AC 200-1 Training Manual 2.5

ac200-1 All Terrain Crane 200 t Lifting Capacity
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
CONTENTS · INHALT · CONTENU · INDICE · CONTENIDO
Page · Seite · Page · Pagina · Página:
Specifications · Technische Daten · Caractéristiques · Dati tecnici · Datos técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overview of standard duty charts · Übersicht Standard-Tragfähigkeitstabellen ·

Tableau synoptique des abaques standard · Visione d’insieme dei diagrammi di carico standard ·
Resúmen de tablas de carga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
HA Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Braccio base · Pluma principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HAV Folding swing-away jib · Klappspitze · Fléchette pliante · Punta rettratile · Plumín de articulación . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
HAV-VA Variable extension with swing-away jib · Variable Verlängerung mit Klappspitze ·
Rallonge variable à fléchette pliante · Prolungamento variabile con punta retrattile ·
Extensión variable con plumín articulado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MS Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Basic equipment · Basisausstattung · Équipement de base · Allestimento di base · Equipamiento básico . . . . . . . . 30

Options · Optionen · Options · Opzioni · Opciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
KEY · ZEICHENERKLÄRUNG · LÉGENDE · LEGGENDA · LEYENDA
Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Contrappeso · Contrapeso
Lifting capacities on outriggers · Tragfähigkeiten, abgestützt · Capacités de levage sur stabilisateurs · Portate su stabilizzatori ·
Capacidad de elevación sobre los apoyos · 360°
Radius · Ausladung · Portée · Sbraccio · Radio
Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Braccio base · Pluma principal
Swing-away jib · Klappspitze · Fléchette pliante · Punta rettratile · Plumín de articulación
Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner
Max. axle loads · Max. Achslasten · Poids d’essieux max. · Pesi sugli assi max. · Carga por eje máx.
Mechanism · Antrieb · Mécanisme · Funzioni · Mecanismos
Tyres · Bereifung · Pneumatiques · Pneumatici · Neumáticos
Hook block · Unterflasche · Crochet-moufle · Bozzello · Gancho
Hoist · Hubwerk · Treuil de levage · Agano · Cabrestante
Dolly · Nachläufer · Remorque · Vagoni · Tráiler
Travel speed · Fahrgeschwindigkeit · Vitesse sur route · Velocità su strada · Velocidad en carretera
Gradeability – road · Steigfähigkeit – Straße · Capacité sur rampes – route · Pendenza superabile – su strada ·
Pendiente franqueable – carretera
Gradeability – off road · Steigfähigkeit – Gelände · Capacité sur rampes – tous terrains · Pendenza superabile – fuoristrada ; ·
Pendiente franqueable – campo a través
Slewing · Drehwerk · Orientation · Rotazione · Unidad de giro
Boom telescoping · Teleskopieren · Télescopage · Funzione telescopica · Despliegue telescópico
Boom elevation · Ausleger-Winkelstellung · Relevage de flèche · Angolazione braccio · Elevación de pluma
Workings speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten · Vitesses opérationnelles · Velocità di lavoro · Velocidades de trabajo
Max. line pull · Max. Seilzug · Traction par câble max. · Tiro max · Tensión máx. de cable
Rope diameter · Seildurchmesser · Diamètre du câble · Diametro · Diam. cable
Rope length · Seillänge · Longueur du câble · Lunghezza fune · Long. cable
Number of sheaves · Anzahl Rollen · Nombre de poulies · No di pulegge · No de poleas
Number of lines · Einscherung · Nombre de brins · No max avvolgim.· Reenvíos máx.
Possible load of hook block · Mögliche Traglast Unterflasche · Charge possible de crochet-moufle · Portata possibile di bozzello ·
Carga permitida de gancho
Weight of hook block · Gewicht Unterflasche · Poids de crochet-moufle · Peso di bozello · Peso de gancho
Distance head sheave axle – hook ground · Abstand Kopfrollenachse – Hakengrund · Distance entre l’axe de la poulie de tête et le fond
du crochet · Distanza asse puleggia da testa – zona di ancoraggio del gancio · Distancia eje de la polea de cabeza – fondo del gancho
Hook block (capacity – sheaves – rope diameter) · Unterflasche (Tragfähigkeit – Rollen – Seildurchmesser) · Crochet-moufle (capacité
de charge – poulies – diamètre du câble) · Bozzello (portata – pulegge – diametro fune) · Gancho (capacidad de carga – poleas –
diámetro de cable)
Ballast · Ballast · Lest · Zavorra · Lastre
System length · Systemlänge · Longeur de système · Lunghezza del sistema · Longitud de sistema
ac200-1 3
HIGHLIGHTS
Self-rigging 85 m total system length (HA 68 m + HAV 17 m)

ac200-1
100 m maximum system length with up to 33 m extendable swing-away jib

Most compact and agile 5-axle crane above 120 t-class
Most compact working area (outrigger base and tail radius) in its class
Only crane in its class with 4 different carriers to choose
Mit 85 m selbstrüstbarer Systemlänge (HA 68 m + HAV 17 m) verfahrbar

100 m maximale Systemlänge mit bis zu 33 m langer Auslegerverlängerung
Kompaktester und wendigster 5-Achser über 120 t Tragfähigkeit
Kompaktester Arbeitsbereich (Stützbasis und Schwenkradius) seiner Klasse
Als einziger Kran seiner Klasse mit 4 verschiedenen Fahrgestellen erhältlich
Déplacement sur une longueur de système à auto-amarrage de 85 m

(HA 68 m + HAV 17 m)
Longueur de système de 100 m avec rallonge de flèche pouvant atteindre
HIGHLIGHTS
jusqu’à 33 m
5 essieux la plus compacte et la plus agile de sa catégorie, dotée d’une capacité
de charge supérieure à 120 t
Zone de travail la plus compacte (base de calage et rayon de pivotement)
de sa catégorie
Unique grue de sa catégorie proposée avec 4 châssis différents
Idonea alla circolazione su strada, con una lunghezza di 85 m in ordine di marcia

(HA 68 m + HAV 17 m)
Massima lunghezza del veicolo 100 m con prolunga del braccio fino a 33 m
Modello a 5 assi più compatto e flessibile con una portata superiore a 120 t
Campo di lavoro (base di appoggio e sbraccio) più compatto della sua classe
Unica gru della sua classe allestibile con 4 diversi modelli di carro
Con 85 m de longitud total automontable de sistema (HA 68 m + HAV 17 m)

100 m longitud máx. de sistema con plumín articulado extensible hasta 33 m
La grúa de 5 ejes más compacta y maniobrable por encima de capacidad de carga 120 t
El campo de trabajo (base de estabilización y radio de giro) más compacto en su clase
Única grúa en su clase con 4 chasis diferentes para elegir
4 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
SPECIFICATIONS · TECHNISCHE DATEN · CARACTÉRISTIQUES ·

DATI TECNICI · DATOS TÉCNICOS
ac200-1
Total
< 10,0 t On request · Auf Anfrage · Sur demande · Su richiesta · Bajo demanda! X
< 12,0 t 60,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 32-1-21 – – – –
< 12,8 t 64,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 – 17 m X –
< 13,2 t 63,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 – 17 m – –
< 13,5 t 65,3 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 13,1 t 17 m – –
< 14,0 t 68,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 15,9 t – X –
< 14,0 t 69,4 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 19,0 t – – –
< 14,5 t 66,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 15,9 t – – –
< 14,5 t 71,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 19,0 t 17 m – –
< 16,5 t 77,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 16,4 t – – –
< 16,5 t 80,3 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 16,4 t 17 m X –
< 17,0 t 79,0 t 10 x 8 x 8 16.00 R 25 80-3-21 16,4 t 17 m – –
ac200-1 p
Total
< 12,0 t 70,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 15,9 t 17 m (X) (1,5 t)

< 12,0 t 71,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 19,0 t – (X) (1,5 t)
< 12,5 t 73,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 19,0 t 17 m (X) (1,5 t)
< 12,7 t 74,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 13,3 t – – –
< 13,0 t 75,3 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 32-1-21 13,3 t 17 m – –
< 13,2 t 75,3 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 32-1-21 13,3 t 17 m – –
< 13,5 t 79,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 16,4 t 17 m – –
< 15,0 t 88,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 25,2 t 17 m – –
< 15,0 t 89,3 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 25,2 t 17 m X –
< 16,5 t 93,3 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 30,9 t 17 m – –
ac200-1 5
ac200-1 tp
Total
< 11,8 t 179,8 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 16,4 t 17 m – –

< 12,0 t 184,0 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 17,8 t 17 m – 1,0 t
< 12,8 t 187,3 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 22,1 t 17 m – –
< 13,0 t 183,0 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 32-1-21 * 17,8 t * 17 m – –
< 13,0 t 188,2 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 32-1-21 25,2 t – – –
< 13,0 t 190,5 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 25,2 t 17 m – –
< 14,5 t 199,3 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 34,0 t 17 m – –
< 15,7 t 107,8 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 42,6 t 17 m – –
< 16,0 t 109,5 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 42,6 t 17 m X –
< 16,5 t 111,0 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 42,6 t 17 m – 4,0 t
* Option GGW R4450
6 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE

OPTION: WITH MODULAR AXLE · OPTION: MIT ZUSATZACHSE · EN OPTION: AVEC

ESSIEU SUPPLÉMENTAIRE · OPZIONE: CON ASSE MODULARE · OPCION: EJE MOLULAR
Selection of configurations · Auswahl an Konfigurationen · Sélection du configurations · Selezione delle configurazioni · Selección de
configuraciones
1 1
1
1 2 2
1 Additional counterweight · Zusatzgegengewicht · Contrepoids supplémentaire · Contrappeso supplementare · Contrapeso adicional
2 Base plates · Abstützplatten · Plaque de callage · Piastra stabilizzatori · Placas base
ac200-1 7
120 m/min* 98,2 kN 21 mm 345 m 11 119,9 112-0-21 6 – 1350 2,00 m

12 119,7 132-1-21 6 – 1600 2,70 m
120 m/min* 98,2 kN 21 mm 345 m 13 129,4 132-1-21 6 – 1600 2,70 m
14 139,1 180-3-21 6 – 1850 3,00 m
1,33 min-1
15 148,6 180-3-21 6 – 1850 3,00 m
570 s 16 158,0 180-3-21 6 – 1850 3,00 m
(12,4-67,8m)
* Rope in topmost position · In oberster Seilstellung · 17 167,3 180-3-21 6 – 1850 3,00 m
75 s Câble en position la plus haute · Nel punto di
(0° – 83°) fissaggio fune superiore · Cable en posición superior 18 176,6 125-5-21 6 – 1125 3,00 m
19 185,7 125-5-21 6 – 1125 3,00 m
10 194,8 125-5-21 6 – 1125 3,00 m
395/95 R25 445/80 R25 445/95 R25 525/80 R25 11 103,7 125-5-21 6 – 1125 3,00 m
14.00 R25 17.50 R25 16.00 R 25 20.50 R 25
12 112,6 160-7-21 6 – 1500 3,00 m
80 km/h 80 km/h 80 km/h 80 km/h 13 121,4 160-7-21 6 + S1 – 1500 3,00 m
14 130,1 160-7-21 6 + S1 – 1500 3,00 m
40 % 40 % 37 % 37 %
15 138,7 160-7-21 6 + S1 – 1500 3,00 m
80 % 80 % 71 % 71 % 16 147,2 200-9-21 6 + S1 – 1750 3,00 m
ac200-1
1 Highway > 45 km/h · Landstraße > 45 km/h · Route> 45 km/h · Strade extraurbane > 45 km/h · Carretera > 45 km/h
2 City < 45 km/h · Stadt < 45 km/h · Ville < 45 km/h · Città < 45 km/h · Ciudad < 45 km/h
Minimum turning radius < 20 km/h · Minimaler Kurvenradius < 20 km/h · Rayon de courbure minimum < 20 km/h ·
3* Raggio minimo di sterzatura < 20 km/h · Radio mínimo de giro < 20 km/h.
4* Off-wall · Wand-weg · Hors mur · Marcia laterale · Desempotrado
5* Crab steer mode · Hundegang · Marche en crabe · Marcia a granchio · Marcha cangrejo
6* Manually steered · manuell gelenkt · Dirigé manuelle · Sterzatura manuale · Dirección manual
ac200-1 p / ac200-1 tp
1 Highway > 45 km/h · Landstraße > 45 km/h · Route> 45 km/h · Strade extraurbane > 45 km/h · Carretera > 45 km/h
2 City < 45 km/h · Stadt < 45 km/h · Ville < 45 km/h · Città < 45 km/h · Ciudad < 45 km/h
3* Minimum turning radius < 20 km/h · Minimaler Kurvenradius < 20 km/h · Rayon de courbure minimum < 20 km/h ·
Raggio minimo di sterzatura < 20 km/h · Radio mínimo de giro < 20 km/h.
4* Off-wall · Wand-weg · Hors mur · Marcia laterale · Desempotrado
5* Crab steer mode · Hundegang · Marche en crabe · Marcia a granchio · Marcha cangrejo
6* Manually steered · manuell gelenkt · Dirigé manuelle · Sterzatura manuale · Dirección manual
* must be activated · muss angewählt werden · activation nécessaire · deve essere attivato · debe activarse
8 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
EQUIPMENT · EINRICHTUNGEN · ÉQUIPEMENT · EQUIPAGGIAMENTO · EQUIPAMIENTO

HAV / HAV-VA
HAV-VA · 33 - 17
HAV · 17
HAV-VA · 25 - 17
HAV · 9
HAV-HY / HAV-VA-HY
HAV-HY-VA · 25 - 17 HAV-HY-VA · 33 - 17
HAV-HY-VA · 33 - 25
HAV-HY-VA · 25 - 25
HAV-HY-VA · 33 - 33
HAV-HY · 17
HAV-HY · 9
MS
ac200-1 9
COUNTERWEIGHT · GEGENGEWICHT · CONTREPOIDS · CONTRAPPESO · CONTRAPESO
PARTS · TEILE · PIÈCES · PEZZI · PIEZAS
f
R4450
STANDARD
e
h j*
d
c i*
g
b
a
CONFIGURATIONS · KONFIGURATIONEN · CONFIGURATIONS · CONFIGURAZIONI · CONFIGURACIONES
a 5,9 t b 7,4 t c 8,8 t d 8,8 t e 8,6 t f 3,1 t g 12,9 t h 12,9 t i 7,4 t j 1,4 t
0t
5,9 t X
9,0 t X X
13,3 t X X
13,3 t X X
14,7 t X X
16,4 t X X X
16,4 t X X X
17,8 t X X X
17,8 t X X X X
22,1 t X X X
25,2 t X X X X
30,9 t X X X X
34,0 t X X X X X
39,5 t X X X X X
42,6 t X X X X X X
59,9 t X X X X X X X
68,5 t X X X X X X X X
* = Option
10 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
OVERVIEW OF STANDARD DUTY CHARTS · ÜBERSICHT STANDARD-TRAG FÄHIG -

KEITS TABELLEN · TABLEAU SYNOPTIQUE DES ABAQUES · VISIONE D’INSIEME DEI
DIAGRAMMI DI CARICO STANDARD · RESÚMEN DE TABLAS DE CARGA
8,40 m x 8,20 m* 8,20 m 6,85 m 5,70 m 2,80 m 360° (* 360° + 0°)
HA / HA-SA MS
68,5-39,5t 34,0-14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t 0t 68,5-39,5t 34,0-16,4 t 14,7-13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t 0t
12,4 m x x x x x x 12,4 m 12,4 m x x x x x x 14,1 m
62,7 m x x x x x x 62,7 m 62,7 m x x x x x – 64,4 m
63,4 m x x x x x – 63,4 m 63,4 m x x x x x – 65,1 m
67,8 m x x x x x – 67,8 m 67,8 m x x x x x – 69,5 m
HAV
0° / 20° / 40° 0° / 20° / 40°
68,5 - 34,0 - 68,5 - 34,0 - 17,8 -

39,5 t 17,8 t 16,4 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t 39,5 t 22,1 t 16,4 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t
12,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 21,4 m 12,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 29,4 m
16,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 25,6 m 16,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 33,6 m
20,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 29,9 m 20,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 37,9 m
21,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30,4 m 21,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 38,4 m
25,1 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 34,1 m 25,1 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42,1 m
25,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 34,6 m 25,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42,6 m
29,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 38,4 m 29,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,4 m
30,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 39,6 m 30,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 47,6 m
33,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42,6 m 33,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,6 m
34,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 43,9 m 34,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 51,9 m
37,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,9 m 37,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 54,9 m
39,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 48,9 m 39,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 56,9 m
42,1 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 51,1 m 42,1 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,1 m
44,2 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 53,2 m 44,2 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 61,2 m
46,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 55,4 m 46,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 63,4 m
49,2 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,2 m 49,2 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 66,2 m
50,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,6 m 50,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,6 m
53,5 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,5 m 53,5 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 70,5 m
54,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 63,9 m 54,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,9 m
58,5 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,5 m 58,5 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,5 m
59,1 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 68,1 m 59,1 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 76,1 m
62,7 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,7 m 62,7 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 79,7 m
63,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 72,4 m 63,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 20 0 80,4 m
67,8 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 0 – 76,8 m 67,8 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 0 – 84,8 m
HAV-VA
0° / 20° / 40° 0° / 20° / 40°
68,5 - 34,0- 68,5 - 34,0-

39,5 t 25,2 t 22,1 t 17,8 t 16,4 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t 39,5 t 30,9 t 25,2t 22,1t 17,8t 16,4t 14,7t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t
12,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 37,4 m 12,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,4 m
16,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 41,6 m 16,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 49,6 m
20,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,9 m 20,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 53,9 m
21,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,4 m 21,4 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 54,4 m
25,1 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,1 m 25,1 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,1 m
25,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,6 m 25,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,6 m
29,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 54,4 m 29,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,4 m
30,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 55,6 m 30,6 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 63,6 m
33,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,6 m 33,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 66,6 m
34,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,9 m 34,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,9 m
37,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,9 m 37,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 70,9 m
39,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 64,9 m 39,9 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 72,9 m
42,1 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,1 m 42,1 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,1 m
44,2 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 69,2 m 44,2 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 77,2 m
46,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,4 m 46,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 79,4 m
49,2 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 74,2 m 49,2 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 82,2 m
50,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,6 m 50,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 83,6 m
53,5 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 78,5 m 53,5 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 86,5 m
54,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 79,9 m 54,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 87,9 m
58,5 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 83,5 m 58,5 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 91,5 m
59,1 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 20 84,1 m 59,1 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 – 92,1 m
62,7 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 – 87,7 m 62,7 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – – 95,7 m
63,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 – – 88,4 m 63,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 20 0 0 – – 96,4 m
67,0 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 20 0 – – 92,0 m 67,0 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – – – 100,0 m
If offsetting is restricted, the maximum possible angle is indicated · Bei eingeschränkter Abwinklung ist der max. Winkel angegeben · En cas de déviation limitée, l’angle maximal est indiqué · Eventuali limiti legati
all’inclinazione sono segnalati dall’indicazione dell’angolo di inclinazione massimo · En caso de angulamiento restringido, aparece indicado el máximo ángulo posible
ac200-1 11
8,40 m x 8,20 m 6,85 m 5,70 m 360°
HAV-HY
0° - 40° (Intervall 10°) 0° - 40° (Intervall 10°)
68,5 - 34,0 - 16,4 - 68,5 - 34,0 - 17,8-

39,5 t 22,1 t 17,8 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t 39,5 t 22,1 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t
12,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 21,4 m 12,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 29,4 m
16,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 25,6 m 16,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 33,6 m
20,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 29,9 m 20,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 37,9 m
21,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30,4 m 21,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 38,4 m
25,1 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 34,1 m 25,1 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 42,1 m
25,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 34,6 m 25,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 42,6 m
29,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 38,4 m 29,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,4 m
30,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 39,6 m 30,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 47,6 m
33,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42,6 m 33,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,6 m
34,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 43,9 m 34,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 51,9 m
37,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,9 m 37,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 54,9 m
39,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 48,9 m 39,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 56,9 m
42,1 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 51,1 m 42,1 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,1 m
44,2 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 53,2 m 44,2 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 61,2 m
46,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 55,4 m 46,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 63,4 m
49,2 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,2 m 49,2 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 66,2 m
50,6 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,6 m 50,6 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,6 m
53,5 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,5 m 53,5 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 70,5 m
54,9 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 63,9 m 54,9 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,9 m
58,5 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,5 m 58,5 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,5 m
59,1 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 68,1 m 59,1 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 76,1 m
62,7 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,7 m 62,7 m 17 40 40 40 40 40 0 79,7 m
63,4 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 72,4 m 63,4 m 17 40 40 40 40 0 – 80,4 m
67,8 m 9 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 76,8 m 67,8 m 17 40 40 40 20 0 – 84,8 m
HAV-HY-VA
68,5 - 34,0- 68,5 - 34,0-

39,5 t 25,2 t 22,1 t 17,8 t 16,4 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t 39,5 t 25,2 t 22,1 t 17,8 t 16,4 t 14,7 t 13,3 t 9,0 t 5,9 t
12,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 37,4 m 12,4 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 37,4 m
16,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 41,6 m 16,6 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 41,6 m
20,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,9 m 20,9 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,9 m
21,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,4 m 21,4 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 46,4 m
25,1 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,1 m 25,1 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,1 m
25,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,6 m 25,6 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50,6 m
29,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 54,4 m 29,4 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 54,4 m
30,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 55,6 m 30,6 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 55,6 m
33,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,6 m 33,6 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,6 m
34,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,9 m 34,9 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 59,9 m
37,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,9 m 37,9 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,9 m
39,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 64,9 m 39,9 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 64,9 m
42,1 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,1 m 42,1 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 67,1 m
44,2 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 69,2 m 44,2 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 69,2 m
46,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,4 m 46,4 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 71,4 m
49,2 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 74,2 m 49,2 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 74,2 m
50,6 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,6 m 50,6 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,6 m
53,5 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 78,5 m 53,5 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 78,5 m
54,9 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 79,9 m 54,9 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 79,9 m
58,5 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 0 83,5 m 58,5 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 0 83,5 m
59,1 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 10 – 84,1 m 59,1 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 10 0 84,1 m
62,7 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 – – 87,7 m 62,7 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 0 – 87,7 m
63,4 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 40 20 20 – – 88,4 m 63,4 m 0 25 40 40 40 40 30 30 0 – – 88,4 m
67,0 m 8 17 40 40 40 40 30 10 0 – – 92,0 m 67,0 m 0 25 40 40 40 30 10 10 0 – – 92,0 m
If offsetting is restricted, the maximum possible angle is indicated

Bei eingeschränkter Abwinklung ist der max. Winkel angegeben
En cas de déviation limitée, l’angle maximal est indiqué
Eventuali limiti legati all’inclinazione sono segnalati dall’indicazione dell’angolo di inclinazione massimo
En caso de angulamiento restringido, aparece indicado el máximo ángulo posible
12 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE

8,40 m x 8,20 m 6,85 m 5,70 m 360°
HAV-HY-VA
68,5 - 68,5 -
39,5 t 34,0 t 30,9t 25,2t 22,1t 17,8t 16,4t 14,7t 13,3t 9,0 t 39,5 t 34,0 t 30,9t 25,2t 22,1t 17,8t 16,4t 14,7t 13,3t 9,0 t
12,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,4 m 12,4 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,4 m
16,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 49,6 m 16,6 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 49,6 m
20,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 53,9 m 20,9 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 53,9 m
21,4 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 54,4 m 21,4 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 54,4 m
25,1 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,1 m 25,1 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,1 m
25,6 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 58,6 m 25,6 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 58,6 m
29,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,4 m 29,4 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,4 m
30,6 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 63,6 m 30,6 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 63,6 m
33,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 66,6 m 33,6 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 66,6 m
34,9 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67,9 m 34,9 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67,9 m
37,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 70,9 m 37,9 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 70,9 m
39,9 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 72,9 m 39,9 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 72,9 m
42,1 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,1 m 42,1 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,1 m
44,2 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 77,2 m 44,2 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 77,2 m
46,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 79,4 m 46,4 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 79,4 m
49,2 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 82,2 m 49,2 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 82,2 m
50,6 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 83,6 m 50,6 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 83,6 m
53,5 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 86,5 m 53,5 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 86,5 m
54,9 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 87,9 m 54,9 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 0 87,9 m
58,5 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 91,5 m 58,5 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 91,5 m
59,1 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 10 – 92,1 m 59,1 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 10 – 92,1 m
62,7 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 95,7 m 62,7 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 95,7 m
63,4 m 16 17 40 40 40 40 40 20 0 10 – – 96,4 m 63,4 m 8 25 40 40 40 40 40 10 0 0 – – 96,4 m
67,0 m 16 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 – – – – 100,0 m 67,0 m 8 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 – – – – 100,0 m
0° - 40° (Intervall 10°)
68,5 -
39,5 t 34,0 t 30,9t 25,2t 22,1t 17,8t 16,4t 14,7t 13,3t 9,0 t
12,4 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 45,4 m
16,6 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 49,6 m
20,9 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 53,9 m
21,4 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 54,4 m
25,1 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 58,1 m
25,6 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 58,6 m
29,4 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 62,4 m
30,6 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 63,6 m
33,6 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 66,6 m
34,9 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67,9 m
37,9 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 70,9 m
39,9 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 72,9 m
42,1 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 75,1 m
44,2 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 77,2 m
46,4 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 79,4 m
49,2 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 82,2 m
50,6 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 83,6 m
53,5 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 86,5 m
54,9 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 10 87,9 m
58,5 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 91,5 m
59,1 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 20 0 0 92,1 m
62,7 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 95,7 m
63,4 m 0 33 40 40 40 40 30 10 10 0 – – 96,4 m
67,0 m 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 – – – – 100,0 m
If offsetting is restricted, the maximum possible angle is indicated

Bei eingeschränkter Abwinklung ist der max. Winkel angegeben
En cas de déviation limitée, l’angle maximal est indiqué
Eventuali limiti legati all’inclinazione sono segnalati dall’indicazione dell’angolo di inclinazione massimo
En caso de angulamiento restringido, aparece indicado el máximo ángulo posible
ac200-1 13
HA
14 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
HA
68,5 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m* 12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m
200,0** -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
13 147,0 147,0 146,5 146,0 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 146,5 135,0 135,5 134,5 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 136,0 125,0 125,0 124,5 121,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 127,0 116,0 116,0 116,0 115,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 119,0 108,0 108,0 108,0 107,0 94,8 73,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 104,5 94,8 94,9 94,5 93,7 93,0 73,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 92,2 84,0 84,2 83,8 83,0 83,6 70,4 52,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 79,7 75,3 75,5 75,0 74,8 74,9 67,1 50,8 44,9 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 64,7 64,7 68,5 67,8 68,3 67,7 63,8 48,8 42,1 37,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 -,0 -,0 62,7 61,7 62,2 61,6 60,4 47,0 39,2 35,0 30,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 -,0 53,0 52,5 52,5 51,9 52,7 44,0 34,1 30,8 27,7 24,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 -,0 -,0 44,6 44,1 44,6 44,2 40,9 30,4 27,3 24,8 22,1 19,6 15,6 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 -,0 38,0 37,5 38,3 37,5 37,9 26,8 24,6 22,3 20,1 18,2 15,6 12,0 16
18 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 32,2 33,1 32,3 33,1 24,1 21,9 20,3 18,4 16,8 14,7 12,0 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 29,0 28,3 29,2 28,3 22,0 19,7 18,3 16,9 15,6 13,7 11,9 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 24,5 25,3 24,5 19,9 18,2 16,5 15,5 14,5 12,9 11,4 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 22,9 22,2 21,4 18,5 16,6 15,3 14,0 13,4 12,1 10,8 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19,7 18,9 17,5 15,0 14,1 13,0 12,3 11,4 10,2 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17,6 16,8 16,6 13,7 12,9 12,1 11,5 10,6 9,7 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15,0 15,0 15,7 12,8 11,7 11,2 10,7 9,9 9,1 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,2 14,1 11,9 10,9 10,2 10,0 9,4 8,6 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,6 12,8 11,1 10,1 9,4 9,2 8,8 8,1 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 11,7 10,6 9,4 8,8 8,4 8,2 7,6 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,7 10,3 8,8 8,2 7,9 7,6 7,1 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,9 8,4 7,6 7,4 7,1 6,7 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,2 8,1 7,0 6,9 6,7 6,2 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,8 6,7 6,4 6,3 5,8 44
46 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,5 6,4 5,9 5,9 5,4 46
48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,1 5,6 5,5 5,1 48
50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,9 5,3 5,1 4,8 50
54 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,8 4,5 4,1 54
58 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,7 3,6 58
62 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,9 62
66 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 66
* over rear
* nach hinten
* sur l’arrière
* sul retro
* hacia atrás
** with special attachment

** mit Sonderausrüstung
** avec équipement spécial
** con accessorio speciale
** con equipo especial
ac200-1 15
HA
42,6 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m
13 144,5 144,5 143,5 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 132,5 132,5 132,0 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 122,0 122,0 121,5 121,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 113,0 113,0 112,5 112,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 105,0 105,0 104,5 104,0 94,8 73,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 91,9 92,0 91,6 90,9 91,5 73,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 81,5 81,7 81,2 81,7 81,1 70,4 52,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 72,9 73,3 72,7 73,2 72,6 67,1 50,8 44,9 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 63,7 64,9 64,8 64,3 63,4 63,8 48,8 42,1 37,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 -,0 57,2 57,2 56,6 56,8 56,7 47,0 39,2 35,0 30,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 44,7 44,5 45,2 45,0 43,9 44,0 34,1 30,8 27,7 24,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 -,0 35,9 35,7 36,0 36,0 35,0 30,4 27,3 24,8 22,1 19,6 15,6 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 29,1 29,9 29,8 29,1 28,2 26,8 24,6 22,3 20,1 18,2 15,6 12,0 16
18 -,0 -,0 -,0 25,2 24,9 24,2 23,3 22,7 21,9 20,3 18,4 16,8 14,7 12,0 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 21,5 21,1 20,5 20,0 20,4 18,7 18,3 16,9 15,6 13,7 11,9 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18,2 17,6 18,2 17,5 16,5 15,9 15,5 14,5 12,9 11,4 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15,9 15,9 15,9 15,1 14,8 14,2 13,9 13,4 12,1 10,8 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,6 14,0 13,2 13,5 12,5 12,2 12,3 11,4 10,2 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,0 12,4 12,2 11,9 11,7 11,2 10,7 10,6 9,7 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 11,6 11,0 11,3 10,5 10,7 9,8 9,9 9,8 9,1 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,1 10,1 9,7 9,4 8,9 9,1 8,5 8,5 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,6 9,1 9,1 8,4 8,2 8,0 7,4 7,4 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,1 8,2 7,8 7,5 7,0 6,5 6,5 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,3 7,3 7,1 6,7 6,2 5,7 5,6 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,6 6,4 5,9 5,4 4,9 4,9 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,0 5,7 5,3 4,8 4,3 4,2 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,1 4,7 4,2 3,7 3,6 44
46 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,6 4,2 3,6 3,1 3,1 46
48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,7 3,2 2,7 2,6 48
50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,3 2,7 2,2 2,2 50
54 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,5 1,5 1,4 54
30,9 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
13 143,0 143,0 142,5 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 130,5 130,5 130,5 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 120,0 120,5 120,0 119,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 111,0 111,5 111,0 110,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 103,5 103,5 103,0 102,5 94,8 73,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 90,6 90,7 90,3 89,8 90,2 73,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 79,1 80,2 78,9 79,6 77,7 70,4 52,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 67,4 68,5 68,5 67,9 66,1 62,5 50,8 44,9 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 58,3 59,5 59,5 58,9 57,4 53,5 48,8 42,1 37,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 -,0 49,9 49,7 51,1 49,8 47,0 45,7 39,2 35,0 30,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 37,1 37,6 37,3 38,4 37,7 35,7 33,5 30,8 27,7 24,0 15,7 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 -,0 29,6 30,2 29,9 29,1 28,2 27,4 25,6 24,8 22,1 19,6 15,6 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 24,4 24,4 24,1 23,4 23,3 23,3 21,9 20,4 20,1 18,2 15,6 12,0 16
18 -,0 -,0 12,4 20,2 19,8 19,9 19,9 19,1 18,2 18,1 17,0 16,8 14,7 12,0 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 17,0 16,7 17,3 16,7 16,1 16,2 15,3 15,3 14,3 13,7 11,9 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 12,0 15,2 14,8 14,2 14,5 13,8 13,9 13,4 13,0 12,5 11,4 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,2 12,8 12,9 12,5 12,6 11,9 12,0 11,5 10,8 10,5 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,3 11,2 11,4 10,9 11,0 10,8 10,4 9,9 9,4 9,1 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,3 10,1 10,1 9,6 9,4 9,0 8,5 8,5 7,9 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,3 8,9 8,9 8,7 8,2 7,8 7,8 7,3 6,7 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,2 7,9 7,6 7,1 7,1 6,8 6,2 5,6 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,3 7,0 6,7 6,3 6,4 5,9 5,3 4,8 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,9 6,3 5,9 5,8 5,6 5,1 4,6 4,0 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,6 5,2 5,3 4,9 4,4 3,9 3,3 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,0 4,6 4,6 4,3 3,8 3,3 2,7 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,1 4,1 3,7 3,3 2,7 2,1 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,6 3,2 2,8 2,2 1,6 44
46 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,7 2,8 2,3 1,8 1,2 46
48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,4 1,9 1,4 -,0 48
50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,5 1,6 1,0 -,0 50
16 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
HA
16,4 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
13 140,5 140,5 140,0 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 128,5 128,5 128,0 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 118,0 118,0 117,5 117,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 109,0 109,5 109,0 108,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 101,5 101,5 101,0 100,5 94,8 73,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 85,1 86,3 84,9 80,9 73,0 69,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 70,7 71,9 69,8 64,9 61,3 55,9 52,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 55,4 57,4 58,0 54,9 50,5 49,3 45,1 41,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 43,7 46,1 46,7 46,1 45,1 41,6 37,9 35,5 33,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 -,0 37,8 38,3 39,7 38,5 35,6 33,1 31,6 29,1 27,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 26,8 28,4 28,6 28,2 27,0 27,0 25,1 23,7 22,1 21,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 -,0 21,6 21,7 22,0 22,2 21,4 20,8 19,8 19,0 18,2 17,3 15,6 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 17,0 17,7 18,0 17,5 17,8 17,2 17,1 16,3 15,2 14,1 13,0 12,0 16
18 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,7 14,7 14,6 14,6 14,6 14,3 13,6 12,7 11,7 10,6 10,3 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 12,3 12,3 12,5 12,4 12,1 11,9 11,4 10,6 9,7 8,7 8,4 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,6 10,6 10,5 10,2 10,0 9,5 8,9 8,1 7,2 6,9 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,1 9,0 8,9 8,7 8,4 7,9 7,4 6,7 5,9 5,7 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,0 7,8 7,7 7,4 7,1 6,6 6,1 5,6 4,8 4,5 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,7 6,6 6,3 6,0 5,5 5,0 4,5 3,8 3,6 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,8 5,6 5,3 5,1 4,6 4,1 3,6 3,0 2,7 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,9 4,5 4,3 3,8 3,3 2,8 2,2 2,0 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,2 3,9 3,6 3,1 2,7 2,1 1,6 1,4 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,3 3,0 2,5 2,1 1,5 1,0 -,0 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,8 2,4 2,0 1,5 1,0 -,0 -,0 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,0 1,5 1,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,6 1,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 44
9,0 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
13 139,0 139,0 139,0 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 127,0 127,5 127,0 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 117,0 117,0 116,5 116,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 108,0 108,5 108,0 105,0 94,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 99,7 100,0 99,5 91,5 80,8 73,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 80,2 81,3 75,5 70,1 64,5 58,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 62,1 63,8 60,8 56,3 51,9 49,4 44,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 46,0 48,8 49,2 46,5 44,1 40,2 37,6 35,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 35,7 38,3 40,2 39,5 36,6 33,7 32,4 30,3 28,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 -,0 30,7 32,7 32,8 31,0 29,8 28,2 25,9 25,0 24,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 22,1 23,0 23,1 24,1 22,5 22,2 21,1 20,5 19,4 18,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 -,0 17,2 18,3 18,2 17,9 18,2 17,6 16,7 15,4 14,3 13,1 11,9 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 14,0 14,4 14,7 14,7 14,6 14,3 13,6 12,5 11,5 10,4 9,3 8,9 16
18 -,0 -,0 -,0 11,6 11,9 11,9 11,8 11,5 11,1 10,1 9,2 8,2 7,2 6,9 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,5 9,8 9,8 9,7 9,4 9,1 8,3 7,5 6,5 5,6 5,4 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,2 8,1 8,0 7,7 7,4 6,8 6,0 5,2 4,3 4,1 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,8 6,7 6,6 6,3 6,0 5,4 4,8 4,0 3,2 2,9 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,5 5,4 5,1 4,8 4,3 3,9 3,1 2,3 2,0 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,6 4,5 4,2 3,9 3,4 2,9 2,2 1,5 1,2 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,8 3,7 3,4 3,1 2,6 2,2 1,5 -,0 -,0 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,1 2,7 2,4 1,9 1,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,5 2,2 1,9 1,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,7 1,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 40
ac200-1 17
HA
0t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 58,4 m 62,7 m
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m
13 137,5 137,5 137,5 121,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 126,0 126,0 125,5 116,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 115,5 116,0 111,0 94,1 77,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 105,0 105,0 91,7 76,7 69,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 92,5 86,8 75,5 68,4 58,9 54,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 64,4 64,6 57,3 52,7 47,0 42,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 43,1 46,0 45,3 41,3 36,9 35,2 32,3 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 30,6 33,3 35,6 33,3 31,6 29,2 27,7 26,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 23,0 25,3 27,3 27,4 27,0 24,9 24,1 22,2 20,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 -,0 20,9 21,8 23,0 23,0 22,2 20,8 19,1 17,5 15,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 14,2 15,6 16,1 16,5 16,4 15,6 14,4 13,2 11,8 10,5 10,2 -,0 12
14 -,0 -,0 11,4 11,8 12,2 12,1 12,0 11,1 10,2 9,0 7,9 7,7 6,5 14
16 -,0 -,0 8,5 8,9 9,2 9,2 9,1 8,8 7,9 6,9 6,0 5,8 4,7 16
18 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,9 7,2 7,1 7,1 6,8 6,2 5,3 4,5 4,4 3,4 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,4 5,7 5,6 5,6 5,3 4,9 4,0 3,2 3,2 2,2 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,6 4,5 4,4 4,2 3,8 3,0 2,3 2,2 1,3 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,7 3,6 3,5 3,3 2,9 2,1 1,4 1,4 -,0 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,9 2,8 2,5 2,2 1,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,2 2,1 1,8 1,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,6 1,5 1,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 32
TELESCOPING CAPACITIES · TELESKOPIERBARE TRAGFÄHIGKEITEN · CHARGES TÉLE-

HA SCOPABLES · CARICHI DEL BRACCIO TELESCOPICO · CAPACIDADES DE CARGA
TELESCÓPICA
8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m
13 34,9 33,5 32,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 34,6 33,0 32,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 34,4 32,5 31,5 27,9 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 34,1 32,1 31,0 27,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 33,9 31,7 30,5 26,9 26,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 33,6 31,0 28,0 26,0 25,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 33,4 30,3 26,0 25,2 24,6 22,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 33,4 28,3 25,4 24,5 22,4 21,9 19,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 33,6 27,9 24,8 23,8 21,7 21,1 19,1 17,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 34,0 27,6 24,3 23,1 21,0 20,4 18,5 16,9 16,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 36,2 27,2 23,4 22,0 20,2 20,1 17,3 15,7 15,4 13,7 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 25,9 22,7 21,1 17,5 16,9 15,2 14,8 14,3 12,8 12,4 12,3 14
16 -,0 26,8 22,3 18,9 16,8 16,1 14,3 13,9 13,4 11,9 9,7 9,6 16
18 -,0 -,0 21,2 18,2 16,1 15,3 13,6 13,1 12,6 11,1 9,1 9,0 18
20 -,0 -,0 21,1 16,8 15,6 14,7 13,0 12,4 11,8 10,4 8,6 8,4 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 16,7 15,2 13,7 12,4 11,8 10,6 8,5 8,1 7,9 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 16,8 14,9 12,9 11,9 11,3 10,1 8,0 7,6 7,4 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,7 12,3 11,5 10,8 8,8 7,6 7,2 7,0 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,0 12,0 11,1 10,4 7,9 7,3 6,8 6,6 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 12,7 11,9 10,8 10,0 7,1 6,9 6,4 6,3 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 11,9 10,6 8,5 6,5 6,6 6,1 5,9 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,0 10,4 8,3 6,0 6,4 5,8 5,6 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,0 8,1 5,5 6,1 5,6 5,3 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,8 8,0 5,0 5,9 5,3 5,1 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,9 4,6 5,7 5,1 4,9 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,1 4,2 5,6 4,9 4,6 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,8 5,5 4,7 4,4 44
46 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,4 4,8 4,6 4,3 46
48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,4 3,5 4,0 48
50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,1 2,4 2,9 50
52 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,2 52
18 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
HAV
ac200-1 19
HAV
68,5 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 33,6 m
9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
13 19,7 -,0 -,0 15,0 -,0 -,0 17 19,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
13,5 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,8 -,0 -,0 18 19,1 -,0 -,0 10,5 -,0 -,0
14 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,6 -,0 -,0 19 18,3 -,0 -,0 10,4 -,0 -,0
14,5 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,3 -,0 -,0 10 17,2 13,3 -,0 10,2 -,0 -,0
15 19,6 15,5 -,0 14,0 -,0 -,0 12 15,3 12,5 9,5 9,8 -,0 -,0
16 19,5 14,3 -,0 13,5 -,0 -,0 14 13,8 11,7 9,1 9,4 7,9 -,0
17 19,1 13,3 10,3 12,8 -,0 -,0 16 12,3 11,0 8,8 8,9 7,5 -,0
18 17,5 12,5 9,8 12,2 -,0 -,0 18 11,2 10,3 8,5 8,5 7,2 -,0
19 16,0 11,7 9,4 11,5 9,6 -,0 20 10,3 9,6 8,3 8,1 6,9 6,1
10 14,4 11,0 9,1 10,9 9,2 -,0 22 9,4 9,0 8,0 7,6 6,6 5,9
12 12,3 9,9 8,5 9,9 8,4 -,0 24 8,6 8,3 7,8 7,2 6,2 5,7
14 10,6 9,0 8,0 9,0 7,8 6,9 26 8,0 7,7 7,5 6,7 5,9 5,5
16 9,4 8,3 -,0 8,2 7,3 6,5 28 7,5 7,3 7,2 6,3 5,6 5,2
18 8,2 -,0 -,0 7,6 6,8 6,2 30 7,0 6,8 6,8 5,8 5,4 5,0
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,0 6,4 6,0 32 6,5 6,4 6,4 5,5 5,1 4,9
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,5 6,1 5,9 34 6,1 6,0 -,0 5,2 4,8 4,7
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,2 5,9 -,0 36 5,8 5,7 -,0 4,9 4,6 4,5
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 38 5,5 5,4 -,0 4,5 4,4 4,4
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 40 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,3 4,2 4,2
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 42 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,1 4,1 -,0
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 44 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,9 3,9 -,0
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 46 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,7 3,7 -,0
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
50,6 m 67,8 m
9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
12 15,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18 7,9 -,0 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
14 14,0 -,0 -,0 8,1 -,0 -,0 20 7,9 -,0 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
16 13,0 11,4 -,0 7,9 -,0 -,0 22 7,9 7,9 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
18 12,1 10,8 8,7 7,7 -,0 -,0 24 7,8 7,8 7,8 5,2 -,0 -,0
20 11,3 10,2 8,6 7,5 6,6 -,0 26 7,8 7,7 7,8 5,2 5,1 -,0
22 10,5 9,7 8,4 7,2 6,4 -,0 28 7,7 7,5 7,6 5,2 5,1 -,0
24 9,7 9,2 8,2 7,0 6,2 5,6 30 7,3 7,3 7,3 5,1 5,0 4,8
26 8,9 8,7 8,1 6,8 6,0 5,5 32 7,0 7,0 7,0 5,1 4,9 4,8
28 8,3 8,3 7,9 6,6 5,8 5,4 34 6,6 6,6 6,7 5,0 4,9 4,7
30 7,8 7,8 7,7 6,4 5,7 5,3 36 6,3 6,3 6,3 4,9 4,8 4,6
32 7,3 7,3 7,3 6,1 5,5 5,1 38 6,0 6,0 6,0 4,8 4,7 4,6
34 6,8 6,8 6,8 5,8 5,3 5,0 40 5,6 5,6 5,7 4,7 4,5 4,5
36 6,3 6,4 6,4 5,5 5,2 4,8 42 5,3 5,3 5,4 4,6 4,4 4,4
38 5,9 5,9 6,0 5,2 5,0 4,7 44 5,0 5,0 5,1 4,4 4,3 4,3
40 5,6 5,6 5,6 4,9 4,8 4,6 46 4,6 4,7 4,8 4,2 4,2 4,2
42 5,2 5,2 5,3 4,6 4,6 4,5 48 4,3 4,4 4,5 3,9 4,0 4,1
44 4,9 4,9 5,0 4,4 4,4 4,3 50 4,0 4,1 4,1 3,7 3,8 3,9
46 4,6 4,6 4,7 4,2 4,2 4,2 54 3,5 3,5 3,6 3,2 3,4 3,5
48 4,3 4,3 -,0 3,9 4,0 4,0 58 3,0 3,0 3,1 2,8 2,9 3,0
50 4,1 4,1 -,0 3,7 3,8 3,8 62 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,4 2,5 2,6
54 3,7 3,7 -,0 3,3 3,3 3,4 66 2,0 2,1 -,0 2,0 2,1 2,2
58 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,9 3,0 -,0 70 1,4 1,5 -,0 1,6 1,7 1,8
62 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,6 2,6 -,0 74 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,1 1,3 -,0
20 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
HAV
42,6 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 33,6 m
9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
13 19,7 -,0 -,0 15,0 -,0 -,0 17 19,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
13,5 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,8 -,0 -,0 18 19,1 -,0 -,0 10,5 -,0 -,0
14 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,6 -,0 -,0 19 18,3 -,0 -,0 10,4 -,0 -,0
14,5 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,3 -,0 -,0 10 17,2 13,3 -,0 10,2 -,0 -,0
15 19,6 15,5 -,0 14,0 -,0 -,0 12 15,3 12,5 9,5 9,8 -,0 -,0
16 19,5 14,3 -,0 13,5 -,0 -,0 14 13,8 11,7 9,1 9,4 7,9 -,0
17 19,1 13,3 10,3 12,8 -,0 -,0 16 12,3 11,0 8,8 8,9 7,5 -,0
18 17,5 12,5 9,8 12,2 -,0 -,0 18 11,2 10,3 8,5 8,5 7,2 -,0
19 16,0 11,7 9,4 11,5 9,6 -,0 20 10,3 9,6 8,3 8,1 6,9 6,1
10 14,4 11,0 9,1 10,9 9,2 -,0 22 9,4 9,0 8,0 7,6 6,6 5,9
12 12,3 9,9 8,5 9,9 8,4 -,0 24 8,6 8,3 7,8 7,2 6,2 5,7
14 10,6 9,0 8,0 9,0 7,8 6,9 26 8,0 7,7 7,5 6,7 5,9 5,5
16 9,4 8,3 -,0 8,2 7,3 6,5 28 7,5 7,3 7,2 6,3 5,6 5,2
18 8,2 -,0 -,0 7,6 6,8 6,2 30 7,0 6,8 6,8 5,8 5,4 5,0
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,0 6,4 6,0 32 6,5 6,4 6,4 5,5 5,1 4,9
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,5 6,1 5,9 34 6,1 6,0 -,0 5,2 4,8 4,7
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,2 5,9 -,0 36 5,8 5,7 -,0 4,9 4,6 4,5
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 38 5,5 5,4 -,0 4,5 4,4 4,4
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 40 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,3 4,2 4,2
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 42 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,1 4,1 -,0
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 44 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,9 3,9 -,0
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 46 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,7 3,7 -,0
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
50,6 m 67,8 m
9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
12 15,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18 7,9 -,0 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
14 14,0 -,0 -,0 8,1 -,0 -,0 20 7,9 -,0 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
16 13,0 11,4 -,0 7,9 -,0 -,0 22 7,9 7,9 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
18 12,1 10,8 8,7 7,7 -,0 -,0 24 7,8 7,8 7,8 5,2 -,0 -,0
20 11,3 10,2 8,6 7,5 6,6 -,0 26 7,8 7,7 7,8 5,2 5,1 -,0
22 10,5 9,7 8,4 7,2 6,4 -,0 28 7,7 7,5 7,6 5,2 5,1 -,0
24 9,7 9,2 8,2 7,0 6,2 5,6 30 7,3 7,3 7,3 5,1 5,0 4,8
26 8,9 8,7 8,1 6,8 6,0 5,5 32 7,0 7,0 7,0 5,1 4,9 4,8
28 8,3 8,3 7,9 6,6 5,8 5,4 34 6,6 6,6 6,7 5,0 4,9 4,7
30 7,8 7,8 7,7 6,4 5,7 5,3 36 6,3 6,3 6,3 4,9 4,8 4,6
32 7,3 7,3 7,3 6,1 5,5 5,1 38 5,4 6,0 6,0 4,8 4,7 4,6
34 6,8 6,8 6,8 5,8 5,3 5,0 40 4,7 5,2 5,5 4,7 4,5 4,5
36 6,3 6,4 6,4 5,5 5,2 4,8 42 4,0 4,5 4,8 4,2 4,4 4,4
38 5,9 5,9 6,0 5,2 5,0 4,7 44 3,4 3,8 4,1 3,6 4,3 4,3
40 5,6 5,6 5,6 4,9 4,8 4,6 46 2,9 3,3 3,5 3,1 3,8 4,2
42 5,2 5,2 5,3 4,6 4,6 4,5 48 2,4 2,7 3,0 2,6 3,3 3,8
44 4,9 4,9 5,0 4,4 4,4 4,3 50 1,9 2,3 2,4 2,2 2,8 3,3
46 4,5 4,6 4,7 4,2 4,2 4,2 54 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,4 1,9 2,3
48 4,0 4,2 -,0 3,9 4,0 4,0 58 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,2 1,5
50 3,5 3,7 -,0 3,7 3,8 3,8 62 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
54 2,8 2,8 -,0 3,0 3,3 3,4 66 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
58 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,3 2,6 -,0 70 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
62 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,8 1,9 -,0 74 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
ac200-1 21
HAV
16,4 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 33,6 m
9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
13 19,7 -,0 -,0 15,0 -,0 -,0 17 19,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
13,5 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,8 -,0 -,0 18 19,1 -,0 -,0 10,5 -,0 -,0
14 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,6 -,0 -,0 19 18,3 -,0 -,0 10,4 -,0 -,0
14,5 19,7 -,0 -,0 14,3 -,0 -,0 10 17,2 13,3 -,0 10,2 -,0 -,0
15 19,6 15,5 -,0 14,0 -,0 -,0 12 15,3 12,5 9,5 9,8 -,0 -,0
16 19,5 14,3 -,0 13,5 -,0 -,0 14 13,8 11,7 9,1 9,4 7,9 -,0
17 19,1 13,3 10,3 12,8 -,0 -,0 16 12,3 11,0 8,8 8,9 7,5 -,0
18 17,5 12,5 9,8 12,2 -,0 -,0 18 11,2 10,3 8,5 8,5 7,2 -,0
19 16,0 11,7 9,4 11,5 9,6 -,0 20 10,3 9,6 8,3 8,1 6,9 6,1
10 14,4 11,0 9,1 10,9 9,2 -,0 22 9,4 9,0 8,0 7,6 6,6 5,9
12 12,3 9,9 8,5 9,9 8,4 -,0 24 8,6 8,3 7,8 7,2 6,2 5,7
14 10,6 9,0 8,0 9,0 7,8 6,9 26 8,0 7,7 7,5 6,7 5,9 5,5
16 9,4 8,3 -,0 8,2 7,3 6,5 28 7,0 7,3 7,2 6,3 5,6 5,2
18 8,2 -,0 -,0 7,6 6,8 6,2 30 6,1 6,4 6,6 5,8 5,4 5,0
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,0 6,4 6,0 32 5,3 5,5 5,7 5,5 5,1 4,9
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,5 6,1 5,9 34 4,6 4,8 4,9 5,0 4,8 4,7
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,2 5,9 -,0 36 4,0 4,1 -,0 4,3 4,6 4,5
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 38 3,4 3,5 -,0 3,8 4,2 4,4
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 40 3,0 -,0 -,0 3,3 3,7 3,9
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 42 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,9 3,2 3,3
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 44 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,5 2,7 -,0
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 46 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,2 2,3 -,0
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
50,6 m 67,8 m
9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
12 15,2 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18 7,9 -,0 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
14 14,0 -,0 -,0 8,1 -,0 -,0 20 7,8 -,0 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
16 13,0 11,4 -,0 7,9 -,0 -,0 22 6,3 7,3 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
18 12,1 10,8 8,7 7,7 -,0 -,0 24 5,1 6,0 6,8 5,1 -,0 -,0
20 11,0 10,2 8,6 7,5 6,6 -,0 26 4,1 4,9 5,6 4,0 5,1 -,0
22 9,3 9,7 8,4 7,2 6,4 -,0 28 3,1 3,9 4,6 3,0 4,5 -,0
24 7,9 8,7 8,2 7,0 6,2 5,6 30 2,3 3,0 3,7 2,2 3,6 4,8
26 7,2 7,4 7,9 6,7 6,0 5,5 32 1,6 2,3 2,8 1,5 2,8 3,9
28 6,0 6,6 6,7 5,9 5,8 5,4 34 -,0 1,6 2,1 -,0 2,1 3,2
30 5,1 5,6 6,0 5,4 5,7 5,3 36 -,0 -,0 1,5 -,0 1,5 2,5
32 4,3 4,7 5,1 4,5 5,1 5,1 38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,8
34 3,6 4,0 4,3 3,8 4,6 5,0 40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,3
36 3,0 3,3 3,6 3,2 4,0 4,2 42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
38 2,4 2,7 3,0 2,7 3,3 3,9 44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
40 1,9 2,2 2,4 2,2 2,8 3,3 46 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
42 1,5 1,8 1,9 1,8 2,3 2,7 48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
44 1,1 1,3 1,4 1,4 1,9 2,2 50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
46 -,0 -,0 1,0 1,0 1,5 1,8 54 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,1 1,4 58 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,0 62 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
54 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 66 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
22 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
HAV-VA
ac200-1 23
HAV-VA
68,5 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 33,6 m
8,0 m 16,0 m 8,0 m 16,0 m

0° 0° 0° 0°
17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m
0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
15 12,3 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10 8,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
16 12,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 12 8,2 -,0 -,0 6,2 -,0 -,0
17 11,4 -,0 -,0 9,3 -,0 -,0 14 7,8 -,0 -,0 5,8 -,0 -,0
18 10,9 -,0 -,0 8,8 -,0 -,0 16 7,4 -,0 -,0 5,5 -,0 -,0
19 10,3 -,0 -,0 8,3 -,0 -,0 18 7,0 6,2 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
10 9,8 -,0 -,0 7,9 -,0 -,0 20 6,5 5,8 -,0 4,9 4,5 -,0
12 8,8 7,8 -,0 7,1 -,0 -,0 22 6,1 5,5 5,1 4,6 4,3 -,0
14 7,8 7,0 -,0 6,4 5,9 -,0 24 5,6 5,2 4,8 4,4 4,0 3,8
16 7,2 6,5 6,0 5,7 5,4 -,0 26 5,3 4,8 4,6 4,1 3,8 3,6
18 6,5 5,9 5,5 5,1 4,9 4,7 28 4,9 4,5 4,3 3,8 3,6 3,4
20 5,8 5,5 5,2 4,7 4,5 4,3 30 4,6 4,2 4,1 3,6 3,4 3,3
22 5,4 5,1 4,9 4,3 4,1 4,0 32 4,3 4,0 3,8 3,4 3,2 3,1
24 5,0 4,7 4,6 3,9 3,8 3,7 34 4,0 3,8 3,7 3,2 3,0 2,9
26 4,7 4,5 4,3 3,6 3,5 3,5 36 3,7 3,6 3,5 2,9 2,8 2,7
28 4,3 4,2 4,2 3,3 3,3 3,2 38 3,6 3,4 3,3 2,7 2,7 2,6
30 4,1 4,0 4,0 3,1 3,0 3,0 40 3,4 3,2 3,2 2,5 2,5 2,5
32 3,9 3,8 -,0 2,8 2,8 2,8 42 3,2 3,1 3,0 2,3 2,3 2,3
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,6 2,6 2,7 44 3,0 2,9 2,9 2,2 2,2 2,2
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,5 2,5 2,5 46 2,8 2,8 2,8 2,1 2,0 2,0
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,4 2,3 -,0 48 2,7 2,6 -,0 2,0 1,9 1,9
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,2 2,2 -,0 50 2,6 2,5 -,0 1,8 1,8 1,8
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 54 2,4 2,4 -,0 1,6 1,6 1,6
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 58 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,5 1,5 -,0
50,6 m 67,0 m (* 63,4 m)
8,0 m 16,0 m 8,0 m 16,0 m

0° 0° 0° 0°
17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m
0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° *20°* *40°*
m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
16 6,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 20 3,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
18 6,3 -,0 -,0 4,3 -,0 -,0 22 3,6 -,0 -,0 2,2 -,0 -,0
20 6,1 -,0 -,0 4,3 -,0 -,0 24 3,6 -,0 -,0 2,2 -,0 -,0
22 5,8 5,3 -,0 4,2 -,0 -,0 26 3,6 -,0 -,0 2,2 -,0 -,0
24 5,6 5,1 -,0 4,0 3,7 -,0 28 3,6 3,5 -,0 2,2 2,7 -,0
26 5,4 4,9 4,6 3,8 3,6 -,0 30 3,6 3,5 -,0 2,2 2,7 -,0
28 5,2 4,7 4,4 3,7 3,4 3,3 32 3,6 3,5 3,5 2,2 2,7 -,0
30 5,0 4,5 4,3 3,5 3,3 3,1 34 3,6 3,5 3,5 2,2 2,7 2,6
32 4,7 4,3 4,1 3,4 3,2 3,0 36 3,5 3,5 3,5 2,2 2,6 2,6
34 4,5 4,2 3,9 3,3 3,0 2,9 38 3,5 3,5 3,4 2,2 2,6 2,6
36 4,3 4,0 3,8 3,1 2,9 2,8 40 3,5 3,4 3,3 2,2 2,5 2,5
38 4,2 3,8 3,6 3,0 2,8 2,7 42 3,4 3,3 3,3 2,1 2,5 2,4
40 4,0 3,6 3,5 2,8 2,7 2,6 44 3,4 3,2 3,2 2,1 2,4 2,3
42 3,8 3,5 3,3 2,7 2,6 2,5 46 3,4 3,2 3,1 2,1 2,3 2,3
44 3,6 3,4 3,2 2,6 2,5 2,4 48 3,3 3,1 3,0 2,1 2,2 2,2
46 3,4 3,2 3,1 2,5 2,4 2,3 50 3,1 3,0 2,9 2,1 2,2 2,2
48 3,3 3,1 3,0 2,4 2,3 2,2 54 2,8 2,7 2,8 2,0 2,0 2,0
50 3,1 3,0 2,9 2,2 2,2 2,1 58 2,4 2,5 2,5 1,8 1,9 1,9
54 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,0 2,0 2,0 62 2,1 2,2 2,2 1,6 1,8 1,8
58 2,4 2,4 2,4 1,8 1,8 1,8 66 1,8 1,9 2,0 1,4 1,6 1,7
62 2,1 2,1 2,1 1,6 1,6 1,6 70 1,4 1,6 1,6 1,2 1,4 1,5
66 1,9 1,9 -,0 1,4 1,4 1,4 74 1,1 1,2 1,3 -,0 1,2 1,2
70 1,6 1,6 -,0 1,2 1,2 -,0 78 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
74 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,0 1,0 -,0 82 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
78 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 86 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
24 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
HAV-VA
42,6 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 33,6 m
8,0 m 16,0 m 8,0 m 16,0 m

0° 0° 0° 0°
17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m
0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
15 12,3 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10 8,5 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
16 12,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 12 8,2 -,0 -,0 6,2 -,0 -,0
17 11,4 -,0 -,0 9,3 -,0 -,0 14 7,8 -,0 -,0 5,8 -,0 -,0
18 10,9 -,0 -,0 8,8 -,0 -,0 16 7,4 -,0 -,0 5,5 -,0 -,0
19 10,3 -,0 -,0 8,3 -,0 -,0 18 7,0 6,2 -,0 5,2 -,0 -,0
10 9,8 -,0 -,0 7,9 -,0 -,0 20 6,5 5,8 -,0 4,9 4,5 -,0
12 8,8 7,8 -,0 7,1 -,0 -,0 22 6,1 5,5 5,1 4,6 4,3 -,0
14 7,8 7,0 -,0 6,4 5,9 -,0 24 5,6 5,2 4,8 4,4 4,0 3,8
16 7,2 6,5 6,0 5,7 5,4 -,0 26 5,3 4,8 4,6 4,1 3,8 3,6
18 6,5 5,9 5,5 5,1 4,9 4,7 28 4,9 4,5 4,3 3,8 3,6 3,4
20 5,8 5,5 5,2 4,7 4,5 4,3 30 4,6 4,2 4,1 3,6 3,4 3,3
22 5,4 5,1 4,9 4,3 4,1 4,0 32 4,3 4,0 3,8 3,4 3,2 3,1
24 5,0 4,7 4,6 3,9 3,8 3,7 34 4,0 3,8 3,7 3,2 3,0 2,9
26 4,7 4,5 4,3 3,6 3,5 3,5 36 3,7 3,6 3,5 2,9 2,8 2,7
28 4,3 4,2 4,2 3,3 3,3 3,2 38 3,6 3,4 3,3 2,7 2,7 2,6
30 4,1 4,0 4,0 3,1 3,0 3,0 40 3,4 3,2 3,2 2,5 2,5 2,5
32 3,9 3,8 -,0 2,8 2,8 2,8 42 3,2 3,1 3,0 2,3 2,3 2,3
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,6 2,6 2,7 44 3,0 2,9 2,9 2,2 2,2 2,2
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,5 2,5 2,5 46 2,8 2,8 2,8 2,1 2,0 2,0
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,4 2,3 -,0 48 2,7 2,6 -,0 2,0 1,9 1,9
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,2 2,2 -,0 50 2,6 2,5 -,0 1,8 1,8 1,8
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 54 2,4 2,4 -,0 1,6 1,6 1,6
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 58 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,5 1,5 -,0
50,6 m 67,0 m (* 63,4 m)
8,0 m 16,0 m 8,0 m 16,0 m

0° 0° 0° 0°
17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m 17,0 m
0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° *20°* *40°*
m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0
16 6,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 20 3,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
18 6,3 -,0 -,0 4,3 -,0 -,0 22 3,6 -,0 -,0 2,2 -,0 -,0
20 6,1 -,0 -,0 4,3 -,0 -,0 24 3,6 -,0 -,0 2,2 -,0 -,0
22 5,8 5,3 -,0 4,2 -,0 -,0 26 3,6 -,0 -,0 2,2 -,0 -,0
24 5,6 5,1 -,0 4,0 3,7 -,0 28 3,6 3,5 -,0 2,2 2,7 -,0
26 5,4 4,9 4,6 3,8 3,6 -,0 30 3,6 3,5 -,0 2,2 2,7 -,0
28 5,2 4,7 4,4 3,7 3,4 3,3 32 3,6 3,5 3,5 2,2 2,7 -,0
30 5,0 4,5 4,3 3,5 3,3 3,1 34 3,6 3,5 3,5 2,2 2,7 2,6
32 4,7 4,3 4,1 3,4 3,2 3,0 36 3,5 3,5 3,5 2,2 2,6 2,6
34 4,5 4,2 3,9 3,3 3,0 2,9 38 3,5 3,5 3,4 2,2 2,6 2,6
36 4,3 4,0 3,8 3,1 2,9 2,8 40 3,5 3,4 3,3 2,2 2,5 2,5
38 4,2 3,8 3,6 3,0 2,8 2,7 42 3,4 3,3 3,3 2,1 2,5 2,4
40 4,0 3,6 3,5 2,8 2,7 2,6 44 3,4 3,2 3,2 2,1 2,4 2,3
42 3,8 3,5 3,3 2,7 2,6 2,5 46 3,0 3,2 3,1 2,1 2,3 2,3
44 3,6 3,4 3,2 2,6 2,5 2,4 48 2,6 3,1 3,0 2,1 2,2 2,2
46 3,4 3,2 3,1 2,5 2,4 2,3 50 2,2 2,9 2,9 1,9 2,2 2,2
48 3,3 3,1 3,0 2,4 2,3 2,2 54 1,4 2,0 2,4 1,2 2,0 2,0
50 3,1 3,0 2,9 2,2 2,2 2,1 58 -,0 1,3 1,6 -,0 1,4 1,8
54 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,0 2,0 2,0 62 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,1
58 2,3 2,4 2,4 1,8 1,8 1,8 66 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
62 1,7 2,0 2,1 1,6 1,6 1,6 70 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
66 1,2 1,4 -,0 1,2 1,4 1,4 74 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
70 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 78 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0
ac200-1 25
MS
26 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
MS
42,6 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
1m t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 t,0 ,1m
13 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 37,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 36,3 36,3 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 34,9 34,9 32,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 32,5 31,9 29,6 25,8 16,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 35,9 35,6 35,8 35,7 34,7 30,3 28,9 26,1 23,4 20,8 17,5 -,0 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 29,7 29,4 28,8 27,9 28,2 26,0 23,6 21,2 19,1 16,4 14,1 10,8 16
18 -,0 -,0 24,7 24,4 24,1 24,6 23,7 23,0 21,3 19,4 17,5 15,3 13,8 10,8 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 21,3 21,4 20,8 20,0 19,6 19,0 17,6 16,2 14,2 12,9 10,7 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 18,8 18,5 17,9 17,0 16,7 16,2 15,9 14,9 13,3 12,0 10,5 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 11,2 16,1 15,5 15,0 15,2 14,3 13,8 13,6 12,5 11,4 10,2 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,1 13,6 14,1 13,3 12,4 12,5 12,0 11,6 10,7 9,7 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,5 12,5 12,4 11,6 11,6 10,9 10,9 10,6 10,1 9,2 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 11,6 11,0 10,4 10,5 10,2 9,7 9,4 9,5 8,7 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,5 9,8 9,8 9,3 9,3 8,7 8,8 8,3 8,2 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,8 9,0 8,5 8,2 8,1 7,7 7,7 7,1 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,1 8,0 8,0 7,4 7,2 6,8 6,8 6,2 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 7,2 7,2 6,9 6,5 6,3 5,9 5,3 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,0 6,4 6,2 6,0 5,7 5,2 4,6 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,8 5,5 5,5 5,1 4,5 3,9 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,3 4,9 4,9 4,5 3,9 3,3 44
46 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,5 4,4 3,9 3,4 2,8 46
48 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,9 3,9 3,4 2,9 2,3 48
50 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,5 3,0 2,4 1,8 50
54 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,2 1,7 1,1 54
58 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,0 -,0 58
62 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 62
ac200-1 27
MS
16,4 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO
12,4 m 16,6 m 20,9 m 25,1 m 29,4 m 33,6 m 37,9 m 42,1 m 46,4 m 50,6 m 54,9 m 59,1 m 63,4 m 67,8 m
13 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13
13,5 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 13,5
14 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14
14,5 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 14,5
15 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 15
16 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 16
17 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 17
18 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 37,8 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 18
19 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,1 39,0 36,3 35,7 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 19
10 37,4 39,0 38,9 39,1 36,4 33,8 32,8 30,7 29,3 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 10
12 -,0 27,8 28,2 27,9 28,9 27,4 26,0 24,3 23,3 21,8 16,6 -,0 -,0 -,0 12
14 -,0 21,0 22,2 22,3 21,9 21,6 20,9 20,0 18,9 18,5 17,0 16,3 -,0 -,0 14
16 -,0 -,0 17,5 17,6 17,6 17,8 17,2 16,9 16,3 15,7 15,1 13,8 13,2 10,8 16
18 -,0 -,0 14,2 14,4 14,9 14,6 14,7 14,1 14,1 13,4 13,0 12,2 11,1 9,9 18
20 -,0 -,0 -,0 12,5 12,4 12,3 12,3 12,1 11,9 11,8 11,1 10,1 9,1 8,1 20
22 -,0 -,0 -,0 10,6 10,4 10,6 10,6 10,3 9,9 9,9 9,4 8,5 7,6 6,6 22
24 -,0 -,0 -,0 9,0 9,2 9,1 9,0 8,7 8,3 8,3 7,9 7,1 6,2 5,3 24
26 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 8,0 7,9 7,7 7,4 7,0 7,0 6,5 6,0 5,1 4,2 26
28 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 6,9 6,7 6,6 6,2 5,9 5,9 5,4 4,9 4,2 3,2 28
30 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,8 5,6 5,3 4,9 4,9 4,5 4,0 3,3 2,4 30
32 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 5,0 4,8 4,5 4,1 4,1 3,7 3,2 2,5 1,7 32
34 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 4,1 3,8 3,4 3,4 3,0 2,5 1,9 1,0 34
36 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 3,5 3,2 2,8 2,8 2,4 1,9 1,3 -,0 36
38 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,6 2,3 2,3 1,8 1,3 -,0 -,0 38
40 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 2,2 1,8 1,8 1,3 -,0 -,0 -,0 40
42 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,4 1,4 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 42
44 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 1,0 1,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 -,0 44
28 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
NOTES TO LIFTING CAPACITY · ANMERKUNGEN ZU DEN TRAGFÄHIGKEITEN ·

CONDITIONS D’UTILISATION · ANNOTAZIONI SULLE PORTATE ·
CONDICIONES DE UTILIZACIÓN
Ratings are in compliance with ISO 4305.

Weight of hook blocks and slings is part of the load, and is to be deducted from the capacity ratings.
Consult operation manual for further details.
Note: Data published herein is intended as a guide only and shall not be construed to warrant applicability for lifting purposes.
Crane operation is subject to the computer charts and operation manual both supplied with the crane.
Tragfähigkeiten entsprechen ISO 4305.

Das Gewicht der Unterflaschen, sowie die Lastaufnahmemittel, sind Bestandteile der Last und sind von den Tragfähigkeitsangaben abzuziehen.
Weitere Angaben in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kranes.
Anmerkung: Die Daten dieser Broschüre dienen nur zur allgemeinen Information; für ihre Richtigkeit übernehmen wir keine Haftung.
Der Betrieb des Kranes ist nur mit den Original-Tragfähigkeitstabellen und mit der Bedienungsanleitung zulässig, die mit dem Kran mitgeliefert
werden.
Le tableau de charges est conforme à la norme ISO 4305.

Les poids du crochet-moufle et de tous les accessoires d’élingage font partie de la charge et sont à déduire des charges indiquées.
Pour plus de détails consulter la notice d’utilisation de la grue.
Nota: Les renseignements ci-inclus sont donnés à titre indicatif et ne représentent aucune garantie d’utilisation pour les opérations de levage.
La mise en service de la grue n’est autorisée qu’à condition que les tableaux de charges ainsi que le manuel de service, tels que fournis avec
la grue, soient observés.
Le portate sono conformi alla norma ISO 4305.

Il peso del bozzello e delle funi d’attacco fanno parte del carico e sono quindi da detrarre dai valori di tabella.
Per ulteriori dettagli sulla velocità vento, consultare il manuale di istruzione della gru.
Nota: I dati riportati su tale prospetto sono solo a titolo indicativo e pertanto non impegnativi. L’impiego della gru è ammesso solo rispettando
le tabelle originali ed il manuale di uso fornito assieme alla gru.
Las capacidades de carga están sujetas a las normas ISO 4305.

El peso de los ganchos y eslingas son parte de la carga y serán deducidos de las capacidades brutas.
Consultar los manuales de operación para ampliar información.
Observación: Los datos publicados son solamente orientativos y no se deben interpretar como garantía de aplicación para determinadas
operaciones de elevación. La manipulación de la grúa está sujeta a las cargas programadas en el ordenador y al manual de operaciones ambos
suministrados con la grúa.
ac200-1 29
BASIC EQUIPMENT
CARRIER
Outriggers H-4-Point design; Vertical and horizontal agitation fully hydraulic; 4 loose outrigger pads incl. transport storage and stowage;
Manual or automatic levelling alternatively; 4 outrigger bases.
Engine Daimler diesel enginge OM502LA, 8 cylinder, water-cooled; Output 390 kW (530 HP) at 1800 1/min, torque 2400 Nm at 1300 1/min.
Certifications in accordance with EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 and CARB. Exhaust system cpl. stainless steel, incl. spark arrester.
Fuel tank 500 l (+ 50 l buffer tank at superstructure) for carrier and superstructure. For diesel engines (alternatives on request).
Transmission ZF AS-Tronic; Automatic transmission system with automated clutch, 16 forward speeds and 2 reverse and integrated retarder;
2-stage transfer case, speed control.
Axles 10 x 8 x 8; 5 Axles, axles 2, 3, 4, 5 driven and equipped with selectable transverse lock; axles 3, 4 with selectable longitudinal lock;
axles 1, 2, 4, 5 steered; axle 3 liftable.
Suspension Hydropneumatic suspension with axle load compensation; Hydraulically lockable; Manual or automatic levelling alternatively.
Steering Dual circuit hydro semiblock steering with emergency steering pump; Active rear axle steering (axles 4, 5) with 6 different steering
programs.
Brakes Service brake: Pneumatic dual circuit-braking system with antilock. Pressurized air disc brakes on all wheels.
Parking brake: Spring-loaded cylinder, acting on multiple wheels.
Additional brake: Retarder integrated into transmission, exhaust brake and constant throttle valve.
Wheels 395/95R25 (14.00R25); Steel rims 9.5-25/1.7".
Cab Wide version 2.88 m; 2 adjustable seats with seat heating, armrests and pneumatic suspension; steering wheel height and tilt
adjustable; Power door windows. Tinted safety glass; engine-dependent water heating; CD-radio; Fire extinguisher; Air condition.
Stowage Open storage boxes for lifting accessories; Lockable compartments.
Miscellaneous Speed control; Central lubrication; Ascendencies; Loose stepladder.
CRANE
Telescopic boom HA 12.5 - 67.8 m. Single cylinder telescoping system, manual or automatic telescoping alternativly; Attachments for all equipment and
extensions; 6 sheaves integrated in boom head for max. capacity of 112.6 t.
Counterweight 42.6 t, 6 pieces; Automatic rigging system; Expandable to max. 68.5 t; Max. 16.4 t can be carried on board serially.
Boom luffing 1 luffing cylinders with automatic lowering brake valve.
Rotary drive 1 slewing gear unit with spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Different operating modes selectable.
H1 Hoist with spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Resolver.
Engine Daimler diesel enginge OM906LA, 6 cylinder, water-cooled; Output 170 kW (231 HP) at 2200 1/min, torque 810 Nm at 1300 1/min.
Certifications in accordance with EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 and CARB. Exhaust system cpl. stainless steel, incl. spark arrester.
Drive Hydraulic system with power control; Axial-piston dual pump and 2 separate pumps for rotary drive and auxiliary consumers;
Hydraulic oil cooler.
Control system Pump control for 4 simultaneous working movements; electric pilot controls via 2 two-axis joysticks; different control modes
selectable for hydraulic circuits; Memory for individual operator settings.
Operator aids Demag IC-1, with integrated electronic load moment indicator; Colour display; Displaying of current operating conditions, load charts,
fault indicator; Outrigger load indicator; Working range limiter. Acoustical and optical (pre-) warning when approaching limit devices
and conditions.
Cab Version 0.88 m; Tilt infinitely variable 20°; Seat heating; Sliding window in door and rear; Fold-out front window; Extendable side
pedestal, foldable front pedestal; Handrails. Tinted safety glass; pull-down sun visor and light curtains; CD-Radio; Engine-dependent
and independent heating with timer; Air condition.
DIVERSE
Illumination Work lights: 1 for hoists and rigging, 1 adjustable for work prefield at crane cab, 1 x engine area crane, 4 for outriggers;
Rotary beacons: 2 x on carrier cab, 2 x on crane tail.
Anemometer Disconnectable, to be used with all extensions.
Toolkit Incl. jumper cables.
OPTIONS
CARRIER
Additional axle (AC 200-1P) In carrier fully integrated additional axle (steered, decelerated, suspended), Axle scheme 12 x 8 x 10; Only available with wheels
395/95R25 (14.00R25); Incl. counterweight transport storage on carrier tail.
Additional axle and tag axle Combination of options AC 200-1P and AC 200-1T. Enables axle scheme 14 x 8 x 12.
(AC 200-1TP)
2440 mm / 8" axle pair spacing Displacement of axles 5, 6.
Outrigger quick connection Hydraulic and electric quick couplings for fast (dis-) assembly.
Counterweight transport For storing counterweight „a“ or „c / e“ on carrier tail; Max. 42.6 t can be stored.
storage on carrier tail
Wheels 445/95R25 (16.00R25) Steel rims 11-25/1.7"
445/80R25 (17.50R25) Steel rims 14-25/1.7"
525/80R25 (20.50R25) Steel rims 17-25/1.7"; Incl. carrier broadening to 3.12 m.
Mount for spare wheel At carrier tail; Not in association with trailer tow couplings or tool box.
Lifting device for spare wheel Manual winch at carrier tail; Not in association with trailer tow couplings or tool box.
Long range fuel tank 300 l, for total 800 l Diesel; Not in association with dual-fuel.
Dual-fuel Additional fuel tank à 300 l; For crane operation with alternative fuel (no RME / Biodiesel).
Bio-fuel operation Special fuel supply system for bio fuel consumption (e.g. RME / Biodiesel).
30 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
OPTIONS
Rear view camera Optical display in carrier cab.
Rear drive radar control Optical and acoustical distance warning in carrier cab.
Folding bed In carrier cab.
Heating, engine independant Auxiliary heating system, with timer switchable for engine block heating.
Tool storage box At carrier tail; Lockable; Not in association with trailer tow couplings or spare wheel mount / lifting device.
Wood storage box At carrier tail; Open.
Wood storage box with mount At carrier tail; Open; Reduced stowage.
for spare wheel
Trailer tow coupling Rockinger 400 G 150, D = 130 kN, with brake and electric couplings.
Trailer tow coupling Ringfeder 92/CX, D = 190 kN, with brake and electric couplings.
Trailer tow coupling Car trailers; electric couplings 12 V / 24 V.
Hook block storage Behind carrier cab; Holds 1- or 3-sheaved hook blocks.
Tachometer TSU Tachometer Simulator; Simulates an installed tachograph (MTCO, DTCO).
Tachometer MTCO Speed indication and analogue tracking on paper disc.
Tachometer DTCO Speed indication and digital tracking on chipcard.
CRANE
S1 Heavy lift attachment, 2-sheaved; Dis-/connectable; For total 8 sheaves at boom head; max. capacity of 147.2 t.
H2 2. hoist; Spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Incl. quick couplings and transport storage; Self-rigging; Resolver; Enables 2-hook operation
with all extensions.
Rope twist prevention Avoids rope twist (available for H1 and H2).
Additional counterweight 25.8 t, 2 pieces; For max. 68.5 t, 8 pieces.
Special counterweight R4450 8.8 t, 2 pieces (for total 17.8 t, 4 pieces).
Quick connection telescopic Hydraulic bolt extractors and hydraulic and electric quick couplings for fast (dis-) assembly; Incl. transport storage for luffing cylinder.
boom
Remote control Control of machine via wireless remote control.
Overload recording system Logs overload conditions.
Diesel particulate filter For exhaust system.
Gas heating Trumatic.
Xenon work floodlight Out of crane cab adjustable xenon floodlight, at front support boom base section; 1 oder 2 units available.
Positioning light Double beacon, disconnectable, to be used with all extensions.
Central lubrication For all lubrication points.
EXTENSIONS
HAV17 9 m / 17 m; Double folding swing-away jib, manual offset 20°/40°; 1-sheaved head; Incl. transport storage; Includes HAV9;
Operation with HA or VA.
HAV9 9 m; Folding swing-away jib, manual offset 20°/40°; 2-sheaved head; Incl. transport storage; Operation with HA or VA.
VA16 8 m /16 m; Variable telescopic boom extension; 2 pieces; Includes VA8; Operation with HAV or MS.
VA8 8 m; Variable telescopic boom extension; Operation with HAV or MS.
MS 1.65 m; runner, 2-sheaved for max. capacity 39.1 t; Incl. transport storage; Operation with HA or VA.
HY Diesel-hydraulic offset for operation with HAV or VA instead of manual pivot.
Swing-away rooster sheave Incl. transport storage; For single-reeving operation.
Transport storage HAV separate For later HAV and / or VA retrofitting; Incl. programming and acceptance.
Transport storage MS separate For later MS retrofitting; Incl. programming and acceptance.
DIVERSE
Emergency override Interface for emergency operation to recover loads in case of machine failure.
Transformator Diesel aggregate with hydraulic pump; For emergency override.
Refinery package Engine emergency stop device, with air shut-off damper.
Special climate layout For operation under unusual climate conditions differing from: -25°C up to +40°C; Up to 2000 m over zero;
0 % up to 95 % humidity.
Dolly preparation Incl. freewheel for slewing gear unit and luffing cylinder, and quick couplings for brake air and electrics.
Dolly support bracket Individual technical verification of axle loads, vehicle weights and dimensions requested.
4-stranded lifting chain - Enables self-rigging; Two 2-stranded lifting chains à 6 m per strand, whereof one 2-strand is equipped with a load compensator
enabeling 4 full loaded strands according to BGR 500; Safety hooks; Contraction claws.
- Nominal size 13 Capacity 0° - 45°/ Strand: 4.8 t/1, 9.5 t/2, 14.3 t/3, 19 t/4.
- Nominal size 16 Capacity 0° - 45°/ Strand: 10 t/1, 14 t/2, 21 t/3, 28 t/4; Special capacity 0° - 20°/ Strand: 36 t/4.
- Nominal size 20 Capacity 0° - 45°/ Strand: 16 t/1, 22 t/2, 33 t/3, 45 t/4.
Hook blocks - 200-9-21-D D = Ramshorn hook
- 160-7-21-D E = Single hook
- 125-5-21-D
- 80-3-21-D / E
- 32-1-21-D / E
- 12.5-0-E
Options might have positive or negative influence on dimensions, axle loads and total weight · All extensions and crane systems incl. specific programming
and acceptance · Further optional equipment on request · Subject to change without notice!
ac200-1 31
BASISAUSSTATTUNG
FAHRGESTELL
Abstützung H-4-Punkt-Anordnung; Vertikale und horizontale Bewegung vollhydraulisch; 4 lose Abstützteller inkl. Transporthalterung;
Wahlweise manuelle oder automatische Niveaueinstellung; 4 Abstützbasen.
Motor Daimler Dieselmotor OM502LA, 8-Zylinder, wassergekühlt; Leistung 390 kW (530 PS) bei 1800 1/min, Drehmoment 2400 Nm bei
1300 1/min. Zertifiziert nach EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 und CARB. Abgasanlage aus Edelstahl mit Funkenfänger.
Kraftstoffbehälter 500 l (+ 50 l Puffertank im Oberwagen) für Unter- und Oberwagen. Für Dieselkraftstoff (alternative Kraftstoffe auf Anfrage).
Getriebe ZF AS-Tronic; Automatisches Getriebesystem mit automatisierter Kupplung, 16 Vorwärts- und 2 Rückwärtsgängen und integriertem
Retarder; 2-stufiges Verteilergetriebe, Tempomat.
Achsen 10 x 8 x 8; 5 Achsen, davon Achsen 2, 3, 4, 5 angetrieben mit zuschaltbarer Quersperre; Achsen 3, 4 mit zuschaltbarer Längssperre;
Achsen 1, 2, 4, 5 gelenkt; Achse 3 liftbar.
Federung Hydropneumatische Federung mit Achslastausgleich; Hydraulische Blockierung; Wahlweise manuelle oder automatische Niveau-
einstellung.
Lenkung Zweikreis-Hydro-Halbblocklenkung mit Notlenkpumpe; Aktive Hinterachslenkung (Achsen 4, 5) mit 6 verschiedenen
Lenkprogrammen.
Bremsen Betriebsbremse: Pneumatische Zweikreis-Bremsanlage mit ABS. An allen Rädern mit Druckluftscheibenbremsen ausgestattet.
Feststellbremse: Federspeicherzylinder an mehreren Rädern wirkend.
Zusatzbremse: Retarder im Getriebe integriert, Auspuffklappenbremse und Motor-Konstantdrossel.
Räder 395/95R25 (14.00R25); Stahlfelgen 9,5-25/1,7".
Kabine Breite Ausführung 2,88 m. 2 Sitze mit Sitzheizung, Armlehnen, pneumatischer Federung und Verstellung; Lenkrad mit Höhen- und
Neigungsverstellung; Fensterheber elektrisch. Getönte Sicherheitsverglasung; Motorabhängige Warmwasserheizung; CD-Radio;
Feuerlöscher; Klimaanlage.
Ablagen Nach oben offene Staukisten für Lasthaken und Anschlagmittel; Abschließbare Staufächer.
Sonstige Tempomat; Zentralschmieranlage; Aufstiege; Lose Stehleiter.
KRAN
Teleskopausleger HA 12,5 - 67,8 m. Einzylinder-Teleskopiersystem, wahlweise automatisches oder manuelles Teleskopieren; Aufnahmen für alle
optionalen Einrichtungen; 6 Seilrollen im Auslegerkopf für max. 112,6 t Tragfähigkeit.
Gegengewicht 42,6 t, 6-teilig; Automatisches Rüstsystem; Auf max. 68,5 t erweiterbar; 16,4 t können serienmäßig am Gerät mitgeführt werden.
Auslegerverstellung 1 Wippzylinder mit lastdrucküberkompensiertem Sicherheits-Senk-Brems-Ventil.
Drehantrieb 1 Drehwerk mit federbelasteter Lamellenbremse; Umschaltbar zwischen verschiedenen Betriebsmodi.
H1 Hubwerk mit federbelasteter Lamellenbremse; Integrierter Drehmelder.
Motor Daimler Dieselmotor OM906LA, 6-Zylinder, wassergekühlt; Leistung 170 kW (231 PS) bei 2200 1/min, Drehmoment 810 Nm bei
1300 1/min. Zertifiziert nach EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 und CARB. Abgasanlage aus Edelstahl mit Funkenfänger.
Antrieb Leistungsgeregelte Hydraulikanlage; Axialkolben-Doppelpumpe sowie 2 separate Pumpen für Drehwerk und Nebenverbraucher;
Hydraulikölkühler.
Steuerung Pumpensteuerung für 4 gleichzeitige Arbeitsbewegungen; elektrische Vorsteuerung über 2 Kreuzsteuerhebel; Verschiedene anwähl-
bare Steuerungsmodi für Hydraulikkreise; Individuelle Fahrereinstellungen speicherbar.
Sicherheitseinrichtung Demag IC-1, mit integriertem elektronischem Lastmomentbegrenzer; Farbdisplay; Anzeige Betriebszustand, Traglasttabellen,
Stützkräfte, Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung, Fehlerindikator. Optische und akustische Vorwarnung bei Erreichung von Endschaltern und
Grenzzuständen.
Kabine Ausführung 0,88 m; Stufenlose Neigung 20°; Sitzheizung; Schiebefenster in Schiebetür und Heck; Frontscheibe aufstellbar;
Ausfahrbares Seitenpodest, klappbares Frontpodest; Handläufe. Getönte Sicherheitsverglasung; Sonnenschutzrollo; CD-Radio;
Motorabhängige und motorunabhängige Warmwasserheizung mit Timer; Klimaanlage.
DIVERSE
Beleuchtung Arbeitsscheinwerfer: 1 x für Hubwerke und Rüsten, 1 x Arbeitsvorfeld an Krankabine, 1 x Motorraum Kran, 4 x für Abstützung;
Rundumleuchten: 2 x auf Fahrzeugkabine, 2 x am Kranheck.
Windmesser Abnehmbar, an allen Einrichtungen nutzbar.
Werkzeugsatz Inkl. Fremdstartkabel.
OPTIONEN
FAHRGESTELL
Zusatzachse (AC 200-1P) Im Fahrgestell voll integrierte (gelenkt, gebremst, gefedert) Zusatzachse, Achsschema 12 x 8 x 10; Nur mit Rädern 395/95R25
(14.00R25) erhältlich; Inkl. Transporthalterung für Gegengewicht auf Heck.
Zusatzachse und Nachlaufachse Kombination der Optionen AC 200-1P und AC 200-1T. Ermöglicht Achsschema 14 x 8 x 12.
(AC 200-1TP)
2440 mm / 8" Achspaarabstand Versatz der Achsen 5, 6.
Schnellverbindung Stützträger Hydraulische und elektrische Schnellkupplungen ermöglichen schnellen Ein- / Ausbau.
Transporthalterung für Gegen- Ablage der Gegengewichtsteile „a“ oder „c/e“ auf dem Heck; Mit max. 42,6 t belastbar.
gewicht auf Heck
Räder 445/95R25 (16.00R25) Stahlfelgen 11-25/1,7"
445/80R25 (17.50R25) Stahlfelgen 14-25/1,7"
525/80R25 (20.50R25) Stahlfelgen 17-25/1,7"; Inkl. Fahrzeugverbreiterung auf 3,12 m.
Halterung für Reserverad Am Heck; Nicht in Verbindung mit Anhängerkupplungen oder Werkzeugkiste.
Hubvorrichtung für Reserverad Manuelle Hubwinde am Heck; Nicht in Verbindung mit Anhängerkupplungen oder Werkzeugkiste.
Kraftstoffbehälter Zusatz 300 l, für insgesamt 800 l Diesel; Nicht in Verbindung mit dualer Kraftstoffversorgung.
Duale Kraftstoffversorgung Zusatztank 300 l; Für Kranbetrieb mit alternativer Kraftstoffsorte (kein RME / Biodiesel).
Kraftstoffbetrieb Bio Spezielle Kraftstoffanlage zur Nutzung biologischer Kraftstoffe (z.B. RME / Biodiesel).
Rückfahrkamera Anzeige in Fahrkabine.
32 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
OPTIONEN
Rückfahrradar Optische und akustische Abstands-Warnanzeige in Fahrkabine.
Klappbett In Fahrkabine.
Heizung, motorunabhängig Standheizung, mit programmierbarer Zeitschaltuhr, Umschaltung auf Motorvorwärmung.
Werkzeugkiste Am Heck; Abschließbar; Nicht in Verbindung mit Anhängerkupplungen oder Halterung Reserverad.
Holzkiste Am Heck; Offen.
Holzkiste mit Halterung Am Heck; Offen; Stauraum reduziert.
Reserverad
Anhängerkupplung Rockinger 400 G 150, D = 130 kN, mit Bremsluft und Elektroanschluß.
Anhängerkupplung Ringfeder 92/CX, D = 190 kN, mit Bremsluft und Elektroanschluß.
Anhängerkupplung PKW-Kupplung; Elektroanschluß 12V / 24V.
Unterflaschenablage Hinter der Fahrkabine; Zur Ablage 1- oder 3-rolliger Unterflaschen.
Tachograph TSU Tachograph Simulator; Simuliert einen vorhandenen Tachograph (MTCO, DTCO).
Tachograph MTCO Anzeige Geschwindigkeit und deren analoger Registrierung auf Tachoscheibe.
Tachograph DTCO Anzeige Geschwindigkeit und deren digitaler Registrierung auf Chipkarte.
KRAN
S1 Schwerlasteinrichtung, 2-rollig; De-/montierbar; Für insgesamt 8 Seilrollen am Auslegerkopf; max. Tragfähigkeit 147,2 t.
H2 2. Hubwerk; Federbelastete Lamellenbremse, ingetrierter Drehmelder; Inkl. Schnellverbindungen und Transporthalterung;
Selbstrüstbar; Ermöglicht 2-Haken-Betrieb an allen Verlängerungen.
Drallfänger Verhindert Verdrehung des Hubseils (für H1 und H2 erhältlich).
Zusatzgegengewicht 25,8 t, 2-teilig; für max. 68,5 t, 8-teilig.
Sonder-Gegengewicht R4450 8,8 t, 2-teilig (für insgesamt 17,8 t, 4-teilig).
Schnellverbindung Teleskop- Hydraulische Ziehvorrichtungen für Ausleger- und Wippzylinderbolzen sowie hydraulische und elektrische Schnellkupplungen ermög-
ausleger lichen schnellen Ein / -ausbau; Inkl. Ablage Wippzylinder.
Fernbedienung Steuerung der Kranbewegungen per Funkfernsteuerung.
Überlastungsrekorder Zeichnet Überlastungen auf.
Partikelfilter Für Abgasanlage.
Gasheizung Trumatic.
Xenon-Arbeitsscheinwerfer Aus Krankabine verstellbarer Xenon-Scheinwerfer an vorderer Lagerung des Grundkastens; 1 oder 2 Stück erhältlich.
Positionsleuchte Doppelhindernisfeuer, abnehmbar, an allen Einrichtungen nutzbar.
Zentralschmieranlage Für alle Schmierstellen.
VERLÄNGERUNGEN
HAV17 9 m / 17 m; Doppelklappspitze, manuell 20°/40° abwinkelbar; 1-rolliger Kopf; Inkl. Transporthalterung; Beinhaltet HAV9; Betrieb an
HA oder VA.
HAV9 9 m; Klappspitze, manuell 20°/40° abwinkelbar; 2-rolliger Kopf; Inkl. Transporthalterung; Betrieb an HA oder VA.
VA16 8 m / 16 m; Variable Teleskopauslegerverlängerung; 2-teilig; Beinhaltet VA8; Betrieb mit HAV oder MS.
VA8 8 m; Variable Teleskopauslegerverlängerung; Betrieb mit HAV oder MS.
MS 1,65 m; Montagespitze; 2-rollig für max. 39,1 t Tragfähigkeit; Inkl. Transporthalterung; Betrieb an HA oder VA.
HY Diesel-hydraulische Abwinkelung zur Verwendung anstelle der manuellen Abwinkelstelle in HAV oder VA.
Seitlich klappbare Kopfrolle Inkl. Transporthalterung; Für einsträngigen Betrieb.
Transporthalterung HAV separat Zur späteren Nachrüstung HAV und / oder VA; Inkl. Programmierung und Abnahme.
Transporthalterung MS separat Zur späteren Nachrüstung MS; Inkl. Programmierung und Abnahme.
DIVERSE
Notbetätigung Schnittstelle für Notbetätigung zum Bergen von Lasten bei Antriebsstillstand.
Transformator Dieselaggregat mit Hydraulikpumpe zum Betrieb der Notbetätigung.
Raffinerie-Paket Motor-Schnellstoppeinrichtung mit Luftabsperrklappe.
Spezielle Klimaausführungen Für Kranbetrieb unter besonderen klimatischen Einsatzbedingungen außerhalb: -25°C bis +40°C; NN bis 2000 m üNN; 0 % bis 95 %
Luftfeuchtigkeit.
Vorbereitung Anbau Dolly Inkl. Freilauf für Drehwerk und Schwimmstellung für Wippzylinder sowie Schnellkupplungen für Bremsluft und Elektrik.
Dollyablage am Ausleger Nach individueller technischer Klärung der Achslasten.
4-Strang Kettengehänge - Zum Selbstrüsten des Gerätes; Zwei 2-strängige Kettengehänge à 6 m Einzelstrang, eines davon mit Lastausgleichwippe für insge-
samt 4 voll tragende Kettenstränge nach BGR 500; Gabelkopfhaken; Verkürzungsklauen.
- Nenngröße 13 Tragfähigkeit 0° - 45°/ Strang: 4,8 t/1, 9,5 t/2, 14,3 t/3, 19 t/4.
- Nenngröße 16 Tragfähigkeit 0° - 45°/ Strang: 10 t/1, 14 t/2, 21 t/3, 28 t/4; Sondertragfähigkeit 0° - 20°/ Strang: 36 t/4.
- Nenngröße 20 Tragfähigkeit 0° - 45°/ Strang: 16 t/1, 22 t/2, 33 t/3, 45 t/4.
Unterflaschen - 200-9-21-D D = Doppelhaken
- 160-7-21-D E = Einfachhaken
- 125-5-21-D
- 80-3-21-D / E
- 32-1-21-D / E
- 12,5-0-E
Zusatzausstattungen können die Achslasten, das Gesamtgewicht sowie die Abmessungen sowohl positiv als auch negativ beeinflussen · Alle Einrichtungen
und Systeme inkl. spezifischer Programmierung und Abnahme · Weitere Zusatzausstattungen nur auf Anfrage · Technische Änderungen vorbehalten!
ac200-1 33
ÉQUIPEMENT DE BASE
CHÂSSIS
Calage Agencement 4 points H ; télescopages verticaux et horizontaux entièrement hydrauliques ; 4 semelles de calage mobiles incl. support
de transport ; mise à niveau manuelle ou automatique ; 4 bases de calage.
Moteur Moteur diesel Daimler OM502LA, 8 cylindres, refroidissement par eau ; puissance 390 kW (530 CV) à 1800 1/min, couple 2400 Nm
à 1300 1/min. Conforme aux normes EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 et CARB. Circuit d’échappement incl. pare-étincelles en acier inox.
Réservoir de carburant 500 l (+ réservoir tampon de 50 l sur la partie supérieure) pour châssis et partie supérieure. Pour carburants diesel (carburants alter-
natifs sur demande).
Boîte de vitesses ZF AS-Tronic ; boîte automatique à embrayage automatique, 16 vitesses AV, 2 AR et ralentisseur intégré ; boîte de transfert à deux
rapports, limiteur de vitesse.
Essieux 10 x 8 x 8 ; 5 essieux dont essieux 2, 3, 4, 5 motorisés et équipés du blocage de différentiel transversal ; essieux 3 et 4 avec blocage
du différentiel longitudinal sélectionnable ; essieux 1, 2, 4, 5 directeurs ; essieu 3 réhaussable.
Suspension Suspension hydropneumatique avec compensation du poids de l’essieu ; blocage hydraulique ; mise à niveau manuelle ou auto-
matique.
Direction Direction à servocommande hydraulique à double circuit de type demi-bloc avec pompe de secours ; direction de l’essieu arrière
active (essieux 4 et 5) comprenant six programmes d’entraînement différents.
Freins Frein de service : système de freinage à double circuit avec système ABS. Freins à disque pneumatiques sur toutes les roues.
Frein de stationnement : cylindre à ressort sur plusieurs roues.
Frein additionnel : ralentisseur intégré dans la transmission, frein d’échappement et régulateur constant d’étranglement.
Roues 395/95R25 (14.00R25) ; jantes en acier 9,5-25/1,7".
Cabine Large modèle de 2,88 m ; deux sièges réglables avec chauffage, accoudoirs et suspension pneumatique ; hauteur et inclinaison de
la roue directrice réglables ; vitres électriques ; vitre de sécurité teintée ; chauffage à eau, fonction du moteur ; radio avec lecteur CD ;
extincteur ; climatisation.
Compartiments de rangement Boîtes de rangement ouvertes pour crochets et matériel de levage ; coffres verrouillables.
Divers Limiteur de vitesse ; dispositif de lubrification central ; élévateurs ; marchepieds mobiles.
GRUE
Flèche télescopique HA 12,5 - 67,8 m ; système de télescopage à vérin unique, télescopage manuel ou automatique ; fixations pour tous les équipements
supplémentaires ; 6 poulies dans la tête de flèche pour une capacité de levage max. de 112,6 t.
Contrepoids 42,6 t, 6 éléments ; système d’amarrage automatique ; extensible jusqu’à 68,5 t max ; la machine peut transporter jusqu’à 16,4 t.
Réglage de la flèche 1 vérin de relevage avec soupape de freinage.
Entraînement rotatif 1 dispositif d’orientation avec frein multidisque à ressort ; différents modes de travail à sélectionner.
H1 Mécanisme de levage avec frein multidisque à ressort ; indicateur de rotation intégré.
Moteur Moteur diesel Daimler OM906LA, 6 cylindres, refroidissement par eau ; puissance 170 kW (231 CV) à 2200 1/min, couple 810 Nm
à 1300 1/min. Conforme aux normes EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 et CARB. Circuit d’échappement incl. pare-étincelles en acier inox.
Entraînement Système hydraulique à servocommande ; double pompe à pistons axiaux et deux pompes séparées pour le mécanisme d’orientation ;
refroidisseur d’huile hydraulique.
Commande Commande de pompe pour 4 mouvements simultanés ; commande pilote électrique via deux leviers de commande en croix ;
différents modes de commande sélectionnables pour les circuits hydrauliques ; possibilité d’enregistrer les réglages individuels.
Sécurité Demag IC-1 avec contrôleur d’état de charge électronique intégré ; affichage couleur ; affichage des conditions de travail, tableaux
de charges, charges de calage, contrôleur de portée, indicateur d’erreur. Dispositif de préalerte optique et acoustique à l’approche
d’un interrupteur de fin de course ou d’une situation limite.
Cabine Modèle 0,88 m ; inclinaison en continu jusqu’à 20° ; siège chauffant ; vitre coulissante sur la porte coulissante et à l’arrière ; pare-
brise réglable, quai latéral extensible, quai avant repliable, mains courantes. Vitrage sécurité teinté ; visière rabattable ; autoradio
avec lecteur CD ; chauffage à eau dépendant et indépendant du moteur avec thermostat ; climatisation.
DIVERS
Éclairage Phares de travail : 1 x pour dispositifs de levage et de manœuvre, 1 x avant champ de travail de la cabine de grue, 1 x compartiment
moteur de la grue, 4 x pour le calage ; gyrophares : 2 x sur la cabine, 2 x sur l’arrière de la grue.
Anémomètre Amovible, utilisable sur tous les dispositifs.
Jeu d’outils Câbles de démarrage d’appoint inclus.
OPTIONS
CHÂSSIS
Essieu supplémentaire Essieu supplémentaire entièrement intégré (dirigé, freiné, suspendu), schéma d’essieux 12 x 8 x 10 ; disponible uniquement sur
(AC 200-1P) roues 395/95R25 (14.00R25) ; support de transport incl. pour contrepoids à l’arrière.
Essieu supplémentaire et Combinaison des options de AC 200-1P et AC 200-1T. Permet un schéma d’essieux 14 x 8 x 12.
essieu suiveur (AC 200-1TP)
2440 mm / 8" distance couples Déplacement des essieux 5, 6.
d’essieu
Connexion rapide des poutres Les connexions hydrauliques et électriques rapides permettent un montage / démontage rapide.
Support de transport pour Rangement des pièces de contrepoids « a » ou « c / e » à l’arrière ; charge de 42,6 t max.
contrepoids sur l’arrière
Roues 445/95R25 (16.00R25) jantes en acier 11-25/1,7"
445/80R25 (17.50R25) jantes en acier 14-25/1,7"
525/80R25 (20.50R25) jantes en acier 17-25/1,7" ; extension du véhicule à 3,12 m incl.
Emplacement roue de secours À l’arrière ; incompatible si la machine contient des dispositifs d’attelage de remorque ou une caisse à outils.
Dispositif de levage de la roue Treuil de levage manuel à l’arrière ; incompatible si la machine contient des dispositifs d’attelage de remorque ou une caisse à outils.
de secours
Réservoir de carburant 300 l, pour 800 l de diesel au total ; incompatible avec alimentation en carburant double.
supplémentaire
Alimentation en carburant double Réservoir supplémentaire de 300 l ; pour un fonctionnement de grue avec types de carburants alternatifs (pas de RME / biodiesel).
Fonctionnement avec Circuit de carburant spécial pour l’utilisation de carburants biologiques (RME / biodiesel par ex.).
biocarburant
34 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
OPTIONS
Caméra de marche arrière Affichage dans la cabine.
Radar auxiliaire Alerte acoustique et optique dans la cabine.
Lit escamotable Dans la cabine.
Chauffage, indépendant du Chauffage auxiliaire, avec minuterie programmable, commutation sur préchauffage moteur.
moteur
Boîte à outils À l’arrière ; verrouillable ; incompatible si la machine contient des dispositifs d’attelage de remorque ou un emplacement de roue de
secours.
Caisse en bois À l’arrière ; ouverte.
Caisse en bois avec support Sur l’arrière ; ouverte ; zone de stockage réduite.
roue de secours
Dispositif d’attelage de remorque Rockinger 400 G 150, D = 130 kN, avec contre-air et raccordement électrique.
Dispositif d’attelage de remorque Ringfeder 92/CX, D = 190 kN, avec contre-air et raccordement électrique.
Dispositif d’attelage de remorque Accouplement voiture de tourisme ; raccordement électrique 12 V / 24 V.
Zone de rangement des moufles Derrière la cabine ; destiné au rangement des moufles à 1 ou 3 poulies.
Tachygraphe TSU Simulateur de tachygraphe ; simule un tachygraphe installé (MTCO, DTCO).
Tachygraphe MTCO Affichage de la vitesse et enregistrement numérique sur disque.
Tachygraphe DTCO Affichage de la vitesse et enregistrement numérique sur carte à puce.
GRUE
S1 Équipement de levage lourd, 2 poulies ; montable / démontable, pour 8 poulies au total sur la tête de flèche ; capacité de levage
max. 147,2 t.
H2 2ème dispositif de levage ; freins multidisques à ressorts ; indicateur de rotation intégré ; connexions rapides et support de transport
incl. ; auto-amarrage ; permet le fonctionnement à 2 crochets sur toutes les extensions.
Dispositif anti-giratoire Prévient la rotation du câble de levage (disponible pour H1 et H2).
Contrepoids supplémentaire 25,8 t, 2 éléments ; pour 68,5 t max, 8 éléments.
Contrepoids spécial R4450 8,8 t, 2 éléments (pour 17,8 t au total, 4 éléments).
Connexion rapide flèche Les dispositifs d’insertion hydrauliques pour les axes des vérins de relevage et des flèches ainsi que les connexions rapides hydrau-
télescopique liques et électriques permettent un montage / démontage rapides ; rangement des vérins de relevage incl.
Commande à distance Commande des mouvements de la machine à distance.
Contrôleur de surcharge Enregistre les états de surcharges.
Filtre à particules Pour circuit d’échappement.
Chauffage au gaz Trumatic.
Projecteurs au xénon Réglables depuis la cabine depuis le support avant de la base de la flèche ; 1 ou 2 pièce(s) disponible.
Feu de position Feu à double obstacle, amovible, utilisable sur tous les dispositifs.
Graissage centralisé Pour tous les points de lubrification.
EXTENSIONS
HAV17 9 m / 17 m ; double fléchette pliante, inclinable manuellement de 20° / 40° ; tête à une poulie ; support de transport incl. ;
HAV9 inclus ; fonctionnement sur HA ou VA.
HAV9 9 m ; fléchette pliante, inclinable manuellement de 20° / 40° ; tête à 2 poulies ; support de transport incl. ; fonctionnement sur HA ou VA.
VA16 8 m / 16 m ; extension variable de la flèche télescopique ; 2 éléments ; VA8 incl. ; fonctionnement avec HAV ou MS.
VA8 8 m ; extension variable de la flèche télescopique ; fonctionnement avec HAV ou MS.
MS 1,65 m ; potence ; 2 poulies pour une capacité de charge max. de 39,1 t ; support de transport incl. ; fonctionnement sur HA ou VA.
HY Déviation hydraulique diesel pour une utilisation sur HAV ou VA à la place du point de déviation manuel.
Poulie auxiliaire pliable Support de transport incl. ; pour levages à brin simple.
latéralement
Support de transport HAV séparé Pour un rééquipement ultérieur HAV et / ou VA ; programmation et validation incl.
Support de transport MS séparé Pour un rééquipement ultérieur MS ; programmation et validation incl.
DIVERS
Dispositif d’urgence Interface d’urgence pour restaurer les charges en cas de défaillance de la machine.
Transformateur Groupe électrogène diesel avec pompe hydraulique pour le fonctionnement du dispositif d’urgence.
Kit raffinerie Dispositif de mise hors service rapide pour le moteur muni d'un clapet anti-retour.
Modèles de climatisation Pour un fonctionnement dans des conditions climatiques particulières non comprises entre : -25°C et +40°C NN jusqu’à 2000 m üNN ;
spéciaux 0 % à 95 % d’humidité ambiante.
Préparation montage remorque Roue libre pour dispositif d’orientation et position flottante pour vérins de relevage incl., ainsi que connexions rapides pour contre-ait
et système électrique
Pallier support de la remorque Après étude technique individualisée des charges sur essieux.
sur la flèche
Chaîne d’élévation à 4 câbles Pour l’auto-montage de l’appareil ; 2 élingues à chaînes à deux brins à brin simple de 6 m, dont un équipé d’un compensateur de
charge pour 4 brins de chaîne entièrement porteurs selon BGR 500 ; crochet à chape ; griffes de raccourcissement.
- Dimension nominale 13 Capacité de levage 0° - 45°/ Brin : 4,8 t/1, 9,5 t/2, 14,3 t/3, 19 t/4.
- Dimension nominale 16 Capacité de levage 0° - 45°/ Brin : 10 t/1, 14 t/2, 21 t/3, 28 t/4 ; capacité de levage spéciale 0° - 20°/ brin : 36 t/4.
- Dimension nominale 20 Capacité de levage 0° - 45°/ Brin : 16 t/1, 22 t/2, 33 t/3, 45 t/4.
Moufles - 200-9-21-D D = crochet double
- 160-7-21-D E = crochet simple
- 125-5-21-D
- 80-3-21-D / E
- 32-1-21-D / E
- 12,5-0-E
Les équipements supplémentaires peuvent avoir une incidence positive ou négative sur les charges sur essieux, le poids total et les dimensions · Tous les dispo-
sitifs et systèmes, programmation et validation spécifiques incl. · Autres équipements disponibles sur demande ! · Sous réserve de modifications techniques!
ac200-1 35
ALLESTIMENTO DI BASE
CARRO
Stabilizzatori Sistema a 4 stabilizzatori; estensione orizzontale e verticale completamente idraulica; 4 piatti stabilizzatori rimovibili, completi di
supporto di trasporto; disponibili nella versione con regolazione del livello automatica o manuale; 4 basi di appoggio.
Motore Daimler OM502LA, diesel 8 cilindri, raffreddato ad acqua; potenza 390 kW (530 PS) a 1800 giri/min, momento di coppia 2400 Nm
a 1300 giri/min. Eesecuzione a norma EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 e CARB. Impianto di scarico in acciaio inossidabile completo di para-
scintille.
Serbatoio carburante 500 l (+ serbatoio di riserva di 50 l a bordo torretta) per carro e torretta. Per combustibili diesel (combustibili alternativi su richiesta).
Cambio ZF AS-Tronic; trasmissione automatizzata con frizione automatica, 16 marce avanti e 2 retromarce e retarder integrato;
distributore di coppia a 2 rapporti, pilota automatico.
Assi 10 x 8 x 8; 5 assi di cui gli assi 2, 3, 4, 5 traenti, dotati di differenziale trasversale inseribile; gli assi 3, 4 con differenziale longitudinale
inseribile; gli assi 1, 2, 4, 5 sterzanti; il 3° asse sollevabile.
Sospensioni Sospensioni idropneumatiche con compensazione del carico assiale; blocco idraulico; disponibili nella versione con regolazione del
livello manuale o automatica.
Sterzo Servosterzo a doppio circuito idraulico con pompa di emergenza; sterzatura attiva degli assi posteriori (assi 4, 5) con 6 modalità di
sterzatura differenti.
Freni Freno di servizio: impianto frenante pneumatico a doppio circuito con ABS. Su tutte le ruote, dotato di freni a disco ad aria compressa.
Freno di stazionamento: cilindro a molla agente su più ruote.
Freno ausiliario: retarder integrato nella trasmissione, freno motore e farfalla fissa.
Ruote 395/95R25 (14.00R25); cerchioni in acciaio 9,5-25/1,7".
Cabina Larghezza 2,88 m. 2 sedili regolabili riscaldati, braccioli e sospensioni pneumatiche; volante regolabile in altezza e inclinazione;
alzacristalli elettrici. Vetri di sicurezza oscurati; sistema di riscaldamento acqua calda tramite motore; radio, CD; estintore;
climatizzatore.
Vani di stoccaggio In alto, vani aperti per argani e funi; compartimenti chiusi.
Altro Pilota automatico; lubrificazione centralizzata; moduli di salita; scala a libro separata.
GRU
Braccio telescopico HA 12,5 - 67,8 m. Sistema di sfilo a un cilindro, configurabile con sfilo manuale o automatico; predisposizioni per il collegamento di tutti
gli accessori opzionali; 6 pulegge integrate nella punta del braccio per una portata max. di 112,6 t.
Contrappeso 42,6 t, divisibile in 6 blocchi, con sistema di autozavorramento; incrementabile fino a 68,5 t; 16,4 t possono essere installate di serie
a bordo macchina.
Sfilo del braccio 1 cilindro differenziale, dotato di valvola di comando del freno di discesa con controllo della pressione a carico.
Azionamento rotazione 1 meccanismo di rotazione con freno lamellare a molla; diverse modalità operative selezionabili.
H1 Argano con freno lamellare a molla; con sincronizzatore integrato.
Motore Daimler OM906LA, diesel 6 cilindri, raffreddato ad acqua; potenza 170 kW (231 PS) a 2200 giri/min, momento di coppia 810 Nm
a 1300 giri/min. Eesecuzione a norma EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 e CARB. Impianto di scarico in acciaio inossidabile completo di para-
scintille.
Azionamento Impianto idraulico con controllo della potenza; doppia pompa con pistoni assiali e 2 pompe indipendenti per la rotazione e utenze
collaterali; radiatore olio idraulico.
Comando Comando pompa per 4 movimenti operativi in contemporanea; pilotaggio elettrico mediante 2 leve di comando a joystick; scelta tra
diverse modalità di comando dei circuiti idraulici; possibilità di salvare le impostazioni definite dall’operatore.
Dispositivi di sicurezza Demag IC-1, con limitatore di carico elettronico integrato; display a colori; visualizzazione dello stato operativo attuale, tabelle di
portata, carichi degli stabilizzatori, limitazione dell’area di lavoro, indicatore di errore. Avvertimenti ottici e acustici al raggiungimento
dei finecorsa e delle condizioni limite.
Cabina Dimensioni 0,88 m; inclinazione a regolazione infinitesimale 20°; riscaldamento del sedile; alzacristalli nelle porte scorrevoli e sul
retro; parabrezza regolabile; pedana laterale allungabile, pedana frontale ribaltabile; corrimano. Vetri di sicurezza oscurati; tendina
parasole; CD, radio; riscaldamento acqua calda sia tramite motore che indipendente dal motore con timer; climatizzatore.
VARIE
Illuminazione Proiettore di lavoro: 1 per meccanismo di sollevamento e allestimento, 1 per zona di lavoro antistante la cabina torretta, 1 per vano
motore della gru, 4 per stabilizzatori; girofari: 2 sulla cabina di guida, 2 sul retro della gru.
Anemometro Estraibile, utilizzabile con tutti i dispositivi.
Cassetta degli attrezzi Comprende cavo di avviamento ausiliario.
OPZIONI
CARRO
Asse aggiunto (AC 200-1P) Asse aggiunto (sterzante, frenato, molleggiato) interamente integrato nel carro, disposizione degli assi 12 x 8 x 10; disponibile solo
con ruote 395/95R25 (14.00R25); completo di supporto di trasporto per contrappeso sul retro.
Asse aggiunto e asse trainato Combinazione opzioni AC 200-1P e AC 200-1T. Consente la disposizione degli assi 14 x 8 x 12.
(AC 200-1TP)
2440 mm / Distanza tra due Disassamento degli assi 5, 6.
assi 8"
Trave degli stabilizzatori con Gli accoppiamenti rapidi idraulici ed elettrici consentono un facile montaggio e smontaggio.
accoppiamento rapido
Supporto di trasporto per Vano per riporre i blocchi del contrappeso „a“ o „c / e“ sul retro; adatto per un massimo di 42,6 t.
contrappeso sul retro
Ruote 445/95R25 (16.00R25); cerchioni in acciaio 11-25/1,7"
445/80R25 (17.50R25); cerchioni in acciaio 14-25/1,7"
525/80R25 (20.50R25); cerchioni in acciaio 17-25/1,7"; incl. estensione in larghezza fino a 3,12 m.
Vano per ruota di scorta Sul retro; non installabile se presente il gancio di traino o la cassetta degli attrezzi.
Dispositivo di sollevamento Verricello manuale sul retro; non installabile se presente il gancio di traino o la cassetta degli attrezzi.
per ruota di scorta
Serbatoio carburante 300 l, per un totale di 800 l di carburante diesel; non utilizzabile con l’opzione doppia alimentazione di carburante.
supplementare
Doppia alimentazione di Serbatoio supplementare 300 l; per il funzionamento della gru con carburanti alternativi (no colza / biodiesel).
carburante
Funzionante con biogas Impianto di carburante alimentabile con carburanti biologici (ad esempio colza / biodiesel).
36 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
OPZIONI
Videocamera per visione lato Display nella cabina di guida.
posteriore
Sensore di retromarcia Dispositivo ottico e acustico di segnalazione della distanza nella cabina di guida.
Lettino ripiegabile Nella cabina di guida.
Riscaldamento, indipendente Sistema di riscaldamento autonomo, con timer programmabile, commutazione al preriscaldamento del motore.
dal motore
Cassetta porta-attrezzi Sul retro; richiudibile; non installabile se presente il gancio di traino o il supporto della ruota di riserva.
Cassa di legno Sul retro; aperta.
Cassa di legno con supporto Sul retro; aperta; riduce lo spazio disponibile per il vano di stoccaggio.
per ruota di scorta
Gancio di traino Attacco Rockinger 400 G 150, D = 130 kN, con aria freni e collegamenti elettrici.
Gancio di traino Attacco Ringfeder 92/CX, D = 190 kN, con aria freni e collegamenti elettrici.
Gancio di traino Sistema di aggancio per veicoli; collegamenti elettrici 12 V / 24 V.
Vano per bozzelli Dietro la cabina di guida; adatto per bozzelli a 1 o 3 pulegge.
Tachigrafo TSU Simulatore del tachigrafo; simula uno dei tachigrafi disponibili (MTCO, DTCO).
Tachigrafo MTCO Indicazione e registrazione analogica della velocità su disco tachigrafo.
Tachigrafo DTCO Indicazione e registrazione digitale della velocità su scheda elettronica.
GRU
S1 Allestimento per carichi pesanti, a 2 pulegge; montabile/smontabile; per un totale di 8 pulegge sulla punta del braccio; portata max.
147,2 t.
H2 2. argano; freno lamellare a molla; sincronizzatore integrato; completo di giunti rapidi e supporto di trasporto; sistema di allestimento
automatico; consente l’uso di 2 ganci su tutte le prolunghe.
Sistema antitorsione Impedisce la torsione della fune (disponibile per H1 e H2).
Contrappeso supplementare 25,8 t, divisibile in 2 blocchi; adatto per max. 68,5 t, 8 blocchi.
Contrappeso speciale R4450 8,8 t, divisibile in 2 blocchi (per un totale di 17,8 t, 4 blocchi).
Accoppiamento rapido braccio I dispositivi di estrazione idraulici per bulloni del cilindro differenziale e del braccio nonché gli accoppiamenti rapidi idraulici ed elettrici
telescopico consentono un veloce montaggio e smontaggio; completo di vano per cilindro differenziale.
Radiocomando Comando a distanza dei movimenti della gru.
Sistema di monitoraggio del Registra le condizioni di sovraccarico.
sovraccarico
Filtro del particolato Per l’impianto di scarico.
Riscaldamento a gas Trumatic.
Proiettori di lavoro allo xenon Fari allo xenon regolabili dalla cabina torretta ubicati sul lato anteriore del blocco di base; 1 o 2 unità disponibile.
Luci di posizione Doppia segnalazione luminosa di ostacolo, estraibile, utilizzabile con tutti i dispositivi.
Impianto di lubrificazione Per tutti i punti di lubrificazione.
centralizzata
PROLUNGHE
HAV17 9 m / 17 m; falcone doppio, falcone manualmente inclinabile 20°/40°; punta a 1 puleggia; completo di supporto di trasporto;
comprende HAV9; funzionamento con HA o VA.
HAV9 9 m; falcone manualmente inclinabile 20°/40°; punta a 2 pulegge; completo di supporto di trasporto; funzionamento con HA o VA.
VA16 8 m / 16 m; prolunga del braccio telescopico variabile; in 2 blocchi; comprende VA8; funzionamento con HAV o MS.
VA8 8 m; prolunga del braccio telescopico variabile; funzionamento con HAV o MS.
MS 1,65 m; runner; a 2 pulegge per una portata max. di 39,1 t; completo di supporto di trasporto; funzionamento con HA o VA.
HY Inclinazione azionata idraulicamente e con motore diesel per il funzionamento con HAV o VA in alternativa alla rotazione manuale.
Punta a una puleggia Completa di supporto di trasporto; configurabile con un rinvio.
ripiegabile lateralmente
Supporto di trasporto HAV Per la successiva conversione HAV e/o VA; comprende la configurazione e l’accettazione.
separato
Supporto di trasporto MS separato Per la successiva conversione MS; comprende la configurazione e l’accettazione.
VARIE
Azionamento d’emergenza Interfaccia di azionamento d’emergenza per il recupero di carichi in caso di guasto.
Trasformatore Unità diesel con pompa idraulica, per l’azionamento di emergenza.
Pacchetto raffineria Dispositivo di arresto immediato del motore, con valvola di intercettazione aria.
Configurazione speciale Per il funzionamento della gru in particolari condizioni climatiche di utilizzo non rientranti nei seguenti intervalli: da -25°C a +40°C;
dell’impianto di climatizzazione da NN a 2000 m üNN; umidità da 0 % a 95 %.
Predisposizione per l’aggiunta Completo di meccanismo a ruota libera per la rotazione e posizione flottante del cilindro differenziale, nonché di giunti rapidi per aria
del carrello freni e collegamenti elettrici.
Supporto carrello su braccio Secondo la verifica tecnica individuale dei carichi assiali.
Imbracatura a catena a 4 rami - Consente l’allestimento automatico dell’unità; due imbracature di sollevamento a 2 rami, ogni ramo pari a 6 m, uno dei quali con
meccanismo di compensazione del carico per un totale di 4 rami interamente portanti a norma BGR 500; gancio a forcella;
accorciatori.
- Dimensione nominale 13 Portata 0° - 45°/ ramo: 4,8 t/1, 9,5 t/2, 14,3 t/3, 19 t/4.
- Dimensione nominale 16 Portata 0° - 45°/ ramo: 10 t/1, 14 t/2, 21 t/3, 28 t/4; portata speciale 0° - 20°/ ramo: 36 t/4.
- Dimensione nominale 20 Portata 0° - 45°/ ramo: 16 t/1, 22 t/2, 33 t/3, 45 t/4.
Bozelli - 200-9-21-D D = gancio doppio
- 160-7-21-D E = gancio singolo
- 125-5-21-D
- 80-3-21-D / E
- 32-1-21-D / E
- 12,5-0-E
Eventuali altri allestimenti possono incidere positivamente o negativamente sui carichi assiali, sul contrappeso o sulle misurazioni · Tutte le attrezzature e i
sistemi comprendono la relativa configurazione e il collaudo · Sono disponibili ulteriori allestimenti a richiesta · Il costruttore si riserva il diritto di apportare
modifiche senza preavviso!
ac200-1 37
EQUIPAMIENTO BÁSICO
CHASIS
Estabilización Diseño 4 puntos en H; Movimiento vertical y horizontal por sistema completamente hidráulico; 4 planchas (separadas) de soporte
para estabilizadores, incl. puesto de transporte y almacenaje; Puede seleccionarse regulación de nivel manual o automática;
4 bases estabilizadoras.
Motor Motor Daimler modelo OM502LA, 8 cilindros, refrigerado por agua; Salida 390 kW (530 HP) a 1800 rpm, par máximo 2400 Nm a
1300 rpm. Certificado conforme a EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 y CARB. Sistema de escape completo (incl. parachispas) de acero inoxidable.
Depósito de combustible 500 l (+ búffer de 50 l en superestructura) para chasis e superestructura. Para combustible diesel (alternativos bajo demanda).
Transmisión ZF AS-Tronic; Caja de cambios automática con embrague automático, 16 marchas adelante y 2 de reroceso y retardador integrado;
Caja de transferencia de 2 etapas, limitador automático de velocidad.
Ejes 10 x 8 x 8; 5 ejes, teniendo ejes 2, 3, 4, y 5 tracción con bloqueo transversal conmutable; Ejes 3 y 4 bloqueo longitudinal conmutable;
Ejes 1, 2, 4 y 5 dirección; Eje 3 elevable.
Suspensión Suspensión hidroneumática con compensación de presión sobre ejes; Mecanismo hidráulico de bloqueo; Puede seleccionarse regulación
de nivel manual o automática.
Dirección Dirección semibloque hidráulica de dos circuitos, con bomba auxiliar de emergencia; Dirección activa de eje trasero (ejes 4 y 5) con
6 programas de conducción distintos.
Frenos Freno de servicio: sistema neumático de frenos de dos circuitos, con ABS. Equipado en todas las ruedas con frenos de disco por aire
comprimido. Freno de estacionamiento: cilindro con fuerza acumulada por muelles, operante en distintas ruedas.
Freno auxiliar: retardador integrado en transmisión, freno por gases con chapaleta de escape y estrangulador constante.
Neumáticos 395/95R25 (14.00R25); Llantas de acero 9,5-25/1,7".
Cabina Modelo ancho, 2,88 m. 2 asientos regulables con calefacción de asiento, reposabrazos y suspensión neumática; Volante con regulación
de altura e inclinación; Elevalunas eléctrico. Acristalamiento de seguridad tintado; Calefaccion por agua caliente dependiente del motor;
Radio-CD; Extintor de Incendios; Climatizador.
Compartimentos de almacenaje Cajones sin tapa para ganchos y material de izar; Cajoneras con cerradura.
Diversos Limitador automático de velocidad; Equipo lubricante centralizado; Escalas; Escalera plegable separada.
GRÚA
Flecha telescópica HA 12,5 - 67,8 m. Sistema telescópico monocilíndrico, pudiendo seleccionarse telescopaje automático o manual; Anclajes para todos los
equipamientos y extensiones; 6 poleas integradas en cabezal de flecha para capacidad máx. de carga 112,6 t.
Contrapeso 42,6 t, 6 bloques; Automontaje automático; Ampliable a máx. 68,5 t; Máx. 16,4 t transportables de serie en la máquina.
Basculación de flecha 1 cilindro de abatimiento con válvula automática de seguridad para frenado de caída.
Tracción de giro 1 mecanismo giratorio con freno multidisco por muelles; Conmutable entre regímenes diferentes de funcionamiento.
H1 Cabrestante con freno multdisco por muelles; Sincrotransmisor integrado.
Motor Motor Daimler modelo OM906LA, 6 cilindros, refrigerado por agua; Salida 170 kW (231 HP) a 2200 rpm, par máximo 810 Nm a
1300 rpm. Certificado conforme a EURO-MOT 3a, TIER 3 y CARB. Sistema de escape completo (incl. parachispas) de acero inoxidable.
Tracción Equipo hidráulico con control de potencia; Bomba doble de émbolos axiales, más 2 bombas aparte para el mecanismo de giro y
consumos auxiliares; Refrigerador de aceite hidráulico.
Sistema de control Control de bomba para 4 movimientos útiles simultáneos; Controles piloto eléctricos a través de 2 joysticks en cruz; Diferentes
regímenes de control seleccionables para circuitos hidráulicos; Memoria para configuraciones de conducción individualizadas.
Dispositivos de seguridad Demag IC-1, con limitador electrónico integrado de momento de carga; Pantalla en color; Visualización de estado operativo actual,
tablas de límites de carga, indicador de fallos, indicador de carga sobre estabilizadores; Delimitador del área de trabajo.
Señal de (pre-) aviso acústico y óptico al alcanzarse finales de carrera y estados límite.
Cabina Modelo 0,88 m; Inclinacion 20° en progresión continua; Calefacción de asiento; Ventanilla elevable en puerta corrediza y en trasera;
Luna frontal alzable; Repisa lateral extensible, estrado frontal abatible; Pasamanos. Acristalamiento de seguridad tintado;
Persiana-parasol; Radio-CD; Calefacción por agua caliente dependiente e independiente del motor y con temporizador; Climatizador.
OTROS
Alumbrado Luces de trabajo: 1 para mecanismo de elevación y colocación, 1 regulable en cabina de grúa para campo inmediato de trabajo, 1 para
compartimento de motor de grúa, 4 para estabilizadores; Faros omnidireccionales: 2 sobre cabina de vehículo, 2 en trasera de grúa.
Anemómetro Retirable, para ser usado con todas las extensiones.
Juego de herramientas Incl. cables para arranque.
OPCIONES
CHASIS
Eje adicional (AC 200-1P) Eje adicional (con dirección, freno, amortiguación) completamente integrado en chasis, esquema de ejes 12 x 8 x 10;
Disponible solamente con ruedas 395/95R25 (14.00R25); Incl. puesto de transporte para contrapeso en trasera de vehículo.
Eje adicional y eje remolcado Combinación de opciones AC 200-1P y AC 200-1T. Posibilita esquema de ejes 14 x 8 x 12.
(AC 200-1TP)
Espaciado 2440 mm / 8" en par Desplazamiento de ejes 5 y 6.
de ejes
Ensamble rápido deestabili- Acoples rápidos hidráulicos y eléctricos para agilizar montaje y desmontaje.
zadores
Puesto de transporte para Para almacenar en trasera bloques de contrapeso „a“ ó „c / e“; Carga máx. 42,6 t.
contrapeso en trasera de vehículo
Neumáticos 445/95R25 (16.00R25) Llantas de acero 11-25/1,7"
445/80R25 (17.50R25) Llantas de acero 14-25/1,7"
525/80R25 (20.50R25) Llantas de acero 17-25/1,7"; Incl. ensanchamiento de vehículo a 3,12 m.
Montura para rueda de repuesto En trasera de vehículo; No combinable con enganches de remolque o cajón de herramientas.
Mecanismo elevador para rueda Gato manual; En trasera de vehículo; No combinable con enganches de remolque o cajón de herramientas.
de repuesto
Ampliación depósito de 300 l, para un total de 800 l de gasóleo; No combinable con alimentación dual.
combustible
Combustible dual Depósito adicional de 300 l; Para funcionamiento de grúa con combustible alternativo (no RME / biodiésel).
Funcionamiento con bio- Equipo especial de alimentación para empleo de combustibles biológicos (p. ej. RME / biodiésel).
combustible
38 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
OPCIONES
Cámara de marcha atrás Pantalla de visualización en cabina de vehículo.
Radar de marcha atrás Señal óptica y acústica de advertencia de distancias en cabina de vehículo.
Litera plegable En cabina de vehículo.
Calefacción, independiente del Calefacción auxiliar, con temporizador; Posibilidad de cambiar a precalentamiento de motor.
motor
Cajón de herramientas En trasera de vehículo; Con cerradura; No combinable con enganches de remolque ni montura / mecanismo elevador para rueda de
repuesto.
Cajón de madera En trasera de vehículo; Sin tapa.
Cajón de madera con montura En trasera de vehículo; Sin tapa; Capacidad de almacenaje reducida.
para rueda de repuesto
Enganche de remolque Rockinger 400 G 150, D = 130 kN, con enganches para aire de frenado y eléctricos.
Enganche de remolque Ringfeder 92/CX, D = 190 kN, con enganches para aire de frenado y eléctricos.
Enganche de remolque Enganche de turismo; Enganches eléctricos 12 V / 24 V.
Compartimento para ganchos Detrás de cabina de vehículo; Para depositar ganchos de 1 ó 3 poleas.
Tacómetro TSU Simulador de tacómetro; Simula un tacómetro instalado (MTCO, DTCO).
Tacómetro MTCO Indicación de velocidad y registro analógico de la misma sobre disco de papel.
Tacómetro DTCO Indicación de velocidad y registro digital de la misma sobre tarjeta chip.
GRÚA
S1 Dispositivo para cargas pesadas, con 2 poleas; (Des-)montable; Para total de 8 poleas en cabezal de flecha y capacidad de carga máx.
147,2 t.
H2 2º cabrestante; Freno multidisco bajo presión de resorte; Incl. enganches rápidos y puesto de transporte; Automontaje: Sincrotransmisor
integrado; Posibilita operar con 2 ganchos en todas las extensiones.
Protector antitorsión Previene retorcimientos de cable elevador (disponible para H1 y H2).
Contrapeso adicional 25,8 t en 2 bloques. Para máx. 68,5 t en 8 bloques.
Contrapeso especial R4450 8,8 t en 2 bloques (para un total de 17,8 t en 4 bloques).
Ensamble rápido flecha Extractores hidráulicos para pasador de flecha y cilindro de abatimiento, más acoples rápidos hidráulicos y eléctricos, para agilizar
telescópica montaje y desmontaje; Incl. compartimento de transporte para cilindro de abatimiento.
Control remoto Control de los movimientos de grúa mediante radiocontrol remoto.
Registro de sobrecarga Registra sobrecargas.
Filtro de partículas diésel Para sistema de escape de gases.
Calefacción de gas Trumatic.
Faro de trabajo Xenon Faro Xenon regulable desde cabina de grúa, situado en el alojamiento delantero de la base de flecha; Disponible en 1 ó 2 unid.
Luz de baliza Doble luz de obstáculo, retirable, para ser usada con todas las extensiones.
Equipo lubricante centralizado Para todos los puntos de lubricación.
EXTENSIONES
HAV17 9 m / 17 m; Plumín de doble articulación, angulable manualmente en 20°/40°; Cabezal de 1 polea; Incl. puesto de transporte; Contiene
HAV9; Opera con HA ó VA.
HAV9 9 m; Plumín articulado, angulable manualmente en 20°/40°; Cabezal de 2 poleas; Incl. puesto de transporte; Opera con HA ó VA.
VA16 8 m / 16 m; Extensión telescópica variable de flecha; en 2 secciones; Contiene VA8; Opera con HAV ó MS.
VA8 8 m; Extensión telescópica variable de flecha; Opera con HAV ó MS.
MS 1,65 m; Runner para montaje; Con 2 poleas para capacidad de carga máx. 39,1 t; Incl. puesto de transporte; Opera con HA ó VA.
HY Angulamiento diésel-hidráulico que sustituye al pivotaje manual en operaciones con HAV ó VA.
Polea en cabezal de pluma, Incluye puesto de transporte; Para operaciones con un solo cable.
plegable lateralmente
Puesto de transporte para HAV, Para reequipamiento posterior HAV y / o VA; Incl. programación y recepción.
por separado
Puesto de transporte para MS, Para reequipamiento posterior MS; Incl. programación y recepción.
por separado
OTROS
Accionamiento de emergencia Interfaz de accionamiento de emergencia para recuperación de cargas en caso de avería de la máquina.
Transformador Grupo diésel con bomba hidráulica para poner en funcionamiento el accionamiento de emergencia.
Equipo refinería Dispositivo de parada rápida del motor, con mariposa para corte de aire.
Diseños especiales de Para operar bajo condiciones climáticas inusuales que excedan: entre -25°C y +40°C; Más de 2.000 m sobre nivel del mar; Humedad
climatización entre 0 % y 95 %.
Preinstalación para dolly Incl. piñón libre para pivote y cilindro de abatimiento, así como enganches rápidos para aire de frenado y dispositivos eléctricos.
Horquilla de sujeción para dolly Requiere comprobación técnica individual de cargas sobre eje, pesos y dimensiones de vehículo.
Cadena de 4 líneas - Permite automontaje; Dos cadenas de 2 líneas a 6 m por cada línea, estando equipada una cadena de 2 líneas con travesaño compen-
sador de carga para un total de 4 líneas de cadena a plena carga conforme a BGR 500; Ganchos-horquilla de seguridad; Pinzas reduc-
toras.
- Volumen nominal 13 Capacidad de carga 0° - 45°/ Línea: 4,8 t/1, 9,5 t/2, 14,3 t/3, 19 t/4.
- Volumen nominal 16 Capacidad de carga 0° - 45°/ Línea: 10 t/1, 14 t/2, 21 t/3, 28 t/4; Capacidad especial de carga 0° - 20° / Línea: 36 t/4.
- Volumen nominal 20 Capacidad de carga 0° - 45°/ Línea: 16 t/1, 22 t/2, 33 t/3, 45 t/4.
Juegos de ganchos - 200-9-21-D D = Gancho doble
- 160-7-21-D E = Gancho sencillo
- 125-5-21-D
- 80-3-21-D / E
- 32-1-21-D / E
- 12,5-0-E
Los equipamientos opcionales pueden tener influencia positiva o negativa sobre cargas sobre ejes, peso total y dimensiones · En todas las extensiones y sistemas
de grúa van incluidos programación y recepción · Otro equipamiento opcional disponible únicamente previa consulta · Reservado el derecho a modificaciones
técnicas!
ac200-1 39
NOTES TO LIFTING CAPACITY · ANMERKUNGEN ZU DEN TRAGFÄHIGKEITEN ·
CONDITIONS D’UTILISATION · ANNOTAZIONI SULLE PORTATE ·
CONDICIONES DE UTILIZACIÓN
The telescopic loads stated in the capacity chart are valid under the following conditions:
– The sliding areas of the telescopes must be lubricated well.
– The surroundings temperature has to be normal (considerable reductions must be expected below 0 °C).
– The radius in the chart is given for the end length of the telescopic sequence.
– The capacities are valid for extending and retracting the telescopic section.
– The telescopic loads are only valid for moving the last section of the sequence. The curve for e.g. 0-0-45-90-90 % is only valid for telescoping from
0-0-0-90-90 % to 0-0-45-90-90 % and back, but not for 0-0-0-0-0 % to 0-0-45-90-90 %!
– The telescopic loads are based on the telescoping ability of the boom. The loads to be telescoped must never exceed the loads in the load chart as
tipping of the crane may occur.
– The most advantageous individual telescoping sequence is shown. Other telescoping sequences for the same boom length will result in lower lifting
capacities for telescoping. Refer to the machine’s documentation for these lifting capacity values.
Für die in der Tabelle aufgeführten Teleskopierlasten gelten folgende Bedingungen:

– Die Gleitflächen der Teleskope sind gut geschmiert.
– Es herrschen normale Umgebungstemperaturen (unter 0 °C ist mit starken Reduzierungen zu rechnen).
– Der auf den Tabellen angegebene Radius ist auf die Endlänge der jeweiligen Teleskopierfolge bezogen.
– Die Tragfähigkeiten gelten für das Aus- und Einteleskopieren.
– Die teleskopierbaren Tragfähigkeiten gelten nur für das Bewegen des letzten Kastens in der Teleskopierfolge. Die Kurve für z. B. 0-0-45-90-90 % gilt
also nur für das Teleskopieren von 0-0-0-90-90 % nach 0-0-45-90-90 % und zurück, nicht jedoch für 0-0-0-0-0 % nach 0-0-45-90-90 %!
– Die teleskopierbaren Lasten richten sich ausschließlich nach der Teleskopierfähigkeit des Auslegers. Die Lasten, die teleskopiert werden, dürfen die
in der Traglasttabelle angegebenen Werte nie überschreiten, da der Kran sonst kippen könnte.
– Dargestellt ist die jeweils günstigste Teleskopierfolge. Andere Teleskopierfolgen / mit gleicher Auslegerlänge haben geringere teleskopierbare Trag-
fähigkeiten, diese sind der Dokumentation des Gerätes zu entnehmen.
Les conditions suivantes s’appliquent aux charges télescopables présentées dans le tableau :
– Bonne lubrification des surfaces de glissement du télescope.
– Températures extérieures normales (fortes réductions des capacités de charge en cas de température inférieure à 0 °C).
– Le rayon indiqué sur les tableaux se réfère à la longueur finale de la séquence de télescopage correspondante.
– Les capacités de charge s’appliquent au déploiement et à la rétraction de la flèche télescopique.
– Les charges télescopables s’appliquent uniquement au mouvement de la dernière section de la séquence de télescopage.
Une courbe de 0-0-45-90-90 % s’applique ainsi uniquement au télescopage de 0-0-0-90-90 % à 0-0-45-90-90 % et au retour dans la position
initiale, et non de 0-0-0-0-0 % à 0-0-45-90-90 % !
– Les charges télescopiques sont fonction de la capacité de télescopage de la flèche. Les charges à télescoper ne doivent jamais dépasser les charges
indiquées sur le graphique de charge, un basculement de la grue risquant alors de se produire.
– La séquence de télescopage individuelle la plus avantageuse est indiquée. Les autres séquences de télescopage pour une longueur de flèche identique
disposent de capacités de charge télescopables moins élevées. Ces dernières figurent dans la documentation relative à l’appareil.
I carichi indicati in tabella si riferiscono alle seguenti condizioni:

– Area di sfilo correttamente lubrificata.
– Temperatura ambiente compresa nell’intervallo normale (con temperature inferiori a 0 °C occorre considerare una notevole riduzione delle capacità).
– Lo sbraccio indicato in tabella si riferisce alla lunghezza finale della rispettiva sequenza di sfilo.
– Le portate si applicano sia per lo sfilo che per il rientro delle sezioni.
– Le portate indicate si riferiscono solo al movimento dell’ultima sezione della sequenza di sfilo. La curva per, ad esempio, 0-0-45-90-90 % si applica
solo per lo sfilo da 0-0-0-90-90 % a 0-0-45-90-90 % e per il corrispondente rientro, ma non per lo sfilo da 0-0-0-0-0 % a 0-0-45-90-90 %!
– I carichi sollevabili con il braccio telescopico sono basati sulla capacità di sfilo del braccio. I carichi sollevabili col braccio sfilato non devono superare
i valori riportati nella tabella dei carichi, per evitare il rischio di ribaltamento della gru.
– La figura mostra la configurazione più vantaggiosa. L’utilizzo di altre sequenze di sfilo con la stessa lunghezza del braccio determina portate inferiori,
rilevabili dalla documentazione in dotazione con la macchina.
Las cargas con telescopaje referidas en la tabla son aplicables bajo las condiciones siguientes:
– Las superficies de deslizamiento de los dispositivos telescópicos han de econtrarse bien lubricadas.
– La temperatura ambiente estará dentro del margen „normal“ (por debajo de 0 ºC ha de contarse con considerables reducciones en las capacidades
de carga).
– El radio indicado en la tabla se aplica a la longitud extendida total de la respectiva secuencia de telescopaje.
– Las capacidades de carga se aplican al despliegue y a la retracción de la flecha telescópica.
– Las capacidades de carga telescópica se aplican únicamente al movimiento del último segmento de la secuencia de telescopaje. Por ejemplo, la curva
para 0-0-45-90-90 % se aplica únicamente al telescopaje desde 0-0-0-90-90 % hasta 0-0-45-90-90 % y viceversa, ¡pero no desde 0-0-0-0-0 %
hasta 0-0-45-90-90 %!
– Las cargas telescópicas están basadas en la capacidad de telescopaje de la flecha. Las cargas que se desee telescopar no deberán exceder nunca
las indicadas en la tabla de cargas, ya que la grúa podría volcar.
– La secuencia de telescopaje que aparece representada es la más ventajosa para cada caso. Otras secuencias de telescopaje con la misma longitud
de flecha darán como resultado menores capacidades de carga telescópica. Dichos valores han de consultarse en la documentación de la máquina.
40 ac200-1
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
DISCLAIMER · HAFTUNGSAUSSCHLUSS ·
AVIS DE NON RESPONSABILITÉ · ESCLUSIONE DELLA RESPONSABILITÀ ·
EXCLUSIÓN DE RESPONSABILIDAD
Effective Date: august 2009.

Product specifications and prices are subject to change without notice or obligation. The photographs and/or drawings in this document are for
illustrative purposes only. Refer to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for instructions on the proper use of this equipment. Failure to follow the
appropriate Operator’s Manual when using our equipment or to otherwise act irresponsibly may result in serious injury or death. The only warranty
applicable to our equipment is the standard written warranty applicable to the particular product and sale and Terex makes no other warranty,
express or implied. Products and services listed may be trademarks, service marks or trade-names of Terex Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in
the USA and other countries and all rights are reserved. „TEREX“ is a registered trademark of Terex Corporation in the USA and many other
countries.
Copyright © 2009 Terex Corporation.
Gültig ab: August 2009.

Produktbeschreibungen und Preise können jederzeit und ohne Verpflichtung zur Ankündigung geändert werden. Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen
Fotos und/oder Zeichnungen dienen rein anschaulichen Zwecken. Anweisungen zur ordnungsgemäßen Verwendung dieser Ausrüstung entnehmen
Sie bitte dem zugehörigen Betriebshandbuch. Nichtbefolgung des Betriebshandbuchs bei der Verwendung unserer Produkte oder anderweitig fahr-
lässiges Verhalten kann zu schwerwiegenden Verletzungen oder Tod führen. Für dieses Produkt wird ausschließlich die entsprechende,
schriftlich niedergelegte Standardgarantie gewährt. Terex leistet keinerlei darüber hinaus gehende Garantie, weder ausdrücklich noch stillschwei-
gend. Die Bezeichnungen der aufgeführten Produkte und Leistungen sind gegebenenfalls Marken, Servicemarken oder Handelsnamen der Terex
Corporation und/oder ihrer Tochtergesellschaften in den USA und anderen Ländern. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. „TEREX“ ist eine eingetragene Marke
der Terex Corporation in den USA und vielen anderen Ländern.
Date d’effet : le août 2009.

Les spécifications et prix des pro-duits sont sujets à modification sans avis ou obligation. Les photographies et/ou dessins contenus dans ce
documents sont uniquement pour illustration. Veuillez vous référer à la notice d’utilisation appropriée pour les instructions quant à l’utilisation
correcte de cet équipement. Tout manquement au suivi de la notice d’utilisation appropriée lors de l’utilisation de notre équipement ou tout acte
autrement irresponsable peut résulter en blessure corporelle sérieuse ou mortelle. La seule garantie applicable à notre équipement est la garantie
standard écrite applicable à un produit et à une vente spécifique. Terex n’offre aucune autre garantie, expresse ou explicite. Les produis et services
proposés peuvent être des marques de fabrique, des marques de service ou des appellations commerciales de Terex Corporation et/ou ses filiales
aux Etats Unis et dans les autres pays, et tous les droits sont réservés. «TEREX» est une marque déposée de Terex Corporation aux Etats Unis et
dans de nombreux autres pays.
Data di inizio validità: agosto 2009.

Ci riserviamo il diritto di modificare le specifiche e i prezzi dei prodotti in ogni momento e senza preavviso. Le fotografie e/o i disegni contenuti
in questo documento sono destinati unicamente a scopi illustrativi. Consultare le istruzioni sull’uso corretto di questo macchinario, contenute
nell’opportuno Manuale dell’operatore. L’inottemperanza delle istruzioni contenute nel Manuale dell’operatore del macchinario e altri comportamenti
irresponsabili possono provocare gravi lesioni, anche mortali. L’unica garanzia applicabile ai nostri macchinari è la garanzia scritta standard
applicabile al particolare prodotto e alla particolare vendita; Terex è esonerata dal fornire qualsiasi altra garanzia, esplicita o implicita. I prodotti
e servizi elencati possono essere dei marchi di fabbrica, marchi di servizio o nomi commerciali di Terex Corporation e/o società affiliate negli Stati
Uniti d’America e altre nazioni e tutti i diritti sono riservati. „TEREX“ è un marchio registrato di Terex Corporation negli USA e molti altri paesi.
Fecha efectiva: agosto 2009.

Los precios y las especificaciones de productos pueden sufrir cambios sin aviso previo u obligación. Las fotografías o dibujos de este documento
tienen un fin meramente ilustrativo. Consulte el manual de instrucciones del operador correspondiente para más información sobre el uso correcto
de este equipo. El hecho de no respetar el manual del operador correspondiente al utilizar el equipo o actuar de forma irresponsable puede suponer
lesiones graves o fatales. La única garantía aplicable a nuestro equipo es la garantía escrita estándar correspondiente a cada producto y venta,
y TEREX no amplía dicha garantía de forma expresa o implícita. Los productos y servicios mencionados pueden ser marcas registradas, marcas de
servicio o nombres de marca de Terex Corporation o de sus filiales en Estados Unidos de América y otros países, y se reservan todos los derechos.
„TEREX“ es una marca comercial registrada de Terex Corporation en Estados Unidos de América y muchos otros países.
ac200-1 41
ac200-1
ALL TERRAIN CRANE
Registered office / Lieferanschrift / Siège social / Sede sociale / Sede social:

Terex Demag GmbH Phone: + 49 6332 83-0
Dinglerstraße 24 Fax: + 49 6332 16715
D-66482 Zweibrücken www.terex-demag.com Order Nr. AC 200-1 F1 – 201 083 12
Copyright 2010 TEREX ®
WN Tabelle BMK-Kennzeichnung (aktuell).xls BMK 13.01.2005
Funktionskennzeichnung 10:00
BMK-Nr. Funktion Function

0000 Allgemeines, Klemmleiste 0 general, terminal block 0
0010 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Steuerung general, wiring assembly for control system
0020 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Lastmomentbegrenzung general, wiring assembly for load moment limiter
0030 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Flugsicherungsbeleuchtung general, wiring assembly for air traffic warning light
1/304


0040 Allgemeines, Schleifringkörper OW-seitig general, slip ring superstructure side
0041 Allgemeines, Schleifringkörper UW-seitig general, slip ring carrier side
0042
0043
0044
0045 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Zusatzbeleuchtung STVZO general, wiring assembly for additional lighting STVZO
0046 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Zusatzbeleuchtung STVZO general, wiring assembly for additional lighting STVZO
0047
0048
0049
0050 Allgemeines, Kabelbäume OW general, wiring assembly for superstructure
0051 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum OW general, wiring assembly for superstructure
0052 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Vorsteuerung OW general, wiring assembly for pilot control superstructure
0053 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum OW general, wiring assembly for superstructure
0054 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Motor OW general, wiring assembly for motor superstructure
0055 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum rechts OW general, wiring assembly for right side superstructure
0056 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Ausleger general, wiring assembly for boom
0057 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum SVE general, wiring assembly for SVE
0058 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Druckaufnehmer general, wiring assembly for pressure transducer
0059 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Gegengewicht OW general, wiring assembly for counterweight superstructure
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
2/304


0066
0067
0068
0069
0070 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum ABS UW
0071 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Stützen UW
0072 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum links vorne UW
0073 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum links hinten UW
0074 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Motor UW
0075 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Getriebe UW
0076 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Schleifringkörper UW
0077 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Federung UW
0078 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum rechts hinten UW
0079 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum rechts vorne UW
0080 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Front UW
0081 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Lenkung UW
0082 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Kabinenelektrik UW
0083 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Unterfahrschutz rechts vorne UW
0084 Allgemeines, Kabelbaum Unterfahrschutz links vorne UW
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Notsteuerung general, wiring assembly for emergency control system
0092 Allgemeines, Kabel kpl., Kabelbaum Notsteuerung general, wiring assembly for emergency control system
0093
0094
0095
0096
0097
0098
3/304


0099
0100 Spannungsversorgung, allgemein power supply, general
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
0110 Spannungsversorgung UW, allgemein power supply carrier, general
0111 Spannungsversorgung UW, hauptbatterien ( 2x12VDC) power supply carrier, main batteries ( 2x12VDC)
0112
0113 Spannungsversorgung UW, Generator (Lichtmaschine) power supply carrier, generator (alternator)
0114
0115 Spannungsversorgung UW, Batterieladegerät power supply carrier, battery charger
0116 Spannungsversorgung UW, Umspanner 220VAC / 24VDC power supply carrier, voltage reducer 220VAC / 24VDC
0117 Spannungsversorgung UW, Umspanner 24DAC / 12VDC power supply carrier, voltage reducer 24DAC / 12VDC
0118
0119
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0128
0129
0130
0131
4/304


0132
0133
0134
0135
0136
0137
0138
0139
0140
0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147
0148
0149
0150 Spannungsversorgung OW, allgemein power supply superstructure, general
0151 Spannungsversorgung OW, Hauptbatterien ( 2x12VDC) power supply superstructure, main batteries ( 2x12VDC)
0152 Spannungsversorgung OW, Batterieladegerät power supply superstructure, battery charger
0153 Spannungsversorgung OW, Umspanner 220VAC / 24VDC power supply superstructure, voltage reducer 220VAC / 24VDC
0154 Spannungsversorgung OW, Umspanner 24DAC / 12VDC power supply superstructure, voltage reducer 24DAC / 12VDC
0155
0156
0157
0158
0159
0160 Spannungsversorgung OW Motor 1, Generator (Lichtmaschine) power supply superstructure motor 1, generator (alternator)
0161
0162
0163
0164
5/304


0165
0166
0167
0168
0169
0170 Spannungsversorgung OW Motor 2, Generator (Lichtmaschine) power supply superstructure motor 2, generator (alternator)
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0178
0179
0180
0181
0182
0183
0184
0185
0186
0187
0188
0189
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
0195
0196
0197
6/304


0198
0199
0200 Sicherung UW, allgemein fuse carrier, general
0201 Hauptsicherung UW, Nr. 1 main fuse carrier, Nr. 1
0202 Hauptsicherung UW, Nr. 2 main fuse carrier, Nr. 2
0203 Sicherungskarte UW, Nr. 1 fuse board carrier, Nr. 1
0210
0211 Sicherung UW, Nr. 1 fuse carrier, Nr. 1
7/304


8/304


9/304


0299
0300 Sicherung OW, allgemein fuse superstructure, general
0301 Hauptsicherung OW, Nr. 1 main fuse superstructure, Nr. 1
0302 Hauptsicherung OW, Nr. 2 main fuse superstructure, Nr. 2
0303 Sicherungskarte OW, Nr. 1 fuse board superstructure, Nr. 1
0310
0311 Sicherung OW, Nr 1 fuse superstructure, Nr 1
10/304


11/304


12/304


0400 Überwachungsorgane, allgemein monitoring devices, general
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0407
0408
0409
0410 Überwachungsorgane UW, allgemein monitoring devices carrier, general
0411 Batterieladekontrolle UW alternator monitoring light carrier
0412
0413
0414
0415
0416
0417
0418
0419
0420 Kraftstoffmenge UW, Tank 1 fuel level carrier, tank 1
0421 Kraftstoffmenge UW, Tank 2 (OPTION Frankreich) fuel level carrier, tank 2 (OPTION France)
0422
0423
0424
0425
0426
0427
0428
13/304


0429
0430
0431
0432
0433
0434
0435
0436
0437
0438
0439
0440
0441
0442
0443
0444
0445
0446
0447
0448
0449
0450 Überwachungsorgane OW, allgemein monitoring devices superstructure, general
0451 Batterieladekontrolle OW, (Motor 1) alternator monitoring light superstructure, (motor 1)
0452
0453
0454
0455
0456
0457
0458
0459
0460 Kraftstoffmenge OW, Tank 1 fuel level superstructure, tank 1
0461
14/304


0462
0463
0464
0465
0466
0467
0468
0469
0470
0471 Batterieladekontrolle OW, Motor 2 alternator monitoring light superstructure, motor 2
0472
0473
0474
0475
0476
0477
0478
0479
0480 Kraftstoffmenge OW, Tank 2 (OPTION) fuel level superstructure, tank 2 (OPTION)
0481
0482
0483
0484
0485
0486
0487
0488
0489
0490
0491
0492
0493
0494
15/304


0495
0496
0497
0498
0499
0500 Schaltorgane / Baugruppenträger UW, allgemein switching components / frame/support for assemblies carrier, general
0501 Hauptrelais UW, Nr. 1 main relay carrier, Nr. 1
0502 Hauptrelais UW, Nr. 2 main relay carrier, Nr. 2
0503 Hauptrelais UW, 12VDC, Nr.1 main relay carrier, 12VDC, Nr.1
0504 Hauptrelais UW, 12VDC, Nr.2 main relay carrier, 12VDC, Nr.2
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
0510 Relais / Relaiskarte UW, allgemein relay / relay board carrier, general
0511 Relais / Relaiskarte UW, Nr. 1 relay / relay board carrier, Nr. 1
16/304


0530 Diode / Diodenkarte UW, allgemein diode / diode board carrier, general
0531 Diode / Diodenkarte UW, Nr. 1 diode / diode board carrier, Nr. 1
0540 Widerstand / Widerstandskarte UW, allgemein resistor/ resistor board carrier, general
0541 Widerstand / Widerstandskarte UW, Nr. 1 resistor/ resistor board carrier, Nr. 1
0544 Widerstand / Widerstandskarte UW, Nr.4 resistor/ resistor board carrier, Nr.4
0550 Schaltorgane / Baugruppenträger OW, allgemein switching components / frame/support for assemblies superstructure, general
0551 Hauptrelais OW, Nr. 1 main relay superstructure, Nr. 1
0552 Hauptrelais OW, Nr. 2 main relay superstructure, Nr. 2
0553 Hauptrelais OW, 12VDC, Nr.1 main relay superstructure, 12VDC, Nr.1
0554 Hauptrelais OW, 12VDC, Nr.2 main relay superstructure, 12VDC, Nr.2
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
0560 Relais / Relaiskarte OW, allgemein relay / relay board superstructure, general
17/304


0561 Relais / Relaiskarte OW, Nr. 1 relay / relay board superstructure, Nr. 1
0579
0580 Diode / Diodenkarte OW, allgemein diode / diode board superstructure, general
0581 Diode / Diodenkarte OW, Nr. 1 diode / diode board superstructure, Nr. 1
0590 Widerstand / Widerstandskarte OW, allgemein resistor/ resistor board superstructure, general
0591 Widerstand / Widerstandskarte OW, Nr. 1 resistor/ resistor board superstructure, Nr. 1
18/304


0594 Widerstand / Widerstandskarte OW, Nr.4 resistor/ resistor board superstructure, Nr.4
0600 SPS Karte UW, allgemein SPS board carrier, general
0601 SPS Karte UW, Nr. 1 SPS board carrier, Nr. 1
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
0620 I/O Modul UW, allgemein I/O module carrier, general
0621 I/O Modul UW, Nr. 1 I/O module carrier, Nr. 1
19/304


0650
0651 SPS-Spannungsmodul UW SPS-power module carrier
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
20/304


0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
0666
0667
0668
0669
0670
0671
0672
0673
0674
0675
0676
0677
0678
0679
0680
0681
0682
0683
0684
0685
0686
0687
0688
0689
0690
0691
0692
21/304


0693
0694
0695
0696
0697
0698
0699
0700 SPS Karte OW, allgemein SPS board superstructure, general
0701 SPS Karte OW, Nr. 1 SPS board superstructure, Nr. 1
0720 I/O Modul OW, allgemein I/O module superstructure, general
0721 I/O Modul OW, Nr. 1 I/O module superstructure, Nr. 1
22/304


0750
0751 SPS-Spannungsmodul OW SPS-power module superstructure
0752
0753
0754
0755
0756
0757
0758
23/304


0759
0760
0761
0762
0763
0764
0765
0766
0767
0768
0769
0770
0771
0772
0773
0774
0775
0776
0777
0778
0779
0780
0781 SPS-Programmierschnittstelle OW, Nr. 1 SPS-programminterface superstructure, No 1
0784
0785
0786
0787
0788
0789
0790
0791 SPS-Diagnose OW, Nr. 1 SPS-diagnosisinterface superstructure, No 1
24/304


0794
0795
0796
0797
0798
0799
0800 CAN-Komponenten allgemein CAN-components general
0801 CAN-Abschlusswiderstand 1 CAN-termination-resistance 1
0810 CAN-Komponenten UW, allgemein CAN-components carrier, general
0811 CAN Sternpunkt IES UW CAN star point IES carrier
0812 CAN-Sternpunkt CANopen UW CAN-star point CANopen carrier
0813 CAN-Sternpunkt SAE J1939 UW CAN-star point SAE J1939 carrier
0814 CAN Gateway IES-CAN/CANopen UW CAN gateway IES-CAN/CANopen carrier
0815 CAN-Gateway SAE-CAN/CANopen UW CAN-gateway SAE-CAN/CANopen carrier
0816 CAN Diagnose IES UW CAN diagnosis IES carrier
0817 CAN Diagnose SAE J1939 UW CAN diagnosis SAE J1939 carrier
0818 CAN Diagnose CANopen UW CAN diagnosis CANopen carrier
0819 CAN Diagnose Modem UW CAN diagnosis modem carrier
0820 CAN Bus T-Verteiler 1 CAN splitter 1
0821 CAN Bus T-Verteiler 1 Stecker 1 Can splitter 1 connector 1
0823 CAN-Bus T-Verteiler 1 Stecker 3 Can splitter 1 connector 2
25/304


0848 CAN-Bus Stecker 18 CAN-Bus connector 18
0849 CAN-Bus Stecker 19 CAN-Bus connector 19
0850 CAN-Komponenten OW Motor 1, allgemein CAN-components superstructure motor 1, general
0851 CAN- Sternpunkt IES OW Motor 1 CAN-star point IES superstructure motor 1
0852 CAN- Sternpunkt CANopen OW Motor 1 CAN-star point CANopen superstructure motor 1
0853 CAN- Sternpunkt SAE J1939 OW Motor 1 CAN-star point SAE J1939 superstructure motor 1
0854 CAN- Gateway IES-CAN/CANopen OW Motor 1 CAN-gateway IES-CAN/CANopen superstructure motor 1
0855 CAN- Gateway SAE-CAN/CANopen OW Motor 1 CAN-gateway SAE-CAN/CANopen superstructure motor 1
0856 CAN- Diagnose IES OW Motor 1 CAN-diagnosis IES superstructure motor 1
0857 CAN- Diagnose SAE J1939 OW Motor 1 CAN-diagnosis SAE J1939 superstructure motor 1
26/304


0858 CAN- Diagnose CAN-open OW Motor 1 CAN-diagnosis CAN-open superstructure motor 1
0859 CAN- Diagnose Modem OW Motor 1 CAN-diagnosis modem superstructure motor 1
0860
0861
0862
0863
0864
0865
0866
0867
0868
0869
0870 CAN-KomponentenOW Motor 2, allgemein CAN-components superstructure motor 2, general
0871 CAN- Sternpunkt IES OW Motor 2 CAN-star point IES superstructure motor 2
0872 CAN- Sternpunkt CANopen OW Motor 2 CAN-star point CANopen superstructure motor 2
0873 CAN- Sternpunkt SAE J1939 OW Motor 2 CAN-star point SAE J1939 superstructure motor 2
0874 CAN- Gateway IES-CAN/CANopen OW Motor 2 CAN-gateway IES-CAN/CANopen superstructure motor 2
0875 CAN- Gateway SAE-CAN/CANopen OW Motor 2 CAN-gateway SAE-CAN/CANopen superstructure motor 2
0876 CAN- Diagnose IES OW Motor 2 CAN-diagnosis IES superstructure motor 2
0877 CAN- Diagnose SAE J1939 OW Motor 2 CAN-diagnosis SAE J1939 superstructure motor 2
0878 CAN- Diagnose CAN-open OW Motor 2 CAN-diagnosis CAN-open superstructure motor 2
0879 CAN- Diagnose Modem OW Motor 2 CAN-diagnosis modem superstructure motor 2
0880 CAN-Komponenten OW Kabine, allgemein CAN-components superstructure cabin, general
0881 CAN- Diagnose CANopen OW Kabine, Nr 1 CAN-diagnosis CANopen superstructure cabin, Nr 1
0885 CAN-Komponenten OW, allgemein CAN-components superstructure, general
0886 CAN- Diagnose CANopen OW, Nr 1 CAN-diagnosis CANopen superstructure, Nr 1
0890 CAN-Komponenten, SLGW, allgemein CAN-components, CWC, general
27/304


0891 CAN- Diagnose CANopen SLGW, Nr 1 CAN-diagnosis CANopen CWC, Nr 1
0895
0896
0897
0898
0899
0900 Sonderbaugruppen allgemein special subassemblies general
0901
0902
0903
0904
0905
0906
0907
0908
0909
0910 Sonderbaugruppen UW allgemein special subassemblies carrier general
0911 Zentralschließanlage UW central pin locking device carrier
0912
0913 Sonderbaugruppen UW, Zentralschmieranlage special subassemblies carrier, central lubricating unit
0914 Sonderbaugruppen UW, Zentralschmieranlage links vorne special subassemblies carrier, central lubricating unit left side front
0915 Sonderbaugruppen UW, Zentralschmieranlage links hinten special subassemblies carrier, central lubricating unit left side rear
0916 Sonderbaugruppen UW, Zentralschmieranlage rechts vorne special subassemblies carrier, central lubricating unit right side front
0917 Sonderbaugruppen UW, Zentralschmieranlage rechts hinten special subassemblies carrier, central lubricating unit right side rear
0918
0919
0920 OW-UW-Verriegelung UW, allgemein superstructure to carrier pin locking in carrier, general
0921 OW-UW-Verriegelung UW, verriegel superstructure to carrier pin locking, in carrier, locked
0922 OW-UW-Verriegelung UW, entriegelt superstructure to carrier pin locking, in carrier, locking off
0923
28/304


0924
0925
0926
0927
0928
0929
0930 Anhänger UW, allgemein trailer carrier, general
0931 Anhängerstecker UW trailer plug carrier
0932
0933
0934
0935
0936
0937
0938
0939
0940
0941
0942
0943
0944
0945
0946
0947
0948
0949
0950 Sonderbaugruppen OW allgemein special subassemblies superstructure general
0951 Zentralschließanlage OW central pin locking device superstructure
0952
0953 Zentralschmieranlage OW central lubricating unit superstructure
0954
0955
0956
29/304


0957
0958
0959
0960 OW-UW-Verriegelung OW, allgemein superstructure to carrier pin locking, in superstructure, general
0961 OW-UW-Verriegelung OW, entriegelt superstructure to carrier pin locking, in superstructure, locking open
0962 OW-UW-Verriegelung OW, verriegelt superstructure to carrier pin locking, in superstructure, locked
0963 OW-UW-Verriegelung OW, Hydraulikumlauf gesperrt superstructure to carrier pin locking, in superstructure, hydraulic circuit locked
0964
0965
0966
0967
0968
0969
0970 Drehwerk, Schwimmstellung OW slewing gear, floating status of superstructure
0971 Drehwerk, Blockierung OW slewing gear, pin locking of superstructure
0972
0973
0974
0975
0976
0977
0978
0979
0980
0981
0982
0983
0984
0985
0986
0987
0988
0989
30/304


0990
0991
0992
0993
0994
0995
0996
0997
0998
0999
1000 Motor allgemein motor general
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
31/304


1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
32/304


1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
33/304


1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100 Motorsteuerung allgemein motor control general
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110 Motorsteuerung UW, allgemein motor control carrier, general
1111 Starter UW starter carrier
1112 Flammglühanlage UW flame glow assy. carrier
1113 MR (PLD alt) UW MR (PLD old) carrier
1114 FR (FMR alt) UW FR (FMR old) carrier
1115 ADM UW ADM carrier
1116 PSW UW PSW carrier
1117 Gateway Motorsteuerung UW gateway motor control carrier
1118 Diagnosestecker Motorsteuerung UW diagnosis plug motor control carrier
1119 Kraftstoffzufuhr UW fuel supply carrier
1120 Grenzlastregelung (MC7C) UW power limiting control (MC7C) carrier
1121 Diagnosestecker Grenzlastregelung UW diagnosis plug power limiting control carrier
34/304


1122
1123
1124
1125 Zusatzheizung Kühlkreislauf Motor, UW aqux. heating system cooling water circuit dieselengine, carrier
1126 Pumpe, Zusatzheizung Kühlkreislauf Motor, UW pump, aqux. heating system cooling water circuit dieselengine, carrier
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150 Motorsteuerung OW Motor 1, allgemein motor control superstructure motor 1, general
1151 Starter OW Motor 1 starter superstructure motor 1
1152 Flammglühanlage OW Motor 1 flame glow device superstructure motor 1
1153 MR (PLD alt) OW Motor 1 MR (PLD old) superstructure motor 1
1154 FR (FMR alt) OW Motor 1 FR (FMR old) superstructure motor 1
35/304


1155 ADM OW Motor 1 ADM superstructure motor 1
1156 PSW OW Motor 1 PSW superstructure motor 1
1157 Gateway Motorsteuerung OW Motor 1 gateway motor control superstructure motor 1
1158 Diagnosestecker Motorsteuerung OW Motor 1 diagnosis plug motor control superstructure motor 1
1159 Kraftstoffzufuhr OW Motor 1 fuel supply superstructure motor 1
1160 Grenzlastregelung (MC7C) OW Motor 1 power limiting control (MC7C) superstructure motor 1
1161 Diagnosestecker Grenzlastregelung OW Motor 1 diagnosis plug power limiting control superstructure motor 1
1162
1163
1164
1165 Zusatzheizung Kühlkreislauf Motor 1, OW aqux. heating system cooling water circuit dieselengine 1, superstructure
1166 Pumpe, Zusatzheizung Kühlkreislauf Motor 1, OW pump, aqux. heating system cooling water circuit dieselengine 1, superstructure
1167
1168
1169
1170 Motorsteuerung OW Motor 2, allgemein motor control superstructure motor 2, general
1171 Starter OW Motor 2 starter superstructure motor 2
1172 Flammglühanlage OW Motor 2 flame glow device superstructure motor 2
1173 MR (PLD alt) OW Motor 2 MR (PLD old) superstructure motor 2
1174 FR (FMR alt) OW Motor 2 FR (FMR old) superstructure motor 2
1175 ADM OW Motor 2 ADM superstructure motor 2
1176 PSW OW Motor 2 PSW superstructure motor 2
1177 Gateway Motorsteuerung OW Motor 2 gateway motor control superstructure motor 2
1178 Diagnosestecker Motorsteuerung OW Motor 2 diagnosis plug motor control superstructure motor 2
1179 Kraftstoffzufuhr OW Motor 2 fuel supply superstructure motor 2
1180 Grenzlastregelung (MC7C) OW Motor 2 power limiting control (MC7C) superstructure motor 2
1181 Diagnosestecker Grenzlastregelung OW Motor 2 diagnosis plug power limiting control superstructure motor 2
1182
1183
1184
1185 Pumpe, Zusatzheizung Kühlkreislauf Motor 2, OW pump, aqux. heating system cooling water circuit dieselengine 2, superstructure
1186
1187
36/304


1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200 Motor START/STOP/ Drehzahlverstellung allgemein motor START/STOP/ rev adjustment/throttle general
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210 Motor START/STOP/Drehzahlverstellung UW-Motor, allgemein motor START/STOP/rev adjustment/throttle carrier-motor, general
1211 Fußfahrgeber UW-Motor throttle pedal carrier-motor
1212 Drehzahlerhöhung UW-Motor rev increasing carrier-motor
1213 Drehzahlerhöhung min. UW-Motor rev increasing min. carrier-motor
1214 Drehzahlerhöhung max. UW-Motor rev increasing max. carrier-motor
1215 Handgas UW-Motor hand throttle carrier-motor
1216 Tempomat UW-Motor tempomat carrier-motor
1217 Motor-Start UW-Motor motor-start carrier-motor
1218 Kaltstart UW-Motor cold start carrier-motor
1219 Motor-Stop UW-Motor motor-stop carrier-motor
1220 Schnell-Stop UW-Motor, allgemein quick-stop carrier-motor, general
37/304


1221 Schnell-Stop UW-Motor, rechts quick-stop carrier-motor, right side
1222 Schnell-Stop UW-Motor, links quick-stop carrier-motor, left side
1223 Fremdstart UW-Motor foreign start carrier-motor
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230 Drehzahlbegrenzung UW-Motor, allgemein speed limit carrier-motor, general
1231 Drehzahlbegrenzung UW-Motor, min. speed limit carrier-motor, min.
1232 Drehzahlbegrenzung UW-Motor, max. speed limit carrier-motor, max.
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250 Motor START / STOP / Drehzahlverstellung OW-Motor, allgemein motor START / STOP / rev adjustment / throttle superstructure motor, general
1251 Fußfahrgeber OW-Motor throttle pedal superstructure motor
1252 Drehzahlerhöhung OW-Motor rev increasing superstructure motor
1253 Drehzahlerhöhung min. OW-Motor rev increasing min. superstructure motor
38/304


1254 Drehzahlerhöhung max. OW-Motor rev increasing max. superstructure motor
1255 Handgas OW-Motor hand throttle superstructure motor
1256 Tempomat OW-Motor tempomat superstructure motor
1257 Motor-Start OW-Motor motor-start superstructure motor
1258 Kaltstart OW-Motor cold start superstructure motor
1259 Motor-Stop OW-Motor motor-stop superstructure motor
1260 Schnell-Stop OW-Motor, allgemein quick-stop superstructure motor, general
1261 Schnell-Stop OW-Motor, Zusatzabschaltung 1 quick-stop superstructure motor, auxiliary cut-off devices 1
1262 Schnell-Stop OW-Motor, Zusatzabschaltung 2 quick-stop superstructure motor, auxiliary cut-off devices 2
1263 Fremdstart OW-Motor foreign start superstructure motor
1264
1265 Fußfahrgeber, Umschaltung Betrieb Automotiv - Manuell, OW-Motor throttle pedal, selection automotive-manuell, superstructure motor
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270 Motor 1 START / STOP / Drehzahlverstellung OW-Motor 1, allgemein motor 1 START/STOP/rev adjustment / throttle superstructure motor 1, general
1271 Fußfahrgeber OW-Motor 1 throttle pedal superstructure motor 1
1272 Drehzahlerhöhung OW-Motor 1 rev increasing superstructure motor 1
1273 Drehzahlerhöhung min. OW-Motor 1 rev increasing min. superstructure motor 1
1274 Drehzahlerhöhung max. OW-Motor 1 rev increasing max. superstructure motor 1
1275 Handgas OW-Motor 1 hand throttle superstructure motor 1
1276 Tempomat OW-Motor 1 tempomat superstructure motor 1
1277 Motor 1-Start OW-Motor 1 motor 1-Start superstructure motor 1
1278 Kaltstart OW-Motor 1 cold start superstructure motor 1
1279 Motor 1-Stop OW-Motor 1 motor 1-Stop superstructure motor 1
1280 Schnell-Stop OW-Motor 1, allgemein Quick-stop motor 1 in superstructure, general
1281 Fußfahrgeber OW-Motor 2 throttle pedal superstructure motor 2
1282 Drehzahlerhöhung OW-Motor 2 rev increasing superstructure motor 2
1283 Drehzahlerhöhung min. OW-Motor 2 rev increasing min. superstructure motor 2
1284 Drehzahlerhöhung max. OW-Motor 2 rev increasing max. superstructure motor 2
1285 Handgas OW-Motor 2 hand throttle superstructure motor 2
1286 Tempomat OW-Motor 2 tempomat superstructure motor 2
39/304


1287 Motor 2-Start OW-Motor 2 motor 2-Start superstructure motor 2
1288 Kaltstart OW-Motor 2 cold start superstructure motor 2
1289 Motor 2-Stop OW-Motor 2 motor 2-Stop superstructure motor 2
1290 Schnell-Stop OW-Motor 2, allgemein Quick-stop motor 2 in superstructure, general
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300 Kontrollorgane Motor allgemein monitoring units motor general
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310 Kontrollorgane UW-Motor, allgemein monitoring units carrier-motor, general
1311 Kühlwassertemperatur UW-Motor, allgemein coolant temperature carrier-motor, general
1312 Kühlwassertemperatur UW-Motor, min. coolant temperature carrier-motor, min.
1313 Kühlwassertemperatur UW-Motor, max. coolant temperature carrier-motor, max.
1314
1315 Kühlwasserniveau UW-Motor, allgemein coolant level carrier-motor, general
1316 Kühlwasserniveau UW-Motor, min. coolant level carrier-motor, min.
1317 Kühlwasserniveau UW-Motor, max. coolant level carrier-motor, max.
1318
1319 Motoröltemperatur UW-Motor, allgemein motor oil temperature carrier-motor, general
40/304


1320 Motoröltemperatur UW-Motor, min. motor oil temperature carrier-motor, min.
1321 Motoröltemperatur UW-Motor, max motor oil temperature carrier-motor, max
1322
1323 Motorölniveau UW-Motor, allgemein motor oil level carrier-motor, general
1324 Motorölniveau UW-Motor, min. motor oil level carrier-motor, min.
1325 Motorölniveau UW-Motor, max. motor oil level carrier-motor, max.
1326
1327 Motoröldruck UW-Motor, allgemein motor oil pressure carrier-motor, general
1328 Motoröldruck UW-Motor, min. motor oil pressure carrier-motor, min.
1329 Motoröldruck UW-Motor, max motor oil pressure carrier-motor, max
1330 Motoröldruck UW-Motor, Wartung motor oil pressure carrier-motor, service
1331
1332 Luftfilter UW-Motor, verstopft air cleaner carrier-motor, contaminated
1333 Ladelufttemperatur UW-Motor charge temperature carrier-motor
1334
1335 ADM-Störung UW-Motor, Anzeige ADM-malfunction carrier-motor, display
1336 ADM-Störung UW-Motor, Warnsummer ADM-malfunction carrier-motor, buzzer
1337 Warnleuchte UW-Motor, Motor ausschalteren pilot light carrier-motor, stop motor
1338 Warnleuchte UW-Motor, Wasser im Kraftstoff pilot light carrier-motor, water in fuel
1339 Diagnose UW-Motor diagnosis carrier-motor
1340 Drehzahl UW-Motor speed of carrier-motor
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350 Kontrollorgane OW-Motor, allgemein monitoring units superstructure motor, general
1351 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor, allgemein coolant temperature superstructure motor, general
1352 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor, min. coolant temperature superstructure motor, min.
41/304


1353 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor, max. coolant temperature superstructure motor, max.
1354
1355 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor, allgemein coolant level superstructure motor, general
1356 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor, min. coolant level superstructure motor, min.
1357 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor, max. coolant level superstructure motor, max.
1358
1359 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor, allgemein motor oil temperature superstructure motor, general
1360 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor, min. motor oil temperature superstructure motor, min.
1361 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor, max motor oil temperature superstructure motor, max
1362
1363 Motorölniveau OW-Motor, allgemein motor oil level superstructure motor, general
1364 Motorölniveau OW-Motor, min. motor oil level superstructure motor, min.
1365 Motorölniveau OW-Motor, max. motor oil level superstructure motor, max.
1366
1367 Motoröldruck OW-Motor, allgemein motor oil pressure superstructure motor, general
1368 Motoröldruck OW-Motor, min. motor oil pressure superstructure motor, min.
1369 Motoröldruck OW-Motor, max motor oil pressure superstructure motor, max
1370 Motoröldruck OW-Motor, Wartung motor oil pressure superstructure motor, service
1371
1372 Luftfilter OW-Motor, verstopft air cleaner superstructure motor, contaminated
1373 Ladelufttemperatur OW-Motor charge temperature superstructure motor
1374
1375 ADM-Störung OW-Motor, Anzeige ADM-malfunction superstructure motor, display
1376 ADM-Störung OW-Motor, Warnsummer ADM-malfunction superstructure motor, buzzer
1377 Warnleuchte OW-Motor, Motor ausschalteren pilot light superstructure motor, motor ausschalteren
1378 Warnleuchte OW-Motor, Wasser im Kraftstoff pilot light superstructure motor, water in fuel
1379 Diagnose OW-Motor diagnosis superstructure motor
1380 Drehzahl OW-Motor speed of superstructure motor
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
42/304


1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400 Kontrollorgane 2-Motorbetrieb allgemein monitoring units operation with 2 motors general
1401 Motor1 motor 1
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410 Kontrollorgane OW-Motor 1, allgemein monitoring units superstructure motor 1, general
1411 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor 1, allgemein coolant temperature superstructure motor 1, general
1412 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor 1, min. coolant temperature superstructure motor 1, min.
1413 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor 1, max. coolant temperature superstructure motor 1, max.
1414
1415 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor 1, allgemein coolant level superstructure motor 1, general
1416 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor 1, min. coolant level superstructure motor 1, min.
1417 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor 1, max. coolant level superstructure motor 1, max.
1418
43/304


1419 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor 1, allgemein motor oil temperature superstructure motor 1, general
1420 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor 1, min. motor oil temperature superstructure motor 1, min.
1421 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor 1, max motor oil temperature superstructure motor 1, max
1422
1423 Motorölniveau OW-Motor 1, allgemein motor oil level superstructure motor 1, general
1424 Motorölniveau OW-Motor 1, min. motor oil level superstructure motor 1, min.
1425 Motorölniveau OW-Motor 1, max. motor oil level superstructure motor 1, max.
1426
1427 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 1, allgemein motor oil pressure superstructure motor 1, general
1428 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 1, min. motor oil pressure superstructure motor 1, min.
1429 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 1, max motor oil pressure superstructure motor 1, max
1430 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 1, Wartung motor oil pressure superstructure motor 1, service
1431
1432 Luftfilter OW-Motor 1, verstopft air cleaner superstructure motor 1, contaminated
1433 Ladelufttemperatur OW-Motor 1 charge temperature superstructure motor 1
1434
1435 ADM-Störung Motor 1, Anzeige ADM-malfunction motor 1, display
1436 ADM-Störung Motor 1, Warnsummer ADM-malfunction motor 1, buzzer
1437 Warnleuchte OW-Motor 1, Motor 1 ausschalten pilot light superstructure motor 1, stop motor 1
1438 Warnleuchte OW-Motor 1, Wasser im Kraftstoff pilot light superstructure motor 1, water in fuel
1439 Diagnose OW-Motor 1 diagnosis superstructure motor 1
1440 Drehzahl OW-Motor 1 speed of superstructure motor 1
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450 Kontrollorgane OW-Motor 2, allgemein monitoring units superstructure motor 2, general
1451 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor 2, allgemein coolant temperature superstructure motor 2, general
44/304


1452 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor 2, min. coolant temperature superstructure motor 2, min.
1453 Kühlwassertemperatur OW-Motor 2, max. coolant temperature superstructure motor 2, max.
1454
1455 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor 2, allgemein coolant level superstructure motor 2, general
1456 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor 2, min. coolant level superstructure motor 2, min.
1457 Kühlwasserniveau OW-Motor 2, max. coolant level superstructure motor 2, max.
1458
1459 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor 2, allgemein motor oil temperature superstructure motor 2, general
1460 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor 2, min. motor oil temperature superstructure motor 2, min.
1461 Motoröltemperatur OW-Motor 2, max motor oil temperature superstructure motor 2, max
1462
1463 Motorölniveau OW-Motor 2, allgemein motor oil level superstructure motor 2, general
1464 Motorölniveau OW-Motor 2, min. motor oil level superstructure motor 2, min.
1465 Motorölniveau OW-Motor 2, max. motor oil level superstructure motor 2, max.
1466
1467 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 2, allgemein motor oil pressure superstructure motor 2, general
1468 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 2, min. motor oil pressure superstructure motor 2, min.
1469 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 2, max motor oil pressure superstructure motor 2, max
1470 Motoröldruck OW-Motor 2, Wartung motor oil pressure superstructure motor 2, service
1471
1472 Luftfilter OW-Motor 2, verstopft air cleaner superstructure motor 2, contaminated
1473 Ladelufttemperatur OW-Motor 2 charge temperature superstructure motor 2
1474
1475 ADM-Störung Motor 2, Anzeige ADM-malfunction motor 2, display
1476 ADM-Störung Motor 2, Warnsummer ADM-malfunction motor 2, buzzer
1477 Warnleuchte OW-Motor 2, Motor 2 ausschalten pilot light superstructure motor 2, motor 2 ausschalten
1478 Warnleuchte OW-Motor 2, Wasser im Kraftstoff pilot light superstructure motor 2, water in fuel
1479 Diagnose OW-Motor 2 diagnosis superstructure motor 2
1480 Drehzahl OW-Motor 2 speed of superstructure motor 2
1481
1482
1483
1484
45/304


1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500 Umschaltung allgemein switching over, general
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510 OW-UW-Betrieb-Umschaltung UW superstructure-carrier operation-switching over to carrier
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
46/304


1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550 OW-UW-Betrieb-Umschaltung OW superstructure-carrier operation-switching over to superstructure
47/304


1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
48/304


1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
49/304


1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
50/304


1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
51/304


1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
52/304


1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
53/304


1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
54/304


1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
55/304


1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
56/304


1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
57/304


1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
58/304


1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
59/304


1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
60/304


1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000 Getriebe allgemein gearbox general
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
61/304


2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
62/304


2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
63/304


2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100 Getriebesteuerung allgemein gearbox control general
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110 Getriebesteuerung UW allgemein gearbox control carrier general
2111 Getriebesteuerung ECU UW gearbox control ECU carrier
64/304


2112 TPS Gasstellung UW TPS position of throttle carrier
2113 Diagnosestecker Getriebe UW diagnosis plug gearbox carrier
2114 Automatische Gangermitlung UW automatic gear selection carrier
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
65/304


2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150 Getriebesteuerung OW allgemein gearbox control superstructure general
2151 Getriebesteuerung ECU OW gearbox control ECU superstructure
2152 TPS Gasstellung OW TPS position of throttle superstructure
2153 Diagnosestecker Getriebe OW diagnosis plug gearbox superstructure
2154 Automatische Gangermitlung OW automatic gear selection superstructure
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
66/304


2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200 Betätigung Getriebe allgemein operation gearbox general
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210 Betätigung, Getriebe UW allgemein operation, gearbox carrier general
67/304


2211 Fahrschalter Getriebe UW drive switch gearbox carrier
2212 Längssperre Getriebe UW longitudinal limited slip, gearbox carrier
2213 Zuschaltung Achse Getriebe UW switch-on of axle gearbox carrier
2214 Getriebe UW, Hochschaltersperre gearbox carrier, preventing change-up gear
2215 Straßengang Getriebe UW road gears, gearbox carrier
2216 Geländegang Getriebe UW rough terrain gears, gearbox carrier
2217
2218
2219
2220 Quersperre Getriebe UW, allgemein limited slip differential gearbox carrier, general
2221 Quersperre Getriebe UW, Achse 1 limited slip differential gearbox carrier, axle 1
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240 Längssperre Getriebe UW, allgemein longitudinal limited slip, gearbox carrier, general
2241 Längssperre Getriebe UW, Achse 1 longitudinal limited slip, gearbox carrier, axle 1
68/304


2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258 Verbolzung, Achsen, allgemein locking, axles, general
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263 Verbolzung, Nachläufer, allgemein pin locking, dolly, general
2264 Verbolzung, Nachläufer, links verbolzen pin locking, dolly, left side locking
2265 Verbolzung, Nachläufer, links entbolzen pin locking, dolly, left side locking off
2266 Verbolzung, Nachläufer, rechts verbolzen pin locking, dolly, right side pin locking
2267 Verbolzung, Nachläufer, rechts entbolzen pin locking, dolly, right side locking off
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
69/304


2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300 Kontrollorgane Getriebe allgemein monitoring units gearbox general
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
70/304


2310 Kontrollorgane Getriebe UW, allgemein monitoring units gearbox carrier, general
2311 Fehler Getriebe UW error gearbox carrier
2312 Ölfilter Getriebe UW oilfilter gearbox carrier
2313 Temperatur Getriebe UW temperature gearbox carrier
2314 Temperatur Wandler Getriebe UW temperature torque converter gearbox carrier
2315 Temperatur Verteilergetriebe UW temperature distributor gearbox carrier
2316 Ganganzeige Getriebe UW, ISTGANG display of gear gearbox carrier, ISGEAR
2317 Ganganzeige Getriebe UW, Empfehlung display of gear gearbox carrier, recommendation
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
71/304


2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350 Kontrollorgane Getriebe OW allgemein monitoring units gearbox superstructure general
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
72/304


2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400 Kupplung allgemein clutch general
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
73/304


2409
2410 Kupplung UW, allgemein clutch carrier, general
2411 Kupplung UW, kpl. clutch carrier, complete
2412 Weggeber Kupplung UW position sensor clutch carrier
2413 Kupplung UW, ausklappen clutch carrier, unsfolding
2414 Übertemperatur Kupplung UW overheated clutch carrier
2415 Verschleißanzeige Kupplung UW wear and tear display clutch carrier
2416 Steuerung Kupplung UW control of clutch carrier
2417 Versteller Kupplung UW adjuster clutch carrier
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430 Notkupplung UW, allgemein emergency clutch carrier, general
2431 Notkupplung UW, Ein emergency clutch carrier, on
2432 Notkupplung UW, Aus emergency clutch carrier, off
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
74/304


2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450 Kupplung OW allgemein clutch superstructure general
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460 Notkupplung OW, allgemein emergency clutch superstructure, general
2461 Notkupplung OW, Ein emergency clutch superstructure, on
2462 Notkupplung OW, Aus emergency clutch superstructure, off
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470 Notsteuerung OW, allgemein emergency control superstructure, general
2471 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, Y-Achse, Funktionsvorwahl emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, Y-level, functional preselection
2472 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, Y-Achse, Richtung allgemein emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, Y-level, direction general
2473 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, Y-Achse, heben / rückwärts emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, Y-level, lift / backwards
2474 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, Y-Achse, senken / vorwärts emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, Y-level, lower / forward
75/304


2475 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, X(Y2)-Achse, Funktionsvorwahl emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, X(Y2)-level, functional preselection
2476 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, X(Y2)-Achse, Richtung allgemein emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, X(Y2)-level, direction general
2477 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, X(Y2)-Achse, heben / rechts emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, X(Y2)-level, lift / backwards
2478 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 1, X(Y2)-Achse, senken / links emergency control superstructure, joystick 1, X(Y2)-level, lower / forward
2479
2480
2481 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, Y-Achse, Funktionsvorwahl emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, Y-level, functional preselection
2482 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, Y-Achse, Richtung allgemein emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, Y-level, direction general
2483 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, Y-Achse, heben / rückwärts emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, Y-level, lift / backwards
2484 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, Y-Achse, senken / vorwärts emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, Y-level, lower / forward
2485 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, X(Y2)-Achse, Funktionsvorwahl emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, X(Y2)-level, functional preselection
2486 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, X(Y2)-Achse, Richtung allgemein emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, X(Y2)-level, direction general
2487 Notsteuerung OW, Steuerhebel 2, X(Y2)-Achse, heben / rechts emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, X(Y2)-level, lift / backwards
2488 Notsteuerung OW,Steuerhebel 2, X(Y2)-Achse, senken / links emergency control superstructure, joystick 2, X(Y2)-level, lower / forward
2489
2490 Notsteuerung OW, Pumpenverstellung allgemein emergency control superstructure, pump adjustment general
2491 Notsteuerung OW, Pumpenverstellung P1 emergency control superstructure, pump adjustment P1
2494 Notsteuerung OW, Pumpenverstellung Drehwerk emergency control superstructure, pump adjustment slewing gear
2495 Notsteuerung OW, Pumpenverstellung SLGW emergency control superstructure, pump adjustment CWC
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500 Ventile allgemein valves general
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
76/304


2508
2509
2510 Ventile UW allgemein valves carrier general
2511 UW, Umschaltung Pumpe 1 auf OW und Nebenfunktionen carrier, switching over pump 1 to superstructure and auxilliary functions
2512 UW, Umschaltung Drehwerk auf Federung / Abstützung carrier, switching over slewing gear to suspension / outriggers
2513 UW, Umschaltung Federung / Abstützung carrier, switching over suspension / outriggers
2514 UW, Abtützung Ausfahren carrier, outriggers extend
2515 UW, Abtützung Einfahren carrier, outriggers retract
2516 UW, Umschaltung Klima auf Lenkkreis 1 (bei mobilem verfahren) carrier, switching over AC-unit to steering circuit 1 (during driving)
2517 UW, Umschaltung Hauptpumpe auf UHL carrier, switching over main pump auf independent rear wheel steering
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
77/304


2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
78/304


2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
79/304


2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
80/304


2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
81/304


2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
82/304


2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
83/304


2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
84/304


2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
85/304


2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
86/304


2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
87/304


2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
88/304


2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
89/304


2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
90/304


2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000 Pumpen / Filter allgemein pumps / filter general
3001
3002
91/304


3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
92/304


3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
93/304


3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100 Pumpen allgemein pumps general
3101
94/304


3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110 Pumpe UW bzw. einmotorige Krane allgemein pump carrier resp. single engined cranes general
3111 Pumpe UW bzw. einmotorige Krane, Nr. 1 pump carrier resp. single engined cranes, Nr. 1
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
95/304


3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150 Pumpe OW, allgemein pump superstructure, general
3151 Pumpe OW, Nr. 1 pump superstructure, Nr. 1
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161 Pumpenverstellung OW, Grenzlastregelung pump adjustment superstructure, power limiting control
3162
3163 Pumpenverstellung OW, Kreis 1 pump adjustment superstructure, circuit 1
3164 Niederdruckstufe OW, Kreis 1 low-pressure stage, circuit 1
3165
3167 Pumpenverstellung OW, Kreis SLGW pump adjustment superstructure, circuit CWC
96/304


3168 Niederdruckstufe OW, Kreis 2 low-pressure stage, circuit 2
3170
3171
3172 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Kreis Drehwerk pressure step pump superstructure, slewing gear circuit
3173
3174
3175 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Kreis SLGW pressure step pump superstructure, CWC circuit
3176
3177 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Vorsteuerkreis, Hochdruck 1 pressure step pump superstructure, pilot control circuit, high pressure 1
3178 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Vorsteuerkreis, Hochdruck 2 pressure step pump superstructure, pilot control circuit, high pressure 2
3179 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Vorsteuerkreis, Niederdruck (20bar) pressure step pump superstructure, pilot control circuit, low pressure (20bar)
3180
3181
3182 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Teleskopzylinder Superlift, Betrieb Dieselmotor 1 Enable supply from pump superstructure, tele.-cylinder superlift, operating diesel engine 1
3183 Druckstufe Pumpe OW, Teleskopzylinder Superlift, Betrieb Dieselmotor 2 Enable supply from pump superstructure, tele.-cylinder superlift, operating diesel engine 2
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200 Kontrollorgane Pumpen/Hydrauliköl allgemein monitoring units pumps/hydraulic oil general
97/304


3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210 Kontrollorgane Pumpen/Hydrauliköl UW allgemein monitoring units pumps/hydraulic oil carrier general
3211 Hydrauliköltemperatur UW, allgemein hydraulic oil temperature carrier, general
3212 Hydrauliköltemperatur UW, min. hydraulic oil temperature carrier, min.
3213 Hydrauliköltemperatur UW, max. hydraulic oil temperature carrier, max.
3214
3215 Hydraulikölniveau UW, allgemein hydraulic oil level carrier, general
3216 Hydraulikölniveau UW, min. hydraulic oil level carrier, min.
3217 Hydraulikölniveau UW, max. hydraulic oil level carrier, max.
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
98/304


3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250 Kontrollorgane Pumpen/Hydrauliköl OW allgemein monitoring units pumps/hydraulic oil superstructure general
3251 Hydrauliköltemperatur OW, allgemein hydraulic oil temperature superstructure, general
3252 Hydrauliköltemperatur OW, min. hydraulic oil temperature superstructure, min.
3253 Hydrauliköltemperatur OW, max. hydraulic oil temperature superstructure, max.
3254
3255 Hydraulikölniveau OW, allgemein hydraulic oil level superstructure, general
3256 Hydraulikölniveau OW, min. hydraulic oil level superstructure, min.
3257 Hydraulikölniveau OW, max. hydraulic oil level superstructure, max.
3258
3259 Hydrauliköl OW, Spülung hydraulic oil superstructure, flushing
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
99/304


3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280 Load Sensing OW, allgemein load sensing superstructure, general
3281 Load Sensing Druck Pumpe 1OW, load sensing pressure pump 1 superstructure
3282 Load Sensing Druck, Pumpe 2 OW load sensing pressure pump 2 superstructure
3283 Load Sensing Druck Hubwerk 2 OW load sensing superstructure hoist 2
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291 Load Sensing OW, Druck Pumpe 1 load sensing superstructure, pressure pump 1
3292 Load Sensing OW, Druck Pumpe 2 load sensing superstructure, pressure pump 2
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
100/304


3300 Kontrollorgane Ölfilter allgemein monitoring units oilfilter general
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310 Kontrollorgane Ölfilter UW, allgemein monitoring units oilfilter carrier, general
3311 Rücklauffilter UW, allgemein return oilfilter carrier, general
3312 Rücklauffilter UW, Nr. 1 return oilfilter carrier, Nr. 1
3313 Rücklauffilter UW, Nr. 2 return oilfilter carrier, Nr. 2
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321 Hochdruckfilter UW, allgemein high pressure oilfilter carrier, general
3322 Hochdruckfilter UW, UHL high pressure oilfilter carrier, independent rear wheel steering
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
101/304


3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350 Kontrollorgane Ölilter OW, allgemein monitoring units oilfilter superstructure, general
3351 Rücklauffilter OW, allgemein return oilfilter superstructure, general
3352 Rücklauffilter 1 OW return oilfilter 1 superstructure
3353 Rücklauffilter 2 OW return oilfilter 2 superstructure
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360 Hochdruckfilter OW, allgemein high pressure oilfilter superstructure, general
3361 Hochdruckfilter OW, Nr. 1 high pressure oilfilter superstructure, Nr. 1
3364
3365
102/304


3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
103/304


3399
3400 Ölkühler allgemein oilcooler general
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
104/304


3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
105/304


3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
106/304


3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
107/304


3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
108/304


3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
109/304


3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
110/304


3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
111/304


3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
112/304


3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
113/304


3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
114/304


3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
115/304


3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
116/304


3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
117/304


3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
118/304


3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
119/304


3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
120/304


3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
121/304


3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000 Bremsen, Lenkung, Federung, Abstützung, allgemein brakes, steering, suspension, outriggers, general
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
122/304


4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
123/304


4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
124/304


4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100 Bremsen allgemein brakes general
4101 Bremsen betätigen operate brakes
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110 Bremsen, Kontrollorgane UW allgemein brakes,monitoring units carrier general
4111 Bremsdruck UW, Kreis 1 ( oder Fahrwerk CC) nicht ausreichend brake pressure carrier, circuit 1 (or crawlers at CC cranes) not sufficiant
4112 Bremsdruck UW, Kreis 2 nicht ausreichend brake pressure carrier, circuit 2 not sufficiant
4113 Infomodul ABS UW info module ABS carrier
4114 Feststelbremse UW, Druck 2bar handbrake carrier, pressure 2bar
4115 Feststelbremse UW, Druck 5bar handbrake carrier, pressure 5bar
4116 Lufttrockner UW air dryer carrier
4117
4118
4119
4120 Bremsen, Steuerorgane UW, allgemein brakes, control units carrier, general
4121 Feststellbremse UW hand brake carrier
4122 Fußbremse UW, Bremslicht service brake carrier, stop light
4123 ABS UW, Fahrzeug ABS carrier, crane carrier
4124 ABS UW, Anhänger ABS carrier, trailer
125/304


4125 ABS UW, Abschaltung ABS carrier, cut-off
4126
4127 ABS UW, Achse 1 R ABS carrier, axle 1 R
4128 ABS UW, Achse 1 L ABS carrier, axle 1 L
4145
4146 Bremse UW, Kreis 1 brake carrier, circuit 1
4147 Bremse UW, Kreis 2 brake carrier, circuit 2
4148
4149 Bremse UW, Kreis Anhänger brake carrier, circuit trailer
4150
4151 Bremsdruckreduzierung UW, Stufe 1 brake pressure reduction carrier, step 1
4156 Diagnosestecker Bremsanlage UW diagnosis plug brake system carrier
4157
126/304


4158 Retarder UW retarder carrier
4159 Motorklappenbremse UW exhaust brake carrier
4160 Kunsstanddrossel UW constant decompression valve carrier
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170 Bremsen, Kontrollorgane OW, allgemein brakes, monitoring units superstructure, general
4171 Bremsdruck OW, Kreis 1 ( oder Fahrwerk CC) nicht ausreichend brake pressure superstructure, circuit 1 (or crawlers at CC cranes) not sufficiant
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180 Bremsen, Steuerorgane OW allgemein brakes, control units superstructure general
4181 Feststellbremse OW, allgemein hand brake superstructure, general
4182 Fußbremse OW, allgemein service brake superstructure, general
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
127/304


4191
4192 Drucküberwachung Hauptlenkkreis 1
4193 Drucküberwachung Hilfslenkkreis 1
4200 Lenkung allgemein steering general
4201
4202 Durchflußüberwachung Hauptlenkkreis 1
4203 Durchflußüberwachung Hilfslenkkreis 1
4210 Lenkung, Kontrollorgane UW, allgemein steering, monitoring units carrier, general
4211 Durchflußüberwachung Lenkkreis 1 monitoring oil flow in steering circuit 1
4214 Fehler elektrische Hinterachslenkung error electric rear wheel steering
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220 Lenkung, Pumpen allgemein steering, pumps general
4221 Lenkpumpe 1 steering pump 1
4223 Notlenkpumpe 1 emergency steering pump 1
128/304


4227
4228
4229
4230 Lenkung, Steller allgemein steering, actuator general
4231 Lenkung, Steller Lenkgetriebe steering, actuator steering gearbox
4232 Lenkung, Steller A1R / Hauptlenkkreis A1 steering, actuator A1R
4233 Lenkung, Steller A1L / Hilfslenkkreis A1 steering, actuator A1L
4250 Lenkung, Sperre allgemein steering, locking general
4251 Lenkung, Sperre A1 / Umlauf Hauptlenkkreis A1 steering, blocking A1
129/304


4260 Lenkung, Geber allgemein steering, sensor general
4261 Lenkung, Geber Lenkrad steering, sensor steering wheel
4262 Lenkung, Geber A1R steering, sensor A1R
4263 Lenkung, Geber A1L steering, sensor A1L
4280 Kein Umlauf Hilfslenkkreis A1
4289
130/304


4290 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, allgemein independent rear wheel steering, general
4291 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, Manuell rechts/links independent rear wheel steering, manual right side/left
4292 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, Allradlenkung = Kurvenfahrt independent rear wheel steering, all wheel steering = travel round corners
4293 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, Diagonalfahrt = Schrägenfahrt independent rear wheel steering, travel diagonally = crab travel
4294 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, lenken links independent rear wheel steering, steer left side
4295 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, lenken rechts independent rear wheel steering, steer right side
4296 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, Allradlenkung = Kurvenfahrt gewählt
4297 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, Diagonalfahrt = Schrägenfahrt gewählt
4298 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung gewählt
4299 Unabhänige Hinterachslenkung, von Wand wegfahren aktiv
4300 Abstützung UW, allgemein (kpl.) outriggers carrier, general (complete)
4301 Abstützung UW, rechts outriggers carrier, right side
4302 Abstützung UW, links outriggers carrier, left side
4303 Abstützung UW, vorne outriggers carrier, front
4304 Abstützung UW, hinten outriggers carrier, rear
4305 Abstützung UW, horizontal outriggers carrier, horizontal
4306 Abstützung UW, vertikal outriggers carrier, vertical
4307 Abstützung UW, horizontal rechts outriggers carrier, horizontal right side
4308 Abstützung UW, horizontal links outriggers carrier, horizontal left side
4309 Abstützung UW, horizontal vorne outriggers carrier, horizontal front
4310 Abstützung UW, horizontal hinten outriggers carrier, horizontal rear
4311 Abstützung UW, vertikal rechts outriggers carrier, vertical right side
4312 Abstützung UW, vertikal links outriggers carrier, vertical left side
4313 Abstützung UW, vertikal vorne outriggers carrier, vertical front
4314 Abstützung UW, vertikal hinten outriggers carrier, vertical rear
4315 Abstützung UW, horizontal VR outriggers carrier, horizontal front right side
4316 Abstützung UW, horizontal VL outriggers carrier, horizontal front left side
4317 Abstützung UW, horizontal HR outriggers carrier, horizontal rear right side
4318 Abstützung UW, horizontal HL outriggers carrier, horizontal rear left side
4319 Abstützung UW, vertikal VR outriggers carrier, vertical front right side
4320 Abstützung UW, vertikal VL outriggers carrier, vertical front left side
4321 Abstützung UW, vertikal HR outriggers carrier, vertical rear right side
4322 Abstützung UW, vertikal HL outriggers carrier, vertical rear left side
131/304


4323 Abstützung UW, klappen VR outriggers carrier, folding front right side
4324 Abstützung UW, klappen VL outriggers carrier, folding front left side
4325 Abstützung UW, klappen HR outriggers carrier, folding rear right side
4326 Abstützung UW, klappen HL outriggers carrier, folding rear left side
4327 Abstützung UW, Spreize VR outriggers carrier, spreader front right side
4328 Abstützung UW, Spreize VL outriggers carrier, spreader front left side
4329 Abstützung UW, Spreize HR outriggers carrier, spreader rear right side
4330 Abstützung UW, Spreize HL outriggers carrier, spreader rear left side
4331 Abstützung UW, vertikal kpl. outriggers carrier, vertical complete
4332 Abstützung UW, Freigabe Automatik outriggers carrier, enable automatic
4333
4334
4335 Stützplatte UW, VR outrigger pad carrier, front right side
4336 Stützplatte UW, VL outrigger pad carrier, front left side
4337 Stützplatte UW, HR outrigger pad carrier, rear right side
4338 Stützplatte UW, HL outrigger pad carrier, rear left side
4339 Stützträger UW, VR anbolzen outrigger beam carrier, front right side pin locking
4340 Stützträger UW, VL anbolzen outrigger beam carrier, front left side pin locking
4341 Stützträger UW, HR anbolzen outrigger beam carrier, rear right side pin locking
4342 Stützträger UW, HL anbolzen outrigger beam carrier, rear left side pin locking
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, allgemein pressure determination outriggers carrier, general
4351 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, VR pressure determination outriggers carrier, front right side
4352 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, VL pressure determination outriggers carrier, front left side
4353 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, HR pressure determination outriggers carrier, rear right side
4354 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, HL pressure determination outriggers carrier, rear left side
4355 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, Zusatz R pressure determination outriggers carrier, addition R
132/304


4356 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, Zusatz L pressure determination outriggers carrier, addition L
4357 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, Zusatz V pressure determination outriggers carrier, addition V
4358 Druckerfassung Abstützung UW, Zusatz H pressure determination outriggers carrier, addition H
4359
4360 Winkelerfassung Abstützung UW, allgemein angle determination outriggers carrier, general
4361 Winkelerfassung Abstützung UW, VL angle determination outriggers carrier, front left side
4362 Winkelerfassung Abstützung UW, HR angle determination outriggers carrier, rear right side
4363 Winkelerfassung Abstützung UW, HL angle determination outriggers carrier, rear left side
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, allgemein length determination outriggers carrier, general
4371 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, VR length determination outriggers carrier, front right side
4372 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, VL length determination outriggers carrier, front left side
4373 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, HR length determination outriggers carrier, rear right side
4374 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, HL length determination outriggers carrier, rear left side
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, maximal VR length determination outriggers carrier, maximum front right side
4382 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, maximal VL length determination outriggers carrier, maximum front left side
4383 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, maximal HR length determination outriggers carrier, maximum rear right side
4384 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, maximal HL length determination outriggers carrier, maximum rear left side
4385 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, mittel VR length determination outriggers carrier, middle front right side
4386 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, mittel VL length determination outriggers carrier, middle front left side
4387 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, mittel HR length determination outriggers carrier, middle rear right side
4388 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, mittel HL length determination outriggers carrier, middle rear left side
133/304


4389 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, minimal VR length determination outriggers carrier, minimum front right side
4390 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, minimal VL length determination outriggers carrier, minimum front left side
4391 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, minimal HR length determination outriggers carrier, minimum rear right side
4392 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, minimal HL length determination outriggers carrier, minimum rear left side
4393 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, Sonderwert VR length determination outriggers carrier, optional value front right side
4394 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, Sonderwert VL length determination outriggers carrier, optional value front left side
4395 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, Sonderwert HR length determination outriggers carrier, optional value rear right side
4396 Längenerfassung Abstützung UW, Sonderwert HL length determination outriggers carrier, optional value rear left side
4397
4398
4399
4400 Federung allgemein suspension general
4401 Federung sperren / entsperren (Speichersperre) suspension blocking / free (blocking the nitrogen akkumulator)
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410 Federungsniveau / -regulierung UW, allgemein suspension level / -control carrier, general
4411 Federungsniveau UW, kpl. suspension level carrier, complete
4412 Federungsniveau UW, oben VR suspension level carrier, high front right side
4413 Federungsniveau UW, oben VL suspension level carrier, high front left side
4414 Federungsniveau UW, oben HR suspension level carrier, upper rear right side
4415 Federungsniveau UW, oben HL suspension level carrier, high rear left side
4416 Federungsniveau UW, mitte VR suspension level carrier, middle front right side
4417 Federungsniveau UW, mitte VL suspension level carrier, middle front left side
4418 Federungsniveau UW, mitte HR suspension level carrier, middle rear right side
4419 Federungsniveau UW, mitte HL suspension level carrier, middle rear left side
4420 Federungsniveau UW, unten VR suspension level carrier, lower front right side
4421 Federungsniveau UW, unten VL suspension level carrier, lower front left side
134/304


4422 Federungsniveau UW, unten HR suspension level carrier, lower rear right side
4423 Federungsniveau UW, unten HL suspension level carrier, lower rear left side
4424 Federungsniveau UW, Automatik suspension level carrier, automatic
4425 Federungsniveauregulierung UW, Dreipunkt/Vierpunkt Umschaltung suspension level adjustment carrier, threepoint/fourpoint switching over
4426 Federungsniveauregulierung UW, Achsen Automatik suspension level adjustment carrier, axles automatic
4427 Federungsniveauregulierung UW, Achsen Hochziehen suspension level adjustment carrier, lift axles
4428 Federungsniveauregulierung UW, Achsen Halten suspension level adjustment carrier, hold axles
4429
4430 Federungsniveau UW, VR auf / ab suspension level carrier, front right side up / down
4431 Federungsniveau UW, VL auf / ab suspension level carrier, front left side up / down
4432 Federungsniveau UW, HR auf / ab suspension level carrier, rear right side up / down
4433 Federungsniveau UW, HL auf / ab suspension level carrier, rear left side up / down
4434
4435
4436 Federungsniveau UW, Heben VL suspension level carrier, lift front left side
4437 Federungsniveau UW, Heben HR suspension level carrier, lift rear right side
4438 Federungsniveau UW, Heben VR suspension level carrier, lift front right side
4439 Federungsniveau UW, Heben HL suspension level carrier, lift rear left side
4440 Federungsniveau UW, Senken VL suspension level carrier, lower front left side
4441 Federungsniveau UW, Senken HR suspension level carrier, lower rear right side
4442 Federungsniveau UW, Senken VR suspension level carrier, lower front right side
4443 Federungsniveau UW, Senken HL suspension level carrier, lower rear left side
4444 Federungsniveau UW, Diagonalsperre VL/HR suspension level carrier, diagonal blocking front left side/rear right side
4445 Federungsniveau UW, Diagonalsperre HR/VL suspension level carrier, diagonal blocking rear right side/front left side
4446 Federungsniveau UW, Diagonalsperre VR/HL suspension level carrier, diagonal blocking front right side/rear left side
4447 Federungsniveau UW, Diagonalsperre HL/VR suspension level carrier, diagonal blocking rear left side/front right side
4448 Federungsniveau UW, Speichersperre VL suspension level carrier, blocking the nitrogen akkumulator front left side
4449 Federungsniveau UW, Speichersperre HR suspension level carrier, blocking the nitrogen akkumulator rear right side
4450 Federungsniveau UW, Speichersperre VR suspension level carrier, blocking the nitrogen akkumulator front right side
4451 Federungsniveau UW, Speichersperre HL suspension level carrier, blocking the nitrogen akkumulator rear left side
4452
4453
4454
135/304


4455 Ein Kreis außer Niveau (Niveau all) one circuit without level (level all)
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460 Liftachse heben lift axle
4461 Liftachse sperren li block left side of axle
4462 Liftachse sperren re block right side of axle
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
136/304


4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
137/304


4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
138/304


4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
139/304


4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
140/304


4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
141/304


4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
142/304


4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
143/304


4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
144/304


4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
145/304


4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
146/304


4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
147/304


4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
148/304


4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
149/304


4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
150/304


4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
151/304


4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000 Kabinen- / Containerzubehör allgemein auxiliaries for cabin / container, general
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010 Belüftungsklappen, allgemein ventilating flap, general
5011 Belüftungsklappe 1 ventilating flap 1
5012 Belüftungsklappe 1 öffnen ventilating flap 1, open
5013 Belüftungsklappe 1 schließen ventilating flap 1, close
5014 Belüftungsklappe 1, Position geöffnet ventilating flap 1, position opened
5015 Belüftungsklappe 1, Position geschlossen ventilating flap 1, position closed
152/304


5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5046
5047
5048
153/304


5049
5050
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080 Feuermeldeanlage kpl. fire alarm system
5081 Feuermeldeanlage, Zentraleinheit fire alarm system, controller
154/304


5082 Feuermeldeanlage, akustischer Melder fire alarm system, audible signal
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100 Kabinenzubehör, Klima / Lüftung allgemein auxiliaries for cabin, AC-unit / ventilation general
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110 Kabinenheizung UW, allgemein cabin heater carrier, general
5111 Kabinenheizung UW, Kabinenheizungsgerät cabin heater carrier, cabin heating unit
5112 Kabinenheizung UW, Steuergerät cabin heater carrier, control unit
5113 Kabinenheizung UW, Timer cabin heater carrier, timer
5114 Kabinenheizung UW, Thermostat cabin heater carrier, thermostat
155/304


5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129 Klimaanlage UW, Lufttemperatur AC-unit carrier, air temperature
5130 Klimaanlage UW, allgemein AC-unit carrier, general
5131 Klimaanlage UW, Klimagerät AC-unit carrier, AC-gear
5132 Klimaanlage UW, Steuergerät AC-unit carrier, control unit
5133 Klimaanlage UW, Geber AC-unit carrier, sensor
5134 Klimaanlage UW, Vereisungsschutz AC-unit carrier, de-icing unit
5135 Klimaanlage UW, Diagnosestecker AC-unit carrier, diagnosis plug
5136 Klimaanlage UW, Steller AC-unit carrier, adjuster
5137 Klimaanlage UW, Kompressor E-Kupplung AC-unit carrier, kompressor electric clutch
5138 Klimaanlage UW, Kompressor Magnetventil AC-unit carrier, kompressor solenoid valve
5139 Klimaanlage UW, Kondensator AC-unit carrier, kondenser
5140 Kabinenlüftung UW, allgemein cabin ventilation carrier, general
5141 Kabinenlüftung UW, Gebläse cabin ventilation carrier, blower
5142 Kabinenlüftung UW, Ventilator cabin ventilation carrier, ventilator
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
156/304


5148
5149
5150 Kabinenheizung OW allgemein cabin heater of superstructure, general
5151 Kabinenheizung OW-Kabinenheizungsgerät cabin heater of superstructure, cabin heating unit
5152 Kabinenheizung OW, Steuergerät cabin heater of superstructure, control unit
5153 Kabinenheizung OW, Timer Kabinenheizung cabin heater of superstructure, timer cabin heater
5154 Kabinenheizung OW, Thermostat Kabinenheizung cabin heater of superstructure, thermostat cabin heater
5155 Kabinenheizung OW, Dosierpumpe cabin heater of superstructure, measuring pump
5156 Kabinenheizung OW, Flammfühler cabin heater of superstructure, flame sensor
5157 Kabinenheizung OW, Temperaturfühler cabin heater of superstructure, temperature sensor
5158 Kabinenheizung OW, Überhitzungsfühler cabin heater of superstructure, overheat sensor
5159 Kabinenheizung OW, Glühkerze cabin heater of superstructure, glow plug
5160 Kabinenheizung OW, Wasserpumpe cabin heater of superstructure, waterpump
5161 Kabinenheizung OW, Brennermotor cabin heater of superstructure, burner motor
5162 Steuergerät Servoventil servo valve, control unit
5163 Servoventil servo valve
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170 Klimaanlage OW, allgemein AC-unit superstructure, general
5171 Klimaanlage OW, Klimagerät AC-unit superstructure, AC-gear
5172 Klimaanlage OW, Steuergerät AC-unit superstructure, control unit
5173 Klimaanlage OW, Vereisungsschutz AC-unit superstructure, de-icing unit
5174 Klimaanlage OW, Lufttemperatur AC-unit superstructure, air temperature
5175 Klimaanlage OW, Diagnosestecker AC-unit superstructure, diagnosis plug
5176 Klimaanlage OW Steller AC-unit superstructure actuator
5177 Klimaanlage OW, Kompressor E-Kupplung AC-unit superstructure, kompressor electric clutch
5178 Klimaanlage OW, Kompressor Magnetventil AC-unit superstructure, kompressor solenoid valve
5179 Klimaanlage OW, Kondensator AC-unit superstructure, kondenser
5180 Kabinenlüftung OW, allgemein cabin ventilation superstructure, general
157/304


5181 Kabinenlüftung OW, Gebläse cabin ventilation superstructure, blower
5182 Kabinenlüftung OW, Ventilator cabin ventilation superstructure, ventilator
5183 Kabinenlüftung OW, Umluftbetrieb cabin ventilation superstructure, air circulation
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190 Fensterheber UW, allgemein window opener, carrier, general
5191 Fensterheber UW, links window opener, carrier, left side
5192 Fensterheber UW, rechts window opener, carrier, right side
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200 Wisch- / Waschanlagen allgemein windscreen wipe-/wash-units general
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, allgemein windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, general
5211 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, Frontfenster windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, front window
5212 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, Frontfenster Intervall windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, front window interval
5213 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, Dachfenster windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, roof window
158/304


5214 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, Dachfenster Intervall windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, roof window interval
5215 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, Zusatzfrontfenster windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, additional front window
5216 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine UW, Zusatzfrontfenster Intervall windscreen wiper unit cabin carrier, additional front window interval
5217
5218
5219
5220 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine UW, allgemein windscreen washer unit cabin carrier, general
5221 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine UW, Frontfenster windscreen washer unit cabin carrier, front window
5222 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine UW, Dachfenster windscreen washer unit cabin carrier, roof window
5223 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine UW, Zusatzfrontfenster windscreen washer unit cabin carrier, additional front window
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
159/304


5247
5248
5249
5250 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW, allgemein windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, general
5251 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW, Frontfenster windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, front window
5252 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW, Frontfenster Intervall windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, front window interval
5253 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW, Dachfenster windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, roof window
5254 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW, Dachfenster Intervall windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, roof window interval
5255 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW, Zusatzfrontfenster windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, additional front window
5256 Scheibenwischanlage Kabine OW,Zusatzfrontfenster Intervall windscreen wiper unit cabin superstructure, additional front window interval
5257
5258
5259
5260 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine OW, allgemein windscreen washer unit cabin superstructure, general
5261 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine OW, Frontfenster windscreen washer unit cabin superstructure, front window
5262 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine OW, Dachfenster windscreen washer unit cabin superstructure, roof window
5263 Scheibenwaschanlage Kabine OW, Zusatzfrontfenster windscreen washer unit cabin superstructure, additional front window
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
160/304


5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299 Menü-Vorwahl Display, Meldeleuchten menu-preselection display, pilot lights
5300 Menü-Vorwahl Display, analoge Werte menu-preselection display, analog values
5301 Menü-Vorwahl Display, Lenkwinkel menu-preselection display, steering angle
5302 Menü-Vorwahl Display, Multimedia menu-preselection display, multimedia
5303 Menü-Vorwahl Display, Softwareversion menu-preselection display, software version
5304 Menü-Vorwahl Display, Analogwerte Bremskreis 1+2 menu-preselection display, analog values brake circuit 1+2
5305 Betriebsstundenzähler UW / OW, absolut operating houremeter carrier / superstructure, absolut
5306 Betriebsstundenzähler UW / OW, verstellbar operating houremeter carrier / superstructure, adjustable
5307
5308
5309
5310 Visualisierung UW allgemein visualisation carrier general
5311 Visualisierung UW, Multifunktionsanzeige visualisation carrier, multifunctional display
5312 Visualisierungssystem UW visualisation system carrier
161/304


5313 Datalogger UW datalogger carrier
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320 Tachograph UW tachograph carrier
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330 Graphikdisplay UW, CGM 1 graphic display carrier, CGM 1
5331 Graphikdisplay UW, CGM 2 graphic display carrier, CGM 2
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340 Uhr UW clock carrier
5341 Betriebsstundenzähler UW, absolut operating houremeter carrier, absolut
5342 Betriebsstundenzähler UW, verstellbar operating houremeter carrier, adjustable
5343
5344
5345
162/304


5346
5347
5348
5349
5350 Visualisierung OW allgemein visualisation superstructure general
5351 Visualisierung OW, Multifunktionsanzeige visualisation superstructure, multifunctional display
5352 Visualisierungssystem OW visualisation system superstructure
5353 Datalogger OW datalogger superstructure
5354
5355 Betriebsstundenzähler OW, allgemein operating houremeter superstructure, general
5356 Betriebsstundenzähler OW, absolut operating houremeter superstructure, absolut
5357 Betriebsstundenzähler OW, verstellbar operating houremeter superstructure, adjustable
5358 Warnleuchte warning light
5359 Stopleuchte stop light
5360 Visualisierung OW, Tachograph visualisation superstructure, tachograph
5361 Visualisierungssystem OW, Display 1 visualisation system superstructure, display 1
5362 Visualisierungssystem OW, Display 2 visualisation system superstructure, display 2
5363 Visualisierungssystem OW, Helligkeitsregelung visualisation system superstructure, brightness adjustment
5364 Visualisierungssystem OW, COM Port visualisation system superstructure, COM Port
5365 OW,Visualisierungssystemn PrinterPort superstructure,visualisation ssystemn PrinterPort
5366 Visualisierungssystem OW-Kabinenlautsprecher visualisation system superstructure cabin speaker
5367 Visualisierungssystem OW-Kabinenmicro visualisation system superstructure cabin micro
5368 Visualisierungssystem OW, CAN Schnittstelle visualisation system superstructure, CAN interface
5369 Visualisierungssystem OW, IrDA visualisation system superstructure, IrDA
5370 Visualisierungssystem OW, RS232 visualisation system superstructure, RS232
5371 Visualisierungssystem OW, Ethernet visualisation system superstructure, Ethernet
5372 Visualisierungssystem OW, Massenspeicher extern visualisation system superstructure, bulk memory extern
5373 Visualisierungssystem OW, Fahreridentifikation visualisation system superstructure, identification of operator
5374 Visualisierungssystem OW, Controller (Master) visualisation system superstructure, controler (master)
5375
5376 Visualisierungssystem OW, Condition Monitoring allgemein visualisation system superstructure, status monitoring general
5377 Visualisierungssystem OW, Condition Monitoring kpl. visualisation system superstructure, status monitoring complete
5378 Lastkollektivzähler Hubwerk 1 counter of totality of loads for hoist 1
163/304


5381 Lastkollektivzähler H4 counter of totality of loads for H4
5382 Lastkollektivzähler H5 counter of totality of loads for H5
5383 Lastkollektivzähler Wippwerk 1 counter of totality of loads for luffing gear 1
5384 Lastkollektivzähler Wippwerk 2 counter of totality of loads for luffing gear 2
5385 Lastkollektivzähler Einziehwerk counter of totality of loads for main boom derricking gear
5386
5387 Visualisierungssystem OW, Accident-Recorder visualisation system superstructure, accident-recorder
5388 Visualisierungssystem OW, Daten-Laufwerk Ausgabe visualisation system superstructure, data harddisk aufgabe
5389 Visualisierungssystem OW, Daten-Laufwerk Massenspeicher visualisation system superstructure, data harddisk bulk memory
5390
5391 Teleservice OW, allgemein teleservice superstructure, general
5392 Teleservice OW, Controller teleservice superstructure, controler
5393 Teleservice Datenübertragung teleservice data transfer
5394
5395
5396
5397 Teleservice OW, RS232 teleservice superstructure, RS232
5398 Teleservice OW, RS485 teleservice superstructure, RS485
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410 Spannungszuführung UW allgemein voltage supply carrier general
5411
164/304


5412 Zigarettenanzünder UW cigaret lighter carrier
5413 Steckdose 24VDC UW, Kabine socket 24VDC carrier, cabin
5414
5415 Steckdose 12VDC UW, Kabine socket 12VDC carrier, cabin
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420 Multifunktionsschalter UW multifunctional switch carrier
5421 Lenkstockschalter UW, links switch on steering column carrier, left side
5422 Lenkstockschalter UW, rechts switch on steering column carrier, right side
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430 Spiegelfunktionen UW allgemein mirror functions carrier general
5431 Heizung UW, Spiegel heater carrier, mirror
5432
5433
5434
5435 Spiegelverstellung UW, allgemein mirror adjustment carrier, general
5436 Spiegelverstellung UW, links mirror adjustment carrier, left side
5437 Spiegelverstellung UW, rechts mirror adjustment carrier, right side
5438
5439
5440 Belastungskontrolle UW, allgemein loading monitoring carrier, general
5441 Belastungskontrolle UW, optisch loading monitoring carrier, visual
5442 Belastungskontrolle UW, akustisch loading monitoring carrier, audible
5443
5444
165/304


5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450 Spannungszuführung OW allgemein voltage supply superstructure general
5451
5452 Zigarettenanzünder OW cigaret lighter superstructure
5453 Steckdose 24VDC OW-Kabine socket 24VDC superstructure cabin
5454
5455 Steckdose 12VDC OW-Kabine socket 12VDC superstructure cabin
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460 Multifunktionsschalter OW multifunctional switch superstructure
5461 Lenkstockschalter OW, links switch on steering column superstructure, left side
5462 Lenkstockschalter OW, rechts switch on steering column superstructure, right side
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470 Spiegelfunktionen OW allgemein mirror functions superstructure general
5471 Heizung OW, Spiegel heater superstructure, mirror
5472
5473
5474
5475 Spiegelverstellung OW, allgemein mirror adjustment superstructure, general
5476 Spiegelverstellung OW, links mirror adjustment superstructure, left side
5477 Spiegelverstellung OW, rechts mirror adjustment superstructure, right side
166/304


5478
5479
5480 Belastungskontrolle OW, allgemein loading monitoring superstructure, general
5481 Belastungskontrolle OW, optisch loading monitoring superstructure, visual
5482 Belastungskontrolle OW, akustisch loading monitoring superstructure, audible
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490 Sonnendachverstellung Kabine OW; allgemein sunroof adjustment cabin superstructure; general
5491 Sonnendachverstellung Kabine OW, schließen sunroof adjustment cabin superstructure, close
5492 Sonnendachverstellung Kabine OW, öffnen sunroof adjustment cabin superstructure, open
5493
5494
5495 Türverriegelung OW, allgemein door locking superstructure, general
5496 Türverriegelung OW-Kabine door locking superstructure cabin
5497
5498
5499
5500 Radioanlage allgemein radio unit general
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510 Radioanlage UW, allgemein radio unit carrier, general
167/304


5511 Radioanlage UW, Radio radio unit carrier, receiver
5512 Radioanlage UW, Antenne radio unit carrier, antenna
5513 Radioanlage UW, Lautsprecher vorne links radio unit carrier, speaker front left side
5514 Radioanlage UW, Lautsprecher vorne rechts radio unit carrier, speaker front right side
5515 Radioanlage UW, Lautsprecher hinten links radio unit carrier, speaker rear left side
5516 Radioanlage UW, Lautsprecher hinten rechts radio unit carrier, speaker rear right side
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
168/304


5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550 Radioanlage OW, allgemein radio unit superstructure, general
5551 Radioanlage OW, Radio radio unit superstructure, receiver
5552 Radioanlage OW, Antenne radio unit superstructure, antenna
5553 Radioanlage OW, Lautsprecher vorne links radio unit superstructure, speaker front left side
5554 Radioanlage OW, Lautsprecher vorne rechts radio unit superstructure, speaker front right side
5555 Radioanlage OW, Lautsprecher hinten links radio unit superstructure, speaker rear left side
5556 Radioanlage OW, Lautsprecher hinten rechts radio unit superstructure, speaker rear right side
5557
5558 Radioanlage OW, Spannungsversorgung 24DAC / 12VDC radio unit superstructure, power supply voltage reducer 24DAC / 12VDC
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
169/304


5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600 Außensprechanlage allgemein PA unit general
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
170/304


5610 Außensprechanlage UW, allgemein PA unit carrier, general
5611 Außensprechanlage UW, Sprechanlage PA unit carrier, speak unit
5612 Außensprechanlage UW, Lautsprecher PA unit carrier, speaker
5613 Außensprechanlage UW, Lautstärkeregler PA unit carrier, volume control
5614 Außensprechanlage UW, Mikrofon PA unit carrier, microphone
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
171/304


5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650 Außensprechanlage OW, allgemein PA unit superstructure, general
5651 Außensprechanlage OW, Sprechanlage PA unit superstructure, speak unit
5652 Außensprechanlage OW, Lautsprecher PA unit superstructure, speaker
5653 Außensprechanlage OW, Lautstärkeregler PA unit superstructure, volume control
5654 Außensprechanlage OW, Mikrofon PA unit superstructure, microphone
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
172/304


5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700 Mobiltelefon allgemein mobile phone general
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
173/304


5709
5710 Mobiltelefon UW, allgemein mobile phone carrier, general
5711 Mobiltelefon UW, Telefon mobile phone carrier, phone
5712 Mobiltelefon UW, Antenne mobile phone carrier, antenna
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
174/304


5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750 Mobiltelefon OW, allgemein mobile phone superstructure, general
5751 Mobiltelefon OW, Telefon mobile phone superstructure, phone
5752 Mobiltelefon OW, Antenne mobile phone superstructure, antenna
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
175/304


5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800 Navigationssystem allgemein navigation system general
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
176/304


5808
5809
5810 Navigationssystem UW, allgemein navigation system carrier, general
5811 Navigationssystem UW, GPS navigation system carrier, GPS
5812 Navigationssystem UW, Dispositionssystem navigation system carrier, disposition system
5813 Navigationssystem UW, Antenne GPS navigation system carrier, antenna GPS
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
177/304


5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850 Navigationssystem OW, allgemein navigation system superstructure, general
5851 Navigationssystem OW, GPS navigation system superstructure, GPS
5852 Navigationssystem OW, Dispositionssystem navigation system superstructure, disposition system
5853 Navigationssystem OW, Antenne GPS navigation system superstructure, antenna GPS
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
178/304


5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900 Sitz allgemein seat general
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
179/304


5907
5908
5909
5910 Sitzheizung UW, allgemein seat heater carrier, general
5911 Sitzheizung UW, Fahrersitz seat heater carrier, drivers seat
5912 Sitzheizung UW, Beifahrersitz seat heater carrier, codrivers seat
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920 Sitzverstellung UW, allgemein seat adjustment carrier, general
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930 Sitzverstellung UW, Fahrersitz seat adjustment carrier, drivers seat
5931 Sitzverstellung UW, Fahrersitz vor seat adjustment carrier, drivers seat forward
5932 Sitzverstellung UW, Fahrersitz zurück seat adjustment carrier, drivers seat backwards
5933 Sitzverstellung UW, Fahrersitz heben seat adjustment carrier, drivers seat lift
5934 Sitzverstellung UW, Fahrersitz senken seat adjustment carrier, drivers seat lower
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
180/304


5940 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat
5941 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz vor seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat forward
5942 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz zurück seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat backwards
5943 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz heben seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat lift
5944 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz senken seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat lower
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950 Sitzheizung OW, allgemein seat heater superstructure, general
5951 Sitzheizung OW, Fahrersitz seat heater superstructure, drivers seat
5952 Sitzheizung OW, Beifahrersitz seat heater superstructure, codrivers seat
5953 Sitzheizung OW, Thermoschalter seat heater superstructure, thermal switch
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960 Sitzverstellung OW, allgemein seat adjustment superstructure, general
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970 Sitzverstellung OW, Fahrersitz seat adjustment superstructure, drivers seat
5971 Sitzverstellung OW, Fahrersitz vor seat adjustment superstructure, drivers seat forward
5972 Sitzverstellung OW, Fahrersitz zurück seat adjustment superstructure, drivers seat backwards
181/304


5973 Sitzverstellung OW, Fahrersitz heben seat adjustment superstructure, drivers seat lift
5974 Sitzverstellung OW, Fahrersitz senken seat adjustment superstructure, drivers seat lower
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat
5981 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz vor seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat forward
5982 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz zurück seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat backwards
5983 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz heben seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat lift
5984 Sitzverstellung UW, Beifahrersitz senken seat adjustment carrier, codrivers seat lower
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990 Armlehnenarretierung OW armrest down SS
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000 Beleuchtung allgemein lighting general
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
182/304


6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
183/304


6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
184/304


6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100 Beleuchtung, Fahr- / Arbeitsscheinwerfer allgemein lighting, driving- / operating lamps general
6101
6102
6103
6104
185/304


6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110 Beleuchtung UW, allgemein lighting carrier, general
6111 Standlicht UW, allgemein parking lights carrier, general
6112 Standlicht UW, vorne rechts parking lights carrier, front right side
6113 Standlicht UW, vorne links parking lights carrier, front left side
6114 Abblendlicht UW, allgemein driving lights carrier, general
6115 Abblendlicht UW, rechts driving lights carrier, right side
6116 Abblendlicht UW, links driving lights carrier, left side
6117 Fernlicht UW, allgemein high beam headlights carrier, general
6118 Fernlicht UW, rechts high beam headlights carrier, right side
6119 Fernlicht UW, links high beam headlights carrier, left side
6120 Außenbeleuchtung OW, allgemein outside lighting superstructure, general
6121 Außenbeleuchtung OW, vorne rechts outside lighting superstructure, front right side
6122 Außenbeleuchtung OW, vorne links outside lighting superstructure, front left side
6123 Außenbeleuchtung OW, hinten rechts outside lighting superstructure, rear right side
6124 Außenbeleuchtung OW, hinten links outside lighting superstructure, rear left side
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130 Außenbeleuchtung Kabine OW, allgemein outside lighting cabin superstructure, general
6131 Außenbeleuchtung Kabine OW, vorne rechts outside lighting cabin superstructure, front right side
6132 Außenbeleuchtung Kabine OW, vorne links outside lighting cabin superstructure, front left side
6133 Außenbeleuchtung Kabine OW, hinten rechts outside lighting cabin superstructure, rear right side
6134 Außenbeleuchtung Kabine OW, hinten links outside lighting cabin superstructure, rear left side
6135
6136
6137
186/304


6138
6139
6140 Außenbeleuchtung Ausleger, allgemein outside lighting boom, general
6141 Außenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Grundkasten outside lighting boom, basic boom section
6142 Außenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Spitze outside lighting boom, top section
6143
6144
6145 Außenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Verstellung outside lighting boom, adjustment
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150 Außenbeleuchtung A-Bock, allgemein outside lighting a-frame, general
6151 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung A-Bock additional outside lighting a-frame
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
187/304


6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, allgemein additional outside lighting container, general
6201 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Frontseite links additional outside lighting container, front side left side
6202 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Frontseite mitte additional outside lighting container, front side middle
6203 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Frontseite rechts additional outside lighting container, front side right side
188/304


6204 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Seite links additional outside lighting container, left side
6205 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Seite mitte additional outside lighting container, middle side
6206 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Seite rechts additional outside lighting container, right side
6207 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Rückseite links additional outside lighting container, rear side left side
6208 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Rückseite mitte additional outside lighting container, rear side middle
6209 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Container, Rückseite rechts additional outside lighting container, rear side right side
6210 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW allgemein additional outside lighting carrier general
6211 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Aufstieg additional outside lighting carrier, Aufstieg
6212 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Aufstieg R additional outside lighting carrier, ladders/stairs R
6213 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Aufstieg L additional outside lighting carrier, ladders/stairs L
6214 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Rückfahrscheinwerfer additional outside lighting carrier, reversing light
6215 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Rückfahrscheinwerfer rechts additional outside lighting carrier, reversing light right side
6216 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Rückfahrscheinwerfer links additional outside lighting carrier, reversing light left side
6217 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Nebelscheinwerfer additional outside lighting carrier, foglight
6218 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Nebelscheinwerfer rechts additional outside lighting carrier, foglight right side
6219 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Nebelscheinwerfer links additional outside lighting carrier, foglight left side
6220 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Nebelschlußleuchte additional outside lighting carrier, rear foglight
6221 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Nebelschlußleuchte rechts additional outside lighting carrier, rear foglight right side
6222 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Nebelschlußleuchte links additional outside lighting carrier, rear foglight left side
6223 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Bremslicht additional outside lighting carrier, stop light
6224 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Bremslicht rechts additional outside lighting carrier, stop light right side
6225 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Bremslicht links additional outside lighting carrier, stop light left side
6226 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Kennzeichenbeleuchtung additional outside lighting carrier, licence lighting
6227 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Kenzeichenbeleuchtung rechts additional outside lighting carrier, licence lighting right side
6228 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Kennzeichenbeleuchtung links additional outside lighting carrier, licence lighting left side
6229 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Standlicht hinten rechts additional outside lighting carrier, parking lights rear right side
6230 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Standlicht hinten links additional outside lighting carrier, parking lights rear left side
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
189/304


6237
6238
6239
6240 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Abstützung kpl additional outside lighting carrier, outriggers complete
6241 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Abstützung rechts additional outside lighting carrier, outriggers right side
6242 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung UW, Abstützung links additional outside lighting carrier, outriggers left side
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung OW, allgemein additional outside lighting superstructure, general
6251 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung OW, vorne links additional outside lighting superstructure, front left side
6252 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung OW, vorne rechts additional outside lighting superstructure, front right side
6253 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung OW, hinten links additional outside lighting superstructure, rear left side
6254 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung OW, hinten rechts additional outside lighting superstructure, rear right side
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Ausleger, allgemein additional outside lighting boom, general
6261 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Hauptausleger-Fuss additional outside lighting boom, main boom foot section
6262 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Hauptausleger-Kopf 1 additional outside lighting boom, main boom head 1
6263 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Hauptausleger-Kopf 2 additional outside lighting boom, main boom head 2
6264
6265 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Ausleger, Mast-Fuss additional outside lighting boom, sl-mast foot section
6266
6267
6268
6269
190/304


6270 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, allgemein additional outside lighting dolly, general
6271 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, Rückfahrscheinwerfer allgemein additional outside lighting dolly, reversing light general
6272 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, Rückfahrscheinwerfer rechts additional outside lighting dolly, reversing light right side
6273 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, Rückfahrscheinwerfer links additional outside lighting dolly, reversing light left side
6274 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, Nebelschlußleuchten allgemein additional outside lighting dolly, rear foglight general
6275 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, Nebelschlußleuchte rechts additional outside lighting dolly, rear foglight right side
6276 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Nachläufer, Nebelschlußleuchte links additional outside lighting dolly, rear foglight left side
6277
6278
6279
6280 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Winde, allgemein additional outside lighting winch, general
6281 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Winde, Hubwerk 1 additional outside lighting winch, hoist 1
6284 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Winde, H4 additional outside lighting winch, H4
6285 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Winde, Wippwerk 1 additional outside lighting winch, luffing gear 1
6286 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Winde, Wippwerk 2 additional outside lighting winch, luffing gear 2
6287 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung Winde, Einziehwerk additional outside lighting winch, main boom derricking gear
6288
6289
6290 Zusatzaußenbeleuchtung SLGW additional outside lighting CWC
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300 Blinkanlage allgemein direction indicator general
6301 Blinkanlage, Kontrolleuchte Fahrzeug direction indicator, control light carrier
6302 Blinkanlage, Kontrolleuchte Anhänger direction indicator, control light trailor
191/304


6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310 Blinkanlage UW, allgemein direction indicator carrier, general
6311 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker UW vorne rechts direction indicator carrier, light carrier front right side
6312 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker UW vorne links direction indicator carrier, light carrier front left side
6313 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker UW mitte rechts direction indicator carrier, light carrier middle right side
6314 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker UW mitte links direction indicator carrier, light carrier middle left side
6315 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker UW hinten rechts direction indicator carrier, light carrier rear right side
6316 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker UW hinten links direction indicator carrier, light carrier rear left side
6317 Blinkanlage UW, Blinkgeber direction indicator carrier, flasher relay
6318 Blinkanlage UW, Warnblinkgeber direction indicator carrier, emergency flasher relay
6319
6320 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker Nachläufer rechts direction indicator carrier, light dolly right side
6321 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker Nachläufer links direction indicator carrier, light dolly left side
6322
6323 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker OW rechts direction indicator carrier, light superstructure right side
6324 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker OW links direction indicator carrier, light superstructure left side
6325 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker, Ausleger direction indicator carrier, lamp, boom
6326 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker, Ausleger rechts direction indicator carrier, lamp, boom right side
6327 Blinkanlage UW, Blinker, Ausleger links direction indicator carrier, lamp, boom left side
6328
6329
6330 Blinkanlage OW, allgemein direction indicator superstructure, general
6331 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker UW vorne rechts direction indicator superstructure, light carrier front right side
6332 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker UW vorne links direction indicator superstructure, light carrier front left side
6333 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker UW mitte rechts direction indicator superstructure, light carrier middle right side
6334 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker UW mitte links direction indicator superstructure, light carrier middle left side
6335 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker UW hinten rechts direction indicator superstructure, light carrier rear right side
192/304


6336 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker UW hinten links direction indicator superstructure, light carrier rear left side
6337 Blinkanlage OW, Blinkgeber direction indicator superstructure, flasher relay
6338 Blinkanlage OW, Warnblinkgeber direction indicator superstructure, emergency flasher relay
6339
6340 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker Nachläufer rechts direction indicator superstructure, light dolly right side
6341 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker Nachläufer links direction indicator superstructure, light dolly left side
6342
6343 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker OW rechts direction indicator superstructure, light superstructure right side
6344 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker OW links direction indicator superstructure, light superstructure left side
6345 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker, Ausleger direction indicator superstructure, lamp, boom
6346 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker, Ausleger rechts direction indicator superstructure, lamp, boom right side
6347 Blinkanlage OW, Blinker, Ausleger links direction indicator superstructure, lamp, boom left side
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
193/304


6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400 Rundumleuchten allgemein rotaflare lights general
6401
194/304


6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410 Rundumleuchte UW, allgemein rotaflare light carrier, general
6411 Rundumleuchte UW, vorne rechts rotaflare light carrier, front right side
6412 Rundumleuchte UW, vorne links rotaflare light carrier, front left side
6413 Rundumleuchte UW, hinten rechts rotaflare light carrier, rear right side
6414 Rundumleuchte UW, hinten links rotaflare light carrier, rear left side
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420 Rundumleuchte OW, allgemein rotaflare light superstructure, general
6421 Rundumleuchte OW, vorne rechts rotaflare light superstructure, front right side
6422 Rundumleuchte OW, vorne links rotaflare light superstructure, front left side
6423 Rundumleuchte OW, hinten rechts rotaflare light superstructure, rear right side
6424 Rundumleuchte OW, hinten links rotaflare light superstructure, rear left side
6425 Rundumleuchte OW, hinten rotaflare light superstructure, rear
6426 Rundumleuchte OW, Kabine, allgemein rotaflare light superstructure, cabin, general
6427
6428 Rundumleuchte OW, Kabine, Zusatz STVZO rotaflare light superstructure, cabin, additional STVZO
6429
6430 Rundumleuchte SLGW, allgemein rotaflare light CWC, general
6431 Rundumleuchte SLGW, rechts rotaflare light CWC, right side
6432 Rundumleuchte SLGW, links rotaflare light CWC, left side
6433
6434
195/304


6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
196/304


6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung allgemein marking- / position lighting general
197/304


6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung UW allgemein marking- / position lighting carrier general
6511 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte UW, 1 rechts side marking light carrier, 1 right side
6512 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte UW, 1 links side marking light carrier, 1 left side
6529
6530 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Ausleger, allgemein marking- / position lighting boom, general
6531 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Ausleger, rechts marking- / position lighting boom, right side
6532 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Ausleger, links marking- / position lighting boom, left side
6533
198/304


6534
6535
6536 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Kabine, rechts marking- / position lighting cabin, right side
6537 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Kabine, links marking- / position lighting cabin, left side
6538
6539
6540 Hindernisfeuer allgemein hazard lighting general
6541 Doppelhindernisfeuer, linker Kanal (1) double hazard lighting, left side channel (1)
6542 Doppelhindernisfeuer, rechter Kanal (2) double hazard lighting, right side channel (2)
6543 Hindernisfeuer, Hauptausleger-Kopf (Anschlußkopf HI) L hazard lighting, main boom head (connecting head fly jib ) L
6544 Hindernisfeuer, Hauptausleger-Kopf (Anschlußkopf HI) R hazard lighting, main boom head (connecting head fly jib ) R
6545 Hindernisfeuer, Spitze Hauptausleger / Hilfsausleger links hazard lighting, top section main boom/fly jib L
6546 Hindernisfeuer, Spitze Hauptausleger / Hilfsausleger rechts hazard lighting, top section main boom/fly jib R
6547 Hindernisfeuer, Spitze LF L hazard lighting, top section light fixed fly jibL
6548 Hindernisfeuer, Spitze LF R hazard lighting, top section light fixed fly jibR
6549 Hindernisfeuer, obere Wippstütze L hazard lighting, top luffing mast L
6550 Hindernisfeuer, obere Wippstütze R hazard lighting, top luffing mast R
6551 Hindernisfeuer, untere Wippstütze L hazard lighting, lower luffing mast L
6552 Hindernisfeuer, untere Wippstütze R hazard lighting, lower luffing mast R
6553
6554
6555 Spannungsversorgung, Hindernisfeuer allgemein power supply, hazard lighting general
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung, Gegengewicht allgemein marking- / position lighting, counterweight general
6561 Markierung-/Positionsbeleuchtung Gegengewicht links marking- / position lighting, counterweight L
6562 Markierung-/Positionsbeleuchtung Gegengewicht rechts marking- / position lighting, counterweight R
6563
6564
6565
6566
199/304


6567
6568
6569
6570 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Kabine, allgemein marking- / position lighting cabin, general
6571 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Kabine, rechts marking- / position lighting cabin, right side
6572 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung Kabine, links marking- / position lighting cabin, left side
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580 Markierung- / Positionsbeleuchtung OW, allgemein marking- / position lighting superstructure, general
6581 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte OW, vorne rechts side marking light superstructure, front right side
6582 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte OW, vorne links side marking light superstructure, front left side
6583 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte OW, mitte rechts side marking light superstructure, middle right side
6584 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte OW, mitte links side marking light superstructure, middle left side
6585 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte OW, hinten rechts side marking light superstructure, rear right side
6586 Seitenmarkierungsleuchte OW, hinten links side marking light superstructure, rear left side
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
200/304


6600 Innenbeleuchtung allgemein inside lighting general
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610 Innenbeleuchtung UW allgemein inside lighting carrier general
6611 Innenbeleuchtung UW, Kabine inside lighting carrier, cabin
6612
6613
6614 Innenbeleuchtung UW, Frontpult inside lighting carrier, front panel
6615 Beleuchtung Zentralelektrik UW illumination central electric carrier
6616 Innenbeleuchtung UW, Instrumente inside lighting carrier, instruments
6617
6618
6619
6620 Innenbeleuchtung OW allgemein inside lighting superstructure general
6621 Innenbeleuchtung OW-Kabine inside lighting superstructure cabin
6622 Innenbeleuchtung OW, Container-Schaltraum inside lighting superstructure, container-control room
6623 Innenbeleuchtung OW, Container-Motorraum inside lighting superstructure, container-motor room
6624
6625 Beleuchtung Zentralelektrik OW illumination central electric ss
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630 Instrumentenbeleuchtung UW instrument lighting carrier
6631
6632
201/304


6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640 Instrumentenbeleuchtung OW instrument lighting superstructure
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650 Leseleuchte UW, allgemein map light carrier, general
6651 Leseleuchte UW, Seitenkonsole map light carrier, side console
6652 Leseleuchte UW, Frontkonsole map light carrier, front console
6653 Leseleuchte UW, Fahrersitz map light carrier, drivers seat
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660 Leseleuchte OW, allgemein map light superstructure, general
6661 Leseleuchte OW, Seitenkonsole map light superstructure, side console
6662 Leseleuchte OW, Frontkonsole map light superstructure, front console
6663 Leseleuchte OW, Fahrersitz map light superstructure, drivers seat
6664
6665
202/304


6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
203/304


6699
6700 n.c n.c
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
204/304


6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
205/304


6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
206/304


6798
6799
6800 Generator allgemein generator general
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811 Generator, Abschaltung linker Antrieb generator, cut-off left side drive
6812 Generator, Abschaltung rechter Antrieb generator, cut-off right side drive
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
207/304


6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
208/304


6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
209/304


6897
6898
6899
6900 Zubehör Scheinwerfer allgemein accessories headlights general
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910 Scheinwerferwisch / waschanlage UW, allgemein headlight wipe / washing unit carrier, general
6911 Scheinwerferwisch / waschanlage UW, rechts headlight wipe / washing unit carrier, right side
6912 Scheinwerferwisch / waschanlage UW, linkss headlight wipe / washing unit carrier, left side
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
210/304


6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
211/304


6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
212/304


6996
6997
6998
6999
7000 Begrenzer allgemein limiter general
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
213/304


7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
214/304


7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
215/304


7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100 Begrenzer, Meldeeinrichtung allgemein limiter, signal unit general
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105 Lastmomentbegrenzung, Anzeige >100% intern load moment limiter, control =>100%, intern
7106 Lastmomentbegrenzung, Anzeige >100% extern load moment limiter, control =>100%, extern
7107 Lastmomentbegrenzg., 3-fach Rundumleuchte, GN=0-90%, GE=90-100%, RT=>100% load moment limiter, triple-rotaflare warninglight, GN=0-90%, YE=90-100%, RD=>100%
7108 Lastmomentbegrenzung, Alarmgeber 0>100%, intern load moment limiter, audible alarm intern
7109 Lastmomentbegrenzung, Alarmgeber 0>100%, extern load moment limiter, audible alarm extern
7110 Begrenzer, Warner, Melder allgemein limiter, warning signals, alarm general
7111 Hupe 1 (UW,OW,Gegengewichtswagen) horn 1 (carrier, superstructure, CWC)
7112 Hupe 2 (UW,OW,Gegengewichtswagen) horn 2 (carrier, superstructure, CWC)
7113 Rückfahrsirene reversing siren
7114 Alarmgeber LMB (GB) audible alarm LMI (GB)
7115 Drehwerk, Sirene slewing gear, siren
7116
7117
7118 SLGW, Sirene Betrieb Fahrwerk CWC, siren operating traveling gear
7119
7120 Überwachung UW, allgemein monitoring carrier, general
7121 Überwachung Rückwärtsfahrt, Kamera monitoring reversing, camera
7122 Überwachung Rückwärtsfahrt, Monitor monitoring reversing, monitor
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
216/304


7128
7129
7130 Überwachung Winden OW-Rahmen, Kamera monitoring winches superstructure frame, camera
7131 Überwachung Hubwerk 1, Kamera monitoring hoist 1, camera
7134 Überwachung H4, Kamera monitoring H4, camera
7135 Überwachung H5, Kamera monitoring H5, camera
7136 Überwachung Wippwerk 1, Kamera monitoring luffing gear 1, camera
7137 Überwachung Wippwerk 2, Kamera monitoring luffing gear 2, camera
7138 Überwachung Einziehwerk, Kamera monitoring main boom derricking gear, camera
7139 Überwachung Drehwerk, Kamera monitoring slewing gear, camera
7140 Überwachung OW-Rahmen, Kamera monitoring superstructure frame, camera
7141 Überwachung OW-Rahmen hinten (SLGW), Kamera monitoring superstructure frame rear (CWC), camera
7142
7143 Überwachung HA-Fuß, Kamera monitoring foot-section main-boom, camera
7144
7145 Überwachung Mast-Fuß, Kamera monitoring foot-section sl-mast, camera
7146 Überwachung A-Bock, Kamera monitoring a-frame, camera
7147 Überwachung A-Bock, Zusatzkamera monitoring a-frame, additional camera
7148
7149
7150 Überwachung Umschalterbox Kamera, allgemein monitoring change-over switch case camera, general
7151 Überwachung Umschalterbox Kamera 1 monitoring change-over switch case camera 1
7158
7159
7160 Überwachung Monitor, allgemein monitoring monitor, general
217/304


7161 Überwachung Monitor 1 monitoring monitor 1
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170 Überwachung Umschalterbox Monitor, allgemein monitoring change-over switch case monitor, general
7171 Überwachung Umschalterbox Monitor 1 monitoring change-over switch case monitor 1
7174
7175 Überwachung OW, Spannungsversorgung 24DAC / 12VDC monitoring superstructure, power supply voltage reducer 24DAC / 12VDC
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
218/304


7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200 Totmannabschaltung dead man cut-off
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205 Endstellung Einziehwerk-Schwinge Schrägzug limit position derricking gear inclination equaliser beam
7206 Endstellung Einziehwerk-Schwinge Schrägzug, Überbrückung limit position derricking gear inclination equaliser beam, by-pass
7207
7208
7209
7210 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Drehen allgemein operating range limit slewing general
7211 Endstellung OW nach hinten limit position superstructure to the rear
7212 Endstellung OW zur Seite (Pos. 90° bzw. 270°) limit position superstructure to the side (pos. 90° 270° resp.)
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Wippen Hauptausleger allgemein operating range limit luffing main boom general
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Hauptausleger-Abstützung eingefahren, links operating range limit main boom back-stops retracted, left side
7226 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Hauptausleger-Abstützung eingefahren, rechts operating range limit main boom back-stops retracted, right side
219/304


7227
7228
7229
7230 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Wippen HI allgemein operating range limit luffing fly jib general
7231 Endstellung wipp. HI heben Arbeitsstellg. 1 limit position luffing fly jib lift operating position 1
7232 Endstellung wipp. HI heben Arbeitsstellg. 2 limit position luffing fly jib lift operating position 2
7233 Endstellung wipp. HI heben Positionskontr. Zylinder 1 im Eingriff luffing fly jib in min. radius limit position monitoring cylinder 1 in contact
7234 Endstellung wipp. HI heben Positionskontr. Zylinder 2 im Eingriff luffing fly jib in min. radius limit position monitoring cylinder 2 in contact
7235 Endstellung wipp. HI heben Positionskontr. Zylinder kpl. eingefahren luffing fly jib in min. radius limit position monitoring cylinder 1 complete retracted
7236 Endstellung wipp. HI senken ohne angebautem Rollensatz limit position luffing fly jib lower without set of sheaves fixed
7237 Endstellung wipp. HI senken mit angebautem Rollensatz limit position luffing fly jib lower set of sheaves fixed
7238 Kontrolle Rollensatz angebaut monitoring set of sheaves assembled
7239
7240 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Superlift allgemein operating range limit Superlift general
7241 Traverse Wippwerk 2 zusammen gefahren, links bridle luffing gear 2 pulled-in completely, left side
7242 Traverse Wippwerk 2 zusammen gefahren, rechts bridle luffing gear 2 pulled-in completely, right side
7243 Abstützung SL-Mast eingefahren, links SL-mast back-stops retracted, left side
7244 Abstützung SL-Mast eingefahren, rechts SL-mast back-stops retracted, right side
7245 Sl-Gegengewicht Bodenkontaktkontrolle SL-counterweight tray tray monitoring ground contact
7246 Endstellung Verbindungsrahen OW zum Superliftgegengewicht limit position connecting frame superstructure zum SL-counterweight tray tray
7247
7248
7249
7250 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung Teleskopieren Hauptausleger allgemein operating range limit retract/extend tele main boom general
7251 Tele eingefahren allgemein telesection retracted general
7252 Tele 1 eingefahren telesection 1 retracted
7258
7259
220/304


7260 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung teleskopieren HAV allgemein operating range limit extend/retract tele main boom V general
7261 Schwenkachse HAV verbolzen pin locking of slewing axle main boom extension
7262 Schwenkachse HAV entbolzen locking off locking of slewing axle main boom extension
7263 HAV abklappen spread main boom extension
7264 HAV anklappen swing main boom extension
7265
7266 HAV Motor starten engine start main boom extention
7267 HAV Motor stoppen engine stop main boom extention
7268 Betriebsart wippbare HAV operating mode tilting main boom extention
7269
7270 Hubendschalter Überbrückung allgemein hoist limit switch, by-pass general
7271 Hubendschalter Rollensatz Anschlußkopf links hoist limit switch, set of sheaves connecting head, left side
7272 Hubendschalter Rollensatz Anschlußkopf rechts hoist limit switch, set of sheaves connecting head, right side
7273 Hubendschalter Spitze Hauptausleger / Hilfsausleger, Rollensatz 1, links hoist limit switch, top section main boom/fly jib,set of sheaves 1, left side
7274 Hubendschalter Spitze Hauptausleger / Hilfsausleger, Rollensatz 1, rechts hoist limit switch, top section main boom/fly jib,set of sheaves 1, right side
7275 Hubendschalter Spitze Hauptausleger / Hilfsausleger, Rollensatz 2, links hoist limit switch, top section main boom/fly jib, set of sheaves 2, left side
7276 Hubendschalter Spitze Hauptausleger / Hilfsausleger, Rollensatz 2, rechts hoist limit switch, top section main boom/fly jib, set of sheaves 2, right side
7277 Hubendschalter Starrer HI links hoist limit switch, fixed fly jib left side
7278 Hubendschalter Starrer HI rechts hoist limit switch, fixed fly jib right side
7279 Hubendschalter Runner links hoist limit switch, runner left side
7280 Hubendschalter Runner rechts hoist limit switch, runner right side
7281
7282
7283
7284 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung A-Bock nach vorne, Kontrolle Position SL-Mast links operating range limit a-frame,control position SL-mast left side
7285
7286 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung A-Bock nach vorne operating range limit a-frame, to front
7287 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung A-Bock nach hinten, mit A-Bock-Zylinder operating range a-frame limit to the rear, with cyl. A-frame
7288 Arbeitsbereichsbegrenzung A-Bock nach hinten, ohne A-Bock-Zylinder operating range a-frame limit to the rear, without cyl. A-frame
7289
7290 Senkendschalter allgemein lowering limit switches general
7291 Senkendschalter Hubwerk 1 lowering limit switches hoist 1
221/304


7294 Senkendschalter H4 lowering limit switches H4
7295 Senkendschalter H5 lowering limit switches H5
7296 Senkendschalter Wippwerk 1 lowering limit switches luffing gear 1
7297 Senkendschalter Wippwerk 2 lowering limit switches luffing gear 2
7298 Senkendschalter Einziehwerk lowering limit switches main boom derricking gear
7299
7300 Druckerfassung allgemein pressure determination general
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310 Druckerfassung Winden allgemein pressure determination winches general
7311 Druckerfassung Hubwerk 1 pressure determination hoist 1
7314 Druckerfassung H4 pressure determination H4
7315 Druckerfassung H5 pressure determination H5
7316 Druckerfassung Wippwerk 1 pressure determination luffing gear 1
7317 Druckerfassung Wippwerk 2 pressure determination luffing gear 2
7318 Druckerfassung Einziehwerk / Wippzylinder pressure determination main boom derricking gear / luffing cylinder
7319
7320 Druckerfassung Arbeitskreise/Vorsteuerkreise allgemein pressure determination operating circuits/pilot control circuits general
7321 Druckerfassung Kreis1 pressure determination circuit 1
7322 Druckerfassung Kreis 2 pressure determination circuit 2
7323 Druckerfassung Kreis 3 pressure determination circuit 3
7324 Druckerfassung GW pressure determination CWC
7325 Druckerfassung Nachsaugung pressure determination anti cavitation
222/304


7326 Druckerfassung Pumpenverstellung Kreis 1 pressure determination pump adjustment circuit 1
7329 Druckerfassung Pumpenverstellung GW pressure determination pump adjustment CWC
7330 Druckerfassung Abstützungen Ausleger allgemein pressure determination back-stops boom general
7331 Druckerfassung Hauptausleger-Abstützung pressure determination main boom back-stops
7332 Druckerfassung A-Bock-Zylinder pressure determination a-frame cylinder
7333 Druckerfassung SL-Abstützung pressure determination SL-mast back-stops
7334 Druckerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder pressure determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder
7335 Druckerfassung HI-Abstützung pressure determination fly jib back-stops
7336 Druckerfassung Pumpenverstellung Drehwerk pressure determination pump adjustment slewing gear
7337 Druckerfassung Bremse Raupenfahrwerk, UW pressure determination brake crawler, undercarriage
7338 Druckerfassung linker Antrieb SLGW pressure determination left drive CWC
7339 Druckerfassung rechter Antrieb SLGW pressure determination right drive CWC
7340 Load Sensing, allgemein load sensing, general
7341 Load Sensing, Pumpendruck 1 load sensing, pump pressure 1
7342 Load Sensing, Pumpendruck 2 load sensing, pump pressure 2
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351 Load Sensing, LS-Druck 1 load sensing, LS-pressure 1
7352 Load Sensing, LS-Druck 2 load sensing, LS-pressure 2
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
223/304


7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
224/304


7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400 Krafterfassung allgemein force determination general
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411 Krafterfassung, Abspannung Hauptausleger force determination, pendants main boom
7412
7413
7414
7415 Krafterfassung, Anschlußkopf HI links force determination, connecting head fly jib left side
7416 Krafterfassung, Anschlußkopf HI rechts force determination, connecting head fly jib right side
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421 Krafterfassung, Abspannung wippbarer Hilfsausleger force determination, pendants luffing fly jib
7422
7423
7424
225/304


7425 Krafterfassung, Spitze HA/HI links force determination, top section main boom/fly jib left side
7426 Krafterfassung, Spitze HA/HI rechts force determination, top section main boom/fly jib right side
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431 Krafterfassung, Abspannung starrer Hifsausleger force determination, pendants fixed fly jib
7432
7433
7434
7435 Krafterfassung, Hubseilfestpunkt force determination, fixed hoist rope point
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441 Krafterfassung, Abspannung Verlängerung 1 force determination, pendants extension 1
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451 Krafterfassung, Abspannung Verlängerung 2 force determination, pendants extension 2
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
226/304


7458
7459
7460
7461 Krafterfassung, Abspannung Runner force determination, pendants runner
7462 Krafterfassung, Abspannung schwerer Runner force determination, pendants heavy runner
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471 Krafterfassung, Einziehwerk (links) force determination, main boom derricking gear (left side)
7472 Krafterfassung, Einziehwerk (rechts) force determination, main boom derricking gear (right side)
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
227/304


7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500 Winkelerfassung allgemein angle determination general
7501 Winkelerfassung, Fuß Hauptausleger angle determination, main boom-foot section
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511 Winkelerfassung, Hauptausleger-Grundkasten angle determination, basic boom section
7512
7513 Winkelerfassung, Hauptausleger-Kopf angle determination, main boom head
7514
7515 Winkelerfassung, Anschlußkopf HI angle determination, connecting head fly jib
7516
7517 Winkelerfassung, Kraftmeßdoße Anschlußkopf angle determination, load cell connecting head
7518
7519
7520
7521 Winkelerfassung, Fuß wippbarer HI angle determination, luffing fly jib foot
7522
7523 Winkelerfassung, Spitze wippbarer HI angle determination, top section luffing fly jib
228/304


7524
7525 Winkelerfassung, Spitze HA/HI angle determination, top section main boom/fly jib
7526 Winkelerfassung, Kraftmeßdoße Spitze HA/HI angle determination, load cell top section main boom/fly jib
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531 Winkelerfassung, Fuß starrer HI angle determination, fixed fly jib foot
7532
7533 Winkelerfassung, Spitze starrer HI angle determination, top section fixed fly jib
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541 Winkelerfassung, Fuß Verlängerung 1 angle determination, main boom extension 1 foot
7542
7543 Winkelerfassung, Spitze Verlängerung 1 angle determination, top section extension 1
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551 Winkelerfassung, Fuß Verlängerung 2 angle determination, main boom extension 2 foot
7552
7553 Winkelerfassung, Spitze Verlängerung 2 angle determination, top section extension 2
7554
7555
7556
229/304


7557
7558
7559
7560
7561 Winkelerfassung, Fuß SL-Mast angle determination, foot SL-mast
7562
7563 Winkelerfassung, Spitze SL-Mast angle determination, top section SL-mast
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571 Winkelerfassung, Fuß A-Bock angle determination, A-frame foot
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
230/304


7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600 Längenerfassung allgemein length determination general
7601 Teleleitsystem tele supporting system
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610 Längenerfassung, Hauptausleger allgemein length determination, main boom general
7611 Längenerfassung, Hauptausleger, Tele1 length determination, main boom, telesection 1
7612 Längenerfassung, Hauptausleger, Tele2 length determination, main boom, telesection2
7615 Längenerfassung, Hauptausleger, Tele5 length determination, main boom, telesection 5
7616 Längenerfassung, Hauptausleger, Tele6 length determination, main boom, tele 6
7617
7618
7619
7620 Längenerfassung, Hilfsausleger allgemein length determination, fly jib general
7621 Längenerfassung, wippbarer Hilfsausleger length determination, luffing fly jib
7622 Längenerfassung, starrer Hilfsausleger length determination, fixed fly jib
231/304


7623 Längenerfassung, Verlängerung 1 length determination, extension 1
7624 Längenerfassung, Verlängerung 2 length determination, extension 2
7625 Längenerfassung, Runner length determination, runner
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630 Längenerfassung, Sonstiges allgemein length determination, other, general
7631 Längenerfassung, SVE length determination, SVE
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641 Längenerfassung, SL-Telezyinder length determination, sl-tele.-cylinder
7642
7643
7644
7645 Längenerfassung, SL-Traverse length determination, sl-tray
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650 Höhenerfassung, SL-Traverse, allgemein level determination, sl-tray, general
7651 Höhenerfassung, SL-Traverse, links level determination, sl-tray, left side
7652 Höhenerfassung, SL-Traverse, rechts level determination, sl-tray, right side
7653
7654
7655
232/304


7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
233/304


7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700 Neigung, Drehwinkel allgemein inclination, operating range general
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710 Neigung allgemein inclination, general
7711 Neigung UW inclination, carrier
7712
7713
7714
7715
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721 Neigung OW inclination, superstructure
234/304


7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731 Neigung, Unterflasche inclination, hook block
7732
7733
7734
7735
7736
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741 Neigung, Verbindungsrahmen Superlift inclination, connecting frame for superlift
7742
7743
7744
7745
7746
7747
7748
7749
7750 Drehwinkel,OW allgemein operating range, superstructure general
7751 OW kontinuierlich superstructure continuous
7752 OW 180° superstructure 180°
7753 OW 0° superstructure 0°
7754 OW -10° superstructure -10°
235/304


7755 OW +10° superstructure +10°
7756 OW verbolzt superstructure pinned
7757 OW entbolzt superstructure locking offned
7758
7759
7760 Drehwinkel, SLGW allgemein operating range, CWC general
7761 Drehwinkel, SLGW, Drehschemel 1, kontinuierlich operating range, CWC, swivelling bolster waggon 1, continuous
7762 Drehwinkel, SLGW, Drehschemel 2, kontinuierlich operating range, CWC, swivelling bolster waggon 2, continuous
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776
7777
7778
7779
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
236/304


7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
7800 Geschwindigkeit, Drehzahl allgemein velocity, speed general
7801 Tachogeber UW velocity sensor carrier
7802
7803
7804
7805 Tachogeber OW velocity sensor superstructure
7806
7807
7808
7809
7810 Geschwindigkeit, Wind, allgemein wind speed, general
7811 Geschwindigkeit, Wind, Hauptausleger wind speed, main boom
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
237/304


7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850 Drehzahl allgemein speed of rotation general
7851 Drehzahl, Hubwerk 1 speed of rotation, hoist 1
238/304


7854 Drehzahl, H4 speed of rotation, H4
7855 Drehzahl, H5 speed of rotation, H5
7856 Drehzahl, Wippwerk 1 speed of rotation, luffing gear 1
7857 Drehzahl, Wippwerk 2 speed of rotation, luffing gear 2
7858 Drehzahl, Einziehwerk speed of rotation, main boom derricking gear
7859 Drehzahl, Drehwerk speed of rotation, slewing gear
7860 Zusatzdrehzahl, allgemein additional speed of rotation, general
7861 Zusatzdrehzahl, Hubwerk 1 additional speed of rotation, hoist 1
7864 Zusatzdrehzahl, H4 additional speed of rotation, H4
7865 Zusatzdrehzahl, H5 additional speed of rotation, H5
7866 Zusatzdrehzahl, Wippwerk 1 additional speed of rotation, luffing gear 1
7867 Zusatzdrehzahl, Wippwerk 2 additional speed of rotation, luffing gear 2
7868 Zusatzdrehzahl, Einziehwerk additional speed of rotation, main boom derricking gear
7869 Zusatzdrehzahl, Drehwerk additional speed of rotation, slewing gear
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
239/304


7887
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900 Sonstiges allgemein other, general
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909 Überbrückung allgemein by-pass general
7910 Überbrückung allgemein UW by-pass general carrier
7911
7912
7913
7914 Überbrückung allgemein OW by-pass general superstructure
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
240/304


7920 Sonstiges, Leistung, Belastung allgemein other, performance, load general
7921 Leistungsbegrenzer kpl. performance limiter complete
7922
7923 Belastungskontrolle allgemein loading monitoring general
7924 Belastungskontrolle kpl. Überbrückt loading monitoring complete by-passed
7925 Belastungskontrolle überbrückt bei Ausladungsverringerung loading monitoring by-passed with decreasing operating radius
7926
7927
7928
7929
7930 Drehmelder, allgemein rotation indicator, general
7931 Drehmelder Hubwerk 1 rotation indicator hoist 1
7935 Drehmelder Wippwerk 1 rotation indicator luffing gear 1
7936 Drehmelder Wippwerk 2 rotation indicator luffing gear 2
7937 Drehmelder Einziehwerk rotation indicator main boom derricking gear
7938
7939
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
241/304


7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7960
7961
7962
7963
7964
7965
7966
7967
7968
7969
7970
7971
7972
7973
7974
7975
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
7983
7984
7985
242/304


7986
7987
7988
7989
7990
7991
7992
7993
7994
7995
7996
7997
7998
7999
8000 Vorsteuerung allgemein pilot control general
8001 Vorsteuerung, Hebelgeber 1 (Joy-Stick) pilot control, joy stick 1
8004
8005 Vorsteuerung, Schnellgang allgemein pilot control, high speed general
8006 Vorsteuerung, Fußfahrgeber 1 pilot control, throttle pedal 1
8009 Vorsteuerung, Funkempfänger pilot control, radio receiver
8010 Druckzuschaltung allgemein pressure increase general
8011 Druckzuschaltung, Kreis 1 pressure increase, circuit 1
8014 Freigabe Vorsteuerdruck WW senken enable pilot control luffing gear
8015 Freigabe Vorsteuerdruck HW1 senken enable pilot control hoist 1 lowering
8016 Freigabe Vorsteuerdruck HW2 senken enable pilot control hoist 2 lowering
8017 Freigabe Vorsteuerdruck HW2 heben enable pilot control hoist 2 lifting
8018
243/304


8019
8020 Fernbedienung, allgemein Remote control, general
8021 Fernbedienung, Empfänger Remote control, receiver
8022 Fernbedienung, Sender Remote control, transmitter
8023 Fernbedienung, Antenne Remote control, antenna
8024
8025
8026
8027
8028
8029
8030 Fernbedienung UW, allgemein Remote control, carrier, general
8031 Fernbedienung UW, Empfänger Remote control, carrier, receiver
8032 Fernbedienung UW, Sender Remote control, carrier, transmitter
8033 Fernbedienung UW, Antenne Remote control, carrier, antenna
8034
8035
8036
8037
8038
8039
8040 Fernbedienung OW, allgemein Remote control, superstructure, general
8041 Fernbedienung OW, Empfänger Remote control, superstructure, receiver
8042 Fernbedienung OW, Sender Remote control, superstructure, transmitter
8043 Fernbedienung OW, Antenne Remote control, superstructure, antenna
8044
8045
8046
8047
8048
8049
8050 Sonderfunktionen Hydraulik special functions hydraulic system
8051 Zusammenschaltung Pumpenkreise add pump circuits
244/304


8052
8053
8054
8055
8056
8057
8058
8059
8060
8061
8062
8063
8064
8065
8066
8067
8068
8069
8070
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
8078
8079
8080
8081
8082
8083
8084
245/304


8085
8086
8087
8088
8089
8090
8091
8092
8093
8094
8095
8096
8097
8098
8099
8100 Hubwerk 1, allgemein hoist 1, general
8101 Hubwerk 1, Vorwahl Hauptkreis hoist 1, pre-selection main circuit
8102 Hubwerk 1, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis hoist 1, pre-selection additional circuit
8103
8104
8105 Hubwerk 1, Schnellgang hoist 1, high speed
8106 Hubwerk 1, Trimot hoist 1, trimot
8107 Hubwerk 1, Druckerhöhung hoist 1, pressure increase
8108 Hubwerk 1, Spülung hoist 1, flushing
8109
8111 Hubwerk 1 heben, Hauptkreis hoist 1 lift, main circuit
8112 Hubwerk 1 senken, Hauptkreis hoist 1 lower, main circuit
8113 Hubwerk 1 heben, Zusatzkreis hoist 1 lift, additional circuit
8114 Hubwerk 1 senken, Zusatzkreis hoist 1 lower, additional circuit
8115 Hubwerk 1 heben, Bremse hoist 1 lift, brake
8116 Hubwerk 1 senken, Bremse hoist 1 lower, brake
8117 Hubwerk 1 senken, Abschaltung-Senkbremsventil hoist 1 lower, cut-off-lowering brake valve
246/304


8118
8119
8120 Hubwerk 1.2, allgemein hoist 1.2, general
8121 Hubwerk 1.2 heben, Hauptkreis hoist 1.2 lift, main circuit
8122 Hubwerk 1.2 senken, Hauptkreis hoist 1.2 lower, main circuit
8123 Hubwerk 1.2 heben, Zusatzkreis hoist 1.2 lift, additional circuit
8124 Hubwerk 1.2 senken, Zusatzkreis hoist 1.2 lower, additional circuit
8125 Hubwerk 1.2 heben, Bremse hoist 1.2 lift, brake
8126 Hubwerk 1.2 senken, Bremse hoist 1.2 lower, brake
8127 Hubwerk 1.2 senken, Abschaltung-Senkbremsventil hoist 1.2 lower, cut-off-lowering brake valve
8128
8129
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8138
8139
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8148
8149
8150
247/304


8151
8152
8153
8154
8155
8156
8157
8158
8159
8160
8161
8162
8163
8164
8165
8166
8167
8168
8169
8170
8171
8172
8173
8174
8175
8176
8177
8178
8179
8180
8181
8182
8183
248/304


8184
8185
8186
8187
8188
8189
8190
8191
8192
8193
8194
8195
8196
8197
8198
8199
8203
8204
8209
249/304


8218 Hubwerk 2 Freigabe Pumpe1 Hoist 2 enable pump 1
8219 Hubwerk 2 Freigabe Pumpe2 Hoist 2 enable pump 2
8220 Hubwerk 2.2, Kreis, allgemein hoist 2.2, circuit, general
8228
8229
8230
8231
8232
8233
8234
8235
8236
8237
8238
8239
8240
8241
8242
8243
8244
8245
8246
8247
8248
8249
250/304


8250
8251
8252
8253
8254
8255
8256
8257
8258
8259
8260
8261
8262
8263
8264
8265
8266
8267
8268
8269
8270
8271
8272
8273
8274
8275
8276
8277
8278
8279
8280
8281
8282
251/304


8283
8284
8285
8286
8287
8288
8289
8290
8291
8292
8293
8294
8295
8296
8297
8298
8299
8303
8304
8309
252/304


8318
8319
8320 Hubwerk 3.2, allgemein hoist 3.2, general
8328
8329
8330 Hubzylinder Haken (Kreis Hubwerk 3) allgemein lift cylinder hook (circuit hoist 3) general
8331 Hubzylinder Haken (Kreis Hubwerk 3), Vorwahl Hauptkreis lift cylinder hook (circuit hoist 3), pre-selection main circuit
8332
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337
8338
8339
8340
8341
8342
8343
8344
8345
8346
8347
8348
253/304


8349
8350
8351
8352
8353
8354
8355
8356
8357
8358
8359
8360
8361
8362
8363
8364
8365
8366
8367
8368
8369
8370
8371
8372
8373
8374
8375
8376
8377
8378
8379
8380
8381
254/304


8382
8383
8384
8385
8386
8387
8388
8389
8390
8391
8392
8393
8394
8395
8396
8397
8398
8399
8400 Wippwerk 1, allgemein luffing gear 1, general
8401 Wippwerk 1, Vorwahl Hauptkreis luffing gear 1, pre-selection main circuit
8402 Wippwerk 1, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis luffing gear 1, pre-selection additional circuit
8403
8404
8405 Wippwerk 1, Schnellgang luffing gear 1, high speed
8406 Wippwerk 1, Trimot luffing gear 1, trimot
8407
8408 Wippwerk 1, Spülung luffing gear 1, flushing
8409
8411 Wippwerk 1 heben, Hauptkreis luffing gear 1 lift, main circuit
8412 Wippwerk 1 senken, Hauptkreis luffing gear 1 lower, main circuit
8413 Wippwerk 1 heben, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 1 lift, additional circuit
8414 Wippwerk 1 senken, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 1 lower, additional circuit
255/304


8415 Wippwerk 1 heben, Bremse luffing gear 1 lift, brake
8416 Wippwerk 1 senken, Bremse luffing gear 1 lower, brake
8417 Wippwerk senken, Bremse luffing gear lower,brake
8418
8419
8420 Wippwerk 1.2 allgemein luffing gear 1.2 general
8421 Wippwerk 1.2 heben, Hauptkreis luffing gear 1.2 lift, main circuit
8422 Wippwerk 1.2 senken, Hauptkreis luffing gear 1.2 lower, main circuit
8423 Wippwerk 1.2 heben, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 1.2 lift, additional circuit
8424 Wippwerk 1.2 senken, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 1.2 lower, additional circuit
8425 Wippwerk 1.2 heben, Bremse luffing gear 1.2 lift, brake
8426 Wippwerk 1.2 senken, Bremse luffing gear 1.2 lower, brake
8427
8428
8429
8430
8431
8432
8433
8434
8435
8436
8437
8438
8439
8440
8441
8442
8443
8444
8445
8446
8447
256/304


8448
8449
8450
8451
8452
8453
8454
8455
8456
8457
8458
8459
8460
8461
8462
8463
8464
8465
8466
8467
8468
8469
8470
8471
8472
8473
8474
8475
8476
8477
8478
8479
8480
257/304


8481
8482
8483
8484
8485
8486
8487
8488
8489
8490
8491
8492
8493
8494
8495
8496
8497
8498
8499
8501 Wippwerk 2, Vorwahl Hauptkreis luffing gear 2, pre-selection main circuit
8502 Wippwerk 2, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis luffing gear 2, pre-selection additional circuit
8503
8504
8505 Wippwerk 2, Schnellgang luffing gear 2, high speed
8506 Wippwerk 2, Trimot Hauptkreis luffing gear 2, trimot main circuit
8507 Wippwerk 2, Trimot Zusatzkreis luffing gear 2, trimot additional circuit
8508 Wippwerk 2, Spülung luffing gear 2, flushing
8509
8511 Wippwerk 2 heben, Hauptkreis luffing gear 2 lift, main circuit
8512 Wippwerk 2 senken, Hauptkreis luffing gear 2 lower, main circuit
8513 Wippwerk 2 heben, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 2 lift, additional circuit
258/304


8514 Wippwerk 2 senken, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 2 lower, additional circuit
8515 Wippwerk 2 heben, Bremse luffing gear 2 lift, brake
8516 Wippwerk 2 senken, Bremse luffing gear 2 lower, brake
8517
8518
8519
8520 Wippwerk 2.2, allgemein luffing gear 2.2, general
8521 Wippwerk 2.2 heben, Hauptkreis luffing gear 2.2 lift, main circuit
8522 Wippwerk 2.2 senken, Hauptkreis luffing gear 2.2 lower, main circuit
8523 Wippwerk 2.2 heben, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 2.2 lift, additional circuit
8524 Wippwerk 2.2 senken, Zusatzkreis luffing gear 2.2 lower, additional circuit
8525 Wippwerk 2.2 heben, Bremse luffing gear 2.2 lift, brake
8526 Wippwerk 2.2 senken, Bremse luffing gear 2.2 lower, brake
8527
8528
8529
8530
8531
8532
8533
8534
8535
8536
8537
8538
8539
8540
8541
8542
8543
8544
8545
8546
259/304


8547
8548
8549
8550
8551
8552
8553
8554
8555
8556
8557
8558
8559
8560
8561
8562
8563
8564
8565
8566
8567
8568
8569
8570
8571
8572
8573
8574
8575
8576
8577
8578
8579
260/304


8580
8581
8582
8583
8584
8585
8586
8587
8588
8589
8590
8591
8592
8593
8594
8595
8596
8597
8598
8599
8600 Einziehwerk, allgemein main boom derricking gear, general
8601 Einziehwerk, Vorwahl Hauptkreis main boom derricking gear, pre-selection main circuit
8602 Einziehwerk, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis main boom derricking gear, pre-selection additional circuit
8603
8604
8605 Einziehwerk, Schnellgang main boom derricking gear, high speed
8606 Einziehwerk, Trimot Hauptkreis main boom derricking gear, trimot main circuit
8607 Einziehwerk, Trimot Zusatzkreis main boom derricking gear, trimot additional circuit
8608 Einziehwerk, Spülung main boom derricking gear, flushing
8609
8610 Einziehwerk, Kreis, allgemein main boom derricking gear, circuit, general
8611 Einziehwerk heben, Hauptkreis main boom derricking gear lift, main circuit
8612 Einziehwerk senken, Hauptkreis main boom derricking gear lower, main circuit
261/304


8613 Einziehwerk heben, Zusatzkreis main boom derricking gear lift, additional circuit
8614 Einziehwerk senken, Zusatzkreis main boom derricking gear lower, additional circuit
8615 Einziehwerk heben, Bremse main boom derricking gear lift, brake
8616 Einziehwerk senken, Bremse main boom derricking gear lower, brake
8617
8618
8619
8620 Einziehwerk 2,Kreis, allgemein main boom derricking gear 2, circuit, general
8621 Einziehwerk 2 heben, Hauptkreis main boom derricking gear 2 lift, main circuit
8622 Einziehwerk 2 senken, Hauptkreis main boom derricking gear 2 lower, main circuit
8623 Einziehwerk 2 heben, Zusatzkreis main boom derricking gear 2 lift, additional circuit
8624 Einziehwerk 2 senken, Zusatzkreis main boom derricking gear 2 lower, additional circuit
8625 Einziehwerk 2 heben, Bremse main boom derricking gear 2 lift, brake
8626 Einziehwerk 2 senken, Bremse main boom derricking gear 2 lower, brake
8627
8628
8629
8630
8631
8632
8633
8634
8635
8636
8637
8638
8639
8640
8641
8642
8643
8644
8645
262/304


8646
8647
8648
8649
8650
8651
8652
8653
8654
8655
8656
8657
8658
8659
8660
8661
8662
8663
8664
8665
8666
8667
8668
8669
8670
8671
8672
8673
8674
8675
8676
8677
8678
263/304


8679
8680
8681
8682
8683
8684
8685
8686
8687
8688
8689
8690
8691
8692
8693
8694
8695
8696
8697
8698
8699
8700 Hilfswinde R1 / R2 allgemein reeving winch R1 / R2 general
8701
8702
8703
8704
8705
8706
8707
8708
8709
8710 Hilfswinde R1 allgemein reeving winch general
8711 Hilfswinde R1, Vorwahl Hauptkreis reeving winch, pre-selection main circuit
264/304


8712 Hilfswinde R1, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis reeving winch, pre-selection additional circuit
8713
8714
8715 Hilfswinde R1, Freigabe Bremse reeving winch, enable brake
8716 Hilfswinde R1, Freigabe Mooring reeving winch, enable mooring
8717
8718
8719
8720
8721
8722
8723
8724
8725
8726
8727
8728
8729
8730
8731
8732
8733
8734
8735
8736
8737
8738
8739
8740
8741
8742
8743
8744
265/304


8745
8746
8747
8748
8749
8750 R2 allgemein R2 general
8751 R2, Vorwahl Hauptkreis R2, pre-selection main circuit
8752 R2, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis R2, pre-selection additional circuit
8753
8754
8755 R2, Freigabe Bremse R2, enable brake
8756
8757
8758
8759
8760
8761
8762
8763
8764
8765
8766
8767
8768
8769
8770
8771
8772
8773
8774
8775
8776
8777
266/304


8778
8779
8780
8781
8782
8783
8784
8785
8786
8787
8788
8789
8790
8791
8792
8793
8794
8795
8796
8797
8798
8799
8800 Drehwerk, allgemein slewing gear, general
8801 Drehwerk, Hauptkreis, links slewing gear, main circuit, left side
8802 Drehwerk, Hauptkreis, rechts slewing gear, main circuit, right side
8803 Drehwerk, Zusatzkreis, links slewing gear, additional circuit, left side
8804 Drehwerk, Zusatzkreis, rechts slewing gear, additional circuit, right side
8805 Drehwerk, Standbremse slewing gear, parking brake
8806 Drehwerk, Prop.bremse slewing gear, proportional brake
8807 Drehwerk, Feststellbremse, Druckkontrolle slewing gear, locking brake, pressure check
8808
8809
8810 Drehwerk, Freigang slewing gear, free wheeling
267/304


8811 Drehwerk, vorne, offener Kreis, drehen links slewing gear, front, open circuit, slew left side
8812 Drehwerk, vorne, offener Kreis, drehen rechts slewing gear, front, open circuit, slew right side
8813 Drehwerk, hinten, offener Kreis, drehen links slewing gear, rear, open circuit, slew left side
8814 Drehwerk, hinten, offener Kreis, drehen rechts slewing gear, rear, open circuit, slew right side
8815 Drehwerk offener Kreis, drehen links slewing gear, open cirquit, left side
8816 Drehwerk offener Kreis, drehen rechts slewing gear, open cirquit, right side
8817 Drehwerk Umschaltung offener / geschlossener Kreis slewing gear, toggle open / closed cirquit
8818
8819
8820 Drehwerk, Schnellgang slewing gear, high speed
8821
8822
8823
8824
8825
8826
8827
8828
8829
8830
8831
8832
8833
8834
8835
8836
8837
8838
8839
8840
8841
8842
8843
268/304


8844
8845
8846
8847
8848
8849
8850
8851
8852
8853
8854
8855
8856
8857
8858
8859
8860
8861
8862
8863
8864
8865
8866
8867
8868
8869
8870
8871
8872
8873
8874
8875
8876
269/304


8877
8878
8879
8880
8881
8882
8883
8884
8885
8886
8887
8888
8889
8890
8891
8892
8893
8894
8895
8896
8897
8898
8899
8900 Raupenfahrwerk am OW allgemein crawlers on superstructure general
8901 Raupenfahrwerk am OW, Vorwahl Hauptkreise crawlers on superstructure, pre-selection main circuits
8902 Raupenfahrwerk am OW, Vorwahl Zusatzkreis (Tailing) crawlers on superstructure, pre-selection additional circuit (tailing)
8903 Raupenfahrwerk am OW, Vorwahl Betrieb mit Fußverstellung crawlers on superstructure, pre-selection operation with foot operation
8904
8905 Raupenfahrwerk am OW, Bremse crawlers on superstructure, brake
8906 Raupenfahrwerk am OW, Schnellgang crawlers on superstructure, high speed
8907
8908 Raupenfahrwerk, Spülung crawler, flushing
8909
270/304


8910 Linke Raupe allgemein left crawler general
8911 linke Raupe vorwärts left crawler forward
8912 linke Raupe rückwärts left crawler reversing
8913
8914
8915 linke Raupe vorwärts (Tailing-Betrieb) left crawler forward (tailing operation)
8916 linke Raupe rückwärts (Tailing-Betrieb) left crawler reversing (tailing operation)
8917
8918
8919
8920
8921
8922
8923
8924
8925
8926
8927
8928
8929
8930
8931
8932
8933
8934
8935
8936
8937
8938
8939
8940
8941
8942
271/304


8943
8944
8945
8946
8947
8948
8949
8950 Rechte Raupe allgemein right crawler general
8951 rechte Raupe vorwärts right crawler forward
8952 rechte Raupe rückwärts right crawler reversing
8953
8954
8955 rechte Raupe vorwärts (Tailing-Betrieb) right crawler forward (tailing operation)
8956 rechte Raupe rückwärts (Tailing-Betrieb) right crawler reversing (tailing operation)
8957
8958
8959
8960
8961
8962
8963
8964
8965
8966
8967
8968
8969
8970
8971
8972
8973
8974
8975
272/304


8976
8977
8978
8979
8980
8981
8982
8983
8984
8985
8986
8987
8988
8989
8990
8991
8992
8993
8994
8995
8996
8997
8998
8999
9000 Telezylinder allgemein telecylinder general
9001
9002
9003
9004
9005
9006
9007
9008
273/304


9009
9010
9011
9012
9013
9014
9015
9016
9017
9018
9019
9020
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
9028
9029
9030
9031
9032
9033
9034
9035
9036
9037
9038
9039
9040
9041
274/304


9042
9043
9044
9045
9046
9047
9048
9049
9050
9051
9052
9053
9054
9055
9056
9057
9058
9059
9060
9061
9062
9063
9064
9065
9066
9067
9068
9069
9070
9071
9072
9073
9074
275/304


9075
9076
9077
9078
9079
9080
9081
9082
9083
9084
9085
9086
9087
9088
9089
9090
9091
9092
9093
9094
9095
9096
9097
9098
9099
9100 Telezylinder allgemein telecylinder general
9101 Telezylinder ausfahren telecylinder extend
9102 Telezylinder einfahren telecylinder retract
9103 Telezylinder ausfahren schnell telecylinder extend fast
9104 Telezylinder einfahren schnell telecylinder retract fast
9105
9106
9107
276/304


9108
9109
9110 Telezyl. einf. Sonderfunktionen allgemein telecylinder retract special functions general
9111 By-Pass Telezylinder einfahren By-pass telecylinder retract
9112 Mengenbegrenzung Telezylinder einfahren flow control telecylinder retract
9113 Zuschaltung Mengenbegrenzung Telezylinder einfahren switch-on of flow control telecylinder retract
9114 Hohe Geschwindigkeit Telezylinder einfahren high speed telecylinder retract
9115 close lowering brake
9116
9117
9118
9119
9120 Telezyl. ausf. Differentialschatung allgemein extend telecylinder regenerative circuit, general
9121 Zuschaltung Differentialschaltung switch-on of regenerative circuit
9122 Telezyl. ausf. Differentialschaltung, Zuschaltung hohe Druckstufe extend telecylinder regenerative circuit, switch-on of high pressure step
9123
9124
9125 Nebenverbraucher hydraulic accumulator PLD
9126
9127
9128
9129
9130
9131
9132
9133
9134
9135
9136
9137
9138
9139
9140
277/304


9141
9142
9143
9144
9145
9146
9147
9148
9149
9150 Teleleitsystem allgemein teleguide general
9151 Teleleitsystem, SVE teleguide, PLD
9152 Teleleitsystem, SVE verbolzen teleguide, PLD pin locking
9153 Teleleitsystem, SVE entbolzen teleguide, PLD locking off
9154 Teleleitsystem, SVE sichern teleguide, PLD locking
9155 Teleleitsystem, SVE entsichern teleguide, PLD unlocking
9156 Teleleitsystem, Zustandserkennung SVE BIT 1 status recognition PLD BIT 1
9159
9160 Teleleitsystem, Kasten-ID BIT 1 (MSB) teleguide, section-ID BIT 1 (MSB)
9161 Teleleitsystem, Kasten-ID BIT 2 teleguide, section-ID BIT 2
9162 Teleleitsystem, Kasten-ID BIT 3 teleguide, section-ID BIT 3
9163 Teleleitsystem, Kasten-ID BIT 4 (LSB) teleguide, section-ID BIT 4 (LSB)
9164 Teleleitsystem, Vorposition Sicherung teleguide, preposition locking
9165 Teleleitsystem, Nachposition Sicherung teleguide, postposition locking
9166 Teleleitsystem, Vorposition Verbolzung teleguide, preposition pin locking
9167 Teleleitsystem, Nachposition Verbolzung teleguide, postposition pin locking
9170 Teleleitsystem, Vorposition Verbolzung 1.IK teleguide, preposition pin locking 1st section
9171 Teleleitsystem, Nachposition Verbolzung 1.IK teleguide, postposition pin locking 1st section
9172 Teleleitsystem, Vorposition Verbolzung 2.IK teleguide, preposition pin locking 2nd section
9173 Teleleitsystem, Nachposition Verbolzung 2.IK teleguide, postposition pin locking 2nd section
278/304


9174 Teleleitsystem, Vorposition Verbolzung 3.IK teleguide, preposition pin locking 3rd section
9175 Teleleitsystem, Nachposition Verbolzung 3.IK teleguide, postposition pin locking 3rd section
9176 Teleleitsystem, Vorposition Verbolzung 4.IK teleguide, preposition pin locking 4th section
9177 Teleleitsystem, Nachposition Verbolzung 4.IK teleguide, postposition pin locking 4th section
9188
9189
9190
9191
9192
9193
9194
9195
9196
9197
9198
9199
9200
9201
9202
9203
9204
9205
9206
279/304


9207
9208
9209
9210
9211
9212
9213
9214
9215
9216
9217
9218
9219
9220
9221
9222
9223
9224
9225
9226
9227
9228
9229
9230
9231
9232
9233
9234
9235
9236
9237
9238
9239
280/304


9240
9241
9242
9243
9244
9245
9246
9247
9248
9249
9250
9251
9252
9253
9254
9255
9256
9257
9258
9259
9260
9261
9262
9263
9264
9265
9266
9267
9268
9269
9270
9271
9272
281/304


9273
9274
9275
9276
9277
9278
9279
9280
9281
9282
9283
9284
9285
9286
9287
9288
9289
9290
9291
9292
9293
9294
9295
9296
9297
9298
9299
9300 OW, div. Zylinder allgemein superstructure, several cylinders, general
9301
9302
9303
9304
9305
282/304


9306
9307
9308
9309
9310 OW-Kabine neigen allgemein superstructure cabin tilt, general
9311 OW, Neigungszylinder Kabine einfahren superstructure, retract cabin tilt cylinder
9312 OW, Neigungszylinder Kabine ausfahren superstructure, extend cabin tilt cylinder
9313
9314
9315
9316
9317
9318
9319
9320 OW-Kabine schwenken superstructure swing cabin
9321 OW, Schwenkzylinder Kabine einfahren superstructure, retract cabin swing cylinder
9322 OW, Schwenkzylinder Kabine ausfahren superstructure, extend cabin swing cylinder
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330 OW-Kabine drehen superstructure cabin swing
9331 OW-Kabine Drehzylinder einfahren superstructure cabin swing cylinder retract
9332 OW-Kabine Drehzylinder ausfahren superstructure cabin swing cylinder extend
9333 OW-Kabinenpodest superstructure cabin pedestal
9334 OW-Kabinenpodest einfahren superstructure cabin pedestal retract
9335 OW-Kabinenpodest ausfahren superstructure cabin pedestal extend
9336 OW-Kabinenpodest Zylinder 1 superstructure cabin pedestal cylinder 1
9337 OW-Kabinenpodest Zylinder 2 superstructure cabin pedestal cylinder 2
9338
283/304


9339
9340 Winde Verbolzung, allgemein Winch pin locking, general
9341 Hubwerk 1 entbolzen hoist 1 locking off
9342 Hubwerk 1 verbolzen hoist 1 pin locking
9347 Wippwerk 1 entbolzen luffing gear 1 locking off
9348 Wippwerk 1 verbolzen luffing gear 1 pin locking
9349 Wippwerk 2 entbolzen luffing gear 2 locking off
9350 Wippwerk 2 verbolzen luffing gear 2 pin locking
9351
9352
9353
9354
9355
9356
9357
9358
9359
9360 Hauptausleger Verbolzung, allgemein main boom pin locking, general
9361 Hauptausleger Verbolzung entbolzen main boom pin locking locking off
9362 Hauptausleger Verbolzung verbolzen main boom pin locking pin
9363
9364
9365
9366
9367
9368
9369
9370 Gegengewicht Verbolzung, allgemein counterweight pin locking, general
9371 Gegengewicht entbolzen counterweight locking off
284/304


9372 Gegengewicht verbolzen counterweight pin locking
9373 GGW Zylinder rechts Counterweight cylinger right side
9374 GGW Zylinder links Counterweight cylinger left hand side
9375
9376
9377
9378
9379
9380 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder, allgemein counterweight lift cylinder, general
9381 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder einfahren counterweight lift cylinder retract
9382 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder ausfahren counterweight lift cylinder extend
9383 GGW angehoben links counterweight liftd left hand side
9384 GGW angehoben rechts counterweight liftd right side
9385 Gegengewicht, Hubzylinder, aus-/einfahren freischalten counterweight lift cylinder, enable extend/retract
9386
9387
9388
9389
9390
9391 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder links einfahren counterweight lift cylinder left side, retract
9392 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder links ausfahren counterweight lift cylinder left side, extend
9393 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder rechts einfahren counterweight lift cylinder right side, retract
9394 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder rechts ausfahren counterweight lift cylinder right side, extend
9395
9396
9397
9398
9399 Gegengewicht Hubzylinder ausfahren, Volumenstromerhöhung counterweight lift cylinder , extend, capacity control extension
9400 A-Bockmontage allgemein A-frame assembly general
9401 A-Bock-Zylinder einfahren A-frame cylinder retract
9402 A-Bock-Zylinder ausfahren A-frame cylinder extend
9403
9404
285/304


9405 A-Bock, Freischaltung Montagezylinder aus- / einfahren A-frame, enable erecting cylinder extend / retract
9406 A-Bock, Tankverbindung hinter Senkbremsventil schließen A-frame, close connection to tank behind lowering brake valve
9407
9408
9409
9410 Aufrichtzylinder Stützbock, allgemein erecting cylinder for supporting frame, general
9411 Aufrichtzylinder Stützbock, einfahren erecting cylinder for supporting frame, retract
9412 Aufrichtzylinder Stützbock, ausfahren erecting cylinder for supporting frame, extend
9413
9414
9415
9416
9417
9418
9419
9420 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Verschiebezylinder, allgemein counterweight / CWC, sliding cylinder, general
9421 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Verschiebezylinder einfahren counterweight / CWC, sliding cylinder retract
9422 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Verschiebezylinder ausfahren counterweight / CWC, sliding cylinder extend
9423 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Differentialschaltung sperren counterweight / CWC, blocking regenerative circuit
9424
9425 SL-Traverse, Hubzylinder, einfahren sl-bridle, lift-cylinder retract
9426 SL-Traverse, Hubzylinder, ausfahren sl-bridle, lift-cylinder extend
9427 SL-Traverse, linker Hubzylinder, anhalten sl-bridle, left lift-cylinder stop
9428 SL-Traverse, rechter Hubzylinder, anhalten sl-bridle, right lift-cylinder stop
9429
9430 Multiverbolzung allgemein multi pin locking general
9431 Multiverbolzung, Zylinder einfahren multi pin locking, cylinder retract
9432 Multiverbolzung, Zylinder ausfahren multi pin locking, cylinder extend
9433
9434
9435
9436
9437
286/304


9438
9439
9440 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Verstellwinde, allgemein counterweight / CWC, adjustment winch, general
9441 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Verstellwinde heben counterweight / CWC, adjustment winch, lift
9442 Gegengewicht / SLGW, Verstellwinde senken counterweight / CWC, adjustment winch, lower
9443
9444
9445
9446
9447
9448
9449
9450
9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9459
9460
9461
9462
9463
9464
9465
9466
9467
9468
9469
9470
287/304


9471
9472
9473
9474
9475
9476
9477
9478
9479
9480
9481
9482
9483
9484
9485
9486
9487
9488
9489
9490
9491
9492
9493
9494
9495
9496
9497
9498
9499
9500 Abstützung Hauptausleger / SL-Mast, allgemein main boom back-stops / SL-mast, general
9501 Abstützung Hauptausleger / SL-Mast, Druckstufe main boom back-stops / SL-mast, pressure step
9502
9503
288/304


9504
9505 Abstützung Hauptausleger, Druckabbau Zylinder main boom back-stops, pressure release cylinder
9506 Abstützung SL-Mast, Druckabbau Zylinder SL-mast back-stops, pressure release cylinder
9507 Abstützung Hauptausleger / SL-Mast, Absperrung Versorgung Zylinder main boom back-stops / SL-mast, blocking supply to cylinder
9508 Abstützung HA-Ausleger / SL-Mast, Versorgung Zylinder bei SLGW Verschiebezyl.-Betrieb main boom back-stops / SL-mast, supply cylinder at CWC sliding cylinder operation
9509
9510 Abstützung Hauptausleger links, allgemein main boom back-stops left side, general
9511 Abstützung Hauptausleger links Druckstufe main boom back-stops left side pressure step
9512
9513
9514
9515
9516
9517
9518
9519
9520 Abstützung Hauptausleger rechts, allgemein main boom back-stops right side, general
9521 Abstützung Hauptausleger rechts, Druckstufe main boom back-stops right side, pressure step
9522
9523
9524
9525
9526
9527
9528
9529
9530 Abstützung SL-Mast allgemein SL-mast back-stops general
9531 Abstützung SL-Mast linker Zylinder Druckstufe SL-mast back-stops left side cylinder pressure step
9532 Abstützung SL-Mast rechter Zylinder Druckstufe SL-mast back-stops right side cylinder pressure step
9533
9534
9535
9536
289/304


9537
9538
9539
9540 Abstützung SL-Mast links, allgemein SL-mast back-stops left side, general
9541 Abstützung SL-Mast links, Druckstufe SL-mast back-stops left side, pressure step
9542
9543
9544
9545
9546
9547
9548
9549
9550 Abstützung SL-Mast rechts, allgemein SL-mast back-stops right side, general
9551 Abstützung SL-Mast rechts, Druckstufe SL-mast back-stops right side, pressure step
9552
9553
9554
9555
9556
9557
9558
9559
9560 Längenerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder, allgemein lenght determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder
9561 Längenerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder 1 lenght determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder 1
9562 Längenerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder 1 lenght determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder 2
9563
9564
9565
9566
9567
9568
9569
290/304


9570 Druckerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder, allgemein pressure determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder
9571 Druckerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder 1 pressure determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder 1
9572 Druckerfassung SL-Gegengewicht, Verstellzylinder 2 pressure determination sl-counterweight, lifting-cylinder 2
9573
9574
9575
9576
9577
9578
9579
9580
9581
9582
9583
9584
9585
9586
9587
9588
9589
9590
9591
9592
9593
9594
9595
9596
9597
9598
9599
9600 Jack-Up-System allgemein Jack-up system general
9601
9602
291/304


9603
9604
9605
9606
9607
9608
9609
9610
9611 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder vorne links einfahren Jack-up system, cylinder front left side retract
9612 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder vorne links ausfahren Jack-up system, cylinder front left side extend
9613 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder vorne rechts einfahren Jack-up system, cylinder front right side retract
9614 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder vorne rechts ausfahren Jack-up system, cylinder front right side extend
9615
9616
9617
9618
9619
9620
9621 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder hinten links einfahren Jack-up system, cylinder rear left side retract
9622 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder hinten links ausfahren Jack-up system, cylinder rear left side extend
9623 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder hinten rechts einfahren Jack-up system, cylinder rear right side retract
9624 Jack-Up-System, Zylinder hinten rechts ausfahren Jack-up system, cylinder rear right side extend
9625
9626
9627
9628
9629
9630
9631
9632
9633
9634
9635
292/304


9636
9637
9638
9639
9640
9641
9642
9643
9644
9645
9646
9647
9648
9649
9650
9651 Jack-Up-System, Positionszylinder vorne einfahren Jack-up system, positioning cylinder front retract
9652 Jack-Up-System, Positionszylinder vorne einfahren Jack-up system, positioning cylinder front extend
9653
9654
9655
9656
9657
9658
9659
9660
9661 Jack-Up-System, Positionszylinder hinten einfahren Jack-up system, positioning cylinder rear retract
9662 Jack-Up-System, Positionszylinder hinten ausfahren Jack-up system, positioning cylinder rear extend
9663
9664
9665
9666
9667
9668
293/304


9669
9670
9671
9672
9673
9674
9675
9676
9677
9678
9679
9680
9681
9682
9683
9684
9685
9686
9687
9688
9689
9690
9691
9692
9693
9694
9695
9696
9697
9698
9699
9700 UW, Freigabe kpl. carrier, enable complete
9701 UW, Freigabe vorne carrier, enable front
294/304


9702 UW, Freigabe hinten carrier, enable rear
9703
9704
9705 UW, Freigabe ausfahren carrier, enable extend
9706 UW, Freigabe einfahren carrier, enable retract
9707
9708
9709
9710 UW, Abstützung vorne allgemein carrier, outriggers front general
9711 UW, Abstützung vorne links kpl. carrier, outriggers front left side complete
9712 UW, Abstützung vorne links einfahren carrier, outriggers front left side retract
9713 UW, Abstützung vorne links ausfahren carrier, outriggers front left side extend
9714 UW, Abstützung vorne rechts kpl. carrier, outriggers front right side complete
9715 UW, Abstützung vorne rechts einfahren carrier, outriggers front right side retract
9716 UW, Abstützung vorne rechts ausfahren carrier, outriggers front right side extend
9717
9718
9719
9720 UW, Abstützung hinten allgemein carrier, outriggers rear general
9721 UW, Abstützung hinten links kpl. carrier, outriggers rear left side complete
9722 UW, Abstützung hinten links einfahren carrier, outriggers rear left side retract
9723 UW, Abstützung hinten links ausfahren carrier, outriggers rear left side extend
9724 UW, Abstützung hinten rechts kpl. carrier, outriggers rear right side complete
9725 UW, Abstützung hinten rechts einfahren carrier, outriggers rear right side retract
9726 UW, Abstützung hinten rechts ausfahren carrier, outriggers rear right side extend
9727
9728
9729
9730 Querträger allgemein crossmember general
9731 Querträger vorne allgemein crossmember front general
9732 Querträger vorne links oben kpl. crossmember front left side upper complete
9733 Querträger vorne links oben entbolzen crossmember front left side upper locking off
9734 Querträger vorne links oben verbolzen crossmember front left side upper pin locking
295/304


9735 Querträger vorne links unten kpl. crossmember front left side lower complete
9736 Querträger vorne links unten entbolzen crossmember front left side lower locking off
9737 Querträger vorne links unten verbolzen crossmember front left side lower pin locking
9738 Querträger vorne rechts oben kpl. crossmember front right side upper complete
9739 Querträger vorne rechts oben entbolzen crossmember front right side upper locking off
9740 Querträger vorne rechts oben verbolzen crossmember front right side upper pin locking
9741 Querträger vorne rechts unten kpl. crossmember front right side lower complete
9742 Querträger vorne rechts unten entbolzen crossmember front right side lower locking off
9743 Querträger vorne rechts unten verbolzen crossmember front right side lower pin locking
9744
9745 Querträger hinten allgemein crossmember rear general
9746 Querträger hinten links oben kpl. crossmember rear left side upper complete
9747 Querträger hinten links oben entbolzen crossmember rear left side upper locking off
9748 Querträger hinten links oben verbolzen crossmember rear left side upper pin locking
9749 Querträger hinten links unten kpl. crossmember rear left side lower complete
9750 Querträger hinten links unten entbolzen crossmember rear left side lower locking off
9751 Querträger hinten links unten verbolzen crossmember rear left side lower pin locking
9752 Querträger hinten rechts oben kpl. crossmember rear right side upper complete
9753 Querträger hinten rechts oben entbolzen crossmember rear right side upper locking off
9754 Querträger hinten rechts oben verbolzen crossmember rear right side upper pin locking
9755 Querträger hinten rechts unten kpl. crossmember rear right side lower complete
9756 Querträger hinten rechts unten entbolzen crossmember rear right side lower locking off
9757 Querträger hinten rechts unten verbolzen crossmember rear right side lower pin locking
9758
9759
9760 Raupenträger allgemein crawler frame general
9761 Raupenträger links allgemein crawler frame left side general
9762 Raupenträger links vorne oben kpl. crawler frame left side front upper complete
9763 Raupenträger links vorne oben entbolzen / allgemein links entbolzen crawler frame left side front upper locking off / general left side locking off
9764 Raupenträger links vorne oben entbolzen / allgemein links verbolzen crawler frame left side front upper locking off / general left side pin locking
9765 Raupenträger links vorne unten kpl. crawler frame left side front lower complete
9766 Raupenträger links vorne unten entbolzen crawler frame left side front lower locking off
9767 Raupenträger links vorne unten verbolzen crawler frame left side front lower pin locking
296/304


9768 Raupenträger links hinten oben kpl. crawler frame left side rear upper complete
9769 Raupenträger links hinten oben entbolzen crawler frame left side rear upper locking off
9770 Raupenträger links hinten oben verbolzen crawler frame left side rear upper pin locking
9771 Raupenträger links hinten unten kpl. crawler frame left side rear lower complete
9772 Raupenträger links hinten unten entbolzen crawler frame left side rear lower locking off
9773 Raupenträger links hinten unten verbolzen crawler frame left side rear lower pin locking
9774
9775 Raupenträger rechts allgemein crawler frame right side general
9776 Raupenträger rechts vorne oben kpl. crawler frame right side front upper complete
9777 Raupenträger rechts vorne oben entbolzen / allgemein rechts entbolzen crawler frame right side front upper locking off / general right side locking off
9778 Raupenträger rechts vorne oben entbolzen / allgemein rechts verbolzen crawler frame right side front upper locking off / general right side pin locking
9779 Raupenträger rechts vorne unten kpl. crawler frame right side front lower complete
9780 Raupenträger rechts vorne unten entbolzen crawler frame right side front lower locking off
9781 Raupenträger rechts vorne unten verbolzen crawler frame right side front lower pin locking
9782 Raupenträger rechts hinten oben kpl. crawler frame right side rear upper complete
9783 Raupenträger rechts hinten oben entbolzen crawler frame right side rear upper locking off
9784 Raupenträger rechts hinten oben verbolzen crawler frame right side rear upper pin locking
9785 Raupenträger rechts hinten unten kpl. crawler frame right side rear lower complete
9786 Raupenträger rechts hinten unten entbolzen crawler frame right side rear lower locking off
9787 Raupenträger rechts hinten unten verbolzen crawler frame right side rear lower pin locking
9788
9789
9790 Schnellverbindung OW-UW allgemein quick connection superstructure/carrier general
9791 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Spannzylinder einfahren quick connection superstructure/carrier, retract tensioning cylinder
9792 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Spannzylinder ausfahren quick connection superstructure/carrier, extend tensioning cylinder
9793 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Positionierzylinder einfahren quick connection superstructure/carrier, positioning cylinder retract
9794 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Positionierzylinder ausfahren quick connection superstructure/carrier, positioning cylinder extend
9795 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Positionierzylinder, allgemein quick connection superstructure/carrier, positioning cylinder, general
9796 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Positionierzylinder einfahren quick connection superstructure/carrier, positioning cylinder retract
9797 Schnellverbindung OW-UW, Positionierzylinder ausfahren quick connection superstructure/carrier, positioning cylinder extend
9798
9799
9800 SLGW 1, allgemein CWC 1 general
297/304


9801
9802
9803
9804
9805 SLGW 1, Freigabe Fahrwerk Unterwagen bei Montage CWC, enable crawler for rigging
9806
9807
9808
9809
9810 SLGW 1 , Abstützung allgemein CWC 1, outriggers general
9811 SLGW 1 , Kreis1 Abstützung kpl. einfahren CWC 1, circuit 1 outriggers complete retract
9812 SLGW 1 , Kreis1 Abstützung kpl. ausfahren CWC 1, circuit 1 outriggers complete extend
9813 SLGW 1 , Kreis2 Abstützung kpl. einfahren CWC 1, circuit 2 outriggers complete retract
9814 SLGW 1 , Kreis2 Abstützung kpl. ausfahren CWC 1, circuit 2 outriggers complete extend
9815 SLGW 1 , Abstützung vorne, allgemein CWC 1, outriggers front side, general
9816 SLGW 1 , Abstützung VR fahren CWC 1, outriggers front right side operate
9817 SLGW 1 , Abstützung VR einfahren CWC 1, outriggers front right side retract
9818 SLGW 1 , Abstützung VR ausfahren CWC 1, outriggers front right side extend
9819 SLGW 1 , Abstützung VL fahren CWC 1, outriggers front left side operate
9820 SLGW 1 , Abstützung VL einfahren CWC 1, outriggers front left side retract
9821 SLGW 1 , Abstützung VL ausfahren CWC 1, outriggers front left side extend
9822 SLGW 1 , Abstützung HR fahren CWC 1, outriggers rear right side operate
9823 SLGW 1 , Abstützung HR einfahren CWC 1, outriggers rear right side retract
9824 SLGW 1 , Abstützung HR ausfahren CWC 1, outriggers rear right side extend
9825 SLGW 1 , Abstützung HL fahren CWC 1, outriggers rear left side operate
9826 SLGW 1 , Abstützung HL einfahren CWC 1, outriggers rear left side retract
9827 SLGW 1 , Abstützung HL ausfahren CWC 1, outriggers rear left side extend
9828 SLGW 1 , Abstützung hinten, allgemein CWC 1, outriggers rear side, general
9829 SLGW 1 , Abstützung Pos. eingefahren CWC 1, outriggers position retracted
9830 SLGW 1, Drehschemel SLGW 1 allgemein CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon CWC 1 general
9831 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 1 rechts drehen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 1 right side turn
9832 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 1 links drehen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 1 left side turn
9833 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 2 rechts drehen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 2 right side turn
298/304


9834 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 2 links drehen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 2 left side turn
9835 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 1 Position 0° CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 1 position 0°
9839 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 1 entbolzen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 1 locking off
9840 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 1 verbolzen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 1 pin locking
9841 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 2 entbolzen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 2 locking off
9842 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 2 verbolzen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 2 pin locking
9843 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 1, Bremse öffnen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 1, brake open
9844 SLGW 1 , Drehschemel 2, Bremse öffnen CWC 1, swivelling bolster waggon 2, brake open
9845
9846
9847
9848
9849
9850 SLGW 1, Fahrenwerk allgemein CWC 1, travel gear general
9851 SLGW 1, Fahrenwerk, Kreis1 fahren vorwärts CWC 1, travel gear, circuit 1 operate forward
9852 SLGW 1, Fahrenwerk, Kreis1 fahren rückwärts CWC 1, travel gear, circuit 1 operate reversing
9853 SLGW 1, Fahrenwerk, Kreis 2 fahren vorwärts CWC 1, travel gear, circuit 2 operate forward
9854 SLGW 1, Fahrenwerk, Kreis 2 fahren rückwärts CWC 1, travel gear, circuit 2 operate reversing
9855 SLGW 1, Fahrantrieb Kreis 1, Druckerhöhung CWC 1, drive circuit 1, pressure increase
9857 SLGW 1, Fahrenwerk, Umkehrschaltung Drehschemel CWC 1, travel gear, Umkehrschaltung swivelling bolster waggon
9858 SLGW 1, Fahrantrieb Kreis 1, Druckreduzierung CWC 1, drive circuit 1, pressure reduction
9860 SLGW 1, Bremse Fahrwerk allgemein CWC 1, brake travel gear general
9861 SLGW 1, Bremse Fahrwerk öffnen CWC 1, brake travel gear open
9862 SLGW 1, Bremse Fahrwerk, Druckkontrolle, Drehschemel 1 CWC 1, brake travel gear, pressure check, swivelling bolster waggon 1
9863 SLGW 1, Bremse Fahrwerk, Druckkontrolle, Drehschemel 2 CWC 1, brake travel gear, pressure check, swivelling bolster waggon 2
9864
9865 SLGW 1, Freilauf Fahrwerk, linkes Radpaar, Drehschemel 1 CWC 1, free wheeling travel gear, left pair of wheels, swivelling bolster waggon 1
9866 SLGW 1, Freilauf Fahrwerk, rechtes Radpaar, Drehschemel 1 CWC 1, free wheeling travel gear, right pair of wheels, swivelling bolster waggon 1
299/304


9867 SLGW 1, Freilauf Fahrwerk, linkes Radpaar, Drehschemel 2 CWC 1, free wheeling travel gear, left pair of wheels, swivelling bolster waggon 2
9868 SLGW 1, Freilauf Fahrwerk, rechtes Radpaar, Drehschemel 1 CWC 1, free wheeling travel gear, right pair of wheels, swivelling bolster waggon 1
9869
9870 SLGW 1, Schnellgang allgemein CWC 1, high speed general
9871 SLGW 1, Schnellgang CWC 1, high speed
9872
9873
9874
9875
9876
9877
9878
9879
9881 SLGW 1, Bremse Fahrwerk öffnen, Drehschemel 1 CWC 1, brake travel gear open, swivelling bolster waggon 1
9882 SLGW 1, Bremse Fahrwerk öffnen, Drehschemel 2 CWC 1, brake travel gear open, swivelling bolster waggon 2
9883
9884
9885
9886
9887
9888
9889
9890 SLGW 1, Hubzylinder für Verbindungsrahmen allgemein CWC 1, lift cylinder für connecting frame general
9891 SLGW 1, Hubzylinder einfahren CWC 1, lift cylinder retract
9892 SLGW 1, Hubzylinder ausfahren CWC 1, lift cylinder extend
9893
9894
9895
9896
9897
9898
9899
300/304


9900 Gegengewichtswagen 2 allgemein CWC 2 general
9901
9902
9903
9904
9905
9906
9907
9908
9909
9910 SLGW 2, Abstützung allgemein CWC 2, outriggers general
9911 SLGW 2, Kreis1 Abstützung kpl. einfahren CWC 2, circuit 1 outriggers complete retract
9912 SLGW 2, Kreis1 Abstützung kpl. ausfahren CWC 2, circuit 1 outriggers complete extend
9913 SLGW 2, Kreis2 Abstützung kpl. einfahren CWC 2, circuit 2 outriggers complete retract
9914 SLGW 2, Kreis2 Abstützung kpl. ausfahren CWC 2, circuit 2 outriggers complete extend
9915
9916 SLGW 2, Abstützung VR fahren CWC 2, outriggers front right side operate
9917 SLGW 2, Abstützung VR einfahren CWC 2, outriggers front right side retract
9918 SLGW 2, Abstützung VR ausfahren CWC 2, outriggers front right side extend
9919 SLGW 2, Abstützung VL fahren CWC 2, outriggers front left side operate
9920 SLGW 2, Abstützung VL einfahren CWC 2, outriggers front left side retract
9921 SLGW 2, Abstützung VL ausfahren CWC 2, outriggers front left side extend
9922 SLGW 2, Abstützung HR fahren CWC 2, outriggers rear right side operate
9923 SLGW 2, Abstützung HR einfahren CWC 2, outriggers rear right side retract
9924 SLGW 2, Abstützung HR ausfahren CWC 2, outriggers rear right side extend
9925 SLGW 2, Abstützung HL fahren CWC 2, outriggers rear left side operate
9926 SLGW 2, Abstützung HL einfahren CWC 2, outriggers rear left side retract
9927 SLGW 2, Abstützung HL ausfahren CWC 2, outriggers rear left side extend
9928
9929 SLGW 2, Abstützung Pos. eingefahren CWC 2, outriggers position retracted
9930 SLGW 2, Drehschemel allgemein CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon general
9931 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 1 rechts drehen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 1 right side turn
9932 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 1 links drehen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 1 left side turn
301/304


9933 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 2 rechts drehen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 2 right side turn
9934 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 2 links drehen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 2 left side turn
9935 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 1 Position 0° CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 1 position 0°
9939 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 1 entbolzen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 1 locking off
9940 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 1 verbolzen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 1 pin locking
9941 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 2 entbolzen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 2 locking off
9942 SLGW 2, Drehschemel 2 verbolzen CWC 2, swivelling bolster waggon 2 pin locking
9943
9944
9945
9946
9947
9948
9949
9950 SLGW 2, Fahrenwerk allgemein CWC 2, travel gear general
9957 SLGW 2, Fahrenwerk, Umkehrschaltung Drehschemel CWC 2, travel gear, Umkehrschaltung swivelling bolster waggon
9961 SLGW 2, Bremse Fahrwerk öffnen CWC 2, brake travel gear open
9962 SLGW 2, Bremse Fahrwerk, Druckkontrolle Drehschemel 1 CWC 2, brake travel gear, pressure check swivelling bolster waggon 1
9963 SLGW 2, Bremse Fahrwerk, Druckkontrolle Drehschemel 2 CWC 2, brake travel gear, pressure check swivelling bolster waggon 2
9964
9965
302/304


9966
9967
9968
9969
9970 SLGW 2, Schnellgang allgemein CWC 2, high speed general
9971 SLGW 2, Schnellgang CWC 2, high speed
9972
9973
9974
9975
9976
9977
9978
9979
9980
9981
9982
9983
9984
9985
9986
9987
9988
9989
9990
9991
9992
9993
9994
9995
9996
9997
9998
303/304


9999
304/304

Ortskennzeichnung 09:55
Nr. Hauptgruppe, Einbauort / Lage allgemein main group, location / location, general
100 UW, Rahmen links kpl. (Verkleidung), Querträger vorne kpl. carrier, frame left complete (covering), crossframe front complete
101 UW, Rahmen vorne rechts (Verkleidung), Querträger vorne rechts carrier, frame front right (covering), crossframe front right
102 UW, Rahmen vorne links (verkleidung), Querträger vorne links carrier, frame front left (covering), crossframe front left
103 UW, Rahmen Mitte kpl. (Topf, Mittelstück) carrier, frame middle complete (centre cone, centre piece)
104 UW, Rahmen Mitte rechts (Topf, Mittelstück) carrier, frame middle right (centre cone, centre piece)
105 UW, Rahmen Mitte links (Topf, Mittelstück) carrier, frame middle left (centre cone, centre piece)
106 UW, Rahmen rechts kpl. (Verkleidung), Querträger hinten kpl. carrier, frame right complete (covering), crossframe rear complete
107 UW, Rahmen hinten rechts (Verkleidung), Querträger hinten rechts carrier, frame rear right (covering), crossframe rear right
108 UW, Rahmen hinten links (Verkleidung), Querträger hinten links carrier, frame rear left (covering), crossframe rear left
109
110 Unterwagen, Kabine allgemein carrier, cabin, general
111 UW, Kabine vorne rechts carrier, cabin front right
112 UW, Kabine vorne links carrier, cabin front left
113 UW, Kabine hinten rechts carrier, cabin rear right
114 UW, Kabine hinten links carrier, cabin rear left
115
116 Unterwagen, Kabine, Frontkonsole allgemein carrier, cabin, front console, general
117 UW, Kabine, Frontkonsole rechts carrier, cabin, front console right
118 UW, Kabine, Frontkonsole Mitte carrier, cabin, front console middle
119 UW, Kabine, Frontkonsole links carrier, cabin, front console left
120 UW, Kabine, Seitenkonsole kpl. carrier, cabin, side console complete
121 UW, Kabine, Rückwandkonsole kpl. carrier, cabin, rear console complete
122 UW, Kabine, Dachkonsole kpl. carrier, cabin, roof console complete
123
124 UW, Kabine, Fahrersitz kpl. carrier, cabin, operaters seat complete
125 UW, Kabine, Fahrersitz rechts carrier, cabin, operaters seat right
126 UW, Kabine, Fahrersitz links carrier, cabin, operaters seat left
127
128 UW, Kabine Verteilerkasten carrier, cabin terminal box
129 UW, Kabinenträger carrier, cabin frame
130 UW, Kabine, Zentralelektrik carrier, cabin, central electric
131
1 / 20

132 UW, Kraftstofftank carrier, fuel tank
133 UW, Hydrauliktank carrier, hydraulic oil tank
134
135 UW, Antriebseinheit kpl. carrier, drive unit complete
136 UW, Hydraulikträger carrier, hydraulic frame
137
138 UW, Steuerblock P1 (1.1) carrier, control block P1 (1.1)
139 UW, Steuerblock P1.2 carrier, control block P1.2
144
145 UW, Verteilerkasten vorne carrier, terminal box front
146 UW, Verteilerkasten Mitte carrier, terminal box middle
147 UW, Verteilerkasten hinten carrier, terminal box rear
148
149
150 UW, Abstützung vorne allgemein carrier, outrigger front, general
151 UW, Abstützung vorne rechts carrier, outrigger front right
152 UW, Abstützung vorne links carrier, outrigger front left
153
154 UW, Abstützung Mitte kpl. (Stützrad) carrier, outrigger middle complete (supporting wheel)
155 UW, Abstützung Mitte rechts (Stützrad) carrier, outrigger middle right (supporting wheel)
156 UW, Abstützung Mitte links (Stützrad) carrier, outrigger middle left (supporting wheel)
157
158 UW, Abstützung hinten kpl. carrier, outrigger rear complete
159 UW, Abstützung hinten rechts carrier, outrigger rear right
160 UW, Abstützung hinten links carrier, outrigger rear left
161 UW, Abstützung hinten Mitte carrier, outrigger rear middle
162
163
2 / 20

164
165 UW, Bedienpult Abstützung vorne carrier, operating console outrigger front
166 UW, Bedienkonsole Abstützung mitte carrier, operating console outrigger middle
167 UW, Bedienkonsole Abstützung hinten carrier, operating console outrigger rear
168 UW, Bedienpult Zusatzabstützung (extern) carrier, operating console aux. outrigger (external)
169
170 Unterwagen, Achsen allgemein carrier, axles, general
171 UW, Achse 1 carrier, axle 1
180 UW, Nachläufer kpl. carrier, dolly complete
181 UW, Nachläufer Anbauteile am Kran carrier, dolly, assembly parts on crane
182
183
184
185 Raupentraeger Links crawler frame left
186 Raupentraeger Rechts crawler frame right
187
188 carrier, wiring assembly ABS
189 carrier, wiring assembly outriggers
190 carrier, wiring assembly left front
191 carrier, wiring assembly left rear
192 carrier, wiring assembly motor
193 carrier, wiring assembly gearbox
194 carrier, wiring assembly slipring
195 carrier, wiring assembly suspension
3 / 20

196 carrier, wiring assembly right rear
197 carrier, wiring assembly right front
198 carrier, wiring assembly front
199 carrier, wiring assembly steering
4 / 20

200 Oberwagen, Rahmen links allgemein superstructure, frame left, general
201 OW, Rahmen vorne links superstructure, frame front left
202 OW, Rahmen vorne rechts superstructure, frame front right
203 OW, Rahmen Mitte kpl. superstructure, frame middle complete
204 OW, Rahmen Mitte links superstructure, frame middle left
205 OW, Rahmen Mitte rechts superstructure, frame middle right
206 OW, Rahmen rechts kpl. superstructure, frame right complete
207 OW, Rahmen hinten links superstructure, frame rear left
208 OW, Rahmen hinten rechts superstructure, frame rear right
209
210 Oberwagen, Kabine allgemein superstructure, cabin, general
211 OW, Kabine vorne links superstructure, cabin front left
212 OW, Kabine vorne rechts superstructure, cabin front right
213 OW, Kabine hinten links superstructure, cabin rear left
214 OW, Kabine hinten rechts superstructure, cabin rear right
215
216 Oberwagen, Kabine, Frontkonsole allgemein superstructure, cabin, front console, general
217 OW, Kabine, Frontkonsole links superstructure, cabin, front console left
218 OW, Kabine, Frontkonsole Mitte superstructure, cabin, front console middle
219 OW, Kabine, Frontkonsole rechts superstructure, cabin, front console right
220 OW, Kabine, Seitenkonsole kpl. superstructure, cabin, side console complete
221 OW, Kabine, Rückwandkonsole kpl. superstructure, cabin, rear console complete
222 OW, Kabine, Dachkonsole kpl. superstructure, cabin, roof console complete
223
224 OW, Kabine, Fahrersitz kpl. superstructure, cabin, operaters seat complete
225 OW, Kabine, Fahrersitz links superstructure, cabin, operaters seat left
226 OW, Kabine, Fahrersitz rechts superstructure, cabin, operaters seat right
227 OW, Kabine, Fußkonsole kpl. superstructure, cabin, feet console complete
228 OW, Kabine, Verteilerkasten superstructure, cabin, terminal box
229 OW, Kabinenträger superstructure, cabin frame
230
231
5 / 20

232 OW, Kraftstofftank superstructure, fuel tank
233 OW, Hydrauliktank superstructure, hydraulic oil tank
234
235 OW, Antriebseinheit kpl. superstructure, drive unit complete
236 OW, Hydraulikträger superstructure, hydraulic frame
237
238 OW, Steuerblock P1 (1.1) superstructure, control block P1 (1.1)
239 OW, Steuerblock P1.2 superstructure, control block P1.2
244
245 OW, Verteilerkasten vorne superstructure, terminal box front
246 OW, Verteilerkasten Mitte superstructure, terminal box middle
247 OW, Verteilerkasten hinten superstructure, terminal box rear
248
249
250 OW, Winde Hubwerk 1 superstructure, winch hoist 1
251
252
253
254
256
257
258
259
261
262
263
6 / 20

264
265 OW, Winde WW superstructure, luffing winch
266
267
268
269
270 OW, Winde Einziehwerk superstructure, main boom derricking winch
271
272
273
274
275 OW, Hilfswinde superstructure, reeving winch
276
277
278
279
280 OW, Wippzylinder (nur bei Telekran) superstructure, luffing cylinder (with telescopic cranes only)
281
282
283
284
285 OW, Gegengewicht superstructure, counterweight
286
287
288
289
290 OW, A-Bock / Stützbock kpl. superstructure, A-frame / supporting frame complete
291 OW, A-Bock / Stützbock Fuß superstructure, A-frame / supporting frame foot
292 OW, A-Bock / Stützbock Rollensatz superstructure, A-frame / supporting frame set of sheaves
293 OW, A-Bock / Stützbock Podest links superstructure, A-frame / supporting frame Podest left
294 OW, A-Bock / Stützbock Podest rechts superstructure, A-frame / supporting frame Podest right
295 OW, HA-Stützzylinder links superstructure, main boom back-stop left
7 / 20

296 OW, HA-Stützzylinder rechts superstructure, main boom back-stop right
297 OW, Mast-Stützzylinder links superstructure, SL-mast back-stop left
298 OW, Mast-Stützzylinder rechts superstructure, SL-mast back-stop right
299
300 Hauptausleger kpl. main boom complete
301 HA-Fuß main boom foot section
302 HA-Stützzylinder links main boom back-stops left
303 HA-Stützzylinder rechts main boom back-stops right
304
305 Winde Hubwerk 3 winch hoist 3
306
307 Winde Wippwerk 1 winch luffing gear 1
308
309
310 Teleskop 1 (SVE) tele section 1 (SVE)
311
312
313 Teleskop 2 tele section 2
314
315
317
318
320
321
323
324
326
327
8 / 20

328 Reduzierstück
329
330 Anschlußkopf HI/Adapterkopf HI connecting head fly jib/adapter head fly jib
331 Rollensatz 1 AK set of sheaves 1 connecting head
332 Rollensatz 2 AK set of sheaves 2 connecting head
333
334
335 obere Wippstütze upper luffing mast
336 untere Wippstütze lower luffing mast
337
338
339
340 HA-Verlängerung kpl. main boom extension complete
341 HA-Verlängerung Fußstück main boom extension footstück
342 HA-Verlängerung Kopf main boom extension head
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350 starrer Hilfsausleger kpl. fixed fly jib complete
351 LF-Fuß (Grundsektion bei Tele) LF-foot (basic section with telecranes)
352
353
354
355 LF-Kopf (Spitze nur bei Tele) LF-head (top section with telecranes)
356
357
358 frei nc
359 frei nc
9 / 20

360 wippbarer Hilfsausleger kpl. luffing fly jib complete
361 HI-Fuß fly jib-foot
362 Adapter HA-Kopf zu HI (Telekrane) adapter boomhead to fly jib (telecranes)
363
364
365 HI-Spitze (Spitze HA/HI) fly jib-top section (top section main boom/fly jib)
366 Rollensatz 1 Spitze set of sheaves 1 top section
367 Rollensatz 2 Spitze set of sheaves 2 top section
368
369
370 Runner kpl. runner complete
371 Runner -Fuß runner -foot
372
373
374
375 Runner Spitze runner top section
376
377
378
379
380 SL-Mast kpl. SL-mast complete
381 Mast-Fuß mast foot section
382 Mast-Stützzylinder SL-mast back-stop
383
384
385 Winde Wippwerk 2 winch luffing gear 2
386
387
388
389
390 Mastspitze SL-mast top
391
10 / 20

392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400 SL-Traverse allgemein cwc, tray, general
401
402
403
404
405 SL-Traverse, Verteilerkasten cwc, tray, terminal box
406
407
408
409
410 SLGW, Gegengewichtswagen allgemein cwc, counterweight carrier, general
411 SLGW, Verbindungsrahmen OW-SL, kpl. cwc, connecting frame from superstructure-SL, complete
412
413
414 SLGW, Verteilerkasten Verbindungsrahmen cwc, terminal box connecting frame
415
416
417
418
419
420 SLGW 1 allgemein cwc 1, general
421 SLGW 1, Rahmen cwc 1, frame
422 SLGW 1, Drehschemel 1 cwc 1, swivelling bolster 1
11 / 20

424 SLGW 1, Verteilerkasten cwc 1, terminal box
425 SLGW 1, Abstützung vorne kpl. cwc 1, outrigger front complete
426 SLGW 1, Abstützung vorne links cwc 1, outrigger front left
427 SLGW 1, Abstützung vorne rechts cwc 1, outrigger front right
428 SLGW 1, Abstützung hinten kpl. cwc 1, outrigger rear complete
429 SLGW 1, Abstützung hinten links cwc 1, outrigger rear left
430 SLGW 1, Abstützung hinten rechts cwc 1, outrigger rear right
431
432 SLGW 1, Kraftstofftank cwc 1, fuel tank
433 SLGW 1, Hydrauliktank cwc 1, hydraulic oil tank
434
435 SLGW 1, Antriebseinheit kpl. cwc 1, drive unit complete
436 SLGW 1, Hydraulikträger cwc 1, hydraulic frame
437
438 SLGW 1, Steuerblock cwc 1, control block
439
440 SLGW 1, Verbindungsrahmen cwc 1, connecting frame
441
442
443
444
445 SLGW 2 kpl. cwc 2 complete
446 SLGW 2, Rahmen cwc 2, frame
449 SLGW 2, Verteilerkasten cwc 2, terminal box
450 SLGW 2, Abstützung vorne kpl. cwc 2, outrigger front complete
451 SLGW 2, Abstützung vorne links cwc 2, outrigger front left
452 SLGW 2, Abstützung vorne rechts cwc 2, outrigger front right
453
454
455 SLGW 2, Abstützung Mitte kpl. cwc 2, outrigger middle complete
12 / 20

456 SLGW 2, Abstützung Mitte links cwc 2, outrigger middle left
457 SLGW 2, Abstützung Mitte rechts cwc 2, outrigger middle right
458
459
460 SLGW 2, Abstützung hinten kpl. cwc 2, outrigger rear complete
461 SLGW 2, Abstützung hinten links cwc 2, outrigger rear left
462 SLGW 2, Abstützung hinten rechts cwc 2, outrigger rear right
463 SLGW 2, Abstützung hinten Mitte cwc 2, outrigger rear middle
464
465
466
467
468
469
470 Windenrahmen SL-Verstellung winch frame sl-adjustment
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
13 / 20

488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500 Notaggregat emergency power pack
501
502
503
504
505 Notsteuerung OW, Verteilerkasten emergency control superstructure, terminal box
506 Notsteuerung OW, Bedienpanel emergency control superstructure, operating panel
507
508
509
510 Jackup-System vorne kpl. Jackup-system front complete
511 Jackup-System Abstützung vorne links Jackup-system outrigger front left
512 Jackup-System Abstützung vorne rechts Jackup-system outrigger front right
513 frei nc
514 frei nc
515
516
517
518
519
14 / 20

520 Jackup-System hinten kpl. Jackup-system rear complete
521 Jackup-System Abstützung hinten links Jackup-system outrigger rear left
522 Jackup-System Abstützung hinten rechts Jackup-system outrigger rear right
523 frei nc
524 frei nc
525
526
527
528
529
530 Spreader spreader
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540 Greifer clamshell
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550 Flugsicherungsbeleuchtung air traffic warning light
551
15 / 20

552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560 Windmessanlage anemometer
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570 Funkanlage f. Montageeinrichtungen radio for remote control for assembly
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
16 / 20

584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600 Container allgemein container, general
601 Container vorne kpl. container front complete
602 Container vorne links container front left
603 Container vorne rechts container front right
604 Container Mitte kpl. container middle complete
605 Container Mitte links container middle left
606 Container Mitte rechts container middle right
607 Container hinten kpl. container rear complete
608 Container hinten links container rear left
609 Container hinten rechts container rear right
610 Container, Maschinenraum vorne container, engine room front
611 Container, Hydrauliktank Maschinenraum vorne container, hydraulic oil tank engine room front
612 Container, Hydraulikträger vorne container, hydraulic frame front
613
614
615 Container, Verteilerkasten Maschinenraum vorne container, terminal box engine room front
17 / 20

616
617
618
619
620
621 Container, Steuerblock P1 (1.1) container, control block P1 (1.1)
622 Container, Steuerblock P1.2 container, control block P1.2
623 Container, Steuerblock P2 (2.1) container, control block P2 (2.1)
627
628
629
630 Container, Maschinenraum hinten container, engine room rear
631 Container, Kraftstofftank container, fuel tank
632 Container, Hydraulikträger Maschinenraum hinten container, hydraulic frame engine room rear
633
634
635 Container, Verteilerkasten Maschinenraum hinten container, terminal box engine room rear
636
637
638
639
640
641 Container, Antriebseinheit 1 kpl. container, drive unit 1 complete
642 Container, Antriebseinheit 2 kpl. container, drive unit 2 complete
643
644
645 Schaltkasten 208VAC (400VAC)-Anlage terminal box 208VAC (400VAC)
646
647 Zusatzverteilerkasten 1; 208VAC (400VAC) auxiliary terminal box 1, 208VAC (400VAC)
18 / 20

648
649
650 Zusatzverteilerkasten 2; 208VAC (400VAC) auxiliary terminal box 2, 208VAC (400VAC)
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
19 / 20

680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
20 / 20

DaimlerChrysler
ADM-FR vehicle control adaption module
Control unit Operating Instructions

Printed in Germany
We reserve the right to modify technical details of the control units and engines,
which may then no longer conform with the information and illustrations in these
Operating Instructions.
Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission.
Title illustration: N30.14-2007-24
Editorial status: 14.06.99

Customer Service Powertrain Business Unit
E/MSS
Responsible for content: M/EGE

Contents
Contents Page
1. Safety ...................................................................... 4
1.1. Symbols ........................................................................................ 4
1.2. General information ................................................................... 4
1.3. Use for the intended purpose ................................................... 5
1.4. Personnel requirements ............................................................ 5
1.5. Conversions and modifications to the ADM-FR ..................... 5
1.6. Installation ................................................................................... 5
1.7. Organisational measures ........................................................... 5
1.8. Safety precautions for engines with
electronic control units .............................................................. 6
1.9. DaimlerChrysler original parts ................................................ 7
1.10. Safety and emergency running programme .......................... 7
2. Operation ................................................................ 8
2.1. Introduction ................................................................................. 8
2.2. Tasks ........................................................................................... 10
2.2.1. Functions ................................................................................................. 10
2.2.2. Inputs ....................................................................................................... 10
2.2.3. Outputs .................................................................................................... 10
3. Construction ......................................................... 11
3.1. Connector allocation ................................................................ 12
3.2. Technical data of connector allocation .................................. 17
4. Parameters (ADM-FR version 4) .......................... 22

4.1. List of parameters ..................................................................... 22
4.2. Description of parameters ....................................................... 28
5. Fitting and connecting ......................................... 52

5.1. Operating data ........................................................................... 52
5.2. Installation ................................................................................. 52
5.2.1. Use in vehicles ....................................................................................... 54
5.2.2. Use in stationary engines ..................................................................... 54
5.3. Connecting up ........................................................................... 55
6. Parameter programming ..................................... 56

6.1. Minidiag ..................................................................................... 56
6.2. Hand-held tester (HHT) ............................................................ 56
6.2.1. Diagnosis and parameter programming with HHT .......................... 57
2
Contents
page
7. Application ........................................................... 59
7.1. Driving mode ............................................................................. 59
7.2. Working speed governor (ADR) ............................................. 60
7.3. Accelerator pedal ...................................................................... 63
7.4. Engine start/stop ...................................................................... 65
7.4.1. Engine start ............................................................................................. 65
7.4.2. Engine stop .............................................................................................. 65
7.5. Engine brake/ABS .................................................................... 66
7.6. Instruments/displays ............................................................... 67
7.6.1. Rev counter ............................................................................................. 67
7.6.2. Coolant temperature gauge .................................................................. 67
7.6.3. Oil pressure gauge ................................................................................. 67
7.6.4. Warning lamp ......................................................................................... 68
7.6.5. Buzzer ...................................................................................................... 69
7.6.6. Coolant temperature indicator lamp ................................................... 69
7.6.7. Oil level indicator lamp ......................................................................... 70
7.6.8. Oil pressure indicator lamp .................................................................. 70
7.7. Transmission ............................................................................. 71
7.8. Actual value output .................................................................. 72
7.9. Generator ................................................................................... 72
7.10. Tachograph (speed) .................................................................. 73
7.11. Programmable limitations ....................................................... 74
7.12. Diagnosis .................................................................................... 76
8. Measured values .................................................. 77

8.1. Analogue measured values ..................................................... 77
8.2. Binary measured values .......................................................... 78
9. Fault codes ............................................................ 81
10. Appendix .............................................................. 85

10.1. Parameter list comparison
ADM-FR version 1/version 4 .................................................. 85
10.2. Connector components ............................................................ 92
10.2.1. Types of connector components required ........................................ 92
10.2.2. Connector components required to make connection ................... 93
10.3. Brackets ...................................................................................... 94
3
1. Safety
1. Safety
1.1. Symbols
The instructions which follow are shown against various symbols.
G Risk of injury!
This symbol appears against all safety instructions which must be complied with
in order to avoid a direct risk of danger to life and limb.
This symbol is used against all safety instructions which, if disregarded, could
give rise to the danger of material damage or malfunctions.
1.2. General information
G Risk of potentially fatal accident!
The ADM-FR vehicle control adaptation module is essential for defining the func-
tions of the engine and vehicle. Functions such as engine start, engine stop, ac-
celerator pedal evaluation, actuation of engine brake etc. are relevant to safety.
Incorrectly performed modifications to the parameters or tampering with the
wiring can cause far-reaching changes to the performance of the engine and/or
vehicle. This can lead to personal injury and material damage.
The ADM-FR control unit has been developed and tested in accordance with the
DaimlerChrysler Specifications for Operating Safety and EMC Compatibility. The man-
ufacturer of the vehicle or equipment is solely responsible the examination and imple-
mentation of applicable legal stipulations.
4
1. Safety
1.3. Use for the intended purpose

The DaimlerChrysler engine and the ADM-FR control unit are only to be used for the
purpose stated in the contract of purchase. Any other use or an extension of the stated
use will be regarded as not conforming to the engine's intended purpose.
DaimlerChrysler AG cannot accept any liability for damage resulting from such use.
Liability for damage resulting from the engine not having been used for its intended
purpose shall rest solely with the manufacturer of the complete machine or vehicle in
which the engine is installed.
These ADM-FR Operating Instructions and the engine Operating Instructions must be
observed.
1.4. Personnel requirements

Work on the electrics and programmed parameters should only be carried out by spe-
cially skilled persons or those who have received training from DaimlerChrysler, or by
specialists employed by a workshop authorised by DaimlerChrysler.
1.5. Conversions and modifications to the ADM-FR

Unauthorised modifications to the ADM-FR could affect the operation and safety of the
vehicle/machine in which it is installed. No responsibility will be accepted for any re-
sulting damage.
1.6. Installation
The guidelines and instructions in Chapter 5 must be observed.
1.7. Organisational measures

These Operating Instructions should be handed to personnel entrusted with the oper-
ation of the ADM-FR and should, whenever possible, be stored in an easily accessible
place.
With the aid of these Operating Instructions, personnel must be familiarised with the
operation of the ADM-FR, paying special attention to the safety-relevant instructions
applicable to the engine. This applies in particular to personnel who only work on the
engine and ADM-FR occasionally.
In addition to these Operating Instructions, comply with local legal stipulations and
any other obligatory accident prevention and environmental protection regulations
which may apply in the country of operation.
5
1. Safety
1.8. Safety precautions for engines with

electronic control units
G Risk of accident!
When the vehicle electrics are first operated, the drive train must be open (trans-
mission in neutral).
The engine could start unexpectedly due to incorrect wiring or unsuitable pa-
rameter programming. If the drive train is closed (transmission not in neutral),
the vehicle could unexpectedly start moving or set the working machine in oper-
ation, constituting a risk to life and limb.
The safety precautions stated below must be applied at all times in order to
avoid damage to the engine, its components and wiring, and to avoid possible
personal injury.
– Only start the engine with the batteries securely connected.

– Do not disconnect the batteries when the engine is running.
– Only start the engine with the engine speed sensor connected.
– Do not start the engine with the aid of a rapid battery charger.
If emergency starting is necessary, only start using separate batteries.
– The battery terminal clamps must be disconnected before
a rapid charger is used. Comply with the operating instructions for the rapid
charger.
– If electric welding work is to be performed, the batteries must be
disconnected and both cables (+ and –) secured together.
– Work is only to be performed on the wiring and connectors are only to
be plugged/unplugged with the electrical system switched off.
– The first time the engine is run, the possibility must be provided to switch off
the voltage supply to the MR engine control and to the ADM-FR adaptation
module in an emergency.
If it is incorrectly wired up, it may no longer be possible to switch the
engine off.
– Interchanging the poles of the control unit's voltage supply (e.g. by
interchanging the battery poles) can damage the control unit beyond repair.
– Fasten connectors on the fuel injection system with the
specified tightening torque.
– Only use properly fitting test leads for measurements on plug
connectors (DaimlerChrysler connector set).
If temperatures in excess of 80 °C (e.g. in a drying kiln) are to be expected,

the control units must be removed as they could be damaged by such temper-
atures.
Telephones and two-way radios which are not connected to an external

aerial can cause malfunctions in the vehicle electronics and thus jeapordise
the engine's operating safety.
6
1. Safety
1.9. DaimlerChrysler original parts

DaimlerChrysler original parts are subject to the most stringent quality checks and
guarantee maximum functional efficiency, safety and retention of value.
Each part is specially designed, produced, selected and approved for DaimlerChrysler.
For this reason, we are obliged to disclaim all liability for damage resulting from the
use of parts and accessories which do not meet the above requirements.
In Germany and various other countries, certain parts (for instance parts relevant
to safety) are only officially approved for installation or conversion work if they
comply with valid legal stipulations. These regulations are assured to be satisfied by
DaimlerChrysler original parts.
If other parts, which have not been tested and approved by DaimlerChrysler, are in-
stalled – even if in individual circumstances they have been granted an official oper-
ating permit – DaimlerChrysler is unable to assess them or grant any form of warranty,
although the company endeavours to monitor market developments as far as possible.
The installation of such parts may therefore restrict the validity of the warranty.
1.10. Safety and emergency running programme

The ADM-FR, FMR and MR electronic engine control units monitor the engine and car-
ry out self-diagnosis.
As soon as a fault is detected it is evaluated and one of the following measures is initi-
ated:
– Faults during operation are indicated by the warning lamps being activated.
– Switch-over to a suitable substitute function for continued, albeit restricted engine
operation (e.g. constant emergency engine speed).
Have any faults rectified without delay by the responsible DaimlerChrysler

Service Station.
Note:
The DaimlerChrysler diagnosis testers (hand-held tester (HHT) or Minidiag), which are
connected to the 14-pin diagnosis socket (on the unit), can be used to read off the fault
codes.
ADM-FR fault codes and their meanings are described in Chapter
Defective units which are still within the period of warranty cover (6 months from
DaimlerChrysler dispatch date) must be returned to the DaimlerChrysler field service
organisation.
7
2. Operation
2. Operation
2.1. Introduction
DaimlerChrysler 500, 900 and 450 series engines are equipped with electronic engine
management (MR). The MR monitors and determines all values which are required for
the operation of the engine (e.g. commencement of injection, load level, ambient con-
ditions, sensor evaluation etc.).
The connection to the vehicle is made via a CAN interface, which digitally transmits
the specified values (e.g. torque, engine speed specification etc.) and the actual values
(e.g. engine speed, oil pressure, etc.).
The ADM-FR vehicle control adaptation module contains the CAN interface required
by the MR and allows the operator to implement his requirements on the engine. On
the one hand, the ADM-FR allows the use of conventional gauges and at the same time
provides a conventional interface for special functions. Predefined engine control set-
tings, e.g. torque/rpm limitations or a specified, predefined set engine speed, can be
selected using signal switches. Routines stored in the control unit can be optimally
adapted to the respective application with parameter programming. A diagnosis inter-
face is provided to connect up an external diagnosis tester.
8
2. Operation
Display function
Instruments
Tester, K-wire IWA

diagnosis
tool ISO
diagnosis
ADR
ADM - FR
BGR
Vehicle
MBR switch control unit
ABS input FFG
FLA
M-CAN
MR
N30.14-2025-00
Adaptation module as vehicle control (ADM-FR)
ABS = Anti-lock brake system
ADR = Working speed governor
BGR = Limitations
FFG = Accelerator pedal sender
(driving mode) or specified rpm
FLA = Flame-start system
ISO = International Organization for Standardization
IWA = Actual value output (for automatic transmission, customer-specific electronics,...)
MBR = Engine brake
MR = Engine control
9
2. Operation
2.2. Tasks
The tasks of the ADM-FR can be split into three areas:
– Functions
– Inputs
– Outputs
2.2.1. Functions
• Driving mode: Torque specification to engine management (MR)

• Working speed governor: Specified rpm to engine management (MR)
• Engine start, engine stop
• Accelerator pedal evaluation, monitoring, fault evaluation
• Engine brake (input and output)
• Speed limitation
• Parameter memory
• Fault memory
• Diagnosis
• Diagnosis intersections: Implementation of K-wire diagnosis to
CAN diagnosis for other control units
2.2.2. Inputs
The ADM-FR has inputs for

• Linkup with conventional ABS control unit,
• Transmission "Neutral" position,
• Activating limitations,
• Switching to working speed governor,
• Adjusting rpm,
• Special functions.
2.2.3. Outputs
The ADM-FR has outputs for

• Indicator and warning lamps
– Oil pressure
– Coolant temperature
– Malfunction
– Buzzer,
• Connections for measuring instruments
– Oil pressure
– Coolant temperature
– Engine speed,
• Customer-specific electronics
– Actual value output IWA 1,2 (e.g. for automatic transmission)
– Relay outputs (kickdown)
10
3. Construction
3. Construction
ADM-FR
1 Assembly spring
2 Housing
3 Data plate
4 Connectors
View from connector side

1 Support lug
2 Connector 1 (15-pin)
The connector allocations and technical data are described on the following pages.
11
3. Construction
3.1. Connector allocation
Connector 1
Pin Type Function Abbreviation Description
1 – Battery voltage Terminal 30 Supply voltage
2 A Oil pressure P_OEL Sensor-compatible signal for conventional oil pressure gauge.
The "LA_ADM" output reports impermissible engine operating

states (e.g. oil pressure too low) and active faults which are
recognised by the control unit due to the permanent monitoring of
3 A Warning lamp (MR, ADM) LA_ADM the inputs and outputs.
If the output is active while the engine is running, perform

maintenance or fault diagnosis as soon as possible.
The output, wired to ground, is active if the accelerator pedal is not

in the idling position. This signal can be used to deactivate a
4 A Retarder RETA
retarder.
The output is monitored for a short or open circuit.
5 – Ground Terminal 31 Ground wire
Output, wired to ground, for connecting a solenoid valve to actuate

the engine brake.
6 A Output to engine brake 1 MBRA1
Note the engine brake configuration parameters.
7 A Coolant temperature T_MOT Sensor-compatible signal for conventional temperature gauge.
8 – Accelerator pedal 2, (supply) FFG2 Supply voltage for accelerator pedal electronics, branch 2.
The output is active if serious faults have developed,

e.g. oil pressure too low.
9 A Buzzer BUZZER
If the output is active while the engine is running, stop the
engine without delay. Perform maintenance or fault
diagnosis as soon as possible.
Programmable actual value output (PWM signal) for customer-

specific electronics or automatic transmission.
Actual value output 2
Possible output signals:
10 A Frequency: Speed IWA2
– Accelerator pedal signal
PWM: FP, limiting load...
– Marginal moment (limiting load signal)
– Actual engine torque
A = Output
E/A = Input/output (bi-directional)
DE = Digital input
AE = Analogue input
IE = Impulse input
12
3. Construction
Connector 1 (continued)
11 – Accelerator pedal 1, (supply) FFG1+ Supply voltage for accelerator pedal electronics, branch 1.
Output is active if the engine coolant temperature is too high.
12 A Coolant indicator lamp LA_T_MOT If the output is active while the engine is running, stop the
Output is active if the oil level has dropped to an impermissibly low

level. This function is only available on engines with oil level sensor.
13 A Oil level indicator lamp LA_OELST
If the output is active while the engine is running, stop the
Output is active if the engine oil pressure at current rpm is too low.
14 A Oil pressure indicator lamp LA_P_OEL If the output is active while the engine is running, stop the
Input for "Terminal 15 ON" signal from starter switch. This signal
15 DE Battery voltage activated Terminal 15
must also be connected to the MR engine management.
A = Output
DE = Digital input
AE = Analogue input
IE = Impulse input
13
3. Construction
Connector 2
1 IE Tachograph speed C3 Speed input from tachograph for road speed signal C3 (B7).
Input for engine brake actuation to outputs MBRA1 and MBRA2.

2 DE Engine brake input MBRE
Note engine brake configuration parameters.
3 IE Generator terminal W Terminal W Terminal W input from generator.
Input for activating selectable air conditioner pin limitations

(e.g. idle speed boost for air conditioner).
4 DE Air conditioner KLIMA These imitations are always effective when the input is active.
It is possible to programme the input to reflect a changeover between
driving and ADR mode.
Input for engine start signal from starter switch. This signal must
5 IE Terminal 50 Terminal 50
also be connected to the MR engine management.
Driving mode: Input for idle speed boost

6 DE Working speed up ADR+
ADR mode: Input for increasing specified engine speed
Input for activating selectable ADR0 pin limitations. These

limitations are always effective when the input is active.
7 DE Working speed 0 ADR0
It is possible to programme the input to reflect a changeover between
driving and ADR mode.
Input, wired to ground, with programmable function

8 DE Special functions 1 DSF1 – "Antigas" (Accelerator pedal lock)
– ABS signal from conventional ABS control unit
"Neutral" information from transmission. This input affects the

9 DE Neutral position NE
engine start.
Engine speed
Engine speed information for terminal W-compatible rev counter.
10 A (terminal W-compatible N_MOT
Allocation of engine speed output frequency can be programmed.
signal)
11 DE Rear axle HA vacant
Input, wired to positive, with programmable function

Special function 0
12 DE DSF0 – "Antigas" (Accelerator pedal lock)
(antigas, upper vehicle...)
– ABS signal from conventional ABS control unit
A = Output
DE = Digital input
AE = Analogue input
IE = Impulse input
14
3. Construction
Signal information from accelerator pedal, branch 1 (driver
13 IE Accelerator pedal 1 (PWM) FFG1
requirement)

It is possible to programme the input to reflect a changeover
between driving and ADR operation.
Signal information from accelerator pedal, branch 2 (driver

15 IE Accelerator pedal 2 (PWM) FFG2
requirement)

It is possible to programme the input to reflect a changeover
between driving and ADR operation.
Manual throttle Signal information (specified engine speed) from

17 IE HFG
sender (PWM) PWM manual throttle sender.
Driving mode: Input for idle speed reduction

18 DE Working speed down ADR-
ADR mode: Input for decreasing specified engine speed
Connector 3
1 – – – vacant
4 AE Analogue input 1 AE1 vacant
5 DE Engine flap (bus) MKLE Input for engine starter inhibitor
6 DE Door open (bus) TROE Input for accelerator pedal lock
7 A Output relay 4 REL4 Output of actual value comparator 4
8 A Output relay 3 REL3 Output of actual value comparator 3
A = Output
DE = Digital input
AE = Analogue input
IE = Impulse input
15
3. Construction
9 A Output relay 2 REL2 Output is active if the accelerator pedal is in the idling position.
Output is active when the accelerator pedal is in the "kickdown"

10 A Output relay 1 REL1
position (information for automatic transmission).
Programmable actual value output for customer-specific

electronics or automatic transmission.
Actual value output 1 Possible output signals:
11 A IWA1
(FP, limiting load,...) – Accelerator pedal signal
– Marginal moment (limiting load signal)
Output, wired to ground, for connecting a solenoid valve to actuate

the engine brake.
12 A Output to engine brake 2 MBRA2
Note the engine brake configuration parameters.
Connector 4
1 E/A High-speed CAN (high) CAN-HH vacant
2 – – – reserved
3 E/A High-speed CAN (low) CAN-HL vacant
4 – CAN-HF ground HF-GND CAN connection (HF ground) to MR engine electronics
5 E/A K wire K-DIAG Diagnosis wire
6 – CAN-HF ground HF-GND CAN connection (HF ground) to MR engine electronics
7 E/A Low-speed CAN (high) CAN-LH CAN connection (high wire) to MR engine electronics
8 – – – reserved
9 E/A Low-speed CAN (low) CAN-LL CAN connection (low wire) to MR engine electronics
A = Output
DE = Digital input
AE = Analogue input
IE = Impulse input
16
3. Construction
3.2. Technical data of connector allocation
Power supply
Conn./pin Function Abbreviation IMAX Other data
1/1 Battery voltage Terminal 30 < 500 mA Current draw
1/5 Ground Terminal 31 – –
UB15, Ri=150 ohms

1/8 Accelerator pedal 2, (supply) FFG2+ 20 mA
short-circuit-protected
UB15, Ri=150 ohms

1/11 Accelerator pedal 1, (supply) FFG1+ 20 mA
1/15 Battery voltage activated Terminal 15 < 10 mA Current draw
The value 150 ohms of the internal resistance of the accelerator pedal supply 1 and 2 is to be regarded as a guideline, as it depends
on a number of factors (e.g. current, temperature, component tolerances, etc.).
Dynamic inputs (IE)

Conn./pin Function Abbreviation f ULOW UHIGH Other data
Wired to ground, 47k

2/1 Tachograph speed C3 5.2 kHz < 3.3 V > 5.7 V
to terminal 30 (UB)
Wired to positive, 22k

2/3 Generator terminal W Terminal W p·n/60 <8V > 15 V
to ground
Wired to positive,
2/5 Terminal 50 Terminal 50 – <5V >8V
3.6k to ground
200 ... Wired to ground, 22k

2/13 Accelerator pedal 1 (PWM) FFG1 < 6.5 V > 14 V
300 Hz to terminal 30 (UB)

2/15 Accelerator pedal 2 (PWM) FFG2 < 6.5 V > 14 V

2/17 Manual throttle sender (PWM) HFG < 6.5 V > 14V
17
3. Construction
Digital inputs (DE)

Conn./pin Function Abbreviation f ULOW UHIGH Other data
Wired to positive, 2k4

2/2 Engine brake input MBRE < 100 Hz <4V > 7.5 V
to ground

2/4 Air conditioner KLIMA < 100 Hz <4V > 7.5 V
to ground
Wired to ground, 2k3

2/6 Working speed up ADR+ < 100 Hz <8V > 16.5 V
to terminal 30 (UB)

2/7 Working speed 0 ADR0 < 100 Hz <8V > 16.5 V
to terminal 30 (UB)
Wired to ground,
2/8 Special function 1 (ABS) DSF1 < 100 Hz <8V > 16.5 V 600R to
terminal 30 (UB)

2/9 Neutral position NE < 100 Hz < 3.8 V > 7.5 V
to ground

2/11 Rear axle HA < 100 Hz <4V > 7.5 V
to ground
Special function 0 Wired to positive, 2k4

2/12 DSF0 < 100 Hz <4V > 7.5 V
(antigas, upper vehicle...) to ground

to ground

to terminal 30 (UB)

2/18 Working speed down ADR- < 100 Hz <8V > 16.5 V
to terminal 30 (UB)

3/5 Engine flap (bus) MKLE < 100 Hz <8V > 16.5 V
to terminal 30 (UB)

3/6 Door open (bus) TROE < 100 Hz <4V > 7.5 V
to ground
18
3. Construction
Analogue inputs (AE)

Conn./pin Function Abbreviation UMIN UMAX Other data
3/4 Analogue input 1 AE 1 0 UB 14k2 to ground
Instrument outputs (A)

Conn./pin Function Abbreviation IMAX f UMAX Other data
Analogue,
1/2 Oil pressure P_OEL 120 mA – UB 0 V – terminal 30 (UB),
Analogue,
1/7 Coolant temperature T_MOT 120 mA – UB 0 V – terminal 30 (UB),
PWM, wired to
ground, pull-up 4k7
Actual value output 2 300 Hz,
1/10 IWA2 50 mA UB to terminal 30 (UB),
PWM: FP, limiting load... +/– 1 %
short-circuit-
protected
PWM, pull-up 4k7 to

Engine speed terminal 30 (UB),
2/10 N_MOT 50 mA 0 – 8 kHz UB
(terminal-W-compatible signal) short-circuit-
protected
PWM, wired to
ground, pull-up 4k7
Actual value output 1 300 Hz,
3/11 IWA1 50 mA UB to terminal 30 (UB),
(FP, limiting load,...) +/– 1 %
short-circuit-
protected
19
3. Construction
Driver outputs (A)

PMAX,
Conn./pin Function Abbreviation IMAX Rcoil, at 20 °C Other data
LAMP
2.0 W
1/3 Warning lamp (MR, ADM) LA_ADM 200 mA – Wired to ground
at 12 V
Wired to ground,
1/4 Retarder RETA 500 mA – – inductive load,
diagnosis possible
Wired to ground,
1/6 Output to engine brake 1 MBRA1 1.2 A 16.5 W 35 ohms inductive load,
diagnosis possible
2.0 W
1/9 Buzzer BUZZER 200 mA – Wired to ground
at 12 V
2.0 W
1/12 Coolant indicator lamp LA_T_MOT 200 mA – Wired to ground
at 12 V
2.0 W
1/13 Oil level indicator lamp LA_OELST 200 mA – Wired to ground
at 12 V
2.0 W
1/14 Oil pressure indicator lamp LA_P_OEL 200 mA – Wired to ground
at 12 V
24 V: 130 ohms Wired to ground,

3/7 Output relay 4 REL4 200 mA –
12 V: 65 ohms inductive load



Wired to ground,
3/12 Engine brake (output) MBRA2 1.2 A 16.5 W 35 ohms inductive load,
diagnosis possible
20
3. Construction
Interfaces (E/A)
Conn./pin Function Abbreviation Level UMIN UMAX Other data
4/1 High-speed CAN (high) CAN-HH 5V – – ISO/DIS 11898
4/3 High-speed CAN (low) CAN-HL 5V – – ISO/DIS 11898
4/4 CAN-HF ground HF-GND GND – – 100 nF to ground
4/5 K wire K-DIAG UB 0 UB –
4/6 CAN-HF ground HF-GND GND – – 100 nF to ground
ISO/DIS 11992,
4/7 High-speed CAN (high) CAN-LH UB – – single-wire-
compatible
ISO/DIS 11992,
4/9 High-speed CAN (low) CAN-LL UB – – single-wire-
compatible
21
4. Parameters
4. Parameters (ADM-FR version 4)
A comparison of the parameters of version 1 and of version 4 is given in the appendix.

The ADM-FR parameters are divided into 17 groups. Each parameter group corresponds to one area of influence.
4.1. List of parameters
Default
Parameter group Parameter Range Unit
value
01 Single wire capability

1 CAN configuration YES/NO – NO
Engine CAN switched off
01 Engine brake (MBR) 0 ... 4 – 1
02 Retarder (RET)
YES/NO – NO
fitted
03 Automatic transmission
YES/NO – NO
fitted
04 Activate touch inputs

YES/NO – YES
ADR+/-
2 Base configuration
driving mode 05 Foot throttle actuator
YES/NO – YES
(FFG) fitted
06 Manual throttle
actuator (HFG) YES/NO – NO
fitted
07 HFG stops
YES/NO – NO
can be learned
08 Configuration for
12/24 V 24
12/24V use
01 Stationary speed
0 ... 4,000 rpm 2,496
limit
02 Idle speed control

0 ... 4,000 rpm 592
specified value
3 Generally valid limits 03 Max. value

0 ... 4,000 rpm 896
idle speed control
04 Maximum speed 0 ... 4,000 rpm 3,008
05 Maximum vehicle
0 ... 150 km/h 85
speed
22
4. Parameters
Default
value
06 Max. torque 0 ... 5,000 Nm 4,999
07 Governor selection 0 ... 5 – 1
3 Generally valid limits 08 Slope of speed

1 ... 99 rpm/10 ms 10
limit
09 Slope of torque
1 ... 1,000 Nm/10 ms 50
limit
01 Min. speed
0 ... 4,000 rpm 496
Pin ADR 0
02 Max. speed
0 ... 4,000 rpm 3,008
Pin ADR 0
03 Max. vehicle speed

4 Variable limits No. 0 0 ... 150 km/h 150
Pin ADR 0
04 Max. torque
0 ... 5,000 Nm 4,999
Pin ADR 0
05 Governor selection
0 ... 5 – 1
ADR 0
01 Min. speed
0 ... 4,000 rpm 496
Pin ADR 1
02 Max. speed
0 ... 4,000 rpm 3,008
Pin ADR 1

5 Variable limits No. 1 0 ... 150 km/h 150
Pin ADR 1
04 Max. torque
0 ... 5,000 Nm 4,999
Pin ADR 1
0 ... 5 – 1
ADR 1
01 Min. speed
0 ... 4,000 rpm 496
Pin AC
6 Variable limits No. 2 02 Max. speed

0 ... 4,000 rpm 3,008
(idle speed increase) Pin AC

0 ... 150 km/h 150
Pin AC
23
4. Parameters
Default
value
04 Max. torque
0 ... 5,000 Nm 4,999
Pin AC
6 Variable limits No. 2
(idle speed increase)
0 ... 5 – 1
AC
01 Allow for input

YES/NO – YES
ADR 0
02 Allow for input

YES/NO – NO
ADR 1
03 Allow for input

YES/NO – NO
ADR 2
04 Allow for input

YES/NO – NO
Neutral
05 Allow for input

YES/NO – NO
AC
06 Allow for idle

YES/NO – NO
throttle status
07 Allow for status

YES/NO – NO
v < 5 km/h
7 Configuration
working speed control 08 Inputs ADR +, ADR -
YES/NO – YES
active
09 Foot throttle actuator

YES/NO – YES
active
10 Manual throttle actuator

YES/NO – NO
active
11 Activate working speed

YES/NO – YES
control (ADR)
12 ADR touch set value

0 ... 4,000 rpm 0
Start value
13 ADR +/- bounce time 50 ... 5,000 ms 500
14 ADR +/- step width 2 ... 10,000 rpm/10 200
15 Change speed,
2 ... 5,000 rpm/100 ms 11
ADR set value
24
4. Parameters
Parameter group Parameter Range Unit Default value
01 Input C3 signal 0 ... 2 – 1
02 Distance pulse count

8 C3 signal analysis 4,400 ... 13,600 Pulses/km 4,400
(tachograph)
03 Rear axle ratio 1 ... 2,000 – 100
01 Actual value output

0 ... 4 – 1
IWA 1

0 ... 4 – 4
IWA 2
9 Act. value output (IWA)
03 Reference torque for
0 ... 5,000 Nm 0
IWA 1,2
04 Pulse count
200 ... 15,000 Pulses/100 rpm 2,173
(tachometer)
01 MBR, activation
0 ... 4,000 rpm 900
speed
02 MBR, time FP torque

10 Engine brake management 0 ... 5,000 ms 300
inhibited after MBR off
03 MBR, acceleration ramp

0 ... 500 Nm/10 ms 30
after MBR off

0.1 ... 100 %/10 ms 4.0
positioning rate up

0.1 ... 100 %/10 ms 5.5
positioning rate down
03 Shift point
0.1 ... 100 % 6.0
idle speed
04 Shift point
0.1 ... 100 % 16.0
11 Accelerator pedal full load
05 Shift point
0.1 ... 100 % 4.0
KD on
06 Shift point
0.1 ... 100 % 14.0
KD off
07 Starting-off aid
reduction FP additional 2 ... 1,000 Nm/s 10
torque
25
4. Parameters
Default
value
08 RQV, FFG position

0 ... 100 % 0
bottom

11 Accelerator pedal 0 ... 100 % 100
top
10 RQV, constant
20 ... 20,000 – 4,000
speed droop
01 Transmission protection
0 ... 150 km/h 0
1st vehicle speed
0 ... 150 km/h 0
2nd vehicle speed
0 ... 5,000 Nm 4,999
torque reduction
04 Hysteresis 0 ... 500 Nm 50

05 Damping at zero load
0 ... 5,000 Nm 25
threshold
06 dM/dt within
0 ... 500 Nm/10 ms 48
threshold, >0
07 dM/dt within
0 ... 500 Nm/10 ms 8
threshold, <0
08 dM/dt not within

0 ... 500 Nm/10 ms 450
threshold
01 Activate analogue
YES/NO – NO
input 1
02 Analogue input 1
0 ... 24,000 mV 0
lower limit value
03 Analogue input 1
13 Input configuration 0 ... 24,000 mV 23,977
upper limit value
04 Digital input DSF0

0 ... 4 – 0
function configuration

0 ... 4 – 4
26
4. Parameters
Default
value
01 Selection oil pressure

14 INS curve oil pressure 0 ... 1 – 0
curve
01 Selection coolant
15 INS curve coolant 0 ... 1 – 0
curve
Parameters in this group define the operation of the speed control system.
16 Vehicle speed limit
Access to these parameters is not possible.
01 Configuration IWK3 0 ... 4 – 0
02 IWK3
0 ... 5,000 Nm 5,000
Torque M
03 IWK3
0 ... 5,000 Nm 50
Hysteresis M
04 IWK3
0 ... 150 km/h 150
Vehicle speed
05 IWK3
0 ... 150 km/h 5
Hysteresis V
06 IWK3
0 ... 4,000 rpm 4,000
Speed N
17 Switching thresholds 07 IWK3

0 ... 4,000 rpm 50
relays 3 and 4 Hysteresis N
08 IWK3
–50 ... 200 °C 200
Coolant temperature
09 IWK3
–50 ... 200 °C 5
Hysteresis T
10 Configuration IWK4 0 ... 4 – 0
11 IWK4
0 ... 5,000 Nm 5,000
Torque M
12 IWK4
0 ... 5,000 Nm 50
Hysteresis M
13 IWK4
0 ... 150 km/h 150
Vehicle speed
27
4. Parameters
14 IWK4
0 ... 150 km/h 5
Hysteresis V
15 IWK4
0 ... 4,000 rpm 4,000
Speed N
17 Switching thresholds 16 IWK4

0 ... 4,000 rpm 50
relays 3 and 4 Hysteresis N
17 IWK4
–50 ... 200 °C 200
Coolant temperature
18 IWK4
–50 ... 200 °C 5
Hysteresis T
4.2. Description of parameters
1 CAN configuration
Parameter Description
According to CAN definition, the CAN-Hi and CAN-Lo data wires transmit the same
information with complementary physical levels. This type of transmission is considered
extremely reliable with regard to influences (interference).
The CAN connection between the ADM-FR and the MR engine management can be made
with a single wire. This allows communications to be continued on the second, intact wire
01 Single wire capability in the event of a short or broken circuit in one wire. Higher availability is thus achieved.
Engine CAN deactivated
Single wire capability must be deactivated if more than two participants are connected to
the engine CAN.
ADM-FR and MR engine management must be have identical settings with regard to single
wire capability.
28
4. Parameters
2 Basic configuration driving mode
This group contains parameters which define driving operation.

The vehicle control adaptation module (ADM-FR) differentiates between the operating modes "Driving" and "Working speed
governing (ADR)".
Driving mode is used for road-based vehicles.
The output/setting value for driving mode is engine torque.
The specified engine torque is determined by the ADM-FR and transmitted to the engine electronics via the CAN connection.
Driving mode is activated whenever the working speed governor is not active.
The following engine brake configurations are possible, depending on this parameter:
Value MBRA1 output MBRA2 output Remarks
0 Output open Output open No engine brake
1 1 valve Output open Constantly open throttle

valve, brake flap on one
valve
01 Engine brake (MBR)
2 1 valve (BK) Output open Brake flap to ADM-FR,
hydr. constantly open
throttle valve to MR
3 Output open 1 valve (KDR) Constantly open throttle

valve to ADM-FR, brake flap
to MR
4 1 valve (BK) 1 valve (KDR) Constantly open throttle

valve and brake flap to each
ADM-FR output
The "RETA" (retarder) output can be used to deactivate a retarder.

02 Retarder (RET) Retarder operation is only permissible if, for example the engine is in deceleration
fitted (overrun) mode, no ABS adjustments have been made and the working speed governor is
not active.
03 Automatic transmission If an automatic transmission is fitted, it is only possible to start the engine with input
fitted "terminal 50" if input "NE" (neutral) is active.
The ADM-FR inputs "ADR+" (working speed governor up) and "ADR–" (working speed
governor down) can be used to increase idling speed. Idling speed can be adjusted in steps
by tipping the "ADR+" or "ADR–" inputs, or along a ramp with a prolonged actuation. The
maximum idling speed is set with parameter "3/03 Max. idling speed control".
04 Activate touch inputs ADR+/– Input debouncing time, increment and ramp rate are adjustable.
Press "ADR+" and "ADR–" at the same time to reset the specified setting (idling speed
setting).
This function is only possible when the vehicle is stationary and driving mode is selected
(no working speed governor).
29
4. Parameters
2 Driving mode basic configuration (continued)
On vehicles, the foot throttle actuator generally serves to transmit the driver's
requirements to the engine.
05 Foot throttle actuator (FFG) On systems without a foot throttle actuator, e.g. stationary appliances, the evaluation and
fitted monitoring of the FFG signals can be deactivated to prevent fault messages being given
due to an open input. This is only possible if the parameter
"7/09 foot throttle actuator active" is also set to "NO".
06 Manual throttle actuator (HFG)

This parameter is not currently available. The function is planned for future extensions.
fitted
07 HFG stops
can be learned
Set this parameter to the rated voltage of the appliance electrical system.
12/24 V use
3 Generally valid limits
This group contains general limitations which define the characteristics of the vehicle or equipment.
It is only possible to modify the limits set in the engine electronics to the extent that maximum values are reduced and minimum
values increased.
The engine speed can be limited to the value set here when driving mode is activated and
01 Stationary speed limit the vehicle is stationary (speed = 0). This prevents the engine from overrevving when the
vehicle is stationary.
Definition of the minimum engine speed, provided the set value is greater than the idling
speed stored in the engine electronics.
The set value is always valid and can only be superseded by higher engine speeds using
02 Idle specified value control
the programmable limitations.
It may be necessary to raise the idling speed if the engine is permanently operated with
increased basic load (ancillary equipment, converter transmission).
Definition of the upper end value of the idling speed adjustment in driving mode, possible
03 Max. value via switches with digital inputs "ADR+" (working speed up) and "ADR–" (working speed
idle speed control down).
This function is activated via parameter programming (see parameter 2/04).
30
4. Parameters
3 Generally valid limitations (continued)
Definition of the maximum engine speed, provided the set value is lower than the limiting
speed stored in the engine electronics.
The set value is always valid and can only be superseded by lower engine speeds using the
04 Maximum speed
programmable limitations.
It may be necessary to reduce the maximum engine speed, e.g. when a hydrostatic drive
is fitted, to prevent the maximum speed of the hydraulic pump from being exceeded.
The vehicle control adaptation module (ADM-FR) is certified as per directive 92/24/EEC
as a speed limiter for keeping to legally specified maximum speeds. This parameter can
only be changed with the relevant authorisation. Such authorisation can be issued to
05 Maximum vehicle speed
vehicle manufacturers upon application to DaimlerChrysler.
The set value is always valid and can only be superseded by lower speeds using the
Limitation of maximum torque value, provided the set value is below the maximum torque
value stored in the engine electronics.
06 Max. torque
The set value is always valid and can only be superseded by lower torques using the
Depending on the application, different, finely tuned speed governors can be used on the
engine electronics in the operating mode "Working speed governor". The type of governor
is set with this parameter.
07 Governor selection Governor type 0 is a dynamic governor, e.g. for engine-clutch governing.
Governor type 1 is specially tuned for use with power take-offs, pumps etc.
Other governor types are not available at present.
Ramps become effective when switching over from driving mode to working speed
governor mode (or vice versa) or when torque limitations cut in.
08 Slope of speed limit
The time characteristic of the change of torque limitation (dynamic or soft) can be set with
this parameter.
Ramps become effective when switching over from driving mode to working speed
governor mode (or vice versa) or when engine speed limitations cut in.
09 Slope of torque limit
The time characteristic of the change of engine speed (dynamic or soft) can be set with this
parameter.
31
4. Parameters
These limitations become effective as a function of the switching state of the "ADR 0" digital input (working speed 0).
These values are effective both in driving mode and in working speed governor mode and can influence minimum and maximum
engine speed, maximum road speed, maximum torque and governor type.
The maximum values effective in parameter group 3 or in the engine electronics can only be superseded by lower values, the
minimum values only be higher values – i.e. the maximum speed can only be reduced with "ADR 0" input activated.
01 Min. speed Definition of idling speed boost. The set value is selected via input "ADR 0" (working
Pin ADR 0 speed 0).
02 Max. speed Definition of engine speed limitation. The set value is selected via input "ADR 0" (working
Pin ADR 0 speed 0).
03 Max. vehicle speed Definition of reduced maximum speed. The set value is selected via input "ADR 0"
Pin ADR 0 (working speed 0).
04 Max. torque Definition of torque limitation. The set value is selected via input "ADR 0" (working
Pin ADR 0 speed 0).
engine electronics in the operating mode "Working speed governor".
This parameter is used to set the governor type, provided the input "ADR 0" (working
speed 0) is to be allowed for with respect to the switchover to working speed governor
05 Governor selection mode (see parameter 7/01).
ADR 0
Governor type 0 is a dynamic governor, e.g. for engine-clutch governing.
32
4. Parameters
These limitations become effective as a function of the switching state of the "ADR 1" digital input (working speed 1).
Function and access to limitations are identical to "4 Variable limits No. 0". The only difference is that the values are activated
via input "ADR 1".
Upper limits are always linked to the minimum value. Lower limits are linked to the maximum value. This also applies when
several programmable limitations are active.
01 Min. speed Definition of idling speed boost. The set value is selected via input "ADR 1" (working
Pin ADR 1 speed 1).
02 Max. speed Definition of engine speed limitation. The set value is selected via input "ADR 1" (working
Pin ADR 1 speed 1).
03 Max. vehicle speed Definition of reduced maximum speed. The set value is selected via input "ADR 1"
Pin ADR 1 (working speed 1).
04 Max. torque Definition of torque limitation. The set value is selected via input "ADR 1" (working
Pin ADR 1 speed 1).
This parameter is used to set the governor type, provided the input "ADR 1" (working
speed 1) is to be allowed for with respect to the switchover to working speed governor
ADR 1
33
4. Parameters
6 Variable limits No. 2 (idle speed increase)
These limitations become effective as a function of the switching state of the "KLIMA" digital input.
Function and access to limitations are identical to "4 Variable limits No. 0". The only difference is that the values are activated
via input "KLIMA".
Upper limits are always linked to the minimum value. Lower limits are linked to the maximum value. This also applies when
several programmable limitations are active.
01 Min. speed Definition of idling speed boost. The set value is selected via input "KLIMA" (air
Pin A/C conditioner).
02 Max. speed Definition of engine speed limitation. The set value is selected via input "KLIMA" (air
03 Max. vehicle speed Definition of reduced maximum speed. The set value is selected via input "KLIMA" (air
04 Max. torque Definition of torque limitation. The set value is selected via input "KLIMA" (air
This parameter is used to set the governor type, provided the input "KLIMA" (air
conditioner) is to be allowed for with respect to switchover to working speed governor
A/C pin
34
4. Parameters
7 Configuration working speed control
This group contains parameters which define the operation of the working speed governor.
The vehicle control adaptation module (ADM-FR) differentiates between the operating modes "Driving" and "Working speed
governor (ADR)"
The working speed governor is used for power take-offs, working equipment (e.g. cranes, piste maintenance equipment,
harvesters, etc.) and for stationary applications (e.g. compressors, power generators, pumps, etc.).
The output/setting value for ADR mode is engine speed.
The specified engine speed is determined by the ADM-FR and transmitted to the engine electronics via the CAN connection.
The working speed governor is activated when all selected conditions are true (AND link).
Which conditions have to be allowed for to switch to working speed governor mode is programmed using simple yes/no
decisions.
The input "ADR 0" (working speed 0) can be allowed for as a condition for activating the
working speed governor. Working speed governor mode is then only possible when the
01 Allow for
input "ADR 0" is active.
input ADR 0
The setting of this value has no influence on the effect of parameter group
"4 Variable limits No. 0".
02 Allow for
input "ADR 1" is active.
input ADR 1
"5 Variable limits No 1".
03 Allow for
working speed governor. The condition is considered to be true if the control unit detects
input ADR 2
a falling edge at the input.
04 Allow for The input "NE" (neutral) can be allowed for as a condition for activating the working speed
input Neutral governor.
The input "KLIMA" (air conditioner) can be allowed for as a condition for activating the
05 Allow for
input "KLIMA" is active.
input A/C
"6 Variable limits No. 2".
The state "idle" can be allowed for as a condition for activating the working speed governor.
06 Allow for idle
Working speed governor mode is then only possible when the accelerator pedal is not
throttle status
depressed.
07 Allow for status The status vehicle stationary (v < 5 km/h) can be allowed for as a condition for activating
v < 5 km/h the working speed governor.
35
4. Parameters
7 Configuration working speed control (continued)
The inputs "ADR+" (working speed up) and "ADR–" (working speed down) can be
activated to define or change the engine speed specification in working speed governor
mode.
08 Inputs ADR+, ADR– The specified engine idling speed can be adjusted in steps by tipping the inputs "ADR+"
active or "ADR–", or ramped within the valid engine speed range by prolonged actuation.
Input debouncing time, increment and ramp rate are adjustable.
Press "ADR+" and "ADR–" at the same time to reset the specified setting (idling speed
setting).
The foot throttle actuator can be activated to define the specified engine speed in working
speed governor mode.
09 Foot throttle actuator active
The accelerator pedal position is shown in linear form in the range defined by the
minimum and maximum engine speeds.
A manual throttle actuator with PWM output can be activated to define the specified
10 Manual throttle actuator active
engine speed in working speed governor mode.

This parameter is used to enable or to disable the working speed governor.
control (ADR)
When switching over from driving mode to working speed governor mode, the specified
12 ADR tip specification engine speed is set to the value programmed here, provided the inputs "ADR+" (working
Start value speed up) and "ADR–" (working speed down) are used to define the specified engine speed
(see parameter 7/08).
The specified engine idling speed can be adjusted in steps by tipping the inputs "ADR+"
(working speed up) or "ADR–" (working speed down), or ramped within the valid engine
13 ADR+/– debounce time
speed range by prolonged actuation.
After the time set here has elapsed, the engine speed adjust ramp commences.
(working speed up) or "ADR–" (working speed down), or ramped within the valid engine
14 ADR+/– step width
speed range by prolonged actuation.
When it is tipped, the specified engine speed changes by the increment set here.
15 Change speed (working speed up) or "ADR–" (working speed down), or ramped within the valid engine
ADR set value speed range by prolonged actuation.
The value set here defines how steep the ramp is, i.e. how quickly the speed is ramped.
36
4. Parameters
8 C3 signal analysis
This group contains the speed determination parameters.

To implement a speed limitation, the ADM-FR requires a speed signal.
This parameter defines whether a speed signal is present, and if so what type.
This value can only be changed with the relevant authorisation. Such authorisation can be
issued to vehicle manufacturers upon application to DaimlerChrysler.
01 Input C3 signal
Programmable values:
0 = off, no speed signal, e.g. for stationary operation.
1 = C3 (B7) – speed signal from tachograph output.
2 = pulse generator, HALL sensor on transmission. This function is being prepared.
Parameter for scaling the speed measurement if the signal is detected by the
(tachograph)
HALL sensor on the transmission.
If a rear axle with variable transmission ratio is fitted, this parameter serves to adapt the
03 Rear axle ratio
speed calculation when the crawler gear is engaged (only possible with signal detection
via HALL sensor on transmission).
The ADM-FR receives the rear axle switching state information via the "Rear axle" input.
37
4. Parameters
Parameter group for actual value output to PWM outputs "IWA 1" (actual value output 1), "IWA 2" (actual value output 2) and
engine speed information to output "N_MOT" (engine speed).
The physical value output at "IWA 1" (actual value output 1) can be selected.
Pulse duty factors < 5 % and > 95 % are evaluated as faults or as signal failures by the
subsequent electronic circuit connected.
Value Meaning Remarks
0 no output
1 FP torque 10 % ... 90 % Illustration of accelerator pedal position

Idle – full throttle to 10 % ... 90 %
pulse duty factor
2 Differential torque Signal for engine load evaluation

e.g. for limit load regulation
01 Actual value output IWA 1 90 %: Maximum engine torque reached
(drive)
50 %: Engine not under load
10 %: Maximum friction torque reached

pulse duty factor
4 Actual torque Illustration of actual engine torque

0 ... MMAX
to 10 % ... 90 % pulse duty factor
5 Load signal Load signal to coupling of

automatic transmission with PWM interface.
Output value is minimum of actual
torque and accelerator pedal position.
38
4. Parameters
9 Actual value output (IWA) (continued)
The physical value output at "IWA 2" (actual value output 2) can be selected.
Pulse duty factors < 5 % and > 95 % are evaluated as faults or as signal failures by the
subsequent electronic circuit connected.
0 no output

pulse duty factor
2 Differential torque Signal for engine load evaluation

e.g. for limit load regulation
02 Actual value output IWA 2 90 %: Maximum engine torque reached
(drive)
50 %: Engine not under load
10 %: Maximum friction torque reached

pulse duty factor
4 Actual torque Illustration of actual engine torque

0 ... MMAX
to 10 % ... 90 % pulse duty factor
5 Load signal Load signal to coupling of

automatic transmission with PWM interface.
Output value is minimum of actual
torque and accelerator pedal position.

IWA 1,2
A square-wave signal which is directly proportional to the engine speed is available at the
"N_MOT" (engine speed) output.
Pulse duty factor approx. 50 %.
The scaling, i.e. allocation of frequency to engine speed can be adjusted.
04 Pulse count
(tachometer) n MOT [ min –1 ]
fMOT [ Hz ] = k • ----------------------------------
6000
fMOT : Frequency at "N_MOT" output

k : rev counter pulse count, number of pulses pro 100 rpm
nMOT : current engine speed, actual value
39
4. Parameters
10 Engine brake management
This group contains parameters which define the characteristics and operation of the engine brake.
G Risk of accident!
The engine brake is a safety-relevant function for commercial vehicles.

Incorrect or unsuitable parameter programming can make it impossible
to actuate the engine brake. The lack of, or reduction in, engine braking
power could lead to the vehicle brake being overloaded. The vehicle can
then no longer be braked.
Changes to the parameters in this group must only be performed by

specially trained personnel or after consultation with the engine
manufacturer.
It is not normally necessary to change these parameters.
Engine brake intervention is only possible when the engine speed is above the speed set
here.
01 MBR, activation speed
This prevents the engine from being stopped by engine brake intervention at excessively
low speed.
When the engine brake is deactivated, the accelerator pedal is blocked for the time set here
02 MBR,time FP torque
(delayed injection). This time is intended for the transition of the engine brake to its rest
position.
03 MBR, acceleration When the time set under parameter "02 MBR, time FP torque inhibited after MBR off" has
after MBR off elapsed, the current accelerator pedal position is effective via the ramp set here.
40
4. Parameters
11 Accelerator pedal
This group contains parameters which define the evaluation of the accelerator pedal.
G Risk of accident!
The accelerator pedal is a safety-relevant function for commercial

vehicles.
Incorrect or unsuitable parameter programming can seriously affect
the reactions of the accelerator pedal. This can cause the driver's
requirements (e.g. throttle back) not to be implemented properly or
only after a delay.
Changes to the parameters in this group must only be performed by

specially trained personnel or after consultation with the engine
manufacturer.
It is not normally necessary to change these parameters.
Acceleration to the current accelerator pedal position runs along the ramp set here. This
01 Foot throttle actuator,
ramp is used to damp leaps in the accelerator pedal position in the direction of
positioning rate up
acceleration.
Deceleration to the current accelerator pedal position runs along the ramp set here.
02 Foot throttle actuator,
This ramp is used to damp leaps in the accelerator pedal position in the direction of
deceleration.
03 Shift point
Definition of accelerator pedal position upper limit for condition "Idle".
idle speed
04 Shift point
Definition of accelerator pedal position upper limit for condition "Full load".
full load
05 Shift point Definition of accelerator pedal position above that for which the condition "Kickdown" has
KD on been set.
06 Shift point Definition of accelerator pedal position below that for which the condition "Kickdown" has
KD off been set.
07 Starting-off aid
Here, the time for the reduction of additional accelerator pedal torque for the starting aid
reduction FP
is defined.
additional torque
41
4. Parameters
11 Accelerator pedal (continued)
08 RQV, FFG position This parameter has an effect on the accelerator pedal characteristic.
bottom It is not normally necessary to change this value.
09 RQV, FFG position This parameter has an effect on the accelerator pedal characteristic.
top It is not normally necessary to change this value.
10 RQV, constant This parameter has an effect on the accelerator pedal characteristic.
P droop It is not normally necessary to change this value.
This group contains parameters from the following areas.
– Definition of speed-dependent torque limitation.

This prevents the transmission from being overloaded due to excessively high torque.
– Influence of torque crossover.

This minimises the effects of sudden load changes in the transmission.
Definition of limiting speed (v1)

If this speed is exceeded, the engine torque will be limited to the value of the parameter
1st vehicle speed
"03 Transmission protection torque reduction".
Definition of limiting speed (v2)

Above this speed, the limitations of group "12 transmission protection" are no longer
active. From "1st vehicle speed" (parameter 01) to
"2nd vehicle speed" (parameter 02), the limitation increases linearly to the maximum
engine torque (provided no other limitations are active).
2nd vehicle speed
42
4. Parameters
12 Transmission protection (continued)
Definition of limiting torque.

The engine torque is limited to the value set here at speeds below "2nd vehicle speed"
torque reduction
(parameter 01).
This parameter is intended to optimise the characteristics during sudden load changes.
04 Hysteresis
It is not normally necessary to change this value.
05 Damping at zero-load This parameter is intended to optimise the characteristics during sudden load changes.
threshold It is not normally necessary to change this value.
06 dM/dt within This parameter is intended to optimise the characteristics during sudden load changes.
threshold, > 0 It is not normally necessary to change this value.
07 dM/dt within This parameter is intended to optimise the characteristics during sudden load changes.
threshold, < 0 It is not normally necessary to change this value.
08 dM/dt not within This parameter is intended to optimise the characteristics during sudden load changes.
threshold It is not normally necessary to change this value.
43
4. Parameters
13 Input configuration
The parameters in this group define the function of analogue and digital ADM-FR inputs.
input 1
02 Analogue input 1
lower limit value
03 Analogue input 1
upper limit value
Depending on the setting of this parameter, certain functions are activated with the digital
input "DSF0" (special function 0) wired to positive.
0 Input "DSF0"
not active
1 Accelerator pedal lock When input "DSF0" is active,

the accelerator pedal is not effective.
2 vacant
3 vacant
function configuration 4 ABS intervention Input "DSF0" is available
for coupling a conventional
ABS control unit.
When input "DSF0" is active, the
engine brake outputs are deactivated.
5 Retarder intervention Input "DSF0" is available to couple a

conventional retarder.
information "Retarder intervention" is
reported to the MR engine control.
This setting only has a useful purpose
on units on which the fan is controlled
via the MR engine control.
6 Accelerator pedal lock Combination of settings 1 and 5.

and Retarder intervention
44
4. Parameters
13 Input configuration (continued)
Depending on the setting of this parameter, certain functions are activated with the digital
input "DSF1" (special function 1) wired to ground.
0 Input "DSF1"
not active
1 Accelerator pedal lock When input "DSF1" is active,

the accelerator pedal is not effective.
2 vacant
3 vacant
function configuration 4 ABS intervention Input "DSF1" is available
for coupling a conventional
ABS control unit.
engine brake outputs are deactivated.
5 Retarder intervention Input "DSF1" is available to couple a

conventional retarder.
information "Retarder intervention" is
reported to the MR engine control.
This setting only has a useful purpose
on units on which the fan is controlled
via the MR engine control.
6 Accelerator pedal lock Combination of settings 1 and 5.

and Retarder intervention
45
4. Parameters
14 INS curve oil pressure
Configuration of output "P_OEL" (oil pressure) as per the oil pressure measuring
equipment connected.
Parameter = 0:
Oil pressure (bar) Reference resistance (ohms)
0 10
1 48
2 82
3 116
4 151
5 184
curve
Parameter = 1:
Oil pressure (bar) Reference resistance (ohms)
0 10
2 52
4 88
6 124
8 155
10 184
46
4. Parameters
15 INS curve coolant
Configuration of output "T_MOT" (coolant temperature) as per the coolant temperature

measuring equipment connected.
Parameter = 0:
Temperature (°C) Reference resistance (ohms)
40 287.4
60 134
curve 80 69.1
100 38.5
120 22.7
Parameter = 1:
vacant
16 Vehicle speed limit
Parameters in this group define the operation of the speed control system.
47
4. Parameters
17 Switching thresholds relays 3 and 4
The parameters in this group define two actual value comparators (IWK). These comparators can be used to check whether the
actual engine torque, speed, engine speed or the coolant temperature are higher than the programmed values. If the actual value
is too high, the respective output is activated.
Parameters for "REL3" digital output configuration (relay 3 output).
0 Idle "REL3" output active, provided the accelerator

pedal is in the idle position.
1 Mactual > M_KOMP3 Comparison actual engine torque with values

"02 IWK3, torque M" and
"03 IWK3, hysteresis M".
"REL3" output active, provided actual engine
torque is greater than "02 IWK3, torque M".
"REL3" output not active, provided
actual engine torque is less than the difference
between "02 IWK3, torque M" and
2 Vactual > V_KOMP3 Comparison actual speed with values

"04 IWK3, speed" and
"05 IWK3, hysteresis V".
"REL3" output active, provided actual speed
is greater than "04 IWK3, speed".
01 Configuration IWK3 "REL3" not active, provided
actual speed is less than the difference
between "04 IWK3, speed" and
3 Nactual > N_KOMP3 Comparison actual engine speed with values

"06 IWK3, engine speed N" and
"07 IWK3, hysteresis N".
"REL3" output active, provided actual engine speed
is greater than "06 IWK3, engine speed N".
"REL3" not active, provided
actual engine speed is less than the difference
between "06 IWK3, engine speed N" and
4 Tactual > T_KOMP3 Comparison actual coolant temperature with

values "08 IWK3, coolant temperature" and
"09 IWK3, coolant temperature".
"REL3" output active, provided
actual coolant temperature is greater than
"06 IWK3, engine speed N".
"REL3" not active, provided
actual coolant temperature is less than the
difference between "08 IWK3, coolant
temperature" and "09 IWK3, hysteresis T".
48
4. Parameters
17 Switching thresholds relays 3 and 4 (continued)
02 IWK3
Definition of reference value for actual engine torque.
Torque M
03 IWK3 Definition of hysteresis for comparison of actual engine torque with

Hysteresis M "02 IWK3, torque M"
04 IWK3
Definition of reference value for actual speed.
Vehicle speed

Hysteresis V "04 IWK3, speed"
06 IWK3
Definition of reference value for actual engine speed.
Speed N
07 IWK3 Definition of hysteresis for comparison of actual engine speed with

Hysteresis N "06 IWK3, engine speed N"
08 IWK3
Definition of reference value for actual coolant temperature.
Coolant temperature
09 IWK3
Hysteresis T
49
4. Parameters
Parameters for "REL3" digital output configuration (relay 4 output).
0 vacant
1 Mactual > M_KOMP4 Comparison actual engine torque with values

"11 IWK4, torque M" and
"REL4" output active, provided actual engine
torque is greater than "11 IWK4, torque M".
actual engine torque is less than the difference
between "11 IWK4, torque M" and
2 Vactual > V_KOMP4 Comparison actual speed with values

"13 IWK4, speed" and
"REL4" output active, provided actual speed
is greater than "13 IWK4, speed".
10 Configuration IWK4
actual speed is less than the difference
between "13 IWK4, speed" and
3 Nactual > N_KOMP4 Comparison actual engine speed with values

"15 IWK4, engine speed N" and
"REL4" output active, provided actual engine speed
is greater than "15 IWK4, engine speed N".
actual engine speed is less than the difference
between "15 IWK4, engine speed N" and
4 Tactual > T_KOMP4 Comparison actual coolant temperature with

values "17 IWK4, coolant temperature" and
"REL4" output active, provided actual
coolant temperature is greater than
actual coolant temperature is less than the
difference between "17 IWK4, coolant
temperature" and "18 IWK4, hysteresis T".
50
4. Parameters
11 IWK4
Definition of reference value for actual engine torque.
Torque M

Hysteresis M "11 IWK4, torque M"
13 IWK4
Definition of reference value for actual speed.
Vehicle speed

Hysteresis V "13 IWK4, speed"
15 IWK4
Definition of reference value for actual engine speed.
Speed N
16 IWK4 Definition of hysteresis for comparison of actual engine speed with "15 IWK4,
Hysteresis N engine speed N"
17 IWK4
Coolant temperature
18 IWK4
Hysteresis T
51
5. Fitting and connecting
5.1. Operating data

Protection rating of ADM-FR with plugged-on connector sockets: IP 30.
Ambient temperature for use and storage of ADM-FR:
– Operating temperature range: –40 °C to +70 °C
– Storage temperature range: –50 °C to +80 °C
5.2. Installation
Install the ADM-FR on a flat surface in a dry place with the connectors facing
downwards.
Fit the central diagnosis socket in an easily accessible place.
1 Brackets
(for MB part number and bolt dimensions of the brackets, see Appendix)
Only use DaimlerChrysler brackets. This will guarantee that the ADM-FR is
securely mounted.
52
To install:
1 Press the ADM-FR against the upper bracket with the mounting springs.
2 Guide the support lugs into the recesses in the lower bracket.
To remove:
Press the ADM-FR against the upper bracket with the mounting springs
until the support lugs can be taken from the recesses in the lower bracket.
53
When it is installed, the inspection plate on the rear of the

ADM-FR is visible.
5.2.1. Use in vehicles
Here, installation is recommended in the cab in the lower section of the dashboard.
Installation in the engine compartment is not permissible.
5.2.2. Use in stationary engines
Ensure that appropriate ambient conditions are provided for, e.g.

– with a separate housing,
– or installation in a control box.
54
5.3. Connecting up
G Risk of accident!
"Terminal 15" and "Terminal 50" of the control units are high-resistance signal
inputs which draw current in the order of mA. Impermissible residual voltage at
these inputs could affect LOW level detection.
Consequence:
– The engine starts unexpectedly (terminal 50)
– The engine can no longer be switched off (terminal 15)
If the engine starts unexpectedly, the vehicle could start moving unintentionally
if the drive train is closed (transmission not in neutral) or the working equip-
ment could start be set into operation, constituting a risk to life and limb.
A battery isolator switch is only to be fitted to one battery terminal (positive).

Wiring a ground connection is not permissible and could result in damage to
the MR and ADM-FR control units.
Observe the following guidelines when connecting up the ADM-FR:

– Only use DaimlerChrysler star quad cables to wire up CAN connections.
These cables are specially designed for vehicle CAN application (EMC).
– The CAN connection between the MR and ADM-FR must not exceed a length of
15 metres.
– Switching off the power supply (terminal 30) is only permissible at the end of the
control unit's run-on phase. The run-on phase begins when terminal 15 is switched
off and lasts for about 5 seconds.
During the run-on phase, new fault codes and parameters may be stored in the
EEPROM memory.
– To avoid fault entries, the input "terminal 15" should be switched simultaneously for
all control units.
– To avoid fault entries, the input "terminal 50" (engine start) should be switched
simultaneously for the ADM-FR and MR control units.
– If a battery charge warning lamp is wired, it is important that a blocking diode is
installed, as it would not otherwise be possible to switch the engine off via
terminal 15.
– The ground connection of all electrical consumers should be distributed in a star
formation from a central ground point.
If the ground connection is not arranged in a star formation, or if the current flows
through frame members with poor conductivity, malfunctions may develop due to
ground offset or EMC effects.
55
6. Parameter programming
Equipment used for diagnosis and parameter programming of the ADM-FR is

described below.
6.1. Minidiag
The following diagnostic functions can be performed with the Minidiag diagnosis
tester:
– Read out control unit version
– Read out/clear the fault memory
– Read out actual value data (e.g. inputs, outputs, operating states)
– Teach in the accelerator pedal.
How to perform these function is described in the Minidiag operating instructions.
Parameter programming of control units is not possible with the Minidiag.
6.2. Hand-held tester (HHT)

The following diagnostic and parameter programming functions can be performed
with the HHT:
– Read out control unit version
– Read out/clear the fault memory
– Read out actual value data
– Teach in the accelerator pedal.
– Parameter programming
– Actuate outputs
The system "Star Diagnosis" with the application programme "HHTWin" offers the
same diagnostic and parameter programming functions.
56
6.2.1. Diagnosis and parameter programming with HHT
The programme module "NFZ" (commercial vehicles) is required for diagnosis and
parameter programming of the ADM-FR with the HHT.
Preparation:
– Connect the HHT to the diagnosis socket.
– Set the starter switch to the ON position.
– Switch the HHT on.
After the initial HHT display, there will be a number of introductory texts which are
ended with the "enter" button.
Following this, the first menu appears, in which the vehicle/application is selected
(see left).
Com. veh.
– In this menu, select the application "IMO".
1 Truck
2 Bus
3 Transporter
4 IMO
Com. veh.
– On the next screen, confirm the selection "IMO".
1 IMO
Following further notes on the release date of the HHT programme module, the next
menu will appear:
Perform short test
– In this menu, select "ADM".
00 Short test
01 ADM
02 MR
99 Short test result
57
The required diagnosis and parameter programming functions can be selected in the
ADM menu.
ADM Functions The continued procedure is described on-screen and in the HHT operating instruc-
tions.
Description of menu items:
1 Control unit version • 1 Control unit version
2 Fault memory Display of
3 Actual values – DaimlerChrysler control unit part number,
4 Actuations – Control unit version
5 Learning – Production date.
6 Parameterizing
• 2 Fault memory
– Display of stored faults, current and non-current,
– Clear the fault memory.
• 3 Actual value data
Current operating data for the engine or for the
vehicle/equipment.
Display of
– Inputs,
– Outputs,
– Operating states.
• 4 Actuation signals
Setting (simulation) of values at outputs.
The actuation of outputs serves in troubleshooting.
• 5 Teach-in
Teach-in the accelerator pedal
• 6 Parameter programming
Check and modify parameters
58
7. Application
7. Application
The following pages describe the areas of application of the ADM-FR and the associated
inputs/input data, outputs/output data and parameters.
7.1. Driving mode

The drive control adaptation module (ADM-FR) differentiates between the operating
modes "Driving" and "Working speed governing (ADR)". Driving mode is used for
road-based vehicles.
The output/setting value in driving mode is the engine torque, this can be com-
pared to an injection pump with RQ characteristics.
The ADM-FR computes a torque specification from the accelerator pedal position and
transmits this to the MR engine management.
In driving mode, the following applications are possible. These are described on the
pages stated.
Application
Engine start/stop page 65
Accelerator pedal page 63
Instruments/displays* page 67
Generator page 72
Engine brake/ABS page 66
Transmission page 71
Actual value output page 72
Tachograph (speed) page 73
Programmable limitations page 74
Applications printed in bold type are essential in driving mode.

* For driving mode, the applications "Warning lamp" and "Buzzer"
are essential with instruments/displays.
59
7. Application
7.2. Working speed governor (ADR)

The vehicle control adaptation module (ADM-FR) differentiates between the operating
modes "Driving" and "Working speed governor (ADR)".
The working speed governor is used for power take-offs, working equipment
(e.g. cranes, piste maintenance equipment, harvesters, etc.) and for stationary applica-
tions (e.g. compressors, power generators, pumps, etc.).
The output/setting value for ADR mode is engine speed.
The specified engine speed is identified by the ADM-FR from the input values given
below and transmitted to the MR engine management via a CAN connection. The set-
ting range of the specified engine speed is between the currently active minimum and
maximum engine speeds. As in driving mode, these limits are defined by the parame-
ters in group "3 Generally valid limitations" or "Programmable limitations no. 0, no. 1,
no. 2".
The input value for the specified engine speed can be selected by parameter program-
ming. The following input values are possible:
– Accelerator pedal
– Manual throttle sender
– Engine potentiometer function via input "ADR+" (working speed governor up)
and "ADR–" (working speed governor down)
– Fixed engine speed via inputs "ADR0" (working speed governor 0),
"ADR1" (working speed governor 1) or "KLIMA" (air conditioner).
It is possible to combine accelerator pedal with manual throttle sender and/or tip in-
puts.
The specified engine speed is defined by the maximum of all selected input values.
The system will switch from driving mode to working speed governor mode when all
the selected conditions are true (AND link). Which conditions have to be considered to
switch to working speed governor mode is programmed using simple yes/no decisions.
60
7. Application
Allow for parameter...

Input ADR0
ADRO
Input ADR1
ADR1
Input ADR2 (flank) Parameter Working speed
ADR2
governor
Input NEUTRAL
NE
& Active ADR
Input KLIMA (A/C) parameters
KLIMA (A/C)
Engine idling
Engine idling
Speed less than
5 km/h Speed under 5 km/h
N30.14-2026-25
Parameter = yes = switch closed.
In the above symbolic illustration of parameter programming, the working speed governor is activated when the following conditions
are satisfied at the same time:
– Input "ADR0" (working speed governor 0) active
– Input "NE" (neutral) active
– Vehicle speed less than 5 km/h.
61
7. Application
Inputs Parameter Output values
7/01 Allow for ADR

ADR0
input 0
7/02 Allow for ADR

ADR1
input 1
Condition for
7/03 Allow for ADR activating the
ADR2
input 2 working speed
governor
7/04 Allow for neutral
NE
input
7/05 Allow for a/c

KLIMA
input
7/08 ADR +, ADR – inputs

active
7/12 ADR tip specification

starting value Definition of
ADR+
specified engine
7/13 ADR +/– debounce time speed via inputs
ADR–
"ADR+" and "ADR–"
7/14 ADR +/– increment
7/15 Adjustment speed of

ADR specification
FFG1 Accelerator pedal for

7/09 Accelerator pedal sender
engine speed
active
FFG2 specification
Manual throttle
7/10 Manual throttle sender
HFG sender for engine
active
speed specification
Central enablement
7/11 Activate working speed
– of working speed
governor (ADR)
governor
62
7. Application
In working speed governor mode, the following applications are possible. These are de-
scribed on the pages stated.
Application
Engine start/stop page 65
Instruments/displays page 67
Generator page 72
Accelerator pedal page 63
Actual value output page 72
Programmable limitations page 74
Applications printed in bold type are essential in working speed governor mode.
7.3. Accelerator pedal
G Risk of accident!
The accelerator pedal is a safety-relevant function for commercial vehicles. In-

correct wiring or parameter programming can seriously affect the reactions of
the accelerator pedal. This can cause the driver's requirements (e.g. throttle
back) not to be implemented properly or only after a delay.
Changes to the accelerator pedal parameters must only be performed by special-

ly trained personnel or after consultation with the engine manufacturer.
It is not normally necessary to change the accelerator pedal parameters.
Only use accelerator pedals approved by DaimlerChrysler. The use of any other
accelerator pedal could lead to malfunctions or damage to the ADM-FR.
The accelerator pedal must be connected to the ADM-FR accelerator pedal connection.
The driver's requirements (accelerator pedal position) are identified by two electronic
modules working independently of each other and transmitted via two PWM signals
with mutually opposite pulse duty cycles.
The evaluation electronics check the plausibility of the accelerator pedal signals and
generate fault codes in the event of deviations.
63
7. Application
Constant signal values are not allocated to the accelerator pedal stops (idle, full throt-
tle). For this reason, it is necessary to teach-in the accelerator pedal to the ADM-FR
control unit. This only has to be done once and is performed using diagnosis tools. This
procedure stores the accelerator pedal extreme values in the non-volatile memory of
the control unit.
If the accelerator pedal or control unit is replaced, the teach-in process must be repeat-
ed.
The teach-in process is described by the displays on the diagnosis units. For further
information, see the operating instructions of the diagnosis units.
The accelerator pedal can be used in both driving mode and working speed governor
mode. Depending on the accelerator pedal position, either a torque value can be spec-
ified in driving mode or an engine speed value in working speed governor mode.
The following inputs are available for the function "Accelerator pedal lock":
– "TROE" (door open (bus))
The accelerator pedal is blocked when the input "TROE" is active.
or
– "DSF0" (special function 0)
The accelerator pedal is blocked when input "DSF0" is active
and programmed accordingly.
or
– "DSF1" (special function 1)
The accelerator pedal is blocked when input "DSF1" is active
and programmed accordingly.
Inputs
– FFG1
– FFG2
– TROE
– DSF0
– DSF1
Parameters
– 2/05 Accelerator pedal sender (FFG) fitted
– 7/09 Accelerator pedal sender active
– 13/04 Digital input DSF0
Function configuration
The parameters in group "11 accelerator pedal" also affect the characteristics of the ac-
celerator pedal. It is not however necessary to change these parameters.
Outputs
– FFG1+
– FFG2+
64
7. Application
7.4. Engine start/stop
G Risk of accident!
The functions "starter inhibitor" and "engine start with automatic transmission"
are not effective in engine emergency running programme without ADM-FR con-
trol unit or if the CAN connection is defective. In such cases, the engine start is
controlled only by the MR engine management and can no longer be influenced
by the ADM-FR. The engine could be started unexpectedly by the MR. If the drive
train is closed (transmission not in neutral), the vehicle could unexpectedly start
moving or set the working machine in operation, constituting a risk to life and
limb.
7.4.1. Engine start
Note:
On DaimlerChrysler engines with starter type JE, the MR engine management controls
the engine start. The starter motor is actuated directly from an output on the MR con-
trol unit.
It is possible to start the engine by activating the input "terminal 50" on the ADM-FR
and on the MR engine management. The "terminal 50" inputs of the ADM-FR and MR
must be wired in parallel.
For the purpose of service, the engine start/stop can be controlled via buttons directly
on the engine. However, the buttons fitted on the engine are only intended for service
purposes.
If an automatic transmission is fitted (parameter "2/03 automatic transmission
fitted" = YES), it is only possible to start the engine when the input "NE" (neutral) is
also active.
The input "MKLE" (engine flap (bus)) is provided for the function "starter inhibitor". If
the input "MKLE" is active, it is no longer possible to start the engine via terminal 50.
Inputs
– Terminal 50
– MKLE
Parameter
– 2/03 Automatic transmission fitted
Output value
– Engine start instruction to MR via
CAN connection
7.4.2. Engine stop
The engine is stopped by deactivating the control inputs "terminal 15" of the ADM-FR
and MR.
Please observe the notes in Chapter 5 regarding the run-on phase, input resistance,
blocking diode etc.
Input
– Terminal 15 (OFF)
Output value
– Engine stop instruction to MR
65
7. Application
7.5. Engine brake/ABS
G Risk of accident!
The engine brake is a safety-relevant function for commercial vehicles. Incorrect

wiring or parameter programming can make it impossible to actuate the engine
brake. The lack of, or reduction in, engine braking power could lead to the vehi-
cle brake being overloaded. The vehicle can then no longer be braked.
Changes to the engine brake parameters must only be performed by specially

trained personnel or after consultation with the engine manufacturer.
It is not normally necessary to change the engine brake parameters.
The engine brake is activated via the input "MBRE" (engine brake input). Here, the fol-
lowing conditions must be satisfied:
– Driving mode (not working speed governor mode)
– No ABS intervention
– Engine speed higher than parameter "10/01 MBR, activation speed"
– Accelerator pedal not depressed
Parameter "2/01 engine brake configuration (MBR)" is to be set according to the en-
gine's equipment.
The engine brake is always actuated in a single stage.
It is not possible to actuate the engine brake in operating mode "working speed gover-
nor". This should be borne in mind when programming the parameters.
Inputs
– MBRE
– DSF0
– DSF1
Parameters
– 2/01 Engine brake (MBR)
– 10/01 MBR, activation
speed
– 10/02 MBR, FP torque time
blocked after MBR off
– 10/03 MBR, ramp up
after MBR off
Outputs
– MBRA1
– MBRA2
66
7. Application
7.6. Instruments/displays
7.6.1. Rev counter
A signal for actuating a rev counter is provided at the output "N_MOT" (engine speed).
Input value
– Engine speed information from MR via CAN connection
Parameter
– 9/04 Pulse number
(rev counter)
Output
– N_MOT
7.6.2. Coolant temperature gauge
A signal which is compatible with temperature sensors is provided at the output

"T_MOT" (coolant temperature) for connecting up a conventional analogue indicator
instrument.
Input value
– Coolant temperature information from MR via CAN connection
Parameter
– 15/01 Select coolant
characteristic
Output
– T_MOT
7.6.3. Oil pressure gauge
A signal which is compatible with oil pressure sensors is provided at the output
"P_OEL" (oil pressure) for connecting up a conventional analogue indicator instru-
ment.
Input value
– Oil pressure information from MR via CAN connection
Parameter
– 14/01 Select oil pressure
characteristic
Output
– P_OEL
67
7. Application
7.6.4. Warning lamp
The output "LA_ADM" (warning lamp) reports impermissible engine operating states
(e.g. oil pressure too low) and active faults which are recognised by the control unit
due to the permanent monitoring of the inputs and outputs.
The output "LA_ADM" must be connected to a suitable warning lamp. If the

warning lamp lights up while the engine is in operation, both the engine and
the electronics must be examined.
The output "LA_ADM" is actuated if the following faults are detected:

– Engine speed less than 300 rpm
– Coolant temperature too high or temperature signal not available
– Oil pressure too low or oil pressure signal not available
– Oil level too low
Stop the engine immediately if the coolant temperature is too high, the oil pres-
sure too low or the oil level too low.
The operating safety of the engine is endangered (risk of engine damage).
– No CAN connection to engine electronics or CAN data implausible

– Active faults in MR engine management fault memory, fault priority medium
or high
– Active faults in ADM-FR fault memory, fault priority medium or high
Input values
– Engine speed information from MR via CAN connection
– CAN information "Coolant temperature too high" from MR
– CAN information "Oil pressure too low" from MR
– CAN information "Oil level too low" from MR
– CAN information "Active fault in MR engine management" with fault priority
medium or high
– Active fault in ADM-FR, fault priority medium or high
– CAN information "Buzzer instruction"
Output
– LA_ADM
68
7. Application
7.6.5. Buzzer
The output "BUZZER" reports serious faults which require the engine to be
switched off immediately. Failure to switch the engine off could result in major
damage to the engine, possibly even its destruction.
The output "BUZZER" must be connected. A warning buzzer or warning lamp
can be connected.
Input values
CAN instruction "Buzzer" from MR in the event of:
– Overspeeding
– Oil level impermissibly low
– Oil pressure impermissibly low
– Coolant temperature impermissibly high
The limits for the values listed above are stored in the engine data records.
Output
– BUZZER
7.6.6. Coolant temperature indicator lamp
The output "LA_T_MOT" (coolant indicator lamp) reports impermissibly high coolant
temperatures. Here, the output "LA_ADM" (warning lamp) is actuated.
The temperature limit is stored in the engine data records.
Input values
– CAN information "Coolant temperature too high" from MR
Outputs
– LA_T_MOT
– LA_ADM
69
7. Application
7.6.7. Oil level indicator lamp
The output "LA_OELST" (oil level indicator lamp) reports impermissibly low oil levels.
Here, the output "LA_ADM" (warning lamp) is actuated.
The function "Oil level warning" is only available on engines with oil level sensor.
The oil level limit is stored in the engine data records.
Input value
– CAN information "Oil level too low" from MR
Outputs
– LA_OELST
– LA_ADM
7.6.8. Oil pressure indicator lamp
The output "LA_P_OEL" (oil pressure indicator lamp) reports impermissibly low oil
pressures. Here, the output "LA_ADM" (warning lamp) is actuated. The oil pressure
limit is stored in the engine data records.
Input value
– CAN information "Oil pressure too low" from MR
Outputs
– LA_P_OEL
– LA_ADM
70
7. Application
7.7. Transmission
The following inputs/outputs/functions are provided in the ADM-FR for the incorpora-
tion of the transmission:
– Input "NE" (neutral).
The neutral position is a condition for starting the engine with an automatic trans-
mission
– Output "REL1" (relay 1 output).
Information "Kickdown" for automatic transmission.
– Outputs "IWA1" (actual value output 1) and "IWA2" (actual value output 2).
Load signal for automatic transmission.
– Function "Transmission protection".
Programmable, speed-dependent torque limitation to prevent overloading.
Output/output
Input Parameter
values
2/03 Automatic transmission

NE –
fitted
– – REL1 (kickdown)
9/01 Actual value output IWA1 IWA1

–
9/02 Actual value output IWA2 IWA2
12/01 Transmission protection

speed 1
12/02 Transmission protection Engine torque

C3
speed 2 limitation

torque reduction
71
7. Application
7.8. Actual value output

The following information is provided in the form of PWM signals at the outputs
"IWA1" (actual value output 1) and "IWA2" (actual value output 2) to incorporate cus-
tomer-specific electronic systems:
– Accelerator pedal position
– Differential torque for limit load control
– Automatic transmission load signal.
Input value Parameter Outputs
Physical values as 9/01 Actual value output IWA 1 IWA1

per setting of para-
meters 9/01 and
9/02 Actual value output IWA 2 IWA2
9/02
7.9. Generator
Terminal W of the generator must be connected to the input "terminal W" (generator
terminal W) of the ADM-FR.
The engine speed computed from the terminal W signal is continuously compared via
the CAN with the engine speed information in the MR. In the event of a discrepancy
between the two values, a fault message will be generated.
If the CAN connection between the MR and ADM-FR should fail, the engine speed com-
puted from the terminal W signal is used as a substitute value for the actuation of the
rev counter and engine brake.
The generator pre-excitation/charge check should be performed with a locking diode
(without influence of ADM-FR).
Input
– Terminal W
72
7. Application
7.10. Tachograph (speed)

For the realisation of the functions
– Legal maximum speed
– Programmable maximum speed
– Transmission protection
The speed signal C3/B7 of a tachograph should be connected to input "C3" (tachograph
speed) of the ADM-FR.
Input "C3" is monitored for a short or open circuit.
For applications without speed signal, the ADM-FR speed measurement function must
be deactivated by appropriate parameter programming.
Parameter programming of the maximum speed (legal maximum speed) and the deac-
tivation of the speed measurement is only possible with special authorisation. Such au-
thorisation can be issued to vehicle manufacturers upon application to
DaimlerChrysler.
Input Parameter Output value
3/05 Maximum speed
8/01 C3 signal input

speed 1
C3
speed 2
Maximum speed via
required torque to
MR via CAN
torque reduction
connection
4/03 Max. road speed
ADR0
ADR pin 0

ADR1
ADR pin 1

KLIMA
A/C pin
73
7. Application
7.11. Programmable limitations

The inputs "ADR0" (working speed 0), "ADR1" (working speed 1) or "KLIMA" (air con-
ditioner) can be used to realise programmable limitations.
The following limitations can be realised when the input is active:
– Idling speed boost e.g. when the air conditioner is switched on
– Maximum engine speed limitation e.g. for pumps or other power take-offs.
– Vehicle speed limitation e.g. for roadsweepers or refuse collection trucks in working
mode
– Maximum torque limitation e.g. as overload protection for power take-offs, transmis-
sion etc.
– Select type of governor in working speed governor mode.
Programmed limitations are active in both driving mode and working speed governor
mode.
The maximum values effective in parameter group 3 or in the engine electronics can
only be superseded by lower values, the minimum values only be higher values.
Minimum engine
4/01 Min. engine speed
speed specification to
ADR pin 0
MR
Maximum engine
4/02 Max. engine speed
speed specification to
ADR pin 0
MR
Maximum speed via

ADR0 required torque to
ADR pin 0
MR
4/04 Max. torque Specified torque

ADR pin 0 limitation to MR
Specified governor
4/05 Engine speed governor type to MR
selection – ADR0 (in working speed
governor mode)
74
7. Application
5/01 Min. engine speed

ADR pin 1

ADR pin 1
Specified governor
5/03 Max. road speed type to MR
ADR1
ADR pin 1 (in working speed
governor mode)
5/04 Max. torque
ADR pin 1
5/05 Engine speed governor

selection – ADR1
6/01 Min. idle speed

A/C pin

A/C pin
Specified governor
6/03 Max. road speed type to MR (in
KLIMA
A/C pin working speed
governor mode)
6/04 Max. torque
A/C pin
6/05 Engine speed governor

selection – A/C
75
7. Application
7.12. Diagnosis
The ADM-FR and MR engine management diagnosis wire "K-Diag" must be

connected to the 14-pin central diagnosis connector in accordance with the
electrical wiring diagrams.
Parameters, actual values and fault codes can be read out from the ADM-FR and MR
using DaimlerChrysler diagnosis tools (e.g. HHT, Minidiag) at the diagnosis connector.
Input/output
– K-DIAG
76
8. Measured values
8. Measured values
The measured values (actual values) are current operating values for the engine or for
the vehicle/equipment. They can be read off with a diagnosis unit
(e.g. hand-held tester, Minidiag).
8.1. Analogue measured values
Measured value Range Unit Conn./pin

0 ... 100 % 2/13
feedback 1

0 ... 100 % 2/15
feedback 2
03 Manual throttle
0 ... 100 % 2/17
actuator
04 Accelerator pedal
0 ... 5,000 Nm –
torque
05 Vehicle speed 0 ... 150 km/h 2/1
06 Vehicle speed
0 ... 125 km/h –
specified value
07 Engine speed through

0 ... 8,000 rpm 2/3
terminal W
08 Engine speed MR(PLD) 0 ... 8,000 rpm –
09 Engine specified speed 0 ... 8,000 rpm –
10 Governor type 0 ... 5 none –
11 Minimum engine speed 0 ... 4,000 rpm –
12 Maximum engine speed 0 ... 4,000 rpm –
13 Engine specified torque –5,000 ... +500 Nm –
14 Engine actual torque –5,000 ... +500 Nm –
77
8. Measured values
Measured value Range Unit Conn./pin
15 Voltage supply
0 ... 40 V 1/1
ADM
16 Analogue input 1
0 ... 24 V 3/4
(air filter sensor)
reserved – – –
reserved – – –
19 Coolant temperature 0 ... 120 °C 1/7
20 Oil pressure 0 ... 5,000 bar 1/2
21 IWA 1 0 ... 100 % 3/11
22 IWA 2 0 ... 100 % 1/10
8.2. Binary measured values
Measured value Range Conn./pin
01 Terminal 15 input YES/NO 1/15
02 Engine start signal

YES/NO 2/5
tml. 50
03 ADR parameterized YES/NO –
04 ADR 0
YES/NO 2/7
Signal present
05 ADR 1
YES/NO 2/14
Signal present
06 ADR 2
YES/NO 2/16
Signal present
07 ADR speed + YES/NO 2/6
08 ADR speed – YES/NO 2/18
78
8. Measured values
09 Engine brake input YES/NO 2/2
10 Engine brake output YES/NO 1/6
11 Neutral position
YES/NO 2/9
switch
12 DSF1 input YES/NO 2/8
13 Rear axle input YES/NO 2/11
14 DSF0 input YES/NO 2/12
15 AC input YES/NO 2/4
16 Retarder output YES/NO 1/4
17 Relay output 1
YES/NO 3/10
(KD output)
18 Relay output 2
(air filter sensor YES/NO 3/9
dirty)
19 Relay output 3 YES/NO 3/8
20 Relay output 4 YES/NO 3/7
21 Fault lamp MR(PLD) YES/NO 1/3
22 Coolant temperature
YES/NO 1/12
warning
23 Oil pressure warning YES/NO 1/14
24 Oil level warning YES/NO 1/13
25 Warning buzzer
YES/NO 1/9
actuated
26 Engine start MR(PLD) YES/NO –
79
8. Measured values
27 Start lockout YES/NO –
28 Idle throttle YES/NO –
29 Kickdown YES/NO –
30 MR(PLD) request
YES/NO –
constant throttle
31 MR(PLD) request
YES/NO –
brake flap
32 ADR active YES/NO –
33 Foot throttle actuator learned YES/NO –
34 Manual throttle actuator learned YES/NO –
35 Engine brake output 2 YES/NO 3/12
36 Engine flap (bus) YES/NO 3/5
37 Door open (bus) YES/NO 3/6
80
9. Fault codes
9. Fault codes
The fault codes can be read off with a diagnosis unit (e.g. hand-held tester, Minidiag).
The display differentiates between current and non-current faults.
Current fault codes cannot be cleared.
The fault codes listed apply to both the ADM-FR and to the
ADM-AR.
The fault codes stored in the control unit describe the priority, path and type of the
fault which has developed.
Example of fault code: 10605
1 = Fault priority
06 = Fault path
05 = Fault type
In the 5-digit fault code, the first digit (0,1 or 2) indicates the fault priority.
Proceed as follows, depending on the fault priority:
Fault priority 0
If necessary, these faults can be rectified during the next maintenance service.
Fault priority 1
The fault must be rectified as soon as possible.
G Risk of accident!
It can be expected that the running characteristics of the engine will be affected.
The driving and braking characteristics of the vehicle may have changed if
driving mode is active. If working speed governor mode is active, the operating
characteristics of the equipment may have changed.
Fault priority 2
The fault must be rectified immediately.
G Risk of accident!
The running characteristics of the engine will be affected (emergency running

programme).
The driving and braking characteristics of the vehicle will have changed if
driving mode is active. If working speed governor mode is active, the operating
characteristics of the equipment will have changed.
Have priority 2 malfunctions rectified immediately in a DaimlerChrysler

Service Station or specialist workshop.
81
9. Fault codes
Fault code Meaning Remedial action
– Check terminal W signal wiring

– Check V-belt tension
Open circuit, short circuit to UB+ or short to ground – Check function of generator (battery charge
00502
terminal W, V-belt slipping indicator lamp out?)
– Check whether terminal W signal is affected by other
items of equipment
The accelerator pedal must be taught-in again as the

00602 Idle position restricted
ADM-FR has not recognised idle position
The accelerator pedal must be taught-in again as the full

00603 Pedal unit outside taught-in range
load position deviates greatly from the taught-in value
– Check voltage of electrical system

01001 Terminal 30 excess voltage identification – Check that parameter "2/08 configuration for
12/24 V application" tallies with electrical system
voltage
– Check voltage of electrical system

01002 Terminal 30 undervoltage identification – Check that parameter "2/08 configuration for
12/24 V application" tallies with electrical system
voltage
Check MR engine management for function/

01103 MR data implausible
malfunction
Analogue input 1 "AE1" – applicable threshold not

10101/2 Check wiring of analogue input "AE1"
reached/exceeded
– Check wiring of speed signal C3 from

tachograph.
Open circuit, short circuit to UB+ or short to ground,
10401 – If no tachograph signal is preset, check parameter
tachograph C3
group "8 C3 signal evaluation" (e.g. for stationary
engines)
Check speed signal C3 for faults as the ADM-FR has

10402 Tachograph C3 frequency error
detected a speed in excess of 200 km/h
– Check terminal W signal wiring

– Check V-belt tension
Generator terminal W allocation error – Check function of generator (does charge indicator
10501
(pulse/rev signal) lamp go out?)
– Check whether terminal W signal is affected by other
items of equipment
82
9. Fault codes
10601 Accelerator pedal unit defective Renew accelerator pedal as signals are implausible
10604 Accelerator pedal unit not taught-in Teach-in accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal signal GAS 1 not present (open

10605 Check accelerator pedal and wiring
circuit, short circuit to UB+ or to ground)
Accelerator pedal signal GAS 2 not present (open

10606 Check accelerator pedal and wiring
circuit, short circuit to UB+ or to ground)
10701 Manual throttle sender signal outside defined range Check manual throttle sender and wiring
Manual throttle sender signal not present (open/

10702 Check manual throttle sender and wiring
short circuit)
– Check engine brake and solenoid valve wiring

10801 Engine brake output 1 "MBRA1" implausible – If no engine brake is fitted, check parameter
"2/01 engine brake (MBR)"
– Check retarder cutoff wiring

Retarder output "RETA" implausible (open circuit,
10901 – If no retarder is fitted, check parameter
short to UB+ or output overloaded)
"2/02 retarder (RET) fitted"
– Check engine CAN wiring

– Check MR wiring terminal 15, terminal 30,
terminal 31
11101 Engine CAN – no connection to MR
– Check that MR parameter "single-wire compatible"
and ADM-FR parameter "1/01 single-wire compatible
engine CAN off" have identical settings
Check that MR parameter "single-wire compatible"

11102 Engine CAN, no single-wire compatibility ADM-FR parameter "1/01 single-wire compatible
engine CAN off" have identical settings
11104 Engine CAN defective, single wire mode active Check engine CAN wiring
83
9. Fault codes
– Check engine brake and solenoid valve wiring

11201 Engine brake output 2 "MBRA2" implausible – If no engine brake is fitted, check parameter
"2/01 engine brake (MBR)"
– Check all ADM-FR parameters for correct

settings
11301 EEPROM error, can be corrected – If the fault reoccurs after fault acknowledgement and
repeatedly switching the ADM-FR on and off,
replace the ADM-FR
– Check IES CAN and neutral point wiring

11401 IES CAN. No connection to FMR – Check FMR wiring terminal 15, terminal 30,
terminal 31
– Check all ADM-FR parameters for correct

settings
21302 EEPROM error, cannot be corrected – If the fault reoccurs after fault acknowledgement and
repeatedly switching the ADM-FR on and off,
replace the ADM-FR
84
10. Appendix
10. Appendix
10.1. Parameter list comparison

ADM-FR version 1/version 4
The following table presents a comparison of the corresponding parameters of ADM-FR versions 1 and 4. The parameters are
described in Chapter 4.
Parameter group/
Parameter group, version 1 Parameter, version 1 parameter,
version 4
01 Single wire capability

1 CAN configuration 1/01
Engine CAN switched off
01 Engine brake (MBR) 2/01
02 Retarder (RET)
2/02
fitted
03 Automatic transmission
2/03
fitted
04 Activate touch inputs

2/04
ADR+/-
2 Base configuration
driving mode 05 Foot throttle actuator
2/05
(FFG) fitted
06 Manual throttle
actuator (HFG) 2/06
fitted
07 HFG stops
2/07
can be learned
2/08
12/24V use
01 Stationary speed
3/01
limit
02 Idle speed control

3 Limits 3/02
specified value
03 Max. value
3/03
idle speed control
85
10. Appendix
Parameter group/
version 4
04 Maximum speed 3/04
05 Maximum vehicle
3/05
speed
06 Max. torque 3/06
07 Governor selection 3/07
08 Min. speed
4/01
Pin ADR 0
09 Max. speed
4/02
Pin ADR 0

4/03
Pin ADR 0
11 Max. torque
4/04
Pin ADR 0
4/05
ADR 0
3 Limits
13 Min. speed
5/01
Pin ADR 1
14 Max. speed
5/02
Pin ADR 1

5/03
Pin ADR 1
16 Max. torque
5/04
Pin ADR 1
5/05
ADR 1
18 Min. speed
6/01
Pin AC
19 Max. speed
6/02
Pin AC

6/03
Pin AC
86
10. Appendix
Parameter group/
version 4
21 Max. torque
6/04
Pin AC
6/05
AC
3 Limits
23 Slope of speed
3/08
limit
24 Slope of torque
3/09
limit
01 Allow for input

7/01
ADR 0
02 Allow for input

7/02
ADR 1
03 Allow for input

7/03
ADR 2
04 Allow for input

7/04
Neutral
05 Allow for input

7/05
AC
4 Configuration
working speed control
06 Allow for idle
7/06
throttle status
07 Allow for status

7/07
v < 5 km/h
08 Inputs ADR +, ADR -

7/08
active

7/09
active
10 Manual throttle actuator

7/10
active
87
10. Appendix
Parameter group/
version 4

7/11
control (ADR)
12 ADR touch set value

7/12
Start value
4 Configuration
working speed control 13 ADR +/- bounce time 7/13
14 ADR +/- step width 7/14
15 Change speed,
7/15
ADR set value
01 Input C3 signal 8/01

5 C3 signal analysis 8/02
(tachograph)
03 Rear axle ratio 8/03

9/01
IWA 1

9/02
IWA 2
9/03
IWA 1,2
04 Pulse count
9/04
(tachometer)
01 MBR, activation
10/01
speed
02 MBR, time FP torque

7 Engine brake management 10/02
03 MBR, acceleration ramp

10/03
after MBR off
88
10. Appendix
Parameter group/
version 4

11/01
positioning rate up

11/02
03 Shift point
11/03
idle speed
04 Shift point
11/04
8 Accelerator pedal full load
05 Shift point
11/05
KD on
06 Shift point
11/06
KD off
07 Starting-off aid
reduction FP additional 11/07
torque

11/08
bottom

9 RQV parameters 11/09
top
03 RQV, constant
11/10
speed droop
89
10. Appendix
Parameter group/
version 4
12/01
1st vehicle speed
12/02
2nd vehicle speed
12/03
torque reduction
04 Hysteresis 12/04
05 Damping at zero load
12/05
threshold
06 dM/dt within
12/06
threshold, >0
07 dM/dt within
12/07
threshold, <0
08 dM/dt not within

12/08
threshold
13/01
input 1
02 Analogue input 1
13/02
lower limit value
03 Analogue input 1
11 Input configuration 13/03
upper limit value

13/04

13/05
90
10. Appendix
Parameter group/
version 4

12 INS curve oil pressure 14/01
curve
13 INS curve coolant 15/01
curve
Parameters in this group define the operation of the speed

14 Vehicle speed limit control system.
91
10. Appendix
10.2. Connector components
10.2.1. Types of connector components required
CAN star quad cable: 000 546 14 01 kZ, see 000 546 16 01
Supplier: can be ordered from DaimlerChrysler organisation.
Instruction
Item (no.) MB part no. AMP supplier part no.
drawing
Steckhülsengehäuse 55 pol 004 545 04 26 kZ 004 545 03 26 828 952 – 1
Abdeckkappe für 15 pol 000 153 00 82 – 96 590
Blindstopfen Anzahl für 15 pol 000 545 62 80 kZ 000 545 27 39 828 922 – 1
Blindstopfen Anzahl für 55 pol 000 545 62 80 kZ 000 545 27 39 88 922 – 1
Einzeldichtung (1) 000 545 29 39 kZ 000 545 27 39 828 905 – 1
Einzeldichtung (2) 000 545 28 39 kZ 000 545 27 39 828 904 – 1
Kontaktfeder (1) 009 545 58 26 kZ 003 545 92 26 929 939 – 6 (Ag)

Steckergehäuse 15 pol 026 545 95 28 kZ 026 545 93 28 964 562 – 2
Steckergehäuse 9 pol 026 545 97 28 kZ 026 545 93 28 964 562 – 4
Flachstecker (1) 035 545 22 28 kZ 019 545 20 28 1-962 841-2 (Ag)
Flachstecker (2) 035 545 24 28 kZ 019 545 20 28 1-963 745-2 (Ag)
AO Diagnose-Dose – 650 005 09 54 –

AO Codierung Diagnose-Dose – 673 005 32 54 –
Diagnose-Dose 14 pol 005 545 46 26 – 965 098 – 1
Befestigungsring 000 546 04 22 – 965 099 – 1
Staubkappe 001 545 00 83 – 965 100 – 1
Abstandscheibe 000 545 01 52 – 91 – 52 177-30
Kontaktbuchse 003 545 08 26 – 1-163 083-2 (Ag)
92
10. Appendix
10.2.2.Connector components required to make connection
Accelerator pedal sensor

Flame-start system
Steering column
Neutral point*
Diagnosis
socket
lever
ADM FR
CAN
Item (no.) MR PSM*
FR/AR* LKN/SKN
** 0.5 – 1.0 – 0.5 – 0.5 – 0.5 – 0.5 – 1.0 – 0.5 – 1.0 – 0.5 – 1.0 0.5 – 1.0 0.75 – 1.5
1.0 2.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5
E = single/B = strip E B E B E B E B E B E B E B E B E B E B E B E
Steckhülsengehäuse 55 pol (1)
Steckhülsengehäuse 15 pol 1
Abdeckkappe für 15 pol 1
Blindstopfen Anzahl für 15 pol 5
Blindstopfen Anzahl für 55 pol (19)
Einzeldichtung (1) a
Einzeldichtung (2) a
Kontaktfeder (1) a
Kontaktfeder (2) a
Kontaktfeder (3) a
Kontaktfeder (4) a
Steckhülsengehäuse 6 pol 1
Steckhülsengehäuse 9 pol 1 1
Steckhülsengehäuse 12 pol 1 1
Steckhülsengehäuse 15 pol 1 1 1
Steckhülsengehäuse 18 pol 1 3 1 1 1
Kontaktfeder (5) a a a a a
Kontaktfeder (6) a a a a a
Kontaktfeder (7) a
Kontaktfeder (8) a
Steckergehäuse 15 pol 1
Steckergehäuse 9 pol 1
Flachstecker (1) a 6
Flachstecker (2) a 6
AO Diagnose-Dose +
AO Codierung Diagnose-Dose +
Diagnose-Dose 14 pol 1
Befestigungsring 1
Staubkappe 1
Abstandscheibe 1
Kontaktbuchse a
* = If other DaimlerChrysler electronic systems are used via a high-speed CAN, the CAN wire must be routed via a
neutral point 029 545 92 28. If the CAN wire is lengthened, the neutral point 033 545 74 28 must be used.
** = Wire cross-section in mm². All contact sockets for cable version "FLR".
a = Quantity as required.
AO = Allocation
+ = Drawing of allocation available.
93
10. Appendix
10.3. Brackets
All holes Ø = 5.5mm

1 Bracket, MB part no. A 670 542 06 40
2 Installation surface
3 Bracket, MB part no. A 670 542 05 40
The brackets are to be bolted to a flat surface with the dimensions given.
94
10. Appendix
95
Provisional edition
As at 14.06.99

LACON design, Langenargen
The automatic transmission system for trucks
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-NewEcosplit
ZF-MissionSoft
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-Intarder
ZF-Ecomat
ZF-Ecomid
ZF-Ecolite
ZF-PTO
EN 0000 750 125 - 2002 AS Tronic Truck
Driveline and Chassis Technology ZF Friedrichshafen AG

Truck Driveline Technology
88038 Friedrichshafen/Germany
Tel. +49 7541 77- 0
Fax +49 7541 77- 908000
www.zf.com/truck-transmission Truck Driveline Technology

Get a move on with powerful EDC engines. Achieve safety using disc brakes, strategy ensures that the engine conti-
ABS, ASR and retarder. Save fuel thanks to improved aerodynamics and mo- nuously operates in its fuel-efficient
dern smooth-ride tyres. And what about the truck driver? Until now – plying green range. The vehicle runs smoothly
the highways in state-of-the-art vehicles – they had no relief from the clutch and evenly and – no matter whether nego-
pedal, and had to change gears using the shift lever and its associated mecha- tiating winding country roads,
nical linkages. As traffic density has risen, increasing the frequency of gear congested motorways or unsurfaced
changes, driver comfort has been the casualty. However, now there is an construction site tracks – the driver is
answer to this problem: ZF-AS Tronic, the integrated, automatic transmission always able to keep both hands on the
system for trucks. wheel. A display provides a continuous
update of the operating mode, drive con-
Compact, simple and reliable ditions and system status. At any time,
the driver is able to make corrections to
We developed the ZF-AS Tronic speci- the automatic gear selection, or switch to
fically for trucks with EDC engines and manual operation. In manual mode, each
CAN communication. This innovative gear can be engaged in turn using the
transmission system combines proven joystick, (or tip lever). Anyone heading
ZF technology with modern electronics down a hill with 20 or 30 tonnes of
and is the first such system to group freight behind them not only wants access
together all the main transmission to fuel efficient gears, they have an even
components in a single housing. The stronger wish to bring their vehicle to a
integrated modular design simplifies safe stop.
the tasks of installation and maintenan- To reflect this wish, the ZF-AS Tronic
ce while at the same time providing is available with the optional extra of an
optimum protection from external influ- integral retarder system. A retarder ensu-
ences. How then do we best summarize res that the service brakes stay cool, even
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-AS Tronic
the ZF-AS Tronic? A system which on extended downhill gradients, ensuring
enables trucks to make effective and that they are always available with full
reliable progress on long-haul routes effect whenever really needed.
and over difficult terrain.
2 3
Automatic fuel efficiency on the road with the ZF-AS Tronic

Fuel efficiency right across the Converting power into work
gear range
on building sites? No problem at all! This is precise-
Vehicles are required to do much more

heavy-duty tippers capable of precision manoeuvres
endless highways, can you cover the ground rapidly
easy work of uphill gradients? On what seem to be
in an articulated truck and save time and fuel? Are

In stop-and-go traffic, can a 40 tonne truck make
The ZF-AS Tronic enables articulated than drive: trucks, construction vehicles
trucks or road trains to put power onto and mobile cranes also have to mix, tip,
the road, combining rapid gear shifts, lift and pump… For all these applications,
ly what the ZF-AS Tronic was made for.
with fuel efficiency when setting off. the ZF-AS Tronic can deliver power to the
The transmission system takes automa- appropriate auxiliary unit. Depending on
tic control of the gear selection, shift, the range of duties required of a truck,
and clutch operation processes. The the transmission system can be extended
gears all engage smoothly using an – even retrospectively – by adding one or
electro-pneumatic system which avoids more power take-off units (PTOs), each
engagement impact and release shock of which can be selected individually and
loadings. Engine power is delivered to independently. Suitable PTO units for the
each driving situation at just the right ZF-AS Tronic system are clutch-depen-
level. In automatic mode, the ZF shift dent and roadspeed-dependent units. In
this way, power is converted into work.

10
The ZF-AS Tronic is available in 12 or 16 speed derivatives, with direct drive and
overdrive ratios respectively. The heart of this simple automatic transmission system
9 for engines with torque of up to about 3000 Nm is a 3-shaft transmission with a con-
8
3 stant-mesh 4-speed section and synchromesh splitter and range-change groups. All
actuating and other transmission components including connections for electrical and
pneumatic systems are housed safely inside the transmission rather than being exter-
nally mounted and are hence safe from external factors. The clutch bell housing, the
well-proven dry clutch, the clutch module and the shift module, both modules being
2 equipped with integrated electronic control equipment are all included in the
ZF-AS Tronic. Despite this, the ZF-AS Tronic still weighs significantly less than
comparable transmissions. The complete electronic transmission control unit is readi-
ly accessible, and is integrated in the shift module, located at the top of the transmis-
1 sion. This unit controls the transmission system as an integral component of the
vehicle system. This is achieved by continuous CAN communication – firstly between
the individual transmission components and secondly between the transmission
system and the vehicle systems such as EDC engine, retarder, ABS and ASR.
7 The control unit receives vehicle status data from these various sources and its custo-
mer-specific software ZF MissionSoft calculates the optimum ratio, shift times,
retarder activities etc. and issues the appropriate control commands.This automatically
ensures rapid and gentle shifts, enabling the vehicle to be driven in its most cost-
6
effective operating range and delivering safe and utterly reliable brake actuation.
11
Zero-wear brakes as an integral component
Extending the system without altering the installed size. A ZF-Intarder and heat
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-AS Tronic
exchanger can be installed in the ZF-AS Tronic without increasing the installed
length of the transmission system. Connected directly to the drive wheels,
System insights
2 3 4 6
4 5
1 Transmission this zero-wear step-up retarder demonstrates convincingly fast and consistent braking
2 Output flange performance (500 kW), especially in the main driving range between 30-90 km/h
3 Connection point for PTO – even during shift operations, and does so regardless of highest engine speed.
4 Mounted PTO (N10)
5 Air breather Awakening unimagined forces – TC Tronic
6 Intarder
7 Heat exchanger Heavy-duty or special transport vehicles cannot get going with “normal drive ratings”.
8 10 11
8 Shift module with integrated Electronic During the start-off procedure, extremely high levels of torque are delivered into
Control Unit
these vehicles’ drivelines, placing excessive strains on the system. This problem is
9 Electrical connection – Transmission plug overcome by the 12-speed ZF-AS Tronic combined with a torque converter and clutch
10 Electrical connection – Vehicle plug system (the WSK unit). This transmission system is the ZF-TC Tronic which
12 11 Clutch module is ideally suited to engines with torque ratings as high as 2700 Nm. Under difficult
12 Tip lever conditions, e.g. when setting off, manoeuvring or on soft ground, a torque converter
13 Display unleashes additional power by providing a hydrodynamic boost to the torque rating.
The vehicle is then able to set off without imposing mechanical shocks or wear on the
13
system. Once the vehicle has built up sufficient momentum, the torque converter is
locked up automatically.

A systematic approach to reliable profits Harnessing great power and reaching each
destination fast
Fleet operators stand to gain a great deal
from equipping their modern trucks with the Driving vehicles of up to 40 tonnes consistently
ZF-AS Tronic. Their drivelines and clutches will and reliably to each destination across hundreds
last longer, driver shift errors are prevented, and of kilometers of country roads, mountain passes
maintenance and repair costs are reduce markedly. and motorways is no mean achievement. If that
In automatic mode, the engine operates consi- same transport delivery also combines speed
stently in its most fuel-efficient range and fuel with fuel efficiency, this is a reasonable indica-
consumption can be reduced by 2 to 3%. tor that the man behind the wheel is using a
If a fleet operator decides in favour of the ZF-AS Tronic automatic transmission system.
ZF-AS Tronic with integrated Intarder, safety is Freed from the need to operate the clutch and
improved, the service life of vehicle brakes is shift lever, each truck driver can focus fully on
extended and operating costs are reduced. Also, by road and traffic conditions, can set off smoothly
virtue of its compact design, the ZF-AS Tronic each time, glide effortlessly down long-haul
The ZF-AS Tronic: not only avoids adding a single gramme of extra roads, make great time on uphill gradients and
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-AS Tronic
– Automatic. No clutch action, no shift action. Automatic simplicity on the road. weight, it actually weighs about 60 kg less than can automatically avoid a fair number of fuel
– Reliable. Reliable and service-friendly thanks to the integrated modular design. other transmissions with comparable ratings. stops. Yet another benefit: when manoeuvring,
– Cost-effective. Fuel consumption and clutch wear are reduced. Operating costs decrease. This additional payload can be translated into ex- the ZF-AS Tronic only transmits the amount of
tra revenue every time the truck takes to the road. power needed to overcome rolling resistance.
6 7
Safe and sound. In the customer’s hands, with your payload,

right where you want it
A vast amount of experience, leading edge technology and user benefits are Driver changeovers no longer constitute the head- This means that the vehicle can be guided accu-
concealed in our integrated, automatic transmission system. ache they once did when all you really want to rately and easily in either direction. The driver
do is to move goods quickly and safely from really has firm control over the vehicle. If the
Quality produced automatically A to B. The controls of ZF-AS Tronic are so traffic situation so requires, drivers can interve-
easy to understand that driver and vehicle will ne in automatic mode at any time, and can also
The compact ZF-AS Tronic is delivered from a one-stop shop as a complete have got to know one another well within a few engage manual mode. This electronically pre-
and tested system which can, if so desired, include an Intarder and a range of kilometers. Of course, when it comes to service, vents shift errors and protects the engine from
PTO units, and is quick and easy to install. Product reliability and cost-effec- our customers know we are close at hand where- over-revving.
tiveness are by no means all that the ZF-AS Tronic has to offer: it also delivers ver they are in the world.
convincing sales arguments inside the driver’s cab – benefits such as an info
display panel and tip lever which can be incorporated in a range of different
locations. The clutch pedal and hydraulic system, shift lever and linkages all
become distant memories, leaving scope and space for ergonomically focused,
individual design features. After all, a truck cab is not only a place to work
– on long-haul routes it also doubles as living space.

For up-to-date technical data sheets, please visit our Internet website: www.zf.com/truck-transmission
Power Take-off
Integr. ZF-Primary retarder

Integr. Clutch bell housing
ZF-AS Tronic
[mm] Installation length
ZF-Intarder (Secondary)
2)
[ca. kg] Mass/ Weight
[ca. dm3] Oil capacity

1)
for continuous operation

Clutch-dependent
[Nm] Input torque
Clutch-dependent
for intermitt. operation
Drive-dependent
for steering pump
Ratio spread
No. of gears
12.79 – 1.00 SAE
12 AS 1010 TD 12 1000 840 190 6.5 • • • •
R13.10 1/2
10.33 – 0.81 SAE

12 AS 1010 TO 12 1000 840 190 6.5 • • • •
R10.59 1/2
12.79 – 1.00 SAE

12 AS 1220 TD 12 1200 900 205 7.0 • • • •
R13.10 1/2
10.33 – 0.81 SAE

12 AS 1210 TO 12 1200 840 190 6.5 • • • •
R10.59 1/2
12.79 – 1.00 SAE

12 AS 1420 TD 12 1400 900 205 7.0 • • • •
R13.10 1/2
10.33 – 0.81 SAE

12 AS 1420 TO 12 1400 900 205 7.0 • • • •
R10.59 1/2
15.86 – 1.00 SAE
12 AS 1630 TD 12 1600 910 252 11.0 • • • •
R14.68 1
10.33 – 0.81 SAE

12 AS 1620 TO 12 1600 900 205 7.0 • • • •
ZF-AS Tronic
R10.59 1
for oil change

15.86 – 1.00 SAE
12 AS 1930 TD 12 1900 910 252 11.0 • • • •
R14.68 1
12.33 – 0.78 SAE

12 AS 1930 TO 12 1900 910 249 11.0 • • • •
3)
R11.41 1
with clutch module and clutch release device,

15.86 – 1.00 SAE
12 AS 2140 TD 12 2100 R14.68 953 260 12.5 1 • • • •
8
12.33 – 0.78 SAE
12 AS 2130 TO 12 2100 910 249 11.0 • • • •
R11.41 1
15.86 – 1.00
Truck driving has a great future – 12 AS 2340 TD 12 2300
R14.68
953 260 12.5
SAE
1
• • • •
12.33 – 0.78 SAE

with innovations from ZF 12 AS 2330 TO 12 2300
R11.41
910 249 11.0
1
• • • •
15.86 – 1.00 SAE

12 AS 2540 TD 12 2500 953 260 12.5 • • • •
R14.68 1
Where is the journey in truck technology going to take us? Will we soon see the day when electronically
controlled long-distance trucks come to collect their driver at the start of a trip rather than wait for him to 12.29 – 0.78 SAE
12 AS 2540 TO 12 2500 953 260 12.5 • • • •
2)
R11.38 1
come to them? Will it be possible, using computer control, to monitor sites and to plan and follow routes
Guide values
12.29 – 0.78 SAE
reliably? Will we soon have navigation programs which inform trucks to the nearest metre of approaching 12 AS 2740 TO 12 2700 953 260 12.5 • • • •
R11.38 1
uphill and downhill gradients? If so, will transmission control units be capable of adapting to this informa-
tion automatically? Will it become possible to monitor the entire driveline “holistically”, right down to the 12.29 – 0.78 SAE
12 AS 2940 TO 12 2900 953 260 12.5 • • • •
1)
R11.38 1
level of conducting continuous function checks on every assembly in the system? And what implications
Under development, • available,

would this have on the electronic transmission control unit? These are all questions for which ZF Product 12.29 – 0.78 SAE
12 AS 3140 TO 12 3100 953 260 12.5 • • • •
R11.38 1
Development staff is finding answers. We are working on innovations which will make the transport of
goods and the operation of trucks progressively easier, safer and more cost-effective. 17.03 – 1.00 SAE
16 AS 2230 TD 16 2200 953 266 12.0 • • • •
R15.77 1
14.12 – 0.83 SAE
16 AS 2630 TO 16 2600
R13.07
953 268 12.0 • • • •
1
12.29 – 0.78 SAE

12 TC 2740 TO 12 2700 1315 545 11+18 3) • • • •
R11.38 1
T = Truck, D = Direct drive, O = Overdrive

TC = ZF-TC Tronic (AS Tronic + WSK)
Technical
Manual
for installation, function
and initial setup
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-AS Tronic mid
1328 765 101e

We reserve the right to undertake amendments
Copyright by ZF
This Technical Manual is protected by copyright.
Printed in Germany
ZF Friedrichshafen AG
Responsible for contents: LPE1-A, LPE2-A / Editorial office: MC-C
Edition: 2003-08 Index e

2002-10 Index d
2002-09 Index c
2000-09 Index b
1999-12 Index a

Preface
This technical manual serves as a technical guide

for the ZF-AS Tronic system for both vehicle and
vehicle body manufacturers as well as ZF staff.
This manual describes the standard ZF application.

Customer-specific deviations must be defined.
A ZF-AS Tronic application contains the

following stages:
• Writing of customer specification for the

transmission system by vehicle manufacturer
and ZF
• Documentation by ZF
018881
• First installation
• First installation check and initial setup by
ZF-AS Tronic
ZF staff
• Approval on the basis of the customer specifi-
cation and parts list
If you have any questions, suggestions

or possible improvements, please contact
your Technical Sales department contact
directly.
019518
ZF-AS Tronic mid with N221
1328 765 101 3 2003-08

List of chapters
1 Brief description of the ZF-AS Tronic
2 Transmission system and its components
3 Description of function
4 Installation
5 Annex
1328 765 101 5 2002-09

Table of contents
2 Transmission system and its components
2.1 System design
2.2 Transmission* and shift system

2.2.1 Description of transmission
2.2.2 Description of shift system
2.2.3 Truck product family 3: technical data, 16-speed – direct drive
2.2.4 Truck product family 3: technical data, 16-speed – overdrive
2.2.13 BUS: technical data 10-speed – direct drive
2.2.14 BUS: technical data 10-speed – overdrive
2.3 Transmission components

2.3.1 Transmission actuator
2.3.2 Clutch actuator
2.4 Peripheral components

2.4.1 ZF console-type range selector (with separate E-module)
2.4.1.1 Console-type selector switch
2.4.1.2 Electronic module (ZF E-module)
2.4.2 Other range selectors (variants)
2.4.2.1 ZF console-type range selector (with integrated E-module), only for truck applications
2.4.3 Display
2.5 Auxiliaries
2.5.1 Intarder
2.5.1.1 General
2.5.1.2 Mechanical interface
2.5.1.3 Oil grade and oil volume
2.5.1.4 Coolant connection
2.5.1.5 Pneumatic interface
2.5.1.6 Electrical interface
2.5.1.7 Communications interface
2.5.1.8 Speedo signal
2.5.2 PTOs
2.5.2.1 Clutch-dependent PTOs
2.5.2.2 Roadspeed-dependent PTOs
2.5.2.3 Engine-dependent PTOs
2.5.2.4 Retrofitting
* For transmission designations, refer to Annex
1328 765 101 6 2003-08

Table of contents
3.1 Basic function

3.1.1 Shift engagement characteristics / ignition on
3.1.2 Gear selection when at a standstill
3.1.2.1 Shifting from neutral
3.1.2.2 Shifting from one gear to another
3.1.2.3 Shifting to neutral
3.1.3 Setting off
3.1.4 Gear selection during travel
3.1.4.1 Upshifts
3.1.4.2 Downshifts
3.1.5 Manoeuvring
3.1.6 Protective functions
3.1.6.1 Engine protection functions
3.1.6.2 Clutch overload protection
3.1.7 Activating PTOs
3.1.7.1 Engaging PTO
3.1.7.2 Disengaging PTO
3.1.8 Ignition off
3.2 Automatic drive program

3.2.1 Activating automatic drive program
3.2.2 Automatic selection of setting off gear
3.2.3 Automatic gear change
3.2.4 Deactivating automatic drive program
3.3 ZF-AS Tronic malfunction concept

3.3.1 Principles
3.3.2 System analyses undertaken
3.3.3 Clutch actuator concept
3.3.4 Transmission control concept
3.3.5 Interface concept
3.3.6 Driving modes investigated
3.4 Error responses
3.5 Diagnosis
3.5.1 Error memory
3.5.2 On-board diagnosis
3.5.3 Off-board diagnosis
4 Installation
4.1 Transmission installation investigation

4.1.1 Standard transmission installation drawings
4.1.2 PTO + emergency steering pump installation drawings
4.1.3 Input shafts
4.1.4 Clutch bell housing
4.1.5 Clutch
4.1.6 Clutch release device
1328 765 101 7 2002-09

Table of contents
4.1.7 Engine connection

4.1.8 Suspension
4.1.9 Transmission installation angle
4.1.10 Propshaft connection
4.1.11 Torsional vibrations
4.1.12 Bending vibrations
4.1.13 Cover / protective floor panels
4.1.14 Additional brackets
4.1.15 Fording ability
4.1.16 Accessibility
4.1.17 Additional guidelines for vehicle body manufacturer
4.1.18 Vehicle wiring
4.2 Temperatures
4.2.1 Permissible ambient temperatures on transmission
4.2.2 Permissible oil temperatures
4.2.3 Causes of excess oil temperatures
4.2.4 Additional transmission cooling
4.2.5 Use in sub-zero temperatures
4.2.6 Storing the transmission
4.3 Oil fill

4.3.1 Oil grade and oil change interval
4.3.2 Oil quantity
4.3.3 Draining oil
4.3.4 Filling oil
4.3.5 Oil level check
4.3.6 General information
4.3.7 Information about bleeding the transmission
4.4 Electrics
4.4.1 System layout and circuit diagrams
4.4.2 Description of connectors
4.4.2.1 Transmission end connector
4.4.2.2 Power supply connector to vehicle
4.4.3 Power supply voltages
4.4.4 CAN bus installation
4.4.5 Quality requirements of wiring
4.4.6 Connector and mating connector designations
4.4.7 Other electrical interfaces on the ZF-AS Tronic
4.4.7.1 Neutral switch (S12)
4.4.7.2 Speedo sensor
4.4.8 CAN signals
4.4.9 EMC
4.5 Pneumatics
4.6 Auxiliaries
4.6.1 ZF-Intarder
4.6.2 Third party retarder
4.6.3 ZF PTOs
4.6.4 Third party PTOs
1328 765 101 8 2003-08

Table of contents
4.7 Transmission installation on assembly belt

4.7.1 Transport
4.7.2 Supplying the main transmission
4.7.3 Anti-corrosive protection
4.7.4 Subsequent paintwork
4.7.5 Assembly of engine, clutch and transmission
4.7.6 EOL (End Of Line) programming
4.7.7 Delivery check
4.8 Additional information

4.8.1 Operation
4.8.1.1 Starting the engine
4.8.1.2 Setting off, forwards travel
4.8.1.3 Maneuvering
4.8.1.4 Moving off downhill
4.8.1.5 Changing operating mode: Manual / Automatic
4.8.1.6 Changing gear
4.8.1.7 Reverse travel
4.8.1.8 Engine brake
4.8.1.9 Stopping
4.8.1.10 Stopping engine / vehicle
4.8.1.11 Towing
4.8.1.12 Tow starting
4.8.1.13 Clutch protection
4.8.1.14 Engine overspeed protection
4.8.1.15 Operations with clutch-driven PTO
4.8.1.16 Roller test rig
4.8.1.17 System faults (error messages)
4.8.2 Maintenance
4.8.2.1 Visual inspection of wiring
4.8.2.2 Maintenance of pneumatic system
4.8.3 Vehicle handover to end customer
4.9 Application and documentation

4.9.1 Application
4.9.2 ZF documentation
4.9.3 Type plate
4.9.4 Explanation for ZF documentation
5 Annex
5.1 Designations for AS-transmission
5.2 AS transmission program

5.2.1 AS transmission program for trucks
5.2.2 AS transmission program for buses
Attachment: attached documents
1328 765 101 9 2003-08

List of documents
Applicable documents (attached and documents to which reference is made in the technical manual)
The specifications listed in these documents must be observed because fault-free operation of the
ZF-AS Tronic transmission systems as well as the warranty cover granted by ZF cannot otherwise
be assured.
The documents attached to the technical manual are provided for information only. Please contact
your personal contact in the Technical Sales department if you need binding drawings for installation
investigations etc.
Attached documents – only for information (refer to Annex)
Order no. Name Techn. information

0501 210 059c Installation drawing Signal switch
0501 210 854b Installation drawing Impulse sensor
0501 211 422e Installation drawing Display
0501 213 667 Installation drawing Impulse sensor
0501 321 169 Installation drawing ZF-console-type range selector (with integrated E-module)
1327 600 007b Installation drawing Bus, 10-speed, IT / 12-speed, IT
1327 600 015b Installation drawing Truck, 12-speed, PF3
1327 600 016b Installation drawing Truck, 12-speed, PF3, IT
1328 600 015c1 Installation drawing Truck, 16-speed, PF3 / 12-speed, PF4
1328 600 016c Installation drawing Truck, 16-speed, PF3, IT / 12-speed, PF4, IT
1328 600 019 Installation drawing Clutch
1336 600 001 Installation drawing 12 AS 1010/1210 SAE2 without PTO
1336 600 003 Installation drawing 12 AS 1220/1420/1620 SAE1 without PTO
1336 600 007 Installation drawing 12 AS 1010/1210 SAE1 without PTO
6006 629 024 Installation drawing Range selector
6029 713 016b Circuit diagram ZF-AS Tronic in general
6029 713 021a Wiring diagram ZF-AS Tronic 2 gen. central consumer
6029 713 022a Wiring diagram ZF-AS Tronic 2 gen. end consumer
6029 713 025a Circuit diagram Onboard computer
6029 713 082 Circuit diagram ZF-AS Tronic 2 standard 18-pin
6041 622 023c Installation drawing ZF E module
6090 601 031 Installation drawing PTO NH/1
6090 604 024 Installation drawing PTO NH/4
6091 610 003d Installation drawing PTO NAS/10
6091 615 007 Installation drawing PTO with emergency steering pump
1328 765 101 10 2003-08

List of documents
Documents to which reference is made in the technical manual
Order no. Name Techn. information

0000 701 972 Specification Conservation, paintwork for AS Tronic solo
0000 701 973 Specification Conservation, paintwork for AS Tronic with Intarder
(heat exchanger, rear left)
0000 701 974 Specification Conservation, paintwork for AS Tronic with Intarder
(heat exchanger, rear right)
0000 702 211 Specification Conservation, paintwork for AS Tronic mid solo
0000 766 707 CD-Rom Propshaft calculation program
0000 766 708 Diskette Propshaft calculation program
1205 754 102 List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
1328 755 101 Form Customer specification form
1328 757 151 Type sheet PTO
1328 761 005 TKI Signal specification
1328 761 011 TKI Transmission actuator
1328 761 053 Specification Clutch
1336 600 004 Installation drawing 12 AS 1220/1420/1620 SAE2 with N221
1336 600 005 Installation drawing 12 AS 1220/1420/1620 SAE1 with N221
1336 600 006 Installation drawing Clutch release AS Tronic mid
1336 757 151 Type sheet PTO AS Tronic mid
6006 629 028 Installation drawing Rotary switch
6008 757 103 Type sheet Testman
6009 774 005 TKI EOL (End Of Line) programming
6029 705 003 TKI Vehicle wiring
6029 713 083 Wiring diagram ZF-AS Tronic 2 gen. end consumer
6029 713 084 Wiring diagram ZF-AS Tronic 2 gen. central consumer
6029 713 087 Circuit diagram ZF-console-type range selector (with integrated E-module)
6085 765 104 Technical manual ZF-Intarder
6085 766 104 CD-Rom ZF-Intarder
6090 754 140 Installation manual PTO
1328 765 101 11 2003-08

List of abbreviations
List of abbreviations
ABS Anti-lock Braking System

ASC Anti-Slip Control
BA Operating manual
Bu Bush contact
CAN Controller-Area-Network
E-box Electronics box
E module Electronic module
EBZ Installation drawing
EDC Electronic diesel control = engine control
EMC Electro-magnetic compatibility
EOL-programming End-of-line programming
FMEA Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
GV Splitter group or front-mounted group
GP Rear-mounted range change group
HF line High frequency line
IT Intarder
JPT Junior-Power-Timer
K-line Communication line
Term. 15 Terminal 15 (switched to +)
PF Product family
PTO Power take off
ST MNL Pin contact, Mate-N-Lock
STVZO Highway code
SW Software
TCU Transmission Control Unit
TKI Technical customer information
WSK Torque converter clutch
1328 765 101 12 2003-08

Overview of amendments: 1328 765 101
Index Date of edition Chapter Originator Comments
a 1999-12 LPE2-B Complete revision

b 2000-09 2 LPE2-B 2.2.3 - 2.2.8, 2.3.2, 2.4.1, 2.4.3
4 4.1.1, 4.1.3, 4.1.5 - 4.1.9, 4.1.16 - 4.1.18, 4.2.4,
4.2.5, 4.3, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.9, 4.5, 4.6.3, 4.7.1, 4.7.5, 4.7.6 -
4.9.4
5 Annex
c 2002-09 LPE2-B Contents revised:
List of documents, 2.2 - 2.5, 3.1 - 3.5, 4.1.5,
4.1.8, 4.1.9, 4.1.17, 4.1.18, 4.2, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6,
4.4.7, 4.5, 4.7.5, 4.7.7
Editorial revision:
1, 2.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.4, 4.1.6, 4.1.10, 4.1.16, 4.3,
4.4.8, 4.7.6, 4.1.10, 4.1.16, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.7.6, 4.8.1, 4.9.1
Added:
List of abbreviations, 5.1, 5.2
Replaced by: –
d 2002-10 LPE2-B Contents revised:
2.2.9, 2.2.11, 3.2.4, 4.2, 4.2.5, 4.7.4, 5.1, 5.2.2
Editorial revision:
Copyright, Preface, 3.1.3, 4.4.6
Added: –
Replaced by: –
e 2003-08 LPE2-A Contents revised:
2.2, 2.5, 3.1.6, 3.1.7, 4.1 - 4.5, 5.1, 5.2
Editorial revision: 1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.7, 4.9
Added: 2.4.2, 4.8.1, 4.8.2
Replaced by: –
1328 765 101 13 2002-10

1 Brief description of the
ZF-AS Tronic

018 910
ZF-AS Tronic mid
019 516
ZF-AS Tronic
The ZF-AS Tronic transmission system is a The driver has the opportunity to drive the vehicle in
combination of an electronically-pneumatically both semi-automatic mode and fully automatic mode.
shifted constant mesh gearbox and an automated When in semi-automatic mode, manual shifting is
dry clutch. simplified through the use of a range selector.
An electronic engine control unit and CAN
communication must be in place before the ZF- When in fully automatic mode, gears are selected
AS Tronic transmission system can be used. and shifted by the electronic transmission control
unit, although the driver can intervene if so desired.
The automated clutch (no clutch pedal) renders All system functions needed, e.g. Neutral, gear
clutch operation by the driver unnecessary. change, clutch overload and diagnosis information
The actual shift process is undertaken by the are shown on the display.
electronic transmission control unit.
1328 765 101 1-1 2003-08

2 Transmission system
and its components
2.1 System design
2.2 Transmission* and shift system

2.2.1 Description of transmission
2.2.2 Description of shift system
2.2.3 Truck product family 3: technical data 16-speed – direct drive
2.2.4 Truck product family 3: technical data 16-speed – overdrive
2.2.13 BUS: technical data 10-speed – direct drive
2.3 Transmission components

2.3.1 Transmission actuator

2.4.1 ZF-console-type range selector (with separate E-module)
2.4.1.1 Console-type range selector
2.4.1.2 Electronic module (ZF E-module)
2.4.2.1 ZF-console-type range selector (with integrated E-module)
2.4.3 Display
2.5 Auxiliaries
2.5.1 Intarder
2.5.1.1 General
2.5.1.3 Oil grades and oil fill
2.5.1.4 Coolant connection
2.5.1.6 Electric interface
* For transmission designations, refer to Annex

2.5.1.7 Communication interface
2.5.1.8 Speedo signal
2.5.2 PTOs
2.5.2.1 Clutch-dependent PTOs
2.5.2.2 Vehicle driven PTOs

2 Transmission system – components 2.1 System design
2 Transmission system –
components
2.1 System design
The transmission system consists of the transmission

(1) and the components needed to automate the sys-
tem. The transmission actuator (2) and clutch actuator
(3) components are integrated in the transmission.
The peripheral components, i.e. the range selector (4)
(console switch), display (5) and ZF E module (8)
should also be installed in the vehicle.
5 8
2 1
4
7 6
3
018 739
When integrated in the vehicle system, the ZF-

AS Tronic no longer needs its own peripheral
components and instead uses the vehicle’s systems
such as engine electronics with accelerator pedal (6)
and brake pedal (7), electronic brake system with
wheel speed sensors etc.
The ZF-AS Tronic is integrated in the overall vehicle

system by networking the vehicle electronics via a
CAN bus. The reciprocal system dependencies result-
ing from this must be investigated as part of a vehicle
integration FMEA.
1328 765 101 2-1 2002-09

2 Transmission system – components 2.2 Transmission and shift system
2.2 Transmission and shift system All transmissions of the ZF-AS Tronic family consist
of a four-speed section in the 16-speed version or a
2.2.1 Description of transmission three-speed section in the 12 and 10-speed version and
a splitter group (GV) and rear-mounted range change
The ZF-AS Tronic family covers the following group (GP) in a planetary design.
transmission types: The 4(3)-speed transmission section has constant mesh
• Truck: ZF-AS Tronic mid (product families 1+2) engagement. Speed-matching (synchronization) is per-
• Truck: ZF-AS Tronic (product families 3+4) formed by the engine control unit and the transmission
• Bus: ZF-AS Tronic (unless otherwise specified, the brake. The splitter group and range change group have
details of truck product family 3 apply) synchromesh.
☞ The precise assignment of all transmissions to The transmissions of product families 1+ 2 have one
product families and the max. permissible torques countershaft.
can be found in the Annex (5.1 + 5.2). The transmissions of product families 3 + 4 have two
countershafts. This compact design (with reduced
weight) ensures a good distribution of torque, lower
gear loading levels and therefore greater efficiency in
this performance class.
Distribution of power:
into constants K1 and/or K2 K2
on both countershafts
K1
4 3 2 1
014 867
Transmission brake 4-speed transmission Range change group

Splitter (GP)
group
(GV)
Example: ZF-AS Tronic, 16-speed with 2 countershafts
1328 765 101 2-2 2003-08

2.2.2 Description of shift system 16-speed shift system
The shift cylinders are integrated in the transmission

actuator and are actuated pneumatically. 2 3 4! 1" 5#
Key
1 Transmission actuator
2 Shift cylinder for splitter group
3 Shift cylinder for main transmission
aenedgs
4 Shift cylinder for range change group 1616-Gsp
GV 3/4
5 Selector cylinder for main transmission 1/2
R
GP
019489
10 or 12-speed shift system
2 3 4 1 5
s
sGpaenegd
1122-
GV 2/3
1/R
GP
019490
1328 765 101 2-3 2003-08

2.2.3 Truck product family 3: Max. input torque

Technical data 16-speed – direct drive (traction / coasting)*: 2200 Nm
For more information, refer to type sheet
Input speed: max. 2500 rpm (traction)
max. 2800 rpm (coasting)
Number of forwards gears: 16
Length: 953 mm
Number of reverse gears: 2
Oil volume (in liters): approx. 12
Ratio range: Forward gears 17.03 - 1.0
Reverse gears 15.77 - 13.07 Weight: 256 kg**
Centre of gravity: refer to installation drawing
(Section 4.1.1)
* Approximate value: depends on type of vehicle and vehicle data as well as the prevailing operating conditions
** Without peripherals, oil fill, PTOs, Intarder, clutch, release fork, release shaft, release bearing, push rod and clutch actuator.
Weight: release fork, release shaft, release bearing, push rod and clutch actuator approx. 10 kg
16-speed, direct drive Powerflow diagram
Gear Ratio Gear step Inertia torque 1)

i kgm 2
1st gear 17.029 0.100 1st gear
1.206
2nd gear 14.120 0.139 2nd gear
1.227
3rd gear 11.504 0.102 3rd gear
1.206
4th gear 9.539 0.143 4th gear
1.213
1.206
1.184
1.206
1.224
1.206
10th gear 3.093 0.169 10th gear
1.227
11th gear 2.520 0.146 11th gear
1.206
12th gear 2.089 0.207 12th gear
1.213
13th gear 1.723 0.201 13th gear
1.206
14th gear 1.428 0.287 14th gear
1.184
15th gear 1.206 0.309 15th gear
1.206
16th gear 1.000 0.443 16 th gear
Reverse 1 15.768 Reverse 1
1.206
N K1 – – 0.098
N K2 – – 0.137 PTO-K1
PTO-K1 014282
1) Values relate to input end
1328 765 101 2-4 2003-08


Technical data 16-speed – overdrive (traction / coasting)*: 2600 Nm
Length: 953 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
16-speed, overdrive Powerflow diagram

i kgm 2
1.209
1.224
1.209
1.210
1.209
1.181
1.209
1.221
1.209
10th gear 2.558 0.217 10th gear
1.224
11th gear 2.089 0.191 11th gear
1.209
12th gear 1.728 0.272 12th gear
1.210
13th gear 1.428 0.270 13th gear
1.209
14th gear 1.181 0.389 14th gear
1.181
15th gear 1.000 0.427 15th gear
1.209
16th gear 0.827 0.617 16 th gear

1.209
N K1 – – 0.170
N K2 – – 0.120 PTO-K1
PTO-K1 014283
1328 765 101 2-5 2003-08


Technical data 12-speed – direct drive (traction / coasting)*: 1600 - 1900 Nm
Length: 910 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed, short, direct drive Powerflow diagram
PTO

i kgm 2
1.287
1.289
1.287
1.266
1.287
1.314
1.287
8th gear 2.700 0.176
8th gear
1.289
9th gear 2.095 0.151
9th gear
1.287
10th gear 1.629 0.241
1.266
10th gear
11th gear 1.287 0.252
1.287 11th gear
12th gear 1.000 0.409
12th gear
1.287
N K1 – – 0.090
N K2 – – 0.140
PTO-K1
PTO-K1 018 742
1328 765 101 2-6 2002-09


Technical data 12-speed – overdrive (traction / coasting)*: 1900 - 2300 Nm
Length: 910 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed, short, overdrive Powerflow diagram
PTO

i kgm 2
1.285
1.290
1.285
1.267
1.285
1.316
1.285
1.290
1.285
10th gear 1.267 0.362 10th gear
1.267
11th gear 1.000 0.406 11th gear
1.285
12th gear 0.778 0.662 12th gear

1.285
N K1 – – 0.181
N K2 – – 0.115 PTO-K1
PTO-K1 018 741
1328 765 101 2-7 2003-08


Length: 953 mm
Oil volume (in liters): approx. 12.5
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed, long, direct drive Powerflow diagram
PTO

i kgm 2
1.290
1.285
1.290
1.259
1.290
1.314
7th gear 3.474 0.127
7th gear
1.290
8th gear 2.693 0.202
8th gear
1.285
9th gear 2.095 0.177
9th gear
1.290
10th gear 1.624 0.286
1.259 10th gear
11th gear 1.290 0.306
1.290 11th gear
12th gear 1.000 0.501
12th gear
1.287
N K1 – – 0.099
N K2 – – 0.155
PTO-K1
PTO-K1 018 740
1328 765 101 2-8 2003-08


Length: 953 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed, long, overdrive Powerflow diagram
PTO

i kgm 2
1.282
1.293
1.282
1.267
1.282
1.323
1.282
1.294
1.282
10th gear 1.267 0.418 10th gear
1.267
11th gear 1.000 0.475 11th gear
1.282
12th gear 0.780 0.771 12th gear

1.285
N K1 – – 0.202
N K2 – – 0.129 PTO-K1
PTO-K1 018 743
1328 765 101 2-9 2003-08


Technical data 12-speed – direct drive (traction / coasting)*: 1000 / 700 Nm1)
Length: 840 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
** Without peripherals, oil fill, PTO’s, clutch, release fork, shaft and bearing, push rod and clutch actuator.
1) under development: 1000 Nm coasting torque
12-speed – direct drive Powerflow diagram
PL
R
3 2 1
KII PTO
KI
i kgm 2
1
1.238
2nd gear 10.333 0.086 2
2nd gear
1.287
3rd gear 8.029 0.067 3
3rd gear
1.238
4
1.253
5
1.238
6th gear 4.182 0.109 6
6th gear
1.367
7th gear 3.058 0.083 7
7th gear
1.238
8th gear 2.471 0.118 8
8th gear
1.287
9th gear 1.920 0.120 9
9th gear
1.238
10th gear
10
10th gear 1.551 0.174
1.253
11th gear 1.238 0.205 11
11th gear
1.238
12
12th gear
12th gear 1.000 0.304
Reverse 1 13.102 0.062 R11

Reverse
1.238
Reverse 2 10.585 0.086 R2 2
Reverse
N K1 – – 0.059
N K2 – – 0.081 PTO-K1
PTO-K1
PTO-K2
PTO-K2
019 425
1328 765 101 2-10 2003-08


Technical data 12-speed – overdrive (traction / coasting)*: 1200 / 840 Nm1)
Length: 840 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed – overdrive Powerflow diagram
R PL
3 2 1
KII PTO
KI
i kgm 2
1st gear 10.333 0.084 1
1st gear
2
1.230
3
1.295
4
1.230
5
1.261
6th gear 3.399

1.230
0.143 6
6th gear
7th gear 2.471

1.376
0.116
7
7th gear
8th gear 2.008

1.230
0.156
8
8th gear
9th gear 1.551

1.295
0.172
9
9th gear
1.230
10th 10
gear
10.th gear 1.261 0.241
1.261
11th 11
gear
11th gear 1.000 0.302
1.230 12th 12
gear
12th gear 0.813 0.437
Reverse 1 10.585 0.084 R1

Reverse 1
Reverse 2 8.604
1.230
0.107 R2 2
Reverse
N K1
N K2
–
–
–
–
0.105
0.075 PTO-K1
PTO-K1
PTO-K2
PTO-K2
019 426
1328 765 101 2-11 2003-08


Technical data 12-speed – direct drive (traction / coasting)*: 1400 / 980 Nm1)
Length: 900 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed – direct drive Powerflow diagram
PL
R
3 2 1
KII PTO
KI
i kgm 2
1
1.238
2nd gear 10.333 0.101 2
2nd gear
1.287
3
1.238
4
1.259
5
1.238
6
1.367
7th gear 3.058 0.094
7th gear
7
1.238
8th gear 2.471 0.134 8
8th gear
1.287
9th gear 1.920 0.132 9
9th gear
1.238
10th gear 1.551 0.193 10th 10
gear
1.253
11th gear 1.238 0.221 11th gear
11
1.238
12th 12
gear
12th gear 1.000 0.329
Reverse 1 13.102 0.072 R1 1

Reverse
1.238
Reverse 2 10.585 0.100 R2 2
Reverse
N K1 – – 0.069
N K2 – – 0.096 PTO-K1
PTO-K1
PTO-K2
PTO-K2
019 425
1328 765 101 2-12 2003-08


Technical data 12-speed – overdrive (traction / coasting)*: 1600 / 1120 Nm1)
Length: 900 mm
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed – overdrive Powerflow diagram
R PL
3 2 1
KII PTO
KI
i kgm 2
1st gear 10.333 0.098 1
1st gear
1.230
2tnd gear 8.399 0.127 2
2nd gear
3
1.295
4
1.230
5
1.261
6
1.230
7th gear 2.471

1.376
0.131 7
7th gear
8th gear 2.008

1.230
0.177 8
8th gear
9th gear 1.551

1.295
0.190 9
9th gear
10th 10
1.230
10th gear 1.261 0.266
gear
11th 11
1.261
11th gear 1.000 0.326
gear
1.230 12th 12
gear
12th gear 0.813 0.473
Reverse 1 10.585 0.098 R1

Reverse 1
R2 2
1.230
Reverse 2 8.604 0.126 Reverse
PTO-K1
N K1 – – 0.124
N K2 – – 0.087 PTO-K1
PTO-K2
PTO-K2
019 426
1328 765 101 2-13 2003-08

2.2.13 BUS: Max. input torque

Length: 898 mm
Oil volume (in liters): approx. 11 /
approx. 21 (with Intarder)
Reverse gears 11.41
Weight: 239 kg**
(Section 4.1.1)
10-speed Bus – direct drive Powerflow diagram

i kgm 2
1.290
1.285
1.267
1.285
1.316
1.285
1.290
1.285
1.267
10th gear 1.000 0.406 10th gear
Reverse 11.413 Reverse

N K1 – – 0.181 014286
N K2 – – 0.115
1328 765 101 2-14 2003-08


Length: 898 mm
Reverse gears 11.41
Weight: 239 kg**
(Section 4.1.1)
10-speed Bus – overdrive Powerflow diagram

i kgm 2
1.285
1.267
1.285
1.316
1.285
1.290
1.285
1.267
1.285
10th gear 0.778 0.662 10th gear

N K1 – – 0.181 014287
N K2 – – 0.115
1328 765 101 2-15 2003-08


Length: 898 mm
Reverse gears 11.41
Weight: 239 kg**
(Section 4.1.1)
12-speed Bus – overdrive Powerflow diagram

i kgm 2
1.285
1.290
1.285
1.267
1.285
1.316
1.285
1.290
1.285
10th gear 1.267 0.362 10th gear
1.267
11th gear 1.000 0.406 11th gear
1.285
12th gear 0.778 0.662 12th gear

019040
N K1 – – 0.181
N K2 – – 0.115
1328 765 101 2-16 2003-08

2 Transmission system – components 2.3 Transmission components
2.3 Transmission components • The integrated transmission electronics contain

all functions needed for open loop / closed loop
2.3.1 Transmission actuator transmission and clutch control.
• The electro-pneumatic valves control the shift
All functions needed for open loop/closed loop trans- cylinder and transmission brake
mission control can be found in the transmission
actuator. It has a mechanical, electrical and pneu- • The pneumatic shift cylinders actuate the
matic interface and is integrated in the transmission mechanical shift elements in the transmission.
housing in a space saving manner. • The sensors record
– the present position of all shift
cylinder
Integrated – the transmission input speed
Compressed air connection
transmission electronics – the transmission temperature
and pressure relief valve
– the amount of air pressure
available
• The vehicle end connector is the
electrical interface to the vehicle
CAN system network, the interface
Transmission to the display, to the range selector,
end connector to the voltage supply, to the diagno-
014869
sis devices, etc.
• The transmission electronics are
Vehicle Sensor
integrated in the housing cover.
end connector • Travel
The figure (010834) shows the trans-
• Temperature
mission actuator with open housing
• Speed
cover.
• Pressure
• Pneumatic connections are produced
using corresponding connection
ducts – electrical connections using
Valves short connection lines.
• Shifting
• Selecting
• Transmission brake
• GV
• GP
• Central air
010834 Shift cylinder

• GV
• GP
• Main transmission
(shifting, selecting)
1328 765 101 2-17 2002-09

2 Transmission system – components 2.3 Transmission components
018769
The clutch actuator is flange-mounted on the inte- The clutch can be engaged in a very finely metered
grated clutch bell housing of the transmission. manner for sensitive setting off and manoeuvring.
The clutch is actuated by the clutch actuator, which in For very quick clutch actuations, if necessary, the
turn is actuated by the electronics in the transmission opening and closing times and/or cycle frequencies
actuator. can be varied to ensure adjustment speeds appropriate
for the situation.
Clutch actuator and transmission actuator are con-
nected (electrically) by the wiring harness integrated During every starting procedure, the present clutch
in the clutch actuator and the relevant transmission initial contact point is learnt in and stored in the
actuator connector (transmission end connector). transmission actuator for use at a later date (clutch
control). This learning in procedure ensures that up-
In addition to the pneumatic actuation piston respon- to date information about the wear status of the clutch
sible for the clutch release, the following components lining is available to the control software at all times.
are integrated in the clutch actuator: Two redundant,
cyclic valves are used each for opening and closing The driver is warned in good time before the clutch is
the clutch, whereby both valves have rear-mounted fully worn.
orifices of different diameters.
The position of the pneumatic piston and therefore

the clutch is recorded by a travel sensor.
An electronics module in the clutch actuator provides
the sensor signal for the transmission control unit.
1328 765 101 2-18 2002-09

2 Transmission system – components 2.4 Peripheral components
Two ZF console-type range selectors are available:

• ZF console-type range selector with separate
E-module,
• ZF console-type range selector with integrated
E-module
2.4.1 ZF-console-type range selector

with separate E-module
2.4.1.1 Console-type range selector
A/M Changeover between

A = automatic M = manual
+ Upshift – Downshift
+ + Accumulated – – Accumulated
upshift downshift
D = Drive (forwards, automatic or manual)

N = Neutral
014 871
R = Reverse
The following range selectors can be purchased from The shift positions are sensed electrically. The digital
ZF for the ZF-AS Tronic system: signals are converted into CAN signals in the ZF E
module (☞ refer to Section 2.4.1.2) and made avail-
Console range selector with integrated rotary switch able to the transmission control unit via the ZF-CAN
Order no. 6006 029 018 bus.
Drawing no. 6006 629 024
The range selector can if necessary by replaced by
a vehicle manufacturer’s interface-compatible range
The range selector is the control device for selector.
• selecting the driving range ☞ More range selector data can be found in
• selecting the gear installation drawing 6006 629 024.
• activating / deactivating automatic mode
• calling up the error display on the display
(☞ refer to diagnosis, Section 3.5)
1328 765 101 2-19 2003-08

2.4.1.2 Electronic module (ZF E module) The following inputs / outputs are available.
Order no. 6041 322 033
Drawing no. 6041 622 023 CAN interface
1x CAN interface (250 k Baud, interface in
The ZF E module is needed when the range selector accordance with ISO/DIS 11898)
information as well as various vehicle input / output
signals (door switch, PTO request …) are not avail- Inputs
able to the transmission control unit as CAN signals. 11x “low active” digital inputs for range selector
5x “low active” digital inputs for vehicle signals
These digital input / output signals are converted into 3x “high active” digital inputs for vehicle signals
CAN signals in the ZF E module and communicated
to the transmission electronics via the ZF-CAN bus. Outputs
2x “low active” digital inputs for vehicle signals
4x “high active” digital inputs for vehicle signals
Range selector Additional interfaces

for ZF-AS Tronic
(e.g. buzzer, PTO, …)
E module
ZF-CAN
ZF-AS Tronic
transmission electronics
1328 765 101 2-20 2003-08

2.4.2.1 ZF console-type range selector with integrated E-module

(This console-type range selector is intended especially for the ZF-AS Tronic system in trucks)
A/M Changeover between

S
A = automatic M = manual
+ Upshift – Downshift
+ + Accumulated – – Accumulated
upshift downshift
N
R D S = Search function*
RM DM
DM = Maneuvering forwards
D = Drive (forwards, automatic or manual)
N = Neutral
R = Reverse
019 617, 019619, 019621
RM = Maneuvering in reverse
* If the “S” position (search function) is selected during manual operations, the transmission shifts into the ECO gear (low engine speed).
If the “S” position (search function) is selected when the engine brake is engaged, the transmission shifts into the POWER gear (high engine speed).
As a further range selector variant, the new ZF con- connected to the input or output as well as their
sole-type range selector with integrated E-module wiring should if necessary be established in agree-
can be used for the ZF-AS Tronic system. This range ment with ZF.
selector contains the electronics (E-module) needed
for recording, transfer and activation: If the range selector output is used to activate a com-
ponent (e.g. PTO), then the ground / earth connection
Lever-type range selector of this component MUST be routed back to the range
Order number: 0501 321 169 selector. The definitions of the corresponding imple-
Drawing number: 0501 321 169 mentations must be agreed upon with ZF.
Rotary switch Input: “high active”

Order number: 6006 629 028 (Vin_low < 3,4V / Vin_high = 7 V)
Drawing number: 6006 629 028
Output: “high active”
The range selector is the control element for (Vout = Ubatt –1,5V / Iout = 730 mA max.)
• selecting the driving range (If necessary, four more outputs can be depicted on
• selecting the gear the lever-type range selector – applications for imple-
• activating / deactivating automatic mode mentation can be clarified on request.)
• selecting the search function
NOTE
The positions of the lever-type range selector are Grip / cover (hood) do not fall within the standard ZF
recorded using a sensor matrix and converted into scope of supply. Customer-specific parts should be
CAN signals by the electronics in the range selector. ordered separately.
In addition to recording the driver’s request, an input ☞ More details of the lever-type and rotary switch
and an output signal can also be connected to the can be found in the installation drawings.
range selector. The definition of the components
1328 765 101 2-21 2003-08

2.4.3 Display WARNING INFORMATION

Drawing no. 0501 211 422
Insufficient air pressure
The display shows operating displays, warning (Airless)
information and system errors. The display
008 128
communicated with the transmission electronics via
a ZF-specific interface. Remove foot from
The display can if necessary be replaced by a vehicle accelerator
manufacturer’s interface-compatible display device.
008 105
Clutch overloaded.
Select lower gear (clutch)
DISPLAYS
008 021
OPERATING DISPLAYS Clutch worn

(Clutch wear)
System self-check
(with ignition ON) 008 029
Communication error
008 010
to display
Transmission in Neutral (Electronic error)
008 122
Excess transmission
008 011
temperature
Gear engaged
018 467
008 015
SYSTEM ERRORS
Manual operation,
shifted gear, downshift options System error.
(2 gears) Restricted further travel
016 893
possible.
Reverse gear “low” 008 026
engaged System error !

Stop !
008 109
Reverse gear “high” 008 027
engaged Example:
error no.: 53
008 107
PTO 1 is activated (P). 008 103
Transmission Neutral (N). Example: error no.: 168

If 4 bars are displayed in addition
008 024
to the figure shown, this means:
PTO 1 and 2 are activated 008 106 error no. + 100.
(P). Setting off gear 3 shifted
(3). Example: error no. 227
008 102
If 4 bars and 2 arrows are dis-
Automatic operation is shown played in addition to the figure
in display by 4 bars with 2 arrows. 018 470 shown, this means: error no. + 200
(8th gear is engaged in the trans- (only with two-digit displays)
013 586 mission)
1328 765 101 2-22 2002-09

2 Transmission system – components 2.5 Auxiliaries
2.5 Auxiliaries 2.5.1.3 Oil grade and oil fill
2.5.1 Intarder The Intarder and ZF-AS Tronic transmission share

a common oil supply. The therefore increased oil
The Intarder is a hydrodynamic and therefore zero- volumes can be found in the Intarder technical
wear transmission brake. Transmission of product manual (order no. 6085 765 104).
families 3 and 4 and bus transmissions can be
supplied with a ZF Intarder. The ZF-AS Tronic with integrated Intarder may only
The ZF-Intarder is not available for product families be filled with the oils approved in List of Lubricants
1 and 2. TE-ML 02.
List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 (refer to Section 4.3)

2.5.1.1 General provides information about the precise oil specifi-
cation as well as the oil change intervals.
An overview of the system concept, structure,
function, operating elements, function variants,
periphery and safety functions, as well as installation 2.5.1.4 Coolant connection
and diagnosis information can be found in technical
manual (order no. 6085 765 104). An oil-water heat exchanger is fitted to the Intarder.
This has to be included in the engine cooling water
A separate technical manual is available for circuit.
the ZF-Intarder (order no. 6085 765 104 /
CD 6085 766 104). More information can be found in the ZF-Intarder
technical manual order no. 6085 765 104.

The Intarder is integrated in the ZF-AS Tronic trans-
mission. The Intarder can only be retrofitted by con- The air connection for the ZF-Intarder may either be
verting the transmission. At the point of ordering the provided via the air reservoir of the ZF-AS Tronic
ZF-AS Tronic transmission, a decision must therefore transmission ( refer to Section 4.5) or via a
be made regarding the additional delivery of an separate connection on the air reservoir for auxiliary
Intarder. consumers.
The installation of the SAE 1 flange in relation to the Refer to information provided in the ZF-Intarder
output flange is the same as with the ZF-AS Tronic technical manual order no. 6085 765 104.
without Intarder attachment.
The installation position of the transmission can 2.5.1.6 Electrical interface

be found in the standard installation drawings
(refer to Section 4.1). The Intarder has an electrical interface to the vehicle
wiring. There is no direct electrical connection to the
Electronics supplied with the Intarder are housed in ZF-AS Tronic.
the dry area of the vehicle (e.g. driver’s cab).
The circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams for
More information can be found in the technical the various Intarder systems can be found in the
manual ZF-Intarder order no. 6085 765 104. ZF-Intarder technical manual 6085 765 104.
1328 765 101 2-23 2003-08

2.5.1.7 Communication interface 2.5.2 PTOs
The Intarder electronics contain a CAN-interface 2.5.2.1 Clutch-dependent PTOs

in accordance with SAE J 1939. This interface is
used for the exchange of signals with other system- Clutch-dependent ZF-PTOs can be used for many
compatible vehicle electronics. different operations. The PTOs can either be fitted
in the factory and supplied with the ZF-AS Tronic
The signal contents and signal specification or retrofitted onto the ZF-AS Tronic. The PTOs are
should be agreed with ZF Friedrichshafen AG. either available with output flange or for pump
attachment. It should be noted that the control unit for
engageable PTOs is integrated in the ZF-AS Tronic
2.5.1.8 Speedo signal electrical system and has to be released via software
configuration (ZF-AS Tronic and if necessary,
When using the Intarder, ensure the use of speedo vehicle computer).
signals corresponding to the instructions provided
in the ZF-Intarder technical manual order no. ZF-AS Tronic has two software configurations for
6085 765 104. different application scenarios:
• Stationary mode
Gears cannot be selected
PTOs can only be used at a standstill
• Stationary / mobile mode

Gears can only be selected at a standstill
Travel possible with PTO engaged in the setting
off gears authorised for this purpose
An overview of the ZF-PTOs available in terms

of permissible torque and the speeds which can
be reached can be found on the type plates,
order no. 1336 757 151 (product families 1+ 2)
and 1328 757 151 (product families 3 + 4).
1328 765 101 2-24 2003-08

2.5.2.2 Vehicle driven PTOs
The vehicle driven PTO can be used to drive a ZF

emergency steering pump or a 2nd steering circuit.
There are various versions of vehicle driven PTOs.
Roadspeed-driven ZF-AS Tronic without ZF-Intarder ZF-AS Tronic with ZF-Intarder

PTO (product families 1 - 4) (product families 3 + 4)
Integration Additional attachment PTO integrated in Intarder

housing
Retrofitting Possible Not possible
The speeds of these PTOs depend on the output speed

of the ZF-AS Tronic. The vehicle driven PTOs can be
fitted in addition to all clutch-dependent PTOs.
☞ More information on this PTO can be found on

the type sheets, page no. 1336 757 151 (product
families 1+ 2) and 1328 757 151 (product
families 3 + 4).
Engine-dependent PTOs for the ZF-AS Tronic are not

available from ZF.
ZF-PTOs can be retrofitted on the ZF-AS Tronic.
☞ Please note fitting instructions 6090 754 140

and the OEM-specific connection and
programming instructions 6090 754 …
during such operations.
1328 765 101 2-25 2003-08

3.1 Basic function

3.1.1 Shift engagement characteristics / ignition on
3.1.2 Gear selection when at a standstill
3.1.2.1 Shifting from Neutral
3.1.2.2 Shifting from one gear to another
3.1.2.3 Shifting to Neutral
3.1.3 Setting off
3.1.4.1 Upshifts
3.1.4.2 Downshifts
3.1.5 Manoeuvring
3.1.6 Protective functions
3.1.6.1 Engine protection functions
3.1.6.2 Clutch overload protection
3.1.7 Activating PTOs (PTO)
3.1.7.1 Engaging PTO
3.1.7.2 Disengaging PTO
3.1.8 Ignition off

3.2.1 Activating automatic drive program
3.2.3 Automatic gear change
3.2.4 Deactivating automatic drive program
3.3 ZF-AS Tronic malfunction concept

3.3.1 Principles
3.3.2 System analyses undertaken
3.3.3 Clutch actuator concept
3.3.4 Transmission control unit concept
3.3.5 Interface concept
3.4 Error responses
3.5 Diagnosis
3.5.1 Error memory
3.5.2 On-board diagnosis
3.5.3 Off-board diagnosis

3 Description of function 3.1 Basic function
The function of the ZF-AS Tronic transmission system is sub-divided into two key blocks; the basic function
and the automatic drive program.
Function structure:
Basic function Automatic drive program

018980
3.1 Basic function
The basic function ensures that the ZF-AS Tronic ☞ Detailed descriptions of the signals can be found
and the pneumatically activated clutch are operated in signal specification ZF no. 1328 761 005 if
in the relevant operating / drive situations. Amongst needed.
other things, this includes selecting gear, setting off,
manoeuvring and gear shifting. In the ZF-AS Tronic transmission system’s standard
application, data is also exchanged via CAN to
The basic function includes the recording of all the ZF E module for recording range selector
signals needed for the function. These are signals information and also for activating PTOs. This CAN
from sensors, such as travel, speed as well as bus connection is operated separately from the CAN
pressure and temperature sensors, which are fitted on driveline.
and in the transmission. Other information (crucial
to the function) is exchanged via the CAN driveline A good diagnosis concept is needed to handle the
(Control Area Network) between the electronic large number of signals makes. This is described in
systems fitted in the vehicle and the ZF-AS Tronic Section 3.4 and 3.5.
control unit.
1328 765 101 3-1 2002-09

3.1.1 Shift engagement characteristics / 3.1.2.2 Shifting from one gear to another
ignition on
If the setting off gear is manually corrected (to select
When the ignition is switched on, the sensor and a higher or lower gear) when the vehicle is at a stand-
control elements, valves, actuator cylinders etc. are still, this is a shift from one gear to another. In this
checked for errors (e.g. short circuit, interrupt, main instance, if the clutch is already open, the transmis-
transmission in Neutral, plausibility in accordance sion input and output speeds are zero so that the new
with specification). During this ignition on and/or gear requested can be selected directly.
check phase, the transmission and clutch-related
sensor values are acquired by the system.
3.1.2.3 Shifting to Neutral
This “learn-in” procedure can only start if there
are no errors on the clutch actuator and Neutral is If the driver selects Neutral from the setting off gear,
successfully learnt in via the transmission sensors. this request is implemented immediately by shifting
During the learning in procedure, the main points of from one gear to the next and the clutch then closed.
the clutch actuator’s adjustment range must be deter-
mined and saved. The clutch actuator needs these
points (once determined) during travel, depending on
the relevant drive situation. The absolute position of
these points depends on the stretch and tolerances of
the mechanics of the entire clutch activation path as
well as depending on the present degree of clutch
wear. The clutch learn in procedure can be used to
compensate for any possible clutch wear.
3.1.2 Gear selection at a standstill
In general during standstill shifts, the transmission

control unit specifies zero filling, i.e. load reduction
to the engine control unit. A distinction is made
between three different shifts.
3.1.2.1 Shifting from Neutral
When shifting from Neutral, the clutch is opened

and the splitter group, range change group and gate
shifted in parallel into their nominal positions. The
transmission brake is used to reduce the transmission
input speed and then the main transmission activated.
1328 765 101 3-2 2002-09

3.1.3 Setting off
Setting off under full load

Accelerator (alphaFP) Present engine torque (mMot akt)

Engine speed (nMot ) Clutch travel (sKup)
Transmission input speed (nGe) Speed (vFzg)
When travelling forwards, the driver is free to When travelling backwards, with 16 and 12-speed
choose the setting off gear up to a maximum setting transmissions, the lower R gear is generally selected.
off gear if the automatically set setting off gear is to There is no automatic gear change. The high R gear
be corrected. For 12-speed transmission, this is 3rd must be selected via manual intervention via the
gear, for 16-speed transmissions, 5th gear. range selector. With bus transmissions, only one
R gear is available.
1328 765 101 3-3 2002-10

Actuating the accelerator allows for comfortable If thermal overloading arises during the second
setting off without damaging the clutch in various phase, the driver is informed of this via the display.
situations (laden / empty, flat / incline, gradient). The nominal engine speed is continuously reduced
If the vehicle rolls in the opposite direction of travel, at the same time. This is achieved by successively
the engine does not stall when setting off. The setting closing the clutch. The nominal engine speed can be
off procedure is aborted if the load is reduced or the reduced until the engine stalls.
brake pedal is actuated.
If the clutch travel sensor fails, a changeover is made
The setting off procedure basically consists of four to time-controlled closing / opening of the clutch.
phases: in the first phase, the clutch’s idle stroke is
surmounted. This is the range in which the clutch
does not transfer torque. The position up to where
the clutch is closed is applicable. After every clutch
learning in procedure, the applied position is
entrained in accordance with the modified clutch
travel. Overriding the idle stroke serves to pass
through the range in which the clutch transfers no
torque as quickly as possible.
Clutch closed loop control then starts in the second

phase. This varies the clutch position and therefore
the clutch torque to set a nominal engine speed.
The nominal engine speed is determined using
characteristics which depend on the gear selected,
transmission input speed and engine idling speed.
If the speed falls below an applicable difference in

speed between engine and transmission input speed
(typically 50 rpm), the system switches into the
third phase. In this phase, the clutch is closed in a
controlled manner, the speed of which depends on
the accelerator position. The third phase is exited
once the clutch is around 90 % closed.
The fourth phase starts when the clutch is closed.

Residual venting is then used to fully vent the
pressure chamber of the clutch actuator.
During the setting off procedure, the engine torque is

increased via ramp from an initial value to the torque
level requested by the driver. Engine torque inter-
vention makes comfortable setting off possible.
1328 765 101 3-4 2002-09

During travel, a shift can be triggered automatically by the automatic drive program, or manually by the driver.
The general shift processes of upshifts and downshifts are described in the next two sections.
3.1.4.1 Upshifts
A → B1 Partial opening of clutch and at the same D Deactivation of transmission brake once
time reduction in load by reducing the fuel minimum difference in speed of trans-
injection volume. mission shift elements is reached.
B1 → C Rapid, complete opening of clutch once D→E Transmission actuator selects new gear.
load reduction is complete.
E→F Clutch closes again in parallel to build-up
B2 → C The transmission actuator deselects the of load.
present gear.
F → G Once clutch has closed completely, the
C Sensors report “transmission in Neutral”. shift procedure is complete.
C→ D Activation of transmission brake to
compensate for difference in speed
between transmission shift elements.
Engine speed
Transmission input speed
Clutch disengaged
Clutch engaged
B2 Gear engaged
Transmission in Neutral
Transmission brake off
Transmission brake on
Speed adaptation
Time A B1 C DE F G
1328 765 101 3-5 2002-09

3.1.4.2 Downshifts
A → B Partial opening of clutch and at the same E→F Once shift elements are at the same speed,
time reduction in load. the clutch opens and the transmission
B → C Rapid, complete opening of clutch. actuator selects the gear requested.
C → D The transmission actuator deselects the F → G When “Gear selected” signal is displayed,
present gear. clutch begins to close in parallel to build-
up of load.
D Sensors report “transmission in Neutral”.
G Clutch is closed, shift is complete.
D→E Partial closing of clutch and “blipping of
throttle” by briefly increasing fuel injection
volume. Transmission shift elements are
brought up to connecting speed of gear to
be selected.
Engine speed
Transmission input speed
Clutch disengaged
Synchronizing
Clutch engaged
Gear engaged
Transmission in Neutral
Time A BCD E F G
3.1.5 Manoeuvring
If the driver actuates the accelerator within a defined torque on the clutch is set by the control unit so that
range, appropriate clutch travel is also set via the drive resistance is surmounted. The accelerator can
clutch actuator. Here, the electronic transmission therefore be used to slowly move the vehicle forwards
control unit (TCU) affects the engine speed bringing or backwards in a very sensitive manner.
it to the level required for manoeuvring operations.
As the accelerator is increasingly actuated, the clutch The clutch travel depends not only on the accelerator
is moved further towards the closed position and the position but also on the manoeuvring gear selected
target engine speed increases. and shifted using the range selector (standard appli-
cation scenario: with 16-speed transmissions, this is
Sliding friction is produced on the friction interfaces 1st, 2nd or 3rd gear, with 12-speed-transmissions,
as a result of the partially closed clutch. The transfer this is 1st or 2nd gear).
1328 765 101 3-6 2002-09

The automatically selected setting off gear may be If the accelerator is moved beyond the range defined
within the range of these manoeuvring gears. It is for manoeuvring, manoeuvring mode is exited.
however also possible for the setting off gear to be
outside the manoeuvring range. In this instance, the
manoeuvring gear required must be selected by
means of manual intervention via the range selector.
Automatic gear changes do not take place during
manoeuvring.A gear change has to be manually
requested via the range selector.
Manoeuvring
018988
Accelerator (alphaFP) Present engine torque (mMot akt)

Engine speed (nMot ) Clutch travel (sKup)
Transmission input speed (nGe) Speed (vFzg)
1328 765 101 3-7 2002-09

3.1.6 Protective functions In this instance, the driver receives both visual and
acoustic warnings (passive protective measure).
3.1.6.1 Engine protection functions The warning is reset once a defined lower load limit
value is reached.
In the “automatic” drive program, an automatic
upshift may occur to protect the engine from over- If the warnings are not observed, active protective
speed when engine speeds exceed a defined speed measures are automatically initiated.
threshold (x% above nominal engine speed). If the setting off gear selected is greater than 1st gear,
Automatic upshifts do not occur in manual mode. then the clutch engagement speed increases as the
friction energy increases so that as clutch loading
NOTE increases, the period of loading (slip time) is reduced
This function must be discussed by the customer sufficiently.
and ZF.
Depending on the clutch load calculated, a shift is
also automatically made back into a lower setting off
gear. When in manoeuvring mode and when a
3.1.6.2 Clutch overload protection defined threshold value is reached, a shift is made
from manoeuvring mode into setting off mode. In
In order to prevent the clutch from being damaged other words, the clutch automatically begins to close
as a result of excessively long friction processes, the to encourage the driver to set off. Once cooled down
present clutch load is continuously calculated from to below the threshold valve, manoeuvring mode is
the clutch torque, differential speed on clutch and the again permitted.
slip time. Taking the previous friction processes into
consideration, checks are undertaken to determine
whether the load limit value has been exceeded.
Slip time
Differential
speed Driver
Clutch information
Algorithm
n for protecting
,n against clutch
t
overload Clutch
activation
Driver Engine P
intervention torque
T 018964
1328 765 101 3-8 2003-08

3.1.7 Activating PTOs (PTO) 2. The PTO is engaged. To do this, the clutch opens
and the transmission brake reduces the trans-
Depending on the application, PTOs can be operated mission input speed.
when stationary or stationary / mobile. Stationary 3. The output of the electronic control unit for
operations are only permitted when the transmission mechanical engagement of the PTO is activated.
is in Neutral. Gears cannot be selected. When in 4. As soon as the PTO is successfully engaged, this
stationary / mobile mode, the starting gears and /or is shown on the display and the clutch is subject to
a reverse gear can be selected when at a standstill. closed loop control when in stationary PTO mode
Gears cannot be selected during travel if PTOs are and when in stationary / mobile mobile, the clutch
still activated. Gear shifts can also not be undertaken is closed once the accelerator has been depressed.
during travel.
Product families 1+ 2: 3.1.7.2 Disengaging PTO

PTOs can be operated with just starting gears and just
reverse gear. The PTO can be disengaged both when the vehicle
is at a standstill and during travel with a gear selected
Product families 3 + 4: or in the Neutral position. If the PTO is disengaged
PTOs can only be operated via K1 (refer to power- during travel and with a gear selected, the load is
flow diagram, chapter 2.2). With direct drive trans- reduced before mechanical disengagement. A shift
missions, gears with GV can therefore only be select- inhibit is set at the same time. To disengage, the
ed in the low position, with overdrive transmissions, clutch is opened and the PTO mechanically discon-
gears with GV can only be selected in the high nected. The shift inhibit is then cancelled. When the
position. Therefore when in stationary / mobile mode ignition is switched off (terminal 15) during PTO
with a direct drive transmission (DD) and with the operations, the PTO is automatically disengaged.
PTO activated when at a standstill, the gears 1, 3, 5
(in the 16-speed version also 7 th gear) and RL
(reverse low) can therefore be selected and used to set 3.1.8 Ignition off
off. With overdrive transmissions (OD), the same
applies to gears 2, 4, 6 and RH (reverse high). If the ignition is switched off, or the voltage switched
via the ignition key falls (terminal 15) below a
defined threshold value, a check is undertaken to
3.1.7.1 Engaging PTO determine whether the transmission is in Neutral and
whether the clutch is closed. If this is not the case, the
The PTO request is activated by pressing the PTO transmission undertakes an enforced shift to Neutral
switch. The PTO selected must be disengaged at this and the clutch is closed. The clutch is opened for the
point. If a second PTO is fitted, it may only assume shift to Neutral. The clutch then closes at a defined
two statuses: ‘engaged’ or ‘disengaged’. If these speed. If while at a standstill the transmission cannot
conditions are satisfied, the PTO request is confirmed be shifted to Neutral, the clutch remains open. The
and the engagement procedure initiated. While the driver is informed acoustically of this malfunction.
PTO is being engaged, the TCU specifies fuel Once a defined delay period has passed, the battery
injection specification fill 0 % (= load reduction) to voltage (terminal 30) of the electronic control unit
the EDC. (TCU) is disconnected via the disengagement relay.
The TCU is only switched off when the vehicle is at a
The engagement procedure proceeds as follows: standstill.
1. If the GV is not in the K1 position, a shift is made

into K1 (only product families 3 + 4).
1328 765 101 3-9 2003-08

Special scenario: If the ignition is switched off

during travel, a shift to Neutral is not undertaken.
The gear selected remains selected, the clutch
remains closed. Only once the speed falls below a
defined threshold speed value does the clutch open
and the transmission shift to Neutral (enforced
neutral switch).
During the ignition off phase, error memory data and

driving mode information is saved from the volatile
memory area (RAM) into the non-volatile memory
area (EEPROM).
It is therefore important to ensure that the permanent
positive supply (terminal 30) is not switched off at
the same time as the switched positive supply but
remains on for a defined period (refer to Section
4.4.2.2.).
1328 765 101 3-10 2002-09

3 Description of function 3.2 Automatic drive program
When the ZF-AS Tronic automatic drive program The existing vehicle CAN signals are used to network
is installed, only accelerator and brake (service EDC (Electronic Diesel Control), ABS (Anti-lock-
brake and 3rd brake) actuation is needed to move Braking-System), ASC (Anti-Slip Control), Intarder
the vehicle. The transmission is fully automatically and transmission. It is therefore very easy to deter-
shifted by the transmission control unit. mine the necessary driving modes.
With the automatic drive program, customer benefits ☞ Detailed descriptions of the signals can if
come to the fore. A reduction in fuel consumption necessary be found in signal specification ZF
when compared with the average driver in long- no. 1328 761 005.
haulage transport and frequency of shifting together
with optimum gear selection are some of the key
features of this function. The program can also be
adapted to different vehicles and engines.
Exchange of signals:

! '
!

! (
) * (
)
"

"

#
$% + )"
&
! "

,-./0/
1328 765 101 3-11 2002-09

3.2.1 Activating the automatic drive program
The automatic drive program is activated by switch-

ing on the electrical system (ignition on), starting
the engine and selecting the forwards driving range.
Once the parking brake has been released and the
accelerator depressed, the vehicle moves, gear shifts
are undertaken fully automatically.
During travel, the range selector can be used to

switch between the manual and automatic drive
programs at any time.
☞ For more information, refer to Section 2.4

(peripheral components / range selector).
When the automatic drive program is activated, the

setting off gear is calculated (fully automatically) in
accordance with the setting off conditions (incline,
loading, etc.) and can if necessary be corrected by the
driver.
If the driver believes that the setting off gear, as

shown in the display, is too high, then the setting off
gear can be corrected (reduced) using the den range
selector.
☞ For more information, refer to Section 2.4,

range selector functions.
Corrections involving increasing the gear to preserve

the clutch are only possible up to a maximum defined
setting off gear (with 12-speed-transmissions, 5th
gear and with 16-speed-transmissions, 7th gear).
Even once the ignition has been switched off and

the vehicle started again, a setting off gear is auto-
matically selected.
1328 765 101 3-12 2002-09

3.2.3 Automatic gear change Other help functions include determining setting off
gear and ratio step calculation with determination of
An operating mode control unit controls (closed shift time. A prediction of power in the new gear and
loop) the transitions between various operating detection of engine governing are also available.
modes. This control unit detects driveline traction
mode or coasting mode from a large number of The figure (below) shows a simple upshift under
external and internal signals. Different processes are traction in engine performance characteristics by way
selected within traction and coasting mode depending of example. A target speed range in which the engine
on kick-down, with or without engine braking speed is to fall after the shift process is defined in
Intarder operations or cruise control operations. these characteristics. The target speed point is calcu-
Furthermore, the operating mode control unit decides lated from present vehicle acceleration and a drive
whether manual intervention is influencing the auto- resistance-dependent correction, in this instance an
matic drive strategy or whether a standstill shift is increase in speed. The final shift speed results from
present with the vehicle virtually at a standstill. the change in speed brought about by the relevant
ratio step and a supplementary value for increased
Numerous calculations, characteristics and character- drive resistance.
istics curve evaluations and interpolations are needed
for the different operating modes. Vehicle status para- If the shift speed exceeds the shift speed range, the
meters, such as present vehicle acceleration and the ratio change and/or gear selection has to be recalcu-
present traction or coasting torque are calculated in lated. The limit points in the upper speed range result
these help functions. The drive resistance and the from the accelerator position and acceleration of the
mass calculation are key influencing parameters for transmission input speed. The ratio step is therefore
determining the shift point. Other status parameters, determined via the shift speed calculation. This pro-
such as speed and the acceleration of the transmission cedure has proven itself in numerous applications in
shafts and an estimate of the vehicle mass when set- trucks, buses and cranes.
ting off, are used for a harmonic drive strategy.
Principle of upshifts under traction

*%
+
,
,
,
*

"
#$

(%

(
%

-
&
%

&%

&
' ( ) ' ( ((

!
018978
1328 765 101 3-13 2002-09

3.2.4 Deactivating the automatic drive program
The driver can use the range selector to end automatic

mode at any time and make manual interventions in
the automatic drive program. The driver is able to
retain the present gear or undertake manual upshifts
or downshifts. If downshifting would lead to over-
revving of the engine, the gearshift will be prevented.
If the gear is manually retained and the vehicle
accelerated, this can result in overrevving of the
engine. The engine protection function described
under 3.1.6.1 is not active in the manual driving
mode.
If an error occurs in the transmission system or in the

exchange of signals with other systems, the automatic
program may be deactivated depending on the error
found. This is, for example, the case if the mass
calculation can no longer be undertaken because an
important relevant signal is not longer transferred on
the CAN bus or if this error is incorrect.
In the standard application, the driver is informed of

restricted system functions by a display.
☞ For more information, refer to Section 2.4.3,

Displays.
NOTE
When operated manually using the range selector,
fuel consumption may if necessary increase depend-
ing on driver's manual gear selection.
The automatic setting off gear selection even also

retained in manual operations.
1328 765 101 3-14 2002-10

3 Description of function 3.3 Malfunction concept
3.3 ZF-AS Tronic malfunction concept The following were identified as safety-related
malfunctions as defined in VDI/ VDE 3542 Page 1
3.3.1 Principles in the risk analysis:
The ZF-AS Tronic is an automatic system, which • Automatic setting off

unlike conventional driveline components, takes on • Setting off in opposite direction of travel
all or some of the processes controlled by the driver. • Blocked driveline during travel
In some instances, responsibility for these processes
passes from the driver to the system. Errors which does not result in the aforementioned
In order to fully satisfy this level of responsibility, vehicle characteristics, affect the correct function of
the ZF-AS Tronic transmission system has been sub- the ZF-AS Tronic and therefore vehicle reliability
jected to a state-of-the-art technical system error and availability.
analysis.
The system responses to simple errors are described
in a malfunction specification written specifically
for the relevant application. Since the vehicle manu-
3.3.2 System analyses undertaken facturer is responsible for the interaction of all
systems integrated in the vehicle (also in the event
• Risk analysis as defined in DIN V 19250 of error), the error responses of the ZF-AS Tronic are
• Error tree analysis discussed and agreed upon with the manufacturer as
• System FMEA part of a vehicle integrations FMEA. During this
• Design FMEA process, vehicle-related errors which can act on the
• Integration FMEA ZF-AS Tronic are included in the analysis.
Previously defined vehicle responses (commonly During development of the system, up-to-date quality
referred to as TOP EVENTS) which take various assurance methods and tools have been and are being
driving modes into consideration formed the starting applied in accordance with state-of-the art knowledge
point for analyzing conceivable malfunctions result- and technology. The function and service life of the
ing from faults or errors occurring during correct mechanical and pneumatic components are designed
system usage. The risk analysis as defined in DIN accordingly and investigated through the use of tests.
V 19250 resulted in requirement class 4 for the ZF-
AS Tronic transmission system under unfavourable System checks are carried out before and during
circumstances. operations so that redundancies and error protection
systems are available if required. The avoidance of
The following were defined as safe nominal statuses safety-related malfunction is reliably reached in
to be aimed for in the event of an error, depending on individual instances. Attempts are made to achieve
the driving mode: maximum possible vehicle availability for these
individual instances when defining failure responses.
• “driveline closed” during travel Vehicle availability is not usually provided in
• “driveline open” with vehicle at a standstill instances of accidental multiple failure which cannot
be systematically covered by the system. In such
The electronic system must have at least partial instances, the system is switched into the aforemen-
function for these nominal statuses to be set. tioned nominal status. If it is no longer technically
If this is no longer the case, the system stabilizes in possible for the nominal status to be set, the last
the present operating mode (failsafe mode). system status is retained.
1328 765 101 3-15 2002-09

3 Description of function 3.3 System security
electrical Clutch actuator Control and

pneumatic Pressure MV4 display elements
relief
valve MV3
Range selector
Sensor
Vehicle supply
MV2 interfaces for
ZF-AS Tronic
MV1
Display
ZF
E module
Transmission actuator
Sensor
Pres-
Pressure sure
Range change group relief sensor ZF system CAN
Sensor valve
Splitter
ZF-AS Tronic
Sensor
transmission ABS / Intarder Engine
electronics ASC electronics
Selecting
Sensor
Y1 ➟ Y9
shift valves
Main transmission Main shut-off valve
Vehicle CAN
System diagram ZF-AS Tronic 2 014 876
3.3.3 Clutch actuator concept 3.3.5 Interface concept
The clutch actuator and corresponding software Great importance (in terms of security and
functions are designed so that individual errors do not availability) is assigned to the interfaces between
result in undesirable responses. The redundant valve ZF-AS Tronic and vehicle. In the event of errors /
system, travel measurement and pressure relief valve faults, error responses and protection measures in
enable a defined nominal status to be retained or set. the ZF-AS Tronic result in the nominal status being
retained and/or the nominal status being set. One
One conceivable exceptional situation: the clutch is precondition for this is that vehicle malfunctions
closed, the nominal status is “open driveline” and the which affect the transmission system must be clearly
air supply or voltage supply is interrupted. In this recognizable. In order to check and ensure this
instance, the driver has to shut down or stall the principle, a “vehicle integration FMEA” (☞ refer
engine. to Section 3.3.2 “System analyses carried out”) is
created with the vehicle manufacturers and corre-
sponding measures initiated if necessary.
3.3.4 Transmission control unit concept
The transmission control unit is designed so that at

least two valves always have to be switched to trigger
a shift (central air and shift valve). The positions of
the shift cylinders in the transmission actuator are
permanently monitored by a travel measuring system.
The design of the transmission control unit puts these
in a position where they are able to prevent undesirable
shift processes in the even of individual errors.
1328 765 101 3-16 2002-09

3 Description of function 3.3 System security
In addition to the safety-related malfunctions already

discussed, the following possible vehicle malfunc-
tions were analyzed and taken into consideration:
• vehicle not setting off (gear already shifted)

• driveline interrupted during travel
• acceleration not OK
• vehicle rolling away
(ruled out: conscious operating error)
• vehicle cannot stop
• undesirable gear selection or gear selected
with driver’s request for Neutral, allow for
• vehicle becoming stranded
1328 765 101 3-17 2002-09

3 Description of function 3.4 Error responses
3.4 Error responses Error class 1
If the ZF-AS Tronic detects system faults or Unrestricted operation available

errors, the system responds by providing substitute • No error display
functions. These are described in what are commonly
referred to as malfunction specifications. The errors • Entry in error memory
themselves are sub-divided into error classes 1 to 3 • Possibly reduced driving comfort
and entered into the ZF-AS Tronic error memory
once the ignition is switched off. The errors are • Error can be rectified during next visit to
shown on the display as agreed with the OEM. workshop
The error presently in place is usually deleted and

the resultant error response cancelled once the error Error class 2
is no longer in place or after “vehicle stop” and
“ignition off ” (reset, transmission electronic de- Restricted operation available
energized). The error numbers can be called up via • Error display (“Screwdriver” symbol)
the range selector, refer to Section 3.5 diagnosis.
• Entry in error memory
• Reduced driving comfort
Error class Displays • Possible deterioration in manoeuvring and setting
off quality
1 none • Possibly increased shift times
• Visit specialist workshop
2
Error class 3
3
No further operation available
• Error display (“STOP” and “Screwdriver”
symbol)
• Entry in error memory
• No further gear shifting during travel, the gear
selected is retained
• When the vehicle comes to a standstill, a shift is
made to Neutral, no further travel available
• Contact nearest specialist workshop
1328 765 101 3-18 2002-09

3 Description of function 3.5 Diagnosis
3.5 Diagnosis 3.5.3 Off-board diagnosis
3.5.1 Error memory ZF can provide the OEM with the following diagno-
sis tools for troubleshooting on the ZF-AS Tronic in
If the ZF-AS Tronic system has detected an error, an the workshop:
error response and/or substitute function is activated
and the error saved in the error memory (RAM). TESTMAN, ZF diagnosis system for PC applica-
During the ECU run-down (after “ignition off ”), the tions incl. ZF diagnosis adapter DPA 04 and connec-
error memory contents are copied into the non- tion cable with ISO and/or SAE connection;
volatile memory (EEPROM). ☞ For description, refer to type sheet 6008 757 103.
When the error first arises, not only the error number All the necessary, transmission-specific data for a
but various ambient conditions, such as speeds, rapid and comprehensive diagnosis can be called up
present function status, gear, operating hours, etc. using the ZF TESTMAN diagnosis system.
can also be saved. After this, only the frequency at
which the error arises is counted. The “diagnosis” function includes:
• reading present error;
Up to 10 different errors can be saved in the error • reading error memory;
memory. If the error memory is full, non-active errors • deleting error memory;
are overwritten. If an error no longer arises after a • reading identification block.
defined number of ECU resets, the error is deleted.
The “Test inputs and outputs” function includes:
• system test when at standstill;
• system test during travel;
3.5.2 On-board diagnosis (when using the ZF • test device (displays all digital inputs and outputs);
console-type range selector with separate • displaying digital and analogue parameters e.g.
E-module) speeds, current strengths and voltage levels.
If an error is in place, the error number can be called When undertaking specific troubleshooting, this
up on the display in the vehicle. Further vehicle device allows staff trained by ZF to rapidly find the
operations are not permitted in the instance of serious error in the transmission system. Once the error
system errors (stop + screwdriver). has been detected, the diagnosis system proposes
remedial measures. Communication occurs in the
In order to call up the present error number, depend- form of a serial interface. Each screen page can be
ing on the present application, the rotary switch is printed out or saved for error documentation. The
e.g. moved to the Neutral position and the control diagnosis software is available in all major languages.
lever held in the «+» direction.
If the service brake is pressed at the same time, Terminal tester
all errors saved in the error memory are displayed. A terminal tester, complete with adapter for 20
If the service brake is not pressed, only the errors and/or 18-pin plug connections is available for the
presently in place are displayed. electrical troubleshooting of input and output signals
of the vehicle interface to the ZF-AS Tronic.
1328 765 101 3-19 2003-08

3 Description of function 3.5 Diagnosis
OEM diagnosis tools

If the vehicle manufacturer has its own diagnosis
tools, these can be adapted to the ZF diagnosis
interface which is produced in accordance with
ISO 14230-1 (K line).
Alternatively, diagnosis can be communicated via

the driveline CAN (SAE J 1939).
Diagnosis communication via CAN accordance with
SAE J 1939 only covers the messages defined in this
standard and its function is not identical to diagnosis
communication via the K line.
Communication may occur via the following points:

• ISO 9141
• Key Word Protocol KWP 2000
• SAE J1939/73
1328 765 101 3-20 2002-09

4 Installation
4.1 Transmission installation investigation

4.1.2 PTO + emergency steering pump installation drawings
4.1.3 Input shafts
4.1.4 Clutch bell housing
4.1.5 Clutch
4.1.8 Suspension
4.1.9 Transmission installation angle
4.1.10 Propshaft connection
4.1.11 Torsional vibrations
4.1.12 Bending vibrations
4.1.13 Cover / protective floor panels
4.1.16 Accessibility
4.1.17 Additional guidelines for vehicle body manufacturer
4.1.18 Vehicle wiring
4.2 Temperatures
4.2.1 Permissible ambient temperatures on transmission
4.2.3 Causes of excess oil temperatures
4.2.4 Additional transmission cooling
4.3 Oil fill

4.3.1 Oil grade and oil change interval
4.3.2 Oil quantity
4.3.3 Draining oil
4.3.4 Filling oil
4.3.5 Oil level check
4.3.7 Information about bleeding the transmission
4.4 Electrics

4.4.4 CAN bus installation
4.4.5 Quality requirements of wiring
4.4.7 Other electrical interfaces on the ZF-AS Tronic
4.4.7.1 Neutral switch (S12)
4.4.8 CAN signals
4.4.9 EMC
4.5 Pneumatics
4.6 Auxiliaries
4.6.1 ZF-Intarder
4.6.3 ZF PTOs
4.7 Transmission installation on assembly belt

4.7.1 Transport
4.7.3 Anti-corrosive protection
4.7.5 Assembly of engine, clutch and transmission
4.8 Additional information

4.8.1 Operation
4.8.1.2 Setting off, forwards travel
4.8.1.3 Maneuvering
4.8.1.4 Moving off downhill
4.8.1.5 Changing operating mode: Manual / Automatic
4.8.1.7 Reverse travel
4.8.1.8 Engine brake
4.8.1.9 Stopping
4.8.1.10 Stopping engine / vehicle
4.8.1.11 Towing
4.8.1.13 Clutch protection
4.8.1.16 Roller test rig
4.8.1.17 System faults (error messages)

4.8.2 Maintenance
4.8.2.1 Visual inspection of wiring
4.9 Application and documentation

4.9.1 Application
4.9.2 ZF documentation
4.9.3 Type plate

4 Installation 4.1 Transmission installation investigation
4 Installation 4.1.3 Input shafts
4.1 Transmission installation investigation )

Trucks
• 12-speed product family 1 (SAE1)* 1336 600 007
• 12-speed product family 2 (SAE1)* 1336 600 003
• 12-speed product family 3
* +
without Intarder 1327 600 015 .
• 16-speed product family 3
without Intarder
12-speed product family 4
without Intarder 1328 600 015
• 12-speed product family 3 with Intarder
, -
(rear left heat exchanger) 1327 600 016
• 16-speed product family 3 with Intarder 019 424
12-speed product family 4 with Intarder

(rear left heat exchanger) 1328 600 016
The dimensions are as follows:
Buses
Dimen- Engine connection Engine connection
– 10-speed, with Intarder sion SAE 1 SAE 2
12-speed, with Intarder (product families 1- 4) (product families 1+ 2)
(rear right heat exchanger) 1327 600 007 A 109 109
B 31.75 31.75
C PF 3 + 4 PF 1 + 2 75
102.3 75
4.1.2 PTO + emergency steering pump
installation drawings ØD 25 f 7 25 f 7
ØE 50.3 50.3
• Product family 2 (SAE2) * F SAE 10 C 2“ SAE 10 C 2“
with N221 1336 600 004
• Product family 2 (SAE1)* Other input shafts can be supplied at additional cost.
with N221 1336 600 005
• Product families 3 + 4 with NAS/10 6091 610 003
• Product families 3 + 4 with NAS/PL 6091 615 007 4.1.4 Clutch bell housing
• Product families 3 + 4 with NH/1 6090 601 031
The ZF-AS Tronic has an integrated clutch bell
• Product families 3 + 4 with NH/4 6090 604 024 housing.
Transmissions of product families 1+ 2 can be
supplied with SAE1 or SAE2 engine connections,
* WARNING transmissions of product families 3 + 4 can only be
These installation drawings are of preseries status. supplied with a SAE1 engine connection (for connec-
New installation drawings (volume production status) tion dimensions, refer to installation drawing).
will be available from March 2004 onwards.
1328 765 101 4-1 2003-08

Fastening to flywheel housing The clutch is subject to stringent requirements

relating to clutch torque transfer characteristics and
• Use screws of a high strength class (8.8)
detection of release force to ensure that its interaction
• Calculation in accordance with VDI 2230 with the ZF-AS Tronic transmission control unit
functions correctly. In order to ensure optimum shift
• Use shims as defined in ISO 7089/7090
processes, the inertia torque of the clutch disc
• Observe specified tightening torque must furthermore not exceed a maximum value
M10 46 ± 5 Nm (refer to table).
M12 79 ± 8 Nm
☞ The clutch requirements are described in
• Note additional thermal load (e.g. by screw 10.9
specification 1328 761 053.
with tightening torque of screw 8.8)
☞ The clutch installation space is shown in installa-
CAUTION tion drawings 1328 600 019 (product families
Do not use toothed locking screws! 3 + 4) and 1336 600 006 (product families 1 + 2).
Secure with stud bolts Standard for clutch selection:

If the ZF-AS Tronic and /or ZF-AS Tronic mid is Product families 1+ 2 Product families 3 + 4
fastened to the flywheel housing via threaded pins SAE1 SAE 2 SAE 1
attached at the engine end, the stud bolts must not Clutch type ø 430 pulled ø 395 pulled ø 430 pulled
Max. inertia torque 0.119 kgm2 0.082 kgm2 0.145 kgm2
protrude by more than 62 mm.
Reason: if they protrude any more, it is very difficult
to disassemble the transmission actuator for service Deviations from the standard (e.g. applications with
work. In extreme instances, the transmission then has 2-disc clutches, other clutch diameters) must be
to be removed for such work. agreed with ZF.
Since the clutch is actuated via the ZF-AS Tronic

transmission control unit, the service life of the
4.1.5 Clutch linings is higher than that experienced in average
applications with manual transmissions.
The clutch, as a link between the engine and
ZF-AS Tronic transmission system has to satisfy the The reasons for this are:
following functions: • Always optimum engine speed during setting off
• To ensure gear shifts and setting off processes in processes => less friction work in clutch
conjunction with the ZF-AS Tronic transmission • The transmission control unit controls upshifts
control unit in all driving situations. so that there is only a small difference in speed
• To reduce vibrations in the driveline between the engine and transmission when
engaging the clutch => less friction work
• To ensure a high number of shifts with a long
service life • During downshifts, the transmission is
synchronized by the engine => no friction work
Only torsion-dampened clutches and pulled clutches
approved by ZF for the relevant engine-transmission
combination may be used for this purpose.
1328 765 101 4-2 2003-08

ZF-AS Tronic and ZF-AS Tronic mid are supplied with To design the push rod, ZF needs the dimensions
release bearings as standard. The OEM therefore no (A, X, Y and Z) and tolerances shown in Fig. 1.
longer needs the clutch actuator on the assembly line. These are acquired in the customer specification.
The snap ring on the release bearing is the trans-
mission’s interface to the clutch.
☞ Clutch installation is described in Section 4.7.5.
A Y
X
Approx. 34 mm max. stroke

of release bearing
“A” engine connection dimension

Housing flywheel disc
“X” release + tolerance
Z
“Y” wear + tolerance
“Z” installation dimension
Clutch
Length of push rod

is configured by ZF
Max. stroke
Clutch actuator
70
Fig. 1 Clutch installation

019 500
1328 765 101 4-3 2003-08


Engine housing Magnetic stands
To ensure a perfect function of the “engine / trans-
mission” combination,
Flywheel
• the centre of the pilot bearing (usually the centre
of the crankshaft) in relation to the centre of the
transmission input shaft Crank-
and shaft
• the connection face on the engine

may only deviate from the geometrically ideal
position within certain limits. Dial gauge A
The following tolerances relating to the crankshaft

axes are permitted: 016 855
• 0.1 mm concentricity tolerance A for the

crankshaft bore (for the roller bearing which
guides the transmission input shaft)
Engine housing Dial gauge B
• 0.2 mm concentricity tolerance B for the
centring bore (for supporting the transmissions)
in the flywheel housing
• 0.1 mm run-out tolerance C for transmission
connection face on flywheel housing.
Crank-
Flywheel
We would also like to point out the dimensions and shaft
tolerances defined in ISO 7649.
Magnetic stands
Pilot bearing
A ball bearing which is sealed on both sides and

supplied with lifetime lubrication is needed to 016 856
permanently guide the transmission input shaft.

The seal material must be resistant to temperatures
of between – 40 and +150 °C. The roller bearing
grease must also be resistant to temperatures of Dial gauge C
between – 40 and +150 °C. Resistance to corrosion Engine housing
is also essential for the sealing material.
Flywheel
Crank-
shaft
Magnetic stands
016 857
1328 765 101 4-4 2000-09

4.1.8 Suspension ZF proposal for suspension
Only the screw surfaces on the transmission housing Fig. 3: Transmission flange-mounted on engine
and/or on the attachment unit intended for the
purpose may be used for the transmission suspension. E
Housing material GD-AlSi9Cu3 is defined as the key
strength values for the screw configuration, material
F270 and surface treatment Fe/Zn6B DIN 50961 are A B
defined for versions with threaded bushes.
Following discussions with ZF, transmission bearings

on the vehicle frame must be designed so that no
Suspension at A + B (on both sides)
additional forces are transferred to the transmission
Additional suspension point E only in special
housing by vehicle frame distortions.
variants.
Connection dimensions for the transmission sus-
pension, transmission weight and the position of C E
the centre of gravity are specified in the relevant
installation drawing. A
The screws used for the transmission suspension

must correspond to quality 8.8. The specified 014877
tightening torque must be calculated in accordance

with VDI 2230 for suspension points C and E. Suspension at A + C (on both sides)
The additional use of screw locking devices is not Approval needed.
permitted. Additional suspension point E available but –
even with ZF auxiliaries – not necessary.
The additional suspension E is only needed if the
corresponding measurements, calculations or tests NOTES
indicate a critical vibration influence or extreme • Other threaded bores are not permitted as
shock impacts. It should however be noted that when suspension points on the ZF-AS Tronic.
rubber bearing E is in the datum position, no forces • Minimum screw-in depth of 32 mm for screw
are transferred and the rigidity of E is less than that connections in housing material, minimum screw-
of bearing A + C and/or A + B. If suspension point E in depth of 24 mm for screw connections in
is needed, all 3 threads should be used (for screw-in threaded bushes.
depth, refer to EBZ). • Maximum permissible vertical loading ± 3 g on
point E. Otherwise support needed for E.
ZF recommendation for suspension on point E
(shown PF 3+4, PF 1+2 only 2 attachment points)
SAE1 engine connection (product families 1 - 4)
! DANGER
The bending torque MC of the bearing
supports on mounting face C must not exceed
Continuous the limit value of 1900 Nm.
support
For calculation of MC , refer to Fig. 6
SAE2 engine connection (product families 1 + 2)

The design department must be connected if attach-
ing to point C.
018902
If connection deviates from the ZF proposals in
Fig. 3, ZF MUST be contacted.
1328 765 101 4-5 2003-08

Rough calculation for suspension at C
Clutch housing SAE 1

C (AS Tronic and AS Tronic mid)
SM
A
016999
a
C
b
c
Fc Fc
l l
Fig. 4
2 2
016998
Clutch housing SAE 2

(only AS Tronic mid
40 +- 20
017000
Fc Fc
l l
Fc 2 2
2 019462
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
l • (mM • a + mG • c) • g
MC = b•2
The central position of the screw connection on the
frame and the screw connection on the transmission
may have a max. offset of 20 mm (Fig. 5). mG = mass of transmission with all accessories oil +
water fill, propshaft, clutch release device
mM = mass of engine with all accessories oil + water,
clutch
g = 9.81 ms
2
1328 765 101 4-6 2003-08

4.1.9 Transmission installation angle Greater gradients may only be travelled briefly.
The longitudinal transmission inclination must F should be contacted if the vehicle application is
not exceed 5°. The ZF-AS Tronic can endure a total associated with frequently occurring, greater
inclination (vehicle inclination incl. transmission gradients and with other transmission combinations.
inclination) of 17° without any damage.
This corresponds to a gradient of: The transmission installation angle (transverse)
• 21 % at 5° transmission inclination may be up to 3°. ZF should be contacted if this value
• 30 % at 0° transmission inclination is exceeded.
Installation angle Gradient % (longitudinal) Camber

(longitudinal) Uphill Downhill of road
incline incline Time (transverse)
30 % 30 % permanently
0°
Rear 50 % 50 % ≤ 1 min
installation
(bus) 21 % 40 % permanently 10 %
up to 5°
40 % 60 % ≤ 1 min (20 % with
longitudinal
30 % 30 % permanently gradient of
0°
Front 50 % 50 % ≤ 1 min 0 %)
installation
(truck) 40 % 21 % permanently
up to 5°
60 % 40 % ≤ 1 min
1328 765 101 4-7 2002-09

4.1.10 Propshaft connection Limit values are displayed for the permissible
deflection angles in the following sub-sections.
A propshaft may be the cause of torsional and If these are observed, the vibration amplitudes
bending vibrations in the driveline. created by the propshaft will not exceed the above
The following values should therefore be observed. value.
The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for doing
this. The limit values for the deflection angle are used in
Exceptions from the specified values must be particular if there are no calculations or measurement
approved on a case-by-case basis. of the vibration amplitudes.
Permissible uniformity of rotation Permissible resultant deflection angle per joint
The maximum permissible angle acceleration The resultant angle βR must first be determined for
amplitudes (∆ε) in the driveline are 1500 rad/s 2. spatial propshaft layouts:
Smaller values do not cause vibration damage.
tan βR = √ tan2 βH + tan2 βV
Rotary acceleration in the driveline can be checked by
means of calculation or measurement. Alternatively, with βH deflection angle in horizontal view
the rotary angle error (∆α, Fig. 7) can be used. (outline view level),
Fig. 7 with βV deflection angle in vertical view

∆α
Rotary (elevation view level).
angle error
0.2
∆α Here, the deflection angle β is defined as the angle
+0.1
between the rotary axles in front of and behind joint
0 in the relevant level.
0.1
0.2
1 revolution S 0013
For link between ∆α and ∆ε, see Fig. 8: β

007927
∆εεperm. ≤ 1500 rad = ∆α [°] • n [1/min ]
2 2
s 2 1306
As a rough estimate, the angle βR can also be

1.8
Rotary angle ∆α
determined from the diagram in Fig. 9.

1.6 ∆α
1.4
1 revolution
1.2
1.0 Limit curve for measurements

0.8
εperm. ≤ 1500 rad
s2
0.6
0.4
0.2
S 0014
1000 2000 3000
Propshaft speed n (rpm)
Fig. 8
1328 765 101 4-8 2002-09

25˚
20°
Deflection angleββRR
βR
18°
Beugewinkel
20˚ 30˚
16°
14°
25˚ Standard range
Standard-Baureihe
12° max. 7° bei Nebenabtrieb
Max. 7° with PTO
15˚ 10°
20˚ Flange Ø150
Flansch-Ø 150
13˚ 8°
6°
10˚ Flansch-Ø
Flange Ø165/180/225
165/180/225
15˚ βR 4°
2°
10˚ 0°
5˚ 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
Propshaft speed
Gelenkwellendrehzahl n (rpm)
n (1/min)
5˚
βV
Fig. 10 Permissible propshaft deflection angle βR

0˚
5˚ 9˚ 10˚
βH 15˚ 20˚
25˚
001 100 Permissible resultant deflection angle for all joints
Fig. 9 Resultant deflection angle βR for spatial
The resultant deflection angle βE is determined from
propshaft arrangement
the resultant angles of the individual joints with the
following formula:
Examples of calculations:
βE = √  ± βR12 ± βR22 ± βR32 ± . . . 
Outline view level Elevation view level
The following applies as the prefix rule for the indi-
vidual angles β:
ßV=13° ßH = 9°
+ if the spider is
90°
vertical to
S 0012 input output
output fork
tan βR = √ 0.16 2 + 0.23 2 = 0.28 βR = 15.6°
– if the spider is
90°
vertical to
In accordance with diagram: βR ≈ 15° input output
input fork
S 0010
The reliability of βR depends on the type, size and

Limit value: ßE < 3°
speed of the propshaft, refer to Fig. 10.
CAUTION
Propshaft calculation programs (graphic
For PTOs, the permissible spatial deflection
depictions) can be ordered from the ZF After-
angle βR must not exceed 7°.
Sales Service by specifying the following
numbers: CD-ROM (0000 766 707),
diskette (0000 766 708).
Basis: Windows 3.11, 95, 98, NT
1328 765 101 4-9 1999-12

Z-arrangement W-arrangement Angle Resultant

error deflection angle
∆β = β1 – β2 βE = √  – β12 + β22 
Example 1
ß1 =12° ß1 =12°
(exact Z
ß2 = 12° ß2 = 12°
and/or W
0° 0°
arrange-
ment)
Example 2
(small ß1= 5° ß1= 5°
deflection
angle with ß2 = 4° ß2 = 4° 1° 3°
angle error)
Example 3
ß1 = 15° ß1 = 15°
(large
ß2 = 14° ß2 = 14°
deflection 1° 5.4°
angle with
angle error)
S 0011
Example 3 shows that with larger deflection angles, even an angle error of 1° results in excessively high joint deflection angles.
Fig. 11 Application examples for the influence of the deflection angle

parameters β 1 and β 2 on the resultant deflection angle β E
1328 765 101 4-10 1999-12

Simple configurations Multiple arrangements
The axles should be mounted appropriately for all By selecting an appropriate spider position and
vehicle load statuses so that a precise propshaft Z varying the height of the intermediate bearing
configuration (β1 = β2) can be achieved. (β-angle distribution), the propshaft can often be
optimised with multiple arrangements.
ß1 Fig. 13. shows one example.

Trans- ß2 Axle
mission
S 0015
Information on this subject can be seen in Fig. 12.
Leaf spring suspension results from unfavourable Unfavourable arrangement

Z arrangements caused by parallel axle arrange-
ments. βE = √  – β12 + β22 – β32  = (13.6°)
Condition β1 = β2 is maintained to some extent
even when the suspension bottoms out.
ß1 =9.5°
h
ß1 ß2 =5° Axle
Spring stroke
ß2
Laden
Transmission
Empty ß 3 =11°
S 0017
Axle movement
S 0016
An oscillating axle result from unfavourable Optimized arrangement

Z arrangements caused by axle oscillation move- (by changing the spider position)
ments.
Condition β1 = β2 is only satisfied in the central βE = √  – β12 – β22 + β32  = (2.4°)
position. When the suspension bottoms out, these
angles cease to be the same.
ß1 =9.5°
h
ß2 =5° Axle
ß1
ß2 Transmission
Oscillation stroke ß3 =11°
S 0017
Laden
Central position
-0+ Fig. 13 Optimization of propshaft drive by changing
Axle movement S 0016
spider position
Fig. 12 Influence of axle alignment on propshaft

defection angle
1328 765 101 4-11 1999-12

More information 4.1.11 Torsional vibrations
– Balancing: The propshaft must be dynamically The configuration and co-ordination of the driveline
balanced using quality level as defined in VDI should be such that no resonance points arise in the
Guideline 2060 (Fig. 14). operating speed range.
Permissible vibrations on transmission input

(input shaft)
250
Permissible residual imbalance
per balancing body mass [gmm/kg]
S 0018
200 Vollastkurve
Full load curve
TMot.
150 +15%
100% +15%
100
zulässige
Permissible
80
Schwingungs-
peak
Q
überhöhungen
16
vibrations
60
40
30
300 500 700 900 1500 3000 4000
0
Propshaft speed n (rpm) nMot.
Fig. 14 Balancing quality Q 16

in accordance with VDI Guideline 2060 4.1.12 Bending vibrations
Vertical vibrations caused by irregularities in the

road surface
– Permissible concentricity and run-out errors
of connection flange: The supports we recommend guarantee the following
vibration resistance:
Concentricity and run-out Centring
deviation (mm) fit • Permanent loading: ± 5 g (< 30 Hz)
• Max. peak loading: ± 7 g (< 30 Hz)
0.06 h7
Bending vibrations caused by propshaft

– Lubrication: and/or engine
The propshaft manufacturer’s specifications should
be observed for lubrication. The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for
The sliding piece must move easily under load. configuration and co-ordination.
– Uniformity of rotation: In order to prevent bending vibrations being

Permissible amplitude of rotary angle acceleration caused by the propshaft, the maximum length should
(ε) on input shaft and on output be limited to 1500 mm. With lengths > 1500 mm,
the propshaft manufacturer should undertake a
ε perm. ≤ 1500 rad
s2 calculation and submit this to ZF.
1328 765 101 4-12 2000-09

4.1.13 Cover / protective floor panels 4.1.16 Accessibility
Appropriate cover plates should be fitted for The following parts of the ZF-AS Tronic ( refer to
applications in which there is a risk of transmission Figure 016859) must be accessible for identification,
damage caused by e.g. deposits and increased dirt test, maintenance and repair purposes.
levels brought about by snow, salt water, dust and
• Type plates of the ZF E module ( refer to
water.
drawing 6041 622 023), transmission actuator and
The vehicle and vehicle body manufacturers should
transmission ( refer to installation drawing)
also ensure that all uppermost plug connections are
protected from damage (e.g. protective floor panels). • Oil filler plug, oil drain plug and overflow
measurement ( refer to installation drawing)
• Compressed air connection at least 40 mm
clearance (for all connections)
• Plug disassembly on transmission actuator 24 mm
No screw connections on the ZF-AS Tronic may be clearance.
subsequently released to fit additional brackets. At least 110 mm vertical clearance should also
be provided for removing and installing the
transmission actuator ( refer to installation
drawing).
• Plug disassembly on ZF E module 220 mm
clearance ( refer to drawing 6041 622 023)
CAUTION
The ZF-AS Tronic has no fording ability as • Vehicle end diagnosis connector (assembly
standard. position defined by OEM); clearance at least
80 mm (Testman connection)
• Both speedo sensors
• All connecting plugs
In order to be able to only remove the transmission
*
*Please keep the transmission
Bitte für Servicezwecke
actuator’s removal
den Aus/Einbauraum 12
/des * Please in case of any service
activities, we need de/installation (without the engine), at least 150 mm clearance is
installation area clear for space for the transmission actuator
Getriebestellers freihalten
service purposes needed to the rear ( refer to Figure 016859).
50*
110*
150*
150 *
016859
1328 765 101 4-13 2002-09

4.1.17 Additional guidelines for vehicle body 4.1.18 Vehicle wiring

manufacturer ( Note TKI 6029 705 003 vehicle wiring)
The reciprocal dependencies of the vehicle • Do not bend the cables.

electronics must not be destroyed by modified cable
• Observe temperature range (refer to ambient
routing (refer to system design).
temperature section).
If fundamental changes are undertaken to the
installation and these affect the ZF-AS Tronic, • Do not secure to water, oil or pressure lines.
ZF installation approval ceases to apply.
• Wiring must not be tightened hard.
• Avoid relative movements (chafing) between
No other consumers may be connected on the wiring and surroundings e.g. vehicle frame.
pneumatic supply line to the ZF-AS Tronic after the
• The distance between the wiring and generator
pressure relief valve.
must be at least 200 mm.
The following should be noted in particular by • Note possible EMC faults. Do not route cable near
vehicle body manufacturers HF lines
Section 4.4 Electrics, • Do not connect ground / earth cables to trans-
TKI 6029 705 003 Vehicle wiring, mission.
TKI 1328 761 011 Transmission actuator
• When undertaking arc welding on the vehicle,
Section 4.5 Pneumatics ensure that current does not flow through the
transmission and associated electronics.
• The wiring must not be affected by work under-
taken on the vehicle.
• Wiring between the transmission actuator and
vehicle must be secured to the transmission max.
200 mm downstream of the 20(18)-pin plug
connection.
Once work near the lines has been completed, they
should be checked for damage and plugs checked to
ensure that they are fitted correctly. This also applies
to the pneumatic lines, oil lines and water lines
(e.g. with Intarder).
1328 765 101 4-14 2002-09

4 Installation 4.2 Temperatures
4.2 Temperatures • For special vehicles (cranes, fire service vehicles

etc.), we also recommend temperature measuring
Temperature measuring runs are required for runs. The same permissible temperatures as those
approval for all ZF-AS Tronic applications. for normal commercial vehicle applications apply.
During these runs, the temperatures gained
• The permissible temperatures specified in the
• on rising gradients manual apply for transmissions with ZF-
• on downward gradients Intarders.
• at max. speed (bus application)
• once the vehicle is parked
4.2.3 Causes of excessive oil temperatures
should in particular be recorded.
The following points may cause the permissible
The customer must use these measurement runs to temperatures to be exceeded:
prove that
• encapsulated and noise-insulated transmission
• the max. ambient temperature installation
(on the transmission actuator)
• insufficient distance between exhaust /
• the temperature in the transmission actuator and turbocharger and transmission
• the permissible permanent temperature • air cannot be exchanged with the transmission
are below the limits specified here. surroundings (measures on vehicle)
Measures for reducing temperature must also be • influence of heat from fitting third party retarder
initiated. • very high and/or very low roadspeed
• oil level too high
• PTO operations with vehicle at standstill
4.2.1 Permissible ambient temperatures on
transmission
The following measures are required:
Max. ambient temperature: 95 °C
(at distance of 50 mm from transmission) • Distance between exhaust, water pipes and other
sources of heat and transmission: min. 100 mm
This temperature is measured near the transmission • Fit baffle plate to vehicle
actuator cover.
The permissible permanent temperature –

measured in the transmission oil sump – is 110 °C
for commercial vehicle applications. Brief (max.
30 min.) temperature peaks of up to 130 °C are
permitted. In total, these peak values may make up
max. 10 % of the oil change interval.
1328 765 101 4-15 2002-10

4 Installation 4.2 Temperatures
4.2.4 Additional transmission cooling When connecting up a heat exchanger (WT),

the following should be noted:
If the permanent temperature in the oil sump is still
above 110 °C, additional cooling is needed. Product families 3 + 4:
This always applies when used in There must be by-pass line (by-pass valve, 0.5 bar)
upstream of the heat exchanger between the WT
• heavy-duty transporters
inlet and WT outlet ends. The transmission must be
• areas with outside temperatures above 40 °C operated while the heat exchanger is not connected
up.
Connecting up a heat exchanger Product families 1+ 2:

The transmission can be fitted with an integrated heat
The ZF-AS Tronic has the connections needed for a exchanger and therefore does not need an external
heat exchanger. by-pass valve.
refer to installation drawing in Section 4.1.1 Chap. 4.3 and the relevant installation drawings
should be noted with regard to filling oil and the
oil level check in conjunction with a heat
exchanger.
Outside temperature down to – 20 °C – 20 °C to – 30 °C – 30 °C to – 40 °C

Oil grade in accordance with ZF-List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
Engine start Permitted Permitted Transmission must be
preheated before the engine is
started
When starting, note – Warm-up phase of at least Preheating e.g. with warm air.
10 minutes, with increased This must not exceed +130 °C
idling speed of approx. on the transmission.
1500 rpm CAUTION
Transmission in Neutral Do not preheat on trans-
mission or clutch actuator.
Limitations None At transmission temperatures At transmission temperatures
in excess of – 20 °C, the trans- in excess of – 20 °C, the trans-
mission is operable and all mission is operable and all
functions are provided. Longer functions are provided. Longer
shift times should be expected. shift times should be expected.
The transmissions may be stored at temperatures of

between – 40 °C and 80 °C. Standard anti-corrosive
protection lasts 6 months.
1328 765 101 4-16 2003-08

4 Installation 4.3 Filling oil
4.3 Filling oil 4.3.3 Draining oil
4.3.1 Oil grade and oil change interval Always change the oil after a long journey while the
transmission oil is still at operating temperature and
The ZF-AS Tronic transmission is supplied with an thin.
oil fill as standard.
! DANGER !
The oil change intervals are co-ordinated to the Touching hot parts and transmission oil may
relevant oil qualities (refer to TE-ML 02). cause burns.
Approved oils and the oil change intervals Remove oil drain plugs from transmission and
gained with them can be found in the most recent collect transmission oil in a suitable container and
version of List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 dispose of in accordance with environmental
(ZF no. 1205 754 102). regulations.
Only product families 3 + 4: clean oil drain plug
and magnetic plug.
4.3.2 Oil quantity
Replace oil drain plug seal ring.
Correctly filling the oil is essential to the precise oil Tighten oil drain plugs to 60 Nm.
volume when changing oil (refer to Chapter 4.3.4).
The volumes given here are only guidelines. The transmissions of the AS Tronic families have one
or more oil drain plugs, depending on the version.
Transmission Oil change Initial filling by OEM
or after repairs
The position of these plugs can be seen in the
(in liters) (in liters)
relevant installation drawing (Chapter 4.1) and
Product family 1 approx. 6.5 approx. 6.5 the technical manual for the Intarder (ZF no.
Product family 2 approx. 7 approx. 7 6085 765 104).
Product family 3 approx. approx.
12-speed 11 / 12* 11 / 21*
4.3.4 Filling oil
16-speed 12 / 13* 12 / 23*
Top up oil through oil fill aperture.
12-speed 12.5 / 13.5 12.5 / 23.5* The oil level is correct once it has reached the
lower edge of the oil fill aperture, and /or if oil is
Bus approx. approx.
already escaping from the oil fill aperture.
10 and 12-speed 11 / 12* 11 / 21*
* with Intarder The position of oil fill apertures and the oil fill
plugs can be seen in the relevant installation
When a PTO is fitted, the oil quantity in the trans- drawing (Chapter 4.1) and the technical manual
mission increases. for the Intarder (ZF no. 6085 765 104).
Reference is made to the oil volumes required in

the installation drawings, the technical manual
for the Intarder (ZF no. 6085 765 104) and the
type sheets for PTOs (ZF no. 1328 757 151 and
1336 757 151).
1328 765 101 4-17 2003-08

4 Installation 4.3 Filling oil
4.3.5 Oil level check 4.3.7 Information regarding transmission venting
! DANGER ! The transmission is fitted with a vent on the trans-

Too little oil in the transmission will cause mission actuator as standard. The vent should be
transmission damage. protected from the ingress of large amounts of water.
RISK OF ACCIDENT ! The vent must be clean and provided without plastic
cover. In special applications, such as off-road vehi-
cles, refuse collecting vehicles, milk collecting vehi-
Check the transmission oil level at regular intervals: cles, which are frequently cleaned using a jet of
water, moisture or moist air may be drawn into the
Check oil level when vehicle is on horizontal
vent as a result of sudden transmission cooling, caus-
ground.
ing condensation to form inside the transmission.
Do not check oil level straight after travel Coaches in which the transmission is located in the
(incorrect measurement). Only check once the surface water spray zone from the rear wheels may
transmission oil has cooled down (< 40 °C). also be affected by this. Since the proportion of water
in the transmission oil must not exceed 1000 ppm,
Remove oil fill plug.
rather than the standard vent, ZF supplies a hose-type
If the oil level has fallen below the oil fill aperture, vent as a retrofitting kit in the vehicle’s dry compart-
the oil must be topped up (in accordance with ment. This available from ZF-Service by quoting ZF
Section 4.3.4). number 1315 298 021.
Tighten oil fill plug to 60 Nm.
NOTE
Wherever checking the oil level, also inspect the
transmission for leaks.
Even if reference is made here and in the aforemen-

tioned documents to particular volumes, ensure that
the oil level is correct on the transmission itself. To
do this, one of the oil fill apertures in the horizontal
vehicle must be filled with oil until the level has
reached the lower edge of the fill aperture and/or
oil is escaping from this fill aperture. For Intarder
applications and applications with heat exchangers,
please note that the the oil is only filled fully once the
vehicle has been moved and a second filling process
is reached ( refer to technical manual for Intarder
ZF no. 6085 765 104).
1328 765 101 4-18 2003-08

4 Installation 4.4 Electrics
4.4 Electrics
The system layout contains a graphic depic- Display Range selector

tion of the arrangement and networking of all
Additional interfaces for
the electronic components which are needed ZF-AS Tronic
for the ZF-AS Tronic transmission systems
function.
In the standard system layout, this not only

includes the ZF-AS Tronic electronics, the
Serial line
electronics of the engine (or vehicle), ABS ZF E module
and Intarder but also the display and range
selector with ZF E module. Communication ZF-CAN
between the electronics only takes place via
the vehicle driveline CAN as defined in
Engine Electron-
standard SAE J 1939 (other transfer protocols ZF-AS Tronic electron- ABS ics ZF
on request). The ZF-AS Tronic communicates ics Intarder
with the ZF E module via another CAN inter-
face (ZF CAN). The ZF display is activated by
a serial data line. Vehicle driveline CAN
• Voltage supply
If the vehicle is fitted with an onboard • Diagnosis
• Speedo signal 014 879
vehicle computer, this can send signals from/
to range selector, display, PTOs, R gear relay,
etc. via the vehicle driveline CAN to the Fig. 15 with ZF E module
ZF-AS Tronic so that the ZF E module is no
longer needed (Fig. 16). Dashboard Range selector Additional interfaces for
ZF-AS Tronic
The circuit diagram is the electrical wiring
diagram for the ZF components in the system
layout. It is used to establish the wiring and
the connectors of the ZF components are also
depicted for this purpose.
OEM bus
Vehicle Engine
If the wiring for connecting ZF components electron-
to the transfer connector (vehicle supply Onboard computer ics
connector in E box) is supplied by ZF, then
Vehicle driveline CAN
ZF also draws up a connection diagram.
Engine Electron-
ZF-AS Tronic electron- ABS ics ZF
ics Intarder
• Voltage supply
• Diagnosis
• Speedo signal
014 880
Fig. 16 with onboard computer
1328 765 101 4-19 2003-08

The standard circuit diagrams and connection

diagrams are:
20-pin:
18-pin:
6029 713 016 Circuit diagram with ZF E module
6029 713 082 Circuit diagram with ZF E-module
6029 713 021 Wiring diagram CAN central
6029 713 083 Wiring diagram CAN end consumer
consumer
6029 713 084 Wiring diagram CAN central
6029 713 022 Wiring diagram CAN end consumer
consumer
6029 713 025 Circuit diagram with onboard
computer
Wiring diagrams for other range selectors

6029 713 087 Circuit diagram ZF-console-type
range selector with integrated
E-module
Wiring to the clutch actuator and output speed sensor This wiring falls within the scope of supply.
is connected to the transmission end transmission
actuator connector.
Pin Pin Name Explanation

20-pin 18-pin
6 6 VMGA2 Analogue ground / earth sensor supply: for output speed sensor
7 7 ADS1 Solenoid valve activation for clutch actuation: slow closing
8 8 ADS3 Solenoid valve activation for clutch actuation: fast closing
9 9 ADS2 Solenoid valve activation for clutch actuation: slow opening
10 10 EU1 Clutch position as analogue voltage 0 … 5 V
11 11 EF Speed signal from transmission output (voltage supply 24 V)
12 12 ADS4 Solenoid valve activation for clutch actuation: fast opening
15 15 AU Voltage supply for clutch position 5 V
16 16 VM1 Ground / earth supply for solenoid valves
17 17 VM2 Ground / earth supply for solenoid valves
18 18 ADVP Supply voltage for output speed sensor*
20 2 VGMA1 Analogue ground / earth sensor supply: for output speed sensor
* This output is electrically connected to the ADVP1 output (vehicle supply connector to vehicle)
1328 765 101 4-20 2003-08

The vehicle end connector on the transmission option, ZF can also supply a connection cable from
actuator represents the connection to the vehicle this connector into the vehicle’s dry compartment.
power supply. The mating connector needed is shown The requirement and purpose of the individual lines
in the connector overview in Section 4.4.6. As an are explained in more detail per pin.

20-pin 18-pin
1 1 VPI voltage supply, term. 15, 24 volt (ignition lock)
(supply for computer core and communication interfaces)
Fuse, at least 3 Amperes, maximum 10 Amperes
2 2 SDDK serial interface for communication in accordance with ISO/DIS 14230
Connection for ZF diagnosis tester.
3 3 CANF2-H ZF’s own CAN interface (CAN high signal), line colour: red,
interface between transmission electronics and ZF components.
4 4 VPE1 voltage supply, term. 30, + 24 volt, (permanent positive)
(supply for computer core and communication interfaces and digital outputs).
Once the ignition, term. 15, has been switched off, the electronics are
supplied via this pin for a brief overrun period.
During this period, any error present are written into the memory and/or the
transmission is transferred into a defined status. Once the ignition is OFF,
permanent positive (term. 30) must be retained for at least 8s to ensure the
aforementioned functions. Fuse 10 Amperes.
5 5 VPE2 redundant supply connection (refer to VPE1, pin 4)
6 6 CANF2-L ZF’s own CAN interface (CAN low signal), line colour: black,
interface between transmission electronics and ZF components.
7 7 SDEF input frequency signal.
Redundant recording of output speed by tachograph.
8 8 CANF1-H vehicle and/or system CAN interface (CAN high), line colour: yellow,
interface between transmission electronics and vehicle electronics
(e.g. EDC, ABS ASC, Intarder etc.)
Communication interface in accordance with SAE J1939 and/or ISO 11898
9 9 SD serial communication interface for connection of electronic components
such as ZF display
10 10 SDP serial communication interface with power output stage (500 mA).
11 11 ADVP1 digital output, 24 volt, to supply ZF components such as display,
warning buzzer and / or warning lamp.
Trigger output for ZF E module (wake up function).
Output remains switched on after ignition “OFF” incl. overrun period
of transmission electronics so that system functions remain active
(e.g. ZF E module, warning, display and diagnosis functions);
I max. consumption: 390 mA
This output is electrically connected to the ADVP output, transmission end
connector.
12 12 CANF1-L vehicle and/or system CAN interface (CAN low), line colour: green,
interface between transmission electronics and vehicle electronics
(e.g. EDC, ABS, ASC, Intarder etc.)
Communication interface in accordance with SAE J1939 and/or ISO 11898
1328 765 101 4-21 2002-09


20-pin 18-pin
13 13 CANF1-L+ 2nd connection point for vehicle and/or system CAN interface (CAN low).
Allows for simple contact as central and/or end consumer.
CANF1-L is bridged with CANF1-L+ on printed circuit.
For more detailed description, refer to CANF1-L. line colour: green.
14 14 CANF1-H+ 2nd connection point for vehicle and/or System CAN interface (CAN high).
CANF1-H is bridged with CANF1-H+ on printed circuit.
Allows for simple contact as central and/or end consumer.
For more detailed description, refer to CANF1-H. line colour: yellow.
15 15 CANF1-T for configuration of CAN end consumers.
This pin is bridged (open end output resistance) for end consumer
configuration with CANF1-L+.
16 16 VM1 ground / earth supply 1 (route VM1 and VM2 with separate line routing on
vehicle ground / earth star point)
17 17 VM2 ground / earth supply 1 (route VM1 and VM2 with separate line routing on
vehicle ground/earth star point)
18 18 VMHF1 connection option for possible CAN line sheathing
(high frequency ground / earth)
19 – VMHF2 connection option for possible CAN line sheathing
(high frequency ground / earth)
20 – VM3 ground / earth supply 3 (redundant to VM1 and VM2)
Nominal voltage for power supply UN: 24 V DC

Permissible operating voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Resistance to overvoltage: 36 V, 40 °C 1h
1328 765 101 4-22 2000-09

4.4.4 CAN bus installation Non-linear CAN connection

(non-linear tap line)
The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for the CAN refer to Fig. 18
bus installation!
The vehicle end connector on the transmission The non-linear connection is more sensitive to faults,
actuator can be used to integrate the ZF-AS Tronic but a simpler form of CAN network. Here, what is
into all known CAN bus topologies (linear CAN commonly referred to as a tap line is formed between
connection, non-linear CAN connection). node point (point B) and electronics (point A).
Experience has proven that sheathed line routing, as
described in standards, is not needed.Line routing via This tap line must not exceed the maximum length
twisted lines (Twisted Pair) is normally sufficient. defined in the standards (refer to standards SAE
J 1939, ISO/DIS 11898).
If there are deviations from the maximum specified
Linear CAN connection lengths, transfer faults may occur (e.g. when using
(no tap lines) terminal testers or intermediate cable kits etc.).
refer to Fig. 17
From today’s standpoint, an economically and Line version

technically (EMC aspects) good solution, relatively
insensitive to faults, even with high transfer rates The line version must also be designed in accordance
(500 kb) the linear connection is relatively insensitive with existing standards (SAE J 1939 and/or ISO/DIS
to faults. 11898), which specify twisted and/or twisted +
sheathed.
The ZF transmission system supports this type of
CAN connection. The CAN lines are fed through the
control unit (2 connections each for CAN_H and/or
CAN_L).
Electronics Electronics Electronics

A B …n
R1 CAN_H CAN_H+ CAN_L CAN_L+ R1*
CAN_H
014 881
Fig. 17 CAN_L * R1: bus terminal resistance
Electronics Electronics Electronics Electronics

A B C …n
Point A Point A
R1 R1*
CAN_H
Point B
014 882 CAN_L

Point B
Fig. 18 * R1: bus terminal resistance
014882
1328 765 101 4-23 1999-12

Bus terminal resistance
The transmission control unit has an integrated bus

terminal resistance which can be activated via the
wiring on the electronics connector.
The electronics can therefore be used as CAN BUS
end consumers and/or as central consumers.
If the transmission electronics are produced as CAN

BUS end consumers, the line bridges in the electron-
ics connector (vehicle power connector) must be used
as shown in Fig. 19 (bridge from PIN 12 to PIN 15).
Transmission electronics as
CAN BUS end consumer
Electronics
free
Terminal Vehicle
resistance
wiring
014 884
Fig. 19
If the transmission electronics are produced as

CAN BUS central consumers, this power bridge is
no longer used, refer to Fig. 20.
1328 765 101 4-24 1999-12

Transmission electronics as CAN BUS central consumer
Electronics
Terminal Vehicle
resistance
wiring
free
014 883
Fig. 20
4.4.5 Quality requirements of wiring The wiring should be routed and secured at a protect-
ed point in the vehicle. The cable must be secured at
A distinction is made between two fundamental a maximum of 20 cm downstream of the transmission
installation situations. power supply connector. Suspended wiring is not
permitted.
1. Wiring which is routed in the cab and/or in the
vehicle frame. The connectors must not be tightened down too
firmly. Ensure that the connectors and mating
2. Wiring which is routed on the ZF unit and/or connectors are compatible and snapped in.
directly next to the unit or engine. More stringent
requirements apply here in terms of temperature, Also ensure that there are no relative movements,
mechanical properties, resistance to media. e.g. between vehicle frame and transmission, which
damage the wiring.
☞ If the cable from the power supply connector The securing material must be selected ensuring
(on the transmission actuator) is produced by the that the wiring is neither squashed nor damaged or
vehicle manufacturer, then technical customer pre-damaged in any way.
information TKI 6029 705 003 should be noted
CAUTION
A sufficient distance should be maintained from
Routing and securing sources of heat, such as exhaust, heat exchanger
etc. and/or thermal protection should be fitted.
The wiring should be routed in the vehicle so that it
a) is not damaged Other techn. requirements can be found in
TKI 6029 705 003.
b) can be accessed at any time
1328 765 101 4-25 2002-09


Connector Use Type Manufact. ZF number Manufacturer no. CKD no. Protection class
X1 GS3 20-pin Bu Kostal 6029 201 675 Connector housing: 09432001 6029 199 090 IP 67/ 69
on-site electronics Bush contact: 22124472200
Seal: 10800444521
Blind plug: 10800472632
Flapped part
Schlemmer: 0501 318 143
X1 GS3 18-pin Bu Kostal 6029 201 752 Connector housing: 09432691 6029 199 125 IP 67/ 69
on-site electronics 0501 317 367 Bush contact: 22124472200
Bus actuator Seal: 10800444521
Blind plug: 10800472632
X36 E module 35-pin AMP 6029 201 262 Connector housing: 925379-1 6029 199 091
with console-type Bracket: 928544-1
range selector with Cap: 925380-1
separate E-module ISO-1481 screw
ST 2.9X9.5-F
Seal ZF 6020 303 013
Contact bush: 925590-1
X21 Diagnosis 6-pin ST MNL AMP 6029 201 121 Connector housing: 926682-3 6029 199 027 Open connector
Contact pin: 926887-1 system
No details for
protection class
X21 Diagnosis 6-pin Bu AMP 6029 201 120 Connector housing: 350715-1 6029 199 092 refer to
Mating connector Contact bush: 926882-3 6-pin ST MNL
X2 Range selector 14-pin Bu AMP 6029 201 403 Connector housing: 929504-5 6029 199 042 refer to
(with sep. E-module) JPT Contact bush: 927771-3 6-pin ST MNL
X2a Range selector (with 15-pin Bu AMP 6029 201 798 Connector housing: 1-967623-1 Open connector
integr. E-module) 3-row Contact bush: 927771-3 system
X2b Range selector (with 9-pin Bu AMP 6029 201 677 Connector housing: 1-967621-1 No details to
integr. E-module) 3-row Contact bush: 927771-3 protection class
X5 Display 6-pin Bu AMP 6029 201 367 Connector housing: 929504-2 6029 199 109 refer to
JPT Contact bush: 927771-3 6-pin ST MNL
X5 Display 4-pin St MNL AMP 6029 201 130 Connector housing: 350780-1 6029 199 028 refer to
Contact pin: 926887-1 6-pin ST MNL
X5 Display 8-pin Bu AMP 6029 201 676 Contact bush: 927771-3 6029 199 108 refer to
JPT Connector housing: 929504-3 6-pin ST MNL
A11/A14 Output sensor 4-pin BU DIN AMP 6029 201 618 Connector housing: 1-967325-1 6029 199 111 IP 67/ 69K
Bayonet Cap: 965783
angled Bush contact: 0-929974-1
Seal: 828920-1
Blind plug: 828922-1
S12 Neutral switch 4-pin BU DIN AMP 6029 201 619 Connector housing: 1-967325-1 6029 199 088 IP 67/ 69K
Bayonet Cap: 965786
straight Bush contact: 0-929974-1
Seal: 828920-1
S12 Neutral switch 4-pin BU DIN AMP 6029 201 618 Connector housing: 1-967325-1 6029 199 111 IP 67/ 69K
Bayonet Cap: 965783
angled Bush contact: 0-929974-1
Seal: 828920-1
X17 Junction 22-pin Bu JPT AMP 6029 201 336 Connector housing: 929504-7 6029 199 043 refer to
Vehicle power Contact bush: 927771-3 6-pin ST MNL
X17 A Junction 22-pin St JPT AMP 6029 201 354 Connector housing: 929505-7 6029 199 025 refer to
Mating connect. Power supply Pin contact: 928930-5 6-pin ST MNL
Power supply Contact bush: 927771-3 6-pin ST MNL
Mating connect. Power supply Pin contact: 928930-5 6-pin ST MNL
X18 A Junction 6-pin Bu JPT AMP 6029 201 367 Connector housing: 929504-2 6029 199 109 refer to
Mating connect. Power supply CAN Contact bush: 927771-3 6-pin ST MNL
Mating connect. Power supply CAN Contact pin: 928930-5 6-pin ST MNL
Cab Contact bush: 927771-3 6-pin ST MNL
X20 Mating con- Junction 18-pin St JPT AMP 6029 201 365 Connector housing: 929505-6 6029 199 026 refer to
nector for X19 Cab Pin contact: 928930-5 6-pin ST MNL
1328 765 101 4-26 2003-08

4.4.7 Other electrical interfaces on the 4.4.8 CAN signals

ZF-AS Tronic
ZF TKI 1328 761 005 contains descriptions of
4.4.7.1 Neutral switch (S12) the requirements of the external signals needed to
operate the ZF-AS Tronic; it also contains
The transmission neutral switch (S12) is located on descriptions of the signals which are transmitted by
the transmission in position G32 (refer to installation the ZF-AS Tronic. The quality, and accuracy as well
drawing). The starter current circuit is connected with as (if necessary) the repeat rate needed (CAN) are
the transmission neutral switch via relay E17 so that also defined for each external signal.
the engine cannot be started when a gear is selected.
If the transmission is mechanically in Neutral, the Most of the signal’s requirements correspond to
neutral switch contact is closed. those defined in SAE J1939.
One neutral switch is available for the ZF-AS Tronic: The ZF-AS Tronic only expects deviating, higher
repeat rates for a few signals.
• Switch: item number 0501 210 059
(bayonet connection in accordance with
As developed at present, this relates to
DIN 72585)
• the accelerator position (with idling switch)
Comments:
• the wheel speed of the ABS.
If the Neutral signal is delivered by CAN, the mech.
neutral switch is not needed.
The signal specification of the TKI 1328 761 005
must be confirmed by the vehicle manufacturer.
G32 1:1 Deviations from these should be agreed upon in a
BAJONETTANSCHLUSS DIN 72585-A1-2.1-A G/K1
BAJONET CONNECTION
special manner.
35.1
1.5
The following characteristics must be observed in
addition to the requirements described in the signal
specification:
Ø 23.6
1
2
• Brake pressure on wheel:

SW27
W.A.F. As soon as the vehicle experiences retardation, i.e.
braking action, there must be a foot brake signal. In
Fig. 21: Switch: drawing no.: 0501 210 059 other words, at a braking pressure of 0.2 + 0.2 bar
on the wheel, the foot brake signal must be set and
should then drop back below this value.
• Accelerator:
The characteristics of the accelerator have a
There is an output speed sensor on the ZF-AS Tronic
significant impact on the maneuvering and setting
which provides the tachographs with the relevant
off characteristics of a vehicle with an AS Tronic
signal (refer to installation drawing).
transmission system! (Accelerator replaces clutch
pedal!!).
A KITAS speedo sensor is available as an option.
The following should therefore be noted:
This is also needed for all TCO tachographs (CAN-
- the idling switch signal should drop at 4 + 2 % of
capable).
the accelerator
Speedo sensor KITAS - kickdown signal should be in placed at >100 %
(Standard) Speedo sensor accelerator position with clearly palpable pressure
Drawing number 0501 210 854 0501 213 667 point
Order number for 0501 210 855 0501 213 668
screw-in length of 19.8 mm
- product families 3 + 4 with Intarder
- product families 1 + 2 gen. 4.4.9 EMC
Order number for 0501 210 859 0501 213 669
screw-in length of 90 mm
- product families 3 + 4 without Intarder The E1 certificate issued by the Federal Vehicle
Registration Authority can be requested from ZF.
1328 765 101 4-27 2003-08

4 Installation 4.5 Pneumatics
4.5 Pneumatics • In example 1, the air supply for the braking

system takes priority over the shift system, since
The quality of the air supplied to the ZF-AS Tronic an relief valve (> 5 bar) is mounted in front of
system is very important for vehicle availability. the ZF-AS Tronic air circuit.
The same requirements as those placed on the brak- The pressure level set on the relief valve must
ing systems therefore apply to air quality and air line however be less than the pressure level of the
versions. relief valves in the 4-circuit protection valve
for the auxiliary consumers.
The air for the ZF-AS Tronic system supplied • In example 2, the air supply for the ZF-AS Tronic
to the vehicle’s air system may either be connected takes priority over the other auxiliary consumers
up upstream of the 4-circuit protection valve since this is mounted upstream of a relief valve
(example 1), or downstream of the 4-circuit pro- (> 5 bar).
tection valve on the auxiliary consumer circuit.
The following should be noted here:
Example 1
Compressor
Air drier 4-circuit
protective
valve
Relief
valve
Transmission 5 bar*
actuator
with pressure sensor Ø inner = 9 mm
014885
20 L
Clutch Pressure relief valve

actuator
D-I = 9 mm
* The pressure level set on the relief valve MUST be less than
max. 4 m the pressure level of the relief valves in the 4-circuit protective
valve for the auxiliary consumers.
Example 2
Compressor
Air drier 4-circuit
protective
valve
Transmission
actuator
with pressure sensor D-I = 9 mm
20 L
Clutch Pressure relief valve

actuator Relief
D-I = 9 mm valve
5 bar Auxiliary
max. 4 m consumer
014886
1328 765 101 4-28 2003-08

4 Installation 4.5 Pneumatics
Air reservoir Air lines
A separate air reservoir is fitted for the ZF-AS Tronic The air lines from the ZF-AS Tronic air reservoir
and is protected by a pressure relief valve. Other con- to the transmission actuator and clutch actuator
sumers must not be connected up to this compressed must have a nominal width (interior diameter) of at
air circuit – with the exception of the ZF-Intarder. least 9 mm. Maximum lengths of 4 m must not be
The pressure relief valve prevents the pressure in exceeded.
the air reservoir from falling when there is a leak or
insufficient air in the rest of the air system.
Minimum volume of air reservoir: Air quality
• ZF-AS Tronic 10 dm3
• ZF-AS Tronic + IT 20 dm3 The compressed air made available to the vehicle
must be cleaned, dried and free of condensate.
Air particle filter: 40 microns mesh width.
Air pressure
Air dryers which emit alcohol or other substances
Supply pressure needed 8 - 12.0 bar downstream of into the air system which may have a negative impact
air drier. on sealing materials are not authorized.
To ensure that sufficient shifts can be undertaken
when there is insufficient air, ZF-AS Tronic has to be Maximum permissible water content of compressed
supplied with a supply pressure of at least 8 bar. air: 15 % (relative air humidity).
The transmission actuator uses an integrated pressure
reducing valve to reduce the air pressure to 7 bar of Ambient Water content
shift pressure to preserve the shift elements and to temperature [°C] [g/m 3 ]
achieve constant shift characteristics. -20 0.136
Reliable shifting and connection of the shift system -10 0.332
is ensured with a shift pressure of 7 bar. 0 0.726
10 1.41
Shift pressure = pressure level in transmission
20 2.6
actuator downstream of pressure
30 4.55
reducing valve
Supply pressure = pressure level in air reservoir 40 7.66
Air consumption Pressure display / warning
Air displacement volume needed: A pressure sensor is integrated in the transmission

At least 5 dm 3/min at 8 – 10 bar. actuator and provides the driver with a warning when
the pressure level of the shift pressure falls below
The vehicle air system should be designed so that
6.2 bar. This information is shown on the ZF display
at least the aforementioned volumetric flow of air is
(AL) and/or can be sent to the CAN as a message.
made available to the ZF-AS Tronic air circuit alone.
This assumed requirement is based on the con- ! DANGER !
sumption needed for 9 shifts and 1 starting process If gear shifts are undertaken with insufficient
(“ignition on” with clutch actuator calibration) per air pressure, the transmission may remain in
minute. Neutral so that there is no direct drive and no
engine brake effect.
1328 765 101 4-29 2003-08

4 Installation 4.6 Auxiliaries
4.6 Auxiliaries 4.6.3 ZF PTOs
4.6.1 ZF-Intarder ZF-PTOs can either be fitted in the factory when the
transmission is supplied, at a later date by the vehicle
The ZF-Intarder cannot be retrofitted. The ZF- manufacturer or in the end customer’s complete
Intarder must always be taken into consideration vehicle.
when ordering the transmission.
The type sheet for ZF-PTOs, ZF no. 1328 757 151,
For ZF-Intarder applications, particular attention provides information on the selection of ZF-PTOs
should be paid to the peripheral parts such as the available. The fitting specifications have to be
fitting of electronics, wiring and cooler connection at drawn up in conjunction with ZF and the vehicle
the water end. The pulse count of the speedo sensor manufacturer.
changes slightly to that of applications without an
Intarder. Particular mention should be made here of the
fact that when a PTO is mechanically fitted, the
Installation instructions and interface electronics in the ZF-AS Tronic need additional
descriptions can be found in the ZF-Intarder programming to guarantee the operating safety of
technical manual (ZF no. 6085 765 104). the system in conjunction with the automated clutch.
When the vehicle manufacturer is fitting the PTO,
The exchange of signals needed with the ZF- the technical data set should be clarified with the
AS Tronic via the CAN bus is taken into con- technical sales team. When retrofitting on supplied
sideration in the ZF-Intarder electronics software. vehicles, this is undertaken by the ZF service centre.
If a PTO is fitted without the ZF fitting instructions
Special features of oil fills for the ZF- (e.g. electronics program modification) being
AS Tronic-Intarder combination can be observed, then ZF assumes no warranty for this unit
found in the ZF-Intarder technical manual combination, the functional and operating safety of
(ZF no. 6085 765 104). the entire system.
Initial installation of a ZF-AS Tronic and ZF-Intarder The peripherals (wiring harness etc.) needed for the
system combination must be commissioned and ZF-PTOs have to be ordered from the vehicle manu-
approved by ZF. facturer. If retrofitting on a vehicle which has already
been supplied, the ZF service centres will assist.

If third party retarders are fitted, the ZF technical
sales team must always contacted. Requirements If Third party PTOs are fitted, the ZF technical sales
relating to the mechanical, pneumatic and electrical team must always contacted. Requirements relating
interfaces and the exchange of signals with the to the mechanical, pneumatic and electrical interfaces
ZF-AS Tronic must be co-ordinated. If necessary, the to the ZF-AS Tronic must be co-ordinated.
system safety of the entire unit must also be taken If necessary, the system safety of the entire unit
into separate consideration and a vehicle entire must also be taken into separate consideration and
system FMEA undertaken by the vehicle manu- a vehicle entire system FMEA undertaken by the
facturer. vehicle manufacturer to guarantee the operating
safety of the system in conjunction with the auto-
If ZF expressly refuses to issue approval for a third mated clutch.
party retarder, then ZF assumes no warranty or
liability for this unit combination, or for the If ZF expressly refuses to issue approval for a PTO
functional and operating safety of the entire system. produced by another company, then ZF assumes no
warranty or liability for this unit combination, or for
the functional and operating safety of the entire
system.
1328 765 101 4-30 2000-09

Transmission
4 Installation 4.7 installation on assembly belt
4.7 Transmission installation 4.7.3 Anti-corrosive protection

on assembly belt
We recommend coating the ZF-AS Tronic with
4.7.1 Transport standard anti-corrosion inhibitor. In special
applications with a high risk of corrosion (e.g. snow
Only the lugs fitted on the transmission mounting on clearing …), special anti-corrosion protection
housings 1 and 3 may be used for transport purposes. measures are needed and can be defined on request.
The ZF-AS Tronic is supplied painted in black as

standard. If the customer would like to paint the ZF-
AS Tronic himself, this must be done in accordance
with ZF specification
• 0000 702 211 (product families 1+ 2)
• 0000 701 972 - solo, 0000 701 973 - IT Truck
019529 and /or 0000 701 974 - IT Bus (product families
ZF-AS Tronic 3 + 4)
The customer must confirm that this is the case.
4.7.5 Assembly of engine, clutch and

transmission
The ZF-AS Tronic is supplied with a release bearing.
WARNING: All parts (apart from the input shaft

spline) must not be greased at a later date. The guide
pipe in particular must remain free of grease. Do not
019530
touch the clutch disc lining.
ZF-AS Tronic mid
This results in the following assembly sequence:
The transmission must not be suspended from its • The guide pipe must be free of grease
input shaft (e.g. during transport) (because this would
• Grease input shaft spline (with approved grease
damage bearings and splines).
following clutch manufacturer specification)
The ZF-AS Tronic must also not be suspended in
slings for transport purposes. • Slide clutch disc onto input shaft spline
• Remove clutch disc and wipe off surplus grease
If the transmission is flange-mounted to the engine,
no transport attachments must be fitted to the trans- • Fit driver disc and pressure plate on flywheel
mission. housing without grease (use mandrel etc. to
ZF is not liable for transmission components being centre pressure plate never use input shaft for
damaged through incorrect transport. this purpose)
• Align transmission so that the input shaft is
aligned with the pilot bearing
• Before installing the transmission, ensure that the
Depending on customer requirements, ends of the load-bearing rings are hooked onto the
the ZF-AS Tronic is supplied as follows: pressure plate
• with the highest gear selected • Carefully guide input shaft into hub of clutch disc
• in Neutral • Secure transmission to flywheel housing
1328 765 101 4-31 2003-08

Transmission
• Remove cover from underside of housing 1 Documentation of EOL (End Of Line)

programming
• Secure release bearing in load-bearing ring by
using a lifting tool (pry bar) to pressure the lower
The delivery status of the ZF-AS Tronic is document-
end of the release fork towards the transmission
ed by ZF using the vehicle manufacturer’s order num-
output. This pushes the upper end of the release
ber.
fork towards the engine until it snaps into the
load-bearing ring.
Furthermore, all EOL programming / parameter
setting and modifications made outside the ZF
organization which result over the service life of a
You must be able to
control unit must be fully comprehensible to ZF.
feel and hear the fork
A database is used for ZF documentation.
snapping into place.
The “vehicle manufacturer – ZF” transfer of data
should be defined using appropriate procedures.
ZF-AS Tronic-specific data which has to be docu-

mented by ZF is discussed with the OEM.
018495
• By pressing the fork towards the engine, check ZF external programming equipment
whether the connection has snapped in correctly.
ZF-AS Tronic-specific data present for EOL pro-
• Secure cover back onto underside of housing 1.
gramming has to be forwarded to ZF. A standardized
procedure should be defined for this purpose.
The ZF-AS Tronic software can be programmed

by the vehicle manufacturer to reduce supply and/or
service variants of the ZF-AS Tronic.
For the EOL (end of line) programming of ZF-

AS Tronic-specific vehicle variants outside the
ZF organization, the vehicle manufacturer and ZF
must agree on the program variants needed as well as
the documentation, production and service process
requirements.
The transmission software can be adapted to the

relevant vehicle configuration by the vehicle manu-
facturer by means of vehicle parameter setting (e.g.
PTO configurations).
The ZF-AS Tronic is programmed using serial data

transfer.
The following description is a summary of the

requirements relating to ZF documentation and/or
ZF Service.
☞ The detailed requirements can be found in

ZF TKI 6009 774 005
1328 765 101 4-32 2002-09

Transmission
A form is available for the delivery check.
The ZF-Testman diagnosis tool (refer to Section 3.5)

assists the delivery check process by means of special
test stages:
• testing while vehicle is stationary
• testing during test run
• interrogation of error memory
Agreement should be reached on ZF training the

assembly staff by the start of production.
019075
Picture: Form OEM supply check
1328 765 101 4-33 2002-09

4 Installation 4.8 Additional information
4.8 Additional information 4.8.1 Operation
Safety instructions Depending on the manufacturer and vehicle type, you

may have controls and operating processes other than
The following safety instructions appear in this those described in this manual. This manual contains
manual: descriptions for the ZF console-type range selector
with separate E-module (Chap. 2.4.1).
NOTE
Refers to special processes, techniques, data, etc.
! DANGER !
CAUTION • The vehicle must not be left with the engine
This is used when incorrect, unprofessional running and a gear selected.
working practices could damage the product. • Gears cannot be selected if the engine is not
functioning (e.g. no fuel), transmission
shifts to “Neutral”. Engine brake and
! DANGER ! steering assistance will fail during travel.
This is used when lack of care could lead to
personal injury or damage to property.
Engage parking brake

! THREATS TO THE ENVIRONMENT !
Turn rotary switch to « N » D N R
Lubricants and cleaning agents must not be
allowed to enter the soil, ground water or (transmission in Neutral)
sewage system.
• Ask your local environment agency for Switch on “ignition”
013 176
safety information on the relevant products
and adhere to their requirements. Shift system self-check
• Collect used oil in a suitably large contain- (display shows « CH »)
er.
• Dispose of used oil, dirty filters, lubricants Start engine
008 010
and cleaning agents in accordance with
environmental protection guidelines. o Self check is complete.
• When working with lubricants and « N » appears on display,
cleaning agents always refer to the manu- transmission is in Neutral
facturer’s instructions. 008 011
NOTE
Gears cannot be selected when
engine is stationary.
1328 765 101 4-34 2003-08

4.8.1.2 Setting off, forwards travel 4.8.1.3 Maneuvering
Start engine (refer to 4.8.1.1). Maneuvering mode is available for extremely long
journeys (e.g. connecting and /or disconnecting a
Turn rotary switch from « N » to « D » semi trailer or trailer).
The first 2 forwards travel gears and both reverse
Automatic driving mode is activated travel gears are available for maneuvering (depending
on the vehicle, possibly only 1st gear and one R gear).
The display shows the Maneuvering mode does not engage in other gears.
starting gear selected.
(The system selects the The system recognizes maneuvering mode from the
starting gear itself, clutch accelerator position and the low roadspeed.
remains separated.) 014 788 In maneuvering mode, the vehicle (accelerator) is
more sensitive and clutch activation differs from how
Depress accelerator and at the same time release it is in normal mode.
the parking brake.
! DANGER !
The system changes from maneuvering mode
! DANGER ! to setting off depending on the accelerator
The vehicle may start to roll away even if you position and vehicle speed.
do not depress the accelerator. The vehicle may accelerate.
RISK OF ACCIDENT !
Vehicle sets off (clutch closes automatically).
1st gear and RL
D N R
Hill start
Maneuvering period unlimited.
! The « CL » display appears if the
DANGER !
D N R clutch is overloaded.
Select gear, only release parking brake once
accelerator has been depressed otherwise the
CAUTION
vehicle will roll backwards.
If the driver does not respond to
the « CL » display, the clutch may
be damaged as a result of over-
Starting gear correction
load.
The driver can correct the starting gear proposed by
the system.
2nd gear and RH
D N R Maneuvering only available until
Undertaking correction:
« CL » is reached.
Press control lever in « – » or « + » direction.
D N R ! DANGER !
The display shows the starting gear selected. If the driver does not respond to
the « CL » display, the system
switches from maneuvering mode
to setting off mode.
The vehicle may accelerate.
RISK OF ACCIDENT !
1328 765 101 4-35 2003-08

4.8.1.4 Moving off downhill The gear display appears

on the display during travel
Precondition: engine is running as a number.
013586
If the parking brake is released when a gear is
selected and the vehicle rolls off, the clutch automati-
cally closes without the driver having to press the Changing gear in Manual operating mode
accelerator.
Press control lever in « + » or « – » direction.
! DANGER ! The shift system exits the Automatic operating mode

When the vehicle moves off without a gear when a manual shift is undertaken.
selected – rotary switch in position « N » – If you press the control lever to the left, Automatic
the engine brake will not work! operating mode is again activated.
Do not allow vehicle to roll in the opposite
direction to the gear selected.
Jumping gear steps
If the vehicle rolls forwards – transmission in Neutral Jumping one gear step:
– once the brake has been released and you shift from Press control lever in the direction required twice
« N » to « D », the system selects a gear appropriate in quick succession.
for the roadspeed. The driveline is therefore closed.
Jumping two gear steps:
Press control lever in the direction required three
4.8.1.5 Changing operating mode: times in quick succession.
Manual /Automatic
NOTES
Can be undertaken at any time, even during travel. • You can shift from any gear to Neutral at anytime
using the rotary switch. This shift request takes
A/M
To change operating mode from Manual to priority over other requests.
Automatic • The accelerator position must not be changed
Press control lever to the left during the shift process because the engine is
controlled electronically.
To change operating mode from Automatic to • A shift command is not undertaken if the shift
Manual would result in the max. permissible engine speed
Press control lever to the left or press control being exceeded.
lever in « + » or « – » direction.
Depending on the vehicle, the system may ! DANGER !
automatically return to Automatic operating Shifts to “Neutral” can also be made during
mode after a certain time. travel. If a shift is made to “Neutral”, the
driveline is interrupted. The engine brake
then no longer functions.
Changing gear in Automatic operating mode
All upshifts and downshifts are undertaken auto-

matically.
This depends on: • Drive resistance
• Loading
• Accelerator position
• Roadspeed
• Engine speed
1328 765 101 4-36 2003-08

4.8.1.7 Reverse travel 4.8.1.8 Engine brake
! DANGER ! ! DANGER !
If the vehicle is rolling, a shift is not made into The engine brake function is interrupted
reverse gear! during the gear shift. The vehicle may
Immediately bring the vehicle to a standstill. accelerate when traveling downhill.
Select reverse gear:

Manual operations
Vehicle must be stationary The engine brake is deactivated by the system during
Turn rotary switch to « R » gear shifts. Once the gear shift is complete, the
« R » appears on the display (clutch remains engine brake is automatically reactivated.
separated)
Depress accelerator and release brake at the same Automatic operations
time. (Clutch closes automatically) By activating the engine brake, the system downshifts
Vehicle travels in reverse. so that maximum braking torque is reached.
Changing direction of travel

4.8.1.9 Stopping
From reverse travel « R » to forwards travel « D »
and vice versa With the accelerator untouched, slow down the
vehicle using the service brake until it reaches a
Turn rotary switch from « R » to « D » standstill.
The clutch opens automatically before the vehicle
reaches a standstill so that the engine does not
! DANGER ! “stall”.
A change in the direction of travel, involving If the vehicle is going to be stationary for long
turning the rotary switch from « R » to « D » periods of time, we would recommend selecting
and vice versa from « D » to « R » may only the Neutral transmission position.
be undertaken when the vehicle is stationary Always engage the service or parking brake when
otherwise the transmission shifts to Neutral. the vehicle is stationary.
Only the details on the display apply to
the direction of travel selected in the trans-
mission. ! DANGER !
• When the vehicle is stationary with the
engine running and a gear selected, you
need simply press the accelerator in order
to move the vehicle!
• Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, the transmission must be shifted
into Neutral and the parking brake
engaged.
• Activating the parking brake during travel
and on a smooth surface may bring the
engine to a standstill. Steering assistance is
then NO longer available!
1328 765 101 4-37 2003-08

4.8.1.10 Switching off engine / stopping vehicle NOTE

Select an operating mode in which there is no risk of
Bring vehicle to a standstill clutch overloading, for example:
Engage parking brake • accelerate vehicle (to close the clutch)
Move rotary switch to « N » Neutral position • stop
Use ignition key to switch off engine • set off and /or maneuver in a lower gear
o Place chocks under wheels (e.g. on slopes)
! DANGER !
! DANGER ! If the driver ignores the warning, the clutch
The engine cannot be switched off if a gear is will close when the accelerator is depressed.
selected. The vehicle may roll away if no This prevents the clutch from being further
brakes are engaged. Engage parking brake. overloaded.
This may cause the engine to “stall” and
rolling backwards downhill cannot then be
NOTE ruled out.
If the transmission is not shifted to Neutral before the The clutch opens again when you take your
engine is switched off, this is done automatically foot off the accelerator.
when the ignition is moved to “Off ”.
➢ To preserve the mechanical parts of the clutch

release mechanism, you should shift the transmis-
4.8.1.11 Towing sion to Neutral when stopping for long periods
(more than approx. 1 to 2 min., for example in
When towing, ensure that you observe the vehicle queuing traffic, at traffic lights etc.).
manufacturer’s instructions! The clutch is thereby closed and the clutch release
mechanism relieved.
CAUTION
When towing, the propshaft flange must always Despite the clutch being automated, the driver still
be disconnected from the rear axle. has considerable influence on the clutch’s service life.
If this is not possible, remove both stub shafts. To keep clutch wear levels as low as possible, we
Prevent pollution through possible oil loss. would recommend always selecting the lowest gear
possible when setting off.

The engine cannot be tow started.
To protect the entire driveline from excessive speeds,
the ZF-AS Tronic only allows gear shifts which are
within the speed range defined by the vehicle manu-
4.8.1.13 Clutch protection facturer.
If there is a risk of the clutch being overloaded by Operating mode: Manual

several starting procedures undertaken one after
another in short succession or by a long period of • Ensure that the engine does not exceed the per-
maneuvering in too high a gear, the « CL » display missible speed range.
appears.
• If the vehicle speeds up when traveling downhill,
there is no automatic shift into a higher gear.
1328 765 101 4-38 2003-08

CAUTION 4.8.1.16 Roller test rig

The engine may be damaged if the vehicle speeds
up when traveling downhill and the engine enters Once driven onto a roller test rig (brake test rig), shift
the overspeed range. transmission into “Neutral”.
• When the rollers are running, the system recognizes

Operating mode: Automatic the “driving vehicle” function. If you select a gear,
the clutch closes.
! DANGER ! • When the rollers are running, reverse gear can no
The vehicle may speed up when traveling longer be selected.
downhill. To protect the engine from damage
in the overspeed range (red range), the system
undertakes an upshift. ! DANGER !
The vehicle may leave the rollers even if the
accelerator is not depressed.
Stationary / mobile operations 4.8.1.17 System faults (error messages)
• During mobile PTO operations, only certain gears • If a « screwdriver symbol » appears on the display,
can be used depending on the transmission type there is a system fault. Only restricted operations
(refer to Chap. 3.1.7). may be available.
If a « STOP » and a « screwdriver symbol » appear
• Gear shifts are only undertaken when the vehicle on the display, there is a serious system fault. Shut
is stationary. Gear changes during travel are not down the vehicle, you must not continue driving.
possible.
• The fault message and the resultant error response
Switch on PTO and select setting off gear. can be cancelled when the vehicle is stationary via
« Ignition OFF », until the display goes out. If the
The following appears on the display e.g.: display does not go out after « Ignition OFF »,
switch off the system by means of the master
battery switch. Switch the ignition back on. If the
fault message is still present, you will have to go to
a service center.
008 018
When contacting the service center, please specify
i.e.: PTO 1 is activated, starting gear 3 is selected the error number(s).
(refer to Chap. 2.4.3).
Stationary operations
During stationary PTO operations, no gears can be

selected. The transmission remains in Neutral.
1328 765 101 4-39 2003-08

Calling up active error numbers: 4.8.2 Maintenance
Switch on ignition 4.8.2.1 isual inspection of wiring

Turn rotary switch to « N »
Hold control lever in « + » position Check wiring for damage
Check that connectors are seated correctly,
Depending on the version, a 2 or 3-digit error number connectors must be fitted without traction relief.
will appear on the display. This corresponds to the
error currently active.
If 4 bars are displayed in addition to the number
shown, this means: error no. + 100 (only on a two- The vehicle manufacturer’s maintenance
digit display) instructions must be observed.
The pneumatic tank should be drained every
week, in the winter every day.
NOTE
013 588 013 587 When draining the pneumatic tank, the pneumatic
e.g.: Error no. 74 Error no. 174 cleaners and water separate should also be drained if
this is not done automatically.
If 4 bars and 2 arrows are displayed in addition If vehicles are fitted with an air dryer, the interval
to the number shown, this means: error no. + 200 for replacing the cartridge must be observed.
(only on a two-digit display)
018 470 When handing over the vehicle to the end customer,
e.g.: Error no. 227 point out the function, operation and maintenance of
the ZF-AS Tronic units.
Calling up inactive error numbers from the error

memory:
Switch on ignition
Turn rotary switch to « N » and at the same time
depress the foot brake
Hold control lever in « + » position
The errors saved are displayed one after another on

the display.
1328 765 101 4-40 2003-08

4 Installation 4.9 Application and documentation
4.9 Application and documentation 4.9.3 Type plate
4.9.1 Application
In the ZF-AS Tronic transmission system, the

1
individual components (vehicle, engine, clutch, trans-
mission, ECUs, drive program, etc.) are finely tuned
to one another. 2 3
4
The system components are defined as part of the 5 6
application and documented in a customer speci-
fication ( Form 1328 755 101). The customer 7 8
specification is used in the application process 9 10
• to specify the parts list

• to document the important application stages
(e.g. FMEA, agreements on safety concept,
• system-interfaces (e.g. CAN). 1
The customer specification is confirmed by the

2 3
customer and is the basis for application approval
by ZF. 4
5 6
In order to prevent installation approval being
revoked as a result of system-related modifications, 7 8
modifications which impact on the transmission 9 10
system have to be clarified early on with ZF.
1 = Transmission type with number of gears
2 = Parts list no. of transmission
3 = Serial no. of transmission
4.9.2 ZF documentation 4 = Customer order no., if known to ZF
5 = Transmission ratio
The scope of supply is defined with the customer 6 = Tachometer ratio [pulse / rev.]
using the customer specification and documented 7 = PTO type
in the ZF parts list. The parts list is available as 8 = PTO ratio
computer extract. 9 = Approx. oil volume for initial fill
10 = Name of ZF List of Lubricant
CAUTION
Before every installation, use the parts list
number to check from the type plates whether the
engine, transmission and electronic control unit
components correspond with the documentation.
In other words, whether they match the details on
the computer extract.
For correspondence and queries, always specify
the parts list number and serial number of your
ZF-AS Tronic (refer to type plate)!
1328 765 101 4-41 2003-08

4 Installation 4.9 Application and documentation
A parts list is drawn up in accordance with the

ZF-AS Tronic transmission system specification by
the vehicle manufacturer and ZF.
The entire scope of supply is defined using the parts

list, see example below.
Superordinate parts list

Parts list number: 1327 XXX XXX (example)
A10 9999 501 537 customer: VEHICLE MANUFACTURER *COUNTRY: D M

A14 9999 501 613 ORDER NO: WITHOUT M
A90 9999 511 101 APPROVAL FOR FIRST INSTALLATION *CHECK NEEDED M
A98 9999 541 465 SPECIFICATION: a 1327 761 XXX M
S02 9999 514 114 VEHICLE DATA 1: M

S04 9999 597 517 TYPE: BUS (COACH) XXXXXXXXXX b M
S06 9999 515 188 PERM. TOTAL WEIGHT: SOLO XXT M
S08 9999 514 742 TYRE DYN: XXX* M
S10 9999 514 575 HA: I=X,XX M
S12 9999 000 999 POSITION DELETED M
S14 9999 597 518 MANUFACTURER/ENGINE *KWXXX/XXXX*N.MXXXX/XXXX c M
S30 9999 501 366 DRAWINGS: M
S46 9999 540 616 CONNECTION DIAGRAM: 6029 711 XXX M
S48 9999 597 520 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM: 6029 713 XXX M

930 9999 200 028 THE SUPERORDINATE PRODUCT CONSISTS OF: T
932 1 1327 040 XXX SS 10 AS 2301 IT 3 P
A1
952 1 6009 071 XXX SS EST 42 INTARDER 3 P
C2
988 1 1327 180 XXX SS ACCESSORIES NBE * PRESERIES 3 P MN
E8 MM
a = Customer specification
b = Type designation of vehicle manufacturer
c = Engine data
1328 765 101 4-42 2000-09

5 Annex
5.1 Designations for AS transmission

Annex: Attached documents

5
1328 765 101

Annex

Nu Ex Ex
mb am Nu am
er mb ple
* standard
ple
* Standard
of of er of
Explanation
sp
Explanation
Truck
ge tra of
ar ge ell
s ns ar ing
mi
ss AS s
AS ion =
12 AS 2300 BO
10 AS 2000 BD
12 AS 2330 TO
12 AS 2140 TD
=a TC aut
ut = T om
om C ati
at Tr c t
ic on ra
12
10
tra ic ns
12
12
ns (A mi
mi S ss
Tu ss + W io
rn ion Nu Tu SK n sy
ing sy mb rn ) ste Nu
mo ste er ing m mb
me m of 0 = mo er
nt ge Ec me of
[N
AS
AS
0= ar nt
s 2 = oli
[N
ge
AS
AS
sta m]
=f A te ar
s
nd ac 4 = S 1 AS; m] =
ar to Te AS 22/ 1 = fa
d2 rx ch Te
00 no 30 142 AS ctor ch
2 10
0 log 4 /1 10
62 1 x 10 no
yf ; 3 /1 0 log
23
20
0= am 0= = A 21; yf
23
wi
th
ou To
ily 2= w
N M itho
S
23
3/
21 am
ily
tI rq V ut I 26
5-2
nt ue nt 3; Tu
ar
de lim ar rn
de
0
0
ing
r; it r*
3
4
Designation for AS transmission

Designation for AS transmission
1= ;1 mo
B wi T= =I me
=B nt
us th Tr nt
ar
;D Int Te uc de lim
ar k; it
=D de ch
nic D r; Pr
od
r* =D
0
0
ire al uc
ct ire
0
0
ge ct tf
dr ne am
ive ra dr ily
;O tio ive
=O Va n ;O
ve ria =O Va
rd nt ve ria
5.1 Designations for AS transmission (status July 2003)
rd
B
5.1
riv nt
s
T
e riv
Ve e
BD
rsi Ve
TD
on rsi
on
019017
019016
2003-08
Designations for AS transmission
5 Annex 5.2 AS transmission program
Designation Number Turning moment Ratio Product family

of gears limits sequence
12 AS 1010 TD* 12 1000 DD 1
12 AS 1010 TO* 12 1000 OD 1
12 AS 1220 TD* 12 1200 DD 2
12 AS 1210 TO* 12 1200 OD 1
12 AS 1420 TD* 12 1400 DD 2
12 AS 1420 TO* 12 1400 OD 2
12 AS 1620 TO* 12 1600 OD 2
12 AS 1630 TD 12 1700 DD 3
12 AS 1930 TD 12 1900 DD 3
12 AS 1930 TO 12 1900 OD 3
12 AS 2130 TD* 12 2100 DD 3
12 AS 2130 TO 12 2100 OD 3
12 AS 2340 TD* 12 2300 DD 4
12 AS 2330 TO 12 2300 OD 3
12 AS 2540 TD 12 2500 DD 4
12 AS 2530 TO* 12 2500 OD 3
12 AS 2540 TO 12 2500 OD 4
12 AS 2740 TO 12 2700 OD 4
12 AS 2940 TO* 12 2900 OD 4
12 AS 3140 TO* 12 3100 OD 4
16 AS 2230 TD 16 2200 DD 3
16 AS 2630 TO 16 2600 OD 3
* under development
AS transmission program
No. of gears
12 AS 1010 1220 1420 1630 1930 2130 2340 2540 TD
12
12 AS 1010 1210 1420 1620 1930 2130 2330 2530
2540 2740 2940 3140 T
16 AS 2230 TD
16 16 AS 2630 T
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
under development [Nm]
019526
1328 765 101 5-3 2003-08

5 Annex 5.2 AS transmission program
Designation Number Turning moment Ratio Transmission type

of gears limits sequence
10 AS 2001 BD 10 2000 DD 10-speed bus
10 AS 2001 BO 10 2000 OD 10-speed bus
10 AS 2301 BD 10 2300 DD 10-speed bus
10 AS 2301 BO 10 2300 OD 10-speed bus
10 AS 2701 BD 10 2700 DD 10-speed bus
10 AS 2701 BO 10 2700 OD 10-speed bus
12 AS 2001 BO 12 2000 OD 12-speed bus
12 AS 2301 BO 12 2300 OD 12-speed bus
12 AS 2701 BO 12 2700 OD 12-speed bus
1328 765 101 5-4 2003-08

ZF Friedrichshafen AG
D-88038 Friedrichshafen
Tel.: +49 (0) 75 41 77-0
Fax: +49 (0) 75 41 77-90 8000
Internet: www.zf.com
Driveline and Chassis Technology

ZF-Friedrichshafen AG Failure Reactions DEMAG 16.02.04
Remark to titles in table:
Int. ZF-fault-number dec/hex - defined by ZF.
Calculated ISMA-starting gear - (0=NO, 1=YES) Intelligent Shift Management (ISMA) suggests starting gear.
ISMA available - (0=NO, 1=YES) Intelligent Shift Management available
Warning-buzzer - (0=NO, 1=YES) recommendation by ZF to activate warning-buzzer
Display spanner-symbol - (0=NO, 1=YES) recommendation by ZF to indicate spanner-symbol (Display)
Display stop - (0=NO, 1=YES) recommendation by ZF Display to indicate stop-symbol (Display)
Shift schemes of transmissions

2 4 Y6
1 Y6 3 R
10/12-Gear Scheme 16-Gear Scheme
Y4 Y5 Y4 Y5
Y2 Splitter K2
Y3 Splitter K1
Y8 Range (GP) low
Y9 Range (GP) high; Y7
Y7
R 2 1 3
3 von 44

fault-description fault detection system reaction fault-recovery
ISMA Starting gear
(KWP2000) FMI
condition
ISMA available
kind of failure
SPN-Prio
failureNo. (dec)
SPN
Astronic ZF-
2 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is Driving: Gear remains engaged, gears with present short-circuit at failure is no longer 0 1 5 3002 3
at output stage to Y2 activated the shift-valve outputs are blocked, engagement of chosen detected or after
(Valve Splitter; DD: alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
high, OD: low) occurs during shifting, gear remains engaged or ECU tries to shift
an adequate gear dependent on the current driving conditions. If this
is impossible the Main-Transmission is shifted to 'neutral'. Gears
with present short-circuit at the shift-valve outputs are blocked, ECU
attemps to engage the chosen alternative gears if possible.
(Valve Splitter; DD: alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
low, OD: high) occurs during shifting, gear remains engaged or ECU tries to shift
(Valve Select) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
occurs during shifting, gear remains engaged or ECU tries to shift
4 von 44

(Valve Shift) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
(Valve Range) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
5 von 44

(Valve Range) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
10 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is ECU output switches off. No gearshifting possible! No neutral After RESET and 0 1 5 3010 3
at output stage to Y10 activated shifting possible !Selected gear remains engaged; Vehicle start no short circuit to
(Main valve) permitted if gear <= lowest gear in high range group is engaged. ground
After ignition on, system not available.
12 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is ECU output switched off. No reverse light activation possible. No After RESET and 0 1 5 3012 3
at output stage to activated further system restrictions no short circuit to
reverse light relay (E- ground
Module)
15 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is no activation of output possible After RESET and 0 1 5 3015 3
at output stage to AD activated no short circuit to
24 ground
17 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is ECU output switches off. Driving: Upshifts during driving are After RESET and 0 1 5 3017 3
at output stage to Y1 activated controlled like downshifts. Input speed will be synchronized by no short circuit to
(inertia brake valve) engine speed. Upshifts blocked, when input target speed is below ground
engine idle speed. Increased shifting time. Stationary: Increased self
adjustment time. Increased shifting time when shifting out of neutral.
Increased PTO engagement time.
18 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is ECU output switches off. Function taken on by valve Y16 (clutch After RESET and 0 1 5 3018 3
at output stage to Y17 activated disengage fast). Decreased comfort for clutch functions. no short circuit to
(valve clutch ground
disengage slow)
19 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is ECU valve output switches off. Function taken on by valve Y14 After RESET and 0 1 5 3019 3
at output stage to Y15 activated (clutch engage fast). Decreased comfort for clutch functions. no short circuit to
(valve clutch engage ground
slow)
6 von 44

20 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 1 5 3020 3
at output stage to Y16 activated coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
(valve clutch Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
disengage fast) available.
21 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is ECU valve output switches off. Function taken on by valve Y15 After RESET and 0 1 5 3021 3
at output stage to Y14 activated (clutch engage slow). Increased shifting time. Decreased comfort no short circuit to
(valve clutch engage for clutch functions. ground
fast)
22 Short circuit to ground by ECU hardware,if output is Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 5 3022 3
at output ADVP activated coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
(wakeup control signal Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not RESET
for E-module, voltage available.
supply to display,
warning lamp, warning
buzzer, output speed
sensor 1)
26 CAN engine After timeout of the message, Applied substitute parameters (P1 to P7) from data application field After receiving a 1 1 4 3026 3
configuration timeout failure is set will be taken. Reduced functionality for automatic mode and start correct message or
gear calculation, if deviation of substitute parameters and real after RESET.
values is high. Target speed for downshifting can be reduced.
Quality of clutch disengagement for stopping can be reduced.
27 Error on ”engine Signal faulty or missing. Applied substitute parameters (P1 to P7) from data application field After receiving a 1 1 8 3027 3
configuration will be taken. Reduced functionality for automatic mode and start correct message or
message” (engine gear calculation, if deviation of substitute parameters and real after RESET.
configuration) values is high. Target speed for downshifting can be reduced.
Quality of clutch disengagement for stopping can be reduced.
28 Error on ”Actual Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 3028 3
driveline retarder - calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill, medium start after RESET.
percent torque” signal off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
(ERC1_DR)
29 Error on ”Engine no actual status available There are no downshift requests coming from retarder to increase Signal available or 1 1 8 3029 3
coolant load increase” engine speed to improve cooling power. after RESET.
signal (ERC1_DR)
7 von 44

30 Error on ”Driveline Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 3030 3
retarder configuration calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
message” (Driveline off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
retarder configuration)
31 Error on ”Actual engine Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 3031 1
retarder - percent calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
torque” signal off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions. No
(ERC1_ER) information about engine brake torque. If exhaust brake is active,
shifting quality at start of shifting may be poor. Engine brake is
considered not active.
32 Error on ”Engine Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 3032 3
retarder configuration calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
message” (Engine off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
retarder configuration)
33 CAN ”Engine retarder After timeout of the message, No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic After receiving a 0 0 4 3033 3
configuration” timeout failure is set calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start correct message or
off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions. after RESET.
34 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Driving: Gear remains engaged, gears with present short-circuit at failure is no longer 0 1 10 3002 1
stage to Y2 (Valve activated the shift-valve outputs are blocked, engagement of chosen detected or after
Splitter) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
Splitter) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
8 von 44

Select) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
Select) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
Shift) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
Shift) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
9 von 44

stage to Y8(Valve activated the shift-valve outputs are blocked, engagement of chosen detected or after
Range) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
Range) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
42 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not No gearshifting possible! No neutral shifting possible! Selected gear No interruption and 0 1 10 3010 3
stage to Y10 (Main activated remains engaged; Vehicle start permitted if gear <= lowest gear in output not
valve) high range group is engaged. After ignition on, system not available activated or after
RESET.
44 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not No reverse light activation possible. No further system restrictions No interruption and 1 1 10 3044 3
stage to reverse light activated output not
relay (E-Module) activated or after
RESET.
47 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not no activation of output possible No interruption and 1 1 10 3047 3
stage to AD 24 activated output not
activated or after
RESET.
49 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Driving: Upshifts during driving are controlled like downshifts. Input No interruption and 0 1 10 3049 3
stage to Y1 (inertia activated speed will be synchronized by engine speed. Upshifts blocked, output not
brake valve) when input target speed is below engine idle speed. Increased activated or after
shifting time. Stationary: Increased self adjustment time. Increased RESET.
shifting time when shifting out of neutral.
10 von 44

50 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Function taken on by valve Y16 (clutch disengage fast) Decreased No interruption and 0 1 10 3050 3
stage valve Y17 (clutch activated comfort. output not
disengage slow) activated or after
RESET.
51 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Function taken on by valve Y14 (clutch engagement slow) No interruption and 0 1 10 3051 3
stage valve Y15 (clutch activated Decreased comfort. output not
engage slow) activated or after
RESET.
52 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Function taken on by valve Y17 (clutch disengage slow). Increased No interruption and 0 1 10 3052 3
stage valve Y16 (clutch activated shifting time. Decreased comfort. output not
disengage fast) activated or after
RESET.
53 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Function taken on by valve Y15 (clutch engage slow). Increased No interruption and 0 1 10 3053 3
stage to large Y14 activated shifting time. Decreased comfort. output not
(clutch engage fast) activated or after
RESET.
54 Interruption at output by ECU hardware,if output not Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 10 3022 1
ADVP (wakeup control activated (detection only coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
signal for E-module, during initialization) Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not RESET
voltage supply to available.
display, warning lamp,
warning buzzer, output
speed sensor 1)
66 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware,if output not Driving: Gear remains engaged, gears with present short-circuit at failure is no longer 0 1 6 3002 1
(Valve Splitter) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
11 von 44

(Valve Splitter) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
12 von 44

(Valve range low) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
(Valve range high) alternative gears is possible. Driving and shifting: If the failure RESET
74 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware,if output not Driving: Gearshifting of all gears possible. Stationary: All starting No short circuit to 0 1 6 3010 1
at output stage to Y10 activated gears can be engaged. Driving with start off gear possible. positive and output
(Main valve) not activated or
after RESET.
76 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware,if output not Reverse light permanently switched on. No other functional After RESET and 1 1 6 3076 1
at output stage to activated restrictions. no short circuit to
reverse light relay (E- positive.
Module)
13 von 44

79 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware,if output not output permanent active No short circuit to 1 1 6 0 3
at output stage to AD activated positive and output
24 not activated or
after RESET.
81 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware,if output not Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Shift of start off gears No short circuit to 0 1 6 3017 3
at output stage to Y1 activated possible. Main valve will be only activated during shifting, if clutch is positive and output
(inertia brake valve) opened. Start off possible. not activated or
after RESET.
82 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware Gearshifting generally blocked, system not available. Driving and no short circuit to 0 1 6 3018 3
at output stage to valve gear engaged: Attempt to keep clutch engaged (prevention with positive or after
Y17 (clutch disengage engagement valves). Stationary: Engagement valves are switched RESET.
slow) off, automatic neutral shifting when clutch is disengaged.
83 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware Gearshifting generally blocked, system not available. Driving: no short circuit to 0 1 6 3019 1
at output stage to valve Required clutch position maintained via disengagement valve. positive or after
Y15 (clutch engage Stationary: Automatic neutral shifting after a certain time. RESET.
slow)
84 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware E-Modul switches off. No shift lever information. No display no short circuit to 0 1 6 3020 1
at output stage to valve information (display dark), warning buzzer not available; warning positive or after
Y16 (clutch disengage lamp not available. Output speed signal 1 will be replaced by RESET.
fast) redundant information. Output ADVP is switched off, Failure is set
back. ISMA is available but no detection of shift lever position over
E-modul; failure display is not possible
85 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware Gearshifting generally blocked, system not available. Driving: no short circuit to 0 1 6 3021 1
at output stage to valve Required clutch position maintained via disengagement valve. positive or after
Y14 (clutch engage Stationary: Automatic neutral shifting after a certain time. RESET.
fast)
86 Short circuit to positive by ECU hardware,if output not 1. After ignition off/on Failure will be detected during initialization. E- After RESET 0 1 6 3022 1
at output ADVP activated (detection only Modul does not switch off. Display can not be switched off. No
(wakeup control signal during initialization) restrictions on system availability. After ignition off, display is
for E-module, voltage flashing EE. 2. During operation No restrictions on system
supply to display, availability.
warning lamp, warning
buzzer, output speed
sensor 1)
14 von 44

90 Communication error 1. Timeout detection, if no There is no differentiation, whether P1 does not receive data from after RESET, if the 0 0 9 3090 3
between controller 1 datas are coming from other P2 or vice versa. If no communication will be detected between failure will not be
and controller 2 (ECU processor. 2. Checksum error processors during initialization (after ignition on), P1 initiates a reset sensed
failure) of data messages between P1 on P2. If a failure is detected during driving, no reset will be initiated.
and P2. 3. If initialization System reaction Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch
datas from P1 are not opens, when coming to standstill. At standstill automatic neutral
complete received in P2, P2 shifting. No further gearshifting possible. System not available.
does request datas again with
a defined repetition number. If
data transfer failed after
repetition attempts, failure will
be set.
91 CAN EBC1 timeout After timeout of the message, No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic After receiving a 0 0 4 3091 1
failure is set calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start correct message or
92 Error on ”ABS active” Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 563 3
signal (EBC1) calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
93 Error on ”ASR engine Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 561 3
control active” signal calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
(EBC1) off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
94 Error on ”ASR brake Signal faulty or missing. No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 8 562 3
control active” signal calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
(EBC1) off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
95 Error on ”Cruise Signal faulty or missing. No other functional restrictions Signal available or 0 1 8 595 3
control active” signal after RESET.
(CCVS)
96 Error on ”Cruise Signal faulty or missing. No other functional restrictions, gear hunting in cruise control Signal available or 1 1 8 86 3
control set speed” possible after RESET.
(CCVS)
15 von 44

97 Error on ”Engine 1.Signal faulty or missing Driving: Time based control of clutch during shifting. Decreased 1.Signal available 0 1 8 190 3
speed” signal (EEC1) 2.Engine speed > plausible clutch comfort after shifting. Clutch does open below fixed value (No and engine speed
value clutch opening according coasting condition) Engine speed < plausible value
governor during upshift does not work. Stationary: No special 2.After Reset
manoeuvering operation possible. Time based control of clutch
during starting off. Decreased clutch comfort of manoeuvering and
starting.
98 Error on transmission 1.Speed gradient > upper Driving: Increased shifting time. During upshifting and downshifting 1.Input_speed > 0 1 8 161 3
input speed signal limit clutch will be partially closed when t/m in neutral to substitute input minimum value and
2.input_rpm > plausible value speed by engine speed. If gear is engaged, input speed is < plausible value
3. input_rpm = 0 and gear is substituted by output speed. Stationary: Increased shifting time. and clutch is
engaged and outputspeed > Decreased clutch comfort in manoeuvering and starting. closed and
minimum value and difference between
outputspeed > minimum value input_speed and
4.During selfadjust-ment when eng._speed <
clutch is closed and threshold and
input_speed < minimum value input_speed >
and eng._speed > minimum minimum value.
value 2.Input_speed >
5.Gear is engaged and clutch minimum value and
is closed and difference speed < plausible value
between input and engine and output_speed
speed > threshold and > minimum value
outputspeed > minimum value and gear engaged
and outputspeed > minimum and difference
value between input
speed and
outputspeed*i_gear
< threshold
3.After RESET
16 von 44

99 Error on output speed 1.Output speed 1 gradient Output speed signal will be calculated depending on system 1.No gradient 1 1 8 3099 1
signal 1 >upper limit application from redundant output speed information. Redundant failure detection
2.Output speed 1 > plausible speed information will be taken depending on application from and difference
value vehicle speed signal via CAN OR output speed signal from CAN Output speed_1
3.Output speeds not plausible tachograph. Manual shifting of all gears possible. and output
with each other. Erronous speed_2 <
output speed defined by threshold and both
plausibility test with input output speeds >
speed minimum value.
2.After RESET
(including gradient
failure detection)
100 Error on output speed Signal faulty or missing. If outspeed signal 1 is available, no functional restrictions of Signal available or 1 1 8 191 3
signal 2 system. after RESET.
101 Error on both output 1.Output speed 1 and 2 = 0, Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 0 8 3101 3
speed signals gear engaged and coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
input_speed > minimum value Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
2.Output speed 1 and 2 = 0, available.
gear engaged and clutch
closed and engine _speed >
minimum value
3.Output speed signal 1 and
output speed 2 are faulty
102 Plausibility error No shifting running and Driving: Gearshifting blocked during driving including neutral shift After RESET 0 1 3 3102 3
between transmission engaged gear > attempt. Stationary: Start off gears can be engaged. Driving with
input speed and out- Testgang_plausib and start off gear possible.
put speed difference between input
speed and
output_speed_1*i_gear >
drz_delta_n_tol (ratio input
speed to output speed not
according to ratio of engaged
gear.
104 High voltage (Vehicle Circuit voltage > limit No system restrictions while driving. circuit voltage 1 1 1 158 4
electrical system threshold If fault occurs before 'Ignition ON' (key 15) the transmission does within valid range
voltage too high) not get out of the check phase. or after RESET.
17 von 44

105 Low voltage (Vehicle Circuit voltage < limit Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Clutch valves will be controlled circuit voltage 0 1 2 158 3
electrical system threshold independent on voltage level. If PTO is engaged and relay cannot within valid range
voltage too low) be kept active, PTO will be disengaged. Subsequent failure or after RESET.
detection of all failures during low voltage will be supressed.
Stationary: Gearshifting blocked. If PTO is engaged and relay
cannot be kept active, PTO will be disengaged. If gear is engaged
and driver switches off ignition, attempt to shift to neutral is allowed
independent on voltage level. Subsequent failure detection of all
failures during low voltage will be supressed. ECU will be switched
off independent on successful neutral shifting after time out.
107 Stabilised voltage Voltage AU out of range(see Driving: Clutch is disengaged and engaged by time control. Voltage at AU 0 1 2 3107 3
supply at output AU ADC_AU_Ausfallschwelle) Stationary: Manoeuvering not possible. If start does not occur within within valid range
(clutch sensor supply) certain time, transmission is automatically shifted to neutral. New and RESET
out of valid range start off gear must be engaged by selector lever. Decreased clutch
comfort during start off.
108 Error in selector lever By plausibility test of switches Following item describes failure reaction of ZF selector lever with 1. Valid shift lever 1 1 9 3108 3
or tip lever in selector lever. three D-positions , one N and one R position and tip lever with neutral signal
position G (middle position) , S (search function) , + and -.General (rotary switch at
function (also without failure active): After ignition off/on , a gear can neutral) 2. After
be only shifted, if rotary switch once has been in neutral position. Reset
Failure reaction is depending on driving situation and on gear
engaged. 1.Failure on tip lever:-> No shifting possible. At standstill,
start off gear selected by rotary switch will be engaged. Driving with
selected start off gear possible (forward and reverse). 2.Failure on
rotary switch: If a gear is engaged during driving, no gear shifting is
possible. At standstill start off gear according last known (stored)
Dx position will be shifted. Driving with selected start off gear
possible. If at standstill neutral is engaged, no gearshifting is
possible -> system not available.
18 von 44

110 ZF CAN timeout ZF-CAN informations can`t be 1. After ignition off/on: Failure will be detected during initialization. After receiving a 1 1 4 3110 3
transmitted and received; No shift lever information. Failure code will be indicated correct message or
failure after timeout automatically on display alternating with gear information. System after RESET.
not available. 2. During operation: No gearchange possible. When
coming to standstill, last selected (via rotary switch) startoff gear
will be automatically engaged. Continuous driving only with startoff
gear possible. If reverse gear has been engaged, t/m will
automatically shifted to neutral. No shift lever information. Failure
code will be indicated automatically on display alternating with gear
information.
111 CAN ”Time/Date” After timeout of the message, Information is used for clutch load calculation. If information is After RESET 1 1 4 3111 3
timeout failure is set missing, ECU switch off time cannot be calculated. Because of that
clutch cooling behavior cannot be calculated correctly. After ignition
off/on the actual clutch load value will be set to zero.
112 Error on ”Time/Date” Signal faulty or missing. Information is used for clutch load calculation. If information is Signal available or 1 1 8 3112 3
signals missing, ECU switch off time cannot be calculated. Because of that after RESET.
clutch cooling behavior cannot be calculated correctly. After ignition
off/on the actual clutch load value will be set to zero.
113 Error on ”Driveline After timeout of the message, No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 0 0 4 3113 3
retarder configuration” failure is set calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill medium start after RESET.
timeout off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
114 Clutch engaged Clutch engaged Standstill: shift to neutral, after neutral system available After RESET, after 0 0 0 3114 3
unintentionally in unintentionally in standstill, neutral, clutch
standstill, gear gear engaged open
engaged
117 Error in clutch self- No clutch stroke change in System not available After RESET 0 0 0 3117 3
adjustment process spite of piloted valves
Condition.: · no clutch stroke
sensor failure· no engine_rpm
error, · no input_rpm error
19 von 44

118 Clutch does not No clutch stroke change in Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 1 0 3118 3
disengage spite of piloted coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
disengagement valves Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
condition: no engine_rpm available.
failure, no input_rpm failure,
no clutch stroke sensor
failureengine_rpm and input
_rpm > min. rpm, clutch not
disengaged, allowed switch-
on-time eceeded
119 Clutch does not Driving / Stationary:Clutch Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 1 0 3119 3
engage / does not sensor does not recognize coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
transmit engine torque engagementEng._rpm <> Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
input_rpmCondition: no available.
eng._rpm failure, no
input_rpm failure, no clutch
stroke sensor failure,
engine_rpm and input_rpm >
n_min., clutch not engaged,
allowed switch-on-time
eceeded
120 Mechanical failure of Clutch does not disengage in Function taken on by redundant valve.Decreased clutch comfort After RESET 0 1 0 3120 3
small disengagement spite of piloted valves (3
clutch valve times)
121 Mechanical failure of Clutch does not disengage in Function taken on by redundant valve.Decreased clutch comfort After RESET 0 1 0 3121 3
large disengagement spite of piloted valves (3
clutch valve times)
122 Mechanical failure of Clutch does not engage in Function taken on by redundant valve.Decreased clutch comfort After RESET 0 1 0 3122 3
small engagement spite of piloted valves (3
clutch valve times)
123 Mechanical failure of Clutch does not engage in Function taken on by redundant valve.Decreased clutch comfort After RESET 0 1 0 3123 3
large engagement spite of piloted valves (3
clutch valve times)
20 von 44

124 Error on clutch travel Clutch stroke sensor signal Driving: Clutch is disengaged and engaged by time control. After RESET and 0 1 0 3124 3
signal out of range (see Stationary: Manoeuvering not possible. If start does not occur within plausible voltage
ADC_Kup_Ausfallschwelle) certain time, transmission is automatically shifted to neutral. New signal
or start off gear must be engaged by selector lever. Decreased clutch
Increase of input shaft speed comfort during start off.
while take up if clutch position
signal indicates an open
clutch
or
Decrease of difference
beween engine speed and
input shaft speed in standstill
if clutch position indicates an
open clutch
or
decrease of engine speed
below idle speed while stop if
clutch position signal indicates
an open clutch
126 Error on pressure Voltage at analog input out of No system restrictions on availability, íf external air supply is If voltage level is 0 1 3 3126 3
sensor signal range (see sufficient. No air pressure indication AL on display in case, air within plausibel
ADC_Drucksensor_Ausfall) pressure is not sufficient. Self adjustment of transmission and clutch range or after
is done time based and not related to the sensor signal. Time for RESET.
adjustment could be longer.
127 Error on ECU Voltage level is out of range No system restrictions on availability. If voltage level is 0 1 3 3127 1
temperature sensor (see within plausibel
signal ADC_ECU_Temp_Ausfall) range or after
RESET.
129 No shift sensor signal by ECU hardware Driving: When failure occurs during shifting, gear engaged signal is After RESET 0 1 6 3129 3
(Short circuit to transmitted based on time control. Further gearshifting blocked.
positive) Only shifting out of neutral possible Stationary: Neutralshifting will
be verified by select test procedure. Engagement of starting gears
possible. Change of starting gears possible. Main valve and gear
valves remain active until clutch engagement exceeds defined
threshold or driving condition is detected (to overcome tooth-to-
tooth)
21 von 44

(Short circuit to transmitted based on time control. Further gearshifting blocked.
ground) Only shifting out of neutral possible Stationary: Neutralshifting will
tooth)
(Interruption) transmitted based on time control. Further gearshifting blocked.
Only shifting out of neutral possible Stationary: Neutralshifting will
tooth)
132 Self adjustment error Sensor value outside of self With ignition off, t/m will be automatically switched to neutral. With After RESET 0 1 0 3132 3
of shift sensor adjustment range with ignition on, valve Y6 and Y7 (neutral) will be switched on together
sufficient air pressure and with main air valve Y10. If sensor value is outside of neutral self
three attempts to teach in had adjustment range and air pressure is sufficient, ECU tries three
been not successful. Sensor times to adjust neutral position. If neutral position could not be
value outside of self adjusted, self adjustment failure will be set. If air pressure is not
adjustment range with faulty sufficient and neutral could not be adjusted, no adjustment failure
air pressure sensor, and a will be set. If air pressure sensor is faulty, N will be adjusted one
maximum number of attempts time. If neutral could not be reached, a waiting time will be started.
to teach in had been not After waiting time has past, neutral adjustment will be tried again.
successful. The adjustment procedure will be repeated until a defined number of
attempts. If the maximum number of attempts will be exceeded,
then self adjustment failure will be set. Stationary: Engagement of
starting gears out of neutral possible, if air pressure is sufficient.
(Gear engaged signal created via time control) Neutral position will
be verified by select procedure. If air pressure is not sufficient,
shifting is blocked. Driving: Gearshifting blocked
22 von 44

133 No gate select sensor by ECU hardware Driving: Only forward gears can be selected, which are allocated in After RESET 0 1 6 3133 3
signal (Short circuit to opposite shift-position of the reverse gear. If failure occurs during
positive) shifting, the target gate will be engaged by time control. Stationary:
All allowed starting gears can be switched, whose positions are
allocated in opposite shift-position of the reverse gear. No reverse
gear shiftable.
signal (Short circuit to opposite shift-position of the reverse gear. If failure occurs during
ground) shifting, the target gate will be engaged by time control. Stationary:
gear shiftable.
signal (Interruption) opposite shift-position of the reverse gear. If failure occurs during
shifting, the target gate will be engaged by time control. Stationary:
gear shiftable.
136 Gate select sensor self Sensor value outside self With ignition off select cylinder will be switched into the gate of high 1. After successful 0 1 0 3136 1
adjustment error adjustment range with forward-gears. In case of electrical fault at select valve, only engagement of
sufficient air pressure and possible gate will be adjusted. gate 2. After
three attempts to teach in had Engine stopped: If select sensor value is outside of self adjustment RESET
been not successful Sensor range and air pressure is sufficient, then ECU tries once to adjust
value outside self adjustment gate allocated to the high forward-gears. If it's not possible to adjust
range with faulty air pressure this gate, the gate allocated to the low forward-gears will be
after waiting time and a selected. If this adjustment is also not possible, ECU selects again
maximum number of attempts the previous gate. The adjustment procedure will be repeated three
to teach in had been not times. If no adjustment is possible at all, after third attempt a self
successful. adjustment error will be set. If select sensor value is outside of self
adjustment range and air pressure is not sufficient, no select
position will be adjusted. Engine running: If select sensor value is
outside of self adjustment range and air pressure is sufficient, then
ECU tries once to adjust gate allocated to the high forward-gears. If
it's not possible to adjust this gate, the gate allocated to the low
forward-gears will be selected. If this adjustment is also not
possible, ECU selects again the previous gate. The adjustment
procedure will be repeated three times.If no adjustment is possible
23 von 44

at all, after third attempt a self adjustment error will be set. If select
sensor value is outside of self adjustment range and air pressure is
not sufficient or air pressure sensor is faulty, then ECU tries once to
adjust gate allocated to the high forward-gears. If it's not possible to
adjust this gate, the gate allocated to the low forward-gears will be
selected. If this adjustment is also not possible, ECU selects again
the previous gate. The adjustment procedure will be repeated three
times. If no adjustment is possible at all, after third attempt a waiting
time will be started. After waiting time has past, gate adjustment will
be tried again. The adjustment procedure will be repeated until a
defined number of attempts. If the maximum number of attempts
will be exceeded, then self adjustment failure will be set. For all
cases: If no gate could be adjusted, no gear shifting is possible.
System is not available. If only one gate could be adjusted, gear
shiftings in this gate are possible. Attempt to shift gear into not
adjusted position during driving and standstill is allowed If select
cylinder reaches adjustment range, adjustment failure will be reset.
If select cylinder does not reach adjustment range, last gear will be
reengaged. Subsequent select shifting failure will be supressed.
137 No range change by ECU hardware Driving: Range group shift during driving blocked. Only gears in After RESET 0 1 6 3137 1
group (GP) sensor engaged range group can be changed. If failure occurs during range
signal (Short circuit to shifting, range group will be engaged by time control. Only gears in
positive) engaged range group can be shifted. Stationary: All start off gears
can be engaged. Low range group will be engaged by time control.
Main valve and range valve remain active until clutch engagement
exceeds defined threshold or driving condition is detected (to
overcome tooth-to-tooth of range group)
signal (Short circuit to shifting, range group will be engaged by time control. Only gears in
ground) engaged range group can be shifted. Stationary: All start off gears
24 von 44

signal (Interruption) shifting, range group will be engaged by time control. Only gears in
engaged range group can be shifted. Stationary: All start off gears
140 Self adjustment error Sensor value outside self With ignition off , range group remains in last engaged position. 1.After successful 0 1 0 3140 3
of range change group adjustment range Engine stationary: With ignition on ECU checks the range sensor range group
sensor in position fast value. If sensor value is within defined end position range high or engagement
low, the appropriate range valve combination will be activated and 2.After RESET
together with main valve Y10 range end position will be adjusted. If
range position is not within defined end position range and air
supply is sufficient, ECU tries to shift once into high position. If
range position is not within defined end position range and air
supply is not sufficient or air pressure sensor is faulty, no range
position will be shifted. Engine running: With ignition on ECU checks
the range sensor value. If sensor value is within defined end
position range high or low, the appropriate range valve combination
will be activated and together with main valve Y10 range end
position will be adjusted.If range position is not within defined end
position range , clutch remains closed and ECU tries to shift into
high position. If high position could not be engaged, range shifts into
low position. If low position could not be engaged, ECU tries three
times to engage high or low position. If air supply is sufficient and all
attempts failed to engage range, a self adjustment failure will be
set.If air supply is not sufficient or air pressure sensor is faulty and
range sensor is not within defined end position range , clutch
remains closed and ECU tries to shift into high position. If high
position could not be engaged, range shifts into low position. If low
position could not be engaged, ECU tries three times to engage
high or low position. If range could not be engaged, ECU waits a
defined time and retry range adjustment in high or low position. The
adjustment procedure will be repeated until a defined number of
25 von 44

then self adjustment failure will be set. For all cases:If no range
position could be adjusted, no gear shifting is possible. System is
not available. If only low range could be adjusted, gear shifting in
low range group is possible. If only high range could be adjusted,
gear shifting in high range group is possible. Start off only in lowest
gear in high range position possible. Attempt to shift gear into not
adjusted positionduring driving and standstill is allowed. If range
cylinder reaches adjustment range, adjustment failure will be reset.
If range cylinder does not reach adjustment range, last gear will be
reengaged. Subsequent range shifting failure will be supressed
141 No splitter group (GV) by ECU hardware Shifting of splitter group blocked. Further driving only possible with After RESET 0 1 6 3141 3
sensor signal (Short last selected splitter group position. If desired gear is not shiftable,
circuit to positive) next higher gear will be engaged. If failure occurs during shifting,
splitter will be engaged by time control
sensor signal (Short last selected splitter group position. If desired gear is not shiftable,
circuit to ground) next higher gear will be engaged. If failure occurs during shifting,
sensor signal last selected splitter group position. If desired gear is not shiftable,
(Interruption) next higher gear will be engaged. If failure occurs during shifting,
26 von 44

144 Splitter group (GV) Sensor value outside self With ignition off, splitter remains in last engaged position. Engine 1.After successful 0 1 0 3144 3
sensor self adjustment adjustment range stationary: With ignition on ECU checks the splitter sensor value. If range group
error sensor value is within defined end position range high or low, the engagement
appropriate splitter valve combination will be activated and together 2.After RESET
with main valve Y10 splitter end position will be adjusted. If splitter
position is not within defined end position range and air supply is
sufficient, ECU tries to shift once into high position. If splitter
position is not within defined end position range and air supply is not
sufficient or air pressure sensor is faulty, no splitter position will be
shifted. Engine running: With ignition on ECU checks the
splittersensor value. If sensor value is within defined end position
range high or low, the appropriate splitter valve combination will be
activated and together with main valve Y10 splitter end position will
be adjusted. If splitter position is not within defined end position
range , clutch remains closed and ECU tries to shift into high
position. If high position could not be engaged, splitter shifts into low
position. If low position could not be engaged, ECU tries three times
to engage high or low position. If air supply is sufficient and all
attempts failed to engage splitter, a self adjustment failure will be
set. If air supply is not sufficient or air pressure sensor is faulty and
splitter sensor is not within defined end position range ,clutch
remains closed and ECU tries to shift into high position. If high
position could not be engaged, splitter shifts into low position. If low
position could not be engaged, ECU tries three times to engage
high or low position. If splitter could not be engaged, ECU waits a
defined time and retry splitter adjustment in high or low position. The
adjustment procedure will be repeated until a defined number of
then self adjustment failure will be set. For all cases: If no splitter
position could be adjusted, no gear shifting is possible. System is
not available. If only low splitter could be adjusted, gear shifting in
low splitter group is possible. If only high splitter couldbe adjusted,
gear shifting in high splitter group is possible. Attempt to shift gear
into not adjusted positionduring driving and standstill is allowed. If
splitter cylinder reaches adjustment range, adjustment failure will be
reset. If splitter cylinder does not reach adjustment range, last gear
will be reengaged. Subsequent splitter shifting failures will be
27 von 44

supressed.
145 Range change group Range change group does not Driving: When shifting from low range group to high group, the 1.After successful 0 1 0 3145 3
(GP) disengagement leave the previous position highest gear in low range group will be shifted. When shifting from range change
error within defined time. high range group to low group, the lowest gear in high range group group shift 2.After
will be shifted. Stationary: If it is not possible to select low range RESET
group, the lowest gear in high range group is selected as starting
gear. New attempt to shift range group is allowed under all driving
conditions. No reverse gear in high range group possible.
146 Changeover error Range change group does not Driving and stationary: If selected range group could not be 1.After successful 0 1 0 3146 3
during range change change over to new position engaged, range cylinder tries to repeat engagement three times. If range change
group (GP) shifting within defined time selected range group could not be engaged, following gear will be group shift 2.After
shifted: When shifting from low range group to high group, the RESET
highest gear in low range group will be shifted. When shifting from
high range group to low group, the lowest gear in high range group
will be shifted. Stationary: If it is not possible to select low range
group, the lowest gear in high range group is selected as starting
gear. New attempt to shift range group is allowed under all driving
conditions.
28 von 44

147 Range change group Range change group does not Driving and stationary: If selected range group could not be 1.After successful 0 1 0 3147 1
(GP) does not engage reach end stop neither in new engaged, range cylinder tries to repeat engagement three times. If range change
nor in old position selected gear could not be engaged, old range position will be group shift 2.After
selected.If engagement into old range position failed, failure will be RESET
set.T/m shifts to neutral. New attempt to shift range group is allowed
under all driving conditions.
148 Splitter (GV) does not Splitter group does not leave If failure occurs, t/m shifts into next upper gear. Following gear 1.After successful 0 1 0 3148 1
disengage the previous position within restrictions are valid: Driving: The highest gear which can be splitter group shift
defined time. selected, is the highest gear in last engaged splitterposition.The 2.After RESET
lowest gear which can be selected is the lowest gear in last
engaged splitterposition. Stationary:The highest gear which can be
selected, is the highest start off gear in last engaged
splitterposition.The lowest gear which can be selected is the lowest
start off gear in last engaged splitterposition.
149 Change over error Splitter group does not If failure occurs, t/m shifts into next upper gear. Following gear 1.After successful 0 1 0 3149 3
during splitter shifting change over to new position restrictions are valid: Driving: The highest gear which can be splitter group shift
within defined time. selected, is the highest gear in last engaged splitterposition.The 2.After RESET
lowest gear which can be selected is the lowest gear in last
engaged splitterposition. Stationary:The highest gear which can be
selected, is the highest start off gear in last engaged
splitterposition.The lowest gear which can be selected is the lowest
start off gear in last engaged splitterposition.
150 Splitter (GV) does not Splitter group does not reach System not available. New attempt to shift splitter group is allowed 1.After successful 0 1 0 3150 3
engage end stop neither in new nor in under all driving conditions. splitter group shift
old position. detection only in 2.After RESET
standstill, during driving is GV
- shifting active up to stillstand
151 Selector cylinder does Selector cylinder does not Driving: When failure occurs during shifting, t/m shifts back into the 1.After successful 0 1 0 3151 3
not disengage leave the previous position last gear. If last gear is not shiftable because of overspeed selection process
condition, the next possible target gear, which is next to last gear 2.After RESET
will be shifted. When highest shiftable gear could not be shifted
because of overspeed condition, then t/m shifts to neutral.
Stationary: If target select position could not be engaged,t/m shifts
into neutral. New shifting of start off gear must be initiated by
selector switch.
29 von 44

152 Change over error Selector cylinder does not Driving: When failure occurs during shifting, gate cylinder shifts back 1.After successful 0 1 0 3152 3
during gate selection change over to new gate into last gate position and t/m shifts back into the last gear. If last selection process
procedure gear is not shiftable because of overspeed condition, the next 2.After RESET
possible target gear, which is next to last gear will be shifted. When
highest shiftable gear could not be shifted because of overspeed
condition, then t/m shifts to neutral. Stationary: If target select
position could not be engaged,t/m shifts into neutral. New shifting of
start off gear must be initiated by selector switch.
153 Selector cylinder does Selector cylinder does not Driving and stationary: T/m shifts into neutral position. New shifting 1.After successful 0 1 0 3153 1
not engage engage neither in new gate of gear must be initiated by selector switch. If no gate could be selection process
end position nor in old gate engaged, system not available. 2.After RESET
end position. The demanded
new endposition AND the
starting position cannot be
engaged/sensed AND after
additional new shifting trials
the demanded endposition
cannot be engaged/sensed. If
after these new shifting trials
no endposition is
engaged/sensed the failure
will be set.
154 Main transmission gear Gear engaged signal does not Driving: Clutch engages in previous gear. Next attempt to shift must 1.Neutral position 0 1 0 3154 1
does not disengage disappear when clutch is dis- be initiated by selector switch. Stationary: Gearshifting only could be reached
en-gaged and Neutral is permitted after neutral signal has been reached. Start off and driving 2.After RESET
requested can be tried with engaged gear, if gear is equal or lower than lowest
gear in range high position.
30 von 44

155 Main transmission gear Driving:· 1.Shift cylinder does Driving: T/m remains into neutral, if neutral position could not be left. 1.Any main gear 0 1 0 3155 1
does not engage not leave neutral position. New shifting of gear must be initiated by selector switch. If neutral could be engaged
Stationary:· 1.Shift cylinder position has been left, but gear does not engage within defined time, 2.After RESET
does not leave neutral shift cylinder will be shifted back into neutral position and same
position· 2.Clutch exceeds main gear will be tried to engage again. This procedure will be
after several gearshifts repeated continuously. Stationary: T/m remains into neutral, if
defined engagement threshold neutral position could not be left. If neutral position has been left,
during tooth-to-tooth contact clutch starts to close to overcome tooth-to-tooth contact. If gear
and gear does not engage. does not engage after several gearshifts if clutch has exceeded a
maximum engagement stroke, t/m will be shifted back to neutral.
New shifting of start off gear must be initiated by selector switch.
156 Wrong gear shifting Shift sensor detects shifting Automatic neutral shifting. Clutch remains opened, if neutral could 1.Correct gear 0 1 0 3156 1
into wrong shift direction not be shifted. New shifting of gear must be initiated by selector shifting 2.After
switch RESET
158 Shift sensor signal Main gear sensor stroke Main valve will be activated automatically together with gear valves 1.gear Gear end 1 1 0 3158 1
leaves engaged exceeds maximum allowed to shift into end position. If gear has been disengaged completely, a position has been
position during driving stroke during vehicle suitable gear depending on speed condition will be shifted reached 2.After
operation without shifting automatically. Reset
active.
159 Range-change group Range sensor stroke exceeds Main valve will be activated automatically together with gear valves 1.Range end 1 1 0 3159 3
sensor signal leaves maximum allowed stroke to shift into end position. If gear has been disengaged completely, a position has been
engaged position during vehicle operation suitable gear depending on speed condition will be shifted reached. 2.After
during driving without shifting active. automatically. Reset
160 Splitter sensor signal Splitter sensor stroke exceeds Main valve will be activated automatically together with gear valves 1.Splitter end 1 1 0 3160 3
leaves engaged maximum allowed stroke to shift into end position. If gear has been disengaged completely, a position has been
position during driving during vehicle operation suitable gear depending on speed condition will be shifted reached 2.After
without shifting active. automatically. Reset
163 Engine does not react No change of engine speed Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Starting allowed. 1. Engine speed 0 1 0 3163 3
on torque intervention when intervention via CAN Decreased clutch functionality and comfort. increase
interface possible(Test will
be started
automatically each
time with t/m in
Neutral) 2.After
RESET
31 von 44

164 Error on ”Drivers Signal faulty or missing. Driving: No calculation of vehicle weight and driving resistance Signal available or 0 0 8 3164 1
demand engine possible. No calculation of startoff gear possible. Drivers demand after RESET.
percent torque” (EEC1) will be substituted by accelerator pedal position information. After
shifting finished, fuel quantity will be released up to accelerator
pedal value. Clutch engagement quality could be reduced. During
cruise contol operation no fuel quantity release is possible, because
accelerator pedal value is 0. After clutch is engaged, fuel quantity
will be released by EDC. => Bad shift quality after shifing.
Stationary: Start off possible. When coming to standstill, medium
start off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
165 Error on ”Accelerator Signal faulty or missing. Driving: No calculation of vehicle weight and driving resistance Signal available or 0 0 8 91 1
pedal position” (EEC2) possible. No calculation of startoff gear possible. Accelerator pedal after RESET.
position will be substituted by drivers demand information. Shift
quality could be reduced. Stationary: Start off possible. When
coming to standstill, medium start off gear will be shifted.
Manoeuvering and startoff quality could be reduced.
166 Permanent idle signal Accelerator pedal position > Driving: Shifting during driving allowed. Stationary: No After RESET 0 1 0 3166 1
coast position (defined manoeuvering and startoff possible. System not available.
threshold) and idle signal
active
167 Error on ”Percent load Signal faulty or missing. No other functional restrictions Signal available or 0 1 8 92 1
at current speed” after RESET.
signal (EEC2)
168 No idle signal or error Idle signal faulty or missing Driving: No functional restrictions during driving. Stationary: After Signal available or 0 1 8 558 3
on ”idle signal switch” RESET AP or FP is shown on display as long as accelerator pedal after RESET.
signal (EEC2) or never value is in coast condition and idle signal is off. If idle signal does
active "idle signal" not appear within defined time, failure will be set and display
indication AC or FP disappears. ECU checks point P1 from engine
configuration (low idle speed).Start off will be allowed, if ECU
detects accelerator pedal value > threshold and engine speed
exceeds idle speed + defined speed threshold (-> verification of
start off intention)
169 Cut-off relay in ECU During system start test: Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 0 0 3169 1
does not switch off When cut-off relay is switched coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
off, digital outputs can be Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
32 von 44

switched on. available.
170 No voltage supply at During system start test:When Driving and Standstill: block shifting and clutchfunction - System not Voltage Key 30 0 0 0 3170 3
pin 30 or cut-off relay ignition is on, no voltage to available. State of clutch and transmission remains unchanged. over minimum or
in ECU does not switch power supply pins after RESET
on
171 Error on ”Actual engine Signal faulty or missing. Driving: No calculation of vehicle weight and driving resistance Signal available or 0 0 8 3171 3
percent torque” signal possible. No calculation of startoff gear possible. Actual engine after RESET.
(EEC1) percent torque will be substituted by drivers demand information.
Shift quality (fuel load reduction and fuel load release) could be
reduced. Stationary: Start off possible. When coming to standstill,
medium start off gear will be shifted. Warning for clutch overload
detection and reaction on overload detection could appear earlier.
173 Error on ”Brake switch” Signal faulty or missing OR Foot brake is considered active and in consequence, clutch Signal available 0 0 8 597 3
signal (CCVS) Foot brake signal permanent disengages always at foot brake related engine speed (higher OR with
on. Condition: No plausibility engine revolution) decreasing signal
error idle signal with edge or after
accelerator pedal, idle signal RESET.
not active, accelerator above
threshold.
174 Error on ”Kickdown Signal faulty or missing. No Kickdown operation mode possible. No other functional Signal available or 1 1 8 359 3
switch” signal (EEC2) restrictions. after RESET.
175 Error on ”Ignition lock” No ignition signal and engine Driving: Gearshifting in general blocked, as soon as no ignition on If ignition signal is 0 1 4 3175 3
signal (Key 15) running signal is detected (failure detection might be delayed). Standstill: If on (rising signal
engine is running , ECU does not switch off. Start off gear shiftable edge) or after
(forward and reverse). Driving with start off gear possible. If engine RESET.
is not running, t/m will be automatically shifted to neutral and ECU
switches off. No initialization of system possible. System not
available.
177 System-CAN Busoff System-CAN informations Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 4 3177 3
error can`t be transmitted and coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
received; failure after timeout Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not RESET
available.
33 von 44

178 CAN Errorwarning ERRWARNING Flag from the Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 4 3178 3
CAN-Controller coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not RESET
available.
179 CAN queue overrun Not all relevant CAN Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 0 3179 1
informations can be coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
transmitted within one cycle of Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not RESET
the ECU available.
180 CAN EEC1 timeout After timeout of the message, Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 4 3180 3
failure is set coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
available.
181 CAN EEC2 timeout After timeout of the message, Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when failure is no longer 0 0 4 3181 3
failure is set coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. detected or after
available.
182 CAN CCVS timeout After timeout of the message, Wheel based vehicle speed missing (redundant output speed After receiving a 0 0 4 3182 3
failure is set information 2, if output speed will not be taken from 2nd output correct message or
speed sensor or CAN tachograph). Service brake signal missing. In after RESET.
coast condition service brake signal is considered as active. Cruise
control active information missing. No calculation of vehicle weight
and driving resistance possible. No calculation of start off gear
possible. Subsequent single failure of message variables are
suppressed. Clutch disengages always at foot brake related engine
speed (higher engine revolution)
183 CAN ERC1_ER After timeout of the message, No calculation of vehicle weight and driving resistance possible. No After receiving a 0 0 4 3183 4
timeout failure is set calculation of startoff gear possible. No information about engine correct message or
brake torque. If exhaust brake is active, shifting quality at start of after RESET.
shifting may be poor. Engine brake is considered as not active. No
further functional restrictions.
184 CAN ERC1_DR After timeout of the message, No calculation of vehicle weight and driving resistance possible. No After receiving a 0 0 4 3184 3
timeout failure is set calculation of startoff gear possible. Medium start off gear will be correct message or
shifted. No further functional restrictions. after RESET.
34 von 44

188 ECU fault - wrong by software Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 0 0 3188 3
interrupt coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
available.
189 ECU fault - stack by software Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 0 0 3189 3
watch coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
available.
190 EOL EEPROM by software EOL values out of Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 0 0 3190 3
parameter out of valid range detection with coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
range initialization (ignition on). Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
available.
191 EOL EEPROM by software checksum of EOL Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 0 0 0 3191 3
parameter checksum parameter not correct coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
error detection with initialization Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
(ignition on). available.
192 ECU fault - EEPROM Values from serial EEPROM No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic After RESET and 0 0 0 3192 3
access failure not readable calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill, medium start EEPROM is
or off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions. readable
Checksum-Error of one or
more in EEPROM stored
values
(Only related to processor 2).
193 ECU temperature too ECU temperature on circuit Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when After RESET AND 0 0 1 3193 3
high board > coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. ECU temperature
C_ECU_TEMP_MAX_ZUL Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. Special display below threshold_1
and oil temperature > indication for ECU temperature too high alternating with gear
C_OEL_TEMP_MAX_ZUL. information. System not available.
(plausibility check) and
failures 128 not active. After
debouncing time failure will be
set.
194 Both sources for front Both sources for front axle ISMA is turned off. No other functional restrictions. One of both 0 0 8 3194 3
axle speed not speed are not available sources is
available available
35 von 44

195 Error on ”Total vehicleSignal faulty or missing. Information is used for clutch life time forecast. If information is Signal available or 1 1 8 245 3
distance” signal (VD) Failure will be only detected, if missing, no clutch life time forecast is possible. If information is after RESET.
reading of "Total vehicle available again, calculation of clutch life time forecast continues
distance" is applied by from last value.
parameter data field.
196 CAN ”Vehicle distance” After timeout of the message, Information is used for clutch life time forecast. If information is After receiving a 1 1 4 3196 3
timeout (VD) failure is set missing, no clutch life time forecast is possible. If information is correct message or
available again, calculation of clutch life time forecast continues after RESET.
from last value.
197 Error on "Front axle Signal faulty or missing and No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic Signal available or 1 1 8 904 3
speed" (WSI) WSI is selected as source for calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill, medium start after RESET.
front axle speed off gear will be shifted. No other functional restrictions.
198 Error on "Relative Signal faulty or missing and No other functional restrictions Signal available or 1 1 8 3198 3
wheel speeds" (WSI) WSI is selected as source for after RESET.
front axle speed
199 CAN WSI timeout After timeout of the message, No calculation of driving resistance possible. No automatic After receiving a 1 1 4 3199 3
failure is set calculation of start off gear. When coming to standstill, medium start correct message or
210 CAN TCO1 Timeout After timeout of the message, no calculation of dynamic tiresize and therefore restricted quality of After receiving a 1 1 4 3210 3
failure is set the automatic mode possible. If t/m output shaft speed is available, correct message or
no further function restrictions. Second output shaft speed is after RESET.
missing.
227 Application-Error by software during system Driving: Gearshifting blocked. Stationary: Clutch opens, when after RESET, if the 1 1 0 3227 3
database for CAN- start test after ignition on coming to standstill. Neutral automatically engaged at standstill. failure will not be
communication Gearshifting blocked, continued driving not possible. System not sensed
available.
36 von 44

ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN Aktiengesellschaft
Description: Technical customer information No. DIN Page 1
Add. Description: Failure effect list Bremsomat CAN V.1 6009 771 081 A4 of 42
This technical document may not be
copied or disclosed to third persons
without permission of ZF. Index No. Date Name Film
K4 ZFN 904 MODIFICATIONS
Issued: Checked: Approved:
Name B. Reisch P.Schmidtner B.Grupp
Dept. LPE2-RV TE-NL LPE2-R
Date 20.04.2004
ZF-Intarder
Failure effect list - Bremsomat CAN V.1
History of document
Date Remark
20.04.2004 1st edition
14.12.2004 2nd edition
confidential

Description: Technical customer information
Add. Description: Failure effect list Bremsomat CAN V.1
Contents
Error code Error text Page
01 11-11 hex Electrical defect on accumulator charge valve (short circuit to ground) 3
02 11-12 hex Electrical defect on accumulator charge valve (short circuit to + / battery) 4
03 11-13 hex Electrical defect on accumulator charge valve (interrupt / open circuit) 5
07 13-11 hex Electrical defect at "Intarder pilot lamp" (short circuit to ground) 6
08 13-12 hex Electrical defect at "Intarder pilot lamp" (short circuit to + / battery) 7
13 15-11 hex Electrical defect of brake light control (short circuit to ground) 8
14 15-12 hex Electrical defect of brake light control (short circuit to + / battery) 9
19 17-11 hex Electrical defect on output "cruise control switch-off" (short circuit to ground) 10
20 17-12 hex Electrical defect on output "cruise control switch-off" (short circuit to + / battery) 11
22 18-11 hex Power supply of brake level selector defective (short circuit to ground) 12
23 18-12 hex Power supply of brake level selector defective (short circuit to + / battery) 13
25 19-11 hex Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (short circuit to ground) 14
26 19-12 hex Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (short circuit to + / battery) 15
27 19-13 hex Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (interrupt / open circuit) 16
28 19-14 hex Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (resistance faulty) 17
29 21-11 hex Electrical defect of cut off channel of proportional solenoid valve (ADM1) (short circuit to ground) 18
30 21-12 hex Electrical defect of cut off channel of proportional solenoid valve (ADM1) (short circuit to + / battery) 19
34 31-15 hex Failure of output shaft speed signal 20
37 32-13 hex Electrical defect of temperature sensing (interrupt / open circuit or short circuit to + / battery) 21
38 32-11 hex Electrical defect of temperature sensing (short circuit to ground) 22
39 23-16 hex Defective diagnosis circuit of proportional solenoid valve (control unit / Intarder-ECU internal) (below lowest 23
limit)
40 23-17 hex Defective diagnosis circuit of proportional solenoid valve (control unit / Intarder-ECU internal) (above highest 24
41 71-13 hex Terminal 30 (+) interruption 25
42 72-17 hex Terminal 15 (+) overvoltage 26
43 72-16 hex Terminal 15 (+) undervoltage 27
44 33-18 hex Brake level selector inputs not plausible 28
46 82-18 hex Operating hours counter loss 29
47 83-18 hex Error memory loss 30
49 41-19 hex CAN-message EEC2 faulty/not received (SAE J1939) 31
51 84-15 hex Defect in INTARDER control unit (IT-ECU) 32
52 42-19 hex CAN-message TSC1 from braking system faulty/not received (SAE J1939) 33
53 43-19 dez CAN transmit error (queue overrun) 34
54 44-15 hex CAN-BusOff 35
55 45-19 hex CAN-message EBC1 faulty/not received (SAE J1939) 36
56 46-15 hex Communication error of CAN messages (acknowledge error) 37
57 47-19 hex CAN-message EEC1 faulty/not received (SAE J1939) 38
58 48-19 hex CAN-message TCO1 faulty/not received (SAE J1939) 39
62 49-19 hex CAN-message CCVS faulty/not received (SAE J1939) 40
Abbreviations 41
6009 771 081 2 / 42

Error code
internal: 1 SPN: 4001 Priority: 1
external: 11-11 hex FMI: 5 Freeze frame: 0
Error text
Electrical defect on accumulator charge valve (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of accumulator charge valve inactive, response time increasing
CAN bus: -
Possible cause of error
Wiring defective, accumulator charge valve (magnetic coil) defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and accumulator charge valve, check accumulator charge valve
(Internal resistance app. 130 Ohm at room temperature; measure on IT-ECU connector), possibly IT-
ECU replacement
Error detection
when: at ignition ON or output active
how: output diagnosis
Error undo
after ignition OFF - ON
ECU connector
Pin: AD1, Pin 1
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 3 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect on accumulator charge valve (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of accumulator charge valve inactive, response time increasing (line
permanently active due to short circuit)
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
ECU replacement
Error detection
when: at ignition ON or output inactive
Error undo
when Intarder inactive (current = 0 mA)
ECU connector
Pin: AD1, Pin 1
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 4 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect on accumulator charge valve (interrupt / open circuit)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of accumulator charge valve inactive, response time increasing
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
ECU replacement
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD1, Pin 1
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 5 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect at "Intarder pilot lamp" (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of "Intarder pilot lamp" inactive, Intarder braking not displayed
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, lamp defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and Intarder pilot lamp, check lamp, possibly IT-ECU replacement
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD2, Pin 29
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: no
6009 771 081 6 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect at "Intarder pilot lamp" (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of "Intarder pilot lamp" inactive, Intarder braking not displayed (line
continuously active due to short circuit, i.e. lamp continuously activated).
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and Intarder pilot lamp, possibly IT-ECU replacement
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD2, Pin 29
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: no
6009 771 081 7 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of brake light control (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of brake light resp. brake light relay inactive
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, brake light resp. brake light relay defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and brake light resp. brake light relay, check light resp. relay,
possibly IT-ECU replacement
Error detection
when: output active
Error undo
after ignition OFF - ON and output active
ECU connector
Pin: AD3, Pin 2
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 8 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of brake light control (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of brake light resp. brake light relay inactive (line continuously active due
to short circuit, i.e. brake light continuously activated)
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and brake light resp. brake light relay, check light resp. relay,
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD3, Pin 2
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 9 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect on output "cruise control switch-off" (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of digital "cruise control switch-off" inactive, cruise control deactivation
with brake step operation not possible
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, controlled relais resp. ECU input defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check wiring between IT ECU and relay resp. activated ECU, check relay resp. activated ECU,
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD6, Pin 52
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 10 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect on output "cruise control switch-off" (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
functional: Intarder-ECU control of digital "cruise control switch-off" inactive (cruise control is
continuously deactivated by short circuit)
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, controlled ECU input defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check wiring between IT ECU and relay resp. activated ECU, check relay resp. activated ECU,
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD6, Pin 52
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 11 / 42

Error code
Error text
Power supply of brake level selector defective (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU control of brake level selector inactive, Intarder activation via brake level
selector no longer possible
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, brake level selector defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and brake level selector, check brake level selector, possibly IT-ECU
replacement
Error detection
when: always
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD4, Pin 30
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: no
6009 771 081 12 / 42

Error code
Error text
Power supply of brake level selector defective (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU permanently controls the brake lever selector, Intarder functions not affected (line
permanently active due to short circuit)
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, brake level selector defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
replacement
Error detection
when: at ignition ON
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AD4, Pin 30
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 13 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU deactivates the Intarder; Intarder no longer available
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, proportional solenoid valve (magnetic coil) defective, IT-ECU output defective
Error rectification
Check wiring between Intarder ECU and proportional solenoid valve, check proportional solenoid valve
(internal resistance: app. 20 Ohm at -40 °C to app. 40 Ohm at 130 °C; measure on IT-ECU connector),
Error detection
when: with ignition ON or a proportional solenoid valve current above 50 mA
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AIP, Pin 4
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 14 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Error detection
when: always
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AIP, Pin 4
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 15 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (interrupt / open circuit)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Error detection
when: always
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AIP, Pin 4
ADM1, Pin 3
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 16 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of proportional solenoid valve control (AIP) (resistance faulty)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Error detection
when: with a proportional solenoid valve current above 50 mA
how: calculation of resistance
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: AIP, Pin 4
ADM1, Pin 3
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 17 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of cut off channel of proportional solenoid valve (ADM1) (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU deactivates the Intarder; Intarder no longer available (line permanently active due
to short circuit)
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Error detection
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: ADM1, Pin 3
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 18 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of cut off channel of proportional solenoid valve (ADM1) (short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Error detection
when: always
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: ADM1, Pin 3
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 19 / 42

Error code
Error text
Failure of output shaft speed signal
Error response
functional: Current limitation to 250 mA caused by the IT-ECU, Bremsomat no longer available
CAN bus: actual retarder torque (ERC1, Byte 2) = FEh,
intended retarder torque (ERC1, Byte 3) = FEh,
maximum available retarder torque (ERC1, Byte 8) = FEh
* vehicle without CAN tachograph (EF1):
Wiring defective, sensor defective, speed signal from tachograph faulty or not available, IT-ECU input
defective
* vehicle with CAN tachograph (TCO1):
Wiring defective, terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective, tachograph defective
Error rectification
* speed signal via EF1:
Check wiring, sensor, tachograph signal, possibly IT-ECU replacement
* speed signal via TCO1:
Check CAN-bus wiring, check terminating resistor, otherwise tachograph is defective
Error detection
when: * vehicle without CAN tachograph:
detection only if signal is lost when vehicle is in motion or through plausibility check
(vehicle speed > 20 km/h)
* vehicle with CAN tachograph:
if no TCO1-message has been received in this operating cycle, no passive TCO1-error is
present in fault memory and vehicle speed > 20 km/h (plausibility check)
how: if speed jump of > 200 rpm to < 60 rpm (signal loss) or because of plausibility check
between speed signal = 0 rpm and ”wheel based vehicle speed” (CCVS) for 3 s > 20 km/h
Error undo
* vehicle without CAN tachograph:
With a non-zero frequency value (Hz) (i.e. speed > 0 rpm) and at the same time speed < 200 rpm or
Intarder inactive (current = 0 mA)
* vehicle with CAN tachograph:
if a valid TCO1 is received again and the Intarder is switched off (current = 0 mA)
ECU connector
Pin: EF1, Pin 8
oder
CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 20 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of temperature sensing (interrupt / open circuit or short circuit to + / battery)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU limits the brake power to a max. permitted value of 100 kW
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, sensor defective, IT-ECU input defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and temperature sensor, check temperature sensor (measure
resistance on IT-ECU connector: app. 35 kOhm at 20°C to app. 3.5 kOhm at 80°C), possibly IT-ECU
replacement
Error detection
when: * with ignition ON:
after detection of an engine speed or output shaft speed and after an additional safety
period (30 sec if there is no change of the resistance value; extension to 60 sec in case of
slight changes)
* after ignition ON:
always
how: Resistance measurement and plausibility check with ignition ON
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: ER1, Pin 9
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 21 / 42

Error code
Error text
Electrical defect of temperature sensing (short circuit to ground)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU limits the brake power to a max. permitted value of 100 kW
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, sensor defective, IT-ECU input defective
Error rectification
Check of wiring between IT-ECU and temperature sensor, check temperature sensor (measure
resistance on IT-ECU connector: app. 35 kOhm at 20°C to app. 3.5 kOhm at 80°C), possibly IT-ECU
replacement
Error detection
when: always
how: measuring of resistance
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: ER1, Pin 9
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 22 / 42

Error code
Error text
Defective diagnosis circuit of proportional solenoid valve (control unit / Intarder-ECU internal) (below
lowest limit)
Error response
functional: IT-ECU deactivates the Intarder, Intarder no longer available
CAN bus: -
Defective readback-current circuit of proportional solenoid valve
Error rectification
IT-ECU replacement
Error detection
when: always
how: Check if measurement is within valid range of values
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: -
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 23 / 42

Error code
Error text
Defective diagnosis circuit of proportional solenoid valve (control unit / Intarder-ECU internal) (above
highest limit)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Defective readback-current circuit of proportional solenoid valve
Error rectification
IT-ECU replacement
Error detection
when: always
how: Check if measurement is within valid range of values
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: -
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 24 / 42

Error code
Error text
Terminal 30 (+) interruption
Error response
functional: * during operation:
no response
* with ignition OFF:
no "after run mode", i.e. no fault memory and no operating hours counter stored
* with ignition ON again:
incorrect fault memory and operating hours counter read from EEProm
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, fuse of terminal 30 defective
Error rectification
Check power supply of Intarder ECU (wiring), check fuse of terminal 30
Error detection
when: with voltage at terminal 15 higher than 16.0 V
how: digital monitoring of terminal 30 (if voltage at terminal 30 rises above 15.6 V it is
considered OK; if the voltage drops below 6.1 V it is not considered to be OK)
Error undo
always
ECU connector
Pin: VPE1: Pin 54
VPE2: Pin 55
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 25 / 42

Error code
Error text
Terminal 15 (+) overvoltage
Error response
CAN bus: -
Vehicle supply voltage too high (higher than 36 V)
Error rectification
Check vehicle supply voltage (battery, generator)
Error detection
when: always
how: Voltage measurement at terminal 15
Error undo
always
ECU connector
Pin: VPI1: Pin 53
VPI2: Pin 31
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 26 / 42

Error code
Error text
Terminal 15 (+) undervoltage
Error response
CAN bus: -
Vehicle supply voltage too low (lower than 17 V)
Error rectification
Check vehicle supply voltage (battery, generator)
Error detection
when: always when voltage measured is lower than 17 V for more than 2.5 sec
how: Voltage measurement at terminal 15
Error undo
always
ECU connector
Pin: VPI1: Pin 53
VPI2: Pin 31
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 27 / 42

Error code
Error text
Brake level selector inputs not plausible
Error response
functional: IT-ECU selects the braking level according to the detected, active lines, possibly
Bremsomat not available
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, brake level selector defective, IT-ECU inputs defective
Error rectification
replacement
Error detection
when: if actual input line combination is not plausible
how: Plausibility check of the input line combinations
Error undo
when an not faulty combination of lines is recognized
ECU connector
Pin: ED1, Pin 15
ED2, Pin 42
ED3, Pin 16
ED4, Pin 43
ED5, Pin 17
ED6, Pin 44
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: possibly
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: possibly
6009 771 081 28 / 42

Error code
Error text
Operating hours counter loss
Error response
functional: Operation hours counter cannot be read from EEProm, IT-ECU resets the counter to zero
CAN bus: -
IT-ECU (EEProm) defective, service work on wiring, battery or IT-ECU with ignition ON, extreme
voltage drop during engine start
Error rectification
Delete error memory, then switch ignition OFF and ON, if error appears again, replace Intarder ECU,
otherwise everything OK
Error detection
how: Control of checksum at ignition ON
Error undo
after ignition OFF - ON, if checksum is correct
ECU connector
Pin: -
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: no
6009 771 081 29 / 42

Error code
Error text
Error memory loss
Error response
functional: Error memory cannot be read from EEProm, IT-ECU rejects the "old" error memory
contents
CAN bus: -
IT-ECU (EEProm) defective, service work on wiring, battery or IT-ECU with ignition ON, extreme
voltage drop during engine start
Error rectification
Delete error memory, then switch ignition OFF and ON, if error appears again, replace Intarder ECU,
otherwise everything OK
Error detection
how: Control of checksum at ignition ON
Error undo
after ignition OFF - ON, if checksum is correct
ECU connector
Pin: -
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: no
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: no
6009 771 081 30 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-message EEC2 faulty/not received (SAE J1939)
Error response
functional: * AP_low_idle_switch:
redundant information to ”Driver's Demand” of EEC1, if EEC1-error also present it is
assumed that the accelerator pedal is not activated, no switching off due to load in brake
position and Bremsomat operation
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective, error in EDC
Error rectification
Check EDC, CAN bus lines, CAN terminating resistor
Error detection
when: * up to version 6009 371 091:
After ignition ON and after 5 sec error detection is activated. Errors detected when
voltage at terminal 15 is between 20.0 V and 30.0 V.
* from version 6009 371 097:
Error detection inactive
how: Timeout monitoring of message (timeout: 1 sec) and of the signal (timeout: 1 sec)
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 31 / 42

Error code
Error text
Defect in INTARDER control unit (IT-ECU)
Error response
CAN bus: -
IT-ECU defective
Error rectification
IT-ECU replacement
Error detection
when: always
how: internal check of IT-ECU
Error undo
no Error status cleaning
ECU connector
Pin: -
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 32 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-message TSC1 from braking system faulty/not received (SAE J1939)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective, ABS/EBS defective
Error rectification
Check ABS/EBS, check CAN bus lines, check CAN terminating resistor
Error detection
when: After ignition ON and after 5 sec error detection is activated. Errors detected when
voltage at terminal 15 is between 20.0 and 30.0 V.
how: Timeout monitoring of message:
* up to 6009 371 054 timeout: 150 ms resp. 600 ms
* from 6009 371 090 timeout: 150 ms when active
Error undo
* up to 6009 371 054: when Intarder inactive (current = 0 mA)
* from 6009 371 090: when TSC1 message is active or after ignition OFF - ON
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 33 / 42

Error code
external: 43-19 dez FMI: 0 Freeze frame: 3
Error text
CAN transmit error (queue overrun)
Error response
functional: no direct error response, no requests or information can be sent to other controllers, i.e.
no downshift request to Astronic
CAN bus: -
CAN bus load too high, terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective, EMC interference
Error rectification
Check CAN bus load (rule-of-thumb: up to 50-60 % OK), check terminating resistor
Error detection
when: After ignition ON and 5 sec error detection is activated. Errors detected when voltage at
terminal 15 between 20.0 V and 30.0 V. Suppression of error detection in case of "CAN
BusOff" or "Communication error of CAN messages":
how: Queue overrun
Error undo
always
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 34 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-BusOff
Error response
CAN bus: -
CAN wiring defective (short-circuit to plus, short-circuit to ground, short-circuit between CAN lines,
interrupt of a CAN line), an ECU connected to CAN bus defective
Error rectification
Check CAN bus line, check all ECUs of CAN bus
Error detection
how: Monitoring BusOff-Flag of CAN module (microcontroller)
Error undo
always
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 35 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-message EBC1 faulty/not received (SAE J1939)
Error response
CAN bus: -
Wiring defective, terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective, ABS/EBS defective
Error rectification
Check ABS/EBS, check CAN bus lines, check CAN terminating resistor
Error detection
when: * up to 6009 371 054: Message will not be received, i.e. error detection inactive.
* from 6009 371 090: After ignition ON and after 5 sec error detection is activated. Errors
detected when voltage at terminal 15 is between 20.0 V and 30.0 V.
how: Timeout monitoring of message (timeout: 500 ms)
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 36 / 42

Error code
Error text
Communication error of CAN messages (acknowledge error)
Error response
functional: No direct error response, no requests or information to other controllers, i.e. no downshift
request to Astronic
CAN bus: -
CAN wiring defective (interrupt / open circuit), terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective
Error rectification
Check CAN bus line, check terminating resistor
Error detection
how: Monitoring Error warning flag of CAN module (microcontroller)
Error undo
always
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 37 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-message EEC1 faulty/not received (SAE J1939)
Error response
functional: * engine_speed:
Limitation of the brake power to a max. permitted value of 350 kW, downshifting request
not possible
* drivers_demand:
Accelerator pedal is assumed as not activated, redundancy over ”AP low idle switch"
EEC2. If driver' demand fails, no Bremsomat, if both signals failed, no switching off due
to load
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Check EDC, check CAN bus line, check terminating resistor
Error detection
how: Timeout monitoring of message (timeout: 1 sec) and of the signals (timeout: 1 sec)
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 38 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-message TCO1 faulty/not received (SAE J1939)
Error response
functional: * tachograph_output_shaft_speed:
Current limitation to 250 mA caused by the IT-ECU, Bremsomat no longer available, no
integration into the service brake
CAN bus: actual retarder torque (ERC1, Byte 2) = FEh,
intended retarder torque (ERC1, Byte 3) = FEh,
maximum available retarder torque (ERC1, Byte 8) = FEh
Wiring defective, terminating resistor of CAN-bus defective, tachograph defect
Error rectification
Check tachograph, check CAN-bus line, check terminating resistor
Error detection
voltage at terminal 15 is between 20.0 and 30.0 V and if in this operating cycle at least
one TCO1 message is received, or if a passive TCO1 error is available.
how: Timeout monitoring of message (timeout: 1 sec) and of the signals (timeout: 1 sec)
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 39 / 42

Error code
Error text
CAN-message CCVS faulty/not received (SAE J1939)
Error response
functional: * wheel-based vehicle speed:
Plausibility check of output shaft speed (EF1) not possible
CAN bus: -
Error rectification
Check EDC, check CAN bus line, check terminating resistor
Error detection
voltage at terminal 15 is between 20.0 V and 30.0 V. Errors are only detected if it is not
possible to read an output shaft speed from CAN (usually only with vehicles with
connected EF1) and if no appropriate CAN error is present in fault memory.
how: Timeout monitoring of message (timeout: 1 sec) and of the signal (timeout: 1 sec)
Error undo
ECU connector
Pin: CANF-H: 22
CANF-L: 49
VMHF: 24
Error display (IKL)
flashing?: yes
manual diagnosis
via BSH?: yes
6009 771 081 40 / 42

Abbreviations
German English
ABS Anti-Blockier-System Anti-lock-System

ACC Abstandsregeltempomat Adaptive Cruise Control
AD Ausgang Digital 24 V Digital output 24 V
ADM Ausgang Digital Masse Digital output ground
AIP Ausgang Strom Proportional Digital output power supply (+)
ASR Anti-Schlupf-Regelung Anti-Slip-control
BC-DR Body Computer - Driveline Retarder
BN Bordnetz Vehicle circuit
BSG Bremssteuergerät Brake controller
BSH Bremsstufenhebel Hand Lever / Brake level selector
CAN Controller-Area-Network Controller-Area-Network
CANF-H CAN Full - High
CANF-L CAN Full - Low
CC Tempomat Cruise Control
CCVS Tempomat / Fahrzeuggeschwindigkeit Cruise Control / Vehicle Speed
DIP Instrumententafel Display ...
DM Diagnose Botschaft Diagnosis Message
EBC Elektronisches Brems-System Electronic Brake Controller
EBS Elektronisches Brems-System Electronic Brake Controller
ECU Elektronisches Steuergerät Electronic Control Unit
ED Eingang Digital 24 V+ Digital input 24 V+
EDC Motorelektronik Electronic-Diesel-Control
EDM Eingang Digital Masse Digital input-ground
EEC Motorelektronik Electronic Engine Controller
EF Eingang Frequenz Frequency input
EMC Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit electro-magnetic compatibility
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit electro-magnetic compatibility
EOL Bandende End-Of-Line
EPS Elektro-Pneumatische-Schaltung
ER Eingang Widerstand Resistance input
ERC Retarder-Steuergerät Electronic Retarder Controller
EST Elektronisches Steuerung Electronic controller
ETC Elektronische Getriebe-Steuerung Electronic Transmission Controller
ETP Motortemperatur Engine Temperature
EU Analog-Eingang Spannung Analogue input voltage
FFR Fahrzeugführungsrechner Vehicle Controller
FMI Fehlerart Failure Mode Identifier
FMR Fahrzeug-Motor-Regulierung Vehicle Controller
FR Fahrzeug-Rechner Vehicle Controller
HRVD Fahrzeug Laufleistung High Resolution Vehicle Distance
IES Integriertes Elektronik-System
IKL Intarder-Kontrollleuchte Intarder pilot lamp
IT Intarder Intarder
KB Kernbüchse
MB Motorbremse Engine brake
MUX Multiplex-System Multiplex-System
n.d. nicht definiert not defined
OEM Fahrzeughersteller Original Equipment Manufacturer
REC Retarder Konfiguration Retarder Configuration
s.n.v Signal nicht verfügbar Signal not available
SA Absender Source Address
SDDK Schnittstelle Digital-Diagnose K-Leitung Interface Digital-Diagnosis K-Line
SPN Fehlerpfad Suspect Parameter Number
TCO Tachograph Tachograph
TCU Getriebe-Steuerung Transmission Control Unit
TSC Drehmoment-/Geschwindigkeit-Kontrolle Torque / Speed Control
UPEC Motor-Steuergerät
6009 771 081 41 / 42

VCM Fahrzeugrechner Vehicle Control Modul

VECU Fahrzeugrechner Vehicle Controller
VIP Fahrzeug-Rechner Vehicle ...
VM Versorgung Masse Supply ground
VMG Versorgung Masse für Sensoren Supply ground to sensors
VMHF Versorgung Masse für CAN Supply ground to CAN
VPE Versorgung Plus - Klemme 30
VPI Versorgung Plus - Klemme 15
VTG Verteilergetriebe Transfer case
WT Wärmetauscher Heat exchanger
6009 771 081 42 / 42

REPAIR MANUAL
001288
6085 751 102b

ZF - Intarder Contents
Page
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Work safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
General disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Required materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Inspection equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table of spring forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adjustment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Intarder views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Sectional drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1. Disassembly
1.1 Oil filter removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.2 Heat exchanger removal, solenoid valve, reservoir, temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3 Removal of Intarder from main transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.4 Oil pump removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.5 Control unit housing and valve removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.6 Stator and rotor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.7 Input spur gear removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8 Stator removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2. Assembly
2.1 Stator and rotor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2 Stator and rotor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3 Fitting of taper roller bearing to rotor and taper roller bearing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.4 Valve assembly and fitting of control unit housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.5 Oil pump assembly and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.6 Axial play measurement (stator and grooved ball bearing on main transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.7 Fitting of Intarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.8 Fitting of reservoir and temperature sensor to heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.9 Fitting of heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.10 Fitting of oil filter to Intarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.11 Fitting of solenoid valve to reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3. Test bench
3.1 Test bench approval (test report and sample copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

ZF - Intarder Preface
This manual is intended for skilled personnel who have been trained by ZF Friedrichshafen AG to carry out
maintenance and repair work on ZF products.
This manual deals with the standard ZF product in accordance with the state of development on the date of
issue.
However, due to continuing development of the product, repair work might require work practices and test or
adjustment data which are not contained in this manual. We therefore recommend that work done on your ZF
product is carried out only by skilled mechanics who have had their practical and theoretical knowledge updated on
a regular basis at our after-sales service training courses.
Service points equipped by ZF Friedrichshafen AG all over the world offer you:
1. Well-trained personnel
2. Specified equipment, e.g. specialized tools
3. Genuine ZF spares, to our latest specifications
All work performed in these service points is carried out conscientiously and with care.
Repair work carried out at ZF service points is guaranteed in accordance with the prevailing contractual
conditions.
Damage resulting from work performed by non-ZF personnel in an improper and unprofessional manner, together
with follow-on costs caused by such work, is excluded from the contractual guarantee agreement. This also applies
where genuine ZF spares have not been used.
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
Friedrichshafen Division
After-Sales Service

Work safety ZF - Intarder
Important work safety notice:
Companies who repair ZF units are responsible for their own work safety.
To avoid injury to personnel and damage to products, all safety regulations and legal requirements which
apply to repair and maintenance work must be adhered to. Before starting work, mechanics must familiarize
themselves with these regulations.
Personnel required to carry out repairs on these ZF products must receive appropriate training in advance. It is the
responsibility of each company to ensure that their repair staff is properly trained.
The following safety instructions appear in this manual:
NOTE Refers to special processes, techniques, data, use

of auxiliary equipment, etc.
CAUTION This is used when incorrect, unprofessional

working practices could damage the product.
! DANGER This is used when lack of care could lead to

personal injury or death.
NOTE
Read this manual carefully before starting any tests or repair work.
CAUTION
After completion of repair work and testing, skilled staff must satisfy themselves that the product is functioning
correctly.
Pictures, drawings and components do not always represent the original object, but are used to illustrate working
procedures.
Pictures, drawings and components are not to scale and no information about size and weight should be inferred
(even within a complete illustration).
Always follow the working steps as described in the text.

ZF - Intarder General - Disassembly
General Reusing parts

This repair manual deals with the ZF-Intarder.
Skilled staff must assess whether components, e.g. roller
The repair manual follows the sequence of steps bearings, discs, thrust washers etc. are still in good
required to completely dismantle and then reassemble enough condition to be re-installed.
the unit. Replace all damaged components and any parts which
have become badly worn.
CAUTION
If you are unclear about any aspect, always consult the
relevant specialist department(s) at the ZF After-Sales Gaskets, tab washers
Service.
Parts which are inevitably damaged during disassembly,
Ensure all work on the transmission is conducted in a e.g. gaskets and tab washers, must always be renewed.
professional manner under conditions of strict cleanliness.
Always use correct tools when dismantling and

reassembling the transmission. Shaft seals
Replace any shaft seals which have rough, torn or

Once the transmission has been removed, always wash hardened sealing lips.
thoroughly with suitable cleaning agent before opening
up the unit.
Components joined with Loctite are easier to unfasten if Rework

they are first heated with a hot air blower.
If rework is required on spacers, shims or similar items
Take care to ensure that corners and angles of housing to cater for clearance adjustments, always ensure that
and cover are cleaned with suitable cleaning agent. reworked surface has no runout (compared to original
condition) and is of the same surface quality. Sealing
ring races must be completely clean and undamaged. If
any faults are detected, these must always be rectified
Cleaning parts using a plunge grinder, never with an abrasive cloth.
Grinding traces and scrolls are not permitted.
Remove gasket residue from all sealing faces. Carefully
remove burrs or similar uneven surfaces with an oil
stone.
Lube bores and grooves must be free of preserving

grease and foreign matter: ensure that passage is
completely unobstructed.
Carefully cover up opened transmissions to prevent

foreign matter entering.

General - Assembly ZF - Intarder
Transmission assembly: Shaft seals
Assembly work must be performed in a clean area. a) Apply thin coat of sealing compound* to outer
Gaskets should be installed without sealing compound surface of shaft seal with steel cover.
or grease.
When assembling the transmission, comply with b) Apply thin coat of Vaseline (never use sealing
adjustment data and tightening torques specified in compound) to outer surface of shaft seal with rubber
repair manual. Always use special tools developed for cover or coat using anti-friction agent, e.g.
specific tasks where applicable. concentrated, water-soluble liquid detergent (e.g.
Pril, Coin, Palmolive).
CAUTION
Diagrams, drawings and components illustrated here do c) The outer surface of shaft seals with steel and rubber
not always show the original item: the intention is covers should be treated in the same way as shaft
merely to illustrate the relevant procedure. seals (b).
The diagrams, drawings and components are not drawn d) Duo-shaft seals have two sealing
to scale and no assumptions should be made regarding lips. The dust protection lip (X)
size and weight (nor regarding relative size and weight must face outwards.
of parts shown in one illustration). X
Work must be carried out in accordance with the text e) Fill 60 % of cavity between sealing lips with grease
description. (e.g. Aralub HL2 or Texando FO 20).
f) If possible, heat shaft seal bore to between 40 and

50°C (this makes installation easier).
Bearings Press shaft seal in to appropriate installation depth
using tool or flat disc.
If bearings require heating before fitting, ensure they
are heated uniformly.
The temperature should be approx. 85°C and must not Loctite
rise above 120°C. Every fitted bearing must be oiled
after assembly using operating oil. Loctite must only be used where specified on the parts
list.
When Loctite is used, always comply with
manufacturer’s instructions and guidelines.
Sealing During installation, comply with all specified adjustment
values, inspection data and tightening torques.
Use sealing compound* for sealing work. Comply with
the manufacturer’s instructions. Sealing compound
should be applied thinly and evenly. Ensure that oil Transmission oil
ducts and oil bores remain free of sealing compound.
Scrape sealing compound away from oil feed ducts and The transmissions are filled with transmission oil after
bores to ensure that no sealing compound enters the oil repair work. Refer to operating instructions for correct
ducts when components are pressed together. procedure and to list of recommended lubricants
TE-ML 02 for approved oil grades. These documents
can be obtained from any ZF Sales and Service Centre.
After filling with oil, tighten oil inspection plugs and oil
drain plugs to specified torques.
* refer to required materials

ZF-Intarder Required materials
No. Description Application Remarks
1 Loctite No.575 for stud bolts on heat exchanger

for all screw plugs on thread
2 Sealing compound

Documentation ZF - Intarder
ZF-Intarder - troubleshooting, el. section Test Technical Handbook

Instructions for PR 87* unit ZF-Intarder Ecosplit and Ecomid
Language German Order No. 6038 756 012 Language German Order No. 6085 765 002
English 6038 756 112 English 6085 765 102
French 6038 756 212
Spanish 6038 756 312 Operating manual
Italian 6038 756 412 ZF-Intarder for ZF-Ecosplit and ZF-Ecomid
transmissions
ZF-Intarder - troubleshooting, el. section Language German Order No. 6085 758 001
Test with 68 pin terminal tester* English 6085 758 101
Language German Order No. 6038 756 011 French 6085 758 201
English 6038 756 111 Spanish 6085 758 301
French 6038 756 211 Italian 6085 758 401
Spanish 6038 756 311
Italian 6038 756 411 Technical data sheet
ZF-Intarder for ZF-Ecosplit transmissions
ZF diagnostic system MOBiDIG 200 Language German Order No. 6085 757 001
Test Instructions for MOBiDIG 200* English 6085 757 101
Language German Order No. 6038 756 006 French 6085 757 201
English 6038 756 106 Spanish 6085 757 301
French 6038 756 206 Italian 6085 757 401
Spanish 6038 756 306
Italian 6038 756 406 Technical data sheet
ZF-Intarder for ZF-Ecomid transmissions
ZF diagnostic system MOBiDIG 200 Language German Order No. 6085 757 002
Intarder EST 32 / Sec. retarder EST 15 English 6085 757 102
Test Instructions for MOBiDIG 200 French 6085 757 202
with „plug-in“ card Spanish 6085 757 302
Language German Order No. 6038 756 030 Italian 6085 757 402
English 6038 756 130
French 6038 756 230 Technical data sheet
Spanish 6038 756 330 ZF-Intarder for ZF-8 S 180 transmissions
Italian 6038 756 430 Language German Order No. 6085 757 003
English 6085 757 103
Repair manual French 6085 757 203
ZF-Intarder Exchange of components Spanish 6085 757 303
Language German Order No. 6085 751 001 Italian 6085 757 403
English 6085 751 101
French 6085 751 201 Service Handbook
Spanish 6085 751 301 ZF-Intarder for ZF-Ecosplit and ZF-Ecomid-
Italian 6085 751 401 transmissions
Language German Order No. 6085 765 003
Repair manual English 6085 765 103
ZF-Intarder French 6085 765 203
Language German Order No. 6085 751 002 Spanish 6085 765 303
English 6085 751 102 Italian 6085 765 403
French 6085 751 202
Spanish 6085 751 302 Troubleshooting form
Italian 6085 751 402 ZF - Intarder
Language German Order No. 6085 754 006
Spare parts lists English 6085 754 106
Specify the desired parts list French 6085 754 206
Spanish 6085 754 306
Italian 6085 754 406
* Refer to next page for test equipment order numbers

ZF - Intarder Test equipment
Diagnosis unit MOBiDIG 200 (plug-in capability) Plug-in card

Order No. 6008 003 003 Language German Order No. 6008 203 014
English 6008 203 015
Connection cable for MOBiDIG 200 French 6008 203 018
2m Order No. 6008 303 015 Spanish 6008 203 019
11 m 6008 303 021 Italian 6008 203 020
22 m 6008 303 022
Plug-in card + test instructions
PR 87 test unit (24V) Language German Order No. 6008 298 003
Order No. 6008 004 001 English 6008 298 004
French 6008 298 008
Adapter cable for EST 32 Spanish 6008 298 009
Order No. 6008 004 023 Italian 6008 298 010
Connection cable for PR87 (50-pin) Temperature measuring device

2m Order No. 6008 004 005 Order No. 1P01 137 960
5m 6008 004 014
11 m 6008 004 021 Pressure test gauge (16 bar)
22 m 6008 004 022 Order No. 1P01 137 280
Project sheet for PR87

Order No. 6008 304 037
68-pin terminal tester

Order No. 6008 006 002
Adapter cable
Reducer: 68-pin - 55-pin socket
Order No. 6008 004 024
Reducer: 68-pin - 55-pin plug
Order No. 6008 004 025
Reducer: 55-pin - 25-pin socket
Order No. 6008 004 026
Reducer: 55-pin - 25-pin plug
Order No. 6008 004 027

Spring table ZF - Intarder
Order No. Inst. location No. of Wire dia. Spring dia. Untensioned
coils in mm in mm length in mm
0732 042 402 Intarder control unit 52.5 3.0 16.5 238.0
(cooler changeover valve)
(pressure relief valve)
(pressure relief valve)
(safety valve)
(pressure increase valve)
0732 042 403 Intarder 14.5 1.6 17.6 85.0

(preload valve)
Intarder
0732 042 406 16.5 1.7 15.6 72.0
(drain valve, not fitted to all
versions)
10

ZF - Intarder Adjustment data
Description Dimension spec. Measuring device Remarks
Oil pump
Impeller ax. play 0.03 - 0.05 mm Dial gauge
Stator-Rotor
Ax. play of taper roller bearing 0.05 - 0.1 mm Fixture and dial gauge Preload (pressure)
11

12
Ecomid
Ecosplit
80

81
79
47
74+75
46
Tightening torques
76+77
9 S 109 / 16 S 109
16 S 151 / 16 S 221
78
88
89
004 097
004097
82
004125
004 125
86 87 84 85 83
Item No. Description Tight. torque Dimension Remarks
46, 47 Hex. screw 23 Nm M8x22

74, Hex. screw (8.8) 60 Nm M12x70 *16 S 151
75 Hex. screw (10.9) 120 Nm M12x60 *16 S 221
76 Hex. screw (8.8) 60 Nm M12x70 *16 S 151
77 Hex. screw (10.9) 120 Nm M12x60 *16 S 221
78 Screw plug. with manget 60 Nm M24x1.5
79, 80, 81 Hex. screw 23 Nm M8x60
82, 83, 84, 85 Hex. screw 23 Nm M8x18
86 Hex. screw 35 Nm M18x1.5
87 Temperature sensor 40 Nm M18x1.5 * depending
ZF - Intarder
88, 89 Hex. screw 23 Nm M8x60 on version

89 88 82 84 85 83
8 S 180
90

ZF - Intarder
91
2
92
1
74
76 99
98
79
81
93
95
96 80
97
87
004 095
004 096
94 004095 004096
3 4 78 86
1, 2 Hex screw 62 Nm M12x120

3, 4 Stud bolt 62 Nm M12x120
74,76 Hex screw 60 Nm M12x60
78 Screw plug 60 Nm M24x1.5
79, 80, 81 Hex screw 23 Nm M8x60
82,83, 84, 85 Hex screw 23 Nm M8x18
87 Temperature sensor 40 Nm M18x1.5
88, 89 Hex screw 23 Nm M8x60
90, 91, 92, 93, 94 Hex screw 79 Nm M12x100
Tightening torques
95, 96, 97, 98, 99 Hex screw 23 Nm M8x25
13
Tightening torques ZF - Intarder
Screw plugs on control unit housing

Intarder housing, items 35 to 47 36
47
46
37
45 38
44
39
40
42 004099
35, 36, 37 Screw plug 25 Nm M12x1.5

38, 39 Screw plug 70 Nm M26x1.5
44 Control valve 70 Nm M26x1.5
46, 47 Cylindr. screw 23 Nm M8x22
14

ZF - Intarder Tightening torques
Retaining screws on control unit housing

Control unit housing, item 1 to 33 2
1 11
29
28 12
33
7
27 13
30
32 14
26
25 6
31
8 10
9 5
24 15
23
22
21
004 098
3 20 19 4 18 17 16
004098
Item No. Tight. torque Dimension Remarks
2 62 Nm M12x115
1, 3, 4 62 Nm M12x120
5 23 Nm M8x115
6, 7, 8, 9 ,10 23 Nm M8x30
11 50 Nm M10x215
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 23 Nm M8x80
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 23 Nm M8x105
32, 33 23 Nm M8x30
15

Tightening torque ZF - Intarder
Ecomid
Intarder housing, item 11, and 49 to 66
54 55 11 68 67 58
59
53
60
61
52
51
62
50 63
49
004 027
66 65 64 57* 004027
11 Hex screw 50 Nm M10x215
49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,

55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60,
61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66 Hex screw 50 Nm M10x60
67 Verschlußschraube 50 Nm M10x60 with bore in head
*57 Preload valve
16

ZF - Intarder Tightening torque
Ecosplit
Intarder housing, items. 11, and 49 to 73
56 11 58 59 60 61
62
55
54
53 63
64
65
66
**52
68
51
67
50 004 026
49 73 72 71 70 69 57* 004026

49, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55,
56, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69,
70, 71, 72, 73 Hex screw 50 Nm M10x60
58, 59, 60, 61 Hex screw 50 Nm M10x75
62, 63, Hex screw 50 Nm M10x35 with washer
**52 Hex screw 50 Nm M10x60 with bore in head
*57 Preload valve
17

18

Special tools
* 1X56 138 045 1X56 138 050 1X56 138 049 3-leg puller, dia 130 * 1X56 138 047 * 1X56 122 292
mm
1,0 - 0,5
14
12
* urgently recommended
10
* 1X56 138 046 1X565 137 196
1X56 137 974 1X56 137 124 (Ecosplit)
1X56 137 975 1X56 138 038 (Ecosplit)
1X56 138 068 1X56 137 575 (110V)

ZF - Intarder
in-house manuf. Item 15 in-house manuf. Item 16 1X56 138 068 1X56 136 513 (220 V) refer to main transmission 1X56 138 048 (Ecomid)
Special tools
ZF - Intarder
* urgently recommended
Fig. Illustration Order No. Application Qty. Remarks

No.
* 1X56 122 292 1 possible to use

Hydraulic spindle M 40 spindle
for pressing out rotor and stator from flange
(in conjunction with 1X56 138 047) extractor of
1 Workshops with hydraulic tools main
„refer to tool appendix, page 7.8“ do transmission.
not require hydraulic spindle
1X56 122 292.
* 1X56 138 045 1
Centring disc
use as guide when installing stator
2 and rotor.
* 1X56 138 046 1
Adjustment fixture
for taper roller bearing on stator and
3 rotor.
* 1X56 138 047 1 absolutely

necessary if 15
Extraction fixture ton
for pressing out stator and rotor hydraulic/spindle
4 .with universal hydraulic tool, refer press is not
to appendix). available.
1X56 138 050 1
Ring
for fitting spur gear when assembling
5 inner race of taper roller bearing.
19

Special tools ZF - Intarder

No.
1P01 137 096 1 standard unit
Feeler gauge
5 mm
for measuring taper roller bearing
1,0 - 0,
6 14 (used with 1X56 138 046)
12
10
Measuring blades on feeler gauge
with 0.02 mm spacing.
1X56 137 124 1 refer to tool

for basic
Tool transmission,
for shaft seal 105x130 possibly already
7 available (refer
(used with tool 1X56 138 038) to Ecosplit)
1X56 137 974 1
Tool
for driving in inner race of taper
8 roller bearing
1X56 137 975 1
Tool
for installing needle sleeve in control
9 housing and pump housing
1X56 138 038 1 refer to tool

for basic
Tool transmission,
for shaft seal 105x130 possibly already
10 available (refer
(used with tool 1X56 137 124) to Ecosplit)
20

ZF - Intarder Special tools

No.
1X56 138 049 1 required if

1X56 138 047
Ring not used
for pressing out stator and rotor with
11 spindle press or hydraulic press
Tool 1 refer to basic

for driving retaining plate into output transmission
flange for tool
12
1X56 136 513 (220 V) or 1

1X56 137 575 (110V)
Hot air blower
for hating the Intarder housing
13
Three-leg puller 1 standard unit,

for removing spur gear and stator expansion
width approx.
dia. 140 mm
14
004106
Pressure piece 1 in-house

for various pressing operations manufacture,
steel ext.
dia. 30 mm
15 and thickness
4 - 5 mm
004116
21

Special tools ZF - Intarder

No.
Plate 1 in-house
to protect shaft seal when heating manufacture,
Intarder housing (if no heating steel, dia.
chamber is used). 140 mm approx.
16 4 to 5 mm thick
1X56 138 048 1 only on Ecomid

e.g. 8 - S 180
Tool
for shaft seal 90x110x10 on output
17 flange
1X56 138 054 1
Calibration mandrel
for bore - pressure relief valve /
18 control valve
1X56 138 055 1
Calibration mandrel
for bore - pressure increase valve
19
1X56 138 056 1
Calibration mandrel
for bore - cooler changeover valve
20
22


No.
1X56 138 057 1
Calibration mandrel
for bore - pilot valve
21
1X56 138 068 1
Measuring plugs
(M24X1.5 x M12X1.5)
22 used on Intarder housing / control
housing for Intarder outlet pressure
or Intarder temperature
1P01 138 069 1
Test unit
for tests on test bench
23
(test instructions supplied with
test unit)
1P01 138 070 1
Test unit
for electronic speedometer
24
(test instructions supplied with
test unit)
23

24

Special tools
General hydraulic tools
1X56 138004 1X56 138 000
1X56 138 002
1X56 138 003 1X56 138 005
1X56 138 008

1X56 138 001
1X56 138 013
1X56 138 007
1X56 138 006

1X56 138 011
1X56 138 009
ZF - Intarder
004126
Recommended list of hydraulic tools for Intarder assembly!
The following kits can be used for Intarder assembly.
Recommended kit 1 comprising:
1x 1X56 138 000 Hydraulic pump

1x 1X56 138 001 T-piece
1x 1X56 138 002 Pressure gauge
1x 1X56 138 003 Connection fitting
1x 1X56 138 004 Hydraulic hose
1x 1X56 138 005 Hydraulic cylinder, 10t pressure
1x 1X56 138 007 Hose coupling
1x 1X56 138 009 Star, size 1, M65x2
1x 1X56 138 011 Quick-release crown, size 1
1x 1X56 138 013 Threaded insert for cylinder adaptation
1x 1X56 138 014 50 mm extension
Recommended kit 2 comprising:
1x 1X56 138 000 Hydraulic pump

1x 1X56 138 001 T-piece
1x 1X56 138 002 Pressure gauge
1x 1X56 138 003 Connection fitting
1x 1X56 138 004 Hydraulic hose
1x 1X56 138 006 Hydraulic cylinder, 15t pressure
1x 1X56 138 007 Hose coupling
1x 1X56 138 009 Star, size 1, M65x2
1x 1X56 138 011 Quick-release crown, size 1
1x 1X56 138 013 Threaded insert for cylinder adaptation
1x 1X56 138 014 50 mm extension
The only difference between these two tool kits is the different sizes of hydraulic cylinder and the necessary
adaptation to the 10t cylinder.
Workshops may already possess hydraulic tool kits which can be used for extracting taper roller bearings (check
where applicable).
25

Transmission view ZF - Intarder
002956
ZF-Ecosplit transmission with ZF-Intarder 16 S 151 und 16 S 221 (figure shows 16 S 221)
001476
ZF-Ecomid bus transmission with ZF-Intarder 8 S 140 und 8 S 180 (figure shows 8 S 180)
001477
ZF-Ecomid truck transmission with ZF-Intarder 9 S 109 und 16 S 109 (figure shows 16 S 109)
26

ZF - Intarder Transmission view
002006
8 S 140 / 8 S 180
002005
9 S 109 / 16 S 109
27

Transmission view ZF - Intarder
001288
28

ZF - Intarder Transmission view
16S 221
X
16S 151
004 274
X= depending on version 004274
29

30

ZF - Intarder Disassembly
1 Disassembly
1.1 Remove oil filter
1 = Oil filter (1) on Intarder
000534
1 Remove M8x20 retaining screw and washer from

oil filter.
1
000529
2 Pull filter from filter neck using pliers.

Remove oil filter from Intarder housing.
Beware of escaping oil.
Catch escaping oil in suitable container.
000552
31

Disassembly ZF - Intarder
3 Remove filter cover from oil filter.
2 = Remove filter cover from oil filter.

3 = O-ring filter
4 = Magnetic disc
CAUTION
Always renew filter. Cleaning old filter is not sufficient.
NOTE
Take magnetic disc (4) from removed filter cartridge
(if fitted) and keep to one side for subsequent fitting to
new filter cartridge. 2 3 4
004467
32

5 6 7
13
12 8 10 9
18 14
1
4 15 11
2
2
16
3
1 17 001229
001229
1 = Nut (M12) (waf 18) TA = 62 Nm 10 = O-ring

2 = O-ring 11 = Solenoid valve
3 = Stud bolt TA = 18 Nm 12 = Hex screw (M8) TA = 23 Nm
4 = Hex screw (M8x115) TA = 23 Nm 13 = Reservoir
5 = Screw plug TA = 35 Nm 14 = Retaining screw TA = 23 Nm
6 = O-ring 15 = Retaining screw TA = 23 Nm
7 = Hex screw (M8) TA = 23 Nm 16 = Screw plug TA = 35 Nm
8 = Line connection - solenoid valve 17 = Temperature sensor (M18x1.5) TA = 40 Nm
9 = Screw plug 18 = Angle plate
1.2 Remove heat exchanger, solenoid valve,

reservoir, and temperature sensor
CAUTION 7 Unscrew and remove retaining screws (12) from

In the following procedure, oil will flow out of heat solenoid valve, remove valve from reservoir.
exchanger. Catch oil as it emerges. Support heat exchanger
8 Unscrew and remove retaining screws (14 or 15)
to prevent from falling.
from angle plate and on reservoir connection flange
(7), remove reservoir.
4 Unfasten nuts (1) (waf 18) on stud bolts and
unscrew. 9 Remove O-ring (6) from annular groove in
Unscrew and remove on M8x115 (4) hex nut from reservoir.
oil connection flange on heat exchanger.
10 Unscrew and remove temperature sensor (17) from
5 Remove heat exchanger and reservoir. heat exchanger.
6 Remove two O-rings (2) from heat exchanger oil
ducts in control unit housing.
33

12 1
9 10 2
8 11 3
4
5
A 6
B 7
13
14
19
18
20
A
C
17
15 *
16
001202 001202
1 = Retaining plate 13 = Hex screw (M10x215) TA = 50 Nm

2 = Hex screw (TT = 60 Nm depen. on version, 120 Nm) 14 = Hex screws for cardan shaft
3 = Washer 15 = * Hex screw TA = 50 Nm
4 = O-ring (68x4) (head with bore for wire retainer)
5 = Output flange 16 = Hex screw TA = 50 Nm
6 = Ring 17 = Hex screw TA = 50 Nm
7 = Shaft seal 18 = Shim (thickness 1.6 to 0.9 mm, 0.1 mm steps)
8 = Hex screw (M10x35 / 8.8) TA = 46 Nm 19 = Shim (thickness 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2 mm)
9 = Hex screw TA = 50 Nm 20 = Gasket
10 = Hex screw TA = 50 Nm A = Sealing face of Intarder housing
11 = Hex screw TA = 50 Nm B = Contact face for output shaft ball bearing
12 = Hex screw TA = 50 Nm C = Contact face for stator
1.3 Removal of Intarder from main transmission
11 Release output flange (5), remove shim (3) and CAUTION

O-ring (4), extract flange with two-leg puller. In the following procedure, the Intarder becomes free
and may fall.
12 Remove ring (6) or, instead of ring (6), remove ring
Secure Intarder to prevent it from falling.
gear (not shown in drawing) from output flange.
NOTE: Depending on version, screw (13) can have
13 Remove hex screws (8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16 and
screw-in thread in housing 3 as well as a through-thread
17) from Intarder, remove Intarder.
in the Intarder housing.
14 Remove gasket (20) and shims (18 and 19).
34

ZF Intarder Disassembly
5
4
2 10
1
11
001227
11 001227
1 = O-ring 7 = Pump housing

2 = Ring gear 8 = Hex screw, (x4) (M8x80) TT = 23 Nm
3 = Shaft 9 = Hex screw, (x1) (M8x30) TT = 23 Nm
4 = V-ring 10 = Dowel pins (x2)
5 = Needle sleeve 11 = Mark on ring gear (ease of assembly)
6 = O-ring
1.4 Oil pump removal
15 Unscrew and remove screws (8 and 9). Check the following:

Axial play on ring gear: 0.03 - 0.05 mm
16 Remove pump, pressing off with pry lever if
No scoring permitted on ring gear, shaft and ring gear
necessary until dowel pin (10) comes free.
bore in housing.
17 Remove O-rings (1 and 6) from control unit Check that pump pinion (3) is firmly located on shaft.
housing.
18 Remove shaft (3) and ring gear (2) from pump
housing.
35

1.1 9
7.2 7.3
1 2.1 2 7
2.2
2.3
1.2
2.4 5 6 7.1
2.5
3
1.3 3.1 17.0
3.2
3.3
4
8.3
8.2 8
8.1
10.3 10
10.2
14 11.5
10.1
11.4
16.1 11 11.3
16.2 11.2
16.3 12 11.1
15.3 13
15.2
15.1
15 16
16.3
16.2
16.1 004275
3
8
2
10
11
1
004 127
004127
36

1 = Cooler changeover valve 9 = Hex screw (M10x215)

1.1 = Screw plug (M48) with seal
1.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 402 10 = Pressure valve
1.3 = Piston 10.1= Screw plug (M30x1,5)
10.2= Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 348
2 = Pressure relief valve (12 bar) 10.3= Piston
2.1 = Screw plug (M26) with seal
2.2 = Piston 11 = Control valve
2.3 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 470 11.1= Sealing cover
2.4 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 471 11.2= Adjusting screw
2.5 = Piston 11.3= Piston
11.4= Compression spring
3 = Safety valve (14,5 bar) 11.5= Piston
3.1 = Screw plug M12x1.5 with seal
3.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 041 247 12 = Hex screws
3.3 = Ball 13 = Screw plug (M24x1,5) with seal
(entry to heat exchanger, oil temperature)
4 = Screw plug M26 M 26 with seal
14 = Gasket ( on sheet metal version, do not bend).
5 = Screw plug M12 (pump pressure) with seal
15 = Preload valve (1.5 bar)
6 = Screw plug M12 (control pressure) with seal 15.1= Screw plug (1.5 bar) M26x1.5 with seal and
recess for compression spring.
7 = Cover 15.2= Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 403
7.1 = Gasket 15.3= Piston
7.2 = Hex screw
7.3 = Hex screw 16 = Drain valve (not on all versions)
16.1= Screw plug (M22x1,5) with seal
8 = Proportional solenoid with control valve 16.2= Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 406
8.1 = Cylindrical screw 16.3= Piston
8.2 = O-ring
8.3 = Piston (control valve) 17 = Needle sleeve and V-ring (for pump shaft).
1.5 Control unit housing and valve removal
19 Remove Intarder control unit. CAUTION

Proportional solenoid (8) must not be subjected to 24V
20 Remove gasket (14).
power source. Check solenoid using terminal tester only.
NOTE:
When removing the valves, ensure that the removed
pistons and piston guides are not damaged. Technical data - proportional solenoid (8)
Stroke mm 2+2
21 Remove the valves shown in this diagram. Limit current A 0.5
Clean Loctite residue from thread on screw plugs Resistance at 20 °C Ω 25.0 ± 6%
and threads for screw plugs. Activation time % 100
37

1
2
3
4
6
7
004276
1 = Retaining ring 6 = Rotor

2 = Circlips 7 = Stator
3 = Spindle (or press) 1X56 122 292 8 = Baseplate or ring (ring 1X56 138 049 when
4 = Pressing-out fixture 1X56 138 047 using press)
5 = Pressure piece (in-house manufacture, 9 = Shaft seal
refer to tools, item 15)
1.6 Stator and rotor removal NOTE:

When using fixture (4) with spindle (3), an appropriate
22 Release retaining ring (1) and remove height of baseplate can be inserted instead of item 8 (ring).
(strike with chisel). When using a press, item 8 (ring) 1X56 138 049 must
be used.
23 Remove circlips (2).
If no baseplate is used, housing may become distorted or
24 Fit pressing-out fixture (4) with pressure piece (5). damaged.
25 Heat housing at points around circumference
26 Press out shaft with stator and rotor from housing.
marked with arrows to between 90 and 100°C using
hot air blower. 27 Press out shaft seal (9) from housing.
38

2
12
11 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
004277
1 = Special hex screw 7 = Ring (not fitted to all versions)

2 = Shim 8 = Rotor
3 = Spur gear 9 = Rectangular ring (piston ring)
4 = Inner race of taper roller bearing 10 = Baseplate or ring
5 = Outer race of taper roller bearing 11 = Three-leg puller
6 = Stator 12 = Pressure piece
1.7 Input spur gear removal
28 Clamp shaft in vice using soft chucks.

29 Remove hex screw (1) and shim (2).
30 Remove spur gear (3) using three-leg puller and
pressure piece.
39

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
004278
1 = Three-leg puller (3x120°) 8 = Rotor

2 = Pressure piece 5 = O-ring 9 = Rectangular ring
3 = Inner race of taper roller 6 = Stator 10 = Ring (or baseplate)
bearing 7 = Ring (not fitted to all 11 = Impulse sensor
4 = Stator housing pocket versions)
1.8 Stator removal
31 Place rotor (8) or ring on baseplate, remove stator

using three-leg puller.
32 Remove inner race of taper roller bearing.
33 Ring (7) aufnehmen (nicht bei allen Ausführungen
vorhanden).
34 Remove O-ring (5) from stator.
11
35 Remove outer race of taper roller bearing 004279
from stator (6).

Technical data - impulse sensor (11)
36 Remove rectangular rings (9) from rotor (8).
Operating voltage U b max 6 - 15 V
37 Remove impulse sensor (11). Current intake max. 18 mA
Tightening torque 40 Nm
Air gap sensor/impulse wheel 1.4 mm
ZF operating voltage 8V
40

ZF Intarder Assembly
6
7
8
10
004280
1 = Hex screw M12x80 Powerlock (95 Nm) 6 = Stator

2 = Shim 7 = O-ring
3 = Spur gear 8 = Ring (not fitted to all versions)
4 = Inner race of taper roller bearing 9 = Rectangular ring (piston ring)
5 = Outer race of taper roller bearing 10 = Rotor
2. Assembly
2.1 Stator and rotor assembly
NOTA: Clean all parts. Lightly coat all moving parts 6 Heat inner race of taper roller bearing (4) to approx.
with oil. 100°C, slide correctly onto rotor shaft (contact face
for inner race of taper roller bearing protrudes, i.e.
1 Coat rectangular rings (9) with oil, insert in annular inner race of bearing faces rotor). Apply light coat
grooves of rotor. of oil to inner race of taper roller bearing.
2 Heat stator bore for outer race of taper roller 7 Heat spur gear (3) to approx. 85°C, place correctly
bearing (5) to approx. 80°C, install outer race of on rotor.
bearing in stator, facing in correct direction.
8 Fit shim (2).
3 Slide ring (8) onto stator (6).
9 Screw in special hex screw (1), tighten provisionally.
4 Place rotor on bench (end of shaft) as shown in When cooled down, tighten to 95 Nm.
diagram.
10 Place O-ring 7) in Stator and coat lightly using
5 Fit stator with ring onto rotor. grease.
41

Assembly ZF - Intarder
1 5
2 6 7
4
8
004281
1 = Stator 5 = Rotor
2 = O-ring 6 = Shaft seal
3 = Rectangular ring (piston ring) 7 = Plate (in-house manufacture, refer to tools, item 16)
4 = Intarder housing 8 = Centring disc 1X56 138 045
2.2 Stator and rotor installation
NOTE: 14 Firmly install stator (1) and rotor (5) in Intarder

If shaft seal has been fitted, this must be protected by a housing until tips of arrows on cam surface of
baffle plate (7) when the housing is heated (if anything Intarder housing and stator are precisely aligned
other than a heating chamber is used). with one another. Maximum tolerance 1 mm.
Using manual press lever, apply pressure to stator
11 Apply light coat of oil to rectangular ring (piston and rotor for approx. 5 minutes until stator locates
ring) and align centrally. firmly in housing recess.
12 Fit centring disc (8) to Intarder housing.
NOTE:
13 Heat Intarder housing (4) to approx. 90 to 100°C When correctly installed, stator must be located lower
(in heating chamber at 100°C for approx. 15 mins., than the groove on the Sealing face (corresponds to
if possible). plate (7) supporting face.
15 Press shaft seal (depending on version) to correct

NOTE:
depth using suitable tool (refer to list of tools).
Carry out following procedure using manual press lever.
Ensure no scoring occurs inside housing when fitting. 16 Screw 1.5 bar preload valve (refer to control unit),
Housing must be heated to between 90 and 100°C. spring, seal plug (with recess for spring) and seal
into Intarder housing.
42

ZF - Intarder Assembly
1
2
3 7
8
4 A
6 6
9
10
5
004282
1 = Retaining ring 8 = Feeler gauge

2 = Circlip 9 = Spur gear
3 = Adjusting fixture 1X56 138 046 10 = Rotor shaft
4 = Inner race of taper roller bearing A = Gap (measure at spin torque 2 +/- 0.5 Nm. Taper
5 = Ring (for assembly of item 4) 1X56 138 050 roller bearing must have preload of 0.05 to 0.1
6 = Baseplate mm).
7 = Tightening torque to spin point 2 ± 0,5 Nm
2.3 Fitting of taper roller bearing to rotor and taper

roller bearing adjustment
17 Fit Intarder and spur gear to ring 1X56 138 050 as 22 Using feeler gauge (8), measure gap „A“ and note
shown in diagram. dimension.
Circlip is supplied in 0.05 mm grades from
18 Heat inner race of taper roller bearing (4) to
2.9 to 3.7 mm.
approx. 85°C, fit correctly on rotor shaft.
Taper roller bearing must have pressure of 0.05 to
19 Apply light coat of oil to inner race (4) of taper 0.1 mm. This is assured if a circlip with thickness
roller bearing. equivalent to gap „A“ is fitted. At a spin torque of
2 Nm, circlip with next possible dimension can be
20 Allow bearing to cool. Remove ring (5). Place
installed.
Intarder housing on baseplates (6). This enables
spur gear (9) to rotate freely. 23 Fit retaining ring (1) and peen onto baseplate at 3
points (120° apart).
21 Fit adjusting fixture (3), preload inner race of taper
roller bearing until spin torque reaches 2± 0,5 Nm.
43

2.4 Valve assembly and fitting of control unit housing
1.1 9
7.2 7.3
1 2.1 2 7
2.2
2.3
1.2
2.4 5 6 7.1
2.5
3
1.3 3.1 17.0
3.2
3.3
4
8.3
8.2 8
8.1
10.3 10
10.2
14 11.5
10.1
11.4
16.1 11 11.3
16.2 11.2
16.3 12 11.1
15.3 13
15.2
15.1
15 16
16.3
16.2
16.1 004275
35
36
47
3
8
46
37 2
10
45 38
44
39
11
1
40
004 127
42
004099
004 099 004127
44

1 = Cooler changeover valve 10.1 = Screw plug (M30x1.5) with seal

1.1 = Screw plug (M48) with seal 10.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 348
1.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 402 10.3 = Piston
1.3 = Piston
11 = Control valve
2 = Pressure relief valve (12 bar) 11.1 = Sealing cover
2.1 = Screw plug (M26) with seal 11.2 = Adjusting screw
2.2 = Piston 11.3 = Piston
2.3 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 470 11.4 = Compression spring
2.4 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 471 11.5 = Piston
2.5 = Piston
12 = Hex screws
3 = Safety valve (14.5 bar)
3.1 = Screw plug M12x1.5 with seal 13 = Screw plug (M24x1.5) with seal
3.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 041 247 (entry to heat exchanger, oil temperature)
3.3 = Ball
14 = Gasket (on sheet metal version, do not bend).
4 = Verschlußschraube M 26 mit Dichtring
15 = Pretension valve (1.5 bar)
5 = Screw plug M12 (pump pressure) with seal 15.1 = Screw plug (1.5 bar) M26x1.5 with seal and
recess for compression spring.
6 = Screw plug M12 (control pressure) with seal 15.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 403
15.3 = Piston
7 = Cover
7.1 = Gasket 16 = Drain valve (not on all versions)
7.2 = Hex screw 16.1 = Screw plug (M22x1.5) with seal
7.3 = Hex screw 16.2 = Compression spring, e.g. 0732 042 406
16.3 = Piston
8 = Proportional solenoid with control valve
8.1 = Cylindrical screw 17 = Needle sleeve and V-ring (for pump shaft)
8.2 = O-ring (Install needle sleeve so that thick collar
8.3 = Piston (control valve) faces pressing-in side)
9 = Hex screw M10x215 Technical data proportional solenoid (8)

Stroke mm 2+2
10 = Pressure valve Limit current A 0,5
Resistance at 20 °C Ω 25.0 ± 6%
Activation time % 100
Intarder housing Items. 35 to 47 (tightening torques)
Item no. Tightening torque Dim. Pos. Nr. Tightening torque Dim.
35 25 Nm M 12x1.5 42 60 Nm M24x1.5
36 25 Nm M 12x1.5 44 70 Nm M26x1.5
37 25 Nm M 12x1.5 45 100 Nm M30x1.5
38 70 Nm M 26x1.5 46 23 Nm M8x22
39 70 Nm M 26x1.5 47 23 Nm M8x22
40 150 Nm M 48x1.5
45

Montage ZF - Intarder
NOTE:
Check compression springs against spring table.
Apply light coat of oil to moving parts.
Calibrate bores for valve pistons using calibration
mandrel (if available) (refer to calibration tools in list of
tools).
In all cases, check piston for ease of movement in piston
bore.
24 Install appropriate piston and compression springs

in control housing.
Apply light coat of Loctite 574 to seal plug threads
and screw in with new sealing ring. Tighten to
required torque.
25 Fit proportional solenoid (8) with O-ring (8.2) and

piston (8.3).
26 Fit control unit with gasket (14).

Tighten retaining screws to required torque.
46

ZF Intarder Assembly
Mounting bolts on control housing

Control housing Items 1 to 33
1 11
29
28 12
33
7
27 13
30
32 14
26
25 6
31
8 10
9 5
24 15
23
22
21
004 098
3 20 19 4 18 17 16
004098
Item no. Tight. torque Dim. Remarks
2 62 Nm M12x115
1, 3, 4 62 Nm M2x120
5 23 Nm M8x115
6, 7, 8, 9 ,10 23 Nm M8x30
11 50 Nm M10x215
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 23 Nm M8x80
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 23 Nm M8x105
32, 33 23 Nm M8x30
47

5
4
2 10
1
11
001227
11
004280
1 = O-ring 7 = Pump housing

2 = Ring gear 8 = Hex screws, (x4) (M8x80) TT = 23 Nm
3 = Shaft with internal rotor 9 = Hex screw, (x1) (M8x30) TT = 23 Nm
4 = V-ring 10 = Dowel pins (x2)
5 = Needle sleeve 11 = Mark on ring gear (for ease of assembly)
6 = O-ring
2.5 Oil pump assembly and mounting
NOTE: Apply light coat of oil to moving parts. 27 Install shaft (3) with internal rotor and ring gear (2)
Once needle sleeve and V-ring have been removed from in pump housing.
pump housing or control unit housing, heat housing to
28 Install O-ring (6 and 1) in control unit housing.
approx. 40°C and install needle sleeve correctly using
tool 1X56 137 975 (thick collar facing pressing-on 29 Fit pump housing, avoiding damage to drive spigot
side). on shaft (3). Drive in dowel pins (10). Tighten
Note that mark (dot) on ring gear (11) points upwards. screws to required torque.
This ensures that the lug on the ring gear external
diameter points towards pump housing.
48

2.6 Axial play measurement (stator and grooved ball bearing on main transmission)
12 1
9 10 2
8 11 3
4
5
A 6
B 7
13
14
19
18
20
A
C
17
15
16
001202
004280
1 = Retaining plate 19 = Shim (thickness 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2 mm)
2 = Hex screw (depending on version) 20 = Gasket
3 = Shim
4 = O-ring (68x4) A = Sealing face of Intarder housing
5 = Output flange B = Contact face for ball bearing on output shaft
6 = Ring (ring or ring gear) C = Contact face for stator
7 = Shaft seal (possibly already fitted) D = Gap between bearing and sealing face of basic
8 = Hex screw (M10x35/8.8) housing (refer to Page 50)
9 = Hex screw Gap A - C e.g. 1,1 mm
10 = Hex screw Gap A - B e.g. 10,5 mm
11 = Hex screw Gap D (refer to page 50) e.g. 10,0 mm
12 = Hex screw
13 = * Hex screw (M10x215) TA = 50 Nm Axial play:
14 = Hex screw for universal shaft Axial play of stator must be 0 ± 0.05 mm
15 = * Hex screw (head with bore for wire retainer Axial play of output flange bearing must be 0 to 0.1 mm.
to secure with impulse sensor)
16 = Hex screw * Depending on version, item 13 may have a
17 = Hex screw through-thread in the Intarder housing.
18 = Shim (thickness 1.6 to 0.9 mm,
available in 0.1 mm steps)
49

A
A
C
B
004284
D = gap between sealing face of basic transmission A-C = gap between sealing face of Intarder housing
and face end of grooved ball bearing. and face end of stator must be 0 ± 0,05 mm
A-B = gap between sealing face of Intarder housing
and face end of grooved ball bearing - must be E = Impulsgeber
0 to 0.1 mm larger than dimension „D“.
NOTE: Various versions of the gasket between Intarder dimension, e.g. 10.5 mm.
and main transmission are in circulation. (On version with steel plate gasket, dimension „A-B“
1. Paper gasket. is thinner by the thickness of the gasket. In this case,
2. Paper gasket and gasket bead. thickness of steel plate gasket without corrugated
3. Steel plate gasket (with corrugated strip). strip must be added to dimension „A-B“). „A-B“.
When measuring this part, do not include gasket bead or Measure dimension „D“ from outer race of ball
corrugated strip. bearing to sealing face of main transmission, note
When being measured, the paper gaskets are placed on dimension, e.g. 10.0 mm.
the Intarder housing. The steel plate gasket is measured E.G.
separately. Dimension A-B 10.5 mm
– Gap D 10.0 mm
30 Measure shim (19) (refer to Page 10.9).
Gap = 0.5 mm
Shim must have play of 0 to 0.1 mm.
– Axial play 0.1 mm
Measure dimension „A-B“ from sealing face (A)
with paper gasket fitted to contact face (B), note Thickness of shim (19) 0.4 mm
50

ZF-Intarder Assembly
2.7 Fitting of Intarder
31 Measure shim (18) (refer to Page 10.9). Shim must housing.

be adjusted to 0.05 mm pressure and 0.05 mm play. Secure the gasket by inserting as many hex screws
Measure dimension „A-C“ from sealing face (A) as possible to the basic transmission and by
with fitted paper gasket to contact face (C), note screwing in long enough stud bolts. Fit stud bolts at
dimension, e.g. 1.1 mm. the points where through bores exist on the Intarder
(On version with steel plate gasket, dimension „A-C“ housing. The stud bolts also serve as dowels when
is thinner by the thickness of the gasket. In this case, fitting the Intarder.
the thickness of the steel plate gasket without
corrugated strip must be added to dimension „A-C“). NOTE: Depending on version, screw (11) M10x215
may have through-bore in Intarder housing.
E.g.
Dimension A-C 1,10 mm 34 Carefully fit Intarder to basic transmission and
+ Pressure 0,05 mm screw down. Note tightening torques.
Thickness of shim (18) 1,15 mm 35 Slide ring (6) (depending on version) onto output
flange.
Ecosplit 56 11 58 59 60 61 Ecomid 54 55 11 68 67 58
62
55 59
54 53
60
53 63
64 61
52
65
66 51
**52 62
68
51
50 63
67
50 004 026
49
004 027
49 73 72 71 70 69 57* 004027
004026 66 65 64 57*
11 = M10x215 = 50 Nm 11 = M10x215 = 50 Nm
49,50, 51, **52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 49,50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56,
64,65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73= M10x60 = 50 Nm 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64,65,
58, 59, 60, 61 = M10x75 = 50 Nm 66, **67 = M10x60 = 50 Nm
62, 63 (with shim) = M10x35 = 50 Nm
68 = M10x180 = 50 Nm
** with bore in head ** with bore in head
32 Attach corrected shims (18 and 19) to contact faces 36 Correctly install retaining screws for cardan shaft
„C“ and „B“ with grease. in output flange.
(screws cannot be inserted when flange is fitted).
33 Fit gasket (20) to basic transmission. On version
with gasket bead or corrugated strip, raised portion 37 Fit output flange (5) without heating.
of bead (corrugated strip) points towards Intarder
51

Assembly ZF-Intarder
38 Fit O-ring (4) and shim (3).
39 Screw in hex screws (2), tighten to correct torque

and secure with retaining plate (1) using tool (refer
to basic transmission).
40 Screw in impulse sensor, tightening torque 40 Nm.
11
004279
Technical data - impulse sensor (11)

Operating voltage Ub max 6 - 15 V
Current intake max. 18 mA
Tightening torque 40 Nm
Air gap between sensor/impulse gear 1.4 mm
ZF operating voltage 8V
52

2.8 Fitting of reservoir and temperature sensor to 1

heat exchanger 2
3
41 Install O-ring (3) in annular groove of reservoir.
Fit reservoir to heat exchanger.
4
5
001226
42 Screw temperature sensor (1) into heat

exchanger, tighten.
Max. tightening torque (M 18x1.5) 40 Nm.
Technical data - Temperature sensor (0501 311 232)

at + 20 °C approx. 50 000 Ω
at + 91 °C approx. 2380 Ω
at + 100 °C approx. 1830 Ω
at + 110 °C approx. 1340 Ω
at + 140 °C approx. 573 Ω
2
1
001225
53

Assembly ZF Intarder
2
3
* 001228
1 = Retaining nut (waf 18) TA = 62 Nm

(* coat with Loctite 574)
2 = Hex screw (M8) TA= 23 Nm
3 = O-ring
2.9 Fitting of heat exchanger
43 Install new O-rings (3) in annular grooves of

control unit housing.
44 Screw stud bolts (1) into heat exchanger with
Loctite 574 (18 Nm).
45 Apply thin coat of Loctite 574 to designated
surfaces (*) of heat exchanger.
Fit heat exchanger to control unit housing, insert
and tighten hex nuts using Loctite 574.
Tightening torque 62 Nm.
46 Screw in one M8 hex screw (2) and tighten.
54

2.10 Fitting of oil filter to Intarder
47 Install new O-rings in filter cover and filter

cartridge.
48 Fit filter cartridge to filter cover.
49 Fit magnet from old filter cartridge to face of new
cartridge. If magnet disc is missing, obtain a new
one and fit.
50 Install filter cover with cartridge in housing, secure
with hex screw and washer.
2 = O-ring in filter cover
3 = O-ring in filter cartridge
4 = Magnet disc 2 3 4
-
2.11 Fitting of solenoid valve to reservoir
51 Slide retaining screws (2) into solenoid valve.

Install O-ring (4) in groove. Fit solenoid valve.
Tightening torque for screws (2) is 23 Nm.
000534/1
Technical data
Solenoid valve: 3/2-way valve 0501 207 251
120-130 Ω 0501 314 675
120-130 Ω 0501 315 645 1
120-130 Ω 0501 315 832
Operating voltage: 24 V 2 3
Coil resistance approx.: 55,6 Ω bei + 23 °C
Mechanical test:
Subject valve alternately to 0 and 24 V and check
acoustic limit stop of piston (piston must not jam). 4
001224
55

56

ZF - Intarder Test rig
3. Test bench
3.1 Test bench approval

(test report and sample copy)
After repair of the Intarder, perform a seal and • Intarder outlet pressure P.. and control pressure P.. may
function test on the test bench. vary from one Intarder unit to another with the same
Observe the following criteria: braking power. For this reason, only perform this
pressure test as a check to obtain information about the
Note prior to the inspection:
functions of the electronic/hydraulic control circuit.
• Test electronics 1P01 138 069 available Adjustment of the Intarder control valve (Page 9.6,
• Test oil SAE 10 or 30 Pos. 11) after repair work is not necessary!
An exception to this is the replacement of
• Test at operating temperature approx. 85 °C rotor/stator/Intarder housing.
• Output speed between 450 and 600 rpm • Pressure may fall below these values on test benches
• Note temperature when operating Intarder braking < 100 kW
control (max. 140°C at oil measuring point).
! DANGER
Incorrect setting can lead to overheating of transmission and the following types of transmission damage.
Braking IT-pressure P IT (bar) Control pressure P ST (bar) Pump press. P Ppe (bar) Tempe-
stage Meas. port TÖl Measuring conn. P St Measuring conn. P Ppe rature
°C
Nom. Actual Nom. Actual Nom. Actual
0 1.3 - 2.3 0 1.0 - 2.5
1 2.0 - 3.5 1.8 - 2.8 10.0 - 12.0
2 3.0 - 4.5 2.2 - 3.2 10.0 - 12.0
3 4.0 - 5.5 2.7 - 3.7 10.0 - 12.0
4 5.0 - 6.5 3.2 - 4.2 10.0 - 12.0
5 6.0 - 7.5 3.7 - 4.7 10.0 - 12.0
6 8.0 - 10.0 4.7 - 5.7 10.0 - 12.0
Electronic speedometer test:

O.K. No function
(special tool 1P01 138 070)
Seal test (leaks): O.K. Leaking at:
Noise test: O.K. Define noises:
57

58

Notes
59

Funktionsskizze
Function sketch
1 Winkelgeber Vorderachse
2 Lenkprogramme z.B. Allrad, Hundegang
3 Geschwindigkeit
4 Sollwert
5 Sicherheits-Lenk-Computer
6 Proportionalventil
7 Lenkzylinder
8 Winkelgeber Hinterachse
1 angle transducer front axle

2 steering programs e.g. allwheel, crab steering
3 vehicle speed
4 setoint
5 safety steering computer
6 proportional valve
7 steering ram
8 angle transducer steered rear axle

Lenkprogramme
Steering Programs
ALLRAD-LENKUNG (STRASSE)
ALL WHEEL STEERING (PUBLIC TRAFFIC)
Beispiel 4-Achser: In niedrigen Geschwindigkeitsbereichen lenkt die 4. Achse

entsprechend der Lenkgeometrie mit. Proportional mit zunehmender
Geschwindigkeit wird die Hinterachse zur Mitte geführt. Dadurch wird bei hohen
Geschwindigkeiten der Geradeauslauf verbessert.
E.g. 4-axle mobile crane: In low speed ranges the 4th Axle is steered
according the steering geometry. Proportionally to the increasing speed
the rear axle is steered into straight position. This leads to an improved
tracking performance at high speed.

Lenkprogramme
Steering Programs
ALLRAD-LENKUNG - ENGE KURVE

ALL WHEEL STEERING - NARROW CURVE
Beispiel 4-Achser: Um auch auf öffentlichen Straßen eine größtmögliche Rangierfähigkeit zu erreichen
kann unterhalb einer Geschwindigkeit von 5km/h das Sonderprogramm „Enge Kurve“ aktiviert werden.
Hierbei wird die Lenklinie (gestrichelt) in die Fahrzeugmitte verlegt wodurch der Wendekreis verringert wird.
Das Programm wird oberhalb von 20 km/h automatisch deaktiviert.
E.g. 4-axle mobile crane: In order to obtain a maximum manoeuvrability also in public traffic it is possible
to select special program „narrow curve“ in speed ranges below 3mph. The steering line (dotted line)
is shifted to the middle of the vehicle. Resulting from this the turning circle is minimized. The program
is automatically switched off in speed ranges above 12mph.

Lenkprogramme
Steering Programs
ALLRAD-LENKUNG (BAUSTELLE) DIAGONALFAHRT (BAUSTELLE)

ALL WHEEL STEERING (OFF ROAD) CRAB STEERING (OFF ROAD)
Beispiel 4-Achser: Lenkgeometrie für Gleicher Lenksinn zum seitlichen Verfahren

maximale Manövrierfähigkeit
E.g. 4-axle mobile crane: steering geometry Unisense steering for parallel movement
for maximum manoeuverability

Sonderprogramme
Special Programs
WEGFAHREN VON DER WAND

MANOEUVRING APART FROM A WALL
Wegabhängig gesteuerte Lenkbewegung zur Unterdrückung des Heckausschermaßes. Das Lenksystem

errechnet im ersten Moment eine diagonale Lenkstrategie um das Ausscheren des Hecks zu minimieren.
Erst im weiteren Kurvenverlauf wird die diagonale Lenktrategie in eine Allrad-Charakteristik überführt
Steering movement in dependance to the distance for swing out suppression. In the first step the
steering system generates a diagonal steering strategy in order to minimize the swing-out of the rear.
Later on in the further course the diagonal steering leads into an all-wheel character.

Systemaufbau EHLA Multi System structure EHLA Multi
1. Sollwertgeber setpoint generator

2. Sicherheits-Lenk-Computer safety steering computer
3. Lenkzylinder steering cylinder
4. Istwertgeber Hinterachsen actual value angle transducer rear axles
5. Proportional-Hydraulikeinheit mit integrierten Sperrventilen proportional hydraulic unit with check valves
6. Konstantpumpe fixed displacement pump
7. Anbindung Motor- und Getriebemanagement über CAN-Bus connection of enginecontrol and gearbox via CAN-bus

Systemkomponenten
System Components
SICHERHEITS-LENK-COMPUTER
SAFETY STEERING COMPUTER
• Sicherheitstechnik entsprechend EN954-1 Kategorie 3 und 4

• Safety technology according EN954-1 category 3 and 4
• CAN-Bus (J1939) für Geschwindigkeitssignale und Kommunikation

mit EGAS, ABS oder Getriebesteuerung
• CAN-Bus (J1939) for speed signals and communication
with ABS, engine and gear control
• ON-Board Textdisplay und Bedienelemente für

Service und Diagnose
• On-board text display and operation elements
for service and diagnosis
• Bis zu 8 gelenkte Achsen möglich durch umfangreiche

Bordcomputer-Produktfamilie
• Up to 8 steered axles possibles due to an
extensious board computer product line

Systemkomponenten
System Components
PROPORTIONAL HYDRAULIKEINHEIT
PROPORTIONAL HYDRAULIC UNIT
• Inklusive Druckregelung mit hydraulischem Load-Sensing

• Including pressure control with hydraulic load sensing
• Sonderfunktionen wie Schockventile sind integriert

• Special functions like shock valves are integrated

Systemkomponenten
System Components
REDUNDANTER SICHERHEITS-WINKELGEBER
REDUNDANT SAFETY ANGLE TRANSDUCER
• Extrem robuste Konstruktion zum direkten Anbau an die Achse

• Extreme rugged construction for direct assembly at the axle
• Kundenspezifische Gehäuse, Anschlußkabel, Anlenkhebel,

Montagezubehör usw.
• Customized housings, cables, connectors,
coupling levers, accessoiries a.s.o.
• Erhältlich mit Edelstahlgehäuse für extremste Anforderungen

• Available with stainless steel housing for extremest demands
• Erhältlich für den Anbau an KESSLER Achsen

• Available for assembly on KESSLER axles

Operating Manual
General Operating Manual
Safety steering system
Mobile crane AC160 / AC200
Terex-DEMAG Mobile Cranes
Safety auxiliary steering system for multiple-axles

mobile cranes
Typ: SLC 019 410

SLC 019 102
MOBIL Bössingerstraße 33
D - 74243 Langenbeutingen
ELEKTRONIK 07946 / 9194 - 0
GMBH FAX 9194 - 130

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
Operating Manual page 1
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Inhaltsverzeichnis
1 General ......................................................................................................... 5
1.1 About this Document ...................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Safety Hints ..................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Safety hints at overhaul.................................................................................................. 6
1.3.1 Welding work at the vehicle ............................................................................................. 6
1.3.2 Steering Systems with Hydraulic Accumulator................................................................ 6
1.3.3 Working in the Steering Range of the Wheels ................................................................. 7
1.3.4 Overhaul............................................................................................................................ 7
2 Installation.................................................................................................... 8
2.1 General............................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Assembly of the Steering Cylinder ................................................................................ 8
2.3 Mounting and Connection of the Hydraulics Units.................................................... 8
2.4 Mounting and Wiring of the Safety Angle Transducers ............................................. 9
2.5 Mounting place of the safety steering computer ........................................................ 10
2.6 Wiring of the System .................................................................................................... 11
3 Start up ....................................................................................................... 12
3.1 General........................................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Requirements ................................................................................................................ 12
3.3 Inspection of the electrical installation ....................................................................... 13
3.4 Connection of the Safety Angle Transducers ............................................................. 13
3.5 Axle Alignment.............................................................................................................. 15
3.5.1 Entering Alignment Mode .............................................................................................. 16
3.5.2 Alignment Modes ........................................................................................................... 16
3.5.3 Select an Axle for Alignment ......................................................................................... 18
3.5.4 Alignment of Center Position ......................................................................................... 20
3.5.5 Left Mechanical Lock Alignment................................................................................... 21
3.5.6 Right Mechanical Lock Alignment................................................................................. 22
3.6 First activation of Steering Mode ................................................................................ 23
3.7 Test Drive....................................................................................................................... 24
4 Operation Manual ..................................................................................... 25
4.1 System concept .............................................................................................................. 25
4.1.1 The Vehicle..................................................................................................................... 25
4.1.2 Safety Concept ................................................................................................................ 25
4.1.3 The Steering Computer................................................................................................... 26
4.1.4 Safety Hints..................................................................................................................... 27

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.2 Overhaul ........................................................................................................................ 28
4.2.1 Daily Check (Departure Control) ................................................................................... 28
4.2.2 Semiannual checks.......................................................................................................... 28
4.2.3 Check every 2 years or every 200 000 km...................................................................... 28
4.2.4 Check every 4 years or every 400 000 km...................................................................... 28
4.3 Steering functions ......................................................................................................... 29
4.3.1 Operation of the Steering System ................................................................................... 29
4.3.1.1 Steering mode „public mode“ and „offroad“..............................................................................................29
4.3.1.2 Steering Programms....................................................................................................................................29
4.3.1.3 Overview of steering programs...................................................................................................................30
4.3.1.4 Further control elements .............................................................................................................................30
4.3.2 Special functions............................................................................................................. 31
4.3.2.1 Axle synchronization ..................................................................................................................................31
4.3.2.2 Error reactions ............................................................................................................................................31
4.3.2.3 Speed limitation ..........................................................................................................................................31
4.3.2.4 Output for speed threshold..........................................................................................................................32
4.3.2.5 Option „Rigid Axle“ ...................................................................................................................................32
4.3.3 Monitoring functions ...................................................................................................... 32
4.3.3.1 Speed measurement ....................................................................................................................................32
4.3.3.2 Monitoring of the locking position .............................................................................................................32
4.3.3.3 Monitoring of Steering Deviation...............................................................................................................33
4.3.3.4 Lamp Test ...................................................................................................................................................33
4.3.3.5 Parameter Set Guarding ..............................................................................................................................34
4.4 Hydraulics Pressure Supply of the Steering System.................................................. 35
4.5 Manual Emergency Operation .................................................................................... 36
4.6 User Interface for Service and Diagnosis ................................................................... 37
4.6.1 Entering the Service Menu ............................................................................................. 37
4.6.1.1 Entering Access Codes ...............................................................................................................................39
4.6.1.2 Using the Parameter Value Menu ...............................................................................................................39
4.6.1.3 Alignment ...................................................................................................................................................41
4.6.1.4 I/O-Data Display.........................................................................................................................................41
4.6.1.5 Error Memory .............................................................................................................................................42
4.6.1.6 Display of the softwareversion ...................................................................................................................45
4.6.2 Display of Operational Data ........................................................................................... 45
4.6.2.1 Display in error-free operation....................................................................................................................45
4.6.2.2 Display of the Actual Errors .......................................................................................................................46
4.6.2.3 Display of faulty parameters.......................................................................................................................46
4.6.2.4 Display of Operational Data .......................................................................................................................47
5 Summary of Parameters ........................................................................... 51

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
6 Alarm List .................................................................................................. 64

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Index of pictures
PICTURE 1: SCHEME OF ANGLE TRANSDUCER .................................................................................. 14
PICTURE 2: OPERATING THE STEERING COMUTER, OVERVIEW OF SERVICES.......................... 38
Note
This manual describes installation, start up, operation and service of the safety auxiliary
steering system.
Information provided here should be followed carefully by skilled staff. The service
manual covers maintenance and should be used as reference for writing the vehicles
handbook.
Technical changes preserved.
File:
Date: 2002-10-08 / Gp / Pl
Author: Dipl. Ing. Plöger, Dipl. Ing. Klugesherz, Dipl.Ing. (FH) Rothweiler
Last change: 2004-07-14 /Gp

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
1 General
1.1 About this Document

The documentation of the safety steering computer 019 410 contains three main chapters:
Installation Manual
describes the assembly and the wiring of the angle transducers, the hydraulics
installation, etc.
Start up Manual
describes the start-up procedure of the steering system until the first test drive is
done
Service Manual
describes operation of the safety steering computer and provides for projekt specific
documentation, such as:
• parameter list,
• alarm codes,
• system outline,
• component list,
• electric wiring schematics
and
• hydraulics schematics.
Note:
This document uses the expression “front axle” for the first axle of the vehicle. This axle
has to comply harmonized European standards (70/311/EWG, ECE-R 79) or equivalent
national standards. However, it has to be made sure, this axle allows for full control of the
vehicles direction.
The expressions „axle“ or “rear axle” are used whenever an axle controlled by the steering
computer is addressed. One particular system may contain more than one controlled axle!
1.2 Safety Hints

The safety steering computer type SLC 019 410 has been developed for hydroelectric
auxiliary steering systems. Therefore the front axle will mainly control the direction of
movement the rear axles are steering additionally.
The steering system is designed to meet the requirements of DIN V19250 class 4 (risk
equivalent to EN954-1 category 3 or EN61508 class 2). The latter can only be met, if all
components are used, installed and wired according to the installation instructions of
MOBIL ELEKTRONIK. Any deviation to the installation instructions and procedures
described in this document have to be agreed on by MOBIL-ELEKTRONIK.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
CAUTION!
Modifications of the system or its components without the agreement of MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK lead to loss of type approval. MOBIL ELEKTRONIK can’t be held
responsible for any damage that results from unauthorized modification. The same applies,
if the steering system is installed on another type of vehicle without authorization by
MOBIL ELEKTRONIK.
Warranty is void if components are modified without authorization by MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK. The same applies, if the steering system or its components are damaged
due to improper treatment or lack of maintenance. Do not use excessive force or
inappropriate tools when mounting or demounting components.
Installation, start up and maintenance have to be done by trained staff only..
When doing painting work, make sure all components of the steering system are well
protected..
When doing welding work at the vehicle, the steering computer has to be disconnected
1.3 Safety hints at overhaul

1.3.1 Welding work at the vehicle
Unplug the safety steering computer before doing welding work! Disconnected electronic
components have to be protected against electrostatic discharge!
Make sure the unprotected electronics is not exposed to water, dirt or swarf
1.3.2 Steering Systems with Hydraulic Accumulator
Steering systems equipped with hydraulic accumulators keep the hydraulics pressure after
switching off the engine. Before working with hydraulics components release the
hydraulics pressure using the release valves!
Releasing the hydraulics pressure:
Open the hand operated release valve (see hydraulics diagram)
• Check if discharged using a pressure gauge!
• Until service work is finished, always close the pressure release valve!
Caution!:
Release hydraulic accumulator pressure before doing maintenance
work! Check if discharged using a pressure!

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
1.3.3 Working in the Steering Range of the Wheels
Before working in the steering range of the wheels, the engine has to be switched off and
the steering system has to be deactivated (i.e. pull the fuse to enter fail-safe state). When
the vehicle is equipped with self-centering axles, care must be taken the axle is either in the
centered position or the pressure of the hydraulics accumulator of the centering circuit is
released.
Make sure that there is no person in the steering range of the axles when alignment mode is
selected.
After start-up or maintenance is done, check for any errors in hydraulics and electrical
installation. Some combinations of errors may result in spontaneous axle movements at
power on!
1.3.4 Overhaul
Every half year (under rough conditions more often) all components of the steering system
will have to be checked due to damage, corrosion, loose. All activity may be done by
trained persons only. Defective components must be replaced.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
2 Installation
2.1 General
Steering equipment used on public road systems have to meet high safety standards. An
hydroelectric steering system for leading or trailing axles has to be looked at the same way
as conventional mechanical steering systems.
Performance and reliability of the whole system depend on the reliability of each compo-
nent. Only when the installation of all components is done properly the system will work in
the desired way.
Components provided by MOBIL ELEKTRONIK correspond to the requirements of
mobile applications and are of sturdy design. However they all do contain sensitive
precision parts! Especially when installing hydraulics, take measures to prevent pollution
of the hydraulics circuit. No component may be exposed to excessive force (e.g. usage of
hammers on components that contain ball bearings).
To facilitate maintenance, the following hints should be followed:
1. Mounting place of the safety steering computer: A mounting place for safety steering
computer should be chosen inside the vehicle or in a control cabinet to avoid direct
exposure to dust, moisture and direct sunlight. If the computer is delivered with a
display, this should be readable after the installation.
2. Accassibilty of components: Twice a year (when used in rough area more often) the
components of the steering system have to be checked by trained staff for mechanical
damage, corrosion or play joints. Make sure, those components can be checked at
easily!
See for the handling of the individual components below!
.
2.2 Assembly of the Steering Cylinder
1. The cylinder has to be able to provide steering forces strong enough to allow steering
movements on dry asphalt when the vehicle stands still
2. The mechanical connections between the cylinder, the axle and the chassis have to be
designed in order to stand the force created by the cylinder when maximum working
pressure is applied.
3. If a combination of cylinders is used to steer one axle (e.g. in a self-centering system
with separate cylinders for steering and centering) and one cylinder may work against
the other in one of the possible system states (e.g. fail-safe state), all mechanical and
hydraulics components have to be designed to resist these forces.
2.3 Mounting and Connection of the Hydraulics Units

1. Mounting: hydraulics units need to be very sturdy and heavy because of the high
energy density of hydraulics systems. Mounting of these units has to be equally sturdy
to resist shock and vibration. Make sure that all fixing points of a hydraulics block are
used. Use bolts that won’t corrode and lock all nuts. Note that improper mounting may

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
result in mechanical strain to the moving parts of hydraulics units (sliding valves),
causing them to seize.
2. Place of mounting: The hydraulics units must not be mounted in the range of snow
chains or gravel. Avoid direct contact of spray water caused by the wheels. If necessary
use a sheet metal.
3. Tube connections must fit and have to be installed without any tension.
4. For the connection of the hydraulics units common parts according DIN 3852 form B
(sealing groove) or form E (soft sealing gasket) may be used. Make sure to apply the
correct torque!
5. Diameters of tubes must be chosen according to the hydraulics diagram.
6. The steering system contains sliding valves with very small tolerances. Although they
appear very sturdy, they are very sensitive to pollution of hydraulics fluid and to
mechanical strain. To avoid sticking valve sliders, take care that filings, burr and dirt
are removed from the tubes, using a suitable cleaning device.
7. The hydraulics sense of rotation is defined as follows: A hydraulics connection from P
to A should result in clockwise rotation of the axle (seen from above).
8. The hydraulics tank has to compensate for difference in oil volume that is needed by
hydraulics cylinders during operation. The tank has to provide two times the required
oil volume. When using an accumulator system using 4 x 1-Liter accumulators, the
tank should contain at least 10 Liters. The oil level can vary about 4 Liters.
2.4 Mounting and Wiring of the Safety Angle Transducers

Connections and joints of the angle transducers are safety critical parts of the steering
system (same importance as a conventional track rod). In case of a failure of connection or
joints, the steered axle is out of control and may steer in any direction (similar to a failure
of a conventional track rod).
1. Mounting: When coupling the angle transducer to the track rod or the steering lever, it
is advisable to make use of drilled holes prepared by the manufacturer of the axle
(drilling or welding has to be permitted by the manufacturer). When using clamps at
track rods or steering levers, make a sturdy construction (e.g. use at least 4 M8-screws).
2. To mount the angle transducer it is necessary to use corrosion less screws with a
firmness of 8.8. Make sure that the nut won’t loosen by usage of self-locking nuts or
threadlocking adhesive.
3. If strong vibrations are to be expected (e.g. when mounted to the axle) the shaft of the
angle transducer should be mounted vertically (lever direction upward or downward).
4. Mounting place: The safety angle transducer must not be mounted in the range of snow
chains or gravel. Avoid direct contact of spray water caused by the wheels. If necessary
use a sheet metal. The ground clearance may not be limited in any case by the angle
transducer or connection parts (arms, joints). Make sure, that the angle transducer and
moving parts are not exposed to external forces when the vehicle is used off road. If
necessary secure the mounting section by a metal sheet or a fender. A check-up of the
connection has to be possible any time.
5. When selecting the mounting range, make sure that in any operation mode (e.g. full
suspension range, full steering angle, operation with snow chains) the connection and
joints of the angle transducer won’t touch other components. Make sure, a clearance

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
zone of about 10mm is kept. If the vehicle is used off road, the clearance should be
bigger.
6. To compensate for all tolerances of manufacturing and mounting and to avoid strain
from the connection of the angle transducer, it is necessary to use ball jointed arms.
The joints (nominal size 8mm) have to secured be locked. The connecting rod should
be made of stainless steel with a minimum diameter or 8mm. The maximum length of
the coupling rod must not exceed 400mm. The ball joints must be fixed using locknuts
and threadlocking adhesive. The thread reach should be at least 8mm at both ends. Best
use a rod with combining left and right thread and appropriate ball joints. See our
guideline SK 410 for the standard installation.
7. Cinematic aspects for the assembly of the angle transducer: The safety angle transducer
should have a swing of +/-25° to +/-55° for the full steering range (stop to stop). Take
care a proportional relation between steering angle and measured angle transducer
exists! In straight position of the axle, the safety transducer must be in mid position to
allow for teach in (alignment) of the axle by the steering computer (maximum
tolerance ± 5°).
2.5 Mounting place of the safety steering computer

1. A mounting place for safety steering computer should be chosen inside the vehicle or
in a control cabinet to avoid direct exposure to dust, moisture and direct sunlight. If the
computer is delivered with a display, this should be readable after the installation.
2. When doing welding work at the vehicle, the steering computer has to be disconnected.
Make sure, the steering computer can be disconnected easily!

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
2.6 Wiring of the System

1. The electrical connections may only be made by trained staff using suitable tools. The
delivered plugs and threaded connectors have to be mounted according to the their
instructions. It is not permitted to leave out gaskets – all connections that are exposed
to the environment must be waterproof after the mounting.
2. Never insert single wires into connectors / PG-threads. Pay attention to this when
wiring safety angle transducers.
3. The isolation shell of the cable must reach deep enough into PG-threads to provide for
proper sealing. The shield of shielded cable has to be connect at one end only and must
not be contacted to the housing of the angle transducer (cut the shield to the same
length as the jacket).
4. The PG-thread must be tightened firmly (but not forcibly) to be waterproof and to
provide for strain relief. The cable must not slip out of the PG-thread, when pulled at
with a force of 50N.
5. Always use bootlace ferrules with suitable crimp tools when wiring the angle
transducers.
6. To avoid interferences, signal and control wires should not be routed next be to cables
that lead high current or high frequency signals.
7. Sensor and magnet cables, that are too long, never should looped up commonly..
8. Always use cables that are specified for automotive temperature range and
environmental conditions. The curvature of a cable must not be smaller than a tenth of
the cable diameter or according to the cable manufacturers specifications. Always use
cables that are specified for automotive temperature range and environmental
conditions. The curvature of a cable must not be smaller than a tenth of the cable
diameter or according to the cable manufacturers specifications.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
3 Start up
3.1 General
This section describes testing steps after installation including test drives.
Initial start-up of the first vehicle of its type has to include additional testing of
controllability of the vehicle when switching to fail safe state during operation.
Hint
This manual describes the start up, the programming of the parameters and the readout of
the alarm memory using the operating controls of the safety steering computer.
The handling with the steering computer can be done using a Notebook/PC via serial
interface (3-wire RS232). The MOBIL ELEKTRONIK PC-Service-Software (PCS)
provides for the following functions ....
... alignment of the axles
... programming of the parameters
... display of alarm codes in plain text
... monitoring and recording of the state of in- and outputs
as well as ... internal data of the steering computer.
The usage of the PCS is covered by another manual (PCS 093 101).
3.2 Requirements
Installation of all components according to the hydraulics and electrical diagrams has to be
finished and checked for errors.
The initial start-up should be done by staff trained in electrical- and vehicle engineering.
The start-up has to be done following the procedure given below.
CAUTION!
• Modifications of the system or its components without the agreement of MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK lead to loss of type approval. MOBIL ELEKTRONIK can’t be held
responsible for any damage that results from unauthorized modification. The same
applies, if the steering system is installed on another type of vehicle without
authorization by MOBIL ELEKTRONIK.
• Warranty is void if components are modified without authorization by MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK. The same applies, if the steering system or its components are
damaged due to improper treatment or lack of maintenance. Do not use excessive force
or inappropriate tools when mounting or demounting components.
• Installation, start up and maintenance have to be done by trained staff only.
• When doing welding work at the vehicle, the steering computer has to be disconnected
• Never pull plugs when power supply is on!

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
3.3 Inspection of the electrical installation

• the supply voltage is correct and all pins except those of the digital inputs are at 0V
level;
• hydraulics valves connected to the proper PWM outputs;
• all sensors and angle transducers are connected properly:
The angle transducers are supplied with two voltages “+5ref” and “+5Vext”. Crossing
over both supplies might lead to erroneous readout of the angle transducers and alarm
messages.
To prevent wrong assignment of reference voltage outputs to the tracks of the angle
transducers:
1. Connect track 1 of all angle transducer according to the wiring scheme. Don’t
connect the other track’s supply 5Vext.
2. Connect PCS and turn on ECU power supply. Check if voltages at the ECU’s
inputs are correct, refer to the wiring diagram.
The alarm messages displayed may just refer to track “B” of every angle
transducer.
1. Complete wiring connecting 5Vext and restart the system. Check if all voltages are
approximately 2.5V and all alarm messages are cleared.
Caution!:
1. when swapping of the angle transducer’s sense of direction is
necessary, always swap the supplies of both tracks! Swapping
slider pins may affect proper operation!
2. An connection between 0V-supply and 0V-signal other than
within the steering electronics is not permitted!
3.4 Connection of the Safety Angle Transducers

The safety angle transducers are made up of two independent sensor units A and B.
Make sure the sensors A are connected to 5Vref and the sensors B to 5Vext. Check the
voltage between the 0V-signal and the sliders. In mid-position of the axle the voltage of
sensor A should have between 2,4V and 2,6V.
The sense of direction should be as follows:
Clockwise rotation of the axle (right direction) leads to increasing voltage at sensor A

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Sense of direction at track 2:
Inverse supply (parameter 64=0): Clockwise rotation of the axle leads to a
decreasing voltage.
Normal supply (parameter 64=1): Clockwise rotation of the axle leads to an
increasing voltage.
Default setup is inverse supply.
If the voltage sense does not correspond to this definition, the connection to reference
voltage and 0V-signal (connected to pins 1 and 3 of the sensor units) have to be swapped.
Resistor
Cable break detection: Track A Track B

Cable break range Cable break range
In order to allow for cable break > +4,8V < +0,2 V
detection, the voltage in sensor A 2,7 V 2,3 V
must not exceed 4,8V at the right Range for 0° alignment Range for 0° alignment
mechanical stop and must not be 2,3 V 2,7 V
below 0,2V at the left mechanical Cable break range Cable break range
stop. < +0,2 V > +4,8V
Schleifer-
Schutzwiderstand
3 1 2 2 3 1
+5V 0V Us Us +5V 0V
picture 1: scheme of angle transducer

Hint!:
• Take care the swing of voltages measured on either stop are about symmetric with
regard to the middle!
• If, by mistake, the connection of the sensor unit’s sliding contact is swapped with one
of the track’s reference voltage supplies, either alignment or on-line plausibility check
during operation might fail!

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
3.5 Axle Alignment

For axle alignment the steering computer saves the actual value feedback voltage of the
angle transducer at 3 positions of the steering range:
• Centre (0°)
• Full lock to the left side.
• Full lock to right side.
During normal steering operation the steering computer uses the stored alignment values
to determine the real steering angle of the axle out of the angle transducer feedback.
Caution!:
• During the alignment procedure the selected axle will move!
• When working in the steering range of the axle, make sure the axle
is not able to move. This has to be done by turning the hydraulics
supply off (engine off) and by releasing pressure from the
accumulators (if present).
Before doing the alignment a valid manufacturer parameter set as well as the
following customer parameters have to be programmed into the steering computer!
Parameter step-no.: Description

6 to 9 Mechanical angles at full lock
of the rear axle axles 1 to 4
(steered by steering
computer).
10 to 11 Mechanical angles at full lock
of the front axles (set-point).
Hints:
• Make sure that the setting of mechanical stops on all axles matches the maximum
angles as set by the steering computer’s parameters.
• If the axle is equipped with mechanical locking or centering equipment, the mechanical
center position has to be adjusted first (i.e. mechanical adjustment with the axle locked
or centered). Teach in of the center position should start right at that fixed point, to
ensure the 0°-position of the control system doesn’t diverge from the mechanical center
position.
• Alignment accuracy of the middle position may considerably affect tire wear and
tracking stability. As there often is an influence of friction on adjustment of the center
position, before teaching in, it is recommended to reduce friction by use of turntables,
jacking up the axle or at least by rolling a few meters. Best results are can be achieved
by use of laser-alignment equipment while the axle is jacked up.
If a movement of the axle is not possible, the following points should be checked:
• Brakes released?
MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
• Hydraulic supply active?
• Hydraulic pressure sufficient?
• No locking device active (axle types with locking device only)?
3.5.1 Entering Alignment Mode
Press the ESCAPE key and the ENTER key (on the diagnosis terminal) simultaneously
for at least 3 seconds.
no error
>
ESC
Hold for 3 s
Use the diagnosis terminal to select alignment mode out of various available special
functions. Scroll through the menu with the PLUS or MINUS key until the 'adjustment'
menu headers is shown on the display. Start the alignment procedure with the ENTER
key.
The system will request an access code which can be entered by using the PLUS (value +
1), MINUS (value - 1) and ENTER (confirm input) keys. The access code is needed to
allow only trained persons to perform the alignment.
Automatic detection of connected steering computers

If the steering system consists of several steering computers linked via CAN bus, the
alignment of all axles can be operated on one single steering computer. For that purpose
the steering computer scans the CAN bus for other steering computers and their steered
axles. During scanning no operation at the control panel is available.
On all connected steering computers the alignment procedure can be watched but no
control panel inputs are possible. Normally the alignment mode can only be started at the
master steering computer of the system.
3.5.2 Alignment Modes
The alignment procedure can be carried out in different modes:

1. Axle by axle
In this mode each axle is aligned one after the other at the positions 'center', 'left
lock' and 'right lock'. So this mode equals the standard alignment in the past. Use
this mode after replacing an angle transducer because only one axle needs to be
aligned.
2. Position by position
MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
In this mode all axles are aligned one after the other at the same position. The
alignment sequence is to align all axles one after the other at center position, than
all axles one after the other at the left lock and in the end all axles one after the
other at the right lock. Use this mode to align all axles during commissioning of a
new vehicle or after replacement of the steering computer.
3. Selectable axle and position
In this mode the axle and position for alignment can be selected without sequence
limitations. Use this mode to align a single position of a single axle. The integrity
of the alignment is not ensured!
4. Read alignment values
In this mode the alignment values can be read and additionally the single axles can
be steered for testing. Modifications of the alignment values are not possible in this
mode.
Hints:
• Saving of the axle positions to the steering computer memory takes place directly after
each single position. There is no need to confirm the values. In the past saving to the
memory was triggered for a whole angle transducer for three positions.
• Reading the saved alignment values is placed into a separate menu. In this menu the axle
can be steered as well.
Menu structure
The following menu structure is selected out of the 'service function menu'.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Alignment
- Mode 1: Axle by axle
- Mode 2: Position by position
- Mode 3: Selectable axle and position
- Read alignment values
Mode 1: Axle by axle

- Select axle
- Align to center
- Align to left lock
- Align to right lock
Mode 2: Position by position

- Select position
- Align first axle
- Align second axle
- Align last axle
Mode 3: Selectable axle and position

- Select axle
- Select position
- Align selected axle at selected position
Read alignment values

- Select axle
- Read center alignment
- Read left lock alignment
- Read right lock alignment
3.5.3 Select an Axle for Alignment
The single axles are aligned one after the other during commissioning. It is possible to
align a single axle as well, e. g. after the replacement of an angle transducer.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
The alignment can only be started if a valid axle number is selected. The selection of an
axle is done using the PLUS and MINUS keys.
During alignment only axles with angle transducers can be selected. The axle number is
shown on the display.
• Angle transducer on axle 1 (front axle) 'axle 1'
• Angle transducer on axle 2 (front axle) 'axle 2'
• Angle transducer on axle 4 'axle 4'
• Angle transducer on axle 5 'axle 5'
If the selected axle is not controlled by any steering computer the following message is
displayed:
not allowed
alignment axle:3
ESC
exit alignment mode
axle number - 1
axle number + 1
new SLC scan
Such axles can be scrolled through.
More than one angle transducer on one axle:

The rear axle auxiliary steering system consists of separate steering circuits with own
steering computers, angle transducers at the steered axle and angle transducers at the front
axle. With the shared axle alignment all steering computers evaluating the same axle are
saving their values at the same time.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
If e. g. the front axle has to be aligned, the angle transducers of the mechanically linked
axles 1 and 2 are aligned at the same time.
3.5.4 Alignment of Center Position
The alignment of an angle transducer is done in 3 steps:

- alignment of the center position
- mechanical left stop and
- mechanical right stop
Caution!:
The accuracy of the center position alignment directly influences the
track of the steered axles and consequently tire wear. On axles with
mechanic locking device the center position is aligned during the
mechanical axle adjustment.
On axles without mechanic locking device the alignment is
recommended to be made during mechanical adjustment of the axles.
If a new alignment is needed (e. g. after replacement of an angle
transducer or steering computer) steer the axle to the exact center
position first and take over the actual value to the new alignment.
If only the full lock alignment has to be made it is possible to skip the
center alignment step.
The first line of the display leads through the separate steps of the alignment procedure.
The second line displays the actual values of the angle transducer in mV (0.001 V).
The axle can be steered with the MINUS and PLUS keys. Pressing a key, axle movement
starts at low speed. Speed of movement increases, as the key is pressed continuously.
While doing the alignment in straight position the axle will activate the locking device (if
available). The axle will lock in the straight position automatically.
Storage of every single alignment position can be skipped pressing ESC. Alignment of the
selected axle is skipped by pressing ESC twice.
Sense of rotation of the axle:

When the MINUS key is pressed the axle has to move to the left. Pressing the PLUS key,
the axle has to move to the right. If this definition is not met, swap the connection of the
proportional valve solenoids A and B over (however, if this has to be done, wiring
diagrams should be updated).
Sense of rotation of the angle transducer:
Doing a counter-clockwise rotation of the axle (direction towards the left stop), the voltage
of the first track of the angle transducer should decrease, with a clockwise rotation the
voltage should increase. The second voltage (track 2) should change in the sense of
direction given by the parameter setting (P_64).

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
set axle 1 to 0
2547mV 2453mV
ESC
Skip straight position
Move left
Move right
Confirm position
As soon as the selected axle is positioned precisely to 0° (with regard to a locking device if
present), the value is stored by pressing ENTER. The voltage in the center position has to
be between 2350 mV and 2650 mV. If the analog value exceeds these limits, an alarm
message is raised.
If the actual value feedback is correct the position of the axle is retained.
The display shows an fault text, if the actual value feedback is not inside the tolerance
window. Press ENTER to repeat the alignment step. Press ESC to quit alignment of this
axle.
During alignment of an axle which is used by more than one steering computer the actual
values feedback of each angle transducer is shown on the display one after the other. This
allows adjusting each axle and saving its value.
CAUTION:
If the axle selected is steered during alignment the saved values of all steering computers
being already aligned are falsified.
Hint:
With every steering movement at standstill the axle and tire are distorted. This might
influence the alignment. This mainly occurs on axles which are linked mechanically. Move
the vehicle to relief the axle (one meter forward and reverse is enough). Preferably the axle
should be jacked up or at least be unloaded.
3.5.5 Left Mechanical Lock Alignment
After the center position alignment the axle has to be aligned to the left full lock.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
set axle 1 left

819mV 4280mV
ESC
Skip
Move left
Move right
Confirm position
The selected axle has to be steered to the left hand full lock by using the MINUS key (for
axles steered by the steering computer) or the steering wheel of the vehicle (for front
axles).
During the axle movement the angle transducer polarity can be checked.
After reaching the left hand full lock, the actual value feedback can be stored using the
ENTER key. The values are saved to the steering computer memory, if the voltage of
angle transducer sensor A is in the range of 200 mV to 2100 mV.
axle.
Hint:
Too low voltage range between center alignment and full lock alignment can result in poor
angle resolution and control accuracy. This might cause extensive tire wear. In case of
doubt the angle transducer type or the angle transducer linkage to the axle has to be
checked.
Caution!:
The parameter defining the full lock angle of the axle has to match the
real angle of the inner curve wheel of the axle. This angle should be
the same for both steering directions.
On all hydraulic axles mechanical steering locks are used as alignment
reference. They are important for the repeatability of the alignment.
The mechanical lock is not touched by the steering in normal
operation, if the axle mechanics is stiff enough and the parameter
setting is correct.
3.5.6 Right Mechanical Lock Alignment
The right lock alignment is similar to the left lock alignment.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
The selected axle has to be steered to the right hand full lock by using the PLUS key (for
axles steered by the steering computer) or the steering wheel of the vehicle (for front
axles).
During the axle movement the angle transducer polarity can be checked.
After reaching the right hand full lock, the actual value feedback can be stored using the
ENTER key. The values are saved to the steering computer memory, if the voltage of
angle transducer sensor A is in the range of 2900 mV to 4800 mV.
set axle 1 right

4280mV 819mV
ESC
Skip
Move left
Move right
Confirm position
axle.
3.6 First activation of Steering Mode
CAUTION:
Stay clear of the axle when activating the steering system for the first
time!
When working in the range of the axle, make sure the axle is not able
to move . This has to be done by turning the hydraulics supply off
(engine off) and by releasing pressure from the accumulators (if
present).
1. The parameters set provided by MOBIL ELEKTRONIK has to be used. For

documentation on how to program the parameters refer the PCS 093 101 manual.
2. Cycle the power supply (turn the off and on again)
3. Clear the alarm memory.
4. Turn the Ignition on – the SLC should raises no alarm (Display of „no error“
respectively rotating segments on the 7- segment display). If an alarm is raised, check
the the steering system for errors as indicated by the description of the alarm code.
MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
5. Steering while standing still
If the present angle of the axle is not close to the setpoint determined by the steering
computer, the axle has to be either „caught“ manually (i.e. change the setpoint to match
the current position of the axle) or the i.e. the front axle has to be positioned
corresponding to the steering geometry. The same can by achieved by turning the
steering wheel to and fro (the axle „synchronizes“ as a steering movement is detected).
6. Control of (as far as applicable):
• the course of the hydraulics pressure in an accumulator system (pressure lies within
the programmed thresholds)
• pressure of HLS/ELS systems with a pressure gauge
• change of steering programs
• additional functions like axle centering, lamps, buzzer, enable signal for vehicle
functions a.s.o.
3.7 Test Drive

If the hydroelectric steered axle is working and there are no alarm messages, a test drive
has to be done:
The following points have to be checked:
• Speed signals: The difference between both signals must not exceed 3km/h. For this
please compare the measured signals using the PCS or the ECUs display:
- With PC service software: select menu item „RAM data read“, watch the values
„SPEED1“ and „SPEED2“.
- With CAN diagnosis display
• Pressure course of the accumulator system (if applicable).
• Locking functions at high speed: When the programmed locking speed is exceeded the
axle is locked, if:
- The actual value of the steered axle has to be smaller than 0,5°.
- With PC service software „ACTUAL VALUE REAR AXLE“
- With diagnostic display actual value
- Axle with mechanical locking: Check the lock- und unlock devices. When the
velocity lies below the locking speed the unlocking of the axle is effected.
• Check all functions: steering programs, release a.s.o.
• After the test drive the hydraulics oil temperature of should not exceed 70°C max.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4 Operation Manual
The operating manual is considered as documentation for the vehicle manufacturer. This
operating manual contains indications of optional functions and equipment, that are not
relevant for a driver.
This operating manual should serve as an operating manual adapted to basis for one onto
the vehicle. It should be complemented around vehicle-particular dates.
4.1 System concept

4.1.1 The Vehicle
The vehicle with the steering-system SLC 019 410/102 is an all wheel steered mobile crane
with more than one axle. The vehicle has 2 inflexibly docked front axles and 2 or 3
restricted steered rear axles. The steering modes of "public road" and "offroad" are
distinguished between.
In "public road" the axles 4 and 5 are usually steered elektrohydraulically, the other rear
axles are blocked in the straight position or rear axle are as rigid axles carried out.
Presupposed axle 3 is steerable, it can be activated in very narrow bends with low speed
additionally.
In "offroad" all steerable rear axles are moved in several steering programs. The vehicle
speed is in this case limited.
4.1.2 Safety Concept
In case of failure, the steering system forces the steered axle into fail-safe state by
switching off fail-safe digital outputs.
On this vehicle the fail-safe-state is defined as locking the axles 4 and 5 in the actual
position.
Since the auxiliary steering system of the rear axles consists of two to a large extent
independent steering-systems, only in each case an axle can break down because of
accidental errors. This means that the majority of the axels remains under the control of the
driver, the vehicle remains controllable. Possibly no steering-program can be chosen any
more. After a further switch-on of the steering mode "public road” is acting.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Safety-related components are:
1. The two safety steering computers which contain fail safe hardware and software for
self test.
2. the MOBIL ELEKTRONIK safety angle transducers containing two electrical
independent angle transducers,
3. components for measurement and limitation of speed,
4. the hydraulic components of the steering system.
CAUTION:
Don’t tamper with speed limitation or speed measurement installations as
those are vital for vehicle safety!
If disabled, the vehicle may turn uncontrollable, if the steering system goes
to fail-safe state at high speed as axles may not be in straight position.
MOBIL-ELEKTRONIK can not be held responsible for any damage that
results of tampering with speed related functions!
The safety concept of a steering system based on the SLC 019 410 / 019
102 can only meet the high demands of a steering system for public road,
if all system components are assembled, installed and serviced and used
according the specifications of MOBIL ELEKTRONIK.
4.1.3 The Steering Computer
The safety steering computer SLC 019 410 and SLC 019102 has been developed for
hydroelectric control of rear axle steering systems. The steering computers are approved by
TÜV and correspond to the requirements of DIN V 19 250 class 4, equal to EN954-1
category 3 (fail-safe with self test).
Safety digital outputs are available, with which the control system can be brought into a
secure state. The steering-computer SLC 019 410 possesses about 8 outputs, SLC 019 102
about their 4.
The parameterization can be carried out about the serial interface RS232 of a personal
computer connected onto the SLC 019 410/102 or about a CAN-diagnosis unit. The
MOBILE ELEKTRONIK PC-Service Software and the CAN-diagnostics terminal takes
over the communication with the steering computer and offers further extensive diagnosis
and auxiliary functions next to the parameterization.
The steering-behavior and the monitoring functions of the steering-system are tuned by
parameters with the vehicle. The parameters may be changed only in agreement with
MOBIL ELEKTRONIK and the vehicle manufacturer. The parameters for security reasons
are checked against unauthorized manipulation.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.1.4 Safety Hints
The vehicle is equipped with electronic / hydraulic steered axels. These are at forward and
backward movement without limit effective.
If the buzzer of the steering system gets active while driving or if the error lamp is lit, the
steering system is in fail-safe state. The axles will be led in the fail-safe-state, it will either
be centered, locked in the current position or (in case of self tracking axles) set to self
tracking mode. However, fail-safe state can result in reduced performance of the vehicle
and it may have to be steered with special attention (e.g. tracking stability and tracking
performance will decrease).
In case of service and setting-jobs in the pivot area of the axels it is to be guaranteed that
the axle can not move. This can for example occur by shutdown of the hydraulics supply
(engine off) or by blocking of the axle.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.2 Overhaul
4.2.1 Daily Check (Departure Control)
• If there is no oil level control device, the oil level of the steering system has to be
checked before departure
• When switching on the ignition, the lamp / buzzer test has to be observed. On power
up, error lamp and buzzer are activated 2 times.
• Check if the manual override for the fail safe circuit’s check valve is unlocked.
4.2.2 Semiannual checks
• If there are errors of priority 1,2 or 3 in the error log memory, trained service staff
have to be informed, to carry out appropriate steps to eliminate the cause of the errors.
• Check if all parts of the steering system are firmly fixed and show no signs of
corrosion. Corroded safety critical parts have to be replaced
• The angle transducer actuation is to be tested for firm seat and especially for corrosion.
Eroded parts must be exchanged.
• Control of the hydraulic oil filters. The pollution display of the hydraulics filter must
not come with high engine speed into the red field. For the inspection the oil must have
operating temperature. In case of attaining of the yellow field the filter should be
replaced.
• The steering cylinder should not have any leakage nearby the sealing of the rod.
Furthermore the rod should not show any grooves. If the cylinder shows any damage it
has to be replaced.
• At the screw joints of the hydraulics of the steering no appreciable oil leakage must be
to be found.
• Check the correct function of the vehicle speed limitation ( if planned in the project).
With loss of the steering system (Pulled fuse) the vehicle speed is limited.
4.2.3 Check every 2 years or every 200 000 km
Change the hydraulics fluid and the backflow filters.
4.2.4 Check every 4 years or every 400 000 km
Change the hydraulic accumulators.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.3 Steering functions

4.3.1 Operation of the Steering System
4.3.1.1 Steering mode „public mode“ and „offroad“
There is a lockable switch, with which the steering system can be brought into the steering
mode “Offroad” (switch activated ) or into the steering mode "Public Road" (switch not
activated).
In the steering mode "Public Road" axle 4 and 5 will be moved in the opposite direction of
the front axle. In this steering mode axle 3 remains in the straight position, or it is executed
generally rigid.
In the steering mode “Offroad” all available axles can be moved in the steering programs
“All Wheel Steering”, “Crab Steering”, “Swing Out Suppression” or “Manual Steering”.
Rigid axles are generally lifted. The vehicle speed is limited.
During the changing from "Public Road" to "Offroad" the steering behavior changes
according to the parameterization in "All Wheel Steering", "Swing Out Suppression" or
remains with the behavior of "Public Road. The changing into “Public Road” is possible
from all steering programs.
4.3.1.2 Steering Programs
The steering has to the operation digital inputs, with which the axels can be moved in
different steering-programs. Following steering programs are available:
• Public-Road:
Axle 3 remains blocked in straight position or is executed rigid, axle 4 and 5 steer
according to the front axle. This steering program must be chosen for the ride on public
roads. Only in this steering program no speed limit occurs.
• All-Wheel-Steering:
The axles are steering according to a programmed geometry concerning the front axle.
This steering program increases the maneuverability in case of bend rides, the vehicle
speed is limited.
• Narrow-Bend:
This steering program corresponds to the behavior of the "All Wheel Steering", and
can be activated however in “Public Road” for narrowings on a short-term basis. The
steering-program "Narrow Bend" is activated in “Public road” by turning on the switch
"All Wheel Steering" and is left automatically at higher speed (for example 20 k.p.h.,
P_34) . First of all, the steering program is preselected with speeds under for example
20 k.p.h. (P_31), the lamp flashes. With underflow of a further speed of for example 5
k.p.h. (P_32) steer all axles with.
• Manual-Steering:
The rear axles are steering according to the position of the front axle and a manual
operation through routing keys on the rear axle. In this case all axles remain in a
geometrically correct position to each other. In this steering program the vehicle speed
is limited.
• Crab-Steering:
The rear axles steer equidirectionally and with same angle as the front axle. The
vehicle will move always to a large extent parallel to his longitudinal direction. In this
steering-program the vehicle speed is limited.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
• Swing-Out-Suppression:
The axles are aligned so that the swinging out of the vehicle end is minimized. For this
purpose does not steer the last axle anymore with, but moves in the straight position.
The other rear axles steer equidirectionally to the front axle in a suitable angle. In this
steering-program the vehicle speed is limited.
Every selectable steering-program has a lamp to display the steering-program. A flashing
lamp shows in this case a new steering-program, a permanently bright lamp shows the just
acting steering-program.
The change between the steering-programs is carried out as soon as all axles stand
correctly to each other. This can occur through:
• “Catching” of the axles with the front axle, the axles are taken along separately from
the front axle.
• moving the vehicle with a speed of more than 2 k.p.h., the axles move self
continuously onto the corresponding set point.
• for so long the corresponding steering program button remains pressed in the standstill
of the vehicle, the axles move self continuously onto the corresponding setpoint
• greater movements at the front axle in the standstill
4.3.1.3 Overview of steering programs
SWITCH MANUAL
“PUBLIC ROAD”/
“OFFROAD”
BUTTON BUTTON
“ALL WHEEL” “ALL WHEEL”,
”DIAGONAL”,
“MANUAL”
“SWING OUT Swing
“NARROW “PUBLIC ALL SUPRESS” out
BEND” ROAD” WHEEL supress
DIAGONAL
PUBLIC ROAD OFFROAD

picture 2:overview steering programs
4.3.1.4 Further control elements

As further control elements a lamp "Error" and a buzzer are available.
The error lamp does not light in normal operation. It flashes or lights up with an error in
the steering-system.
The buzzer sounds with every new occurred error for approx. 0,5s and at operation error at
changing the steering program.
MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.3.2 Special functions
4.3.2.1 Axle synchronization

When a change of steering mode takes place, there is a need for transitional movements
between different setpoints. These movements are referred to as synchronization
movements.
Conditions for synchronization movements are as follows:
1. angular speed of movement is limited
2. geometrically correct relation between the axles is maintained where possible. An
exception is transition to crab steering mode and transition from crab steering mode to
an all wheel steering mode (public road or offroad). There all steered axles move
independently.
3. In order to minimize the risk of someone is hurt by unattended axle movement when
the vehicle is at stand still, movement is only allowed if at least one of the following
conditions is true:
• vehicle speed > 1km/h
• the steering wheel is turned (steering movement)
• in offroad mode: one of the steering mode or steering control keys is held
• the optional digital input “synchronize axle” is active
4.3.2.2 Error reactions

Errors in the steering system are displayed with the error lamp and signaled with a buzzer
besides.
• Acting errors are displayed always with the error lamp.

• Once occurred errors are to "Ignition off" acting, independently of whether the error
cause still exists.
• The error buzzer sounds besides if the vehicle is during the occurrence of the error in
motion.
• The error buzzer sounds at every start in the error state.
• An acting error is hold automatically in the error log memory
Hint
A current error remains at least acting up to “ignition off”!
You find a full description of the errors and their displays in chapter 6.
4.3.2.3 Speed limitation

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
In „Public Road“ the vehicle speed is not limited. In all other steering-programs the vehicle
speed is limited on 20 k.p.h..
The vehicle speed is limited if an error is recognized by the steering system. If the affected
axle can be held in the straight position, the speed limit is cancelled
4.3.2.4 Output for speed threshold

The steering-electronics has a digital output, that becomes acting (+24V) as soon as the
measured vehicle speed falls below a programmed threshold. The parameter 29 is to be
indicated in k.p.h..
The exit is deactivated again if the threshold is exceeded (0V). A hysteresis of 3 k.p.h.
avoids frequent switching.
4.3.2.5 Option „Rigid Axle“

A vehicle can be equipped with liftable rigid axles. The rigid axle is in “Public Road”
lowered and lifted in “Offroad”.
Output-signal:
To avoid unnecessary tire abrasion the steering system offers an output signal which
approves the lowering of the rigid axle first if the rear axles stand correctly.
The signal "Release rigid axle lift/lower" becomes acting, when:
- „Public Road“ is selected
- all axles stand in the correct position
Input signal:
The optional input signal "rigid axle lowered" is used by the steering to limit the steering
angle at the rear axles if the rigid axle is lowered. With acting signal the steering-angles of
the rear axles are limited on angles which are adjustable in parameter P_36. This occurs
only in the steering-programs "Diagonal" and "Swing Out Suppression"
4.3.3 Monitoring functions
4.3.3.1 Speed measurement

The SLC 019 410 evaluates two independent inputs for the speed measurement.
The calibration of the speed inputs can be done by setting scaling factors (WIZ1: P_16,
WIZ2: P_17).
The SLC 019 410 compares the two calculated speeds and causes an error at exceeding of
the speed difference programmed in P_73.
4.3.3.2 Monitoring of the locking position

Every steering-axle can be locked in the straight position. In this position the axle is
blocked hydraulically and if available locked with a bolt mechanically. The steering
computer checks the position of the axle and reports deviations from this position.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Die maximal zulässige Abweichung aus der Geradeausstellung kann in Parameter P_78
eingestellt werden. Kehrt die Achse innerhalb 0,5s in den zulässigen Bereich zurück erfolgt
keine Fehlermeldung.
The maximally possible deviation from the straight position can be set in parameter P_78.
If the axle returns into the permissible range within 0,5s no error report occurs.
4.3.3.3 Monitoring of Steering Deviation

To meet high safety demands and to assure robust operation at the same time, the SLC
provides for dynamic monitoring of the steering tolerance. This function consists of three
functional parts:
1. Control of inverse movement
The first part of the function watches over direction of axle movement. If the axle moves to
the wrong direction for more than the time defined in P_96 (inverse axle movement) an
error is generated. This function is independent from the vehicle speed.
2. Control deviation monitoring
The second part of the function monitors the absolute control deviation of the steered axle.
If the allowed deviation is exceeded for a defined time, an alarm is raised. The allowed
control deviation depends on the vehicle speed and can be determined by factory
parameters.
control-
deviation
[°]
area of immediate alarm
P_102 area of delayed alarm
P_103 P_106
P_104
allowed area
P_105
v1 v2 v3 v4 speed
P_98 P_99 P_100 P_101 [km/h]
picture 3: deviation monitoring
3. Exceeded control deviation monitoring

High deviation raises an alarm immediately, as a second deviation threshold is exceeded.
This second threshold is formed by a programmable ratio out of the first threshold (P_106).
4.3.3.4 Lamp Test

After the start up is turned on, the steering computer tests the connected lamps. The control
lamps and buzzers are pulsed twice in a time span of 2,5 seconds.
Note:
The driver/operator has to check the correct function of all lamps and buzzers when
starting up the vehicle.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.3.3.5 Parameter Set Guarding
The steering computer can be applied to various system requirements by setting parameter
values. These parameter values can be modified by different means (CAN hand held tester,
on print diagnostic display or PC using PCS). As to prevent unauthorized modification of
factory parameters, P_52 to P_254 are guarded by checking on a signature (CRC) written
in P_40.
After power on, the steering computer checks on compliance of parameter settings and
signature. In case of a discrepancy a alarm „31,19,0“ is raised. However, to allow for
system optimization, for the first 5 minutes after power-on, apart from alarm indications,
there will be no effect on system behavior. After 5 minutes the alarm „31,19,1“ is raised
and the steering system locks all steered axles in center position. This state can only be left
by switching power off and on again.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.4 Hydraulics Pressure Supply of the Steering System

Hydraulics Load-Sensing System (HLS)
HSL provides for hydraulic load depending pressure by means of hydraulic compensators
(e.g. open center load sensing) or by bias of a pressure controlled hydraulic pump (e.g.
closed center load sensing).
However, it is not advisable to share a pump with other working gear that may be
demanding hydraulic supply the same time as the steering system.
Open center load sensing usually works with an independent fixed displacement pump
since all the hydraulics fluid not needed for an axle movement, will be bypassed to tank.
Because only a small numbers of components are needed, the advantages are high
reliability at low price compared to other solutions.
If no steering movement is needed, the entire oil flow from the pump is bypassed to tank,
with very low system pressure. System and engine do not dissipate much power.
However, if high steering force is demanded, even small quantities of oil consumed by the
axle cause considerable power dissipation, which may cause oil heating.
When driving with the engine at high number of revolutions, permanently doing steering
maneuvers, there is a danger of oil overheating. If such operation modes happen
frequently, tank volume has to be enlarged sufficiently or a temperature monitoring gear
has to be used.
In applications where a big span of number of revolutions has to be covered, a pump with
volume flow limitation should be used.
To avoid overheating at stand still, the steering system switches off the hydraulics after a
period of time, even if there is a small (but sustained) angle deviation.
Hydraulics will be reactivated if at least one of the following conditions is true:
• Setpoint values are changed
• Steering program keys are operated
• Movement of the front axle
• Vehicle movement
Closed center load sensing uses a controllable hydraulic pressure supply in order to
minimize energy dissipation as only small quantities of hydraulic fluid at high pressure are
demanded.
Due to limited efficiency of controlled pumps, this approach still can take advantage of the
treatment of sustained deviation described before.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.5 Manual Emergency Operation

If the steering system is in fail safe state while the hydraulics supply is still working, the
axle can be moved using auxiliary manual controls to allow for repair or to prepare for
“limp home”.
1. The check valve that locks the axle has to be opened by pushing down and turning
clockwise the cap of the check valves solenoid. It has to be made sure, nobody is
within reach of the axle’s steering range.
2. To move the axle, open the proportional valves by pressing a blunt tool (e.g. Allan key)
in the center of the rubber-sealed solenoid caps.
3. after turning the axle to the desired angle, the check valve has to be unlocked to allow
for proper operation!
auxiliary manual control

lock
rubber cap
solenoid B solenoid A
picture 4: Manual Emergency Operation
CAUTION:
The manual override for the fail safe circuit’s check valve allways has to
be unlocked except when actually using the auxiliary manual control.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.6 User Interface for Service and Diagnosis

ESCAPE key: - quit current menu
- move input cursor to the left
MINUS key: - one menu point back.
- Subtract value by 1
PLUS key: - one menu point forth
- increase value by 1
ENTER key: - enter selected menu.
- confirm/save value.
- move input cursor to the right
4.6.1 Entering the Service Menu
The service menu can be entered by pressing ENTER and ESC simultaneously.
No error
>
ESC
Press simultaneously for at least 3 seconds
Service menu is entered as soon as the display text 'i/o data display' comes up. The choice
of following submenus can be done:

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
picture 2: operating the steering computer, overview of services

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.6.1.1 Entering Access Codes

To ensure only authorized persons can change parameter values and do axle alignments, an
access code has to be keyed in order to use those services.
Opposed to entering the alignment menu, where a access code has to be entered for access,
in the parameter menu, the pass code needs to be entered before the first new value can be
stored. This allows for reading out parameters without knowing the pass code.
4.6.1.2 Using the Parameter Value Menu

The steering computer can be applied to various system requirements by setting parameter
values. These parameter values can be modified by different means (CAN hand held tester,
on print diagnostic display or PC using PCS). As to prevent unauthorized modification of
factory parameters, P_52 to P_254 are guarded by checking on a signature (CRC) written
in P_40.
By use of parameter values the steering system receives information on:
• details of the steering system as maximum steering angles, type of angle transducers,
measurement and use of vehicle speed;
• hydraulics configuration, valve specific data;
• supplementary functions as special steering modes or special monitoring functions;
• control loop adjustment.
Those values are stored in non volatile memory (EEPROM).
The submenu ‘parameter‘ can be accessed as described in section 4.6.1.
On activation of the parameter menu, the user is prompted to key in the parameter number
he wants to access.
A number is keyed in digit by digit. A cursor (underscore character) marks the digit that
can be changed by pressing PLUS and MINUS. A every digit has to be confirmed by
pressing ENTER. The previous digit can be accessed by pressing ESC. Pressing ESC
when the cursor is at the leftmost digit, the number input mode is exited.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
4.6.1.2.1 Reading Out Consecutive Parameters

After choosing the first parameter number, the parameter’s value will be displayed.
Pressing ENTER again, will show the next parameter number etc.
4.6.1.2.2 Key In Parameters

To change a parameter value, the cursor has to be move left by pressing ESC to the first
digit to be changed.
After changing the digit by using PLUS and MINUS, the digit has to be confirmed by
pressing ENTER.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Pressing ENTER moves the cursor one digit to the right. Pressing ENTER at the rightmost
position stores the value. When this is done for the first time since entering the parameter
menu, the user is prompted for a pass code.
Before storage, the value is checked on limits stored in the PLC. If the value doesn’t
correspond to those limits, the limits are displayed.
Pressing any key, the user returns to number input mode.
4.6.1.3 Alignment
For axle alignment (alignment of the angle transducers) the middle, leftmost and rightmost
position of the axle have to be taught in. In normal steering operation mode, the steering
computer uses those stored values for the translation of sensor values to axle angles values.
The alignment of an angle transducer is done in several steps:
- choose a axle
- alignment of the center position
- mechanical left stop
- mechanical right stop
After teaching in the angle transducer the values have to be transferred to the memory
separately.
4.6.1.4 I/O-Data Display

Using the 'i/o data display' all process input/output data can be displayed (digital and
analog inputs and outputs). The submenu 'i/o data display' can be accessed as described in
section 4.6.1.
MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
On pressing ENTER, the display shows the status of digital inputs 1 to 8.
A total of 19 views can be accessed using PLUS and MINUS.
Sequentially several IO-data can be displayed:

• digital inputs
• analog inputs
• PWM outputs
• analog outputs
• digital outputs
• incremental inputs
4.6.1.5 Error Memory

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
All errors which have been occurred are stored in an EEPROM memory and are kept
without supply. The error memory contains 32 storage positions each providing 3 error
codes (location, kind of error, priority).
In order to simplify the reason for the errors they are subdivided in location, kind of error
and priority.
Location and kind of error describe the defective area:
Location: e.g.: angle transducer track 1 of axle 1
Kind: e.g.: cable break, tolerance....
The priority defines the reaction of the system in case of an error:
Priority 0: Warning, the steering behavior is not affected.
Priority 1: The steering is kept until the axle passes 0° the next time.
Priority 2: The axle is centered immediately (active steering).
Priority 3: Switch off in the secure state (setting the axle hydraulically free)
To read or erase the error memory with the diagnosis terminal please select the menu 'error
memory' as described in Chap.4.6.
4.6.1.5.1 Reading the error memory

The error memory mode is activated with the ENTER-key. The display changes to the first
error storage position. The error memory mode can be left any time by pressing the ESC-
key.
Pressing the PLUS- and MINUS-key the errors can be read one after the other. At the end
of the error memory (position 32) the display jumps back to position 1 automatically.
As soon as an error 255, 255, 255 appears in the display there are no further errors written
in the memory. Thus the error position before is the last error message written to memory.
If the error memory is erased completely there are only „255“ contained.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
error number: 1
code:001 001 003
ESC
Previous error Next error
4.6.1.5.2 Erasing the Error Memory

The error memory can be erased at any state of display in the error memory mode.
error number: 1
code:001 001 003
ESC
Keep pressed for 3 seconds
After having pressed the PLUS-key for at least 3 seconds the erase process can be started
by confirming the request message appearing on the display.
error memory
clear ?
ESC
Do not erase Erase
Pressing the ESC-key the memory will not be erased. The display changes to the error
memory mode again. Pressing the ENTER-key starts the erasing process.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
While the memory is erased the progress is displayed on the second line of the display.
After the memory has been erased all storage positions are set to 255. The display
automatically changes to the first position.
The menu 'error memory' can be left by pressing the ESC-key.
4.6.1.6 Display of the software version

Single parts of the software and the date of modification can be verified regarding their
software version number. This function is only necessary for the surveillance of
modifications of the steering computer and is usually meaningless for the user.
4.6.2 Display of Operational Data
After switching on the steering system the software version and date of the steering
computer will be displayed.
After about 5 seconds the display automatically changes to the show the operational status.
As long as no key is pressed the error display stays active during the operation of the
steering computer.
4.6.2.1 Display in error-free operation

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
In addition to the message 'no error' there is a '>' sign moving from left to right in the
second line. This means the steering computer is working and the software program is
running.
4.6.2.2 Display of the Actual Errors
As soon as an error is recognized in the steering computer the display changes to the error
memory. All single codes (location, kind of error, priority) of the error are shown. If there
are several errors pending at the same time the display automatically changes to the next
error position every 2,5 seconds. If all error causes are repaired the display changes back to
the error-free operation.
4.6.2.3 Display of faulty parameters
For each software parameter there is a minimum and maximum value. If the value stored in
the EEPROM memory is not valid i.e. if the value lies not within the allowed range there
will be a message generated on the display. The error may only be erased by reprogram-

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
ming a valid parameter value. The value range of the parameters is shown in the parameter
list.
4.6.2.4 Display of Operational Data

The display of operational data is activated by the ENTER-key. The display content
changes into the operational data mode. The ESCAPE-key allows to return to the error
display. If there is no key pressed for 5 minutes the screen jumps back to the error display
automatically.
In the operational data mode there are several displays available. The selection of the
displays is done by the PLUS-key and MINUS-key.
setp: 0.00
ramp: 0.00
ESC
Previous display Next display
Display of the Steering Pole

Display of the actual steering pole with x- and y-coordinates.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
PX: 17116.79
PY: 4817.76
ESC
Display of Steering Setpoint

Display of the actual steering setpoint [+/- °]. The steering setpoint is resulting from the set
point generator and other physical quantities like speed, pressure a.s.o.
The second line shows the internal setpoint which is damped by a setpoint ramp. This
value is taken for the internal steering control process.
Position of the axles

The nominal angle and the actual angle of an individual axle is displayed. The values are
given in [°].
Output of the Proportional Amplifiers

Output of the proportional amplifiers driving the proportional valve solenoids A and B of a
individual axle. The values are given in [%]. The setpoint shown in the display contains a
range from 0 to 100%. 100 % corresponds to an output voltage of +24V.
MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Maximum Steering Deviation

The maximum deviation is displayed in [°]. This value defines the error surveillance of the
steering computer. The axle shown is the axle which had this deviation.
Display of the Steering Program

Display of the actual and the new steering program (encoded).
Vehicle speed
Display of the calculated (filtered) vehicle speed. The data is used for the calculation of the
steering geometry. The vehicle speed is calculated from the values of the speed sensors.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Speed sensors
Display of the actual measured speed signals (not the calculated / filtered values).

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
5 Summary of Parameters
The parameters 0 to 51 are customer parameters, they are freely programmable.

The parameters above 52 are ME factory parameters, they are protected by a signature.
Complete valid parameter sets can be transmitted and written by using the PC service
software.
Customer parameters XXXXXXX.PAR:
Step Text Value Change Description
0 Y-coordinate 8190 Distance between the front axle and
front axle the most rear axle
0 ... 9999 [mm]
1 Y-coordinate 1650 Distance between steered axle 1 and
steered axle 1 the most rear axle (in most cases = 0)
0 ... 9999 [mm]
steered axle 2 the most rear axle(not used)
0 ... 9999 [mm]
0 ... 9999 [mm]
0 ... 9999 [mm]
5 Y-coordinate steering 3520 Distance between the steering line
line (virtual rigid axle) and the most rear
0 ... 9999 [mm] axle in „all wheel steering“
6 Mechanical stop 240 Max. mechanically limited steering
steered axle 1 angle of the electronic-hydraulically
0...900 [0,1°] steered axle (rear axle 1).
0...900 [0,1°] steered axle (rear axle 2). (not used)
front axle angle of the front axle
0...900 [0,1°]

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
11 Mechanical angle 0 Max. mechanically limited angle of a
setpoint generator manual setpoint generator
0...900 [0,1°]
12 Max. steering angle 235 Maximum used angle of the steered
axle1 axle 1 in normal operation.
0...900 [0,1°]
axle 2 axle 2 in normal operation.
0...900 [0,1°] (not used)
0...900 [0,1°] (not used)
0...900 [0,1°] (not used)
16 Calibration of speed 1 3000 Factor to align the number of pulses
0...6500 [10 Imp/km] for the measurement of speed 1
17 Calibration of speed 2 3000 Factor to align the number of pulses
0...6500 [10 Imp/km] for the measurement of speed 2
18 Front axle angle for 0 The programmed angle of the front
steering suppression axle does not result in a steering
0 ... 900 [0,1°] movement of the rear axles.
19 Lower pressure level 0 Pressure threshold for the
0 ... 200 [bar] accumulator charge valve in hydraulic
accumulator systems.
20 Upper pressure level 0 Switch-off threshold for the
0 ... 200 [bar] accumulator charge valve in hydraulic
accumulator systems.
21 Reserve 0
22 y-coordinate of the 3520 Distance between the steering line
steering line in (virtual rigid axle) and the most rear
normal operation axle in „all wheel steering mode“.
0 ... 9999 [mm]
23 Reserve 0
24 Enable special 0 x|x|x|1 : Display of pressure built-up
functions 1 x|x|1|x : Pressure-dep. Setpoint ramp
x|1|x|x : Reserved
1|x|x|x : Suppression of small angles
(0 on the respective position switches
the function off)
25 Reserve 0

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
26 Enable special 0001 x|x|x|1 : Switch-off hydraulic at dev.
functions 3 x|x|1|x : Reserve
x|1|x|x : Reserve
1|x|x|x : Reserve
(0 on the respective position switches
the function off)
27 Reserve 0
28 Warning speed for 20 With a speed above the programmed
special steering value the buzzer will sound in order
programs to warn the driver.
0 ... 100 [km/h]
29 Speed threshold for 20 Exceeding this threshold an digital
digital output output will be switched.
0...199 [km/h]
30 Time to enable the 2 If the steering program „narrow bend“
steering program is triggered but had not become
„narrow bend“ active, after this time it will be reset
0...120 [minutes] automatically.
31 Max. speed to trigger 20 To trigger the steering program
steering program „narrow bend“ the vehicle speed must
„narrow bend“ be lower than this value.
0...199 [km/h]
32 Speed to activate a 5 A triggered steering program „narrow
triggered steering bend“ will get active at a speed lower
program „narrow than this parameter.
bend“
0...199 [km/h]
33 Begin of reducing the 10 Above this speed the behavior
steering line in „narrow bend“ will be shifted to the
„narrow bend“ behavior in „public road“.
0...30 [km/h]
34 End of reducing the 19 Above this speed the steering
steering line in program „narrow bend“ will be
„narrow bend“ changed to „public road“
0...30 [km/h]
35 Max. difference 0 Max. difference between rear axles
between rear axles can be limited (in crab steering)
0...200 [0,1°]
36 Reserve 0
37 Selection of CAN- 0 A combination of 8 different CAN
diagnostic messages messages can be selected.
0...255 [bin]
38 Version for set of 100 This parameter can be used to
parameter organize different sets of parameters.
0 ... 9999 This value it displayed on the LCD
after startup.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
39 Signature for 9636 The signature surveilles the factory
parameter 52 to 254 parameters concerning changes of the
0 ... 9999 parameter programming. If factory
parameters and signature are nit
matching the steering system can bot
be activated and the error message
L31,19,1 is displayed.
40 Reserve 0
41 Selection of J1939- 1013 A set of CAN messages can be
CAN-messages selected.
0...3333
42...47 Reserve 0
48 Closed-loop gain 40 Closed-loop gain of the steering
steering axle 1 controller of the steered axle 1
0...99 [%]
0...99 [%]
0...99 [%]
0...99 [%]

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
Factory Parameter *.PAR:
52 Axle configuration 11 Control configuration steering axle 1:
steering axle 1 10: Self-tracking axle with bypass
valve
11: Non self-tracking axle with
check valves
13: Self-centering axle
14: Axle with mechanical
locking device
53 Axle configuration 0 See P_52
steering axle 2
steering axle 3
steering axle 4
56 Steering velocity 12 Limitation of the steering velocity
steering axle 1 0 : no limitation
0 ... 99 [°/sec]
0 ... 99 [°/sec]
0 ... 99 [°/sec]
0 ... 99 [°/sec]
60 Reserve 0
61 Steering velocity for 5 Steering velocity for:
special functions centering, bus stop function, axle
1 ... 99 [°/sec ] synchronization, ...
62 General setpoint 15 Limitation of the velocity for the
velocity setpoint ramp
0 ... 99 [°/sec] 0000 : no limitation
63 Number of axles to 1 Configuration of the steering computer
be steered 1 ... 4 concerning the number of steered axles.
64 Selection of angle 0 Configuration of the angle
transducers measurement:
0: two tracks, contrary sense
1: two tracks, same sense
99: one track

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
65 max. tolerance of the 10 Difference between track 1 and track 2
angle transducers leading to an error message.
0...30 [%]
66 max. deviation of the 150 Deviation of the sum of track 1 and
voltage sum track 2 leading to an error message.
0...300 [mV] (only when angle transducers are
evaluated in contrary sense).
67 Reserve 0
68 Change of steering 21 Configuration of steering programs
programs x|x|x|0 : no change
x|x|x|1 : change allowed
x|x|0|x : selection by keys
x|x|1|x : selection by switches
69 Selection of manual 0 0 : Setpoint via digital inputs
setpoint generators 1 : Setpoint via angle transducers
70 Steering angle 30 Reduction speed:
reduction, lower From this speed limit the steering angle
threshold will be reduced linear with growing
0...50 [km/h] speed. (smaller than locking speed -
5km/h !)
71 Steering angle 50 Locking speed:
reduction, lower If this speed limit is reached the rear
threshold axle will be locked.
0...60 [km/h]
72 Speed measurement 52 Configuration of speed measurement:
0|0|y|x: x = sensor 1
y = sensor 2
9|9|y|x: redundant measurement is
switched off
0: Initiation switch 1 and 2
1: ABS sensor 1 and 2
2: CAN-ABS
3: Initiation switch 3 and 4
4: magnetic wheel 040 010
5: CAN-Tacho
73 max. deviation of the 50 If the speed signal deviation exceeds
speed signals the programmed value an error
1 ... 200 [0,1km/h] message is created.
74 Tolerance time for 8 Tolerance time for the deviation of the
speed deviation speed signals until an error message is
0 ... 300 [s] created.
75 Reserve 1
76 Valve opening for 55 Valve opening for the axle movement
alignment in the alignment mode.
0 ... 99 [%]

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
77 Time for increase of 500 When the key is pressed down in the
the proportional axle alignment mode the output signal
output in the for the proportional valve is increased
alignment mode to the maximum value within the
0 ... 2000 [10ms] programmed value.
78 Drift from 15 If the locked axle is moving from the
0°-position 0° position for more than the program-
0 ... 100 [0,1°] med value an error message is created..
79 Reserve 0
80 Selection of the 0 Configuration of the pressure supply:
pressure supply 00 : Hydraulic load sensing (HLS)
01 : Accumulator system (SLS)
10 : Electrical load sensing (ELS)
81 ELS Pmax 0 (only ELS)
0...99 [%] maximum system pressure
82 ELS Pmin 0 (only ELS)
0...99 [%] minimum pressure kept constantly
83 ELS dead band 0 (only ELS)
0...999 [0,1°] If the deviation exceeds the program-
med value the pressure is increased.
84 ELS steepness 0 (only ELS)
0...999 [0,1°] The pressure reaches its max. value if
the deviation is equal to this value
85 ELS decrease time 0 (only ELS)
0 ... 99 [s] The pressure is decreased to the min.
value as soon as the axle reaches its
nominal value.
86..87 Reserve 0 Reserve for ELS and SLS systems
88 Min.cent.pressure 0 Minimum pressure in the centering
40 ... 195 [bar] accumulator
89 Min.steer.pressure 70 Minimum pressure in the steering
90 Max.steer.pressure 0 Maximum pressure in the steering
91 Max. charging time 0 The charging time of the hydraulic
1 ... 120 [s] accumulators after power-on may not
exceed the programmed time.
92 Min. charging time 0 The charging time may not be shorter
1 ... 10 [s] than the programmed time.
93 Min. charging time 0 The charging time of the centering
centering accumulator may not be shorter than
accumulator the programmed time.
1 ... 10 [s]

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
94 Tolerance time 0 Tolerance time for monitoring the
centering pressure pressure switches at the centering
switches cylinder.
1 ... 20 [s]
95 Reserve 0
96 Max. inverse axle 20 Monitoring inverse axle movement:
movement An axle movement to the wrong
0 ... 50 [%] direction exceeding this value causes a
system fault.
97 Tolerance time 150 Deviation monitoring:
steering deviation If the tolerance time ends a fault is
0 ... 1000 [10ms] generated
98 Speed threshold v1 3 Deviation monitoring:

0 ... 100 [km/h] P_102 contains the maximum allowed
steering deviation for the speed range
v1...v2 programmed in this parameter.
between v2 and v3 (v3 > v2 !)
between v3 and v4 (v4 > v3 !)
steering deviation for the speed > v4
102 Control deviation 60 Deviation monitoring:
at v1 A bigger deviation than this value will
0 ... 200 [0,1°] cause a fault after the dead time (P_97).
Valid in the speed range v1...v2
Valid in speed range > v4.

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
106 Deviation factor 200 Deviation monitoring:
0,150,200,300,400 If a deviation exceeds this factor at the
[%] levels P_102 to P_105 an error is
instantly generated.
107 Reserve 0
...
111
112 Selection of axles to 0 If digital input „axle centering“ is
be centered activated the programmed axles are
0 ... 255 [bin] centered:
1: axle 1
2: axle 2
3: axle 1 and 2
4: axle 3
113 Selection of axles to 0 If steering program „all wheel steering“
be locked is activated the programmed axles are
0 ... 255 [bin] locked:
1: axle 1
2: axle 2
3: axle 1 and 2
4: axle 3
114 Reserve 0
...
115
116 Error reactions 0 Configuration of error reactions:
1|x|x|x : emergency switch-off in case
x|1|x|x : Reserve
x|x|1|x : Reserve
x|x|x|1 : Reserve
117 Steering speed of the 300 If the steered axles are not in line with
front axle for the steering geometry after power-on or
synchronization of steering program change they will be
the steered axles synchronized as soon as the front axle
0 ... 1999 [0,01°/s] moves with the programmed speed.
118 Reserve 0
119 Min. steering speed 0 Reduction of the steering speed:
0 ... 99 [%] The global setpoint ramp (P_62) is
reduced depending on the deviation of
each axle until the programmed value
is reached
P_62 must be programmed
0 = no reduction of the steering speed

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
120 Lower steering 100 Reduction of the steering speed:
speed depending on In case of steering deviations the global
the steering setpoint ramp (P_62) is reduced linear
deviation between P_120 and P_121.
0 ... 2000 [0,01°] Only active if P_119 > 0!
121 Upper steering speed 300 Reduction of the steering speed:
depending on the In case of steering deviations the global
steering deviation setpoint ramp (P_62) is reduced linear
0 ... 2000 [0,01°] between P_120 and P_121.
Only active if P_119 > 0!
122 Steering speed 0 Reduction of the steering speed:
depending on the Lower pressure threshold for a setpoint
pressure, lower value ramp depending on the pressure (has to
0 ... 200 [bar] be < centering pressure.)
123 Steering speed 0 Reduction of the steering speed:
depending on the Upper pressure threshold for a setpoint
pressure, upper value ramp depending on the pressure (has to
0 ... 200 [bar] be > lower pressure value)
124 pulswith for axle 50 To reduce small deviation in axle
regulation position this parameter pulses the
0..500 [ms] proportional valve
125 Reserve 0
126 SLC-ID 1 In a CAN network the SLC are using
0...5 different CAN-IDs
128 Configuration of 0 See wiring diagram
... digital inputs P_128=43, P_129=4100, P_131=200,
143 P_132=300, P_133=506, P_134=4,
P_136=110
144 Configuration of 0 See wiring diagram
... digital outputs P_144=8, P_146=1000, P_147=1200,
167
P_148=911, P_152=100, P_160=700
168 Reserve
...
175
176 Axle 1 in alignment 4 In alignment mode this value is
mode displayed instead of „axle 1“
0...10
0...10
0...10

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
0...10
180 Front axle in 1 In alignment mode this value is
alignment mode displayed instead of „poti 1“
0...10
181 Front axle 2 in 0 In alignment mode this value is
alignment mode displayed instead of „poti 2“
0...10
182 Reserve 0
...
187
188 Reserved 0 Reserved for prop.-valve resistors
...
191
192 Valve overlap 35 Valve overlap of the proportional valve
steered axle 1 of steered axle 1. Value is given in %
0...99 [%] of the nominal valve voltage
196 Reserved 0
...
199
200 Max. voltage of the 50 Ratio of supply voltage and nominal
proportional valve voltage of the proportional valves.
0 ... 99 [%] e.g. 12V-valve at 24V-supply. = 50%
201 max. ELS-voltage 0 Ratio of supply voltage and nominal
0 ... 99 [%] voltage of the ELS valve.
202 PWM-frequency 0 Clock of the pulse-width modulated
[Hz] power amplifiers.
203 Reserved 0

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
204 Configuration of 3333 x|x|x|3 : DO1 + DO2 not monitored
cable break detection x|x|x|2 : DO2 not monitored
at DO 1 ... 8 x|x|x|1 : DO1 not monitored
0 ... 3333 x|x|x|0 : both monitored
x|x|x|0 : DO1 and DO2
x|x|y|x : DO3 and DO4
x|y|x|x : DO5 and DO6
y|x|x|x : DO7 and DO8
205 Configuration of 3333 x|x|x|0 : DO9 + DO10 monitored
cable break detection x|x|y|x : DO11 and DO12
at DO 9 ... 16 x|y|x|x : DO13 and DO14
y|x|x|x : DO15 and DO16
206 Configuration cable 3300 x|x|x|0 : PWM1 + PWM 2 monitored
break detection at x|x|y|x : PWM 3 + PWM4
PWM 1 ... 8 x|y|x|x : PWM 5 + PWM6
y|x|x|x : PWM 7 + PWM8
207 Configuration cable 3333 x|x|x|0 : PWM9 + PWM10 monitored
break detection at x|x|y|x : PWM11+PWM12
PWM 9 bis 16 x|y|x|x : PWM13+PWM14
y|x|x|x : PWM15+PWM16
208 Reserved 0
...
209
210 Reaction at axle 1 1 x|x|x|1 : DO1 monitored
onto cable breaks at x|x|x|2 : DO2 monitored
DO 1 to 8 x|x|x|3 : DO1 + DO2 monitored
2|x|x|1 : DO1 + DO8 monitored
0…3333
0…3333
0…3333
0…3333
214 Reserved 0
…
239

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
240 Configuration 0
... inverse digital inputs
249 DI1...25
250 Input resistance 0
analogue inputs
251 Input resistance 0
digital inputs
252 Reserve 0
...
255

MOBIL
ELEKTRONIK
GMBH SLC 019 410 / SLC 019 102
6 Alarm List
The alarm list is as available as a separate document “Alarm list Terex-Demag V0200.pdf”

Alarm List Steering System page 1 of 29
SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02
Hint:
The alarm list can be used with the following steering systems:
- SLC 019 410, SLC 019 102 (AC200, AC250, AC350, AC110, AC130)
- SLC 018 302 (AC55)
- SLC 019 113 (AC200PT)
Alarm codes assigned to an axle are ment from a view of the steering computer. If several steering computers
are used on one vehicle determine the concerning axle by using the system structure scheme.
Alarm codes which are shown on the display of the ECU as “U-error” are stored in the error memory as “L239-
xxx-3” and “L240-xxx-3”
Structure of the error memory:

All errors which have been occurred are stored in an EEPROM memory and are kept without supply. The error
memory contains 32 storage positions.
In order to simplify the reason for the errors they are subdivided in location, kind of error and priority.
Location and kind of error describe the defective area:
Location: e.g.: angle transducer track 1 of axle 1
Kind: e.g.: cable break, tolerance....
The priority defines the reaction of the system in case of an error:
Priority 0: Warning, the steering behavior is not affected.
Priority 1: The steering is kept until the axle passes 0° the next time.
Priority 2: The axle is centered immediately (active steering).
Priority 3: Switch off in the secure state (setting the axle hydraulically free)
Reading the error memory:

To read or erase the error memory, please select the menu 'error memory':
- Press the buttons ENTER and ESC simultaneously for at last 3 seconds.
- Select the item 'error memory' from the menu and press ENTER. The first entry of the error stack will be
displayed.
The reading of the error memory can be left by the pressing the button ESC.
Additional details to the actual entry can be displayed on operating the ENTER key.
Pressing the PLUS or MINUS keys the errors can be read one after the other. At the end of the error memory
(position 32) the display jumps back to position 1 automatically.
As soon as an error 255, 255, 255 appears in the display there are no further errors written in the memory. Thus
the error position before is the last error message written to memory. If the error memory is erased completely
there are only values of „255“ contained.
Erasing the error memory:

The error memory can be erased at any state of display in the error memory mode.
After pressing the PLUS key for at least 3 seconds the erase process can be triggered by confirming the request
message appearing on the display. The ESC key will cancel erasing the error memory.
Alarm list Terex-Demag V0202 englisch.doc

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02
Alarm list of system errors (L-errors):

Loc Type of alarm Prio Description, troubleshooting
1 Reserve
…
4
5 Digital outputs 05 = DO1 09 = DO5 13 = DO9 17 = DO13
… 06 = DO2 10 = DO6 14 = DO10 18 = DO14
07 = DO3 11 = DO7 15 = DO11 19 = DO15
19 08 = DO4 12 = DO8 16 = DO12
02 Cable break 1 Cable break detected at the according output. The wiring has to be
checked.
Notes for troubleshooting:
By doing a resistance measurement at the contacts of the 54-pole plug with the
steering computer removed, the single valve solenoid coils can be checked. The
typical solenoid coil resistance of switching valves is in the range of 15 to 30 ohms.
• If a number of outputs detect cable break at the same time this could be caused by
a cable break of a common return wire.
• If the problem can not be located by measuring the solenoid coil resistance, check
the common return wire for too small cross-section.
03 Short circuit 3 Short circuit detected at the according output. The wiring has to be
checked!
By doing a resistance and voltage measurement at the contacts of the 54-pole plug
with the steering computer removed, the kind of short circuit can be found out.
Short circuits to ground potential or to +24 V supply voltage are possible. At the output
contacts voltages higher than 3 V are not permitted.
05 Parameter setting 3 Internal configuration error of the steering computer.

12 > max. value 3 Internal configuration error of the computer. This error can only be
removed by the manufacturer.
20 PWM outputs 20 = PWM1 (proportional valve axle 1 solenoid A)
… 21 = PWM2 (proportional valve axle 1 solenoid B)
22 = PWM3 (proportional valve axle 2 solenoid A)
29 23 = PWM4 (proportional valve axle 2 solenoid B)
…
02 Cable break 1 Cable break detected at the according output. The wiring has to be
checked.
By doing a resistance measurement at the contacts of the 54-pole plug with the
steering computer removed, the single valve solenoid coils can be checked. The
typical solenoid coil resistance of proportional valves (9 V solenoid coils) is in the
range of 2.0 to 3.5 ohms.
• If a number of outputs detect cable break at the same time this could be caused by
a cable break of a common return wire.
• If the problem can not be located by measuring the solenoid coil resistance, check
the common return wire for too small cross-section.
03 Short circuit 3 Short circuit detected at the according output. The wiring has to be
checked!
• Disconnect the solenoid coils and check if the alarm persists after power-cycling the
steering computer. If the alarm persists check the wiring.
• If the alarm disappears check the solenoid coils with the help of an ohm-meter
(compare the resistance of the coils and check for short circuit of a coil to vehicle
ground).
05 Parameter setting 3 Internal configuration error of the steering computer.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

30 Power supply
02 Cable break 0 The power supply of the steering computer out of the ignition
(terminal 15) is not available.
In normal operation the 'ignition fuse' signal hat to be active all the time. Check the
fuses.
04 Plausibility 0 The power supply of the steering computer out of the ignition
(terminal 15) is not plausible.
The delay between the ignition signal and the alternator signal is too
short. The steering computer assumes a short circuit between the
two signals.
In normal operation the 'ignition fuse' signal has to be active first. The 'alternator fuse'
signal must be delayed at least for 1 second. It must be active only with engine
running.
Note: this test can lead to false alarms when the engine is started before the steering
computer self-test is completed. It has been disabled in recent software versions.
09 +24 V supply 0 Cable break or blown fuse of the redundant power supply of the error
lamp
Measure with disconnected steering computer at the according contact of the 54-pole
plug or use the PCS-software to display the inputs. The according input must have a
+24 V level all the time.
10 5 V reference 1 The 5 V reference supply output at contact 34 exceeds the allowed

tolerance range! Check the wiring of the connected angle
transducers and pressure sensors for short circuit!
The 5 V reference voltage output supplies the angle transducers and the pressure
sensors. With the steering computer connected, contact 34 must be set to 5 V. If the
voltage deviates, the angle transducers and sensors should be disconnected one after
the other to find out the faulty connection.
Additionally check the shields of the connected sensors.
11 5 V external 1 The 5 V supply for external components at contact 33 exceeds the

allowed tolerance range! Check the wiring of the connected angle
transducers and pressure sensors for short circuit!
Refer to '5 V reference'.
12 > max. value 3 Power supply voltage exceeds maximum value!

UBAT at contact J12.1 is higher than 30 V!
13 < min. value 3 Power supply voltage is below minimum value!
UBAT at contact J12.1 is lower than 14V!
31 Speed > 0 1 Power supply voltage is switched on at a vehicle speed higher than
10 kph. The power supply is not secure, check the wiring!
There may be a loose contact in the power supply wiring. Has the vehicle been
towed?
31 Parameter
04 Plausibility 3 Memory error in the parameter range. This error can only be
removed by the manufacturer.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

05 Parameter setting 2 Incorrect values inside the parameter set. The steering computer
uses the defined default value for the concerning parameter.
Correct the value of the parameter shown on the display.
19 Deviation 0 The parameters do not match to the valid configuration. The

validation code has to be programmed to parameter P_39.
The steering system will be operational for 5 minutes.
Load a valid parameter set using the PCS software.
19 Deviation 1 The parameters do not match to the valid configuration. The

validation code has to be programmed to parameter P_39.
The 5 minutes testing period has passed. The steering system is
switched off.
Load a valid parameter set using the PCS software.
32 Pressure sensor
02 Cable break 1 No signal available from the pressure sensor. Check the wiring!
Check the output voltage of the sensor with the steering computer connected. The
voltage must be in the range of 0.5 V - 4.5 V. The check can be done by using a
voltmeter or the input/output display function of the PCS.
04 Plausibility 0 The signal from the pressure sensor is faulty. Check the wiring!
Check the output voltage of the sensor with the steering computer connected. The
voltage must be in the range of 0.5 V - 4.5 V. The check can be done by using a
voltmeter or the input/output display function of the PCS.
26 Build-up pressure 1 Pressure signal is not plausible while pressure is built up. Check the
pressure sensor and the pressure supply.
The pressure signal has to increase if the charging valve is opened and no steering
movements occur.
27 Pressure 1 Pressure signal is not plausible while pressure is decreasing. Check

decreasing the pressure sensor and the pressure supply.
The pressure signal has to decrease if the charging valve is closed and steering
movements are done.
33 Pressure supply
05 Parameter 3 Faulty setting of the hydraulic supply parameter in step P_80.
09 Level 0 Cable break of sensor or low oil level in the tank.
Check the oil level. In normal operation the monitoring input should be +UBAT.
12 > max. value 3 The hydraulic oil pressure is higher than the maximum value defined
by parameter P_90. Check the hydraulic supply.
13 < min. value 3 The hydraulic oil pressure is lower than the minimum value defined
by parameter P_89. Check the hydraulic supply.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

26 Build-up pressure 1 The hydraulic pressure could not be built up after the ignition and the
'engine running' signal have been on and the time set in P_91 has
passed. Check the pressure supply and the pressure sensor.
Check the 'engine running' (charge indicator) input to be only set if the engine is
already running. Check the hydraulic supply and the pressure sensor.
45 Maintenance 0 The pressure filter is clogged. The filter monitoring sensor is

indicating that state.
Check the oil filter. In normal operation the monitoring input should be +UBAT. The
alarm can be caused by the filter monitoring sensor as well.
47 Breakdown 0 The oil flow sensor of the main hydraulic pump indicates no oil flow
with running engine.
Check the oil flow sensor and the main hydraulic pump. In normal operation the
monitoring input should be +UBAT.
34 Engine running
02 Cable break 0 The engine speed signal is available on the CAN bus but indicated
as faulty.
The engine controller has failed.
04 Plausibility 0 The engine speed signal is received on the CAN bus but indicated as
not available.
The engine controller has failed or has a faulty configuration.
06 Time-out 0 The engine speed signal is not received on the CAN bus.
The engine controller has failed or the engine controller CAN bus is not connected.
31 Speed > 0 1 The 'engine running' signal is off while te vehicle speed is higher
than 20 kph.
Check the wiring of the 'engine running' (charge indicator) signal.
35 Pressure accumulator
04 Plausibility 1 The hydraulic accumulator charge time is lower than the defined
minimum value.
Check the pressure rise during changing. Probably the pressure accumulator has to
be replaced.
36 Redundant power supply

02 Cable break 0 The redundant power supply out of the alternator is not available
(terminal 91) while the engine is running.
Check the 'alternator fuse' signal. It has to be +UBAT while the engine is running. Check
the fuse.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

04 Plausibility 0 The redundant power supply out of the alternator is set while the
engine is not running. The steering system assumes a short circuit to
+UBAT.
In normal operation the signal 'ignition fuse' must be active before 'alternator fuse'.
The engine must not be started 1 second after the ignition is switched on.
Refer to alarm 30,04,0.
38 Wheel driven pump

04 Plausibility 0 The wheel driven pump signal is not plausible. It is checked against
the vehicle speed.
The signal of the wheel driven pump has to be active if the vehicle speed is higher
than 10 kph. At standstill it has to be off.
39 Off-road switch
04 Plausibility 0 The off-road signal is not plausible. It is read redundantly on different
steering computers.
Check the off-road signal on all available steering computers.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

40 Angle transducer 40 = rear axle 1
42 axle x track 1 42 = rear axle 2
44 44 = rear axle 3
46 46 = rear axle 4
48 48 = front axle 1
Note:
The alarm codes refer to the single steering computer. If several
steering computers are used on one vehicle determine the
concerning axle by using the system structure scheme.
02 Cable break 1 The angle transducer feedback voltage is inside the cable break
detection range. Check the wiring of the indicated angle transducer.
Check the angle transducer feedback voltage by using a voltmeter of the PC-Service-
Software. Check the 5 V supplies of the angle transducer for cable break as well.
Feedback voltage > 4.8 V:
• Short circuit of the angle transducer output (slider) to terminals J10.4, J2.11 or
+UBAT.
• Cable break between angle transducer output and terminal J2.2.
• Angle range of the angle transducer exceeded.
Feedback voltage < 0.2 V:
• Short circuit of the angle transducer output (slider) to terminal J2.2 or ground.
• Cable break between angle transducer and terminal J10.4.
• Cable break between slider and angle transducer.
• Angle range of the transducer exceeded.
For a more detailed check unplug the steering computer and measure the following
resistance values at the open connectors:
Measure the resistance between terminals J10.4 and J2.2. The resistance has to be
approximately 1000 Ohms (750 - 1250 Ohms) because two angle transducer tracks
are connected to each 5 V supply. If the measured value differs, a cable break/short
circuit either on the 5 V side or the ground side may be present.
05 Parameter 0 Incorrect setting of parameter P_64.

17 Total for track 1/2 2/3 Total of slider voltages is implausible. The second angle transducer
track may have reversed supply voltage connections. Error priority
02 for setpoint value sensors, 03 for axles
Hints for troubleshooting:
• For vehicles in use: The angle transducer may be damaged or there may be a
wiring problem. Check the linearity of the angle transducer voltages. If there is
currently no obvious problem with the angle transducer, check bearings of the
sensor, cable, connectors and crimp-connections.
• If the bearing of the angle transducer is damaged, check if there is a problem
with the coupling when replacing the angle transducer.
During commissioning: Display the angle transducer voltages with the PCS. When
steering the main pivot from the left limit stop to the right limit stop, the voltage on
track 1 on the relevant angle transducer should increase. With the correct voltage
curve on track 1 (increase in voltage when turning to the right), track 2 of the angle
transducer is being powered incorrectly, with the incorrect voltage curve (decreasing
voltage when turning to the right), track 1 of the angle transducer is being power
incorrectly. On the relevant rack, swap the cables to the PINs for powering the
relevant track.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

18 Deviation of 2/3 The angle determined between track 1/2 deviate by more than the
tracks 1/2 value programmed in parameter P_65. Error priority 02 for setpoint
value sensors, 03 for axles
Hints for troubleshooting:
For vehicles in use: proceed as described in “Total for track 1/2”
During commissioning: The angle transducer also needs to be calibrated
41 Angle transducer 41 = rear axle 1

45 45 = rear axle 3
47 47 = rear axle 4
Note:
02 Cable break 1/2/3 The angle transducer feedback voltage is inside the cable break
detection range. Check the wiring of the concerning angle
transducer.
Priority for single track failure 1
Priority for both track failure 2 or 3
Check the angle transducer feedback voltage by using a voltmeter of the PC-Service-
Software. Check the 5 V supplies of the angle transducer for cable break as well.
Feedback voltage > 4.8 V:
• Short circuit of the angle transducer output (slider) to terminals J10.4, J2.11 or
+UBAT.
• Cable break between angle transducer output and terminal J2.2.
Feedback voltage < 0.2 V:
• Short circuit of the angle transducer output (slider) to terminal J2.2 or ground.
• Cable break between angle transducer and terminal J10.4.
• Cable break between slider and angle transducer.
For a more detailed check unplug the '5 V external' signal from the steering computer
and measure the following resistance values at the open wire end:
Measure the resistance between terminals J2.11 and the open wire end. The
resistance has to be approximately 2000 Ohms. If the measured value is deviating a
cable break/short circuit either on the '5 V external' side or the ground side occurs.
11 5 V external 1 The '5 V external' supply voltage is out of tolerance. Check the wiring
of all connected angle transducers and pressure sensors for short
circuit.
The '5 V external' supplies the angle transducers as well as the pressure sensors.
Check the voltage output with active steering computer at terminal J2.11 to be 5 V. In
case of deviations disconnect the angle transducers and pressure sensors one after
the other to determine the faulty connection. Check the shields of the angle transducer
and pressure sensor cables as well.
52 Speed 1
02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus speed signal is indicated as faulty.
Check the devices providing the speed signals (ABS controller, speedometer).

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus speed signal is indicated as not available.
Check the configuration of all devices providing the speed signals (ABS controller,
speedometer).
05 Parameter 1 Speed source parameter set incorrectly.

Check parameters P_16, P_17 and P_72.
06 Time-out 0 The CAN bus speed signal is not received by the steering computer.
18 Deviation 0 The deviation between signals 'speed 1' and 'speed 2' exceeds the
tolerance of parameter P_73. The CAN bus speed signal is still
available.
Check the speed signals during a test run.
18 Deviation 1 The deviation between signals 'speed 1' and 'speed 2' exceeds the
tolerance of parameter P_73. Both speed signals are not available.
Check the speed signals during a test run:
• Has the speedometer been recalibrated?
• Have the tyres been replaced by different size tyres (diameter)? Adapt WIZ
parameter P_17.
• Using inductive proximity switches? Check the distance between switch and metal.
53 Speed 2

speedometer).
06 Time-out 1 Both CAN bus speed signals are not received by the steering
computer.
54 Speed 3

speedometer).

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02


SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

55 Steering angle 55 = rear axle 1
56 monitoring axle x 56 = rear axle 2
57 57 = rear axle 3
58 58 = rear axle 4
Note:
05 Parameter 2 At least one of the steering angle monitoring parameters is set to an
incorrect value.
13 < min. value 0 The axle does not move as it is expected or the axle does not move
at all. Check the hydraulic supply pressure. Is it possible to steer the
axle while the vehicle is standing still?
19 Deviation 3 The allowed control deviation is exceeded longer than defined in
P_97. The axle did not reach the correct position.
Note: The allowed control deviation varies with the vehicle speed.
• Check the maximum steering forces needed.
• Check the hydraulic supply pressure and oil flow.
• Check if the axle is blocked mechanically (e. g. by a road hole).
30 Inverse 3 The axle moves to the opposite direction than expected by the
movement steering computer.
During commissioning:
Check the angle transducer sense of rotation and the proportional valve polarity.
For vehicles in service:
• The proportional valve spool might be sticking inside the valve body.
• Check the angle transducer linkage to the axle to be free of play.
37 v1 < v < v2 0 Warning

Control deviation tolerance has been exceeded for a short time at a
vehicle speed between v1 and v2 (parameters P_98 and P_99).
Check the available steering speed of the axle and the hydraulic supply.



SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

40 v > v4 0 Warning
vehicle speed higher than v4 (parameter P_101).
41 Factor 3 Control deviation tolerance has been exceeded by more than the
factor of parameter P_106. The axle is switched off immediately.
Check the axle steering forces and the hydraulic supply (oil flow and pressure).
59 Tag axle
04 Plausibility 0 The hydraulic supply for the tag axle is not available.
Check the tag axle hydraulic supply.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

60 Alignment of angle 60 = rear axle 1
62 transducer 62 = rear axle 2
66 66 = rear axle 4
Note:
04 Plausibility 3 The alignment values of the concerning angle transducer are
incomplete or faulty.
Repeat the alignment procedure for the concerning axle. Execute all alignment steps.
42 0° alignment 3 The 0° alignment value stored inside the steering computer memory
is outside the tolerance range 2350 mV - 2650 mV.
Repeat the 0° alignment of the axle.
43 Left alignment 3 The left lock alignment value stored inside the steering computer
memory is out of tolerance.
Repeat the left lock alignment of the axle. The angle transducer feedback voltage at
left lock has to be lower than 2000 mV. Probably the angle transducer linkage has to
be modified.
44 Right alignment 3 The right lock alignment value stored inside the steering computer
Repeat the right lock alignment of the axle. The angle transducer feedback voltage at
left lock has to be higher than 3000 mV. Probably the angle transducer linkage has to
be modified.
31 Speed > 0 0 During alignment a vehicle speed higher than 10 kph is detected.
Check the speed sensors. Do not move the vehicle during alignment.
61 Alignment of angle 61 = rear axle 1

63 transducer 63 = rear axle 2
67 67 = rear axle 4
Note:
04 Plausibility 3 The alignment values of the concerning angle transducer are
incomplete or faulty.
Repeat the alignment procedure for the concerning axle. Execute all alignment steps.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

42 0° alignment 3 The 0° alignment value stored inside the steering computer memory
is outside the tolerance range 2350 mV - 2650 mV.
Repeat the 0° alignment of the axle.
43 Left alignment 3 The left lock alignment value stored inside the steering computer
Repeat the left lock alignment of the axle. Probably the angle transducer linkage has
to be modified.
44 Right alignment 3 The right lock alignment value stored inside the steering computer
Repeat the right lock alignment of the axle. Probably the angle transducer linkage has
to be modified.
72 CAN operating
terminal
06 Time-out 0 The CAN bus connection to the operating terminal is interrupted.
Check the CAN bus wiring to the operating terminal as well as the power supply of the
operating terminal.
74 Software
46 Overload 0 The maximum cycle time of the steering computer is exceeded and
therefore not constant any more.
For synchronous remote systems a constant cycle time is very important. Does this
warning occur frequently?
Has the system been modified?
75 CAN connection
06 Time-out 0 The CAN communication failed.
Check the CAN bus wiring as well as the power supply of the CAN bus nodes.
12 too high 0 The number of activated CAN bus messages is too high to be
executed by the steering computer.
Check the CAN bus message configuration.
76 Control panel
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus control signals are invalid.
06 Time-out 0 The CAN bus control signals are not available.
77 Axle configuration
05 Parameters 1 At least one of the parameters P_52 to P_55 holds a wrong
configuration.
Check parameters P_52 to P_55.
78 Steering suppression
05 Parameters 0 Parameter P_18 is set to an incorrect value.
Check parameter P_18.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

79 Rear angle reduction
05 Parameters 0 Parameter P_70 or P_71 is set to an incorrect value.
Check parameters P_70 and P_71.
80 Global steering set-point ramp

05 Parameters 0 At least one of the parameter P_119 to P_121 is set to an incorrect
value.
Check parameters P_119 to P_121.
81 Fuse monitoring
09 Level 0 The digital input used for fuse monitoring is not active.
Check redundant fuse (3 A) inside the alarm lamp supply and the wiring.
82 Centring unit
02 Cable break 1 Cable break to the pressure sensor of the centring unit.
Check the wiring of the pressure sensor and the sensor itself.
83 Steering program keys

04 Plausibility 0 The operating elements for steering program selection are faulty or
not used correctly. The steering computer will not accept any further
steering program command.
Check the steering program keys for locked keys or short circuit of their wiring.
05 Parameters 0 Parameter P_112 and P_128 are set to incorrect values.

84 Steering line reduction

05 Parameters 3 Parameter P_70 or P_71 is set to an incorrect value.
21 Locking cycle 3 The axle locking after finishing the steering line reduction failed.
The steering program 'narrow bend' shall be finished automatically. However the axle
could not be locked.
85 Tilt-out suppression
05 Parameters 3 Incorrect parameter setting. The tilt-out suppression cannot be
activated.
Check parameter setting.
86 Speed limit
04 Plausibility 3 The vehicle speed is higher than 30 kph with active speed limiter.
Check the wiring of speed limit signal as well as the speed limiter of the vehicle.
87 CAN master

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

06 Time-out 0 The CAN bus connection to the master steering computer is timed
out.
Check the CAN bus wiring and the power supply (fuses) of the master steering
computer.
18 Deviation 0 The front axle angle measurement differs too much from the CAN
bus value received from the master steering computer.
Check measured angles. Execute the front axle alignment procedure again.
47 Breakdown 0 Failure of the master steering computer. Alarms occurring on the

master steering computer.
Check the master steering computer. Probably parts of the steering function are not
available.
88 CAN slave 1
06 Time-out 0 The CAN bus connection to the slave 1 steering computer is timed
out.
Check the CAN bus wiring and the power supply (fuses) of the slave 1 steering
computer.
bus value received from the slave 1 steering computer.
47 Breakdown 0 Failure of the slave 1 steering computer. Alarms occurring on the

slave 1 steering computer.
Check the slave 1 steering computer. Probably parts of the steering function are not
available.
89 CAN slave 2
06 Time-out 0 The CAN bus connection to the slave 2 steering computer is timed
out.
Check the CAN bus wiring and the power supply (fuses) of the slave 2 steering
computer.
bus value received from the slave 2 steering computer.
47 Breakdown 0 Failure of the slave 2 steering computer. Alarms occurring on the

slave 2 steering computer.
Check the slave 2 steering computer. Probably parts of the steering function are not
available.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

90 Axle locking 90 = rear axle 1
91 91 = rear axle 2
92 92 = rear axle 3
93 93 = rear axle 4
Note:
16 Drift 3 Deviation of the axle from the aligned (0°) locked position. Axle could
not be locked. The deviation tolerance is defined by parameter P_94.
The locked axle has moved out of the locking tolerance area or the axle could not be
steered to the locking position exactly enough to activate the locking.
New alignment of the axle.
Check the angle transducer linkage to the axle to be free of play. Check the angle of
the axle during a test run of the vehicle. The axle must not move more than 0.5°.
Does the axle deform in curves? Does the angle change on suspension movements?
21 Locking cycle 3 The axle is not retained after a complete locking cycle.
Check the centring switch of the mechanical locking.
22 Unlocking cycle 3 The axle cannot be steered after a complete unlocking cycle.
Check the centring switch and the compressed air supply.
23 Locking state 3 The centring switches of the axle locking are not in correct position.
Check the centring switches.
24 Unlocking state 1 The centring switches of the axle locking are not in correct position.
Check the centring switches and the compressed air supply.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

95 Actuator test axle x 95 = rear axle 1
96 96 = rear axle 2
97 97 = rear axle 3
98 98 = rear axle 4
Note:
23 Locking state 1 The axle can be steered with active locking (check valves not
powered).
• Check valves leaking?

• Check valves opened manually?
• Check the axle mechanics to be free of play.
• Air inside the hydraulic system can cause this alarm too. Bleed the hydraulics.
32 Check valves 3 The axle can be steered with active locking (check valves not
opened powered).
Check valves faulty or leaking?
33 Check valves 3 The axle cannot be steered with open locking (check valves
closed powered).
Check valves faulty or necessary steering forces too high.
34 Bypass valve 3 Bypass valve failure (open/close).

35 Centring function 3 Only on axles with centring system:
Axle cannot be centred.
Probably the steering-forces are too high to centre the axle.
36 Hydraulic locking 3 Only on axles with centring system:

of the centring
The centring part of the cylinder cannot be locked hydraulically.
cylinder
Check the non-return valve at the cylinder.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

99 Ground breaker relay
03 Short circuit 2 The relay current is higher than the output of the steering computer
can drive.
Check the relay for short circuit to +UBAT.
04 Plausibility 0 The ground breaker relay feedback is faulty.

Check the relay and its wiring.
45 Maintenance 0 The ground breaker relay does not open. The contacts seem to stick
in closed position.
Check the relay and especially its contacts.
100 Digital inputs 100 = DI1 105 = DI6 110 = DI11 115 = DI16
… 101 = DI2 106 = DI7 111 = DI12 116 = DI17
119 102 = DI3 107 = DI8 112 = DI13 117 = DI18
103 = DI4 108 = DI9 113 = DI14 118 = DI19
104 = DI5 109 = DI10 114 = DI15 119 = DI20
04 Plausibility 3 Internal fault of the concerning digital input.
05 Parameters 3 Internal digital input configuration faulty.
12 > max. value 3 Internal digital input configuration faulty.

120 Analog inputs 120 = AI1 123 = AI4 126 = AI7 129 = AI10
… 121 = AI2 124 = AI5 127 = AI8
129 122 = AI3 125 = AI6 128 = AI9
03 Short circuit 3 Short circuit between analog inputs.

Check the wiring.
04 Plausibility 3 Internal fault of the concerning analog input.

140 Digital inputs via CAN 140 = CAN-DI1 146 = CAN-DI7 152 = CAN-DI13
… 141 = CAN-DI2 147 = CAN-DI8 153 = CAN-DI14
155 142 = CAN-DI3 148 = CAN-DI9 154 = CAN-DI15
143 = CAN-DI4 149 = CAN-DI10 155 = CAN-DI16
144 = CAN-DI5 150 = CAN-DI11
145 = CAN-DI6 151 = CAN-DI12
05 Parameters 3 Internal digital input configuration faulty.
12 > max. value 3 Internal CAN digital input configuration faulty.


SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

160 Digital outputs via 160 = CAN-DO1 166 = CAN-DO7 172 = CAN-DO13
… CAN 161 = CAN-DO2 167 = CAN-DO8 173 = CAN-DO14
175 162 = CAN-DO3 168 = CAN-DO9 174 = CAN-DO15
163 = CAN-DO4 169 = CAN-DO10 175 = CAN-DO16
164 = CAN-DO5 170 = CAN-DO11
165 = CAN-DO6 171 = CAN-DO12
05 Parameters 3 Internal digital output configuration faulty.
12 > max. value 3 Internal CAN digital output configuration faulty.

180 CAN message 'TCO1' Speedometer signal.

02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal 'TachoVehicleSpeed' is indicated as faulty.
Check speedometer.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal 'TachoVehicleSpeed' is indicated as not

available.
Check speedometer.
06 Time-out 0 The 'TCO1' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the speedometer and the
CAN bus.
181 CAN message 'EBC2' ABS brake controller signal.

02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal 'WheelSpeedInfo' is indicated as faulty.
Check ABS control unit.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal 'WheelSpeedInfo' is indicated as not available.

Check ABS control unit.
06 Time-out 0 The 'EBC2' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the ABS control unit and
the CAN bus.
182 CAN message 'CCVS' Cruise control signal.

02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal 'CruiseCtrlVehSpeed' is indicated as faulty.
Check cruise control unit.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal 'CruiseCtrlVehSpeed' is indicated as not

available.
Check cruise control unit.
06 Time-out 0 The 'CCVS' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the cruise control unit
and the CAN bus.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

183 CAN message 'EEC1' Engine controller signal.
02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal 'EngineSpeed' is indicated as faulty.
Check engine control unit.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal 'EngineSpeed' is indicated as not available.

Check engine control unit.
06 Time-out 0 The 'EEC1' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the engine control unit
and the CAN bus.
184 CAN message 'ETC2' Transmission controller signal.

02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal 'CurrentGear' is indicated as faulty.
Check transmission control unit.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal 'CurrentGear' is indicated as not available.

Check transmission control unit.
06 Time-out 0 The 'ETC2' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the transmission control
unit and the CAN bus.
185 CAN message Includes current date and time.

'TimeDate'
02 Cable break 0 At least one of the CAN bus signals for time or date is indicated as
faulty.
Check concerning control unit.
04 Plausibility 0 At least one of the CAN bus signals for time or date is indicated as
not available.
06 Time-out 0 The 'TimeDate' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the concerning control
186 CAN message Includes the vehicle mileage.

'VehicleDistance'
02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal 'TotalVehicleDistance' is indicated as faulty.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal 'TotalVehicleDistance' is indicated as not

available.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

06 Time-out 0 The 'VehicleDistance' message is not received by the steering
computer.
187 Reserve
02 Cable break 0 The CAN bus signal ' ' is indicated as faulty.
04 Plausibility 0 The CAN bus signal ' ' is indicated as not available.
06 Time-out 0 The ' ' message is not received by the steering computer.
188 CAN message 'EBC1' ABS/ASR controller signal.

02 Cable break 0 At least one of the ABS/ASR CAN bus signals is indicated as faulty.
Check ABS/ASR control unit.
04 Plausibility 0 At least one of the ABS/ASR CAN bus signals is indicated as not
available.
Check ABS/ASR control unit.
06 Time-out 0 The 'EBC1' message is not received by the steering computer.

Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check the ABS/ASR control unit
and the CAN bus.
189 CAN message 'CAN- Steering operation signals.

Bedien'
02 Cable break 0 At least one of the CAN bus steering operation signals is indicated
as faulty.
Check CAN bus controls.
04 Plausibility 0 At least one of the CAN bus steering operation signals is indicated
as not available.
Check CAN bus controls.
06 Time-out 0 The 'CAN_Bedien' message is not received by the steering

computer.
Do other systems on the vehicle raise similar alarms? Check CAN bus controls and
the CAN bus.
195 Steering control

setting
05 Parameters 3 The parameters for steering control setting are incomplete.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02
Alarm Codes for Fail-Operational steering system SLC 018 302 / SLC 019 113:
200 Main steering circuit
201 Back-up steering circuit
04 Plausibility 0 The alive signal of the received CAN message is not altering any
more. Data is not valid.
Check CAN bus connection between the steering computers of the two circuits and
their power supply.
06 Time-out 0 CAN connection between both circuits is interrupted.

Check CAN bus connection between the steering computers of the two circuits.
47 Breakdown 0 The opposite steering circuit is out of order. Error-free signal of the
opposite steering circuit is not available any more.
Check the opposite side steering computer alarms.
212 Axle blocked 0 Steering axle is blocked. Both steering circuits switch into a test
mode in order to exclude the proportional valves The warning
message is generated as soon as the test is finished and both valves
are error-free.
210 Bypass valve of main steering circuit
211 Bypass valve of back-up steering circuit
12 Pressure too high 0 Respecting bypass valve is not able to switch the circuit
depressurised. Alarm is generated if the steering pressure is not
decreasing even with bypass active.
Check the bypass valve and the wiring to it.
212 Proportional valve of main steering circuit

213 Proportional valve of back-up steering circuit
03 Short circuit 3 Current of solenoid is too high due to a short circuit to +UBAT.
Check the proportional valve solenoids and the wiring.
206 Always open 3 Proportional valve is stuck in open position or permanently operated
due to a short circuit.
Check the proportional valve solenoids and the wiring. Probably the valve spool is
sticking inside the valve body.
214 Comparison of control deviations

04 Plausibility 0 Both steering circuits exchange the steering deviations by CAN bus
for comparison. Error message is active with too high deviations of
the comparison result.
Do an alignment of the axle on both circuits.
Check the angle transducer linkage to the axle to be free of play. The alarm can be
caused by mechanical deforming of the axle as well.
215 Self test main steering circuit

216 Self test back-up steering circuit

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

200 CAN bus 0 No self test possible because no CAN connection to the opposite
circuit was built up.
Check CAN bus wiring between the two circuits.
201 State of circuits 0 No self test possible because the opposite steering circuit did not
switch into self test mode.
202 Volume flow 0 Volume flow switch is active before engine runs or is not active after
switch start of the engine.
203 Pressure sensor 0 Value of pressure sensor is not valid.
204 Bypass valve 0 Bypass valve of main circuit out of order. Main circuit can not be
main circuit locked or bypassed.
205 Proportional 0 No pressure increase when operating the proportional valve.
valve main circuit Proportional valve can not be actuated.
206 Proportional 3 Steering pressure can not be decreased even if proportional is not
valve main circuit actuated. Obviously the valve is continuously open.
continuously
open
207 Bypass valve 0 Bypass valve of back-up circuit out of order. Back-up circuit can not
back-up circuit be locked or bypassed.
208 Proportional 0 No pressure increase when operating the proportional valve.
valve back-up Proportional valve can not be actuated.
circuit
209 Proportional 3 Steering pressure can not be decreased even if proportional is not
valve back-up actuated. Obviously the valve is continuously open.
circuit open
continuously
210 Self test stopped 0 Self test has been stopped, because
because of - vehicle is driving
synchronization - front axle is steered.
211 Self test stopped 0 Self test has been interrupted by the opposite circuit
because of
opposite circuit
212 Axle is blocked 0 The axle seems to be blocked, pressure of both main and backup
circuit have high values.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02
Alarms from internal monitoring of the steering computer (U-alarms):

Alarm codes which are shown on the display of the ECU as “U-error” are stored in the error memory as “L239-
xxx-3” and “L240-xxx-3”
These errors are pointing to an internal error but can be generated by external short circuits or disturbances too.
Hint:
There are two lists of error codes for the different types of steering computer “SLC 018 3xx” and ”SLC 019 xxx”
Alarms of the internal monitoring in the computers “SLC 019 xxx”:

239 Steering computer electronics
1 Internal 3 Internal fault.
… monitoring Notes for troubleshooting:
4 Replace steering computer.
5 Power-on test 3 Parameter storage inside steering computer memory faulty.

EEPROM Notes for troubleshooting:
• Reprogram all parameters be using the PCS.
• Replace steering computer.
6 Power-on test 3 Function software inside the steering computer memory faulty.
ROM signature Notes for troubleshooting:
• Download function software again.
7 Internal Internal fault.

19 Internal safety 3 Internal safety switch test failed.

switch Notes for troubleshooting:
• Check digital outputs for short circuit to +UBAT.

monitoring Notes for troubleshooting:
Replace steering computer.
21 Power-on test 3 Digital output test failed.

… digital output Notes for troubleshooting:
36 Nr. 1 - Nr. 16
• 21 = digital output 1 … 36 = digital output 16.
99 Internal power 3 Supply for safety outputs not available.

supply Notes for troubleshooting:
• Check supply voltage.

106 +UBAT > 33 V 3 Supply voltage of steering computer too high (> 31 V).
• Check supply voltage.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

107 + UBAT < 9 V 3 Supply voltage of steering computer too low (> 14 V).
• Check supply voltage. Can be caused by weak batteries during starting the engine.
108 Temperature 3 Internal temperature too high (> 85 °C)

monitoring Notes for troubleshooting:
• Check temperature of steering computer. Check ambient temperature.

114 Test VREFEX 3 5 V reference supply output out of tolerance.

• Check 5 V reference output voltage.
• Check all sensors (angle transducers) connected to the 5 V reference outputs.
115 Test 5VEXT 3 5 V external supply output out of tolerance.

• Check 5 V external output voltage.
• Check all sensors (angle transducers) connected to the 5 V external outputs.
116 Internal safety 3 Internal safety switch test failed.

switch Notes for troubleshooting:
121 digital output 3 Digital output test failed.

… Nr. 1 - Nr. 16 Notes for troubleshooting:
136 • 121 = digital output 1 … 136 = digital output 16.
161 digital input 3 Digital input test failed.

176 • 161 = digital input 1 … 176 = digital input 16.
• Check digital inputs for floating voltages.
201 analog input 3 Analog input test failed.

208 • 201 = analog input 1 … 208 = analog input 8.
• Check analog inputs voltages.
221 analog output 3 Analog output test failed.

222 • 221 = analog input 1; 222 = analog input 2.
• Check analog outputs for short circuit or too low load resistance.
240 Redundant steering computer

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

Reserved for future systems.

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02
Alarms from internal monitoring of the steering computer “SLC 018 3xx”:
239 Self test FR Hardware test 2-channel electronic function controller
240 Self test SR Hardware test 2-channel electronic safety controller
0 Kind of error not 3 No further statements possible. Please note error code of the
available opposite part of the control electronic.
1 Power-on test 3 Probably hardware failure – replace steering computer.
… internal
4 surveillance
5 Power-on test 3 Error during test of non-volatile data memory. Parameters are
EEPROM needed to be restored.
6 Power-on test 3 Error during test of program memory. Program memory is needed to
ROM signature be flashed.
internal
surveillance
8 Power-on test 3 Error during test of non-volatile data memory. Automatic correction
EEPROM done!
internal
surveillance
21 Power-on test 3 Short circuit of output to ground or +UBAT or short circuit between two
… digital output outputs.
Nr. 1 - Nr. 16
36
… internal
surveillance
42
43 Power-on test 3 No internal connection
connection Appears when doing updates with software “WinEEA”
… internal
surveillance
48
51 Power-on test 2. 3 Test of the second switch-off path – Check power supply or external
… switch-off path voltage at DO1 - DO12 and PWM1 - PWM8.
58
internal
surveillance
101 Cyclic tests 3 Probably hardware failure – replace steering computer.
… internal
surveillance
105
106 +UBAT > 33 V 3 Supply voltage too high– check power supply.
107 + UBAT < 9 V 3 Supply voltage too low – check power supply.
108 Temperature 3 Temperature inside housing < -35 °C or > 85 °C.
monitoring

SLC019410 / SLC019102 / SLC018302 02.07.2007 / V02.02

+ internal
110 surveillance
111 Cyclic tests 2. 3 Test of second switch-off path - Check power supply or external
switch-off path voltage at DO1 - DO12 and PWM1 - PWM8.
+ internal
113 surveillance
114 Test VREFEX 3 Error of external reference voltage. Check VREFEX!
115 Test 5VEXT 3 Error of external 5 V supply for sensors. Check 5VEXT!
… internal
surveillance
118
120 Error of internal 3 Real-time problem of electronics. Please note concomitants and
… communication contact MOBIL ELEKTRONIK. Replace steering computer.
124
126 Error internal 3 Probably hardware failure. Please note concomitants and contact
… surveillance MOBIL ELEKTRONIK. Replace steering computer.
139
141 Error digital input 3 Deviation of internal redundant signal. Check if there is a signal
… pending with invalid voltage or containing high-frequent pulses.
164
171 Error analog 3 Deviation of internal redundant signal. Check if there is a signal
… input pending containing high-frequent pulses.
180
181 Error 2-channel 3 Probably hardware failure. Please note concomitants and contact
… digital output MOBIL ELEKTRONIK. Replace steering computer.
196
201 Error surveillance 3 Short circuit of output to ground or +UBAT or short circuit between two
… digital output outputs.
216
221 Error 2-channel 3 Probably hardware failure. Please note concomitants and contact
… PWM output MOBIL ELEKTRONIK. Replace steering computer.
228
232 Error surveillance 3 Short circuit of output to ground or + UBAT or short circuit between
… PWM-output two outputs.
238

Service Training Hydraulik
Sinnbild/Symbol Bezeichnung Designation
Fixed displacement pump

Konstantpumpe mit einer Stromrichtung
1 direction of flow
Variable displacement pump

Verstellpumpe mit einer Stromrichtung
1 direction of flow
Variable displacement pump

Verstellpumpe mit zwei Stromrichtungen
2 directions of flow
Verstellpumpe mit einer Stromrichtung Variable displacement pump

und Hillfspumpe 1 direction of flow and charge pump
Fixed displacement motor

Konstantmotor mit zwei Stromrichtungen
2 directions of rotation

Variable displacement motor

Verstellmotor mit zwei Stromrichtungen
2 directions of rotation
Zylinder, einfachwirkend Cylinder, single acting
Cylinder, single acting,

Zylinder, einfachwirkend, mit Federrückstellung
return stroke via spring pressurisation
Zylinder, doppelt wirkend Cylinder, double acting
Zylinder, doppelt wirkend, mit beidseitiger Cylinder, double acting,

Kolbenstange double rod

Teleskopzylinder Telescopic cylinder
Wegeventile
Ventile, die zum Öfnen oder Schließen
Directional valves:
verschiedener Durchflusswege dienen.
Open and closed loop control of
Wegeventile sind gekennzeichnet durch:
energy.
- Zahl der Schaltstellungen
- Zahl der Anschlüsse
Ports are allocated with A, B, C

Kennzeichnung der Anschlüsse durch Buchstaben
references
2/2 Wegeventil 2/2 way directional valve

2 Anschlüsse, 2 Schaltstellungen 2 points, 2 direction of flow

4/2 Wegeventil (elektromagnetisch betätigt, 4/2 way directional valve (electrically

Federrückstellung) operated, return spring)
Federrückstellung Spring looded
Federzentrierung Spring loaded mid-position
elektromagnetisch mit Federrückstellung Electrically operated, return spring
Electrically operated, spring loaded mid-

elektromagnetisch mit Federzentrierung
position
hydraulisch betätigt, elektromagnetisch

Electric-hydraulic operation
angesteuert

Directional valve
Wegeventil mit eingebauter Druckwaage
including balancing valve
Proportionalventile, elektromagnetisch betätigt Proportional valves

Druckbegrenzungsventil, fest eingestellt Pressure relief valve
Druckbegrenzungsventil, einstellbar Pressure relief valve, adjustable
Druckbegrenzungsventil, vorgesteuert Pressure relief valve, pilot operated
Druckregelventil, einstellbar Pressure reducing valve, adjustable

3-Wege-Druckminderventil 3-way pressure reducing valve
Abschaltventil, vorgesteuert Pressure reducing valve, pilot operated
Drossel, fest eingestellt, Volumenstrom abhängig

Throttle valve
von Druckdifferenz
Drossel, einstellbar, Volumenstrom abhängig von

Throttle valve, adjustable
Druckdifferenz
2-Wege-Stromregler, Volumenstrom unabhängig 2-way flow control valve pressure

von Druckdifferenz compensated
3-Wege-Stromregler, Überschussstrom wird

3-way flow control valve
abgeleitet

Stromteiler, Aufteilung in einem festen Verhältnis Flow divider
Rückschlagventil Check valve
Rückschlagventil, federbelastet Check valve, spring loaded
Rückschlagventil, entsperrbar Check valve, pilot operated
Drossel-Rückschlagventil Throttle/check valve
Wechselventil Shuttle valve
Antrieb: Elektromotor Electric motor
Verbrennungsmotor Diesel motor

Hydraulische Hauptleitung,
Main pressure line
Druck-,Arbeits-.Rücklaufleitung
Vorsteuerleitung Pilot pressure line
Leckölleitung Drain line --- Case drain
flexible Leitung, Schlauch Flexible, hose
Leitungsverknüpfung Connection of lines
gekreuzte Leitung, ohne Verbindung Cross-over
Schnellkupplung Quick coupler
Hydrospeicher Accumulator

Filter Filter
Kühler Cooler
Öl-Kühler mit elektrisch angetriebenem

Oil-cooler electric powered fan
Ventilator
Öl Kühler mit hydraulisch angetriebenem

Oil-cooler hydraulic powered fan
Ventilator
Manometer Pressure gauge
10

Druckaufnehmer Pressure transducer
Druckschalter Pressure switch
11

Aufhängung
Mounting
bracket
Messprinzip:
berührungslos
Wirbelstromverfahren
auch möglich:
Potentialsonden,
Potentiometer
oder induktiv
Kabel
Cable
Measuring principle:
Contactless
Eddy current method
also possible:
Potential sensor,
potentiometer
or inductive
Messstab
Measuring
stick
Kolben
Piston
Alu-Rohr
Alu-pipe
Legende
Technical Training Electric Symbols
Symbol Bezeichnung Designation
Intervallschaltung für Wischer wiper with interval circuit
Schmelzsicherung fuse
Druckschalter, Öffner push-button switch, normally closed,

double action
Druckschalter, Wechsler push-button switch, normally closed,

break-make, double action
Druckschalter, Wechsler, 3x Schaltstellungen Push-button switch, normally closed, three switch-

positions
Stößelschalter, Öffner tappet switch

Schlüsselschalter, Schliesser key switch, normally open, double action
Rollenschalter, Öffner roller switch, normally closed, single action
rastender Pilzschalter, Schliesser, öffnen durch Drehen latching mushroom switch, normally open, open through
turn
Schalter betätigt durch Druck, Öffner switch operated from pressure, normally closed
Batterie battery
2 Batterien 2 batteries, in serie
Leuchte lamp

Rundumleuchte rotaflare lamp
Akustischer Signalgeber, Horn audible alarm, horn
Akustischer Signalgeber, Klingel audible alarm, bell
Akustischer Signalgeber, elektronisch audible alarm, electronic bleep
Relais, Spannungsabhängig relay, voltage dependent
Zeitrelais einstellbar time relay, adjustable

abfallverzögert off-delay

Zeitrelais einstellbar time relay, adjustable

anzugsverzögert on-delay
Kammrelais-Spule multicontact relay, coil
Relais, Spule und Schaltkontakt relay, coil and switch
Hilfskontakte vom Relais K213 auxiliary contact from relay K213
Querverweis mit Angabe des Zieles cross-reference with destination noted
Querverweis mit Angabe des Zieles cross-reference with destination noted
Querverweis mit Angabe der Herkunft cross-reference with origin noted

Induktion, Drossel inductance coil, inductor
E-Motor 24 V electric motor, 24 volt
Motor mit Schalter, z.B. Wischermotor Motor with switch, i.e. wiper motor
Hochspannung mit Lampe hight voltage with a lamp
Startermotor, Anlasser starter motor,
Lichtmaschine generator

Startermotor mit Anlass-Relais starter motor with relay
Anzeigeinstrument, windspeed display

Windgeschwindigkeit
Temperaturanzeige 70 bis 120°, temperature gauge 70 to 120° celsius

mit Beleuchtung illuminated
Druckanzeige 0 – 5 bar, pressure gauge 0 – 5 bar,

mit Beleuchtung illuminated
Festwiderstand resistor

Potentiometer potentiometer
Temperaturfühler mit Schaltkontakt, temperature sensor with switch,

Schliesser normally open
Druckfühler mit Schaltkontakt, pressure sensor with switch,

Öffner normally closed
resistance-current converter i.e. angle indicator, length

R/I- Wandler z.b. im Winkelgeber, Längengeber
indicator
Spannungswandler, Eingang 24V, Ausgang 12V voltage converter, input 24V, output 12V

Näherungsschalter, drei Anschlusskabel proximity switch, three connecting wires, normally

als Öffner closed
Näherungsschalter, drei Anschlusskabel proximity switch, three connecting wires, normally open
als Schliesser
Näherungsschalter, zwei Anschlusskabel schwarz und proximity switch, two connecting wires black and white,
weiß, Öffner, wird durch umpolen zum Schliesser normally closed, is changing to normally open if cables
are connected transverse
Näherungsschalter, zwei Anschlusskabel proximity switch, two connecting wires white and black,
weiß und schwarz, Schliesser, wird durch umpolen zum normally open, is changing to normally closed if cables
Öffner are connected transverse
Temperaturschalter, Öffner temperature switch, normally open
Näherungsschalter proximity switch,

Zünd-Anlassschalter ignition key switch
Taster, in Neutralstellung geöffnet, zwei Richtungen switch, 2 directions, normally open,

single action
Schalter, in Neutralstellung geöffnet, zwei Richtungen switch, 2 directions, normally open,

double action
Diode, gezeichnet in verschiedenen Positionen diode, drawn in different positions
Optokoppler optocoupler
Leuchtdiode LED LED, light-emitting diode

Freilaufdiode oder Löschdiode ist anti-parallel an einer free-wheel or erase diode is connected anti-parallel to
Spule angeschlossen coil
Magnetventil solenoid valve
Proportional-Magnetventil proportional solenoid valve

für die Kranbewegung erforderlicher Strombereich liegt current range for the crane motion is
zwischen 250 – 800 mA between 250 – 800 mA
Betätigt durch Druck operated from pressure
Betätigt durch Temperatur operated from temperature
Schleifring slipring
Geber für Druckanzeige sensor for pressure determination
Temperaturfühler temperature sensor
10

Lautsprecher speaker
Antenne antenna
⇑ Das neben diesem Symbol gezeichnete Bauteil ist in the component next to this symbol is displayed
betätigter Form dargestellt in operated status
Lösbare Verbindung detachable connection
Steckdose oder Zigarettenanzünder socket or lighter
Stecker (Dose) socket
Stecker (Pin) pin
Stecker und Dose pin and socket
Dose und Stecker socket and pin
11

Programm AC110, AC160, AC200-1, AC250, AC350-1
Diagnosis on the MOKI

Bitmap / LED on top Testing Wiring Test Testing 2 Function Description of function Remarks PIN
Symbol
LED 17 Tachograph chart inserted No --- No chart inserted No chart inserted & crane is driving ---
and crane is driving => LED on
--- ABS switched off light ABS Light test 1x shortly --- Flashing: Reply from ABS Permanent signal: ABS Error D15
ABS is flashing when ignition on ABS switched off ⇒ Input active Signal flashing: ABS switched off
or ⇒ switch on light
LED 2 permanent: Error ABS carrier
Make ADM2- FR powerless Not cyclic --- ABS error carrier Signal from ABS Electronics --- DM1
⇒ CAN_DM1
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID = 12300
Plug in Trailer or Tag axle Once when ignition --- ABS Trailer OR tag axle error Reply from ABS trailer OR tag axle --- D16
ABS 1 and create error on and trailer OR ⇒ Input active
tag axle connected ⇒ switch on light
LED 1
“ --- --- “ “ --- “
L-ID= 12304
--- Create error Abs 2 --- --- 6 – Axle Machine Reply from ABS 2 --- D16
AC250: Axle 3 ⇒ Input active
AC350: Axle 3 ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID =12302
switch high beam Light test once --- High beam Activate switch --- D22
when ignition on ⇒ Input active
LED 3+4 ⇒ switch on light
Blinker or hazard Light test once --- Blinker carrier engaged Signal from relays Signal is flashing D20
LED 5 ⇒ switch on light
Create error Light test once --- Stop Message when error occurs Stop crane und correct error SW
LED 6 when ignition on
Create warning Light test once --- Attention Message when a function is activated Signal is flashing: I- CAN no connection ZR2-B / MOKI SW
when ignition on Signal not flashing: Warning
LED 7
LED 8 Blinker Light test once --- Blinker trailer engaged Signal from relays Signal is flashing D21
⇒ switch on light
LED 10 Retarder Light test once --- Retarder active Activate switch Signal could be flashing or permanently on C5
when ignition on Reply from Intarder
⇒ Input active
⇒ switch on light
LED 11 Engage parking brake Light test once --- Parking brake engaged Activate switch --- D17
when ignition on ⇒ signal from pressure switch
⇒ Input active
⇒ switch on light
LED 12 Light and fog light Light test once --- Fog light Activate switch & light = 1 --- C-34
when ignition on ⇒ Reply from PLC
⇒ Input active
⇒ switch on light
LED 18 Minidiag Light test once --- Engine rpm over 2350 1 / min Engine rpm over 2350 1 / min --- SW
Engine rpm when ignition on ⇒ switch on light
⇒ Buzzer continuous tone
Create transmission error, Disconnect CAN Error transmission Signal from transmission DM1
e.g. remove plug X21 on J1939 to ⇒ CAN_DM1
ADM2- FR CAN Transmission ⇒ activate bitmap

Symbol
L-ID= 12310 L-ID=12311
--- Switch on Disconnect CAN Snail mode active Activate switch --- PROP
J1939 to ⇒ Signal from CPU-transmission
Transmission ⇒ CAN_PROP_1
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID= 12217 L-ID=12218
Strain the clutch Disconnect CAN Clutch temperature too high Signal from CPU transmission --- PROP
J1939 to ⇒ CAN_PROP_1
Transmission ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID = 12415 L-ID=12414
--- --- Switch on camera time out Disconnect CAN Camera_1 Signal Reverse wrong Signal from transmission --- Current gear
OPEN at ZR2-BD ⇒ CAN_ETC2_current_gear
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=12216
Create error retarder Disconnect CAN Error Retarder Signal from Retarder AWL
J1939 to the ⇒ CAN_DM1
transmission, ⇒ activate bitmap
Retarder
L-ID =12308 L-ID = 12309
--- Switch on --- --- Transmission Retarder Signal switch activated
Brake cruise control active ⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=12306
Switch on Disconnect CAN Emergency control system ⇒ Signal from PLC --- PDO_08
OPEN at ZR2-BD ⇒ CAN OPEN Byte 8
⇒ activate bitmap Bit 1,2
L-ID = 12318 L-ID = 12319

On CAN-Open Node not --- A PLC Node is not answering Signal from PLC PDO_08
operational ⇒ Signal from PLC Byte 8
⇒ IF signal = 0 Bit 5,6
THEN switch on light
L-ID=12322 L-ID=12323
--- SLC1 without power Disconnect CAN Speed limitation active Signal from PLC OR SLC --- PDO_09
OPEN at ZR2-BD ⇒ CAN OPEN Byte 1
⇒ IF signal = 1 Bit 1,2
THEN V_max = 20 km / h to ADM2-FR
L-ID =12214 L-ID =12215
Switch on Disconnect CAN Steering job site active (only below 20 km / Signal from switch at SLC No Warning but PROP
(switched =white J1939 at SLC 1 h active) => CAN J1939 1 x Beep
active=yellow) => activate bitmap
L-ID=14291
L-ID= 14289
Switch on Disconnect CAN All wheel steering engaged Signal from Switch at SLC No Warning but PROP
(switched =white J1939 at SLC 1 => CAN J1939 1 x Beep
L-ID=14295 L-ID=14294
Switch on Disconnect CAN Crab steering engaged Signal from Switch at SLC No Warning but PROP
L-ID=14298 L-ID=14296
Switch on Disconnect CAN Rear wheel steering engaged Signal from Switch at SLC No Warning but PROP
L-ID=14304 L-ID=14303
Switch on Disconnect CAN Axle 3 and 4 can be controlled Signal from Switch at SLC No Warning but PROP
(switched =white J1939 at SLC 1 independently from the front axle => CAN J1939 1 x Beep
L-ID=14307 L-ID=14308
Create error Disconnect CAN Error electr. steering Signal from SLC 1 x Beep PROP
J1939 at SLC 1 or
=> CAN J1939 10 x Beep
=> activate bitmap

Symbol
L-ID=14306
--- Start engine immediately Disconnect CAN Self test of lock valves was aborted Signal from SLC --- PROP
after ignition on J1939 at SLC 1 => CAN J1939
=> activate bitmap
L-ID=14300
--- --- Disconnect CAN No CAN connection from CAN J1939 to Signal from SLC --- PROP
J1939 at SLC 1 SLC1 MOKI => CAN J1939
=> activate bitmap
L-ID=14301
Bypass sensor Disconnect CAN Flow indicator emergency pump for axle 7 Signal from flow indicator & v>5km/h Only 6- Axle AC200-1 PT PROP
J1939 at SLC 1 PT (S4213) => SLC1 DI 18 (SLC)
=> CAN J1939
=> activate bitmap
L-ID=14310 L-ID=14311
Bypass sensor Disconnect CAN Oil level for main and emergency pump too Signal from level switch in tank Only 6- Axle AC200-1 PT PROP
J1939 at SLC 1 low (axle 7) => SLC1 DI 17 (SLC)
=> CAN J1939
=> activate bitmap
L-ID=14313 L-ID=14312
Not used
Bypass sensor remove plug Steering circuit 1 no flow Signal from flow indicator C-20
S4211 S4211 ⇒ Input active & Engine running
PIN ½ PIN 1/2 ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID= 14211 L-ID=18011

S4212 S4212 ⇒ Input active & Engine running
PIN 1/2 PIN 1/2 ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14212 L-ID=18012
S4213 S4213 ⇒ Input active & v_Fzg > 5 km / h
PIN 1/2 PIN 1/2 ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14213 L-ID=18013
--- Switch to special mask, start --- Special mask Signal from flow indicator --- C-20
engine ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=15311
--- Switch to special mask, start --- --- Special mask Signal from flow indicator --- C-21
engine ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=15312
--- Switch to special mask, start --- --- Special mask Signal from flow indicator --- C-22
driving ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=15313
Missing signal: Engine oil pressure too low Signal from ADM2 --- C12
⇒ X12:3
ADM2-FR ⇒Input active
plug X12:3 ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID= 11327 L-ID=11326
Missing signal: Engine oil level too low Signal from ADM2 --- C-12
⇒ CAN_analog value
ADM2-FR ⇒MOKI SW
plug X21:4 ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID= 11365 L-ID=11364
Missing signal: Error engine Signal from engine --- C-7
⇒ CAN_DM1
ADM2-FR ⇒ activate bitmap
plug X21:6
L-ID= 11311 L-ID= 11312

Symbol
--- --- Missing signal: ADM2- FR buzzer --- D-35
ADM2-FR
plug X21:6
L-ID=11313
--- Bypass switch --- --- Air filter clogged Signal from pressure switch --- C-25
S1330 ⇒ signal from PLC
Pin 1/4 ⇒ Input active
L-ID=11330 ⇒ activate bitmap
Exhaust brake circuit 1 --- --- Brake pressure below 5,5 bar Signal from pressure switch --- C13
below 5,5 bar Circuit 1 ⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14145
Exhaust brake circuit 2 --- --- Brake pressure below 5,5 bar Signal from pressure switch --- D-24
below 5,5 bar Circuit 2 ⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14147
Minidiag --- --- Engine water temperature too high Signal from ADM2 --- Engine coolant
Water temperature ⇒ CAN_analog value temperature
⇒ MOKI SW
Set: t_MOT > 105 °C (8125)
L-ID= 11314
Reset: t_MOT > 101 °C (8000)
⇒ activate bitmap
Emergency stop No --- Emergency stop active Switch activated D-13
output PLC QD2.2 A0622
⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID= 11219
Bypass sensor Disconnect CAN Fuel tank empty SW --- E24
B0420 OPEN at ZR2-BD IF tank gauge < threshold value SW
PIN: G/GND ⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=10420 L-ID=10422
(only AC350)
Online Test MOKI --- No battery charge Signal from alternator (L) --- C-33
IF Input = 1
THEN activate bitmap
L-ID=10411 L-ID=10412
Not used --- --- Battery check superstructure C-31
L-ID=11221
--- Set crane out of level Disconnect CAN One circuit is not in level Signal from Indicator Only when parking brake and engine running SW
OPEN at ZR2-BD => Software: IF one circuit out of level AND parking brake = 1
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14455 L-ID=14454
Bypass sensor --- --- Return filter of carrier hydraulics for IF pressure switch p< 2,5 bar = 1 --- C-32
S3312 Pin 1 and 4 outriggers, levelling,... no flow THEN activate bitmap
or S3313 Pin 1 and 4
L-ID=13313
Switch on --- --- Hold axles Switch activated --- C-30
⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14428
Switch on Disconnect CAN All axles raised ON: Switch raise all axles = 1
OPEN at ZR2-BD ⇒ activate bitmap
OFF: Switch lower all axles= 1
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14429 L-ID=14431
Switch on --- --- Suspension locked Switch activated --- C-29
⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=14401

Symbol
--- Switch on and drive --- --- Diff lock transverse axle1 and 2 engaged Switch activated --- C24
⇒ signal from Mechanic-Switch
⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=12220
Switch on and drive --- --- At least one longitudinal diff lock engaged. Switch activated --- C-23
and drive lift axle engaged ⇒ signal from Mechanic-Switch
⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap C-4
L-ID=12212 L-ID=12313
--- Switch on --- --- Transfer box in off road mode ⇒ signal from pressure switch --- C-3
⇒ Input active
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID = 12314
--- Switch on --- --- Transfer box neutral ⇒ signal from pressure switch --- C-2
⇒ Input GE_Gang = 0 & ST_Gang = 0
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID =12316
Not used --- --- Central greasing signal from central greasing unit --- D-30
No grease ⇒ Input = 1
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID =11222
--- Switch on --- --- switch to3- Point suspension Switch activated --- D14
⇒ Input = 1
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=12312
--- Plug in trailer --- --- trailer Info Input = 1 --- D-1
OR
PDO_09_ Byte_3_Bit_1_2
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID =11220
Plug in trailer --- --- Trailer error: attention Input = 1 --- D-2
OR
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID =11220
Plug in trailer --- --- Trailer error: Stop Input = 1 --- D-4
OR
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID =11220
--- Switch on Lift axle up ON: Switch raise lift axle activated --- PDO_??
⇒ activate bitmap Byte ??
OFF: when lift axle is lowered Bit ?,?
⇒ activate bitmap
L-ID=12320 L-ID=12321
--- --- Ignition on/off --- --- Activate buzzer IF (ERROR OR N-fkt) Prio 3 = 1 --- D-18
THEN Buzzer 1 x Beep
OR IF ERROR Prio 1 = 1
THEN Buzzer ca. 10 x Beep
OR IF overrev = 1 (Prio 0)
THEN permanent buzzer
--- --- error carrier engine --- --- Error carrier engine --- C-1
(in superstructure cabin)
--- --- Switch on camera 1 --- --- Engage power supply for camera 1 Activate mask camera --- D-18
Switch camera 1 activated
Output = 1 & Video channel = camera 1 active
--- --- --- --- --- Analogue value level front left analogue sensor --- PDO_8
CAN OPEN
Tür CAN
--- --- --- --- --- Analogue value level front right analogue sensor --- PDO_8

Symbol
CAN OPEN
Tür CAN
--- --- --- --- --- Analogue value level rear left analogue sensor --- PDO_8
CAN OPEN
Tür CAN
--- --- --- --- --- Analogue value level rear right Analogue sensor --- PDO_8
CAN OPEN
Tür CAN
--- --- --- --- --- Levelling crane activated Signal from one of the level sensors --- PDO_8
⇒ signal from PLC
⇒ Input active
⇒ Mask Niveau activated
--- --- --- --- --- Engine water temperature Analogue meter --- E25
--- --- --- --- --- Fuel gauge Analogue meter --- E24
--- --- --- --- --- Rpm meter Analogue meter --- EEC1
K3
--- --- --- --- --- Brake pressure analogue circuit 1 Bar graph --- PDO_8
--- --- --- --- --- Brake pressure analogue circuit 2 Bar graph --- PDO_8
--- --- --- --- --- Engine oil pressure analogue Bar graph --- PROP
--- --- --- --- --- Engine oil level analogue Bar graph --- PROP
--- --- --- --- --- Hour meter --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- Software version --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- Special mask --- --- ---
--- No CAN connection between --- --- --- no connection to ZR-2. Possible cause: I- CAN connection --- ---
MOKI, ZR2- BD, MTCO disconnected OR ZR-2 without power supply OR ZR-2 defective,....
flashing

Indicator Lights in the Driver Information System
Display in the Status (S)

Switching Chassis display in the
Fault code Text display Assembly Fault/Function Information Pin assignment Comments super- /
type driver information system
structure Fault (F)
A0623 ABS_WABCO
Brakes ABS crane chassis ABS switch D2 (-) X1:15 No F
Ein_02 WL
A0623
Brakes ABS dolly Fault D3 (-) F
Ein_03
P5311 RET
Brakes Retarder lever Active C31 (-) X1:29 No S
Ein_32 AD2
A0621
Brakes Handbrake Closed B1 Pressure <2 bar No S
A_Ein_06
A0621
Lighting High-beam
Switch actuated A21 (+) S6115 No S
equipment headlight
S_Ein_13
P5311
D15
S_Ein_21
Lighting Blinker
Switch actuated (+) S6115 No S
equipment Crane Chassis
P5311
D23
S_Ein_22
P5311
D15
Switch actuated S_Ein_21
Lighting Blinker
and (+) S6115 No S
equipment Trailer
Trailer present P5311
D23
S_Ein_22
Light switches
P5311
Lighting AND rear fog
Rear fog lamp D3 (+,-) S6220 No S
equipment lamp switch
S_Ein_18
actuated
Page 1 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
Disc Brake Brake linings
Brakes D32 (-) No S
Axles 1-2 worn
S_Ein_25
P5311
Disc brake Brake linings
Brakes C2 (-) No S
axles 3-6 worn
S_Ein_34
Sustained-action P5311
Brakes brake − cruise Active C5 (+) No S
control S_Ein_45
Brakes Cruise Control Actuated J1939 Bus No S
Brakes Engine flap brake Active No S
Brakes Engine flap brake selected No S
P5311
D24
S_Ein_29 (-)
Off-road gear S2215
Drive train Distributor gear No S
active S2216
P5311 (-)
D34
S_Ein_30
P5311
D24
S_Ein_29 (-)
S2215
Drive train Distributor gear Neutral No S
S2216
P5311 (-)
D34
S_Ein_30
P5311
D24
Suggestion S_Ein_29 (-)
Power takeoff S2215
Distributor gear Engage off- No S
train S2216
road gear P5311 (-)
D34
S_Ein_30
Page 2 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Manoeuvring
Drive train Active J1939 Bus No S
operation
A0621
Drive train Quick stop Switch actuated B15 (-) S
Ein_23
P5311
Drive train Air Filter clogged C22 (-) S1330 No S
Ein_44
Suspension
blocked, IRAS
Drive train Speed limit Active No S
active or
J1939 bus
A0621
Fuel Main tank Reserve D14 B0420 S
A_Ein_02
Lighting
Outrigger area Active No S
equipment
P5311
Outriggers /
Suspension blocked C8 (-,+) S4401 No S
suspension
S_Ein_46
Outriggers /
Axles "Hold axles" No S
suspension
P5311
Outriggers / 3-way/4-way Three-circuit
E31 (+,-) S4425 S
suspension system switch over system active
S_Ein_66
Outriggers /
Suspension OFF level No S
suspension
Page 3 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Outriggers /
Lift axle Lift axle raised S
suspension
Outriggers /
Suspension Switch actuated S
suspension
Outriggers / 3-way/4-way 3-circuit system

S
suspension system switch over selected
Outriggers / Second
suspension suspension Switch actuated S2283 S
optional system/dolly
Longitudinal
Travel gear Active No S
differential locks
Activation
axle 4
Transverse
differential locks
Longitudinal
Travel gear selected S
differential locks
Transverse
differential locks
Activation
axle 4
Enable steering
Steering Active J1939 Bus S
program
Page 4 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Enable steering
Steering selected J1939 Bus S
program
4-wheel drive
steering program
4-wheel drive
steering program
“Diagonal steering”
steering program
“Diagonal steering”
steering program
Steering program
Steering “Driving away from Active J1939 Bus S
the wall”
Steering program
Steering “Driving away from selected J1939 Bus S
the wall”
“Independent rear
Steering axle steering” Active J1939 Bus S
steering program
“Independent rear
Steering axle steering” selected J1939 Bus S
steering program
“Close cornering”
steering program
in road-travel
mode
Page 5 of 36
structure Fault (F)
“Close cornering”
steering program
in road-travel
mode
Steering SLC Self-test J1939 Bus S
Central
A0621
Central lubricating lubricating
Diverse B13 (-) S
system system without
S_Ein_24
grease
Emergency
Diverse Active No S
lowering
A0623
Hydraulic oil filter Hydraulic oil
Diverse D1 (-) S3312, S3313 No S
(return line filter) filter clogged
S_Ein_01
Emergency
Diverse Switch actuated No S
lowering
Operating Mode
Offroad Active S
System
Operating Mode
Mobile Active S
System
Operating Mode
crane Active S
System
ABS crane Fault with a

1 Brakes ABS crane chassis J1939 Bus No F
chassis HP high priority
Page 6 of 36
structure Fault (F)
ABS crane Fault with a

2 Brakes ABS crane chassis J1939 Bus No F
chassis LP low priority
A0623
5 ABS caster axle Brakes ABS caster axle Fault D11 (-) No F
Ein_11
A0621 ADM2-FR
ADM Service Cable breakage
6 Brakes Foot brake E11 (-) X21:15 No F
Brake short circuit
Aus_24 Service_Brake
8 Cruise Control Brakes Cruise Control No signal J1939 Bus No F
A0623
Brake circuit 1 Pressure Pressure transducer
9 Brake circuit 1 Brakes D4 (-) yes F
Digital <5,5 bar B4111
S_Ein_04
A0623
Brake circuit 1 Pressure transducer
10 B4111 G KB Brakes Cable breakage D13 yes F
Analogue B4111
A_Ein_01
A0623
Brake circuit 2 Pressure Pressure transducer
11 Brake circuit 2 Brakes D5 (-) yes F
Digital <5,5 bar B4112
S_Ein_05
A0623
Analogue B4112
A_Ein_02
Fault with a
13 retarder HP Brakes Retarder J1939 Bus No F
high priority
Fault with a
14 retarder LP Brakes Retarder J1939 Bus No F
low priority
Page 7 of 36
structure Fault (F)
15 retarder CAN Brakes Retarder No signal J1939 Bus No F
P5311
E21 Steering column
Cruise S_Ein_63 (-) level retarder S4120
Cruise control/
16 Control/Retarder Brakes Implausibility Pins 2 and 3 never No F
Retarder stages
PL P5311 (-) active
E30 simultaneously
S_Ein_64
A0621 ADM2-FR X18.4
Cruise control Cruise control Cable breakage
17 Brakes E17 (-) SET/DECEL No F
MINUS MINUS short circuit
Aus_18
A0621
Cruise control Cruise control Cable breakage ADM2-FR X18.5
18 Brakes E15 (-) No F
PLUS PLUS short circuit RES/ACCEL
Aus_20
A0621
Cruise control Cruise control Cable breakage ADM2-FR X18.6
19 Brakes E13 (-) No F
ON/OFF ON/OFF short circuit ON/OFF
Aus_22
Short circuit to A0621

Parking brake
20 B4115 + KS Brakes plus B1 B4115 F
2 Bar
(logic) A_Ein_06

Parking brake
21 B4115 - KS Brakes earth B1 B4115 F
2 Bar
(logic) A_Ein_06

Parking brake
22 B4121 G - KS Brakes earth D13 B4121 yes F
analogue
(logic) A_Ein_01
A0622
Parking brake Cable breakage
23 B4121 G KB Brakes D13 B4121 yes F
analogue (logic)
A_Ein_01
A0622
24 B4121 PL Brakes Parking brake Implausibility D13 B4121 yes F
A_Ein_01
Page 8 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0623
ABS crane
27 Brakes ABS crane chassis Short circuit D2 (-) A4123 yes F
chassis KS
S_Ein_02
P5311
D13 (+)
S_Ein_12
P5311
D25 (+)
S_Ein_13
28 S4120 PL Brakes Cruise Control Implausibility S4120 No F
P5311
D16 (+)
S_Ein_11
P5311
D5 (+)
S_Ein_14
A0623
30 B4111 WK + KS Brakes Short circuit D4 (-) yes F
Digital B4111
S_Ein_04
A0623
31 B4112 WK + KS Brakes Short circuit D5 (-) yes F
Digital B4112
S_Ein_05
P5311
Cruise control
32 S4120 10 KS Brakes Short circuit D25 (+) S4120 No F
MINUS
S_Ein_13
P5311
Cruise control
PLUS
S_Ein_12
P5311
Cruise control
ON/OFF
S_Ein_11
P5311
35 S4120 12 KS Brakes Cruise control OFF Short circuit D5 (+) S4120 No F
S_Ein_14
Page 9 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
Retarder brake
36 RET AD3 KS Brakes Short circuit D31 (+) RET AD3 No F
light
S_Ein_26
P5311
37 RET AD2 KS Brakes Retarder lamp Short circuit C31 (+) RET AD2 No F
S_Ein_32
Sustained-action Sustained-action P5311

38 brake − cruise Brakes brake − cruise Short circuit C5 (+) No F
control KS control S_Ein_45
P5311
39 S4120 2 KS Brakes Engine brake Short circuit E21 (-) S4120 No F
S_Ein_63
A0623
D4
S_Ein_04
Pressure transducer
40 B4111 PL Brakes Brake circuit 1 Implausibility yes F
B4111
A0623
D13
A_Ein_01
A0623
D5
S_Ein_05
Pressure transducer
41 B4112 PL Brakes Brake circuit 2 Implausibility yes F
B4112
A0623
D14
A_Ein_02
A0623
42 B4111 G - KS Brakes Cable breakage D13 yes F
Analogue B4111
A_Ein_01
A0623
43 B4112 G - KS Brakes Cable breakage D14 yes F
Analogue B4112
A_Ein_02
A0622
Foot braking Pressure transducer
pressure B4122
A_Ein_02
Page 10 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0622
Foot braking Pressure transducer
45 B4122 G - KS Brakes Short circuit D14 yes F
pressure B4122
A_Ein_02
P5311
46 ABS axle 3 Brakes ABS axle 3 Fault C11 (-) A4126 F
S_Ein_33
P5311
47 ABS axle 3 KB Brakes ABS axle 3 Cable breakage C11 (-) A4126 F
S_Ein_33
Transmissions Fault with a

51 Drive train Transmission J1939 Bus yes F
HP high priority
Transmissions Fault with a

52 Drive train Transmission J1939 Bus yes F
LP low priority
Transmissions
53 Drive train Transmission No signal J1939 Bus yes F
CAN
P5311
Transmission Transmission
54 Drive train Active C29 (+) A2110 F
buzzer buzzer
S_Ein_38
P5311
Transmission Transmission
55 Drive train Cable breakage C29 (+) A2110 F
buzzer KB buzzer
S_Ein_38
P5311
D24
S_Ein_29 (-)
Distributor gear S2215
57 Drive train Distributor gear Implausibility yes F
HP S2216
P5311 (-)
D34
S_Ein_30
Page 11 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
E22
S_Ein_65 (+,-)
58 S2216A PL Drive train Distributor gear Implausibility S2216A yes F
P5311 (+,-)
E23
S_Ein_67
Excessive Excessive
59 Drive train Engine yes F
engine speed engine speed
Oil pressure too Oil pressure too

60 Drive train Engine J1939 Bus yes F
low low
61 Oil pressure KB Drive train Engine No signal J1939 Bus yes F
62 Oil level too low Drive train Engine Oil level too low J1939 Bus yes F
63 Oil level KB Drive train Engine No signal J1939 Bus yes F
Coolant
Coolant
64 Drive train Engine temperature too J1939 Bus yes F
temperature
high
A0623
Cooling water
65 Coolant level Drive train Engine B11 B1316 yes F
level too low
A_Ein_03
Fault with a
66 Fault engine HP Drive train Engine J1939 Bus yes F
high priority
Page 12 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Fault with a
67 Fault engine LP Drive train Engine J1939 Bus yes F
low priority
A0621 S1217L
69 S1217L 5B KB Drive train Engine start Cable breakage B17 (+;-) (Outrigger Controls No F
S_Ein_22 Left)
A0622 S1217R
70 S1217R 5B KB Drive train Engine start Cable breakage A21 (+;-) (Outrigger Controls No F
S_Ein_13 Right)
Battery/light P5311 Speed, but “Engine

71 Battery charge Drive train machine does not Voltage too low D4 (+) running” signal is yes F
charge S_Ein_23 OFF
P5311 No speed, but signal

Engine still
72 Drive train Running engine Implausibility D4 (+) "Engine running" is yes F
running
S_Ein_23 on
73 v-limit CAN Drive train Speed limit No signal J1939 Bus No F
A0623 ADM2-FR
ADM Engine
74 Drive train Buzzer ADM D8 (-) X21:5 yes F
StopEngine malfunction
S_Ein_08 Stop_Eng
P5311
On-road gear
79 2216A 6 KB Drive train Cable breakage E23 (+,-) S2216A No F
switch
S_Ein_67
P5311
OFF-road gear
80 2216A 3 KB Drive train Cable breakage E22 (+,-) S2216A No F
switch
S_Ein_65
A0621 ADM2-FR
Cable breakage
83 v-limit Drive train Speed limit E5 (-) X18:12 No F
short circuit
Aus_28 LIM_1
A0623 A2110
Cable breakage
84 Torque reduction Drive train Torque reduction E15 (-) X2:5 F
short circuit
Aus_20 EDM4
Page 13 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0621
Distributor gear Cable breakage
85 Y2215 Drive train A4 (+) Y2215 No F
On-road gear short circuit
Aus_08
A0622
Distributor gear Cable breakage
86 Y2216 Drive train E4 (+) Y2216 No F
off-road gear short circuit
Aus_29
A0621 ADM2-FR
Work engine Work engine Cable breakage
87 Drive train E7 (-) X18:10 No F
speed speed short circuit
Aus_26 Remote_PTO
A0622 EMOD
Quick stop Cable breakage
89 A2110 ED5 Drive train E8 (+) X2:14 No F
overspeed short circuit
Aus_25 ED5
H7113 (Reversing
A0621
Reversing Cable breakage buzzer), H6215 and
91 Drive train Reverse gear B18 (+) yes F
buzzer short circuit H6216 (Reversing
Aus_10
light)
A0623 ADM2-FR
ADM Engine
94 Drive train Engine D6 (-) X21:6 yes F
CheckEngine malfunction
S_Ein_06 Check_Eng
A0623 ADM2-FR
ADM
98 Drive train Buzzer ADM Short circuit D8 (-) X21:5 No F
StopEngine KS
S_Ein_08 Stop_Eng
Cable breakage A0623

Engine
99 B1316 Drive train short circuit to B11 B1316 No F
Coolant level
plus A_Ein_03
P5311
100 G0113 L KB Drive train Running engine Cable breakage D4 (+,-) G0113 No F
Ein_23
P5311
101 S1330 KS Drive train Air Filter Short circuit C22 (-) S1330 No F
S_Ein_44
P5311
Distributor gear
102 S2215 KS Drive train Short circuit D24 (-) S2215 No F
On-road gear
Ein_29
Page 14 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Short circuit in A0623

Ignition External
103 Drive train External ignition switched-on B16 (+) No F
SC
state Aus_11
A0623
ADM ADM2-FR
104 Drive train Engine Short circuit D6 (-) No F
CheckEngine KS Check_Eng
Ein_06
P5311
Distributor gear
105 S2216 KS Drive train Short circuit D34 (-) S2216 F
off-road gear
Ein_30
Short circuit A0621

Engine Stop Engine STOP
106 Drive train in switched-on B12 (+) No F
Enablement SC Release
state Aus_13
Short circuit A0621

Engine Start ext. External engine
107 Drive train in switched-on E4 (+) No F
SC start
state Aus_29
P5311
E20
(+,-)
S_Ein_61
Outriggers / Switch Level S4411
111 S4411 PL Implausibility No F
suspension overall (+,-) (cab)
P5311
E29
S_Ein_62
P5311
C4
S_Ein_54 (+,-)
Outriggers / Switch Level Front S4413
suspension left (cab)
P5311 (+,-)
C34
S_Ein_55
P5311
C23
S_Ein_58 (+,-)
Outriggers / Switch Level Rear S4415
suspension left (cab)
P5311 (+,-)
E19
S_Ein_59
Page 15 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
C16
S_Ein_56 (+,-)
Outriggers / Switch Level Rear S4414
suspension Right (cab)
P5311 (+,-)
C15
S_Ein_57
A0622
3a
S_Ein_20 (+,-) S4427L
Outriggers / Switch
115 S4427L PL Implausibility (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension Axles left
A0622 (+,-) Left)
A1
S_Ein_21
A0622
A13
S_Ein_17 (-,+) S4427R
Outriggers / Switch
116 S4427R PL Implausibility (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension Axles right
A0622 (-,+) Right)
A11
S_Ein_18
A0624
D1
S_Ein_01 (+,-) S4320L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Front left vertical
A0624 (+,-) Left)
D2
S_Ein_02
A0624
D3
S_Ein_03 (+,-) S4319L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Front right vertical
A0624 (+,-) Left)
D4
S_Ein_04
A0624
D5
S_Ein_05 (+,-) S4322L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Rear left vertical
A0624 (+,-) Left)
D6
S_Ein_06
Page 16 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0624
D7
S_Ein_07 (+,-) S4321L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Rear right vertical
A0624 (+,-) Left)
D8
S_Ein_08
A0622
D1
S_Ein_01 (+,-) S4320R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Front left vertical
A0622 (+,-) Right)
D2
S_Ein_02
A0622
D3
S_Ein_03 (+,-) S4319R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Front right vertical
A0622 (+,-) Right)
D4
S_Ein_04
A0622
D5
S_Ein_05 (+,-) S4322R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Rear left vertical
A0622 (+,-) Right)
D6
S_Ein_06
A0622
D7
S_Ein_07 (+,-) S4321R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Rear right vertical
A0622 (+,-) Right)
D8
S_Ein_08
A0624
D9
Switch S_Ein_09 (+,-) S4316L
Outriggers /
125 S4316L PL Front left Implausibility (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
horizontal A0624 (+,-) Left)
D10
S_Ein_10
Page 17 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0624
D11
S_Ein_11 (+,-) S4318L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Rear left horizontal
A0624 (+,-) Left)
D12
S_Ein_12
A0622
A5
Switch S_Ein_19 (+,-) S4315R
Outriggers /
127 S4315R PL Front right Implausibility (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
horizontal A0622 (+,-) Right)
B13
S_Ein_24
A0622
B17
Switch S_Ein_22 (+,-) S4317R
Outriggers /
128 S4317R PL Rear right Implausibility (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
horizontal A0622 (+,-) Right)
B15
S_Ein_23
A0621
3a
S_Ein_20 (+,-) S4300L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Vertical overall
A0621 (+,-) Left)
A1
S_Ein_21
A0622
A19
S_Ein_14 (+,-) S4300R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Vertical overall
A0622 (+,-) Right)
A17
S_Ein_15
A0621
A13
S_Ein_17 (+,-) S4322L
Outriggers / Switch Out
suspension Auto/ignition off
P5311 (+,-) Left)
A5
S_Ein_19
Page 18 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0622
A15
S_Ein_16 (+,-) S4322R
Outriggers / Switch Stabilizers
suspension Auto/Ignition off
A0621 (+,-) Right)
A11
S_Ein_18
A0623
Outriggers / Axle 3 bottom 100
139 S4461 KS Short circuit 3a (+) S4461 F
suspension bar filled
S_Ein_20
A0623
Outriggers / Axle 3 bottom 100
140 S4462 KS Short circuit A1 (+) S4462 F
suspension bar filled
S_Ein_21
P5311
Outriggers / Switch over 3-
141 S4425 KB Cable breakage E31 (+,-) S4425 F
suspension way/4-way system
S_Ein_66
Switch A0624 S4320L

Outriggers /
144 S4320L 2B KB Retract Front left Cable breakage D1 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Vertical S_Ein_01 Left)
Switch A0624 S4320L

Outriggers /
145 S4320L 5B KB Extend Front left Cable breakage D2 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
vertical S_Ein_02 Left)
Switch A0624 S4319L

Outriggers /
146 S4319L 2B KB Retract Front right Cable breakage D3 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4319L

Outriggers /
147 S4319L 5B KB Extend Front right Cable breakage D4 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4322L

Outriggers /
148 S4322L 2B KB Retract rear left Cable breakage D5 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4322L

Outriggers /
149 S4322L 5B KB Extend rear left Cable breakage D6 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Page 19 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Switch A0624 S4321L

Outriggers /
150 S4321L 2B KB Retract rear right Cable breakage D7 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4321L

Outriggers /
151 S4321L 5B KB Extend rear right Cable breakage D8 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4316L

Outriggers /
152 S4316L 2B KB Retract Front left Cable breakage D9 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
horizontal S_Ein_09 Left)
Switch A0624 S4316L

Outriggers /
153 S4316L 5B KB Extend Front left Cable breakage D10 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4318L

Outriggers /
154 S4318L 2B KB Retract rear left Cable breakage D11 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0624 S4318L

Outriggers /
155 S4318L 5B KB Extend rear left Cable breakage D12 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
A0621 S4300L
Outriggers / Switch
156 S4300L 2B KB Cable breakage 3a (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension Retract all vertical
S_Ein_20 Left)
A0621 S4300L
Outriggers / Switch
157 S4300L 5B KB Cable breakage A1 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension Extend all vertical
S_Ein_21 Left)
A0621 S4332L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Automatic
S_Ein_19 Left)
A0622 S4427L
Outriggers / Switch
159 S4427L 2B KB Cable breakage 3a (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension Raise axles Left
S_Ein_20 Left)
A0622 S4427L
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Lower axles Left
S_Ein_21 Left)
Page 20 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Switch A0622 S4320R

Outriggers /
161 S4320R 2B KB Retract Front left Cable breakage D1 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Vertical S_Ein_01 Right)
Switch A0622 S4320R

Outriggers /
162 S4320R 5B KB Extend Front left Cable breakage D2 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
vertical S_Ein_02 Right)
Switch A0622 S4319R

Outriggers /
163 S4319R 2B KB Retract Front right Cable breakage D3 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4319R

Outriggers /
164 S4319R 5B KB Extend Front right Cable breakage D4 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4422R

Outriggers /
165 S4422R 2B KB Retract rear left Cable breakage D5 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4422R

Outriggers /
166 S4422R 5B KB Extend rear left Cable breakage D6 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4321R

Outriggers /
167 S4321R 2B KB Retract rear right Cable breakage D7 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4321R

Outriggers /
168 S4321R 5B KB Extend rear right Cable breakage D8 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4315R

Outriggers /
169 S4315R 2B KB Retract Front right Cable breakage A5 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
horizontal S_Ein_19 Right)
Switch A0622 S4315R

Outriggers /
170 S4315R 5B KB Extend Front right Cable breakage B13 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Switch A0622 S4317R

Outriggers /
171 S4317R 2B KB Retract rear right Cable breakage B15 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
Page 21 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Switch A0622 S4317R

Outriggers /
172 S4317R 5B KB Extend rear right Cable breakage B17 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension
A0622 S4300R
Outriggers / Switch
173 S4300R 2B KB Cable breakage A19 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
suspension Retract all vertical
S_Ein_14 Right)
A0622 S4300R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Extend all vertical
S_Ein_15 Right)
A0622 S4332R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Automatic
S_Ein_16 Right)
A0622 S4427R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Raise axles Right
S_Ein_17 Right)
A0622 S4427R
Outriggers / Switch
suspension Lower axles Right
S_Ein_18 Right)
P5311
Outriggers / Switch S4401
178 S4401 KB Cable breakage C8 (-,+) No F
suspension Block suspension (cab)
S_Ein_46
P5311
Outriggers / Raise level entirely S4411
179 S4411 6 KB Cable breakage E20 (+,-) No F
suspension switch (cab)
S_Ein_61
P5311
Outriggers / Lower level S4411
suspension entirely switch (cab)
S_Ein_62
P5311
Outriggers / Raise Front level S4413
181 S4413 6 KB Cable breakage C4 (+,-) No F
S_Ein_54
P5311
Outriggers / Lower Front level S4413
S_Ein_55
Page 22 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
Outriggers / Raise left rear S4415
suspension level switch (cab)
S_Ein_58
P5311
Outriggers / Lower left rear S4415
S_Ein_59
P5311
Outriggers / Raise right rear S4414
S_Ein_56
P5311
Outriggers / Lower right rear S4414
S_Ein_57
P5311
Outriggers / Automatic level S4424
187 S4424 KB Cable breakage E28 (+,-) No F
S_Ein_60
Switch over A0622

Outriggers / Cable breakage
188 Y2513 Suspension/Stabili E17 (+) Y2513 No F
suspension Short circuit
zers Aus_18
A0622
Outriggers / Extend the back Cable breakage
189 Y2514 E15 (+) Y2514 No F
suspension stop Short circuit
Aus_20
A0622
190 Y2515 Retract outriggers. E13 (+) Y2515 No F
Aus_22
A0622
Outriggers / Stabilizers front Cable breakage
191 Y4315 A18 (+) Y4315 No F
suspension right horizontal Short circuit
Aus_03
A0621
Outriggers / Stabilizers front left Cable breakage
192 Y4316 A18 (+) Y4316 No F
suspension horizontal Short circuit
Aus_03
A0622
Outriggers / Stabilizers rear Cable breakage
193 Y4317 A14 (+) Y4317 No F
suspension right horizontal short circuit
Aus_05
Page 23 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0621
Outriggers / Stabilizers rear left Cable breakage
194 Y4318 A14 (+) Y4318 No F
suspension horizontal Short circuit
Aus_05
A0622
Outriggers / Stabilizers front Cable breakage
195 Y4319 A16 (+) Y4319 No F
suspension right vertical Short circuit
Aus_04
A0621
Outriggers / Stabilizers front left Cable breakage
196 Y4320 A16 (+) Y4320 No F
suspension vertical Short circuit
Aus_04
A0622
Outriggers / Stabilizers rear Cable breakage
197 Y4321 A12 (+) Y4321 No F
suspension right vertical Short circuit
Aus_06
A0621
Outriggers / Stabilizers rear left Cable breakage
198 Y4322 A12 (+) Y4322 No F
suspension vertical Short circuit
Aus_06
A0622
Outriggers / Suspension level Cable breakage
199 Y4411 A4 (+) Y4411 No F
suspension complete Short circuit
Aus_08
A0622
Outriggers / Switch over 3- Cable breakage
200 Y4425 E3 (-) Y4425 No F
suspension way/4-way system Short circuit
Aus_30
A0622
201 Y4427 Raise axles E12 (+) Y4427 No F
Aus_23
A0622
202 Y4428 Hold axles E11 (+) Y4428 No F
Aus_24
A0623
203 Y4430 Front level E13 (+) Y4430 No F
Aus_22
A0623
204 Y4432 Level rear, right E7 (+) Y4432 No F
Aus_26
Page 24 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0621
205 Y4433 Level rear, left E5 (+) Y4433 No F
Aus_28
A0621
Outriggers / Suspension Cable breakage
206 Y4448 A6 (-) Y4448 No F
suspension blocked Short circuit
Aus_07
A0621
207 Y4449 B6 (-) Y4449 No F
Aus_14
A0622
208 Y4450 A6 (-) Y4450 No F
Aus_07
A0622
209 Y4451 B6 (-) Y4451 No F
Aus_14
Outriggers / Sensor Level Front CANOPEN

210 Level sensor VL Implausibility No F
suspension left (B4413)
Outriggers / Sensor Level front CANOPEN

211 Level sensor VR Implausibility No F
suspension right (B4412)
Outriggers / Sensor Level rear CANOPEN

212 Level sensor HL Implausibility No F
suspension left (B4415)
Outriggers / Sensor Level rear CANOPEN

213 Level sensor HR Implausibility No F
suspension right (B4414)
A0623
214 Y4431 Level front, left E11 (+) Y4431 F
Aus_24
P5311
Outriggers / Raise right rear
215 S4412 6 KB Cable breakage C3 (+,-) S4412 F
suspension level switch
S_Ein_35
Page 25 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
Outriggers / Lower right rear
216 S4412 3 KB Cable breakage D21 (+,-) S4412 F
suspension level switch
S_Ein_16
P5311
C3
(+,-)
S_Ein_35
Outriggers / Switch Level Front
217 S4412 PL Implausibility S4412 F
suspension right
P5311
(+,-)
D21
S_Ein_16
P5311
Outriggers / Disable "Raise
218 S4427 KB Cable breakage E32 (+,-) S4427 F
suspension axle 4" switch
S_Ein_68
A0623
219 Y4460 Raise/lower axle 4 E4 (+) Y4460 F
Aus_29
A0622
220 Y4461 Disable lift axle left E7 (-) Y4461 F
Aus_26
A0622
Outriggers / Disable lift axle Cable breakage
221 Y4462 E5 (-) Y4462 F
suspension right Short circuit
Aus_28
A0622
222 Y4452 Block suspension E18 (-) Y4452 F
Aus_17
A0621
223 Y4453 Block suspension E18 (-) Y4453 F
Aus_17
Second P5311
Outriggers /
224 S2283 KB suspension system Cable breakage D17 (+,-) S4427 F
suspension
switched on S_Ein_15
Condition of the
A0621 Device
241 Hardware MUX1 Device PLC - MCAN Bus yes F
Error
component
Page 26 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Condition of the
A0622 Device
Error
component
Condition of the
A0623 Device
Error
component
Condition of the
A0624 Device
Error
component
Condition of the
A0626 Device
246 Hardware A0626 PLC - CANOPEN bus yes F
Error
component
Condition of the
249 Tilt sensor error Hardware Tilt sensor PLC - CANOPEN bus yes F
component
Condition of the
A5310 Device
250 Hardware ZR32 Device PLC - F
Error
component
Condition of the
P5311 Device
251 Hardware MOKI Device PLC - ICAN Bus yes F
Error
component
Condition of the
ETC Device ETC Device
252 Hardware PLC - J1939 Bus yes F
Error (transmission)
component
Condition of the
EDC Device EDC Device
253 Hardware PLC - J1939 Bus yes F
Error (engine)
component
Condition of the
RET Device
254 Hardware Retarder Device PLC - J1939 Bus yes F
Error
component
Condition of the
EBS Device
255 Hardware EBS Device PLC - J1939 Bus yes F
Error
component
Page 27 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Condition of the
TCO Device
256 Hardware TCO Device PLC - ICAN Bus yes F
Error
component
MUX3 output
P5311 WakeUp
257 Hardware DMUX WakeUp Implausibility switched on but No F
Error
MOKI input is not on
P5311
Central-differential S2243
261 S2243 KS Travel gear Short circuit C32 (-) No F
lock S2244
Ein_42
P5311
262 S2213 KS Travel gear Engage axle 3 Short circuit D35 (-) S2213A No F
S_Ein_31
S2222
P5311
S2224
263 S2222 KS Travel gear Transverse lock Short circuit C33 (-) F
S2225
S_Ein_43
S2226
P5311
Central-differential
264 S2240 KB Travel gear Cable breakage C30 (+;-) S2240 F
lock
S_Ein_36
P5311
265 S2220 KB Travel gear Transverse lock Cable breakage C20 (+;-) S2220 F
S_Ein_37
A0623
Central-differential Short circuit
266 Y2240 Travel gear E8 (+) Y2240 F
lock Cable breakage
Aus_25
A0623
Short circuit
267 Y2220 Travel gear Transverse lock E6 (+) Y2220 F
Cable breakage
Aus_27
P5311
Through-flow
271 Steering Lenkkreis 1 no through-feed C21 (-) S4211 yes F
LK1
S_Ein_39
P5311
Through-flow
272 Steering Steering circuit 1 Cable breakage C21 (-) S4211 yes F
LK1 KB
S_Ein_39
Page 28 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
Through-flow
273 Steering Steering circuit 2 no through-feed C21 (-) S4212 yes F
LK2
S_Ein_40
P5311
Through-flow
LK2 KB
S_Ein_40
P5311
Through-flow
275 Steering Steering circuit 3 no through-feed C35 (-) S4213 yes F
LK3
S_Ein_41
P5311
Through-flow
LK3 KB
S_Ein_41
P5311
Switch
277 S4290 KB Steering Cable breakage C25 (+,-) S4290 No F
Release
S_Ein_47
P5311
Switch
"Close cornering"
S_Ein_50
P5311
Switch
"Diagonal steering"
S_Ein_51
Switch P5311
280 S4299 KB Steering “Driving away from Cable breakage C13 (+,-) S4299 No F
the wall" S_Ein_52
P5311C
Switch
281 S4291 3 KB Steering Cable breakage C7 S4291 No F
Manually to the left
S_Ein_49
Switch P5311C
282 S4291 6 KB Steering Manually to the Cable breakage C14 S4291 No F
right S_Ein_48
Page 29 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
C7
S_Ein_49 (+,-)
283 S4291 PL Steering Switch manual Implausibility No F
P5311 (+,-)
C14
S_Ein_48
284 SLC fault Steering SLC Fault yes F
287 SLC Warning Steering SLC Warning J1939 Bus yes F
Condition of the
SLC Device
288 Steering SLC PLC - yes F
Error
component
P5311
305 S4211 KS Steering Steering circuit 1 Short circuit C21 (-) S4211 yes F
Ein_39
P5311
306 S4212 KS Steering Steering circuit 2 Short circuit C12 (-) S4212 yes F
Ein_40
P5311
307 S4216A KS Steering Steering circuit 3 Short circuit C35 (-) S4216A yes F
Ein_41
Voltage >31
311 Voltage too high Diverse Voltage at ZR32 During 1 sec No F
Volts
Voltage < 22
312 Voltage too low Diverse Voltage at ZR32 During 1 sec No F
Volts
A0621
Cable breakage
314 buzzer Diverse buzzer E14 (+) H603 No F
Short circuit
Aus_21
Page 30 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0621 S4332L
Switch ignition
315 S4332L 5B KB Diverse Cable breakage A13 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
from outriggers
S_Ein_17 Left)
A0621 S4332R
Switch ignition
316 S4332R 5B KB Diverse Cable breakage A11 (+,-) (Outrigger Controls No F
from outriggers
S_Ein_18 Right)
Emergency P5311C
321 S2430 KB Diverse Cable breakage S2430 No F
lowering switch S_Ein_53
P5311
Ignition key
323 S1271 58 KS Diverse Short circuit D30 (+) S1271 No F
Position 58
S_Ein_24
Load
Load P5311
compensation
324 compensation Diverse Implausibility D6 (+) Input inactive No F
lamp
SS CB S_Ein_09
superstructure
Load
Load P5311
compensation Relay active but
325 compensation Diverse Implausibility D12 (+) No F
lamp crane input inactive
CR CB S_Ein_10
chassis
Load
Load P5311
compensation
326 compensation Diverse Short circuit D6 (+) No F
lamp
SS SC S_Ein_09
superstructure
Load
Load P5311
compensation
327 compensation Diverse Short circuit D12 (+) No F
lamp crane
CR SC S_Ein_10
chassis
P5311
D12
Load
Load S_Ein_10 (+)
compensation Relay inactive but
330 compensation Diverse Implausibility No F
lamp crane input active
CR PL P5311 (+)
chassis
C10
Aus_16
Magnetic coupling A0621
Cable breakage
331 Y5137 Diverse air-conditioning B14 (+) Y5137 No F
Short circuit
compressor Aus_12
Page 31 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A5310
D2
WKUP_01 (+)
333 S1271 PL Diverse Ignition lock Implausibility S1271 yes F
P5311D (+)
D30
S_Ein24
Quick decoupling A0623
Cable breakage
334 Y9791 Diverse crane chassis E18 (+) Y9791 F
Short circuit
superstructure Aus_17

Cable breakage
Short circuit

Cable breakage
Short circuit

Cable breakage
Short circuit
A0623
Return line filter Hydraulic oil filter S3311
339 Diverse Short circuit D1 (-) yes F
SC return line filter S3312
Ein_01
A0623
Air-conditioning
340 S5133 KS Diverse Short circuit D10 (+) S5133 No F
pressure switch
S_Ein_10
P5311
Lighting Rear fog lamp
343 S6220 KB Cable breakage D3 (+,-) S6220 No F
equipment switch
S_Ein_18
P5311
Lighting Outrigger area
344 S6240 KB Cable breakage D33 (+,-) S6240 No F
equipment switch
S_Ein_19
A0621
Lighting Flashing warning
345 S6310 KB Cable breakage A15 (+,-) S6310 No F
equipment light switch
S_Ein_16
Page 32 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0623 Retarder
Lighting Cable breakage
346 RET ED9 Retarder ED9 B14 (+) ED9 No F
equipment Short circuit
Aus_12 X1:19
P5311
D15
S_Ein_21 (+)
Lighting Switch
349 S6115 2 / 3 PL Implausibility S6115 No F
equipment Blinker
P5311 (+)
D23
S_Ein_22
A0622
Lighting Cable breakage H6221
350 Rear fog lamp Rear fog lamp A22 (+) No F
equipment Short circuit H6222
Aus_01
Lamp Blinker Left A0623

351 Blinker left front front Crane A12 (+) H6312 No F
chassis Aus_06
A0623
Lighting Lamp Blinker Left Cable breakage
352 Blinker left side A14 (+) H6314 No F
equipment side Crane chassis Short circuit
Aus_05
A0623
Lighting Lamp Blinker Left Cable breakage
353 Blinker left rear A16 (+) H6316 No F
equipment rear Crane chassis Short circuit
Aus_04
Lamp Blinker Right A0623

354 Blinker right front front Crane A18 (+) H6311 No F
chassis Aus_03
A0623
Lighting Lamp Blinker Right Cable breakage
355 Blinker right side A20 (+) H6313 No F
equipment side Crane chassis Short circuit
Aus_02
A0623
Lighting Lamp Blinker Right Cable breakage
356 Blinker right rear A22 (+) H6315 No F
equipment rear Crane chassis Short circuit
Aus_01
A0621
Lighting Lamp Brake light Cable breakage
357 Brake light left E6 (+) H6225 No F
equipment Left Crane chassis Short circuit
Aus_27
Page 33 of 36
structure Fault (F)
Lamp Brake light A0622

358 Brake light right Right Crane E6 (+) H6224 No F
chassis Aus_27
Lamp Low-beam A0622

359 Left low beam headlight Left B16 (+) E6116 No F
Crane chassis Aus_11
Lamp Low-beam A0621

360 Right low beam headlight Right B16 (+) E6115 No F
A0622
361 Ill. Stabilizers Lamp stabilizers E2 (+) Relay K205 No F
Aus_31
A0621
Lighting Lamp Parking light Cable breakage
362 Parking light, left B4 (+) No F
equipment Left Crane chassis Short circuit
Aus_15
Lamp Parking light A0622

Parking light, Lighting Cable breakage
363 Right Crane B4 (+) No F
right equipment Short circuit
chassis Aus_15
Lamp High-beam A0622

Lighting Cable breakage E6116
364 Left high beam headlight Left B2 (+) No F
equipment Short circuit E6119
Lamp High-beam A0621

Lighting Cable breakage E6115
365 Right high beam headlight Right B2 (+) No F
equipment Short circuit E6118
Lighting A0623
Blinker Left Blinker Left Japan Cable breakage
366 equipment B4 (+) H6318 F
Japan lamp Short circuit
optional Aus_15
Lighting A0623
Blinker Right Blinker Right Cable breakage
367 equipment B6 (+) H6317 F
Japan Japan lamp Short circuit
optional Aus_14
P5311
Lighting Low-beam
369 S6114 8 KB Cable breakage D26 (+,-) S6114 No F
equipment headlight switch
S_Ein_17
Page 34 of 36
structure Fault (F)
A0621
Lighting Low-beam
370 S6114 1 KS Short circuit A19 (+) S6114 No F
equipment headlight
S_Ein_14
P5311
Lighting
371 S6115 2 KS Lever Blinker Left Short circuit D15 (+) S6115 No F
equipment
S_Ein_21
P5311
Lighting
372 S6115 3 KS Lever Blinker Right Short circuit D23 (+) S6115 No F
equipment
S_Ein_22
A0621
Lighting Low-beam Short circuit to
376 S6114 1 + KS A19 (+,-) S6114 No F
equipment headlight switch plus
S_Ein_14
A0621
Lighting Low-beam
377 S6114 1 1 KB Cable breakage A19 (+,-) S6114 No F
equipment headlight switch
S_Ein_14
A0621
378 S6114 5 + KS A17 (+) S6114 No F
equipment headlight switch plus
S_Ein_15
A0621
379 S6114 5 - KS A17 (+) S6114 No F
equipment headlight switch earth
S_Ein_15
A0621
380 S6114 5 KB A17 (+) S6114 No F
equipment headlight switch earth
S_Ein_15
A0621
381 B0420 KB Fuel Main tank Cable breakage D14 B0420 No F
A_Ein_02
P5311
Fuel Additional tank
optional switch on pump
S_Ein_28
P5311
optional switch off pump
S_Ein_27
Page 35 of 36
structure Fault (F)
P5311
D8 (+,-)
S_Ein_28
386 S0420 PL Implausibility S0420 F
optional switch
P5311
D14 (+,-)
S_Ein_27
Switch level diesel A0623
Fuel Short circuit to S0421
387 S0421 KS min in additional A13 (-) F
optional plus S0422A
tank S_Ein_17
A0621
Fuel Diesel pump at Cable breakage
388 M3111A 2a (+) M3111A F
optional additional tank Short circuit
Aus_09
Activation
A0621
Activation OPM Operating Mode operating mode Cable breakage
751 A22 (+) K702 F
UW System selection switch Short circuit
Aus_01
driver's cab
Operating Mode
752 OperatingMode F
System
Operating Mode
754 OperatingMode F
System
Operating Mode
755 OperatingMode F
System
Operating Mode
756 OperatingMode F
System
Operating Mode
757 OperatingMode F
System
Operating Mode
758 OperatingMode F
System
Page 36 of 36
BMP-list shortcut 19.02.2008
Abkürzung Bezeichnung deutsch shortcut description english

deutsch english
ABK Abstützbedienkasten ABK Outrigger control box
ABS Anti-Blockier-System ABS Anti skid system
AD2 Ausgang Digital AD2 Output digital
ADM Adaptionsmodul ADM Adaption module
ADM2-FR Adaptionsmodul ADM2-FR Adaption module vehicle control
Fahrzeugregelung
CAN Netzwerk CAN Controller Area Network
CCVS Tempomat Fahrzeug CCVS Cruise Control Vehicle speed
Geschwindigkeit
DM1 Diagnosemeldung DM1 Diagnosis Message
DMUX Bildschirm im Armaturenbrett DMUX Thin film transistor (TFT) Display
EBS Elektronisches Bremssystem EBS Electronic brake system
ED Eingang digital ED Input digital
EDC Elektronischer Fahrregler EDC Electronic drive controller
EEC2_Road_S Elektronische Motorregelung EEC2_Road_S Electronic engine controller
EMOD Elektronikmodul EMOD Electronic module
ETC Elektronische Getrieberegelung ETC Electronic transmission controller
KB Kabelbruch CB cable break

KS Kurzschluss SC short circuit
HAL Hinterachslenkung RAS Rear axle steering
HaLK Hauptlenkkreis main SLC main steering circuit
HiLK Hilfslenkkreis help SLC auxiliary steering circuit
HL hinten links RL rear lest
HL H hinten links horizontal RL H rear left horizontal
HL V hinten links vertikal RL V rear left vertical
HP Hohe Priorität HP High priority
HR hinten rechts RR rear right
HR H hinten rechts horizontal RR H rear right horizontal
HR V hinten rechts vertikal RR V rear right vertical
ICAN I-Netzwerk ICAN I-Controller Area Network
ID Adresse ID Identity
LIM Begrenzer LIM Limiter
LP niedrige Priorität LP Low priority
MCAN Multiplex CAN MCAN Multiplex CAN
MOKI "Armaturenbrett" MOKI Dash board
MUX Multiplex MUX Multiplex
niO nicht in Ordnung NOK not OK
NLP Notlenkpumpe SLC Emergency pump
OW Oberwagen SS Superstructure
PDM Prozessdatenmodul PDM Process data module
PL Plausibilität PL Plausibility
PTO Nebenabtrieb PTO Power take off
RET Retarder RET Retarder
RET AD3 Retarder Ausgang digital RET AD3 Retarder output digital
SLC_IO Sicherheitslenkcomputer SLC_IO Steering computer input/output
Eingang/Ausgang
TCO Tachograph TCO Tacho
UHL unabhängige Hinterachslenkung UHL independent rear wheel steering
UW Unterwagen Carrier
VG Verteilergetriebe DG Distributer gear box
VL vorn links FL Front left
VL H vorn links horizontal FL H Front left horizontal
VL V vorn links vertikal FL V Front left vertical
VR vorn rechts FR Front right
Seite 1 von 2

BMP-Liste Abkürzungen 19.02.2008
Abkürzung Bezeichnung deutsch shortcut description english

deutsch english
VR H vorn rechts horizontal FR H Front right horizontal
VR V vorn rechts vertikal FR V Front right vertical
WK Warnkontakt WC Warning contact
WL Warnleuchte WL Warning light
ZR Zentralrechner ZR Central computer
Seite 2 von 2

1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

Meldeleuchten Sperren Achsen Niveau
Prio 3
Prio 2 . . .
Prio 1
Lenkung Antrieb
. .
. .
R-
Gang

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6
Panel Prio 2
015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6
Panel
015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6
Panel Prio 1
015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6
Panel zurück
015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6
Copyright 2010 TEREX ® Panel

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6
Copyright 2010 TEREX ® Prio 2 Prio 1 Panel

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
01 : 05 012
1 4
01 : 00
< 2 003
5 M
02 : 05 015
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
00 : 00 012
1 4
00 : 00
< 2 003
5 M
00 : 00 015
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 Kamera: ja 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

015 24 . 12 . 02
02 : 05 09 : 30
1 Kamera: Nein 4
< 2 5 M
3 6

Service Training AC120-1 … AC200-1
Teleskop / Main Boom
(1) (2)
(3)
Beispiel / example : Tele 6 von / from 0% auf / to 45%

Bedingungen Näherungsschalter/ Prox.switches
Zustand / situation SVE / Position Sichern Position verbolzen Kastenerkennung
Conditions LPD locking pinning section identify
vor / in nach/ vor / in nach/
B9156 front of behind front of behind
verbolzt / entsichert B9157 B9160
B9164 B9165 B9180 B9181
B9158 B9161
pinned / unlocked
B9168 B9162
B9164 B9165 B9180 B9181
B9169 B9163
gesichert / verbolzt B9157 B9160
B9164 B9165 B9180 B9181
B9158 B9161
locked / pinned
B9168 B9162
B9164 B9165 B9180 B9181
B9169 B9163
gesichert / entbolzt B9157 B9160
B9164 B9165 B9180 B9181
B9158 B9161
locked / unpinned
B9168 B9162
B9164 B9165 B9180 B9181
B9169 B9163
Service Training SVE Zustände.doc

Service Training AC200-1
Main boom
Pinning positions
Tele 1 Position = 0 % = 0.06 m

Tele 1 Position = 100 % = 9.342 m
Tele 2 Position = 100 % = 9.506 m
Tele 3 Position = 100 % = 9.728 m
Tele 4 Position = 100 % = 9.930 m
Tele 5 Position = 100 % = 10.093 m
Tele 6 Position = 100 % = 10.093 m
Service Training JC AC200-1 Verbolzungspositionen e.doc

Pressure settings AC 160-1 / 200-1
1. Overview hydraulic beam
3-way hydraulic control block

Y 9125 supply SVE
Y 9311/12 cabin tilt
Y 8230/31 rigging HW2 Pinning SS / Carrier
Valves and pressure relief

Counter weight
Pressure transducers
LS1 & LS2
P1 & P2
Main block
Hoist
Telescope
Luffing
Accumulator and measuring point

Control pressure
Swing
open / closed circuit
Y 8815 / Y 8816
Cut off valves

Y 8000
Y 8014
Y 8015
Block Hoist 2
Seite 1 von 11

2. Bleeding the pressure transducer (pumps seperated).
(The pressure is set with warm oil (>40°C).)
B 3282 B 3292 B 3291 B 3281
Pump pressure 2 LS pressure 2 LS pressure 1 Pump pressure 1
Bleed pump pressure and LS pressure 2 with raising hoist 1.

Bleed pump pressure and LS pressure 1 with luffing up.
After bleeding crosscheck the pressure with a proper gauge. The measurement on the Dlog and
on the manometer should be the same.
Seite 2 von 11

Setting the Stand-by pressure (pumps separated)
Minimum flow
setting Pump 2
Minimum flow
setting Pump 2
The stand-by pressure is set between 5 and 10bar (read off the Dlog; pump pressure)
Y 3152 Pump 2
Setting
starting output
of pump 2
Setting
starting output
of pump 1
Y 3151 Pump 1
The starting output of the pump is set to 200mA. When sensitively moving the Joystick
and the pump pressure increasing (at e.g. 160mA) with the LS-pressure staying 0bar, the
starting output is set wrong. Correct the adjustment.
Seite 3 von 11

4. Setting the pressure relief of the block (Pumps separated, Y9104 without power)
LS 1 secondary cut off

350bar
Pressure relief
Y 9312 luffing up 320 bar
Pressure relief Tele

extend 230 bar
Spool valve stroke limitation
P 2 primary cut off LS 2 secondary cut off

380 bar 350 bar
4.1 Set Primary pressure relief Pump 2 with Hoist 1 up. Unplug Y8115 (Brake hoist 1)
and raise the secondary pressure relief (LS2). Set the primary pressure to 380bar.
(pressure reading in Dlog P2)
4.2 Set Secondary pressure relief LS2 with hoist 1 up to 350bar. (pressure reading in
Dlog LS2)
Main block rear view
Pressure relief hoist

down 140 bar
Pump 1 primary Pressure relief Tele

pressure relief 380 retract 240 bar
bar
4.3 Set pressure relief of hoist down to 140bar (pressure reading in Dlog LS2). Block the
brake line hydraulically on the lowering brake valve.
Seite 4 von 11

4.4 Set pressure relief Pump 1 with luffing up. Drive luffing cylinder completely up,
increase the pressure relief of luffing up, increase the secondary pressure relief
(LS1). Then set the primary pressure relief to 380bar. (pressure reading in Dlog P1)
4.5 Set secondary pressure relief LS1 with luffing up to 350bar einstellen. (pressure
reading in Dlog LS1)
4.6 Set pressure relief of luffing up to 320bar (pressure reading in Dlog LS1).
4.7 Set pressure relief Tele extend to 230bar. Lock and Pin the SVE manually in the first
section. (pressure reading in Dlog LS1).
4.8 Set pressure relief of tele retract to 240bar. Lock and Pin the SVE manually in the first
section. (pressure reading in Dlog LS2).
The control pressure is not adjustable. A measuring point is at the accumulator.

Check the pressure 35 – 45 bar.
Accumulator pSt;
320ccm, 15bar
Measuring point pSt
5. Swing
Secondary pressure relief

280 bar Swing Pump
Seite 5 von 11

Measuring point
Swing Pump
The pressure relief is set with closed circuit. (Y8815 & Y8816 engaged). To set, drive the
swing against the dynamic brake (foot pedal) and set to 280bar. Measure the pressure
either at the pump or at the swing motor (Ma left, Mb right)
6. Setting of SS / carrier pinning
Y0961
Pressure relief valve 30 bar

SS/carrier pinning
Measuring point
SS/carrier pinning
Pressure relief 30bar only when pinning SS/carrier (Y0961 engaged). Adjust with idle
speed.
7. Counterweight

Counterweight down

GGW raise
Measuring point Measuring point

Counterweight raise Counterweight lower
Seite 6 von 11

The settings of the counterweight pressure takes place with 1500 rpm of the diesel
engine. Because the PLC expects 200bar in the automatic mode, it is possible that the
adjusted 200bar are not enough. In this case, raise the pressure for raising the cylinders
to 210 bar. (The counterweight cylinders are supplied from pump 2)
Pressure transducer 400 bar,

4-20mA
Counterweight up
Switching point in automatic
mode is 200 bar
Seite 7 von 11

8. 3-way valve bank for 16ccm gear pump, cabin tilt, feeder valve and rigging aid hoist2
(to adjust with 1000 rpm)
Bolt to mechanically
operate Y9125

(Y9125) feeder valve SVE
Primary cut off 175 bar,

16ccm Pump

Rigging aid hoist 2

Tilt cabin
Measuring point
Cut off 175 bar
Y 9312 Y 8231
Y 9125
Y 9311 Y 8230
8.1 Primary pressure relief175 bar of Pump

To set the primary pressure relief you have to take off the plug from Y9125. Then
increase the pressure of tilt cabin to 200 bar. Now set the pressure relief to 175 bar.
8.2 Set the pressure relief of tilt cabin to 100 bar.
8.3 Set rigging aid hoist 2 to 35 bar.
8.4 Set the feeder valve (Y9125 ) to 90 bar (90bar to 87bar, not higher then 90bar). To
adjust, manually push the valve 9125. Wait for the charging of the valve when using the
SVE. It should start charging at 76 bar and stop charging at 85bar.Observe in the Dlog.
Seite 8 von 11

9. Pressure relief valve SVE pinning 35 bar
Pin the first section at and retract the SVE. Open the cover at the base of the boom.
Manually pin and measure the pressure at measuring point 3.
DBV 35 bar
Measuring point
10. Setting the pressure for lowering brake valve luffing cylinder
Measuring point MX
Opening pressure 25bar
lowering brake valve
Pressure relief valve

Opening pressure 25bar
lowering brake valve
Set the opening pressure 25bar with maximum lowering speed (best with 1000mA on the
proportional valve).
Seite 9 von 11

11. Setting the pressure for hoist 2
Pressure relief
140 bar hoist 2 lower
Set the pressure relief for hoist 2 lower to 140bar. (pressure reading in Dlog LS2). Block
the brake line hydraulically on the lowering brake valve.
12. Lowering brake valve hoist with By-Pass (from SBV – produktion number 04005199
the By-Pass is internal)
Internal By-Pass is to
close
Lockvalve with
connection MD to MA
Nozzle body with

2,5mm nozzle
Seite 10 von 11

13. Hydraulic emergency control
Measuring point 230 bar
Cock valve for swing

direction when hyd.
emergency

control pressure hyd.
emergency
Measuring point 35 bar

control pressure hyd.
emergency
13.1 Set pressure relief 230bar (220bar to 230bar) best when driving against dynamic
swing brake.
13.2 The control pressure is set at 35±5bar .
Seite 11 von 11

CAN BUS
1
CAN BUS
(Controller Area Network)
This system was developed by the German
Company BOSCH 1987. CAN is a serial bus
system for net-working smart sensors, actuators
and subsystems. A bus is a network topology or
circuit arrangement in which all devices are
attached to a line directly and all signals pass
trough each of the devices.
2
CAN – Bus description
CAN CAN
MICRO MICRO
CHIP CHIP
NODE ‘A’ (SENDER) NETWORK NODE ‘B’ (RECEIVER)
3
Physical Network layout
TOPOLOGY= Structure of all components in the network
Point-to-Point Star Ring Loop Linear Bus Tree
TRANSFER MEDIUM = Components who transferring the data physical
 In Vehicles and Construction machines always connected via Bus cable (J1939
and CAN open).
Other methods' like Fiber optic, radio waves, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are possible.
4
J1939-11 Cable layout
J1939-11 Twisted, shielded cable
CAN GND CAN-Cable

[Pin 3 black] according to J1939
Specs. Need 120
Ohm Impedanz.
+UB Pin2 (red)
Power supply What is
Impedanz?
CAN Low
[Pin 5 blue] Note: It is
Rubber
impossible to
check Impedanz
CAN High with an
Shield Pin 1 [Pin 4 white
Multimeter!
5
Cable-Impedanz
Correct Impedanz has always the right
resistance according to the message
volume.
Incorrect Impedanz will result in an

“accident”. Messages will be lost or
encrypted.
Reasons for Impedanz Error Frames:
 Wrong Cable
 Damaged or kinked cable
 Missing shield inside the Can cable.
 Difference between the Can knots to far.
6
Shield
The “J1939” Cable is an specially designed cable for
the Can-open system. Sometimes it is also called as
the “heavy cable”.
PRO  Protect the signals. Errors will be transmitted to the ground via the shield.
 Reducing the volume of the produced “emitted” errors.
 Cable very expensive  Hard to repair in the field.

CON  Not rely flexible, hart to bend.  If cable damaged, need to be replaced.
The shield only can have one connecting to the ground. If

more connections to the ground could cause problems.
The shield have to be connected on every pin to the right

location.
7
J1939 ‘Lite’ cable
This Can cable is designed for the communication
between engines and transmissions. This cable have
no shield!
 Because of no shield this cable is more sensitive for external interference.
‘Lite’ cable should not

be close to:
 Solenoid valves.
 Relays
 Turn signals, lights
 Starter, electric motors
 Alternators'
 Radio frequency's, etc.
8
Termination end resistors
Two 120 Ohm resistors are closing the loop It is also possible to use 120
for the Can open cable. Ohm resistors inside plugs
(Receptacles).
To reduce costs and parts some suppliers are using those resistors inside
plugs or electronic boxes. (INTERNAL TERMINATION RESISTOR).
9
CAN-Plug layout
5 Pin Male 5 Pin Female
Front view Front view
4 3 1- GND (Schield) 3 4
2- red (+UB)
5 3- black (Can Gnd) 5
4- white (Can H)
1 2 2 1
5- blue (Can L)
10
Why do we need
Termination Resistors ?
 Because of the REFLECTIONS. In a normal datalink trace, the
bit states are well defined.
 Electricity is moving fast: ca.300.000 km/s.
 Reflections appear if electric impulses touching one

end of a cable, like waves in a swimming pool.
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
 Termination Resistors working like a shock absorber
and determine the reflection of the impulses.
 Without termination resistors the impulses would With no termination resistors,

move uncontrolled in the Can bus and could stop the bits states are unclear!
all communications.
Extreme high density inside a Bus system is

typically for defect or missing end resistors.. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
11
The Can Bus layout
2,4 – 2,9 V
CAN High
120 Ohm AO 701 60 Ohm 120 Ohm

AO 703
Resistor Master Resistor
CAN Low
2,2 – 2,7 V
12
Oscilloscope- View
Yellow Line CAN CAN High ~3.5V
High (Pin ‘A’).
~2.5V
~2.5V
CAN Low ~1.5V
Green Line CAN
Low (Pin ‘B’).
4 S
Characteristic
 CAN High and CAN Low are producing an differential input signal.
 Voltage differences are very low, a proximity  1.0 volt.
 The Voltage sequence are square and have two conditions. ( 0 -1, 1-0 )
 The Condition sequence (0-1) are changing over in 4 microseconds, see above.
13
Bus Status
Dominant State
Information's are transferred with the
Binary system.
Recessive State
BINARY SYSTEM:
Only situations 0 and 1 are possible,

which are named “Dominant” and
“Recessive”.
Why ? Because Computer systems are only working with the Binary system.
Switch is on or off, digital.
Situation: 1 or 0.
14
What can
we check
with the
Multimeter ?
15
Measurements on CAN BUS
with digital multimeter – part 1
Note:
All described measurements are done with a digital multimeter. The actual values are
measured between the appropriate pins and compared with specified values.
With this measurement the wiring and the interfaces are included.
1. Ignition off. All control units have to be connected.

2. Connect the socket box.
3. Adjust digital multimeter to resistance (Ω)
Measurement Specified Actual value Possible cause

between value
approx. 0 Ω Short circuit from CAN_H to
CAN_L
CAN_H red probe
and Ca. 60 Ω approx. Connection to the end resistor is
120 Ω cut off
CAN_L black probe
approx. ∞ Ω End resistors cut off or damaged
16
Measurements on CAN BUS
with digital multimeter – part 2
1. Ignition off. All control units have to be connected.
2. Connect the socket box.
3. Adjust digital multimeter to voltage.
4. Switch on the ignition.
Measurement Specified Actual value Possible cause
between value
Short circuit from CAN_H to U
CAN_H red probe approx. 24 V
batt.
and
Short circuit from CAN_H to
ground black 2,4 V – 2,9 V approx. 0 V ground
probe
0 V – 2,3 V Short circuit from CAN_H to
3,0 V – 24 V arbitrary potential
Short circuit from CAN_L to U
approx. 24 V
CAN_L red probe batt.
and 2,2 V – Short circuit from CAN_L to

approx. 0 V
ground black 2,7 V ground
probe 0 V – 2,1 V Short circuit from CAN_L to
2,8 V – 24 V arbitrary potential
17
Intermittent Error Frames
 An well engineered and designed CAN Bus system will have NO Error frames.
 Disturbing signals (Inducted noise) leading to INTERMITTENT ERROR
FRAMES.
 Often most situations depending for example Solenoid valve, electric motor etc.
 With the right Software and CAN Card it is possible to show Error frames.
 If the systems have problems and Error frames just perform the “Monkey
Test”. :
Ignition ON: Switch on all the functions' in the Cabin, one after the
other….Lights, AC, Radio etc.
Start Motor: Same procedure as above, now energize all systems on the
Crane.
 If Errors appear please check the wiring harness or cable connections close to
the component switched on last.
18
10
64
Z 200 379
2/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10 Safety Equipment
(Z 200 379)
−You can determine the software status of the IC−1 in the system
screen (201.1) in the Quick menu (E12) (see section 10.1.7.1 on
page 43).
10.1 Electronic Crane Information System

The electronic crane information system IC−1 (Intelligent
Control System) (64) combines several devices which supply
the crane operator with important information for operating the
crane within the parameters set by the manufacturer:
− Device for overload safety (load limit device LLD).

− Telescoping information system (see section 12).
− Display of several crane configurations such as e.g. support
pressure, tilt, crane configuration, load capacities, etc.
− Warning (optical and acoustic) when prohibited conditions
arise.
The crane information system used (incl. load limit device) is an

operating help. It supplies the crane operator with important
information concerning crane data such as e.g. length and angle
of the boom, sheave head height, nominal load capacity, the total
load hanging from the boom, etc. and warns when an overload
state is being approached or when the hook block is nearing the
boom head.
This safety device is no substitute for judgement and

experience of the crane operator or application of
recognised safe working procedures for crane operation.
The crane operator is not relieved of his responsibility for
safe crane operation.
200−1−1100−286c_en
3/151
10
64
Z 200 379
4/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 200 379)
If, when raising a load or lowering the main boom with load the
permissible load moment / the permissible load is exceeded, the
load moment increasing movements as well as ”raise luffing
gear“ and ”raise load on hook“ are switched off. ”Lower load on
hook“ is permitted.
Load moment deactivation should only be activated in

exceptional cases. It must never be used for normal
operation.
Before raising a load its weight must be known. The safety device
may not be used to calculate the weight.
The load limit device must be set by the crane operator for
the individual crane configuration. This means that the
crane operator must change the load limit device as well
when the crane configuration is changed.
The crane operator is responsible for the correct setting by
acknowledging the crane configuration.
The load limit device functions automatically only when
each setting has been adjusted correctly.
The load limit device can be monitored using the overload

recorder (optional). See section 10.1.7.17, page 89.
200−1−1100−286c_en
5/151
10
64
Z 200 379
6/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 200 379)
The load may only be picked up using the hoist during hook
operation.
If the load is still in contact with the ground and the raising
of the hoist was turned off, the load is too heavy. The
movement “raise main boom” may not be enabled!
“Raise main boom” must never be used to raise the load!
It is essential for the operating safety of the crane that the

IC−1 crane control functions in its original condition.
Necessary updates can be obtained in the after−sales
service department of the crane manufacturer.
Risk of crushing!
Despite using automatic safety devices, swinging of the

load cannot always be avoided during shutdown!
It can only be avoided by adjusting the acceleration / speed
of all crane movements!
Also take note of the continuous load utilisation display
with preliminary warning at 90 % of the permissible load
utilisation prior to switch−off!
Danger of influencing the crane control!

The danger that the load limit device is influenced by
high−frequency radiation is minimised as far as the
technology allows it (shields). However, it cannot be totally
excluded, particularly under extreme conditions such as
e.g. proximity to very powerful transmitters.
200−1−1100−286c_en
7/151
10
64.1 64.11
64.2 64.12
64.3 64.13
64.4 64.14
64.5 64.15
62 64.6 64.16
64.7
64
64.10 Z 200 380
8/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.1 Operating and Display Elements

(Z 200 380)
(62) Ignition start switch:

Position ’1’ All consumers are switched off
Position ’2’ Ready for ignition:
External starting procedure
Position ’3’ The ignition is switched on
Position ’4’ Starting position for engine
(64) Visualisation computer (DloG) with touchscreen display

see for this section 10.1.2.
Depending on the design of the visualisation computer (DloG), it

will have the following devices for operation and display:
(64.1) On / off Switch

If the IC−1 needs to be rebooted: to do so: Switch off the
ignition (switch ignition start switch A 11 to position ’1’);
wait for at least 30 seconds, press switch for at least 3
seconds; switch the ignition back on (switch ignition start
switch A 11 to position ’3’)
(64.2) Brightness “+” (manual)
(64.3) Brightness “−” (manual)
(64.4) not assigned
(64.5) Temperature warning
If the temperature in the computer is smaller than 05 C (325 F) the
LED illuminates red and the computer is heated internally. When
the temperature is more than 05 C (325 F) the computer then
starts automatically. The heating procedure can take between
one and eight minutes, depending on the outside temperature.
The computer is ready for operation as soon as the red LED
(Temp, 64.5) goes out and the green LED (Power, 64.7) lights up.
If the operating and display element cancels the operation
(monitor goes black) and at the same time the temperature
warning light comes on, then the ambient temperature may be
too high. The cab will then need to be cooled down with the air
conditioner. As soon as the temperature has once again fallen to
an acceptable level, the operating and display element will
attempt once again to dial into the CAN network.
(64.6) Hard disk access
(64.7) Operating condition
200−1−1100−286c_en
9/151
10
64.1 64.11
64.2 64.12
64.3 64.13
64.4 64.14
64.5 64.15
62 64.6 64.16
64.7
64
64.10 Z 200 380
1 2
Z 56 172
10/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 200 380)
(64.10) USB ports
(64.11) Moves the mouse pointer up
(64.12) Moves the mouse pointer down
(64.13) Moves the mouse pointer to the left
(64.14) Moves the mouse pointer to the right
(64.15) On / off Switch for key mouse control
(64.16) Causes a mouse click (touch)
Attaching stick−on labels to the screen will cause damage to

it.
10.1.2 Operation of the IC−1

(Z 200 380, Z 56 172)
In this system, all functions are operated by ”touching” the

illustrated switches or surfaces, i.e. all settings of the safety
equipment are carried out entirely via the monitor (64).
By touching an active switch surface, a selection window for

parameter selection is opened (3) or the display switches to a
further selection window.
When a selection window is opened, a list of selection options is
opened in upward or downward direction next to the selected
button. One of the options must be selected from the selection
list. If the set value is not to be modified, then the previous value
must be selected again from the selection list.
The values displayed for selection are always dependent on the

previously selected settings. This means if, for example, crane
operation without main boom extension is selected, then no
values for parameter settings with main boom extension will be
offered. These switches will only appear in ”grey”. All parameters
that can be set appear on a switch with a black frame.
200−1−1100−286c_en
11/151
10
1 2
Z 56 172
12/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 56 172)
The following applies:
Floppy Memory symbol: selected setting is saved,

disk and the display is changed (2)
Exit symbol: the display is left without
Door
saving the modified settings (1)
The displayed values must be changed or
”Red”
at least confirmed, otherwise the settings
entries
cannot be saved for crane operation.
Operation at ambient temperatures in excess of 50C

(1225F).
To avoid malfunctioning of the crane controls display, the air

conditioner should be used to cool the cabin both before and
during crane operations when ambient temperatures are in
excess of 50°C (1225F). Direct sunlight should then be avoided
on the display.
An appropriate cooling−down stage should be prescribed if
necessary for the period before work begins.
200−1−1100−286c_en
13/151
10
1
74.4 t 8,50 m 1
2a
Z 60 358
1
74.4 t 8,50 m 1
1 11.8 t
74.4 t
8,50
Z 60 359
14/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.3 System Start / Switching the System off
The IC−1 is automatically started when the ignition is switched

on. At the same time, a system check is made automatically.
Momentary ”error” displays appearing during the automatic

check serve to test the functional reliability of the system, and are
of no importance to you.
Initialisation of the monitor

(Z 60 358 principle diagram, Z 60 359 principle diagram)
The monitor is initialised by the CAN bus master on the CAN bus
after the system has been started. Depending on the
temperature of the computer (monitor), the display of the
previously set crane status with the ”Initiate CAN ...” screen
positioned above it appears after an appropriate warm−up time.
The (2a) symbol means that the computer is receiving data from
the CAN bus.
The “Initiate CAN ...” screen automatically closes after a

successful initialisation − The “Operating mode selection”
(Z 60 359 principle diagram) screen appears. The header (1)
colour changed from red to blue; the CAN status changed from
“STOP” to “OK”.
The CAN status can have the following conditions:

STOP crane operation not permissible
a subscriber is missing, but not relevant
OK crane operation permissible
If the initialisation does not follow, proceed as described starting

on page 19.
200−1−1100−286c_en
15/151
10
1
74.4 t 8,50 m 1
1 11.8 t
74.4 t
8,50
Z 60 359
Z 200 645
16/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
If the assembly or operating condition remains unchanged, the

screen can be exited via .
If the assembly or operating condition has been changed, then

the specifications in the screen must be adjusted accordingly. In
order to be able to transfer the modifications to the control
system, the screen must be exited in this case via .
In both cases, the ”Crane operation” screen then appears

(Z 200 645 principle diagram).
A detailed description on operating mode selection can be found
in section 10.1.7.4, from page 47, and in the “Crane operating
mask” in section 10.1.6, from page 31.
The starting point for employing the IC−1 functions are mainly the
“Crane operating mask, (Z 200 645 principle depiction)” − and in
that specifically the area “E”, the mask “Quick menu” (from
page 39) − and the mask “Main menu (see section 10.1.5, from
page 27).
Using these screens the desired functions can be selected by

calling up the corresponding submenus (see section 10.1.7, from
page 43).
200−1−1100−286c_en
17/151
10
74.4 t 8,50 m 1
2a
3
Z 60 360 Z 60 361
1
74.4 t 8,50 m 1
Z 60 365
18/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Initialisation does not follow − no connection to CAN bus

master
(Z 60 360 principle diagram, Z 60 361 principle diagram,

Z 60 365 principle diagram)
If the monitor is not initialised by the CAN bus master, the

progress display (3) runs to the end.
The CAN status is at “STOP”.
The (2a) symbol means that the computer is receiving data from
the CAN bus. It is thus lacking the Guarding signal from the bus
master (PLC A0621).
This state leads to fault message E 102 (Z 60 361 principle

diagram). There is no fault message on the screen.
The “Initiate CAN ...” screen does not close automatically. The
two keys and ”CAN reset” (Z 60 360 principle diagram)
become active and must be actuated manually:
1st option: actuate ”CAN reset”: the initialisation is restarted. If

that does not work:
2nd option: actuate: The (Z 60 365 principle diagram)

screen for selecting the operating mode appears with a red
header (1) and the CAN status is at “STOP”. No crane operation
is permitted. In this state, the (Z 60 365 principle diagram) screen
cannot be exited by pressing the key, it can only be exited
by pressing the key.
The present error must be found and corrected − e.g. with help
from the diagnostics screen after exiting the (Z 60 365 principle
diagram) screen by pressing .It is only then that the
initialisation can be restarted.
200−1−1100−286c_en
19/151
10
1
74.4 t 8,50 m 1
2b
Z 60 362
Z 60 363
20/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Initialisation does not follow − no CAN bus signal

If the monitor does not receive data from the CAN bus, the
“Initiate CAN ...” screen appears as seen in the picture (Z 60 362
principle diagram).
The CAN status is at “STOP”.
The (2b) symbol means that there is a disconnection.
This state leads to fault message E 101 (Z 60 363 principle

diagram).
Possible causes are:

− Complete bus failure
− Disconnection, physical error in CAN bus system.
As long as the crane can be driven with active jumper switches,

i.e. the CAN bus functions, the following errors could be present:
− loose CAN plug connection to the monitor
− disconnection in the cable to the monitor
− defective CAN card in the monitor
The “Initiate CAN ...” screen does not close automatically.

Proceed as described on the previous page.
200−1−1100−286c_en
21/151
10
Z 200 101
22/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Switching off (Power Control)

(Z 200 101)
When the electric power supply fails, or after switching off the
ignition, the display changes automatically to the ”Power control”
screen. The remaining time (starting at 15 min.) up to switching
off the computer is displayed here. If the ignition is switched on
again within this time, the display changes directly to the
”Operating mode selection” screen. IC−1 is immediately ready for
use again.
The ignition can be checked after three minutes. If the ignition is

switched on and then switched off directly after, it can take
approx. three minutes until the ”Power control” screen is
selected.
200−1−1100−286c_en
23/151
10
E11
D18
Z 56 175
24/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.4 Menu Display

To operate the crane, the main menu and the crane operation
screen are primarily used.
Some submenus can only be selected at the main menu and
some can only be selected at the crane operation screen.
Some submenus can only be selected at the main menu and
some can only be selected at the crane operation screen.
The actual main menu is explained at 10.1.5.
The crane operation screen is described under 10.1.6.
The selectable submenus are described under 10.1.7.
(Z 56 175)
By pressing the ”E11” button in the crane operation screen, the

display switches to the main menu.
By pressing the ”202.1” button in the main menu, the display

switches to the crane operation screen.
To exit subdisplays or submenus that do not offer storage or exit

options (e.g. display of outrigger pressure) the ”D18” button is
used in the crane operation screen.
200−1−1100−286c_en
25/151
10
201:
201.1 201.2
202:
202.1 202.2 202.3 202.4 202.5
203:
203.1 203.2 203.3 203.4 203.5
204:
204.1 204.2 204.3 204.4 204.5 204.6
Z 57 684
26/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.5 Main menu

(Z 58 684)
The main menu is the central point of access for crane

application. From here you can call up the display screens listed
below. The relevant screen is called up by pressing the buttons.
The name, time and version number of the software are
displayed in the top section of the screen.
201 System settings
System screen (user settings) (see section

201.1
10.1.7.1 on page 43).
Switches background lighting off. The
201.2 background illumination is switched on by
pressing on the screen centre.
202 Crane operation
Crane operation screen (LLD) see section

202.1
10.1.6 from page 31;
Operating mode preselection screen (load
202.2
tables) (see section 10.1.7.4 on page 47)
Opens the dialogue ”fault message” (see
202.3
section 10.1.7.5 on page 55)
Opens the pop−up to select the control
202.4 level assignment, e.g. for hoist 2 (see
section 10.1.7.6 on page 57).
Operating hours display (see section
202.5
10.1.7.7 on page 59)
200−1−1100−286c_en
27/151
10
201:
201.1 201.2
202:
202.1 202.2 202.3 202.4 202.5
203:
203.1 203.2 203.3 203.4 203.5
204:
204.1 204.2 204.3 204.4 204.5 204.6
Z 57 684
28/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 57 684)
203 Service
Parameter screen. Setting of the crane

203.1 functions, e.g. slewing gear (see section
10.1.7.8 on page 61)
Opens the dialogue for crane information
203.2
(see section 10.1.7.9 on page 65)
Activation and deactivation of the function
203.3 Emergency operation (optional) (see
section 36)
Operating range limits screen: Setting of a

203.4 set operating range (see section 10.1.7.11
on page 67).
Hoist data logger (optional): This is where
the stored hoist data can be read off using
203.5
the USB port. (see section 10.1.7.12 on
page 73)
204 Diagnosis
Diagnosis joystick (see section 10.1.7.13 on

204.1
page 77)
Diagnosis all control inputs / outputs (see
204.2
Diagnosis CAN bus (see section 10.1.7.15
204.3
on page 79)
Diagnosis load−sensing (see section
204.4
10.1.7.16 on page 87).
Data logger mask (optional): The written
204.5 crane data is displayed here (see section
10.1.7.17 on page 89)
Call up the screen “function diagnosis“ (see
204.6
Depending on the design of the display, the indicated functions

are assigned to the buttons. As soon as the desired crane
parameters have been selected, the display is exited after
confirming or saving. Functions which are not enabled although
available as an option are displayed in “grey”.
200−1−1100−286c_en
29/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 174
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A 12
B C
D E
Z 550 040
30/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.6 Crane Operation Screen (Main Menu: 202.1)

(Z 56 174)
The crane operating mask is the display for normal work with
the crane.
The load limit device screen (crane operating screen) is divided

into five areas. The positions ”A” to ”D” are already specified.
Position ”E”, in contrast, can be assigned various free panels as
required.
All current and selected crane parameters are indicated in this

display. Further crane settings can be activated or other crane
information can be called up by calling up the quick menu.
(Z 550 040)
(A) − Current configuration information

1 Designation of the type of operating mode:
HA− Main boom
HAV − Main boom extension
MS− Runner
2 Counterweight
3 Outrigger span / standing on wheels
4 Reeving number
5 Longitudinal code no. LC
6 Pinning state superstructure / chassis
7 CAN bus status
8 Permissible rotation range
9 Assignment of the pilot control sensor
10 Warning buzzer
After the warning buzzer sounds out, it can be
acknowledged by pressing the loudspeaker symbol, and is
switched off in doing so.
If new criteria is added which would cause the warning buzzer to

sound the warning buzzer goes off again.
11 Time display
12 Software version
200−1−1100−286c_en
31/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 174
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1
8.2
30
29 9
28
10
27
11
26
12
25 13
24 14
15
23
16
22
17
21 20 19 18
Z 57 675
32/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 56 174, Z 56 675)
(B) − Display of the max. load, the current load and the current
radius. By pressing the net button, the current load is
tared.
For erecting in longitudinal code (LC 1), the rigging sym-
bol is displayed instead of a maximum load. Raising of
loads is not permissible (see section 10.1.10 on page
105).
(C) − Continuously changing indication of the current crane

utilisation as a ’bar display’ with shown percentage
screen / overload screen.
For loading in longitudinal code (LC 1), the whole field
(C) is shown in red with stars instead of the bar display 3
stars are displayed in the red field. Raising of loads is not
permissible (see section 10.1.10 on page 105).
Load Bar of the load utilization display
Normal range Load utilization display (C) is green
(below 90%)
Prewarning Load utilization display (C) becomes
range yellow
(90% − 100%)
Overload range Load utilization display (C) becomes red
(100%)
When the overload range has been reached the load limit device
switches off the load moment increasing movements and the
luffing gear is raised.
In addition to the displays of the load utilization display, further

acoustic and visual warning signals are emitted within and
outside of the crane operator’s cab. See segment 10.2 “Crane
control characteristics in relation to loading” (from page 117) in this
regard.
200−1−1100−286c_en
33/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 174
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1
8.2
30
29 9
28
10
27
11
26
12
25 13
24 14
15
23
16
22
17
21 20 19 18
Z 57 675
34/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 56 174, Z 56 675)
(D) − Here the current status information is displayed for the

crane condition (Z 57 675):
1 When a fault occurs the fault button is displayed.
2 Lower limit switches 1 + 2 (red = not bypassed,

black = bypassed).
3 Function emergency operation (optional) is active (see

section 36).
4 Load moment limit (red = not bypassed, black =

bypassed).
5 Warning support pressure
6 Display of current wind speed
7 Counterweight fitting surveillance bridged
8 Display of warning (8.1) or stop signals (8.2)
9 Tilt display
200−1−1100−286c_en
35/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 174
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1
8.2
30
29 9
28
10
27
11
26
12
25 13
24 14
15
23
16
22
17
21 20 19 18
Z 57 675
36/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 56 174; Z 57 675)
10 Operating range limit active. Can be deactivated by
acknowledgement.
11 Length main boom.
12 Max. main boom length
13 Display − HATZ diesel engine in operation (only for option:
hydraulic luffing main boom extension)
14 High speed
15 Display for rigging mode. Raising of loads is not
permissible, see section 10.1.10 on page 105.
16 Display slewing angle. When ”Slewing angle” is switched
off the text is displayed in red.(positive counting direction in
clockwise direction when seen from above).
17 Display: if open brake circuit of the slewing gear brake is
switched (see section 8 “Slewing the superstructure”).
18 Button for calling up the quick menu.
19 Radius indicator
20 Display of the relevant longitudinal codes and radius step
for the load limit device
21 Display min. / max. radius
22 Angle main boom
23 Display min. / max. main boom angle.
24 Movement of tele is only possible with bridging of LLD.
25 Head height
26 Radio remote control active Screen will not receive any
operating actions
27 Angle main boom head
28 Display − folding−out angle between the main boom
extension to the main boom (0° to 40°) (only for option:
hydraulic luffing main boom extension)
29 Display − angle of the main boom extension to the
horizontal (only for option: hydraulic luffing main boom
extension)
30 Hoist limit switch (red = not bypassed, black = bypassed)
200−1−1100−286c_en
37/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 174
E11 E12
E21 E22 E23 E24
E31 E34
E32 E33
E52 E53
E51 E54
E61 E62 E63 E64

Z 56 176
38/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 56 174, Z 56 176)
(E) − Quick menu:

In addition to the display mask of the main menu, further
masks can be called up here:
Main menu, refer to section 10.1.5, page

E11
27.
System screen, see section 10.1.7.1 on
E12
page 43.
Operating mode preselection screen, see
E21
section 10.1.7.4 on page 47.
Parameter screen, see section 10.1.7.8 on
E22
page 61.
Pilot control assignment, see section
E23
10.1.7.6 on page 57.
Operating range limits, see section
E24
10.1.7.11 on page 67.
Diagnosis control lever, see section
E31
10.1.7.13 on page 77.
Diagnosis all control inputs / outputs, see
E32
Diagnosis CAN bus, see section 10.1.7.15
E33
on page 79.
Diagnosis load−sensing system, see
E34
Telescoping information system, see
E51
section 12 ”Telescoping”
”Support pressure / inclination indicator”,
E52
see section 10.1.7.21 on page 93.
200−1−1100−286c_en
39/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 174
E11 E12
E21 E22 E23 E24
E31 E34
E32 E33
E52 E53
E51 E54
E61 E62 E63 E64

Z 56 176
40/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 56 174, Z 56 176)
Operation mode of the hydraulic pumps,

E53
see section 10.1.7.22 on page 95.
Movement assignment hydraulic pumps
E54 (together with ”E53”), see section 10.1.7.23
on page 97.
Display ”Active working area limitations“,
E61
see sect. 10.1.7.24 on page 97.
Switches to engine display, see section
E62
10.1.7.25 on page 97.
Display switches to mask: “Erect counter-

E63
weight”, see section 9 “Counterweight”
Display switches to mask: “HAVHY” to
control of the hydraulic main boom
E64
extension, see corresponding section 18
“Main boom extension” (optional)
200−1−1100−286c_en
41/151
10
Z 60 020
42/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7 Submenus
Description of the main menu’s submenus and of the crane
operation screen.
10.1.7.1 System Screen (Main Menu: 201.1) (Quick Menu: E12)
The following settings can be selected / changed:
(Z 60 020)
Language / Selection of language setting.
Sprache:
Unit / Einheit: Selection of unit depiction.
You can choose between the metric and the
imperial system.
Date / Datum: Setting option for the date.
Time / Zeit: Setting possibility for time
Audio: not allocated
Calibration / Crane application is ended by pressing the
Kalibrierung: button. After this, different items have to be
pressed on the display as prompted. After
the calibration has ended, the crane
application is automatically started.
The settings ’Demag Pin” as well as ”Server” are only accessible

for internal employees or customer services.
The following settings can only be selected:

APP: Version number of crane software.
OS−IPC Version number of operating system.
CPU−FAN− Display of the current ventilating fan speed.
RPM: Not possible with all devices. If the fan does
not have a tachometer, squares are
displayed on screen.
CPU: Display of the current IPC CPU
temperature.
Software: A pop−up dialogue is opened by activating
the button. The version numbers of all
configuration or parameter files are listed.
Save / Spei- If changes have been made to language,
chern: unit, date, time or audio, they must be
confirmed by activating the button.
200−1−1100−286c_en
43/151
10
44/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.2 Background Lighting (Main Menu: 201.2)
Switches background lighting off. The background

illumination is switched on by pressing on the screen centre.
10.1.7.3 Crane Operation Screen (Main Menu: 202.1)
see section 10.1.6 at page 31.
200−1−1100−286c_en
45/151
10
Z 56 187
Incorrect selection!
Z 56 186
46/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.4 Operating Mode Selection Mask (Main Menu: 202.2;

Quick Menu E21)
The individual rigging mode parameters are displayed and

set in the operation type preselection screen.
In the operation type preselection screen, you can choose

between the lifting capacity table view, the parameter view and
the search lifting load view. When the operation type preselection
window is selected, the parameter view is displayed first.
(Z 56 187)
Parameter view
The individual rigging mode parameters are displayed and

set in the parameter view. A ”crane symbol” (2) is displayed
on the tab.
If changing a parameter results in another parameter being
changed as well, the second parameter is displayed in red.
Values in red must be confirmed by the operator. This means
that you must press the button again.
If a configuration state parameter cannot be set due to the current

crane state, it is subsequently depicted with a red background.
In this case, there are two possible depiction options, depending
on the state of the crane control software:
− The symbol of the configuration state parameter appears
with a red background (here: crane configuration).
− The configuration state parameter appears with a red

background (abbreviation of the crane configuration in this
case: HA).
Selection options that contain only one parameter cannot be

changed.
If a parameter is displayed in red, the screen cannot be left by
saving. The info screen shown in figure Z 56 186 is then
displayed. ”Incorrect selection!”
The previously set configuration state is disregarded when you
leave using Exit. The screen automatically changes to the last
shown screen.
The operating mode selection screen is always called up when
the computer is started again. The crane operation screen is
started up when this screen is exited for the first time.
200−1−1100−286c_en
47/151
10
Invalid LC / LC−relevant!
Z 550 043 Z 52 988
48/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Exiting / saving
Precondition for changing the operation type

∗ The current LLD relevant longitudinal code and the selected
longitudinal code must be available in the newly selected
operation mode.
The system first checks if the current extension sequence of the

tele cylinders (longitudinal code LC) exists for the selected
configuration state when exiting the screen using Save. If this
requirement has not been met, an information window appears
with the text: “Invalid LC / LC−relevant!” (Z 550 043).
The operation type preselection screen is not exited.
If the check results in authorisation, the set rigging mode is

transferred to the SPS. While data is being transmitted to the
SPS, the display shown in figure Z 52 988 appears.
200−1−1100−286c_en
49/151
10
1 2 3
4
14
5
13
11
9 7 6
Z 56 177
Z 56 165 Z 56 166
50/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Load capacity chart view
(Z 56 177)
By pressing ”table” in the operating mode screen, the loads
of the set configuration state are indicated.
1 Longitudinal code LC
2 Main boom end length
3 Maximum carrying load determined by the reeving
4 Scroll bar
5 Load capacity
6 Table identification
7 Scroll bar
9 Information on special load capacities: An information

dialogue is opened by pressing this button. This button is
only visible if a special load capacity actually exists.
11 Unpinned loads
13 Minimum reeving
14 Radius
Searching possible rigging modes
(Z 56 165, Z 56 166)
The load and radius can be determined by pressing ”Search”
in the operating mode screen, and the system automatically
searches possible configuration states.
The data is entered using the buttons ”Load” and ”Radius”. An

entry window appears for entering the appropriate value.
The search is started using the Magnifying Glass button.
All found configuration states are entered in the bottom selection

element after the search.
200−1−1100−286c_en
51/151
10
Z 58 686
52/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
LC list: Pinning condition of the main boom to the

longitudinal code (LC)
(Z 58 686)
LC By pressing ”LC” in the operation type screen, a pinning

condition assigned to a longitudinal code can be observe.
200−1−1100−286c_en
53/151
10
Z 54 562
Z 54 563
54/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.5 Error Message (Main Menu: 202.3)
(Z 54 562 principle diagram, Z 54 563)
By pressing the button, / to call up the list of the

existing PLC errors (Z 54 563).
In any case, all error messages are retained until they have been
viewed. This is especially useful for identifying errors which only
occur for a short time, and then disappear automatically.
The corresponding symbol can − with the exception of the “Main

menu” screen − also appear in various other screens as soon as
an error occurs or is cancelled.
− the list of error messages is either empty or all error

messages have already been displayed once
− new (not yet displayed) errors have arisen, or existing

errors are cancelled − or both at the same time
Risk of accidents!
As soon as an error is displayed, shut off operations and
immediately have the error identified and eliminated!
Faults must be rectified by qualified specialist personnel
(customer services, for example).
If personnel who are not qualified try to rectify faults, it can
cause serious injury to people and / or damage to objects!
Providing the update key is white in the ”Error messages”

(Z 54 563) screen , the list shows the current status for the
error messages.
Currently red, must be updated by tapping the key. This
may be necessary again should the symbol stay red.
If − when the “Error messages” screen is open − new errors occur,

or are cancelled, or both at the same time, the update key
is red. It must then be tapped, if necessary, repeatedly − until it
is white again.
Only after this is the list of displayed errors complete, and the
screen can be exited via .
200−1−1100−286c_en
55/151
10
Z 60 141
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A 12
B C
D E
Z 550 040
56/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.6 Control Lever Function (Main Menu: 202.4; Quick

Menu: E23)
Depending on the crane equipment, different modes (IC−1)

can be selected. After the “E23” button has been selected,
an image will appear in area “E” of the crane operation
screen to show the current control lever function. By
selecting a new mode (e.g. mode 4), you can display the
corresponding control lever function. The newly selected
mode becomes active after you select the ”Save” symbol
(disk) to quit the display. The current control lever function is
shown at position “9” in field “A”.
(Z 60 141; Z 550 040)
Mode 1: SLH = slewing SRH = luffing gear

gear SRV = hoist 1
SLV = telescoping
Mode 2: SLH = slewing SRH = luffing gear
gear SRV = hoist 1
SLV = hoist 2
Mode 3: SLH = slewing SRH = hoist 2
gear SRV = hoist 1
SLV = telescoping
Mode 4: SLH = luffing gear SRH = slewing
SLV = telescoping gear
SRV = hoist 1
Mode 5: SLH = luffing gear SRH = slewing
SLV = hoist 2 gear
SRV = hoist 1
Mode 6: SLH = slewing SRH = telescoping
gear SRV = hoist 1
SLV = luffing gear
(S = control lever, R = right (16), L = left (24), H = horizontal,
V = vertical)
Risk of accidents!
If the configuration of the control levers is changed, it must
be checked, that the crane movements are carried out
properly with the new configuration!
It is the crane operator’s responsibility to check the current
control lever configuration before initiating a crane
movement!
Otherwise there is risk of accidents if accidental crane
movements are triggered!
200−1−1100−286c_en
57/151
10
14
30 15
31
26 16
32
34 25
35 24
36
Z 160 365
Z 60 142
Z 60 146
58/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 160 635)
The speeds of the crane movements ”Slewing gear“, ”Hoist 1“,

”Hoist 2“ and ”Luffing gear down“ can be finely tuned additionally.
The movements that are carried out via the x−axis (horizontal
movement of pilot control lever) of the individual pilot control lever
can be regulated via the corresponding self−return rocker switch
(14 / 26). The movements that are carried out via the Y−axis
(vertical movement of the pilot lever) of the corresponding pilot
lever, can be regulated via the corresponding self−return rocker
switches (14 / 26) and simultaneously pressing the button (31
/35) on the top end of the pilot lever in the direction of driving
always on the left).
Programming control lever
(Z 60 142)
If a dialogue ”pilot control assignment” is started from the main

menu, an additional button ”setup” appears.
The setup button provides the option of programming a left

control to be a right control. This option is protected by a special
PIN and can only be carried out with the help of our customer
services.
10.1.7.7 “Operating Hour Counter” (Main Menu: 202.5)
(Z 60 146)
The operating hours of the crane movements slewing gear,
hoists, luffing gear and tele unit are shown here. The display
of the operating hours is in ”Hours : Minutes“.
The appropriate crane movement can be selected in the bottom

left corner of the display.
For the hoist unit (H1−L, H1−S) a difference is made between

load and rope load.
200−1−1100−286c_en
59/151
10
2 2
1 1
3 3
4 5 4 5
Z 550 046 Z 56 188
Z 60 028 Z 60 029
60/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.8 Parameter Mask (Main Menu: 203.1; Quick Menu: E22)
(Z 60 026)
The solenoid valve data for the individual crane functions is

set in the parameter menu. This enables driver−specific
settings to be saved and changed for the activation mode of
the hydraulic valves for the individual movements. When
changing to the mask, the data set ”slew gear left” of the
SPS is always displayed first.
Selection of a crane function
The pop−up dialogue is opened by pressing the ComboBox (1,

Z 550 046, Z 56 188).
A new function can be selected here. The SPS sends your data
to the display as soon as you have made your selection.
Entering a parameter
The entry dialogue (Z 60 028) is opened by activating a

parameter button (2, Z 550 046).
The valid entry area is indicated behind the OK symbol. If this

area is exceeded, the entry is indicated in red. The last symbol
entered can be deleted with the arrow. The entry is saved by
pressing the diskette and directly transmitted to the SPS. Entry
is cancelled via the Exit button.
Selection of a stored data record
Selecting a stored data set
The menu window (Z 60 029) is opened by clicking on the menu

button (3, Z 550 046).
1. Load setting 1
2. Load setting 2
3. Load setting 3
4. Load Demag factory setting
5. Load current setting of the SPS
6. Save settings
7. Exit parameter menu
200−1−1100−286c_en
61/151
10
1 2
2
3 1
5
3
6
7 4 5
Z 60 029 Z 550 046
62/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 60 029)
This is where different settings can be loaded or saved. The

parameter menu is ended via the Exit symbol (7).
If a new setting is loaded from the computer it must be saved with

the disc symbol (6). That means that the setting will then be
transmitted to the SPS.
The default setting cannot be modified. For the functions ”tele in

and out” and ”slew gear brake” only the default setting can be
selected, i.e. the crane operator cannot make a personal setting.
Status display
(Z 60 029)
Data set that is currently saved in the SPS ( 1, 2, 3, D ).

When the data set of the SPS does not align with any stored
on the computer, SPS appears in the symbol. Otherwise, the
number of the corresponding data set is displayed.
Control value of the pilot control transducer
Output current
Graphic display
(Z 550 046)
The graphics display can be changed by activating the button

(position 5). The options available are the time ramp and the
PWM ramp (PWM = pulse width modulation).
200−1−1100−286c_en
63/151
10
2 1
2
1 3
5
3
6
4 5 7
Z 550 046 Z 60 029
AC200−1
33000 (75/75)
33000_1
Z 200 641
64/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Copying a data set
(Z 550 046, Z 60 029)
If for example the factory setting is to be assigned to setting 1, the

procedure is as follows:
The factory settings are loaded using the menu window

(identified by a ”D”)
and stored via the menu window with the ”diskette symbol”.
Afterwards load setting 1 from the menu window.
Then load the current SPS setting via the menu window into
the data set “setting 1”.
At 4 in figure Z 550 046 the icon for the data record ”setting 1” can
be seen.
Finally press ”Save” at the menu window to finish.
10.1.7.9 Crane Information (Main Menu: 203.2)
(Z 200 641)
Display of crane type, construction number, validity of the
software used, information on the load capacity table set and
a note on EN 13000 conformity.
Depending on the software used there is a note missing on the

validity of the used software and / or information on the load
capacity table set.
If the crane is equipped with control software in accordance with

EN 13000, “EN13000” can be found here.
10.1.7.10 Emergency Operation (Main Menu: 203.3)
See section 36.
200−1−1100−286c_en
65/151
10
Z 60 147
66/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.11 Setting the Operating Range Limit (Main Menu: 203.4;

Quick Menu: E24)
(Z 60 147)
The crane operator can define the following limits so that the
crane or boom do not enter existing danger zones, e.g. near
overhead power lines:
− Slewing angle limit

− Radius and height limit
− Operating range limit by virtual wall
The setting of operating range limits does not relieve the

crane operator of his responsibility for safe crane operation.
He must ensure that he fully understands and follows the
indicated instructions and applications.
Make sure you deactivate any activated limits as soon as

operation within a limited operating range is finished.
Otherwise this could lead to an unintentional and abrupt
shutdown during a later crane operation without limits,
which accordingly causes the hook block / load to swing out
widely.
Access to the screen for setting an operating range is

achieved using this button. The limits which are active are
displayed in green. The button Operating range limits must
be pressed again to deactivate the set operating range, the
button is then displayed in “grey”.
The position (1) indicates the current position of the main boom
head.
Activation of the slewing angle limit.
The background behind the buttons is “green” when the
slewing angle limit is active.
Setting and saving the left slewing angle.
Setting and saving the right slewing angle.
200−1−1100−286c_en
67/151
10
Z 60 147
68/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 60 147)
Follow the instructions for this in section 17 ”Slewing the

superstructure”.
Especially make sure that the selected limit angle
(= shutdown point) actually ensures sufficient distance to
the danger area in extreme situations (e.g. the hook block
swinging out after the crane motion has been switched off).
All crane movements must always be carried out with
adapted speed!
After setting the limit angles, first make sure in a ”test run”
that the shutdown occurs at the intended positions.
Activation of the max. radius limit.
Setting and saving the max. radius.
Activation of the min. radius limit.
Setting and saving the min. radius.

adapted speed!
Activation of the wall limit.
Setting and saving wall point ”A”.
Setting and saving wall point ”B”.
Switching over of the operating range to the wall.
When the inverted display is switched on the background is

displayed in ”green”.
200−1−1100−286c_en
69/151
10
Z 60 147
70/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
When setting and saving a wall a minimum distance of 8 m

(26.25 ft) between the wall points must be adhered to.
If the distance is too small, the wall area will be displayed in
”red”.

adapted speed.
Activation of the height limit.
Setting and saving the height.

adapted speed!
200−1−1100−286c_en
71/151
10
1 2 3 4 5 6
Z 57 685
67 64.10
Z 56 192 Z 56 193
72/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.12 Hoist Data Logger (Optional) (Main Menu: 203.5)
Press this button to open the mask “hoist data logger” for
reading off the stored hoist data using the USB port.
Hoist data logger mask
(Z 57 685)
1 Info line: shows the next step to be carried out
2 Status line: shows the current system status
3 Control field “Connect”: Starts initialisation of the USB stick
4 Control field “Copy”: Starts the transfer of data to the USB

stick
5 Fault display: is displayed when a system error occurs
6 Symbol for leaving the mask
Procedure
1. By touching the button “hoist data logger” (203.5) in the main

menu, switch to the hoist data logger mask;
2. Insert the USB stick in the USB port in the instrument panel
(optional) (67, Z 56 192) or on the bottom of the display
instrument for the crane control (DLOG) (64.10, Z 56 193)
and wait for 10 seconds;
200−1−1100−286c_en
73/151
10
Z 57 686 Z 57 687
Z 57 688 Z 57 689
Z 57 690 Z 57 691
74/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
3. Press the control panel “Connect” (3, Z 57 686);
While the USB stick is being initialised, a progress display

appears in the info and status lines (Z 57 687)
If the USB stick is not initialised correctly, the message: “Error:

USB stick could not be initialised (Z 57 688)” appears
Once the USB stick has been initialised, the status line displays:
“O.K.: USB stick initialised” (Z 57 689)
4. Press the control field “Copy” (4, Z 57 689)
While the data is being copied, a progress display appears in the

info and status lines.
If the data is not copied to the USB stick correctly, the status line
displays the message: “Error: error in data transfer (Z 57 690)”
Once the data has been transferred to the USB stick, the info line
displays the message: “You can now remove the USB stick” and
the status line displays: “O.K.: data transfer has been
successfully completed” (Z 57 691)
The USB stick can now be connected to a standard PC and the

data transferred.
For evaluation, a special program is required which creates an
EXCEL file from the data.
The data can then be evaluated as required.
200−1−1100−286c_en
75/151
10
Z 60 030
1
2
Z 60 031
76/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.13 Diagnosis Control Lever (Main Menu: 204.1; Quick

Menu: E31)
(Z 60 030)
After touching this button, the operation of the control lever
can be checked by moving the control lever.
10.1.7.14 Diagnosis Control In− / Outputs (Main Menu: 204.2;

Quick Menu: E32)
(Z 60 031)
The individual inputs and outputs of the control unit can be
checked in the IO menu. If the selected unit is a CPU unit,
software version (1) is displayed above the ComboBox (2).
The various units can be selected by pressing the Combo-
Box (2).
200−1−1100−286c_en
77/151
10
1 2 3 4
Z 56 156
78/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.15 Diagnosis CAN−Bus (Main Menu: 204.3; Quick Menu:

E33 )
The individual components of the control system exchange

information in a manner resembling a computer network through
the so−called CAN bus data (CAN = Controller Area Network).
(Z 56 156)
The status of each individual CAN participant can be
checked in the CAN diagnosis menu. The status of a
participant is OK if the bits B1 and B2 are at 1. This
information is important for our customer services team when
there are faults.
In addition, the possibility exists of using the CAN logger to view

bus error lists (Emergency) or logs of guarding errors.
Configuration of the CAN participants is also possible in special
cases.
CAN−screen
1 Table of bus participants
2 Key data
3 Bus status
4 CAN logger button
”Bus participants” table
B1 B2 Description
0 0 Participant is not on the ”bus”
0 1 Pre−operational node:
Participant was set to Pre−operational by
the Master.
1 0 Stopped
Participant was set to stopped by the
Master.
1 1 Operational
Participant is on the bus and is behaving
correctly, meaning that it is participating in
guarding (normal operative state)
All bus participants are listed in the table. The state of the bus
participants is described by two status bits, the meaning of which
can be obtained from the following table. Under normal operating
conditions, B1 and B2 are set to 1.
200−1−1100−286c_en
79/151
10
1 2 3 4
Z 56 156
3A
a:
b:
Z 56 157
80/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Basic data
(Z 56 156)
Three additional key data are displayed at the position (2,

Z 56 156) of the CAN screen (Z56 156) which can also offer
indication of possible errors.
The three numerical values mean the following, in the sequence
shown:
− Overruns (OR): number of messages lost at the time of
reception (PDO)
− Java State (JS): shows in the form of numerical values the
status that the Java application has assumed. There are
three possible statuses: Pre−operational = 127, Operational
= 5, Stopped = 4.
− Task State (TS): shows which status the CAN Demon (CAN
Task) has assumed. Here, too, there are three possible
statuses: Pre−operational = 127, Operational = 5, Stopped
= 4.
Communications between CAN Task and application are
disrupted when there are different values in TS and JS. Display
in error−free normal operation: ”CAN−OR−JS−TS: 0−5−5”
Bus status
(Z 56 157)
The current bus status is displayed at the position (3, Z 56 156)

of the CAN screen (Z 56 156).
The green bar means that the DloG data is being received by the
CAN bus (Z 56 157, Figure ”a”).
If a red bar is visible that is interrupted by a lightning symbol, then
the computer is receiving no data from the bus (Z 56 157, Figure
”b”).
Communications between the application and the CAN Task can

be tested by pressing the monitor symbol (3A, Z 56 157).
If the connection is OK, then the monitor screen of the symbol
needs to be changing back and forth between blue and green.
CAN logger button
(Z 56 156)
At the position (4, Z 56 156) of the CAN screen (Z 56 156) there

is a button with which on can switch over to the CAN logger.
The call up needs to be enabled through the use of a PIN code.
200−1−1100−286c_en
81/151
10
3
4
4
3
5
2
7
1
6
1
Z 56 158 Z 56 159
5
6
Z 56 160 Z 56 161
82/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Appearance of an error
(Z 56 158)
Two additional buttons are displayed in the event of a CAN error:
The monitor is completely restarted when the ”Reboot IPC”

button (6) is actuated.
The ”Reset CAN” button (5) causes a restart of the program parts
that are responsible for communications with the CAN card.
CAN−Logger
(Z 56 159, Z 56 160)
If the number of messages (MSG) at the position (1, Z 56 159) is

> 0, then the CAN lists can be transmitted from the PLC to the
DloG computer by pressing the ”PLC” button (7, Z 56 159).
Depending on the quantity, the data transfer may take several
seconds.
The pop−up shown in the illustration (Z 56 160) will be displayed
during the transfer.
Status of the CAN bus participant
The numerals entered at the position (2, Z 56 161) describe the

status of the CAN bus participant.
0= Not present
1= Configured, but without message
4= Stopped
5= Operational
127 = Pre−Operational
Actuating ”Save” (5, Z 56 161) causes the data on the PLC to be

saved on the DloG computer.
Actuating ”Reset” (6, Z 56 161) causes the data on the PLC to be
deleted.
200−1−1100−286c_en
83/151
10
4 4B
5
6
Z 56 161 Z 56 162
4B
Z 56 163
84/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
One can switch to the error list display (Z 56 162) by actuating the
”Emergency” button (4, Z 56 161).
Error list display
If the number of messages (MSG) is > 0, then the CAN

emergencies can be transmitted from the PLC to the DloG
computer by pressing the ”PLC” button (7, Z 56 162).
Illustration (Z 56 163) shows the error lists displaywith the errors
that were transmitted.
One can switch back to the CAN logger view (Z 56 161) by

actuating the ”State” button (4B, Z 56 163).
General fault messages independent of the screen currently

present.
If the master PLC (A0624) fails, then the E102 error message is
reported: ”Display gets no data from A0621.”
The DloG and its connection to the CAN bus are running in
orderly fashion in such cases.
If the computer is receiving no signals from the CAN bus, then

error E101 is reported: ”Monitor is receiving no CAN data”.
200−1−1100−286c_en
85/151
10
1: 2:
3: 4:
5:
5
Z 200 637
86/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.16 Diagnosis Load Sensing System

(Main Menu: 204.3; Quick Menu: E34)
(Z 200 637)
Actuating this key causes the ”LS” screen for diagnostics of
the electrical ”Load Sensing” system to be called up.
The operating mode of the pumps − “coupled” or “disconnected”

is displayed in this screen. At the same time the pump pressure
and the electric control of each pump can be read off.
Depending on the mode selection the screen display changes.

The left−hand mode key can be pressed. The
selected mode is displayed top left in the left−hand key area.
LS control is deactivated using key . The button is shown

in red . In addition, symbol is displayed on the screen.
To exit the screen press key .
200−1−1100−286c_en
87/151
10
Z 60 148
88/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.17 Datalogger (Optional) (Main Menu: 204.5)
(Z 60 148)
The data logger saves every set configuration of the crane.
The current configuration state is displayed in grey fonts (1).
The date and time show when these configurations were set.
Quantity / Anzahl: The number of data sets currently stored

Current / Aktuell: The currently visible data sets
LLD: 0= Enabled
1= Not enabled
CAN: 0= CAN bus OK

1= CAN bus error
U−LMB 0= Bridging switch load limit device not

actuated
1= Bridging switch load limit device actuated
U−HES: 0= Bridging switch HES (hoist limit switch) not

actuated
1= Bridging switch HES (hoist limit switch)
actuated
U_AUF 0= Bridging switch UP (luff up) not actuated

1= Bridging switch UP (luff up) actuated
TELE_M: 0 = Tele automatic active

1= Tele manual active
LC: Selected length code
LC−RV: The relevant length code for the load

calculation
200−1−1100−286c_en
89/151
10
Z 60 148
Z 54 587
90/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
EIN: Hoist rope reeving
AUSL: Current crane load
MAX: Maximum load
Last / Current load

load:
RAD: Current radius
RAD−RV Radius relevant to load calculation
HA−W: Current boom angle
HA−KW: Current main boom head angle
HA−L: Current main boom length
DREHW: Current superstructure slewing angle
10.1.7.18 “Function diagnosis” screen

(Z 54 587)
Press this button to call up the ”function diagnosis” screen.
Pressing to open a pull−down menu and make the required

selection.
For the selected function, the setpoint and actual values can be
compared to diagnose an existing malfunction.
200−1−1100−286c_en
91/151
10
1
8.20 8.20
8.20 [m] 8.20
3
2
Z 200 431
92/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.19 Select Main Menu (Quick Menu: E 11)
Change from quick menu to the main menu
10.1.7.20 Telescoping Information System (Quick Menu: E 51)
see section 18 ”Telescoping”
10.1.7.21 Support Pressure Display / Inclination Display / Outrigger

Support Area Display
(Optional) (Quick Menu: E 52)
(Z 200 431)
Display of the support pressures (1) as well as the inclination
(2).
The display bars are coloured red if the support pressures
are in the limit range.
Outrigger support area display (optional)

If thecrane is equipped with an outrigger support area display,
there is a length measuring device on each strut in order to
register the position of each strut (see section 12, part 2).
The value displayed under (3, Z 200 431) in the mask of the
support pressure gauge in the IC−1 indicates the pinning position
of each strut.
In figure (Z 200 431) the struts are supported in the 8.2 m
(26.9 ft) pinning position.
Risk of tilting!!
The support position of the relevant supports is ONLY
displayed.
The value which corresponds to the value of the support
position is not passed on to the LLD.
There are NO instructions and NO shut−down if the
displayed outrigger support area does not correspond with
the outrigger support area set in the IC−1.
Risk of accidents!
Observe the instructions and warnings on tilting and
accident risks in connection with the outrigger support
area display, which can be found in section 12 of the
chassis operating instructions.
200−1−1100−286c_en
93/151
10
E53
E54
5
Z 200 638
94/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.22 Operation Mode of the Hydraulic Pumps (Quick

Menu: E 53)
(Z 200 638)
Connects the pumps (P1) and (P2) together for the
movements luffing, telescoping, hoist 1 and hoist 2 or
disconnects them.
(Hydraulic decoupling of movements can improve the
sensitivity of the driven “disconnected” movements.)
In the upper left−hand corner of the ”E53” button, you can
see the number of the current operating mode.
Procedure on changing the operating mode:

You can select the operating mode by pressing ”E53” until you
find the mode (BA) you want. On ”E53” and ”E54” you can see
the movements and the pumps that have been assigned to them.
Ope- Driven Fed Description
rating movement through
mode pump
1 Luffing The maximum movement speeds can be achieved in
Telescoping (P1) and this operating mode.
(P2)
Hoist (2) together
Hoist (1)
2 Luffing No effect on crane movements luffing and telescoping
(P1) by the crane movements of hoist 1 and hoist 2.
Telescoping
Reduced end speed.
Hoist (2)
(P2)
Hoist (1)
3 Luffing No effect of the crane movements luffing, telescoping
Telescoping and hoist 2 by the crane movement of hoist 1.
(P1)
Reduced end speed.
Hoist (2) (Can only be selected with a control lever assignment of
Hoist (1) (P2) which hoist 2 is a participant.)
4 Luffing (P1) Operating mode can be advantageous if the crane
movements luffing and hoist 1 are to be driven very
sensitively.
Hoist (1) (P2) Movements controlled by pumps; no LS control.
Reduced end speed.
5 Luffing Setting with high load pressures.
Telescoping (P1) and Engine is not put under a lot of strain and cannot be
(P2) stalled.
Hoist (2) together Reduced end speed.
Hoist (1)
200−1−1100−286c_en
95/151
10
E53
E54
5
Z 200 638
E61.1 1
Z 56 189 Z 200 103
96/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.7.23 Assignment of Movements of Hydraulic Pumps (Quick

Menu: E 54)
(Z 200 638)
Displays the movements assigned to the hydraulic pumps
together with 10.1.7.22.
10.1.7.24 “Active Working Area Limitations” (Quick Menu: E 61)
Here the active working area limitations are displayed.
(Z 56 189)
The active limits are displayed in the top status bar (E61.1). The
valid operating range is always displayed in green.
10.1.7.25 Engine Display (Quick Menu: E 62)
(Z 200 103)
Switches to the engine display
1. Button for automotive driving. The button is green when

automotive driving is active.
2. Slide control switch for manual minimum speed.

Min. value is 800, max. value is 2100. The current value is
displayed in the centre.
3. Slide control switch for various kinds of engine information.
200−1−1100−286c_en
97/151
10
14
30 15
31
16
26 32
34 25
35 24
36
Z 160 635
98/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.8 Dead man’s switch
(Z 160 635)
In order to prevent crane movements being activated

accidentally, both control levers are fitted with an additional
button (16 / 24) (dead man’s switch). Switch (32) in the control
lever (16) and switch (36) in the control lever (24).
A crane movement can only be carried out as long as one of these
buttons is pressed. For example, a movement can be made with
the left−hand control lever while the dead man’s switch is
operated using the right−hand control lever.
You may only activate (press or release) a dead man’s switch or
bypass a limit switch on the instrument panel if the corresponding
control lever is in “neutral position” and/or the introduced working
movement is completed.
Risk of accidents!
Activating one of these dead man’s switches when the

control lever has been moved as far as possible from
neutral position causes abrupt activation or, when the lever
is released, abrupt termination of the corresponding
movement.
Observe the control lever allocation.
Risk of accidents!
Only by adapting the acceleration or speeds of all crane

movements can you prevent the load or the hook block
from swinging out, causing risk of crushing or crashing
when a movement is switched off.
The control levers (16 or 24) may not be activated directly in

an opposite moving direction, but must first rest in neutral
position. Slew the superstructure in the opposite direction
only when the superstructure has come to a standstill.
200−1−1100−286c_en
99/151
10
Z 56 181
100/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.9 Setting the Operating Mode

(Z 56 181)
In order for the load limit device to function faultlessly, it must:

− be set by the crane operator according to the crane
configuration before beginning work (as soon as the
configuration state has been reached) after ignition / engine
has been switched on.
− be reset by the crane operator according to the new operating
mode after the crane configuration has been changed.
The load limit device can only function automatically if it has

been set correctly by the crane operator in accordance with
the individual operating mode / crane configuration.
Risk of overturning! RISK OF BREAKAGE!

The load capacities indicated in the load capacity tables
correspond 100% with the permissible maximum load of
the individual crane configuration. If these limit values are
exceeded there is risk of the crane tipping and / or risk of
the crane components or supplementary equipment
breaking.
The operating mode selection screen can be selected in the main

menu and on the quick menu of the crane operating screen.
For more information on the operation type screen see the
sub−item 10.1.7.4 on page 47 of this section.
200−1−1100−286c_en
101/151
10
B
C E
D
F G
K
L
M
Z 56 182
102/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
1. Select load capacity table (paper) which corresponds with

the current crane configuration.
The following example shows where you can find these
values in the load capacity table.
The following load table is only a sample.

Only the load capacity tables supplied with the crane are
valid for crane operation.
(Z 56 182)
(A) − Main boom operation (all telescopes pinned)
(B) − Permissible rotation range
(C) − Outrigger support area
(D) − Counterweight
(E) − Main boom length
(F) − Radius
(G) − Load capacity (load + hook block)
(K) − Reeving number of the hoist rope:
(L) − Longitudinal code no. of extension sequence (LC)
(M) − Extension sequence of telescopes:

Tele 1 −
Tele 2 −
Tele 3 −
Tele 4 −
Tele 5 −
Tele 6 −
(N) − ID No. of the lifting capacity table, page no. within the
lifting capacity table
200−1−1100−286c_en
103/151
10
Z 200 642
104/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.10 Loading Operation

(Z 200 642)
When configuring, the highlighted ”Configuration” symbols in the

opposite figure appear.
In addition, the load utilization display of the load limit device is

shown in red (with 3 stars).
In configuration operation no lifting capacities are enabled!

The raising of loads is not permitted!
Risk of tilting!!
The crane may only be configured in an erected state
(outriggers, counterweight etc.) for which there are load
capacity tables!
200−1−1100−286c_en
105/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 176
106/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.11 Load Monitoring Assembly

(Z 56 176)
With the help of the computer of the load limit device, it is possible
to monitor the weight of the raised load (net load).
The load monitoring assembly may not be used to calculate

the weight but is used to check the previously calculated
weights of loads to enable the load hoist to be calculated
better and to avoid possible hazardous situations.
Before raising the load the maximum load for the operating
condition must be determined. It is shown on the display at ”B” for
”MAX (t)” (”MAX (kip)”) depending on the selected operating
mode.
Load monitoring
1. Press the button of the net display (B) when the hook block
is hanging free (no load, with load handling device). The
lifting tackle is tared and set at 0.0 t (0.0 kip) net load.
2. Raise the load with the hoist.

The net display now shows the net load (actual load on the
hook without load−handling device).
The gross load contains – apart from the load weight – the weight
of the main boom extension in transport position, the weight of
the hook block, the hoist rope and all load handling devices. The
net load is the actual load on the hook block without the
load−handling device. Display errors are possible due to external
factors, such as wind acting on the crane and the load.
The load may only be raised with the hoist. It is forbidden to

raise the load by extending the telescopes or luffing
cylinders.
One exception is lifting with the load lifting beam on the main
boom or on the boom point.
200−1−1100−286c_en
107/151
10
111
112
113
114
115
116
Z 56 184
108/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.12 Bridging the Load Limit Device

(Z 56 184)
10.1.12.1Bridging the Shutdown of the Load Moment Reducing

Movement “Raise Luffing Gear”
Bridging can only be initiated if the control levers are in the

neutral position and/or the initiated crane movement is
finished.
Release of this load moment reducing movement can only

occur if it does not create a dangerous situation.
If the load is still in contact with the ground and the raising
of the hoist was turned off, the load is too heavy. In this
case, activating the ”Raise luffing gear” movement is not
permitted!
”Raise luffing gear” must never be used to raise the load!
If a prohibited overload condition has occurred, the

load−moment−reducing movement ”Raise luffing gear” is also
switched off by the load limit device.
After the overload state has been switched off by a load limit
device, the load moment reducing movement can be driven in
order to take a hanging load from the overload range into the
normal working range. The release to “raise luffing gear” is
carried out via the key button (116).
The key must be turned in the clockwise direction and held in this
position.
It is prohibited to lock the key−operated pushbutton

mechanically.
The indicator light (115) lights up in the bridged state.
Risk of overturning
If an attempt is made to set the main boom so steep that the
minimum radius of the corresponding table is not reached,
this movement is also prevented. The system switches the
movement off.
If, in this situation, the movement is released by bridging,
there is the risk of overturning backwards.
200−1−1100−286c_en
109/151
10
111
112
113
114
115
116
Z 56 184
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
110/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.12.2Set−up Button
(only EN 13000 design)
(Z 56 184, Z 200 644)
The set−up button is only in the “EN 13000” design.
This key−operated pushbutton is used to bridge the shut−down

of all movements in the “non−EN 13000”−design.
In this case, see segment 10.1.12.3.1 (page 113).
You can check whether the crane is equipped with control

software in accordance with EN 13000 in the “Info” screen (for
“Info” screen, see segment 10.1.7.9, page 65).
Description
The setup button (112) is used to permit a slightly higher load
value (110 %) for a short period of time under special operating
conditions.
Activating the set−up button does not permit any movements
which cause component failure or stability loss.
The indicator light (111) lights up in the bridged state.
The ”Caution” symbol (8.1) appears in the crane operating
screen.
Risk of accidents!
The set−up button may not be used to increase the
shutdown load.
Risk of accidents!
Bridging can only be initiated if the control levers are in
the neutral position and/or the initiated crane movement
is finished.
Speed of movement
When the setup button (112) is activated, the movement speed
which can be carried out is greatly reduced.
200−1−1100−286c_en
111/151
10
111
112
113
114
115
116
Z 56 184
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
112/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
Deactivation
(Z 56 184)
Crane control is switched back to standard operation by pressing
the Set−up button (112) again or by stopping the engine.
It is possible to initiate a further movement within 10 seconds
after the control levers have been placed in the neutral position.
If this time is past, the setup button (112) must be pressed again
to drive further crane movements.
10.1.12.3Bridging the Shutdown of all Movements
10.1.12.3.1 General Instructions

(Z 200 644)
The load limit device can be bridged using a key−operated

pushbutton.

mechanically!
The load limit device may only be bridged in exceptional

cases, for example in case of repairs, fitting a rope etc.!
This may only be carried out by authorised persons who
are fully familiar with the correct operation of the crane.
The bridging of the load limit device may not be used to
increase the load moment under any circumstances!
Raising the load with the load limit device bridged is
hazardous and is prohibited!
Risk of accidents!
Bridging can only be initiated if the control levers are in
the neutral position and/or the initiated crane movement
is finished.
The ”LLD” screen (4) changes from red to black in the IC−1
display and the “Stop” symbol (8.2) appears.
200−1−1100−286c_en
113/151
10
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
114/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.1.12.3.2 Control Elements (Shut−down of all Movements):

“EN 13000” Compared to
“Non−EN 13000”−Design
(Z 200 643)
The following table describes the different control elements for

bridging the load limit device depending on the design:
“EN 13000”−design “Non−EN 13000”−design
Control element Key−operated pushbutton Key−operated pushbutton
(39) on the outside of the rear (112) in the instrument
cab wall panel
(when key−operated
pushbutton (112) is
activated, indicator light
(111) is illuminated)
How is it activated? Turn key clockwise and Turn key clockwise and
release hold in this position
Activation time Deactivation as long as the key is held
period − Press key switch (39) in the activated position
again
− after 30 min
− with engine stop
In the “Non−EN 13000−design” there is a key−operated push-

button (39), but it is not activated.

200−1−1100−286c_en
115/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
116/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2 Behaviour of Crane Control Depending on Load
10.2.1 General Instructions

(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)
Risk of accidents!
The behaviour of crane control in relation to load is
described in this segment.
It does not deal with the associated risks.
To ensure safe crane operation, the corresponding
warnings, notes and procedures found in some segments
of this section must be observed.
Depending on the crane’s load utilisation, crane control shows

the following displays and takes the following measures:
− Displays on the operating unit of crane control (see in 10.1.6
on page 33) change: for example
− Load utilisation display (C)
− Display “Caution” (8.1) or “Stop” (8.2) in the crane display
− Display lettering “LLD” (4)
− Acoustic and visual warning signals are given within and
outside of the crane operator’s cab:
− Warning light (38): for people within the crane’s danger
zone
− Warning buzzer in the crane operator’s cab: for the crane
operator
− Warning siren: for people within the crane’s danger zone
− Crane movements are stopped or limited.
− Overload data is saved.
Differentiation in two designs

You must differentiate between the “EN 13000”−design and the
“Non−EN 13000”−design.

200−1−1100−286c_en
117/151
10
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
118/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.2 EN 13000−Design
(Z 200 643)
You must differentiate between the following operating

conditions:
− Configuration operation (10.2.2.1; page 121)
− Standard crane operation (10.2.2.2; page 123)
− Operation with activated Setup button (112) (10.2.2.3; page
125)
− Operation with bridged crane control (key (39) activated)
(10.2.2.4; page 129)
200−1−1100−286c_en
119/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 642 Z 200 643
120/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.2.1 Configuration Operation (EN 13000)

(Z 200 644, Z 200 642, Z 200 643)
Risk of accidents!
To ensure safe crane operation, observe the warnings,
instructions and information concerning configuration
operation in segment 10.1.10 (page 105).
If the crane is in configuration operation, crane control shows the

following displays and takes the following measures depending
on the crane’s load utilisation:
Load Signals for the crane operator Signals for Speed of
(in the crane operator’s cab) people in the move-
crane’s danger ment
zone
Crane operating screen Warning Warning Warning
(Z 200 644, Z 200 642) buzzer light siren
(38;Z 20
0 643)
− Warning symbol at item (8)
− Maximum load displays
Normal range Load utilisation display (C) red
with configuration symbol (***);
Maximum load display and crane illumina- unlimited
status figure with configuration ted in
symbols green
Overload range
Warning symbol at item (8)
+
Load utilisation display (C) red inter-
conti- illumina-
with configuration symbol (***); rupted
nuous ted in stopped
Maximum load display and crane sound warning
red
status figure with configuration sound
symbols
− After the crane movements have been stopped, load−moment−re-
ducing crane movements can be carried out again.
In an emergency, it is possible to change to “Operation with bridged
setup button” (see 10.2.2.3) or “Operation with bridged crane
control” (see 10.2.2.4).
− The overload data is recorded.
200−1−1100−286c_en
121/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
122/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.2.2 Standard Crane Operation (EN 13000)

(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)
Depending on the load utilisation of the crane, crane control

shows the following displays and takes the following measures:
zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
Normal range
(below 90%)
Load utilisation display (C) green illumina- unlimited
ted in
green
Prewarning
range Warning symbol at item (8)
(90% − 100%) interrup-
+ illumina-
ted
warning ted in unlimited
Load utilisation display (C) yellow sound yellow
Overload range
(from 100%)
interrup-
+ conti- illumina-
ted
nuous ted in warning stopped
Overload display (C) red sound red
sound
In an emergency, it is possible to change to “Operation with
activated setup button” (see 10.2.2.3).
− The overload data is recorded.
All acoustic warnings listed here can be stopped / switched off in the crane operator’s cab
after 5 seconds (see ”Warning buzzer” in the crane operator’s mask).
200−1−1100−286c_en
123/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
124/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.2.3 Operation with Activated Set−up Button (EN 13000)

(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)
Risk of accidents!
Observe all warnings, instructions and information on the
setup button in segment 10.1.12.2 (page 111) to ensure safe
crane operation.

zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
Normal range Warning symbol at item (8)
(below 90%) (flashing)
+ conti- illumina-
reduced
nuous ted in
Load utilisation display (C) green sound to 15%
green
Prewarning Warning symbol at item (8)
range (flashing)
(90% − 100%) + conti- illumina-
reduced
nuous ted in
Load utilisation display (C) yellow sound to 15%
yellow
Overload range Warning symbol at item (8)
(100% − 110%) (flashing)
+ conti-
flashes reduced
nuous
Overload display (C) red in yellow to 15%
sound
Table continued on the next page
200−1−1100−286c_en
125/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
126/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)

zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
Overload range Warning symbol at item (8)
(from 110%) (flashing)
interrup-
+ conti- illumina-
ted
nuous ted in warning stopped
Overload display (C) red sound red
sound
It is possible to switch to “Operation with bridged crane control” (see
10.2.2.4) during emergencies.
Caution!
All data is recorded during crane operation with activated setup button (112).
200−1−1100−286c_en
127/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
128/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.2.4 Operation with Bridged Crane Control

(Bridging all Movements) (EN 13000)
(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)
Risk of accidents!
instructions and information concerning bridged crane
control found in segment 10.1.12.3 (page 113).
When crane control is bridged, crane control shows the following

displays and takes the following measures:
zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
over all load Warning symbol at item (8)
utilisation (flashing)
ranges
+ conti- conti-
flashing reduced
nuous nuous
Overload display (C) red in red to 15%
sound sound
− All crane movements are carried out without crane control
monitoring whether the executed movements can cause risks.
The acoustic warnings cannot be switched off.
Caution!
All data is recorded during crane operation with bridged crane control.
200−1−1100−286c_en
129/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 642 Z 200 643
130/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.3 Non−EN 13000−Design
10.2.3.1 Configuration Operation (Non−EN 13000)

(Z 200 644, Z 200 642, Z 200 643)
Risk of accidents!
instructions and information concerning configuration
operation in segment 10.1.10 (page 105).
If the crane is in configuration operation, crane control shows the

following displays and takes the following measures depending
on the crane’s load utilisation:
zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
− Maximum load displays
Normal range Load utilisation display (C) red
Maximum load display and crane illumina- unlimited
status figure with configuration ted in
symbols green
Overload range
+
Load utilisation display (C) red
conti- illumina- conti-
nuous ted in nuous stopped
Maximum load display and crane sound red sound
status figure with configuration
symbols
− The overload data is recorded with the overload recorder (optional)
activated.
200−1−1100−286c_en
131/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
132/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.3.2 Standard Crane Operation (Non−EN 13000)

(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)

zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
Normal range
(below 90%)
Load utilisation display (C) green illuminat unlimited
ed in
green
Prewarning
range Warning symbol at item (8)
(90% − 100%) interrup- interrup-
+ illumina-
ted ted
warning ted in warning unlimited
Load utilisation display (C) yellow sound yellow
sound
Overload range
(from 100%)
+ conti- illumina- conti-
nuous ted in nuous stopped
Overload display (C) red sound red sound
− The overload data is recorded with the overload recorder (optional)
activated.
200−1−1100−286c_en
133/151
10
8.1 8.2
4 8
A
B C
D
E
Z 200 644
111
112 39
38
Z 200 643
134/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.2.3.3 Operation with Bridged Crane Control

(Bridging All Movements)
(Non−EN 13000)
(Z 200 644, Z 200 643)
Risk of accidents!
instructions and information concerning bridged crane
control found in segment 10.1.12.3 (page 113).
When crane control is bridged, crane control shows the following

displays and takes the following measures:
zone
(38;Z 20
0 643)
over all load Warning symbol at item (8)
utilisation (flashing)
ranges
+ conti- illumina- conti-
nuous ted in nuous unlimited
Overload display (C) red sound red (*) sound
− All crane movements are carried out without crane control
monitoring whether the executed movements can cause risks.
(*) = Depending on specific national regulations, the red light of warning
light (38; Z 200 643) can flash in this state as well.
The overload data is recorded with the overload recorder (optional) activated.
200−1−1100−286c_en
135/151
10
111
112
113
114
115
116
Z 56 184
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1
8.2
30
29 9
28
10
27
11
26
12
25 13
24 14
15
23
16
22
17
21 20 19 18
Z 57 675
136/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.3 Limit Switches
10.3.1 Hoist Limit Switch
10.3.1.1 Function
(Z 56 184, Z 57 675)
Hoist limit switches are safety devices that limit the upwards
movement of hoist ropes and hook blocks.
This avoids collisions between the hook block and boom head
and therefore possible damage to these parts and/or the hoist
rope, which could cause the load to fall.
For this reason, the crane may only be operated with fully
functional hoist limit switches that have not been triggered.
Risk of accidents!
Approach the hoist limit switch daily and check that it
functions properly!
If a hoist limit switch is triggered (and not overridden), HES (30)

(red) appears on the IC−1 display and the warning buzzer
sounds. The following crane movements are shut down:
− Raise hoists
− Extend telescopic sections
− Lower luffing gear and raise luffing gear.
Then either lower the hoist or telescope it in in order to end this

prohibited condition.
200−1−1100−286c_en
137/151
10
111
112
113
114
115
116
Z 56 184
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1
8.2
30
29 9
28
10
27
11
26
12
25 13
24 14
15
23
16
22
17
21 20 19 18
Z 57 675
138/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.3.2 Bridging the Hoist Limit Switch

(Z 56 184, Z 57 675)
Bridging can only be initiated if the control levers are in the

neutral position and/or the initiated crane movement is
finished.
The limit switch may only be bridged in exceptional cases,

e.g. when configuring the crane (fitting or changing of device
components, putting on ropes, etc.).
Operating the crane with the limit switches bridged is

prohibited. Risk of accidents!
Key−operated pushbutton (114) is used to bridge the hoist limit

switches ”raise hoists”.
The key must be turned in the clockwise direction and held in this
position.

mechanically.
On the IC−1 display HES (30) appears (black). This means that
the hoist limit switches are bridged, regardless of whether they
are triggered or not.
200−1−1100−286c_en
139/151
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1
8.2
30
29 9
28
10
27
11
26
12
25 13
24 14
15
23
16
22
17
21 20 19 18
Z 57 675
140/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.3.3 Lower Limit Switch
10.3.3.1 Function
(Z 57 675)
Lower limit switches are safety devices which shut down the
unreeling function of the hoist rope when it is down to 3 remaining
turns on the drum. This prevents the rope being wound back on
in the opposite direction.
If a lower limit switch has been triggered (and not overridden), the
IC−1 Display shows SES (2) (red) and the warning buzzer
sounds. “Lower hoist” is switched off. Only “Raise hoist” is
possible.
10.3.3.2 Bridging Lower Limit Switches
A lower limit switch must be bridged directly at the corresponding

proximity switch.
The lower limit switches may only be bridged in exceptional

cases (e.g. to change or fit ropes).
Operating the crane with the limit switches bridged is

prohibited. Risk of accidents!
200−1−1100−286c_en
141/151
10
61 62
”X...”
F ”X0550”
B1 A H B2
63
Z 200 441 Z 200 442
61 L: R:
63.1 63.1
”B”
”B”
”A”
61.1
63.2
3
1
Z 104 266 Z 104 166
142/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.4 Electric Safety Chain

(Z 200 441 principle illustration, Z 200 442, Z 104 266, Z 104 166)
On distribution box ”X0550” on the main boom head the electric

safety chain for operation of the crane is connected.
For main boom operation the sockets on the distribution box

”X0550” must be assigned on the main boom head as follows:
Socket (A, Z 200 441)
− either with the plug of the wind speed rotor (62)

− or with bridging plug (B1).
Socket (A) must in any case be fitted with one of the named
plugs.
Socket (F, Z 200 441)
− with the plug of the hazard light (61)
As shown in figure (Z 200 442), the hazard light (61) is fastened

to the main boom head using two wing nuts.
During crane operation, the hazard light (61) must be in the
swinging position (Z 200 442).
In the transport condition (Z 104 266), the hazard light (61) must
be secured against swinging using locking pin (61.1) for driving
the crane.
− or protection cap (as shown).
Socket (H, Z 200 441)
− with the plug of the connecting cable of the hoist limit switch
(63) on the right−hand side of the main boom head.
The hoist limit switch (63) is connected on the right−hand side
of the main boom head at the end of the connecting cable.
The hoist limit switch may not be blocked (bridged).

Figure (Z 104 166 figure ”R”) shows the hoist limit switch in the
functional state. The hoist limit switch shift weight must be fitted
over the slowest piece of rope (see section 17).
To prevent exceeding the permitted vehicle dimensions (vehicle

height, etc.), the hazard light (61) and the anemometer rotor (62)
must be removed for driving the crane on public roads.
200−1−1100−286c_en
143/151
10
A
B C
D
E
Z 56 185
67
Z 55 566 Z 56 192
64.11
64.12
64.13
64.14
64.10 64.15
64.16
Z 56 193 Z 200 388
144/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.5 Malfunction Procedure
10.5.1 Malfunction−free Operation

(Z 56 185)
When crane operation is free of malfunctions, the ”Menus” and
”Screens” currently configured are shown on the crane controls
display (DLOG). Crane movements can be executed with the aid
of the control lever.
In the crane operating mask (Z 56 185), the individual areas “A”
to “E” are arranged on the crane control display (DLOG). For
fault−free operation the spaces between the individual fields are
separated with a grey background colour.
(Z 55 566)
In the main menu and in other submenus, the top line is displayed
in blue for malfunction−free operation.
10.5.2 Failure of the ”Touchscreen” of the Crane Controls

Display
(Z 56 192, Z 56 193, Z 200 388)
If no more entries can be made on the crane controls display
(DLOG), even though no other malfunctions are present, then the
functioning of the load limit device is ensured. The view on the
screen looks the same as the one described under
’Malfunction−free operation’ under 10.5.1.
One possible cause for the failure of the touchscreen could be the
operation of the crane controls display when ambient
temperatures are too high. The crane cab will then need to be
cooled down with the air conditioner. Direct sunlight on the crane
controls display must be avoided.
In order to be able to continue with operation of the crane, the

optional operating keys on the right−hand side of the DLOG can
be used.
If there are no operating keys on the right−hand side of the
DLOG, a commercial computer entry device with a USB port (i.e.
USB mouse, USB trackball, or similar) can be connected to the
display of the crane control system.
An optional USB connection (67, Z 56 192) can be located on the
cabin instrument panel.
If no such USB connection is available on the instrument panel,
then the crane controls display needs to be removed. Two USB
connections (64.10, Z 56 193) are located on the underside of the
device.
200−1−1100−286c_en
145/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 185
Z 55 566
146/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.5.3 Failure of the Crane Control Display

(DLOG)
(Z 56 185, Z 55 566)
If only the display of the crane control (DLOG) fails, thenthe

function of the load limit device is safeguarded.
The display can fail in two ways:
− the background colour switches to red and/or the header is

shown in red.
The configured menus / masks continue to be displayed, but
now they are no longer being updated, either to a partial
extent or entirely.
Risk of accidents!
Please note that the load and radius display is not updated.
When the crane is switched over to carrier operation, the display

behaves in the same manner as with the above−mentioned
malfunction. The background and top line colour are displayed
in red.
− Monitor failure − the monitor turns black.
What is to be done?
Proceed with both types of monitor malfunction as follows:
1. Place load down.
2. Look for the source of the error.
3. Rectify the error.
Risk of accidents!
No crane operation is permissible when the display fails!
The error must be eliminated before crane operation is
permitted to resume!
200−1−1100−286c_en
147/151
10
B C
E
Z 56 185
64.1
64.2
64.3
64.4
64.5
64.6
64.7
Z 55 566 Z 56 186
148/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
The display of the crane control (DLOG) attempts to register

automatically with the crane network.
Once this occurs, the ”Operating mode selection” screen
appears. This needs to be confirmed with Save.
All crane movements are stopped for as long as the ”Operating

mode selection” screen is displayed. The crane control reacts as
with a new start.
If the DLOG fails to register with the crane network, the CAN
mask can be selected to search for the fault. Here checks can be
carried out to see which components are in the network.
Depending on which faults exist the load can still be set

down using the hoist.
The main boom can be telescoped in by means of actuation
of the corresponding control lever in the telescoping−in
device (dependent on the control lever function
configuration).
If for example the control levers are assigned in ’Mode 1’ (see

section 10.1.7.6 on page 57), the left−hand control lever must be
moved to the rear for telescoping retraction.
If ’Mode 6’ is configured, then the right−hand control lever needs
to be moved to the left for telescoping retraction.
If telescoping retraction is not possible, then the crane

and/or the load must be put down with an auxiliary crane as
an emergency measure.
It must be observed that the load and radius display are not
updated.
In this event, please contact our customer service
department.
Monitor failure due to ambient temperatures being too high
If there is monitor failure (”black screen”) at the same time that the
”Temp” lamp (64.5, Z 56 186) is illuminated, then the ambient
temperature is too high. The crane cab will then need to be
cooled down with the air conditioner. Direct sunlight on the crane
controls display must be avoided.
As soon as the ambient temperature has been reduced to a
permitted value, the crane controls display (DLOG) will once
again report to the crane network on its own.
200−1−1100−286c_en
149/151
10
150/151 200−1−1100−286c_en
Safety Equipment 10
10.5.4 Failure of the Crane Control (CAN Stop)

In the event of crane control failure all crane movements are
stopped within one second.
No further input can be made with the control lever. Only such
inputs as affect diagnostics can be carried out via the crane
controls display (DLOG).
Before continuing operation of the crane, the fault must first

be rectified.
If necessary, the crane and load must be emergency

lowered using an auxiliary crane.
In this event, please contact our customer service
department.
200−1−1100−286c_en
151/151
Technical Training Universal Class
Technische Schulung Software components
DLOG IPC 5/100
(New Dlog MPC 5)
Bezeichnung /
description: A5352
Programmierung /
programming: ja / yes (Uploader2.2),
kranspezifische Daten, crane data
Adresse /
address: Wird mit Programmierung festgelegt
/ set with programming
Einbauort /
location: Armaturenbrett OW / dash bord
Digsy Compact
I/O-Karte (Ein- Ausgangskarte)
input / output
Bezeichnung /
description: z.B. A702
Programmierung /
programming: Keine / none
Firmware: ja / yes (Bootloader), (z.B.
6.3.1)
Adresse/address: Wird über Steckplatz festgelegt
/ will be set over slot
CPU-Karte (Digsy compact)
Bezeichnung / description: z.B. A701

Programmierung /
programming: ja / yes (Prosyd 1131),
kranspezifische Daten,crane data
Firmware: ja/yes (Bootloader), (z.B. 6.3.2)
Adresse/address : Wird mit Programmierung
festgelegt / set with
progamming
Die Firmwareversionen der The first two figures of the firmware on a CPU-
beiden Karten müssen in den module must comply with the first two figures
ersten Ziffern über einstimmen of the I/O-module firmware.
(z.B. 6.3.X).

DM 01 (Digitale Ein- Ausgangskarte)
Bezeichnung /
description: z.B. A0623, A0624 ....
Programmierung /
programming: Keine / none
Firmware: Keine / none
Adresse /
address: Wird über Dipschalter festgelegt /
Set with dipswitches
Einbauort / location: verschieden/different
Die Adresse der DM01 muss laut Address must be set depend electric drawing
Schaltplan eingestellt werden.
CGM (Cockpit Grafik Modul)
Bezeichnung /
description: z.B. A5317, P5330 ....
Programmierung /
programming: ja/yes (Prosyd 1131), links und
rechts unterschiedlich/left and right different
Firmware: ja/yes, (z.B.4.2.1)
Adresse /
address: Wird über Programmierung
festgelegt/ set with
programming
Einbauort /
location: Abstützungsbedienung /
outrigger box

Joystick
Bezeichnung /
description: A5961, A5962
Programmierung /
programming: nein/no
Firmware: nein/no
Adresse /
address: Wird mittels Dlog eingestellt
Set with Dlog
Einbauort /
location: Kabine/cabin
SVE Längengeber
Bezeichnung /
description: B7631
Programmierung /
programming: nein / no
Firmware: nein / no
Adresse /
address: ist voreingestellt /
preset
Einbauort /
location: im Ausleger /
within main boom
Der Längengeber muss nach dem After mounting the cero position
Einbau am DLOG justiert werden of the indicator must be set with
the Dlog

Winkelgeber / angle indicator
Bezeichnung /
description: B7611, B7513
Programmierung /
Firmware: nein / no
Adresse /
address: Muß eingestellt werden A0705
Set with software (A0705)
Einbauort /
location: Am Ausleger/
mainboom
Beim AC250-1 gibt es keinen For AC 250-1 lenght indicator for total
äußeren Längengeber mehr, lenght doesn’t exist any more. After
dafür aber mehrere busfähige assembling the address must be adjusted
Winkelgeber. Es muss die by Dlog.
Adresse für jeden Winkelgeber
eingestellt werden. Nach dem After mounting the cero position of the
Einbau am DLOG justieren. indicator must be set.
Drehkranzgeber / azimuth
Bezeichnung / description:
B7611,B7513, B7751
Programmierung /
programming : nein / no
Firmware: nein / no
Adresse /
address: Ist voreingestellt /
preset
Einbauort /
location: Am Drehkranz /
At slewring

Neigungsgeber /level indicator
Bezeichnung /
description: B7721
Programmierung /
Firmware: nein / no
Adresse /
preset
Einbauort /
location: Im Drehkranz /
In slewring
Beim AC350 gibt es 2 Neigungsgeber. For AC 350 both level indicator must
Es muss für jeden Neigungsgeber die adjusted with the right address code
Adresse eingestellt werden. over Dlog
SLC (Sicherheits Lenkcomputer)

Bezeichnung / A4200, A4201
description:
Programmierung / ja / yes
programming: WinPCS)
Parametrierung / ja / yes
Parameter setting: (WinPCS)
Adresse / Wird über Programmierung
address: festgelegt / set with
programming
Einbauort / verschieden
location: / different
Ab 5 Achsen sind 2 oder mehr nicht identische SLC‘s

verbaut.
From version more than 5 axles, assemling with SLC’s they
are not identical anymore.

MOKI
Bezeichnung /
description: P5351, P5311
Programmierung /
programming: ja/yes
(Param.exe, KibesRT)
Parametrierung /
parameter setting: ja/yes
(KibesRT) (Betriebsstunden)
Adresse /
address: Wird über
Programmierung festgelegt /
Set with programming
Einbauort /
location: Kabine / cabin
ZR2 (Zentralrechner MOKI)
Bezeichnung /
description: P5351, P5310
Programmierung /
programming: ja,yes
(Param.exe)
Parametrierung /
Parameter setting: ja/yes
(Betriebsstunden)
Adresse /
address: wird über Programmierung
festgelegt / set with
programming
Einbauort /
location: Zentralelektrik
central electric

ADM2-FR (DaimlerChrysler)
Bezeichnung /
description: z.B.A1115, A1112
Programmierung /
Parametrierung /
Parameter setting: ja / yes
(Minidiag)
Adresse /
already adjusted
Einbauort /
location: Zentralelektrik /
central electric
HES / hoist limit switch
Bezeichnung /
description: B 7271, 7277
Programmierung /
Parametrierung /
Parameter setting: nein / no
Adresse /
address: A0705 / set by A0705
set with software
Einbauort /
location: Hauptausleger /
main boom

Windmesser / Anemometer
Bezeichnung /
description: B 7811
Programmierung /
Parametrierung /
Adresse / voreingestellt /
address: preset
Einbauort / Hauptausleger /
location: main boom
Längenwinkelgeber / Length and angle indicator
Bezeichnung /
description: B 7611
Programmierung /
Parametrierung /
Adresse / voreingestellt /
address: preset
Einbauort / Hauptausleger /
location: main boom
Längen- und Winkelgergeber After mounting the cero position

müssen nach dem Einbau am DLOG of the indicators must be set
justiert werden. with the Dlog.

Central Control
All participants are directly connected to a central participant.
Bussystem Zentrale Steuerung
Bussystem
All participants are coupled on a common medium. All information
sent are available for all the participants.

CAN-Overview Carrier
DDF
CGM I/O CGM
DDF
DM01
CPU
120Ω CAN-Open
ABS ZR 2 I/O ADM SLC 1 SLC 2 Retarder Transmission
CPU
J1939 120Ω
CAN-Low
CAN-High

CAN-Overview Superstructure
DLOG Inclino-
I/O I/O CPU meter
CPU CPU I/O
CAN-Open
Slew angle
LWG Length SVE
DDF
MR ADM
120Ω
J1939
CAN-Low
DDF
CAN-High

Manual
digsycompact
4885.27.100
Drawing Number: 04 – 68 248000/A

Issued: 23.02.2000
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Version: V 2.00
File name: 68248A.DOC
Prepared by: M. Neubauer
Distr. code: 40 41 42 43
Revisions: 23.02.2000 V 2.00 Explanations modified
The details and data in this document are regularly checked and updated and are at any time subject to change without notice.
The document includes information that enjoys protection of copyright. No part of this publication may be reproduced or
translated into other languages without the prior written permission of INTER CONTROL.
INTER CONTROL
Hermann Köhler Elektrik GmbH & Co. KG
Schafhofstraße 30
90411 Nürnberg
Germany
Tel.: ++49 911 9522-5; Fax: ++49 911 9522-857
E-mail: frenzel_bernhard@intercontrol.de
Internet: www.intercontrol.de

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Table of Contents
1 SAFETY NOTES FOR THE USER........................................................................6

1.1 General Notes - Warranty - Liability...........................................................................6
1.2 Qualified Personnel ...................................................................................................7
1.3 Hazards.....................................................................................................................7
1.4 Normal Use ...............................................................................................................8
1.5 Notes on the Product Installation...............................................................................8
1.6 Active and Passive Faults of an Automation System ...............................................10
1.7 How to Proceed in the Event of Maintenance or Repair...........................................11
1.8 How to Proceed when Carrying Out Welding Jobs ..................................................12
1.9 How to Proceed in the Case of Quick Charging.......................................................13
1.10 How to Render Starting Aid .....................................................................................13
1.11 Possible Consequential Damage when Cutting-through Cable Harnesses..............13
1.11.1 Network power supply.......................................................................................................13
1.11.2 Analog inputs ....................................................................................................................13
1.11.3 Communication interfaces ................................................................................................14
1.11.4 Rotary transducer inputs ...................................................................................................14
1.11.5 Counting inputs .................................................................................................................14
1.11.6 Digital inputs 24V ..............................................................................................................14
1.11.7 Digital outputs 24V ............................................................................................................14
1.11.8 Reference voltage outputs ................................................................................................14
1.11.9 PWM outputs 24V.............................................................................................................14
1.11.10 Inputs/outputs of external sensors ................................................................................15
1.11.10.1 Sensor inputs.............................................................................................................15
1.11.10.2 Sensor outputs...........................................................................................................15
1.11.10.3 Rotary transducer outputs .........................................................................................15
1.12 System Diagnosis....................................................................................................15
2 cONNECTING THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR.............................................16
3 UTILIZATION CATEGORY OF THE CONTROL MODULES..............................16
4 wiring proposal for switchgear cabinEt ..........................................................17
5 Module INSTALLATION or EXCHANGE ...........................................................20
6 Block DIAGRAMS digsycompact ..........................................................................21
7 FunCtionAL DESCRIPTION...............................................................................23
7.1 Subunit CPU (4885.67.001).....................................................................................23
7.2 Subunit I/O (4885.68.001) .......................................................................................24
8 PWM-OUTPUTS AND Digital OUTPUTS...........................................................25
9 Digital inPUTS....................................................................................................26
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 2 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
10 Analog OUTPUTS ..............................................................................................27
11 Analog INPUTS ..................................................................................................27
12 AsynchronOUS INTERFACES ..........................................................................27

12.1 RS232-Interface 1 ...................................................................................................27
12.2 RS232-Interface 2 ...................................................................................................27
13 CAN-Bus .............................................................................................................28
14 VOLTAGE SUPPLY ............................................................................................29
15 REAL-TIME CLOCK ...........................................................................................29
16 ProgrammiNG ....................................................................................................30
16.1 Operands for Subunit CPU 4885.67.001 .................................................................30
16.1.1 Input operands ..................................................................................................................30
16.1.2 Output operands ...............................................................................................................32
16.1.3 Configuration operands.....................................................................................................34
16.1.4 System input operands .....................................................................................................38
16.1.5 System output operands ...................................................................................................38
16.2 Operands for Subunit I/O 4885.68.001....................................................................39
16.2.1 Input operands ..................................................................................................................39
16.2.2 Output operands ...............................................................................................................41
16.2.3 Configuration operands.....................................................................................................43
16.2.4 System input operands .....................................................................................................46
16.3 Storage of Formulations, Constants, and Data........................................................47
16.4 CANopen.................................................................................................................47
17 SAFETY FUNCTIONS AND DIAGNOSIS ...........................................................47

17.1 Error Coding ............................................................................................................49
18 PIN ASSIGNMENT Subunit CPU .......................................................................59
19 PIN ASSIGNMENT Subunit I/O..........................................................................60
20 TechniCAL DATA FOR Subunit CPU................................................................61

20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .....................................................................................61
20.2 Dynamic Properties .................................................................................................61
20.2.1 Voltage supply...................................................................................................................61
20.2.2 Digital inputs......................................................................................................................62
20.2.3 Digital inputs or counting inputs ........................................................................................62
20.2.4 Analog inputs ....................................................................................................................62
20.2.5 Digital outputs ...................................................................................................................63
20.3 Standards................................................................................................................63
21 TechniCAL DATA FOR Subunit I/O ..................................................................64

21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .....................................................................................64
21.2 Dynamic Properties .................................................................................................65
21.2.1 Voltage supply...................................................................................................................65
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 3 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
21.2.2 Digital inputs......................................................................................................................65

21.2.3 Digital inputs or counting inputs ........................................................................................65
21.2.4 Analog inputs ....................................................................................................................66
21.2.5 Digital outputs ...................................................................................................................66
21.2.6 Analog outputs ..................................................................................................................66
21.3 Standards................................................................................................................67
22 NotES..................................................................................................................68
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 4 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
List of Illustrations
Wiring of a control unit in the switchgear cabinet...........................................................17
Cable connection in switchgear cabinet (Detail drawing of Figure 1 on Page 17)........18
Block diagram digsycompact Subunit CPU...........................................................................21
Block diagram digsycompact Subunit I/O..............................................................................22
PWM-output with output current measurement (QD1.1 to QD1.8) .................................25
Digital output with backreading of the output state (QD2.1 to QD2.8)..........................25
Digital inputs on the Subunit CPU or Subunit I/O............................................................26
CAN-Interface .....................................................................................................................28
Voltage supply of a digsycompact .........................................................................................29
List of Tables
Input operands for Subunit CPU .......................................................................................31
Output operands for Subunit CPU ....................................................................................33
Configuration operands for Subunit CPU ........................................................................37
System input operands for Subunit CPU .........................................................................38
System output operands for Subunit CPU .......................................................................38
Input operands for Subunit I/O..........................................................................................40
Output operands for Subunit I/O.......................................................................................42
Configuration operands for Subunit I/O ...........................................................................45
System input operands for Subunit I/O ............................................................................46
Characteristics of the digital outputs ...............................................................................47
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 5 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
1 SAFETY NOTES FOR THE USER

1.1 General Notes - Warranty - Liability
This manual contains the information required for the normal use (as defined by Section 1.4 on Page
8) of the product described herein. It is meant for technically qualified personnel with special training or
having relevant knowledge in the field of measuring, open- and closed-loop control engineering,
hereinafter called automation engineering.
The knowledge and technically appropriate implementation of the safety notes and warnings contained
in this manual are the prerequisite for safe installation and commissioning as well as for safety during
operation and maintenance of the product described. Only qualified personnel as defined by Section1.2
on Page 7 has the expertise required under specific conditions to correctly interpret and implement the
safety notes and warnings given in general in this document.
This manual is an integral part of the range of items delivered, even if, for logistic reasons, a separate
order for it had to be placed. For reasons of comprehensibility, it does not contain all details for all
designs of the product described and cannot consider any imaginable case of setup, operation or
maintenance. Should you want further information or should special problems not sufficiently covered
by this document occur, you can request further information from INTER CONTROL (address on Page
1) or their representatives.
In addition, we point out that the contents of this product documentation are not part of an earlier or
existing agreement, commitment or of a legal relationship nor an amendment to this. All obligations of
INTER CONTROL result from the respective purchase contract, which also contains the complete and
exclusively valid warranties. These contractual warranty regulations are neither extended nor limited by
the text of this document.
INTER CONTROL shall not be liable for damage resulting from improper use of the
supplied components or from non-observance of the instructions given in this
manual.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 6 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
1.2 Qualified Personnel

Unqualified interference with the device/system or non-compliance with the warnings specified in this
manual or attached to the device/system cabinet can result in serious physical injury or damage to
property. Therefore, only appropriately qualified personnel is allowed to interfere with this
device/system.
Qualified personnel as meant by the safety-related notes in this manual or on the product itself are
persons that
♦ are either, as project engineering personnel, familiar with the safety concepts of automation
engineering;
♦ or are, as operating personnel, trained in the handling of automation systems and know the
operation-related contents of this manual;
♦ or, as commissioning and service personnel, have special training enabling them to repair such
automation systems or have the authorization to commission, earth and label circuits and
devices/systems in compliance with the applicable safety standards.
1.3 Hazards
The following notes are on one hand meant for your personal safety and, on the other, for the
protection against damage of the described product or connected devices.
Safety notes and warnings to avoid hazards for life and health of users or maintenance personnel or to
avoid damage to property are emphasized in this manual by the signal terms defined below.
As regards this manual and the notes on the products themselves the various terms have the following
meaning:
HAZARD: means that death, serious physical injury or considerable damage to property
will occur, if the relevant precautions are not taken.
WARNING: means that death, serious physical injury or considerable damage to property
can occur, if the relevant precautions are not taken.
CAUTION: means that slight physical injury or damage to property can occur, if the
relevant precautions are not taken.
NOTE: is a piece of important information about the product, handling of the product
or the respective section of the manual to which special attention is to be
paid.
ATTENTION: if ATTENTION is emphasized and used in this manual to refer to safety-

related facts, its contents correspond to the above-mentioned definition
under „Note“ or „Caution“.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 7 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
1.4 Normal Use

♦ The device/system or the respective system component may only be used in cases where the
technical data are not exceeded and only in conjunction with devices or components (supplied by
external providers) that are recommended or permitted by INTER CONTROL.
♦ The product described was developed, manufactured, tested, and documented in compliance with
the relevant safety standards. Therefore, the product normally causes no hazards for property or
physical health, if the handling instructions and safety notes for project planning, mounting/
installation, normal use and maintenance/repair are complied with.
WARNING: After removal of the housing or the protection against electric shock or after
opening of the system cabinet, certain dangerous live parts of these
devices/systems become accessible, which poses a risk for the user's health.
Only appropriately qualified personnel is allowed to interfere with this
device/system. This personnel must have profound knowledge of all sources
of hazards and maintenance measures according to the specifications given
in this manual. Prerequisites for perfect and safe operation of the product are
proper transportation, proper storage, setup and installation as well as
careful operation and maintenance.
1.5 Notes on the Product Installation

Since the product when used is mostly part of larger systems or equipment, these notes are meant to
provide a guideline for safe integration of the product into its environment.
In this connection special attention is to be paid to the following facts:
NOTE: Even if in the project planning of an automation system an utmost degree of

conceptional safety has been achieved, e.g., by a multi-channel layout, it is
nevertheless indispensable to accurately follow the instructions given in this
manual, since improper handling can possibly render ineffective precautions
for the prevention of hazardous faults or can create additional sources of
hazards.
Hereinafter we give, depending on the case of application, notes to be observed in the installation and
commissioning of the product:
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 8 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
WARNING: The safety regulations and the regulations for the prevention of accidents
applicable to the specific case of use are to be observed.
Operation of devices that are meant to be installed in housings or cabinets is
only permitted if they have been built in, that of desk-top or portable devices
only if the housing is closed. For equipment with permanent connection
(stationary devices/systems) without an all-pole mains disconnecting switch
and/or fuses, a mains disconnecting switch or a fuse have to be installed in
the building installation. The system has to be connected to the protective
conductor.
WARNING: For devices/systems with permanently attached, non-detachable connections

and without all-pole mains disconnecting switches, the socket outlet with
earthing contact for the device must be mounted near the device and be
easily accessible.
For devices to be operated at mains voltage, check before putting the device
into operation if the set range of nominal voltage corresponds with the local
mains voltage.
If the supply is 24V, care must be taken that the electrical isolation of the
extra-low voltage is safe. Use only power-supply units manufactured
according to IEC 364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100 Part 410).
Fluctuations or deviations of the mains voltage from the nominal value must
not exceed the tolerance limits specified in the Technical Data, otherwise
functional failures and hazardous conditions in electric subassemblies/
equipment cannot be excluded.
Precautions are to be taken that after voltage dips and power failures an
interrupted program can be properly continued. In this connection no
hazardous operating conditions, not even temporarily, must occur. If
necessary, an „emergency-OFF“ has to be imposed. Emergency-OFF devices
according to EN 60204/IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain effective in all modes
of operation of the automation system. Unlocking the emergency-OFF
devices must not lead to an uncontrolled or undefined restart.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 9 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
CAUTION: Connecting cables and signal lines must be installed so that inductive and
capacitive parasitics/interference do not adversely affect the automation
functions.
Systems and equipment of automation engineering and their control
elements must be mounted so that they are sufficiently protected against
unintentional operation or actuation.
To avoid undefined conditions in the automation system caused by a cable
or wire break on the signal side, appropriate safety measures have to be
taken on the hardware and software side of the I/O coupling.
I/O cables may be plugged or pulled under de-energized conditions only.
Interface cables may be plugged or pulled without switching off the voltage
supply only if the following preconditions have been met:
1. The cable must be shielded and the shield must be linked to the
conducting metal hood.
2. Prior to plugging the cables, a potential equalization has to be effected by
connecting the PE-carrying plug parts.
1.6 Active and Passive Faults of an Automation System

♦ Depending on the task to be performed by an electronic automation system, both active and
passive faults can be dangerous faults. In a drive control for example, in general the active fault is
dangerous, since it leads to unauthorized switching on of the driving mechanism. In the case of a
signalling function, on the other hand, a passive fault may prevent a hazardous operational
condition from being indicated/signalized.
♦ This differentiation between possible faults and their task-related attribution to dangerous and
harmless faults is of importance for all safety considerations concerning the product delivered.
WARNING: Wherever faults occurring in the automation system can cause material
damage or even personal injury, i.e. can be dangerous faults, additional
external precautions have to be taken or equipment has to be provided (e.g.,
by independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks etc.) that ensure or
impose a safe operational condition even in the event of a fault.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 10 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
1.7 How to Proceed in the Event of Maintenance or Repair

If measurements or testing become necessary on the active device, then the requirements and
procedural instructions of the regulation for the prevention of accidents VBG 4.0 must be observed,
especially §8 „Permissible deviations during work on active parts“. Suitable electric tools are to be
used.
WARNING: Repair work on an automation system may only be carried out by qualified
personnel as defined under Section 1.2 or by INTER CONTROL. For the
replacement of parts or components use only parts that are listed in the
spare parts list or in the Chapter „Spare Parts“ of this manual. Unauthorized
opening or improperly performed repair work can lead to death or severe
physical injuries as well as to considerable damage to property.
Before you open the device, always pull the mains plug or switch the
disconnecting switch to OFF-position. I/O cables may be plugged or pulled
under de-energized conditions only.
2. Prior to plugging the cables, a potential equalization has to be carried out
by connecting the PE-carrying plug parts.
If you want to replace fuses, use only fuse types that are specified in the
technical data or in the maintenance instructions of this document.
Do not throw batteries into fire and do no soldering on the cell body,
because there is explosion hazard (max. temperature 100 °C). Do not open
and recharge lithium batteries or batteries containing mercury; use only the
same types for replacement! Always treat batteries and accumulators as
hazardous waste and dispose of them accordingly. When using monitors:
Improper interference, especially alteration of the high voltage or installation
of a different type of picture tube can lead to an increased amount of X-
radiation. A device that has been changed that way no longer corresponds to
the device for which approval was given and further operation of this device
is no longer permitted.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 11 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
1.8 How to Proceed when Carrying Out Welding Jobs

If machinery and systems are to be welded, the following regulations have to be observed:
1. Accident prevention regulation VBG 4 (electrical systems and equipment)
2. Accident prevention regulation VBG 15 (welding, cutting and related techniques)
In particular § 43 (connecting and disconnecting welding current circuits)
ATTENTION: Welding jobs on machinery and systems must be carried out by qualified
personnel only.
To protect electronic equipment it is necessary to proceed as follows:
1. Ignition switch: Off
2. Starter battery:
First disconnect the negative pole, then the positive pole.
Or an equivalent measure to disconnect the circuits.
3. Connecting the earthing/grounding terminal:

Connect the earthing terminal directly to the component to be welded.
Never establish the connection via rotating elements.
Avoid stray welding currents.
4. Welding cable routing:

Do not lay any welding cables in parallel to electric lines.
5. Housings of electronic components:

Do not touch any housings of electronic components and electric lines
with the welding electrode.
If one of the specified measures cannot be complied with, the plug

connectors have to be pulled out of the electronic devices prior to carrying
out any welding jobs.
In the case of plasma welding too, the plug connectors have to be pulled out
of the electronic devices prior to welding.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 12 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
1.9 How to Proceed in the Case of Quick Charging

Quick charging may only be carried out with the starter battery disconnected.
1.10 How to Render Starting Aid

Starting aid with a vehicle may only be rendered if the starter battery is connected.
ATTENTION: Starting aid with a quick charging set must not be rendered!
1.11 Possible Consequential Damage when Cutting-through

Cable Harnesses
Caused by welding flame, electric arc, cutting tool, or tearing apart.
In this context, only damage is considered that is either caused by a short-circuit of the 24volt voltage
supply with the various interface cables in the cable harness or by a short-circuit of the supply and
interface cables with ground.
ATTENTION: Touching the cables (when the insulation is damaged) with the welding
electrode will instantly destroy the electronics.
1.11.1 Network power supply

Protected power supply units (by fuse, automatic circuit-breakers) and cables are safe from short-
circuits.
ATTENTION: Incorrectly fused/protected or unprotected power supply units and cables

can be destroyed.
1.11.2 Analog inputs

Analog voltage inputs work in the range of ± 10 V.
Analog current inputs work in the range from 0 to 20 mA.
ATTENTION: Applying 24V on analog inputs, in particular on current inputs, may destroy
the modules.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 13 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
1.11.3 Communication interfaces

RS 485: 24volts applied on the inputs may destroy the input drivers,
the output drivers are short-circuit-proof.
RS 232: 24volts applied on the inputs may destroy the input drivers,
CAN: 24volts applied on the inputs may destroy the input drivers,
1.11.4 Rotary transducer inputs

Rotary transducer inputs often work with 5V or 12V levels,
Applying 24V on the inputs may destroy the modules.
1.11.5 Counting inputs

Counting inputs for 24V - no destruction.
Counting inputs for 5V and 12V can be destroyed.
1.11.6 Digital inputs 24V

No destruction.
1.11.7 Digital outputs 24V

Digital outputs are protected against short circuit.
Applying 24V to switched-on or switched-off outputs can destroy the outputs.
1.11.8 Reference voltage outputs

Reference voltage outputs work in the range from 0 to 10V and, as a rule, they are protected against
short circuit towards GND. Applying 24V to reference voltage outputs may destroy them!
1.11.9 PWM outputs 24V

PWM outputs are protected against short circuit.
Applying 24V to switched-on or switched-off outputs may destroy the solenoid valve.
As a rule, 24V applied to the current measuring inputs will destroy the measuring shunt.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 14 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
1.11.10 Inputs/outputs of external sensors
1.11.10.1 Sensor inputs

As a rule, sensor inputs for temperature, humidity, current, or pressure are not designed for 24V.
By directly feeding in 24V, sensor inputs can be destroyed.
1.11.10.2 Sensor outputs

Normally, sensor outputs with 24V are not short-circuit-proof and could be destroyed.
Applying 24V to switched-on or switched-off outputs is permissible.
1.11.10.3 Rotary transducer outputs

As a rule, rotary transducer outputs are not short-circuit-proof.
Applying 24V to switched-on or switched-off outputs may destroy them.
1.12 System Diagnosis

To detect possible hardware faults and software errors in the control unit and the application in time,
and in order to bring the system to a safe condition, there exists a variety of diagnostic possibilities for
the components of the digsyoutdoor electronics system.
For a detailed description please refer to the programming manuals digsyoutdoor (Type-No.: 4305.90.20)
and digsycompact (Type-No.: 4885.27.xxx).
Further diagnostic methods are detailed in the individual module manuals:

CPU, PWM, RSM, ANM, TPM, BIM, CGC, DM01/DI01, etc.
ATTENTION: System diagnosis and error handling serve to ensure the safety of man and
machine.
It is absolutely necessary to use them!
Whenever you need them, the manuals may individually be requested from Inter Control GmbH & Co.
KG (address on Page 1).
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 15 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
2 CONNECTING THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR
ATTENTION: From the earthing screw (PE) of the system housing a connection (min.
2
2.5mm ) that has to be as short as possible is to be laid to the PE in the
power supply unit or chassis/ground in the vehicle.
When using connectors featuring metal hoods with applied shield, it is
possible to dispense with the additional overall-shield connection to the
earthing point of the control unit housing.
In the case of shielded cables use always metal hoods.
The metal hoods are to be conductively fastened to the housing.
In the case of potential differences between several PE - (GND) - points (e.g.,
in the case of separated power supplies via different circuits) the shield of
the connecting cable must only be applied (earthed) on one side (i.e., on the
control unit).
The twisted-pair, shielded cables must in the connector (50-pole Sub-D- jack)
be connected to GND. The individual shields on the open cable end must not
be connected to the overall shield or PE.
The protective conductor (PE) or the ground of the vehicle is to be connected via the star-point in the
switchgear cabinet to the earthing screw provided for on the system housing. This measure, too,
serves to increase the interference immunity (see Figure 1 on Page 18 and Figure 2 on Page 19).
3 UTILIZATION CATEGORY OF THE CONTROL

MODULES
Regarding the details refer to the type plate or the module manual.
E.g.: Utilization category according to DIN 40040: GPF
G = -40°C lower temperature limit

P = +85°C upper temperature limit
F = humidity ≤ 75% without moisture condensation
The internal temperature of the control unit is measurable and available for the application program
(AWP).
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 16 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
4 WIRING PROPOSAL FOR SWITCHGEAR CABINET
Figure 1: Wiring of a control unit in the switchgear cabinet
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 17 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
Figure 2: Cable connection in switchgear cabinet

(Detail drawing of Figure 1 on Page 17)
A= Prior to connecting painted housing parts the lacquer/varnish coat on the points of connection
has to be removed.
B= Fold the shield backward and earth it coaxially with the nickel-plated cable clamps.
C= PE-rail or ground-rail made of Al, Cu or Fe nickel-plated.
D= Nickel-plated or varnished mounting plate with bare/uninsulated area around the fastening holes
(coating or lacquer must have been removed).
E= Fastening bolts on the mounting plate of the switchgear cabinet.
F= PE-connection 16mm2 to the machine. When using the device in a vehicle the connection from
the switchgear cabinet to the chassis has to be established in the same way as the connection
from the mounting plate to the switchgear cabinet.
G= Nickel-plated washer to ensure a conducting connection.
H= Nickel-plated cable clamp.
K= Connection (large-surface contact) to switchg. cabinet door (e.g.: braided Cu-conductor).
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 18 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
PE-conductors must always be wired according to VDE-regulations!

In addition, the whole mounting plate is to be used as a grounding surface.
That means: all metal parts such as housing, rails etc. are to be led via short low-resistance
HF-connections to the mounting plate (braided Cu-conductors, nickel-plated screws etc.).
ATTENTION: The connecting points must be free from lacquer/varnish, i.e., prior to
connection, the varnish/coating has to be properly removed from the surface
(see Figure 2 on Page 19).
The areas of the control electronics, power electronics and mains-ON/OFF must be geometrically
separated (they must not be located next each other). This area separation applies also to the closed
cabinet door.
ATTENTION: All the metal parts must have low-resistance HF-connections.

i.e.: 1. Bright and bare connecting points
2. Surfaces protected against corrosion,
e.g.: nickel-plating.
No or only negligible oxide films on the
blank surface (no eloxal coating)!
3. Connections of large-surface contact
4. Short connections
The high-frequency connections of the metal parts have to be carried out in addition to the PE-
connection according to the VDE-regulations.
The PE-connections according to the applicable VDE-regulations (or VDE-standards) have to be laid
separately!
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 19 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
5 MODULE INSTALLATION OR EXCHANGE
ATTENTION: Observe the chapter "Safety notes for the user"!
♦ Bring the system/machine to its regular and safe starting position.

♦ Switch off the system.
♦ Loosen the plug connector retaining clamps and the screws.
♦ Make sure that the connectors are match-marked with regard to the plug-in place.
♦ Pull out the plug connector.
♦ If necessary, unscrew the PE-conductor.
♦ After removing the 6 Torx-screws (TX20, M4) pull the side plate with the Subunit slowly out of the
housing. Attention: take the cable connection to another possible Subunit in the control unit into
consideration. If necessary, ...
♦ Disconnect the cable connection between the Subunits. In the case of CAN-bus operation make the
adjustments for the appropriate party No. and the transmission rate for the new Subunit.
♦ Insert the new Subunit with seals in the side plate. If applicable, establish the cable connection.
♦ The Subunit must be snugly and flush in the guiding grooves of the housing.
♦ Screw-fasten the side plate with installed silicone seal to the housing (6 Torx-screws, TX20, M4).
The inserted seal is, due to the component design, protected and cannot be damaged by fastening
the screws too tightly.
♦ Screw-fasten the PE-connection cable.
♦ Plug-in the connectors and snap the retaining clamps into place.
♦ Compare the plug connector with the marking of the respective plug-in place.
♦ Put the system into operation and check its function.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 20 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
6 BLOCK DIAGRAMS digsycompact
Figure 3: Block diagram digsycompact Subunit CPU
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 21 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
Figure 4: Block diagram digsycompact Subunit I/O
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 22 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
7 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
digsycompact is a compact modular control unit consisting of a housing body (4885.27.001), a Subunit
CPU (4885.67.001) and the optional Subunit I/O (4885.68.001).
7.1 Subunit CPU (4885.67.001)

The Subunit CPU has the following performance characteristics:
♦ DC/DC-converter for generating the logic operating voltage.
♦ microcontroller 80C167.
♦ 512 Kbyte RAM.
♦ 1 Mbyte Flash-EPROM.
♦ real-time clock.
♦ back-up supply of RAM and real-time clock by externally supplied voltage when the operating
voltage is cut off.
♦ additional back-up supply of the real-time clock by integrated long-term capacitor.
♦ reset-controller
♦ system switch-on and switch-off with the control voltage input (IPON).
♦ 10 digital inputs (ID1.1 to ID1.10), can be configured to two groups of 5 each, either plus or ground
switching, active self-test by input test stimulus.
♦ 2 digital inputs (ID1.11 and ID1.12), also usable as counting inputs (IC1.1...IC1.2).
♦ 4 analog inputs (12 bits) as voltage inputs from 0 to +10V (IAV1.1 to IAV1.4) or current inputs from
0 to +20mA (IAI1.1 to IAI1.4).
♦ 4 internal, analog monitoring channels for the supply voltage of the DC/DC-converter VIMI, Vcc, , the
internal housing temperature, and testing of the AD-converter and reference voltage.
♦ 8 digital outputs (QD1.1 to QD1.8 with output current measurement function), also usable as PWM-
outputs.
♦ 1 synchronous serial interface.
♦ 1 asynchronous serial interface (RS232).
♦ 1 CAN-bus with optional bus termination.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 23 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
7.2 Subunit I/O (4885.68.001)

The Subunit I/O has the following performance characteristics:
♦ microcontroller 80C164.
♦ 128 Kbyte RAM (optional 512 Kbyte).
♦ 128 Kbyte Flash-EPROM (optional 512 Kbyte).
♦ 8 digital inputs (ID2.1 to ID2.8), can be configured to 2 groups of 4 each, either plus or ground
switching, active self-test by input test stimulus.
♦ 6 digital inputs (ID2.9 to ID2.14), also usable as counting inputs (IC2.1 and IC2.2, IC3.1 and IC3.2,
IC4.1 and IC4.2). IC2.x, IC3.x and IC4.x usable in pairs and as incremental decoder with AB-
counter signal.
♦ 4 analog inputs (12 bits) as voltage inputs from 0 to +10V (IAV2.1 to IAV2.4) or current inputs from
0 to +20mA (IAI2.1 to IAI2.4).
♦ 4 analog outputs from 0 to +20mA (QAI2.1 to QAI2.4).
♦ 8 digital outputs (QD2.1 to QD2.8), output state backreadable.
♦ 1 synchronous serial interface.
♦ 1 asynchronous serial interface (RSR232).
♦ 1 CAN-bus with optional bus termination.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 24 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
8 PWM-OUTPUTS AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS

The Subunit CPU and the Subunit I/O have 8 digital outputs each, QD1.1 to QD1.8 on the Subunit
CPU, and QD2.1 to QD2.8 on the Subunit I/O.
All outputs feature:

♦ short-circuit protection
♦ overload protection
♦ overvoltage and undervoltage protection and
♦ testability by backreading the logic signal state
NOTE: QD1.1 to QD1.8 on the Subunit CPU may also be used as PWM-outputs with
current measurement function.
ATTENTION: Each PWM-output has already internal free-wheeling diodes which are
necessary for internal current measurements. Any additional external free-
wheeling diodes can possibly cause a corruption of the measured current
values and destroy the outputs!
ProFET V IQ ProFET VIQ
RMeas
Measuring
amplifier
QD1.x QD2.x
RL RL
DFreewheel DFreewheel
Figure 5: PWM-output with output current Figure 6: Digital output with backreading of
measurement (QD1.1 to QD1.8) the output state
(QD2.1 to QD2.8)
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 25 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
9 DIGITAL INPUTS
The digsycompact-Subunit CPU has 12 digital inputs (ID1.1 to ID1.12). The switching thresholds of all
digital inputs ID1.1 to ID1.12 are switchable for systems with a nominal voltage of 12V or 24V (a
changeover can be effected via the application program). The groups ID1.1 to ID1.5 or ID1.6 to ID1.10
can independently of each other be configured as ground or plus switching inputs (a changeover can
be effected via the application program).
The inputs ID1.1 to ID1.8 can also be used for pulse length measurements.
The inputs ID1.11 and ID1.12 can also be used as counting inputs IC1.1 and IC1.2.
The digsycompact-Subunit I/O has 14 digital inputs (ID2.1 to ID2.14). The switching thresholds of all
digital inputs ID2.1 to ID2.14 are switchable for systems with a nominal voltage of 12V or 24V (a
changeover can be effected via the application program). The groups ID2.1 to ID2.4 or ID2.5 to ID2.8
can independently of each other be configured as ground or plus switching inputs (a changeover can
be effected via the application program).
The inputs ID2.11 and ID2.12, ID2.9 and ID2.10 and ID2.13 and ID2.14 can also be used as counting
inputs (IC2.1 and IC2.2, IC3.1 and IC3.2, IC4.1 and IC4.2). Consequently, there are 6 counting inputs
available.
The input pairs ID2.11 and ID2.12, ID2.9 and ID2.10, or ID2.13 and ID2.14 can also be used as AB-
counters. Thus, there are 3 AB-counters for speed, orientation and position detection available. The
counting inputs may be freely combined, e.g., 1 AB-counter and 4 single counters, etc..
ID2.1 to ID2.8
ID1.1 to ID1.10
Ω
10kΩ
VIM
ID2.9 to ID2.13
ID1.11 to ID1.12
Ω
10kΩ
Figure 7: Digital inputs on the Subunit CPU or Subunit I/O
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 26 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
The digsycompact-Subunit I/O has 4 analog outputs (QAI2.1 to QAI2.4) with a resolution of 10 bits each.
They are current outputs from 0 to +20mA. The analog outputs are sustained-shortcircuit-proof
towards GND (ground).
11 ANALOG INPUTS
The Subunit CPU has 4 analog inputs with a resolution of 12 bits each, which can be used either for
1
standard signals from 0 to +10V (IAV1.1 to IAV1.4) or from 0 to +20mA (IAI1.1 to IAI1.4) .
The Subunit I/O has 4 analog inputs with a resolution of 12 bits each, which can be used either for
1
standard signals from 0 to +10V (IAV2.1 to IAV2.4) or from 0 to +20mA (IAI2.1 to IAI2.4) .
To connect analog sensors to the analog inputs, special ground pins are available (GNDA1 on the
Subunit CPU, GNDA2 on the Subunit I/O).
12 ASYNCHRONOUS INTERFACES
Two asynchronous interfaces are implemented on the digsycompact-Subunit CPU,
♦ RS232-interface 1 (IRXD1, QTXD1, IRI1, IDCD1) and
♦ RS232-interface 2 (IRXD2, QTXD2).
12.1 RS232-Interface 1
The RS232-interface 1 serves for
a) loading the application program and
b) connecting other devices with RS232-interfaces.
The RS232-interface 1 is freely programmable. With the signals QTXD2 (function RTS) and IDCD1
(function CTS) a hardware-handshake in four different modi (Send, Receive, Send-and-Receive,
RS485) or a software-handshake (Xon/Xoff) is supported.
12.2 RS232-Interface 2
Presently, the RS232-interface 2 is only used by the producer for diagnostic purposes and cannot be
employed by customers.
This RS232-interface 2 is only available in devices of the type digsycompact 1.
1
An analog input can either be used as a voltage input (e.g. IAV1.1) or as a current input (e.g. IAI1.1) (independent of the other analog input
channels)
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 27 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
13 CAN-BUS
The digsycompact-Subunit CPU features a CAN-interface (V2.0B active, to 1MByte/sec). Via the pins
CAN_L1.1 and CAN_H1.1 or CAN_L1.2 and CAN_H1.2 a bus line can be led in and out (integrated T-
unit).
A bus termination can be easily implemented by connecting the pins CAN_TRX and CAN_HX.2.
The digsycompact-Subunit I/O features a CAN-interface having the same characteristics as that on the
digsycompact-Subunit CPU.
CAN_L2.1 (I/O)
CAN_L1.1 (CPU)
CAN_H2.1 (I/O)
CAN- CAN_H1.1 (CPU)
Transceiver
CAN_L2.2 (I/O)
CAN_L1.2 (CPU)
Ω
120Ω
CAN_H2.2 (I/O)
CAN_H1.2 (CPU)
CAN_TR2 (I/O)
CAN_TR1 (CPU)
Figure 8: CAN-Interface
Through the internal connection of Subunit CPU and Subunit I/O via the synchronous interface the
digsycompact can be used as a CAN-Gateway.
The CAN-interface 1 on the Subunit CPU supports CANopen as a protocol.
The CAN-interface 2 on the Subunit I/O supports various proprietary protocols, among others J1939
for the connection of Diesel engines.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 28 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
14 VOLTAGE SUPPLY
The control unit digsycompact is designed for operation in 12V or 24V DC-voltage networks.
The supply of the logic of the control unit digsycompact is effected via the pin VIM1 on the Subunit CPU.
The power drivers are supplied via the pin VIQ1 on the Subunit CPU or VIQ2 on the Subunit I/O.
VIM1 is to be permanently connected with the voltage source (e.g., vehicle battery). The control unit is
switched on and off via the input IPON. With the internal wiring (see Figure 9, link IPON and processor
output) it is possible, after a switch-off by the user, to continue operating the control unit digsycompact
via the switch on IPON, until the system run-down is completed. The control unit can be switched off
from the application program via the processor output.
I/O
VIQ2 Output Logic

driver
VIQ2
QD2.x
synchronous
serial
connection
CPU
VIQ1 Output
VIQ1 driver Logic
QD1.x
VCC
DC
VIM1
DC
ENABLE
≥1
IPON
Figure 9: Voltage supply of a digsycompact
15 REAL-TIME CLOCK
The digsycompact-Subunit CPU features a quartz clock which obtains its operating voltage from VIM1.
After disconnecting it from VIM1 a running reserve of a few minutes is ensured by a Gold-Cap-capacitor.
NOTE: The type digsycompact III is not equipped with the Gold-Cap-capacitor.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 29 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
16 PROGRAMMING
The following tables (Table 1 to Table 9) show the input and output assignments to operands required
for programming (see documentation and programming system PROSYD 1131 type 4395.20.100).
NOTE: On both modules the voltage supply has to be configured to 12V or 24V.
16.1 Operands for Subunit CPU 4885.67.001
16.1.1 Input operands

Input
Input Input operand in
operand in operand in Bit-
Word- Byte- notation Symbolic address
notation notation (%IX), if Symbolic address acc. to adjustable
(%IW) (%IB) available acc. to data structures control configuration Description
0 0 In.DigIn.Value[1] ID1 All digital inputs of DcS CPU (ID1.1..ID1.12)
(WORD)
0.0 ID1_1 Digital input 1 of DcS CPU (ID1.1)
1 0.8 ID1_9 Digital input 9 of DcS CPU (ID1.9)
0.12 not assigned
0.13 not assigned
0.14 not assigned
0.15 not assigned
3 6 In.AnIn.Value[1] IA1_1 Analog input 1 of DcS CPU (IU1.1 or II1.1)
(WORD)
(WORD)
(WORD)
(WORD)
11 22 In.AnIn.VCC VCC_CPU Applied input voltage on DcS CPU [10mV]
(WORD)
12 24 In.AnIn.VIMP VIMP_CPU Applied operating voltage on DcS CPU [10mV]
(WORD)
13 26 In.AnIn.TEMP TEMP_CPU Temperature close to the CPU of DcS CPU [K]
(WORD)
14 28 In.AnIn.RAMPE RAMPE_CPU Applied ramp on DcS CPU
(WORD)
15 30 In.Cnt.Value[1] IC1_1 Counting input 1 of DcS CPU (IC1.1)
(DINT)
17 34 In.Cnt.Value[2] IC1_2 Counting input 2 of DcS CPU (IC1.2)
(DINT)
31 62 In.Cnt.Velocity[1] IC1_1_Velo Velocity on counting input No. 1 of DcS CPU (IC1.1)
(WORD) [pulses/time window]
32 64 In.Cnt.Velocity[2] IC1_2_Velo Velocity on counting input No. 2 of DcS CPU (IC1.2)
39 78 In.PWM.Current[1] IPI1_1 Backreading of current on PWM-output 1 of DcS CPU

(WORD) (ID1.1)
[0 to 1023 digits]
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 30 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Input
(WORD) (ID1.2)
[0 to 1023 digits]
(WORD) (ID1.3)
[0 to 1023 digits]
(WORD) (ID1.4)
[0 to 1023 digits]
43 86 In.PWM.Current[5] IPI1_5 Backreading of current on PWM-output 5 of DcS I/O
(WORD) (ID1.5)
[0 to 1023 digits]
(WORD) (ID1.6)
[0 to 1023 digits]
(WORD) (ID1.7)
[0 to 1023 digits]
(WORD) (ID1.8)
[0 to 1023 digits]
47 94 In.Common.AwpCycle I_AWPCycle Duration of an AWP-cycle [ms]
(BYTE)
95 In.Common. WdgReset I_WdgReset Detection of a Watch-Dog-Reset on DcS CPU (TRUE
(BYTE) -> Watch-Dog-Reset occurred)
48 96 In.Common.PwrFail I_PwrFail Detection of undervoltage on DcS CPU (TRUE =
(BYTE) undervoltage (approx. 8.5V))
97 In.Common.RDVIQP1 I_RDVIQP1 Output voltage of DcS CPU
(BYTE) (TRUE = applied)
49 98 In.Common. COMOFF I_COMOFF Detection whether one of the input values RDVIQP1,
(BYTE) RDVIQP2, Watch-Dog-Reset-CPU, or Watch-Dog-
Reset-I/O occurred
(internal OR-operation of these input values)
99 In.Common.RDVIQP2 I_RDVIQP2 Output voltage of DcS I/O
(BYTE) (TRUE = applied)
50 100 In.Common. I_SRAMchecked Number of test runs SRAM in DcS CPU;
SRAMchecked -1 means error
(INT)
51 102 In.Common.FWchecked I_Fwchecked Number of test runs Firmware (Flash-ROM) in DcS
(INT) CPU;
-1 means error
52 104 In.Common.Nodestate I_Nodestate Indicates the NMS-state of the CAN-node
(BYTE) (0,1 -> INIT
127 -> PREOPERATIONAL
4 -> PREPARED
5 -> OPERATIONAL)
Table 1: Input operands for Subunit CPU
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 31 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
16.1.2 Output operands

Input
notation notation (%QX), if Symbolic address acc. to adjustable
(%QW) (%QB) available acc. to data structures control configuration Description
0 0 Out.DigOut.Value QD All digital outputs of DcS CPU+I/O (QD1.1..QD1.8
(WORD) and QD2.1..QD2.8)
0.0 QD1_1 Digital output 1 of DcS CPU (QD1.1)
0.8 See DcS I/O
0.9 See DcS I/O
0.10 See DcS I/O
0.11 See DcS I/O
0.12 See DcS I/O
0.13 See DcS I/O
0.14 See DcS I/O
0.15 See DcS I/O
1 2 Out.Cnt.TimeWnd[1] IC1_1_TimeWnd Time window of the counting input 1 of DcS CPU in
(WORD) [ms]
2 4 Out.Cnt.TimeWnd[2] IC1_2_TimeWnd Time window of the counting input 2 of DcS CPU in
(WORD) [ms]
9 18 Out.Cnt.Start IC_Start Start/Stop of counting on the counting inputs of DcSs
(BYTE) CPU and I/O
(IC1.1..IC1.2 and IC2.1..IC4.2 on ID1.11..ID1.12 and
ID2.9..2.14) 1
9.0 IC_1_1_Start Start of counting on the counting input 1 of DcS
CPU
(IC1.1 or ID1.11) 1
9.1 IC_1_2_Start Start of counting on the counting input 2 of DcS
(IC1.2 or ID1.12) 1
9.2 See DcS I/O
9.3 See DcS I/O
9.4 See DcS I/O
9.5 See DcS I/O
9.6 See DcS I/O
9.7 See DcS I/O
19 Out.Cnt.Reset IC_Reset Resetting the counter values (with concurrent
(BYTE) stopping) on the counting inputs of DcSs CPU and I/O
(IC1.1..IC1.2 and IC2.1..IC4.2 on ID1.11..ID1.12 and
ID2.9..2.14)
9.8 IC_1_1_Reset Resetting the counter values (with concurrent
stopping) on the counting input 1 of DcS CPU
(IC1.1 or ID1.11) 2
stopping) on the counting input 2 of DcS CPU
(IC1.2 or ID1.12) 2
9.10 See DcS I/O
9.11 See DcS I/O
9.12 See DcS I/O
9.13 See DcS I/O
9.14 See DcS I/O
9.15 See DcS I/O
14 28 Out.PWM.Freq[1] QP1_Freq Frequency of the PWM-output 1 of DcS CPU (QD1.1)
(WORD) [Hz], range: 50 to 1200Hz
1
1 = Start, 0 = Stop
2
1 = Reset
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 32 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Input
18 36 Out.PWM.Freq[5] QP5_8_Freq Frequency of the PWM-outputs 5..8 of DcS CPU
(WORD) (QD1.5..QD1.8) [Hz], range: 50 to 1200Hz
19 38 Out.PWM.Pwidth[1] QP1_PWidth Pulsewidth of PWM-output 1 of DcS CPU (QD1.1)
(WORD) [digits], range: 0 to 1023 digits
27 54 Out.PWM.Pstart QP_Start Start of PWM of the PWM-outputs 1 to 8 of DcS CPU
(BYTE) (QD1.1 to QD1.8) 1
27.0 QP1_Start Start of PWM of the PWM-output 1 of DcS CPU
(QD1.1)1
(QD1.2) 1
(QD1.3) 1
(QD1.4) 1
(QD1.5) 1
(QD1.6) 1
(QD1.7) 1
(QD1.8) 1
55 not assigned
28 56 Out.Common.Hold Q_Common_Hold Switch-off of the control unit from the AWP (appl.
(BYTE) program) will be set after switch-on, in the case of
FALSE the Vcc will be switched off (Vcc=0)
57 Out.Common.VIQOFF1 Q_VIQOFF1 Activate / passivate VIQOFF of the DIGSYcompact-
(BYTE) Subunit CPU
TRUE -> activate, FALSE -> passivate
The digital outputs QD1.1..1.4 are deactivated in the
case of TRUE.
29 58 Out.Common.SHDN1 Q_SHDN1 Activate / passivate SHDN of the DIGSYcompact-
(BYTE) Subunit CPU
TRUE -> activate, FALSE -> passivate
case of TRUE.
59 See DcS I/O
60 See DcS I/O
61 not assigned
Table 2: Output operands for Subunit CPU
1
1 = Start, 0 = no signal
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 33 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
16.1.3 Configuration operands

Input
128 256 Cfg.DigIn.Used[1] CFG_ID_CPU Using the digital inputs 1 to 8 of DcS CPU (ID1.1 to
(WORD) 1
ID1.12)
128.0 CFG_ID1_1 Using the digital input 1 of DcS CPU (ID1.1)1
128.1 CFG_ID1_2 Using the digital input 2 of DcS CPU(ID1.2) 1
128.12 not assigned

128.13 not assigned
128.14 not assigned
128.15 not assigned
131 262 Cfg.DigIn.Group CFG_ID_GROUP Determining the active level of the digital inputs of
(BYTE) 2
DcSs CPU and I/O
131.0 CFG_ID_GROUP_1 Determining the active level of the digital inputs 1 to 5
of DcS CPU (ID1.1 to ID1.5)2
131.1 CFG_ID_GROUP_2 Determining the active level of the digital inputs 6 to

10 of DcS CPU (ID1.6 to ID1.10) 2
131.2 See DcS I/O

131.3 See DcS I/O
131.4 not assigned
131.5 not assigned
131.6 not assigned
131.7 not assigned
263 not assigned
132 264 Cfg.DigOut.Used CFG_QD Using the digital outputs of DcS CPU and I/O
(WORD) (QD1.1 to QD1.8 and QD2.1 to QD2.8)1
132.0 CFG_QD1_1 Using the digital output 1 of DcS CPU (QD1.1) 1
132.4 CFG_QD1_5 3
Using the digital output 5 of DcS CPU (QD1.5)
1
1 = used as digital input, 0 = not used as digital input
2
1 = plus switching, 0 = ground switching
3
1 = used as digital input
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 34 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Input
132.5 CFG_QD1_6 Using the digital output 6 of DcS CPU (QD1.6)3
265 132.8 See DcS I/O

132.9 See DcS I/O
132.10 See DcS I/O
132.11 See DcS I/O
132.12 See DcS I/O
132.13 See DcS I/O
132.14 See DcS I/O
132.15 See DcS I/O
133 266 Cfg.AnIn.Used CFG_IA_Used Using the analog inputs of DcS CPU and I/O
(BYTE) 1
(IA1.1 to IA1.4+IA2.1 to IA2.4)
133.0 CFG_IA1_1_Used Using the analog input 1 of DcS CPU (IU1.1 or II1.1)1
133.1 CFG_IA1_2_Used Using the analog input 2 of DcS CPU (IU1.2 or II1.2) 1
133.4 See DcS I/O

133.5 See DcS I/O
133.6 See DcS I/O
133.7 See DcS I/O
267 not assigned
134 268 Cfg.AnIn.UpperLimit[1] CFG_IA1_1_LimitUp Upper limit of analog input 1 of DcS CPU (IA1.1) in
(WORD) [Digit] (0 to 1023)
(presently without function)
142 284 Cfg.AnIn.LowerLimit[1] CFG_IA1_1_LimitLow Lower limit of analog input 1 of DcS CPU (IA1.1) in
150 300 Cfg.AnIn.VCC_UpperLi CFG_Vcc_LimitUp Upper limit of input voltage Vcc of DcS CPU in [Digit]
mit (0 to 1023 -> 1Digit corresp. w. 10mV)
(WORD)
151 302 Cfg.AnIn.VIMP_UpperLi CFG_VIMP_LimitUp Upper limit of operating voltage Vimp of DcS CPU in
mit [Digit]
(WORD) (0 to 1023 -> 1Digit corresp. w. 10mV)
152 304 Cfg.AnIn.TEMP_UpperL CFG_TEMP_LimitUp Upper limit of temperature of DcS CPU in [K]
imit (243 to 393)
(WORD)
1
1 = used as analog input, 0 = no meaning
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 35 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
Input
153 306 Cfg.AnIn.RAMPE_Uppe CFG_RAMPE_LimitUp Upper ramp limit of DcS CPU in [Digit]
rLimit (0 to 1023 -> 1Digit corresp. w. 10mV)
(WORD) (presently without function)
154 308 Cfg.AnIn.VCC_LowerLi CFG_Vcc_LimitLow Lower limit of input voltage Vcc of DcS CPU in [Digit]
mit (0 to 1023 -> 1Digit corresp. w. 10mV)
(WORD)
155 310 Cfg.AnIn.VIMP_LowerLi CFG_VIMP_LimitLow Lower limit of operating voltage Vimp of DcS CPU in
mit [Digit]
(WORD) (0 to 1023 -> 1Digit corresp. w. 10mV)
156 312 Cfg.AnIn.TEMP_LowerL CFG_TEMP_LimitLow Lower limit of temperature of DcS CPU in [K]
imit (243 to 393)
(WORD)
157 314 Cfg.AnIn.RAMPE_Lowe CFG_RAMPE_LimitLow Lower ramp limit of DcS CPU in [Digit]
rLimit (0 to 1023 -> 1Digit corresp. w. 10mV)
(WORD) (presently without function)
159 318 Cfg.Cnt.Used CFG_IC Using the counting inputs of DcS CPU and I/O
(BYTE) 1
(IC1.1 to IC1.2+IC2.1 to IC4.2)
159.0 CFG_IC1_1 Using the counting input 1 of DcS CPU (IC1.1) 2
159.1 CFG_IC1_2 Using the counting input 2 of DcS CPU (IC1.2)2
159.2 See DcS I/O
159.3 See DcS I/O
159.4 See DcS I/O
159.5 See DcS I/O
159.6 See DcS I/O
159.7 See DcS I/O
319 See DcS I/O
160 320 Cfg.PWM.Used CFG_QP Using the PWM-outputs 1 to 8 of DcS CPU (QD1.1 to
(BYTE) 3
QD1.8)
160.0 CFG_QP1_1 Using the PWM-output 1 of DcS CPU (QD1.1)3
160.1 CFG_QP1_2 Using the PWM-output 2 of DcS CPU (QD1.2) 3
321 not assigned

161 322 Cfg.Common.Awp CFG_AWPCycle Adjusting a fixed (appl.prog.)AWP-cycletime in [ms]
Cycle (1 to 255)
(BYTE)
323 Cfg.Common.U_12_24 CFG_U_12_24 Determining whether on VIM=24V or VIM=12V
(BYTE) (Values: 12, 24)
162 324 Cfg.Common.CheckSR CFG_CheckSRAM Determining the check of the RAMs at the
AMStartup Startup AWP(appl.prog.)-start of DcS CPU (Representation:
(BYTE) 2#nnnnSSSS)
in the whole RAM (n+1) Bytes each are checked in
step sizes of ((S+1)*16) steps:
S : Step size := S+1 * 16Byte :
! 0 := 16; 1 := 32; 16#F := 256
n : Number Checkbytes := n+1
! 0:= 1; 1 := 2; .. ; 16#F := 16Bytes
Special values:
16#00 -> no check
16#F0 -> check of whole RAM
1
1 = used as counting input
2
3
1 = used as PWM-output
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 36 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Input
325 Cfg.Common.CheckSR CFG_CheckSRAMRun Determining the check of the RAM at the
AMRun AWP(appl.prog.)-start of DcS CPU (Representation:
(BYTE) 2#nnnnSSSS)
in the whole RAM (n+1) Bytes each are checked in
step sizes of ((S+1)*16) steps:
S : Step size := S+1 * 16Byte :
! 0 := 16; 1 := 32; 16#F := 256
n : Number Checkbytes := n+1
! 0:= 1; 1 := 2; .. ; 16#F := 16Bytes
Special values:
16#00 -> no check
16#F0 -> check of the whole RAM
163 326 Cfg.Common.CheckFW CFG_CheckFWStartup Determining the check of the Flash-ROMs at the
Startup AWP(appl. prog.)-start of DcS CPU (Representation:
(BYTE) 2#nnnnmmmm)
m := Mode:
2#0000 := check AWP-CRC (t approx. 100ms/16k)
2#0001 := check AWP-CKS (t approx. 25ms/16k)
2#0010 := check Firmware-CRC
(t approx. 100ms/16k)
2#0011 := check Firmware-CKS
(t approx. 25ms/16k) 2#x1xx := reserved
n := reserved
327 Cfg.Common.CheckFW CFG_CheckFWRun Determining the check of the Flash-ROMs during the
Run running AWP(appl.prog.) (in each cycle) of DcS CPU
(BYTE) (Representation: 2#nnnnmmmm)
m := Mode:
2#0000 := check AWP-CRC
(t approx. 185µs/16BYTE)
2#0001 := check AWP-CKS (t approx. 80µs/16BYTE)
2#0010 := check Firmware- + AWP-CRC
2#0011 := check Firmware- + AWP-CKS
2#0100 := check Firmware-CRC
2#0101 := check Firmware-CKS
2#1xxx := reserved
n := reserved
Special value: 16#00 -> no continuous check
196 392 Cfg.Sys.maxWDreset CFG_MaxWdgReset max. number of Watchdog-Resets, when this number
(WORD) of Watchdog-Resets is reached one after the other,
the AWP(appl. progr.) will be deactivated
197 394 Cfg.Sys.cyclesWDclear CFG_CyclesToClearWdg Number of AWP-cycles after which the internal
(WORD) Watchdog-Reset counter will be reset
198 396 Cfg.Sys.en_emergency CFG_EnableEmergency Mask for EMERGENCY-messages on CAN-Bus:
(BYTE) Default: 0 = issue no message
NO_ERROR= 16#01 := issue normal message
WARNING = 16#02 := issue warnings
USER_ERROR = 16#04 := issue user error
APP_ERROR = 16#08 := issue application error
SYS_ERROR = 16#10 := issue system error
16#01F := issue all
Table 3: Configuration operands for Subunit CPU
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 37 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
16.1.4 System input operands

Input
96 192 SysIn.initialized SYSIN_WasInit Flag for first processing
(BYTE) TRUE -> first AWP(appl.prog.)-run is/was effected
FALSE -> AWP not yet started
193 SysIn.SW_Major SYSIN_CPU_SW_Major Majority-version of the software of DcS CPU
(BYTE)
97 194 SysIn.SW_Minor SYSIN_CPU_SW_Minor Minority-version of the software of DcS CPU
(BYTE)
195 SysIn.SW_Buckfix SYSIN_CPU_SW_Buckfi Buckfix-version of the software of DcS CPU
(BYTE) x
98 196 SysIn.HW_Major SYSIN_CPU_HW_Major Majority-version of the hardware of DcS CPU
(BYTE)
197 SysIn.HW_Minor SYSIN_CPU_HW_Minor Minority-version of the hardware of DcS CPU
(BYTE)
99 198 not assigned
199 SysIn.RetainIdx SYSIN_RetainIdx Current Retain data block
(BYTE)
100 200 SysIn.RetainLength SYSIN_RetainLength Supplies the current Retain data length
(WORD)
101 202 SysIn.RetainPcycles SYSIN_RetainPCycles Number of Retain programming cycles so far
(WORD)
102 204 SysIn.CanType SYSIN_CANType Type of implemented CAN-protocol
(BYTE) 0 -> CANopen
205 SysIn.CanNodeState SYSIN_CANNodeState NMS-state of CAN-node
(BYTE)
103 206 SysIn.ErrorCnt SYSIN_ErrorCnt Supplies the current error counter state
(WORD)
104 208 See DcS I/O
209 See DcS I/O
105 210 See DcS I/O
211 See DcS I/O
106 212 See DcS I/O
213 SysIn.FlManuCode SYSIN_FlManuCode Manufacturing Code of the Flash-EPROM located on
(BYTE) the DcS CPU
107 214 SysIn.FlIdent SYSIN_FlIdent Identity Code of the Flash-EPROM located on the
(BYTE) DcS CPU
Table 4: System input operands for Subunit CPU
16.1.5 System output operands

Input
96 192 SysOut.initialized SYSOUT_WasInit Flag for one-time processing
(BYTE)
193 SysOut.set_CanType SYSOUT_setCANType Sets the type of the CAN-protocol:
(BYTE) 0 -> CANopen
97 194 SysOut.set_CanNodeSt SYSOUT_setCANNodeSt Sets the NMS-state of the CAN-node
ate ate
(BYTE)
Table 5: System output operands for Subunit CPU
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 38 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
16.2 Operands for Subunit I/O 4885.68.001
16.2.1 Input operands

Input
1 2 In.DigIn.Value[2] ID2 All digital inputs of DcS I/O (ID2.1..ID2.12)
(WORD)
1.0 ID2_1 Digital input 1 of DcS I/O (ID2.1)
3 1.8 ID2_9 Digital input 9 of DcS I/O (ID2.9)
1.15 not assigned
2 4 In.DigIn.Value[3] QD2_AS_ID3 Digital outputs of DcS I/O, configured as digital inputs
(WORD) (QD2.1..QD2.8)
2.0 QD2_1_AS_ID3_1 Digital output 1 of DcS I/O, configured as digital input
(QD2.1)
(QD2.2)
(QD2.3)
(QD2.4)
(QD2.5)
(QD2.6)
(QD2.7)
(QD2.8)
5 2.8 not assigned
2.9 not assigned
2.10 not assigned
2.11 not assigned
2.12 not assigned
2.13 not assigned
2.14 not assigned
2.15 not assigned
2.16 not assigned
7 14 In.AnIn.Value[5] IA2_1 Analog input 1 of DcS I/O (IU2.1 or II2.1)
(WORD)
(WORD)
(WORD)
(WORD)
19 38 In.Cnt.Value[3] IC2_1 Counting input 1 of DcS I/O (IC2.1)
(DINT)
(DINT)
(DINT)
(DINT)
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 39 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
Input

(DINT)
(DINT)
33 66 In.Cnt.Velocity[3] IC2_1_Velo Velocity on counting input 1 of DcS I/O (IC2.1)
53 106 In.CAN.Active CANActive_In Indication as to whether communication partner
(BYTE) transmits within DcS I/O or not
(1 -> cyclic transmission
2 -> WRN(Activ. of SHDN)
4 -> BOFF(Activ. of SHDN))
54 108 In.CAN.Data.. From this point on the input data come from the CAN-
(BYTE) Bus of DcS I/O
Permissible data types: TCanIOMobaRx,
TCanIOJ1939Rx
Table 6: Input operands for Subunit I/O
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 40 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
16.2.2 Output operands

Input
0 0 Out.DigOut.Value QD All digital outputs of DcS CPU+I/O (QD1.1..QD1.8
(WORD) and QD2.1..QD2.8)
0.1 See DcS CPU
0.2 See DcS CPU
0.3 See DcS CPU
0.4 See DcS CPU
0.5 See DcS CPU
0.6 See DcS CPU
0.7 See DcS CPU
1 0.8 QD2_1 Digital output 1 of DcS I/O (QD2.1)
0.9 QD2_2 Digital output 2 of DcS I/O (QD2.2)
3 6 Out.Cnt.TimeWnd[3] IC2_1_TimeWnd Time window of the counting inputs 1 of DcS I/O in
(WORD) [ms]
4 8 Out.Cnt.TimeWnd[4] IC2_2_TimeWnd Time window of the counting input 2 of DcS I/O in
(WORD) [ms]
(WORD) [ms]
(WORD) [ms]
(WORD) [ms]
(WORD) [ms]
9 18 Out.Cnt.Start IC_Start Start/Stop of counting on the counting inputs of DcSs
(BYTE) CPU and I/O
(IC1.1..IC1.2 and IC2.1..IC4.2 an ID1.11..ID1.12 and
ID2.9..2.14) 1
9.0 See DcS CPU
9.1 See DcS CPU
9.2 IC_2_1_Start Start of counting on the counting input 1 of DcS I/O
1
(IC2.1)
(IC2.2) 1
(IC3.1) 1
(IC3.2) 1
(IC4.1) 1
(IC4.2) 1
19 Out.Cnt.Reset IC_Reset Resetting the counter values (with concurrent
(BYTE) stopping) on the counting inputs of DcSs CPU and I/O
(IC1.1..IC1.2 and IC2.1..IC4.2 an ID1.11..ID1.12 and
ID2.9..2.14)
9.8 See DcS CPU
9.9 See DcS CPU
stopping) on the counting input 1 of DcS I/O
(IC2.1 or ID2.11) 2
(IC2.2 or ID2.12)
(IC3.1 or ID2.9)
1
1 = Start, 0 = Stop
2
1 = Reset
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 41 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
Input
(IC3.2 or ID2.10)
(IC4.1 or ID2.13)
(IC4.2 or ID2.14)
10 20 Out.AnOut.Value[1] QAI1 Output current value of the analog output 1 of DcS I/O
(WORD) (QAI1) [digits]
(0 to 1023 digits = 0 to +20mA)
(0 to 1023 digits = 0 to +20mA)
(0 to 1023 digits = 0 to +20mA)
(0 to 1023 digits = 0 to +20mA)
59 Out.Common.VIQOFF2 Q_VIQOFF2 Activate / passivate VIQOFF of the DcS I/O
(BYTE) TRUE -> activating, FALSE -> passivating
case of TRUE.
30 60 Out.Common.SHDN2 Q_SHDN2 Activate / passivate SHDN of the DcS I/O
(BYTE) TRUE -> activating, FALSE -> passivating
case of TRUE.
61 not assigned
31 62 Out.CAN.Mode Q_CAN_Mode
(BYTE)
63 Out.CAN.Timeout Q_CAN_Timeout Timeout of the CAN of DcS I/O in [10ms]
(BYTE) (0 = no Timeout)
32 64 Out.CAN.Speed Q_CAN_Speed Speed of the CAN of DcS CPU (EcanSpeed) – See
(WORD) Prosyd.lib
33 66 Out.CAN.xxx From here all output-PDOs of the CAN-bus
Permissible data types: TCanIOMobaTx,
TCanIOJ1939Tx
Table 7: Output operands for Subunit I/O
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 42 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
16.2.3 Configuration operands

Input
129 258 Cfg.DigIn.Used[21] CFG_ID_IO Using the digital inputs of DcS I/O (ID2.1 to ID2.14)1
(WORD)
129.0 CFG_ID2_1 Using the digital input 1 of DcS I/O (ID2.1) 1
129.9 CFG_ID2_10 Using the digital input 10 of DcS I/O (ID2.10)
129.14 not assigned

129.15 not assigned
130 260 Cfg.DigIn.Used[3] CFG_QD_AS_ID Using the digital outputs of DcS I/O as digital inputs
1
(WORD) (QD2.1 to QD2.8)
130.0 CFG_QD2_1_AS_ID Using the digital output 1 of DcS I/O as digital input
(QD2.1) 1
(QD2.2) 1
(QD2.3) 1
(QD2.4) 1
1
(QD2.5)
(QD2.6) 1
(QD2.7) 1
(QD2.8) 1
130.8 not assigned
130.9 not assigned
130.10 not assigned
130.11 not assigned
130.12 not assigned
130.13 not assigned
130.14 not assigned
130.15 not assigned
131 262 Cfg.DigIn.Group CFG_ID_GROUP Determining the active level of the digital inputs of
(BYTE) 2
DcS CPU and I/O
1
2
1 = plus switching, 0 = ground switching
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 43 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
Input
131.0 See DcS CPU
131.1 See DcS CPU
of DIGSYcompact-module I/O
(ID2.1 to ID2.4)2

of DIGSYcompact-module I/O
(ID2.5 to ID2.8) 2
131.4 not assigned

131.5 not assigned
131.6 not assigned
131.7 not assigned
263 not assigned
132 264 Cfg.DigOut.Used CFG_QD Using the digital outputs of DcS CPU and I/O
(WORD) 1
(QD1.1 to QD1.8 and QD2.1 to QD2.8)
265 132.8 CFG_QD2_1 Using the digital output 1 of DcS I/O (QD2.1)3
132.9 CFG_QD2_2 Using the digital output 2 of DcS I/O (QD2.2) 3
133 266 Cfg.AnIn.Used CFG_IA_Used Using the analog inputs of DcS CPU and I/O
(BYTE) (IU1.1 to IU1.4+IU2.1 to IU2.4) 2
133.0 See DcS CPU

133.1 See DcS CPU
133.2 See DcS CPU
133.3 See DcS CPU
133.4 CFG_IA2_1_Used Using the analog input 1 of DcS I/O (IA2.1)1
133.5 CFG_IA2_2_Used Using the analog input 2 of DcS I/O (IA2.2) 1
267 not assigned

138 276 Cfg.AnIn.UpperLimit[5] CFG_IA1_5_LimitUp Upper limit of analog input 1 of DcS I/O (IA2.1) in
146 292 Cfg.AnIn.LowerLimit[5] CFG_IA2_1_LimitLow Lower limit of analog input 1 of DcS I/O (IA2.1) in
1
2
1 = used as analog input
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 44 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Input
158 316 Cfg.AnOut.Used CFG_QAI Using the analog outputs 1-4 of DcS I/O (QI1 to
(BYTE) 1
QI4)
158.0 CFG_QAI1 Using the analog output 1 of DcS I/O (QI1)1
158.1 CFG_QAI2 Using the analog output 2 of DcS I/O (QI2) 1
158.4 not assigned

158.5 not assigned
158.6 not assigned
158.7 not assigned
317 not assigned
159 318 Cfg.Cnt.Used CFG_IC Using the counting inputs of DcS CPU and I/O
(BYTE) (IC1.1 to IC1.2+IC2.1 to IC4.2) 2
159.0 See DcS CPU
159.1 See DcS CPU
159.2 CFG_IC2_1 3
Using the counting input 1 of DcS I/O (IC2.1)
159.3 CFG_IC2_2 Using the counting input 2 of DcS I/O (IC2.2)2
159.4 CFG_IC3_1 Using the counting input 3 of DcS I/O (IC3.1) 2
319 Cfg.Cnt.AB CFG_AB Using the counting inputs of DcS I/O as AB-counter
(BYTE) (IC2.1 to IC4.2) 2
159.8 CFG_IC2_AB_1 Using the counting input IC2 of DcS I/O as AB-
counter (A-Signal) (IC2.1) 2
counter (B-Signal) (IC2.2) 2
159.14 not assigned
159.15 not assigned
164 328 Cfg.CAN.Mode CFG_CAN_Mode Adjustable CAN-protocols of the DcS I/O (customer-
(BYTE) specific)
(0 – no, 1 - MOBA, 2 – Caterpillar-J1939,
3 – Deutz J1939)
329 Cfg.CAN.Timeout CFG_CAN_Timeout CAN-Timeout of DcS I/O in [10ms]
(BYTE) (0 -> no Timeout)
165 330 Cfg.CAN.Speed CFG_CAN_Speed Baud rate of CAN of DcS I/O in
(EcanSpeed) [EcanSpeed (See Prosyd.lib)]
Table 8: Configuration operands for Subunit I/O
1
1 = used as analog output
2
3
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 45 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
16.2.4 System input operands
Input
96 192 See DcS CPU
193 See DcS CPU
97 194 See DcS CPU
195 See DcS CPU
98 196 See DcS CPU
197 See DcS CPU
99 198 not assigned
199 See DcS CPU
100 200 See DcS CPU
101 202 See DcS CPU
102 204 See DcS CPU
205 See DcS CPU
103 206 See DcS CPU
104 208 SysIn.IO_SW_Major SYSIN_IO_SW_Major Majority-version of the software of DcS I/O
(BYTE)
209 SysIn.IO_SW_Minor SYSIN_IO_SW_Minor Minority-version of the software of DcS I/O
(BYTE)
105 210 SysIn.IO_SW_Buckfix SYSIN_IO_SW_Buckfix Buckfix-version of the software of DcS I/O
(BYTE)
211 SysIn.IO_HW_Major SYSIN_IO_HW_Major Majority-version of the hardware of DcS I/O
(BYTE)
106 212 SysIn.IO_HW_Minor SYSIN_IO_HW_Minor Minority-version of the hardware of DcS I/O
(BYTE)
213 See DcS CPU
107 214 See DcS CPU
Table 9: System input operands for Subunit I/O
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 46 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
16.3 Storage of Formulations, Constants, and Data

See documentation on PROSYD 1131 Type 4395.20.100.
16.4 CANopen
See documentation on PROSYD 1131 Type 4395.20.100.
17 SAFETY FUNCTIONS AND DIAGNOSIS

♦ Watch-Dog
♦ Undervoltage detection
♦ Measurement of internal housing temperature
♦ Digital inputs:
The function of the inputs ID1.1 to ID1.10 (Subunit CPU) and ID2.1 to ID2.8 (Subunit I/O) is
cyclically checked with a test stimulus.
♦ Analog inputs:
The AD-converter, multiplexer and reference voltage are cyclically checked by an analog
stimulation signal (not yet implemented).
♦ Digital outputs:
The load current for the digital outputs QD1.1 to QD1.8 is measurable. Short circuits towards
ground and line interruptions of the load are detected. In the case of overvoltage or undervoltage an
automatic switch-off is effected. The device is already equipped with a free-wheeling diode for an
operation at inductive loads.
The signal levels of the digital outputs QD2.1 to QD2.8 are backreadable. Short circuits towards
ground are detected. In the case of overvoltage and undervoltage they are automatically switched-
off. The device is already equipped with a free-wheeling diode for an operation at inductive loads.
Characteristics QD1.1 to QD1.8 QD2.1 to QD2.8

Current measurement X -
Backreadability - X
Short circuit detection towards GND X X
Short circuit capability X X
Wire-break detection X -
Switch-off in the case of overvoltage X X
Switch-off in the case of undervoltage X X
Free-wheeling diode X X
Table 10: Characteristics of the digital outputs
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 47 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
♦ Analog outputs:
The analog outputs QA2.1 to QA2.4 are short-circuit-proof and protected against polarity reversal.
♦ Memory test:
Memory tests for firmware-Flash and main memory can be configured within the application
program. The firmware-Flash is protected via a CRC. The main memory (RAM) is tested in
sections. The tests can be carried out at the start of the system or during the running time of the
application program.
The application program (AWP) and stored formulations and constants (retained data) are secured
via CRCs which are checked each time at the system start.
♦ Error memory:
All the detected system errors of the device are mapped in an error memory (circulating memory
with 32 error entries).
The error memory can be evaluated by the application program (AWP). Via the AWP it is also
possible to make entries in the error memory.
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 48 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
17.1 Error Coding

Source of Error Cause Error-Code Errr- Channel Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Type Action
Reg.
Word Byte Word Word of
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
0xxxH
General error in operating 1001H ERR_LOCAT_ANIN System

system ERR_LOCAT_COU
NTER
ERR_LOCAT_DIGIN
ERR_LOCAT_DIGO
UT
ERR_LOCAT_PWM
ERR_LOC_SSC
Unknown error 1002H System
2xxxH
Ana. Inputs (Current) MIN/MAX !!! 3102H (12546dec) 4H Channel 1-4 Limit MIN/MAX Actual in Digit App-Err M _ _ _ _ _
Module supply Overvoltage/ 3100H (12544dec) 4H 0 : VIM Preset value Actual value App- M _ _ _ UIO
undervoltage state 1: VCC Preset value Err
2: VIQ-CPU 1
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 49 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
3: VIQ-IO 1
Dig. Inputs Test stimulus 0x3101 Chan.1-12: CPU Preset value Actual value Appl.-
Error
Chan. 16-23: IO
Ana. Inputs (Voltage) MIN/MAX 3102H (12546dec) 4H Chan. 1-4:CPU Limit MIN/MAX Act. val. in Digit Warning M _ _ _ _ _
5-6 : IO
ADC-Ramp MIN/MAX 3103H (12546dec) 4H 0 Limit MIN/MAX Act. val. in Digit Warning M _ _ _ _ _
Source of error Cause Error-Code Errr- Channel Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Type Action
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
0xxxH
General error in operating 1001H ERR_LOCAT_ANIN System

system ERR_LOCAT_COU
NTER
ERR_LOCAT_DIGIN
ERR_LOCAT_DIGO
UT
ERR_LOCAT_PWM
ERR_LOC_SSC
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 50 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
Unknown error 1002H System
2xxxH
Ana. Inputs (Current) MIN/MAX !!! 3102H (12546dec) 4H Channel 1-4 Limit MIN/MAX Act. val. in Digit App-Err M _ _ _ _ _
Module supply Overvoltage/ 3100H (12544dec) 4H 0 : VIM Preset value Actual value App- M _ _ _ UIO
undervoltage state 1: VCC Preset value Err
2: VIQ-CPU 1
3: VIQ-IO 1
Dig. Inputs Test stimulus 0x3101 Chan.1-12: CPU Preset value Actual value App-
error
Chan. 16-23: IO
Ana. Inputs (Voltage) MIN/MAX 3102H (12546dec) 4H Channel Limit MIN/MAX Act. val. in Digit Warning M _ _ _ _ _
1-4:CPU
5-6 : IO
ADC-Ramp MIN/MAX 3103H (12546dec) 4H 0 Limit MIN/MAX Act. val. in Digit Warning M _ _ _ _ _
Back-up supply voltage Min/MAX 3200H (12800dec) 1H 2 2100 = Min. Act. val. in mV Warning M _ _ _ _ _
500= no battery
Counter reference 3250 1 tbd tbd tbd Warning M _ _ _ _ _
Digital Outputs Backreading 3301H (13057dec) 4H Chan. 1-8: CPU previous state new state Warning M _ _ _ _ _
Chan. 9-16: IO
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 51 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
Internal Temperature 4100H (16896dec) 8H 0 Limit min/max Act.val. in dgrs. Warning M _ _ _ _ _
RAM Write test 55 / AA 5002H (20482dec) 01H 0=Init Address low Address high System Init:
Faulty 1=running M _ S _ _ _
!!! Run:
M R S _ _ _
Flash (HW) Write/Delete 5003H (20483dec) 01H 0 = delete Address low Address high System M _ S _ _ _
1 = write
2 = ill. access
AD-converter !!! 5004H
Watchdog !!! 5005H (20485dec) 01H
ADC/Reference !!! 5007H (20487dec) 01H
CAN-Controller !!! 5010H (20496dec) 01H Bit1: overrun
Bit2: bus-off
Bit 6: rx-queue
Bit 15:tx-queue
Real-time clock !!! 5030 (20528dec) 01H
Checksum Firmware Checksum 6100H (dec) 1H 0 : CPU Checksum- Checksum- System M _ S _ _ _

1: IO preset value actual value
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 52 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
Re-initialization Download 6201H (dec) 01 Warning M _ _ _ _ _

AWP New start
CANopen-NMS/DLL 6120 H (24864dec) 10 Bit1: overrun 0 0 Error M _ _ _ _ _
System
Bit2: bus-off
Bit 6: rx-queue CAN-Offline!!!
Bit 15:tx-queue
CANopen-SDO-Transfer 6121H (24865dec) 10 SDO-Channel 1: ill. Rx-Handle 255 : not active Warning M _ _ _ _ _
(=Node-No.) 2: ill. SDO- 128: Aborted
Cmnd Length
3: Toggle-Error Toggle-Status
4: Rx-Error
5: ill. Length
6: Tx-error
7: Abort Error
8: Time-out
CAN-NMT Node monitoring 6122H (24866dec) 10 Node-No. 1: Guard error Node-state Warning M _ _ _ _ _
2: State error
CANopen-Initialization 6123H (24867dec) 10 Bit0 Init 1 10 M _ S _ _ _

/Configuration Bit1 Net-Init 1 0 Reset-Nodes
1 1 Start Guarding
1 2 Set State
Bit2 ill. Net-State Node-State 0
Bit9 gen. Obj. 1 Maximum
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 53 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
Bit10 Manuf. Obj 1 Maximum
Bit11PDO-Obj 1 0 = PDO
1= PDO-Mapping
Bit13 Net-Obj 1
Bit14 DCF-Obj
Bit15 DeviceObj
canopen-Concised DCF 6124H (24868dec) 10 1: gen. Error C-DCF-Index CANopen index Warning M _ _ _ _ _
2: illegal Index
3: ill. Subindex
4: Read_only
5:Value-overflow
6:Val.-underflow
7:ill. Type
8 Type length >
9 Type length <
10 no Mapping
11 PDO-length >
12 ill. value
13 toggle-Bit
14 Obj not exist
15 local error
16 service error
17 load /save
18 gen.Interrupt
canopen-init PDOs 6125H (24869dec) 10 0: Rx-PDOs PDO-No. COB-ID Warning M _ _ _ _ _

1: Tx-PDOs
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 54 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
Arithmetic error Error in AWP-Block 6200H (25088dec) 1H Block-No. Addition: ±1 Warning M _ _ _ _ _

Subtraction: ±2
Multiplication: ±3
Division: ±4
Allocation.32-16Bit: ±5
Allocation.32/16-8: ±6
MD-Addition : ±8
MD-Subtraction: ±9
MD-Multiplication: ±10
MD-Division: ±11
QW-Alloc. 32-16: ±12
Watchdog-error 10 times Wdog 6201H (25089dec) 1H 1 0 0 System M _ S _ _ _
Checksums Checksum 6302H (25346dec) 1H 0 Block type Block No. System M _ S _ _ _

Application Progr. Block 1-63 1 or 0 or
checks. act.value checks. pres. val.
Checksum Checksum 6303H (25347dec) 1H 0-63 1 or checksum 1 or checksum Warning M _ _ _ _ _
User data block actual value preset value
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 55 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
Dynamic memory no memory available 6320H (25348dec) 1H 1: Near Heap requested available memory System M _ S _ _ _
(Heap) 2: Far Heap memory
128: CAN
2048: Display
SSC Transmission error to 7001H ( ) 0 Error number absolute

IO-Subunit error number
COM-SP/SK 8000H (32768dec) 10H 0 = COM-Sp Bit-No: Error counter Warning M _ _ _ _ _

1= COM-SK 0 Data overflow
1 Frame Error
2 Parity Error
3 illeg Start
character
4 Length1 !=
Length2
5 Length = 0
6 Startchar. 1 !
= Start char..2
7 Dest.address > 15
8 Mast. addr. != FFH
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 56 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
Reg.
Byte
Error M R S x x UIO
9 illegal Data length
10 Checksum error
11 ill. End charact.
12 Rx-level to 0
13 Idletime fall. below
14 Rx-buffer overflow
15 no initialization or
Buffer empty
9xxxH
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 57 / 68

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
18 PIN ASSIGNMENT SUBUNIT CPU1

Dig. Dig. Ana. Ana. Coun PWM
Pin Signal In Out In Out In Out Explanation
1 VIQ1 Input supply voltage for power outputs (connected with Pin2)
2 VIQ1 Input supply voltage for power outputs (connected with Pin1)
3 GNDA1 Ground pin for analog input signals
4 IAV1.1 ● Analog input 1 (0 to +10V, not to be connected, if IAI1.1 is used)
9 ID1.11 ● ● Digital input 11 (also usable as counting input IC1.1 )
11 GND Ground pin
12 CAN_L1.1 CAN-interface 1, Low signal
13 CAN_H1.1 CAN-interface 1, High signal
14 GND Ground pin
15 ILDN1 Input Boot loader (must not be connected by user!)
16 IRI1 Input Ring Indicator RS232-interface 1
17 QTXD2 Output Transmit RS232-interface 2
18 IRXD1 Input Receive RS232-interface1
19 GND Ground pin
20 VIM1 Infeed supply voltage for control logic
22 IAI1.1 ● Analog input 1 (0 to +20mA,
not to be connected, if IAV1.1 is used)
2
27 ID1.9 ● Digital input 9 (switchable: Ground/Plus switching Group 1B)
28 ID1.10 ●1 Digital input 10 (switchable: Ground/Plus switching Group 1B)
29 PE1 Housing potential
(ext. connection GND-PE1 applies GND to housing potential)
32 CAN_TR1 CAN terminating resistor (optionally to be connected to CAN_H1.2)
33 GND Ground pin
34 IDCD1 Input Data Carrier Detect RS232-interface 1
35 IRXD2 Input Receive RS232-interface 2
36 QTXD1 Output Transmit RS232-interface 1
37 GND Ground pin
38 IPON Input Vehicle ignition switch
3
39 ID1.1 ● Digital input 1 (switchable: ground/plus switching Group 1A)
40 ID1.2 ●2 Digital input 2 (switchable: ground/plus switching Group 1A)
44 ID1.6 ●1 Digital input 6 (switchable: ground/plus switching Group 1B)
47 GND Ground pin
48 QD1.1 ● ● Digital output 1 (also usable as PWM-output )
1
For firmware versions from V1.2.1 up
2
Group 1B (ID1.6...ID1.10), switchable: ground/plus switching
3
Group 1A (ID1.1...ID1.5), switchable: ground/plus switching
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 59 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
19 PIN ASSIGNMENT SUBUNIT I/O1

Dig. Dig. Ana. Ana. Coun PWM
Pin Signal In Out In Out In Out Explanation
1 VIQ2 Input supply voltage for power outputs (connected with Pin 2)
2 VIQ2 Input supply voltage for power outputs (connected with Pin 1)
2
11 GND Ground pin
14 GND Ground pin
15 QAI2.1 ● Analog output 1 (0 to +20mA)
19 GND Ground pin
20 VQQS2 Output Actuator supply,
will be switched off in case of an error (2nd cut-off channel),
not in all device variants available.
IAI2.2 ● Analog input 2 (0 to +20mA,
not to be connected, if IAV2.2 is used))
29 GND Ground pin
32 CAN_TR2 CAN terminating resistor (optionally to be connected to CAN_H2.2)
33 GND Ground pin
36 IPRG Input programming voltage (must not be connected!)
37 GND Ground pin
38 not assigned
47 GND Ground pin
48 QD2.1 ● ● Digital output 1 (also usable as digital input )
1
For firmware versions from V1.2.1 up
2
IC2, IC3 and IC4 each can also be configured as phase-coded pairs of counting inputs.
3
Group 2A (ID2.1...ID2.4), switchable: ground/plus switching
4
Group 2B (ID2.5...ID2.8), switchable: ground/plus switching
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 60 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
20 TECHNICAL DATA FOR SUBUNIT CPU

20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
TU = 25°C
Signal Definition min. max. Unit

VIQ1 Operating voltage of the outputs on Subunit CPU 0 40 V
Operating current VIQ1 0 20 A
VIM1 Operating voltage Logic and Back-up supply 0 40 V
IDx.y max. Input voltage per digital input 0 40 V
IAVx.y max. Input voltage per analog input 0 40 V
IAIx.y max. Input current per analog input 0 35 mA
ICx.y max. Input voltage per counting input 0 40 V
max. Load capability per digital output 0 2.5 A
max. Load capability w. 2 digital outputs conn. in parallel 0 3.8 A
TU Component ambient temperature -40 +85 °C
TL Storage temperature -40 +85 °C
20.2 Dynamic Properties

1
for VIQ1 = 24V; TU = 25°C
20.2.1 Voltage supply

VIM1 = +12V VIM1 = +24V
Signal Definition min. typ. max. min. typ. max. Unit
VIQ1 Operating voltage of the outputs 9 --- 32 9 --- 32 V
Operating current of VIQ1 0 --- 16 0 --- 16 A
VIM Oper. voltage Logic and back-up supply 8 --- 16 16 --- 32 V
Operating current VIM1 in normal mode --- 80 160 --- 40 160 mA
Oper. current VIM1 in back-up mode --- 2.3 --- --- 2.3 --- mA
IPON Switch on / off Ignition switch 8 --- 32 8 --- 32 V
Operating current IPON --- 250 1000 --- 500 1000 µA
1
unless otherwise specified
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 61 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
20.2.2 Digital inputs

VIM = +12V VIM = +24V
ID1.1.to Input voltage per input 0 --- 32 0 --- 32 V
ID1.8
ID1.1.to Max. LOW - level per input --- --- 2.70 --- --- 5.50 V
ID1.8 Min. HIGH - level per input 5.85 --- --- 11.40 --- --- V
plus-
Switch-ON time from"1" → "0" 140 200 140 70.7 110 170 µs
switch-
ing Switch-OFF time from "0" → "1" 8 20 32 2 5 8 µs
2
ID1.8 Min. HIGH - level per input
2
5.8 --- --- 11.30 --- --- V
ground 2
Switch-ON time from "0" → "1" 30 --- 130 14 --- 65 µs
switch- 2
Switch-OFF time from "1" → "0" 84 --- 280 42 --- 140.0 µs
ing
ID1.1.to Input impedance per input --- 10 --- --- 10 --- kΩ
ID1.8
20.2.3 Digital inputs or counting inputs

VIM = +12V VIM = +24V
Signal Definition min. typ. max. min. typ. max Unit
ID1.1 Max. LOW - level per input --- --- 2.70 --- --- 5.40 V
to Min. HIGH - level per input 5.80 --- --- 11.30 --- --- V
ID1.12
Switch-ON time from "0" → "1" 2.0 4.5 9.0 1.0 2.5 4.5 µs
Switch-OFF time from "1" → "0" 8.8 16.5 29.0 3.7 6.7 12.0 µs
Input impedance per input --- 10 --- --- 10 --- kΩ

Voltage inputs Current inputs
IAVx.y Input voltage per voltage input 0 --- 10 V
IAIx.y Input current per current input 0 --- 20 mA
Precision per input --- 0.5 1.30 --- 0.4 0.8 ±%
Cut-off frequency per input 3 3.6 4 2 2.2 2.5 kHz
Input impedance per current input --- 500 --- --- 500 --- Ω
Input impedance per voltage input --- 250 --- --- 250 --- kΩ
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 62 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
20.2.5 Digital outputs

VIM = +24V
Signal Definition min. typ. max. Unit
IQOFF Output current per digital output in Off-state --- 24 --- µA
1 2
IQONNENN Output current per digital output in On-state --- 1.5 --- A
3
IQon Output current per digital output in On-state --- 1.5 2.5 A
4
IQon Output current per digital output in On-state with 2 channels in --- 3.0 3.8 A
parallel
5
parallel
20.3 Standards
Degree of protection with enclosure acc. to DIN 40050 IP66K
CE – conformity in process
EMC guidelines EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
EMC testing DIN 40839-1/-3/-4
Environmental test Vibrations IEC 68 Part 2-6
Environmental test Shock IEC 68 Part 2-27
Environmental test Dry heat IEC 68 Part 2-2
Environmental test Humid heat IEC 68 Part 2-3, IEC 68 Part 2-30
Environmental test Cold IEC 68 Part 2-1
Environm. test Change of Temp. IEC 68 Part 2-14
DCP-Subunit connector FCI DCS-1 Nominal data: Max. current carrying capacity of each pin 20 A @ 85°C
(15 A @ 100°C), Temp.-range –40 .. +120°C, Degr. of protection IP 67
1
With the nominal current all outputs can be permanently operated at the same time!
2
At 100% c.d.f.
3
One output each of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated with the indicated max. current, if all the other outputs of the same
group are switched off at the time of the loading.
4
Two outputs each of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated in parallel with the indicated max. current, if the two other outputs of
the same group are switched off at the time of the loading.
5
The four outputs of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated in parallel with the current indicated here. It may happen that the
current reaches only 5.9A, so that the expected current of 4 * 1.5A is slightly fallen short of! It is advisable to realize the real current load IL by
connecting n outputs in parallel, so that the following applies: n * IQonNENN ≥ IL !
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 63 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
21 TECHNICAL DATA FOR SUBUNIT I/O

TU = 25°C
Signal Definition min. max. Unit

VIQ2 Operating voltage of the outputs on Subunit I/O 0 40 V
Operating current VIQ2 0 20 A
IDx.y max. Input voltage per digital input 0 40 V
IAVx.y max. Input voltage per analog input 0 40 V
IAIx.y max. Input current per analog input 0 35 mA
max. Load capability per digital output 0 2.5 A
TU Ambient temperature -40 +85 °C
TL Storage temperature -40 +85 °C
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 64 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100

1
for TU = 25°C; VIQ2 = 24V
21.2.1 Voltage supply

VIM = +12V VIM = +24V
VIQ2 Operating voltage of the outputs on 9 --- 32 9 --- 32 V
Subunit I/O
Operating current of VIQ2 0 --- 16 0 --- 16 A
21.2.2 Digital inputs

VIM = +12V VIM = +24V
ID2.1.to Input voltage per input 0 --- 32 0 --- 32 V
ID2.8
ID2.8 Min. HIGH - level per input 5.85 --- --- 11.40 --- --- V
plus-
Switch-ON time from "1" → "0" 140 200 140 70.7 110 170 µs
switch-
ing Switch-OFF time from "0" → "1" 8 20 32 2 5 8 µs
2
ID2.8 Min. HIGH - level per input
2
5.8 --- --- 11.30 --- --- V
ground 2
Switch-ON time from "0" → "1" 30 --- 130 14 --- 65 µs
switch- 2
Switch-OFF time from "1" → "0" 84 --- 280 42 --- 140.0 µs
ing
ID2.1.to Input impedance per input --- 10 --- --- 10 --- kΩ
ID2.8
21.2.3 Digital inputs or counting inputs

VIM = +12V VIM = +24V
ID2.9 Max. LOW - level per input --- --- 2.70 --- --- 5.40 V
to Min. HIGH - level per input 5.8 --- --- 11.30 --- --- V
ID2.14 Switch-ON time from "0" → "1" 2.0 --- 9.0 1.0 --- 4.5 µs
Switch-OFF time from "1" → "0" 8 --- 30 3.5 --- 12 µs
Input impedance per input --- 10 --- --- 10 --- kΩ
1
unless otherwise specified
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 65 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual

Voltage inputs Current inputs
IAVx.y Input voltage per voltage input 0 --- 10 V
IAIx.y Input current per current input 0 --- 20 mA
Precision per input --- 0.5 1.30 --- 0.1 0.2 ±%
Cut-off frequency per input 3 3.6 4 2 2.2 2.5 kHz
Input impedance per current input --- 500 --- --- 500 --- Ω
Input impedance per voltage input --- 250 --- --- 250 --- kΩ
21.2.5 Digital outputs

VIM = +24V
Signal Definition min. typ. max. Unit
QD2.1 Number of the digital output channels 8
to
QD2.8
1 2
IQONNENN Output current per digital output in On-state --- 1.5 --- A
3 2
IQon Output current per digital output in On-state --- 1.5 2.5 A
4 2
parallel
5 2
parallel
21.2.6 Analog outputs
Signal Definition min. typ. max Unit

Output current per current output 0 --- 20 mA
min. or max. Load resistance per analog output 0 --- 300 Ω
Precision per output 2 ±%
1
With the nominal current all outputs can be permanently operated at the same time!
2
At 100% c.d.f.
3
One output each of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated with the indicated max. current, if all the other outputs of the same
group are switched off at the time of the loading.
4
Two outputs each of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated in parallel with the indicated max. current, if the two other outputs of
the same group are switched off at the time of the loading.
5
The four outputs of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated in parallel with the current indicated here. It may happen that the
current reaches only 5.9A, so that the expected current of 4 * 1.5A is slightly fallen short of! It is advisable to realize the real current load IL by
connecting n outputs in parallel, so that the following applies: n * IQonNENN ≥ IL!
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 66 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

digsycompact
Manual 4885.27.100
21.3 Standards
Degree of protection with enclosure acc. to DIN 40050 IP66K

CE – conformity in process
EMC testing DIN 40839-1/-3/-4
Environmental test Dry heat IEC 68 Part 2-2
Environm. test Change of temp. IEC 68 Part 2-14
DCP-Subunit Connector FCI DCS-1 Nominal data: Max. current carrying capacity of each pin 20 A @ 85°C
(15 A @ 100°C), Temp.-range –40 .. +120°C, Degr. of protection IP 67
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
04 – 68 248000/A Page 67 / 68

digsycompact
4885.27.100 Manual
22 NOTES
Stored: 23.02.2000
Printed: 05.07.2001
Page 68 / 68 04 – 68 248000/A

Manual
DM01 / DI01
4885.64
Drawing Number: 04 – 68 225 000/A

Issued: 22.07.99
Stored: 22.07.99
Printed: 17.10.00
Version: V 1.00
File name: 68225A_ENG.DOC
PCB - No.: 04 – 65 318 (CCN) / 320 (DCP-SU)
Prepared by: Michael Breu
Distr. code: 40 41 42 43
The details and data in this document are regularly checked and updated and are at any time subject to change without
notice. The document includes information that enjoys protection of copyright. No part of this publication may be
reproduced or translated into other languages without the prior written permission of INTER CONTROL.
INTER CONTROL
Hermann Köhler Elektrik GmbH & Co. KG
Schafhofstraße 30
D - 90411 Nürnberg / Germany
Tel.: (0911) 9522-5; Fax: (0911) 9522-857

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Table of Contents
1 Safety Notes for the User .................................................................................5

1.1 General Notes - Warranty - Liability .........................................................................................5
1.2 Qualified Personnel....................................................................................................................6
1.3 Hazards .......................................................................................................................................6
1.4 Normal Use .................................................................................................................................7
1.5 Notes on Product Installation.....................................................................................................7
1.6 Active and Passive Faults of an Automation System.............................................................9
1.7 How to Proceed in the Event of Maintenance or Repair..................................................... 10
1.8 How to Proceed when Carrying Out Welding Jobs ............................................................. 11
1.9 How to Proceed in the Case of Quick Charging.................................................................. 11
1.10 How to Render Starting Aid ................................................................................................... 12
2 Connecting the Protective Conductor ..........................................................12
3 Utilization Category / Temp. Range ...............................................................12
4 Wiring Proposal for Switchgear Cabinet.......................................................13
5 Module Installation or Exchange ...................................................................16
6 Project Introduction.........................................................................................17
7 General Description ........................................................................................18

7.1 Block Diagrams DM01 and DI01 .......................................................................................... 18
7.2 Mechanical System................................................................................................................. 19
7.2.1 Quality features ...................................................................................................................19
7.2.2 Characteristics....................................................................................................................19
7.3 Hardware.................................................................................................................................. 22
7.3.2.1 Operator control area......................................................................................................24
7.3.2.1.1 Input / Adjustment unit ...............................................................................................24
7.3.2.1.2 Output unit .................................................................................................................26
7.3.2.2 Electronics area ..............................................................................................................27
7.3.2.2.1 Digital inputs (DM01 and DI01)..................................................................................27
7.3.2.2.2 Digital outputs (DM01 only) .......................................................................................28
7.3.2.2.3 CAN-bus connection .................................................................................................29
7.3.2.2.4 Temperature range....................................................................................................29
7.3.2.2.5 Other..........................................................................................................................29
7.3.2.3 Connection area..............................................................................................................29
7.3.2.3.1 CCN...........................................................................................................................29
7.3.2.3.2 DCP Subunit..............................................................................................................29
7.3.3 Interfaces ............................................................................................................................30
7.4 Firmware .................................................................................................................................. 31
Stored: 17.10.00
File name: 68225A_eng.DOC Page 2 / 47

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual

7.4.2.1 Initialization ......................................................................................................................31
7.4.2.2 Object dictionary acc. to CANopen specification............................................................32
7.4.2.3 Error handling..................................................................................................................34
7.4.2.4 CANopen - State change ................................................................................................36
7.5 Safety........................................................................................................................................ 36
8 Pin Assignment................................................................................................37
8.1 CCN Pin-Assignment of Spring-loaded Terminals X1...X12 ............................................. 37
8.2 DCP-Subunit Pin-Assignment ............................................................................................... 40
9 Technical Data..................................................................................................43
9.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................................... 43
9.2 Static Properties ..................................................................................................................... 43
9.3 Dynamic Properties ................................................................................................................ 44
10 Notes.................................................................................................................47
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
List of Illustrations
Figure 1: Wiring of a Digsy or Digsyoutdoor in the switchgear cabinet............................................... 13

Figure 2: Cable connection in switchgear cabinet............................................................................. 14
Figure 3: DM01/DI01 Types ................................................................................................................. 17
Figure 4: Example of a possible CAN network .................................................................................. 17
Figure 5: Block diagram DM01 (8I/8O) ............................................................................................... 18
Figure 6: Block diagram DI01 (16I)...................................................................................................... 18
Figure 7: Housing digsyCompact ............................................................................................................... 20
Figure 8: CCN-housing ......................................................................................................................... 21
Figure 9: Circuit board DM01/DI01 CCN............................................................................................ 23
Figure 10: Circuit board DM01/DI01 digsy compact subunit................................................................. 23
Figure 11: Adjusting the node-ID and baud rate................................................................................. 24
Figure 12: CANopen states.................................................................................................................. 36
List of Tables
Table 1: Implemented I/O-modules ...................................................................................................... 17

Table 2: Functional features CCN and digsyCompact subunit................................................................ 18
Table 3: Quality features........................................................................................................................ 22
Table 4: Assignment of switches to COB-ID-bit................................................................................. 25
Table 5: Transmission rates ................................................................................................................. 25
Table 6: LED functions .......................................................................................................................... 26
Table 7: Object dictionary CANopen standard, DS-301 ................................................................... 32
Table 8: Object dictionary CANopen standard, DS-401 ................................................................... 33
Table 9: PDO(process data object)-mapping of the DM01 .............................................................. 33
Table 10: PDO-mapping of the DI01 ................................................................................................... 34
Table 11: Error handling ........................................................................................................................ 34
Table 12: Error detection in digital outputs ......................................................................................... 35
Table 13: Pin assignment DM01 DCP-subunit .................................................................................. 41
Table 14: Pin assignment DI01 DCP-subunit..................................................................................... 42
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
1 SAFETY NOTES FOR THE USER

1.1 General Notes - Warranty - Liability
This manual contains the information required for the normal use (as defined by Section 1.4 on Page 9)
of the product described herein. It is meant for technically qualified personnel with special training or
having relevant knowledge in the field of measuring, open- and closed-loop control engineering,
hereinafter called automation engineering.
The knowledge and technically appropriate implementation of the safety notes and warnings contained
in this manual are the prerequisite for safe installation and commissioning as well as for safety during
operation and maintenance of the product described. Only qualified personnel as defined by Section 1.2
on Page 8 has the expertise required under specific conditions to correctly interpret and implement the
safety notes and warnings given in general in this document.
This manual is an integral part of the range of items delivered, even if, for logistic reasons, a separate
order for it had to be placed. For reasons of comprehensibility, it does not contain all details for all
designs of the product described and cannot consider any imaginable case of setup, operation or
maintenance. Should you want further information or should special problems not sufficiently covered
by this document occur, you can request further information from INTER CONTROL or their
representatives.
In addition, we point out that the contents of this product documentation are not part of an earlier or
existing agreement, commitment or of a legal relationship nor an amendment to this. All obligations of
INTER CONTROL result from the respective purchase contract, which also contains the complete and
exclusively valid warranties. These contractual warranty regulations are neither extended nor limited by
the text of this document.
INTER CONTROL shall not be liable for damage resulting from improper use of the
supplied components or from non-observance of the instructions given in this manual.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
1.2 Qualified Personnel

Unqualified interference with the device/system or non-compliance with the warnings specified in this
manual or attached to the device/system cabinet can result in serious physical injury or damage to
property. Therefore, only appropriately qualified personnel is allowed to interfere with this
device/system.
Qualified personnel as meant by the safety-related notes in this manual or on the product itself are
persons that
♦ are either, as project engineering personnel, familiar with the safety concepts of automation
engineering;
♦ or are, as operating personnel, trained in the handling of automation systems and know the
operation-related contents of this manual;
♦ or, as commissioning and service personnel, have special training enabling them to repair such
automation systems or have the authorization to commission, earth and label circuits and
devices/systems in compliance with the applicable safety standards.
1.3 Hazards
The following notes are on one hand meant for your personal safety and, on the other, for the protection
against damage of the described product or connected devices.
Safety notes and warnings to avoid hazards for life and health of users or maintenance personnel or to
avoid damage to property are emphasized in this manual by the signal terms defined below.
As regards this manual and the notes on the products themselves the various terms have the following
meaning:
HAZARD: means that death, serious physical injury or considerable damage to property
will occur, if the relevant precautions are not taken.
WARNING: means that death, serious physical injury or considerable damage to property
can occur, if the relevant precautions are not taken.
CAUTION: means that slight physical injury or damage to property can occur, if the
relevant precautions are not taken.
NOTE: is a piece of important information about the product, handling of the product
or the respective section of the manual to which special attention is to be
paid.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
ATTENTION: if ATTENTION is emphasized and used in this manual to refer to safety-

related facts, its contents correspond to the above-mentioned definition
under „Note“ or „Caution“.
1.4 Normal Use

♦ The device/system or the respective system component may only be used in cases where the
technical data are not exceeded and only in conjunction with devices or components (supplied by
external providers) that are recommended or permitted by INTER CONTROL.
♦ The product described was developed, manufactured, tested, and documented in compliance with
the relevant safety standards. Therefore, the product normally causes no hazards for property or
physical health, if the handling instructions and safety notes for project planning, mounting/
installation, normal use and maintenance/repair are complied with.
WARNING: After removal of the housing or the protection against electric shock or after
opening of the system cabinet, certain dangerous live parts of these
devices/systems become accessible, which poses a risk for the user's
health. Only appropriately qualified personnel is allowed to interfere with this
device/system.
This personnel must have profound knowledge of all sources of hazards and
maintenance measures according to the specifications given in this manual.
Prerequisites for perfect and safe operation of the product are proper
transportation, proper storage, setup and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
1.5 Notes on Product Installation

Since the product when used is mostly part of larger systems or equipment, these notes are meant to
provide a guideline for safe integration of the product into its environment.
In this connection special attention is to be paid to the following facts:
NOTE: Even if in the project planning of an automation system an utmost degree of

conceptional safety has been achieved, e.g., by a multi-channel layout, it is
nevertheless indispensable to accurately follow the instructions given in this
manual, since improper handling can possibly render ineffective precautions
for the prevention of hazardous faults or can create additional sources of
hazards.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Hereinafter we give, depending on the case of application, notes to be observed in the installation and
commissioning of the product:
WARNING: The safety regulations and the regulations for the prevention of accidents
applicable to the specific case of use are to be observed.
Operation of devices that are meant to be installed in housings or cabinets is
only permitted if they have been built in, that of desk-top or portable devices
only if the housing is closed. For equipment with permanent connection
(stationary devices/systems) without an all-pole mains disconnecting switch
and/or fuses, a mains disconnecting switch or a fuse have to be installed in
the building installation. The system has to be connected to the protective
conductor.
WARNING: For devices/systems with permanently attached, non-detachable connections

and without all-pole mains disconnecting switches, the socket outlet with
earthing contact for the device must be mounted near the device and be
easily accessible.
For devices to be operated at mains voltage, check before putting the
device into operation if the set range of nominal voltage corresponds with
the local mains voltage.
If the supply is 24V, care must be taken that the electrical isolation of the
extra-low voltage is safe. Use only power-supply units manufactured
according to IEC 364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100 Part 410).
Fluctuations or deviations of the mains voltage from the nominal value must
not exceed the tolerance limits specified in the Technical Data, otherwise
functional failures and hazardous conditions in electric subassemblies/
equipment cannot be excluded.
Precautions are to be taken that after voltage dips and power failures an
interrupted program can be properly continued. In this connection no
hazardous operating conditions, not even temporarily, must occur.
If necessary an „emergency-OFF“ has to be imposed. Emergency-OFF
devices according to EN 60204/IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain effective in
all modes of operation of the automation system. Unlocking the emergency-
OFF devices must not lead to an uncontrolled or undefined restart.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
CAUTION: Connecting cables and signal lines must be installed so that inductive and
capacitive parasitics/interference do not adversely affect the automation
functions.
Systems and equipment of automation engineering and their control
elements must be mounted so that they are sufficiently protected against
unintentional operation or actuation.
To avoid undefined conditions in the automation system caused by a cable or
wire break on the signal side, appropriate safety measures have to be taken
on the hardware and software side of the I/O coupling.
I/O cables may be plugged or pulled under de-energized conditions only.
2. Prior to plugging the cables, a potential equalization has to be effected by
connecting the PE-carrying plug parts.
1.6 Active and Passive Faults of an Automation System

♦ Depending on the task to be performed by an electronic automation system, both active and passive
faults can be dangerous faults. In a drive control for example, in general the active fault is
dangerous, since it leads to unauthorized switching on of the driving mechanism. In the case of a
signalling function, on the other hand, a passive fault may prevent a hazardous operational condition
from being indicated/signalized.
♦ This differentiation between possible faults and their task-related attribution to dangerous and
harmless faults is of importance for all safety considerations concerning the product delivered.
WARNING: Wherever faults occurring in the automation system can cause material
damage or even personal injury, i.e. can be dangerous faults, additional
external precautions have to be taken or equipment has to be provided (e.g.,
by independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks etc.) that ensure or
impose a safe operational condition even in the event of a fault.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
1.7 How to Proceed in the Event of Maintenance or Repair

If measurements or testing become necessary on the active device, then the requirements and
procedural instructions of the regulation for the prevention of accidents VBG 4.0 must be observed,
especially §8 „Permissible deviations during work on active parts“. Suitable electric tools are to be
used.
WARNING: Repair work on an automation system may only be carried out by qualified
personnel as defined under Section 1.2 or by INTER CONTROL. For the
replacement of parts or components use only parts that are listed in the
spare parts list or in the Chapter „Spare Parts“ of this manual. Unauthorized
opening or improperly performed repair work can lead to death or severe
physical injuries as well as to considerable damage to property.
Before you open the device, always pull the mains plug or switch the
disconnecting switch to OFF-position. I/O cables may be plugged or pulled
under de-energized conditions only.
2. Prior to plugging the cables, a potential equalization has to be carried out
by connecting the PE-carrying plug parts.
If you want to replace fuses, use only fuse types that are specified in the
technical data or in the maintenance instructions of this document.
Do not throw batteries into fire and do no soldering on the cell body,
because there is explosion hazard (max. temperature 100 °C). Do not open
and recharge lithium batteries or batteries containing mercury; use only the
same types for replacement! Always treat batteries and accumulators as
hazardous waste and dispose of them accordingly. When using monitors:
Improper interference, especially alteration of the high voltage or installation
of a different type of picture tube can lead to an increased amount of X-
radiation. A device that has been changed that way no longer corresponds to
the device for which approval was given and further operation of this device
is no longer permitted.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
1.8 How to Proceed when Carrying Out Welding Jobs

If machinery and systems are to be welded, the following regulations are to be observed:
1. Accident prevention regulation VBG 4 (electrical systems and equipment)
2. Accident prevention regulation VBG 15 (welding, cutting and related techniques)
3. In particular § 43 (connecting and disconnecting welding current circuits)
ATTENTION: Welding jobs on machinery and systems must be carried out by qualified
personnel only.
To protect electronic equipment it is necessary to proceed as follows:
1. Ignition switch: Off
2. Starter battery:
First disconnect the negative pole, then the positive pole.
Or an equivalent measure to disconnect the circuits.
3. Connecting the earthing/grounding terminal:

Connect the earthing terminal directly to the component to be welded.
Never establish the connection via rotating elements.
Avoid stray welding currents.
4. Welding cable routing:

Do not lay any welding cables in parallel to electric lines.
5. Housings of electronic components:

Do not touch any housings of electronic components and electric lines
with the welding electrode.
If one of the specified measures cannot be complied with, the plug

connectors have to be pulled out of the electronic devices prior to carrying
out any welding jobs.
In the case of plasma welding too, the plug connectors have to be pulled out
of the electronic devices prior to welding.
1.9 How to Proceed in the Case of Quick Charging

Quick charging may only be carried out with the starter battery disconnected from the terminals.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
1.10 How to Render Starting Aid

Starting aid with a vehicle may only be rendered with the starter battery connected to the terminals.
Starting aid with a quick charging set must not be rendered.
2 CONNECTING THE PROTECTIVE

CONDUCTOR
ATTENTION: From the earthing screw (PE) of the housing (Digsy) a connection (min.
2.5mm2) that has to be as short as possible is to be laid to the PE in the
power supply unit (or chassis).
When using connectors featuring metal hoods with applied shield, it is
possible to dispense with the additional overall-shield connection to the
earthing point of the control unit housing.
In the case of shielded cables use always metal hoods.
The metal hoods are to be conductively screw-fastened to the housing.
In the case of potential differences between several PE - (GND) - points
(e.g., in the case of separated power supply via different circuits) the shield
of the I/O-cable must only be applied (earthed) on one side (i.e., on the
control unit).
The twisted-pair, shielded signal cables must in the connector (50-pole Sub-
D- jack) be connected to GND. The individual shields on the open cable end
must not be connected to the overall shield or PE.
The protective conductor (PE) is to be connected via the star-point in the switchgear cabinet to the
earthing screw provided for on the Digsy housing. This measure, too, serves to increase the
interference immunity (see Figure 1 and Figure 2 on Pages 15 and 16).
When using I/O-cables with shields and plastic hoods the shield connection has to be screwed
together with the earthing screw (PE) of the Digsy housing.
3 UTILIZATION CATEGORY / TEMP. RANGE

Utilization category acc. to DIN 40040: GPF
G = -40°C
P = +85°C
F = humidity ≤ 75% without moisture condensation
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
4 WIRING PROPOSAL FOR SWITCHGEAR

CABINET
Figure 1: Wiring of a Digsy or Digsyoutdoor in the switchgear cabinet
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Figure 2: Cable connection in switchgear cabinet

(detail drawing of Figure 1 on Page 13)
A= Prior to connecting painted housing parts the lacquer/varnish coat on the points of connection
has to be removed.
B= Fold the shields backward and earth them coaxially with the nickel-plated cable clamps.
C= PE-rail made of Al, Cu or Fe nickel-plated.
D= Nickel-plated or varnished mounting plate with bare/uninsulated area around the fastening holes
(coating or lacquer must have been removed).
E= Fastening bolts on the mounting plate of the switchgear cabinet.
F= PE-connection 16mm2 to the machine. When using the device in a vehicle the connection from
the switchgear cabinet to the chassis has to be established in the same way as the connection
from the mounting plate to the switchgear cabinet.
G= Nickel-plated washer to ensure a conducting connection.
H= Nickel-plated cable clamp.
K= Connection (large-surface contact) to switchg. cabinet door (e.g.: braided Cu-conductor).
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
PE-conductors must always be wired according to VDE-regulations!

In addition, the whole mounting plate is to be used as a grounding surface.
That means: all metal parts such as housing, rails etc. are to be led via short low-resistance
HF-connections to the mounting plate (braided Cu-conductors, nickel-plated screws etc.).
ATTENTION: The connecting points must be free from lacquer/varnish, i.e., prior to
connection the varnish/coating has to be removed from the surface (see
Figure 2, detail drawing on Page 16).
The areas of the control electronics, power electronics and mains-ON/OFF must be geometrically
separated (they must not be located next each other). This area separation applies also to the closed
cabinet door.
ATTENTION: All the metal parts must have low-resistance HF-connections.

i.e.: 1. Bright and bare connecting points
2. Surfaces protected against corrosion,
e.g.: nickel-plating.
If possible no oxide films on the
blank surface (no eloxal coating)!
3. Connections of large-surface contact
4. Short connections
The high-frequency connections of the metal parts have, in addition to the PE-connection, to be
carried out according to the VDE-regulations.
The PE-connections according to the applicable VDE-regulations (or VDE-standards) have to be laid
separately!
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
5 MODULE INSTALLATION OR EXCHANGE
ATTENTION: Observe the chapter "Safety Notes for the User"!
♦ Bring the machine/system to its regular and safe starting position.

♦ Switch off the system.
♦ Loosen the plug connector screws (DCP-SU = digsy compact subunit).
♦ Check whether the plug connectors are marked with reference to the module slot (DCP-SU), and
make sure that the individual cables (CCN) are match-marked.
♦ Pull out the plug connector (DCP-SU), or remove the individual cables from the terminals (CCN).
♦ If necessary, screw off the PE-conductor.
♦ After removing the 6 Torx-screws, pull the side plate with the module slowly out of the housing
(DCP-SU), or detach the CCN.
♦ Insert the new module (DCP-SU).
♦ The module must be snugly and flush in the guiding grooves of the housing (DCP-SU).
♦ Screw-fasten the side plate to the housing (6 Torx-screws, DCP-SU), or fasten the CCN.
♦ Screw-fasten the PE connecting cable.
♦ Attach the plug connector and click the retaining clamps into place (DCP-SU), or insert the individual
cables/leads into the spring-loaded terminals.
♦ Compare the plug connector or the cable with the marking.
♦ Screw-fasten the plug connector.
♦ Put the system into operation and check its function.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
6 PROJECT INTRODUCTION
DM01/DI01 is the designation for digital signal I/O-modules designed as a node with CAN-interface.
The new product with the working title DM01 or DI01 is, as several other products from INTER
CONTROL, equipped with a CAN-interface and suitable for connecting it to the available products
digsycompact and CGC. DM01 and DI01 feature the same characteristics like the digsyoutdoor family
(i.e., industrial temperature range, vibration resistance, etc.) and in some aspects they are even more
suitable for use in commercial vehicles or under rough environmental conditions (e.g., housing with
IP66K, extended supply voltage range for 12V and 24V vehicle electrical systems, etc.).
D M 0 1 8I / 8O
sequ. number
mixed I/O
digital node
D I 0 1 16I / 0O
sequ. number
inputs
digital node
Figure 3: DM01/DI01 Types
DM01 and DI01 are available in two versions, i.e., as CCN (CAN Connection Node) and as digsy compact
subunit.
CAN Connection Node digsy compact subunit

CCN DCP-SU
DM01 X X
DI01 X X
AM01 X X
Table 1: Implemented I/O-modules
The nodes DM01 or DI01, as several other

components of the digsyoutdoor family, are
compatible with the CANopen standard and
can thus be used in a variety of CAN networks,
i.e., not only in digsyoutdoor systems.
Figure 4: Example of a possible CAN network
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7.1 Block Diagrams DM01 and DI01
The nodes DM01 or DI01 are available in two versions, viz. as CAN Connection Node (switchgear
cabinet version with spring-loaded terminals for easy wiring) and as digsy compact subunit with single-
plug-connector system suitable for mobile use.
CCN digsyCompact subunit

Switch for transmission rate and node-ID X X
Diagnostic LED X X
Status LED inputs / outputs X
Table 2: Functional features CCN and digsyCompact subunit
Sensor voltage
supply
Voltage CAN-transceiver
supply, CAN- (EN11898)
Watch-dog controller Termin.
and Reset
RES 8 digital strips
outputs
WD
Backreading
outputs
Display and Micro-
Operator controller stimulation
panel 4 Hi/Lo
(LEDs + 8 digital
switch panel) inputs
4 Hi/Lo
Figure 5: Block diagram DM01 (8I/8O)
Sensor supply
voltage
Voltage CAN-transceiver
supply, CAN- (EN11898)
Watch-Dog controller
and Reset Termin.
RES
strips
WD 8 digital
inputs
Display and Micro-

operator panel controller stimulation
(LEDs + 4 Hi/Lo
switch panel) 8 digital
inputs
4 Hi/Lo
Figure 6: Block diagram DI01 (16I)
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.2 Mechanical System
7.2.1 Quality features

Circuit board:
• Four-layer multi-layer board with two layers for voltage supply VCC and ground for SMD-equipping
(only components not available in SMD-technology are conventionally fitted)
• The variants DM01 and DI01 are implemented on one layout
• The plug connectors on the circuit board are mechanically fastened
• Heavy components on the board are additionally fastened (mechanically)
• All components are mounted in a vibration-resistant way
The housing for DM01 or DI01 as digsycompact subunit has the following essential quality features:
• The electronics is safely and mechanically protected against rough service-conditions for use in
mobile machinery and utility / commercial vehicles
• Safe electrical protection (EMC) of the installed electronics against environmental influences of any
kind
• All necessary standards for interference susceptibility and noise emission are complied with.
The housing for CCN-components has the following essential quality features:
• Easy handling and mounting
• Simple wiring
• Easy access to controls/switches and diagnostic indicators
• Compact design
7.2.2 Characteristics
The housing for the nodes DM01 and DI01 as digsycompact subunit meets the following requirements:
• Compact design
• IP66K acc. to DIN 40050 (housing tested as being positive up to IP69K; because of the technical
data of the 55-pole connector and GoreTex pill only IP66K can be guaranteed),
• Impact resistance
• GoreTex filter
• Resistant to electromagnetic interference (EMI)
• Good resistance to chemicals, even to sea water
• Industrial temperature range (-40 up to +85 °C).
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
159,05
100
5
7
5
9
,
3
5
3
2
,
2
p
2
3
71
100
2
0
2
6
B
l
.
8
e
a
K
.
c
f
a
m
ca.4 mm
S
5
Figure 7: Housing digsyCompact

e
b
i
Stored: 17.10.00

s
e

n
h
4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
l
The wiring technique for the DM01/DI01 as CCN meets the following requirements:
• Easy quick-connect terminals (spring-loaded terminals) which, at the same time, serve as a
e
distribution connector
e
• Robust terminal system
z
r
t
n
e
4,5
c
c
i
t
s
2
d
E
l
2
130 9
1
117
n
a
a
5x3,81 57,5
1 0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
i
X 19
h
e
8
X
7
h
.
c
6
X
X 5
7
c
S
4
X
X 3
1
3
2
s
X 2
2
-
-
X
0
n
X 1
Typen-Nr.:4885.65.011
P
7
1
Connection
5
AM01Node
2
CAN
D
e
1
I
4
0
E
y
5
T
x
Figure 8: CCN-housing
,
Stored: 17.10.00

7

1
4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.3 Hardware

The hardware of the nodes DM01 and DI01 represents two different component variants of the same
layout. They are divided up into three areas with different functions:
DM01 DI01
Operator control Adjustment unit (switches)
area
Output unit (LEDs), digsycompact subunit only partially equipped
Electronics area Voltage supply
Reset-generation, Watch dog
Microcontroller
8 digital inputs with the following characteristics:
Switch-selectable input polarity of the digital inputs (by groups)
Switch-selectable switching threshold of the digital inputs for 12V or
24V vehicle networks
Continuous testing of digital inputs
8 digital outputs with the following 8 digital inputs with the following
characteristics: characteristics:
backreading of output states Switch-selectable switching
threshold of the digital inputs for
12V or 24V vehicle networks
CAN-Bus-interface
Connection area Connection terminals (only CCN)
Connector (only digsycompact subunit)
Table 3: Quality features
These areas are implemented on the circuit board in 3 sectors each which are roughly arranged as
shown in Figure 9: Circuit board DM01/DI01 CCN on Page 25 and Figure 10: Circuit board DM01/DI01
digsycompact subunit on Page 23.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Connection area
Oper.cont. area
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12
Electronics area
Figure 9: Circuit board DM01/DI01 CCN
Operator contr. area
DIP-Switch & LEDs
Connect.
area
55-pole
Connector
Electronics area
Figure 10: Circuit board DM01/DI01 digsy compact subunit
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.3.2.1 Operator control area

The operator control area combines the input / adjustment and the output unit:
7.3.2.1.1 Input / Adjustment unit
An array with 10 switches forms the input/adjustment unit. With these switches it is possible to adjust
the identifier for the CAN-node (acc. to Default-Connection-Set from CANopen), the selected
transmission rate, and the threshold voltage of the digital inputs (for 12V-, or 24V voltage supply).
1 10
ON = 0
OFF = 1
1 bit for adjusting the switching

threshold of the inputs for 12V or 24V
voltage supply (switch 10).
3 bits for adjusting the transmission rate

(switches 7 to 9).
6 bits for adjusting the node-IDs acc. to

CANopen Default-Connection Set
(switches 1 to 6).
Figure 11: Adjusting the node-ID and baud rate
ATTENTION: In this connection mind the following:

1. Switch position OFF ≡ 1, Switch position ON ≡ 0.
2. Switch assignment of DM01/DI01 not identical with AM01.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Adjusting the Node-ID:
The switches 1...6 are to be used in order to adjust the module-ID, i.e., the adjustments on the switches
1...6 correspond with the bits 0...5 of the module-ID; bit 6 of the module-ID is always ´0´. Consequently,
it is not possible to adjust 127 nodes, as is theoretically possible acc. to the CANopen specification, but
only 63. This figure, however, is considered to be adequate.
In the case of the module-ID = 0, the module is separated from the CAN-bus and does not take
part in any CAN-bus-events!
COB-identifier, Bit No.: 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Switch number: 6 5 4 3 2 1
Bit state: 0 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
Function Code Module-ID
CANopen
Table 4: Assignment of switches to COB-ID-bit
Adjusting the switching threshold:
Switch 10 is to be used in order to adjust the switching threshold for the digital inputs. The switch
position defines whether the switching threshold of the inputs is adjusted for systems with 12V or 24V
voltage supply.
ON = Input switching threshold for systems with 24V voltage supply

OFF = Input switching threshold for systems with 12V voltage supply.
Adjusting the transmission rate:
Switches 2 Transmission CANopen Bit length Sample-

9 8 7 rate compatible tBIT point
0 0 0 10 kbit/s • 100 µs 0.7

0 0 1 20 kbit/s • 50 µs 0.7
0 1 0 50 kbit/s • 20 µs 0.7
0 1 1 62.5 kbit/s 16 µs 0.75
1 0 0 100 kbit/s 10 µs 0.7
1 0 1 125 kbit/s • 8 µs 0.7
1 1 0 200 kbit/s 5 µs 0.68
1 1 1 250 kbit/s • 4 µs 0.7
Table 5: Transmission rates
1
Bit state „0“ or „1“ possible
2
Switch position ON = 0, OFF = 1
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.3.2.1.2 Output unit

The output unit comprises 20 coloured LEDs with the following functions:
LED LED
LED No. Designation Colour Function
1 VIM_ON green Indicating the fed-in operating voltage VIM for the logic:
LED off: operating voltage VIM not applied
LED on: operating voltage VIM applied
2 VCC red/green Indicating the logic-circuit supply voltage and the operational
RESET/RUN status of the system:
LED off: VCC is not on!
LED on: VCC is on, in this case two possibilities:
LED red: system is in RESET-state
LED green: system is in RUN-state
3 COM_ERR red Indicating the error status CAN-controller:
LED off: CAN-communication works error-free
LED flashes (approx. 2Hz): CAN-controller error passive.
LED flashes (approx. 2Hz) with
overlaid signal of 16Hz in
switched-on status of the 2Hz-
period: Node-guarding for the node
is not effected.
LED permanently on: CAN-controller-bus off
4 APP_ERR red Indicating an application error:
LED off: Application error-free (group
alarm)
LED flashes (approx. 2 Hz): Error digital inputs
LED flashes (approx. 2Hz) with
overlaid signal of 16Hz in
switched-on status of the 2Hz-
period: Node is not in opera-tional
state, (i.e., preoperational or
prepared)
LED permanently on: Error digital outputs
5-121 ID1-ID8 green Indicating the digital inputs 1-8:
LED off: input inactive 2)
LED on: input active 3)
13-201 QD1-QD8 yellow Indicating the digital outputs 1-8 (DM01):
LED off: output switched-off
LED on: output switched-on
or ID9-ID16 or green Indicating the digital inputs 9-16 (DI01)
LED off: input inactive 4)
LED on: input active 4)
Table 6: LED functions
1
DCP-SU (digsy compact subunit) is not equipped with these LEDs
2
Input is inactive, if status=0 in the case of ´1´-switching inputs, or status=1 in the case of ´0´-switching inputs.
3
Input is active, if the status=1 in the case of ´0´-switching inputs, or status=0 in the case of ´1´-switching inputs.
4
Inputs are ´1´-switching only!
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
ATTENTION: If the LEDs No. 3 and No. 4 are alternately flashing with approx. 4 Hz, the
Module-ID 0 has been selected on the node and thus the node is separated
from the CAN-bus!
7.3.2.2 Electronics area
7.3.2.2.1 Digital inputs (DM01 and DI01)

There are eight digital, ground-related inputs implemented. The inputs are resistor-coupled and meet
the requirements of the EN61131-2 for digital inputs, type 2, rated voltage 24 VDC.
The inputs are adaptable to various requirements:
• The switching thresholds of all inputs are switch-selectable for systems with a voltage supply of 12V
or 24V. The switching threshold can be switched over with a switch of the switch array (10
switches) (see point 7.3.2.1.1 „Input / Adjustment unit“ on Page 24).
• With DM01 and DI01 - separately for the two groups of four (ID1-ID4 and ID5-ID8) - the active level
of the input signal is adjustable for "1"-switching or "0"-switching. The switchover is effected by
means of SDO (service data object), hence, with the software via the CAN-bus.
• The inputs ID9-ID16 on the DI01 are "1"-switching only.
The inputs for systems with a voltage supply of 24V meet the requirements of the Euro-Standard
EN 61131-2 regarding input levels. The inputs for systems with a supply voltage of 12V are
proportionally adapted to the input levels for 24V vehicle networks, since there exists no standard for
them yet.
It is ensured that, no matter which active input level is selected, the green LEDs1 always indicate the
logic input state - irrespective of the selected active level.
To be able - for safety reasons - to test the function of the input wiring, and especially the input logic, a
stimulation of the inputs is enabled with simple means.
1
Only with version CCN
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.3.2.2.2 Digital outputs (DM01 only)

The digital outputs are electrically coupled.
The maximum load for each digital output (independent of all others) is 1.5 A. This current is available
for the whole extended temperature range. If higher currents are needed, several outputs can be
connected in parallel.
NOTE: The digital outputs are not current-limited (as e.g., outputs on the BIM). Any
short circuits in these output driver components on the module will be
detected due to their own overheating. In case of an internal excess
temperature (junction temperature ≥ 150 ° C) the modules switch off.
Consequently, the nominal loading of 1.5 A can well be exceeded. However,
it has to be mentioned that a trouble-free function of the electronic device
over the entire temperature range is only guaranteed when the nominal
currents are kept to!
A controlled/driven output is designated by a yellow LED1 which always indicates the true state of the
output.
To ensure a detection of output errors the outputs are backreadable. Backreading is effected with input
circuits which are identical with those of digital inputs.
The following events cause a switch-off of the output driver:

• Short circuit (by switching off due to overheating)
• Overload (by switching off due to overheating)
• Overvoltage (by switching off)
• possibly undervoltage (by switching off).
Because of the special features of the electronics and external components, e.g., free-wheeling diodes,
the outputs are protected against short circuits, overload, overvoltage (including load dump), polarity
reversal, load shedding and cut-off of the supply voltage, and electrostatic discharge.
ATTENTION:
One free-wheeling diode per output prevents overvoltages
due to inductive loads.
The occurrence of a fault on one or several outputs causes:

• an indication on the device with the LED APP_ERR (application error)
• an indication to the network-master via emergency message.
1
Only with version CCN
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.3.2.2.3 CAN-bus connection

See point 7.3.3 "Interfaces" on Page 30.
7.3.2.2.4 Temperature range

The electronics is designed for the industrial temperature range ( -40...+85 °C ). These temperature
limits apply to the direct ambient operating temperature of the components.
7.3.2.2.5 Other
It is not possible to load application programs to DM01 or DI01!
7.3.2.3 Connection area
7.3.2.3.1 CCN
The connecting piece consists of twelve 6-pole spring-loaded terminals.
• Two are used for connecting the supply voltages (one terminal for the incoming and, if necessary,
one for the outgoing line)
• Two serve for the connection to the CAN-bus (one terminal for the incoming and, if necessary, one
for the outgoing line)
• Eight are used in order to connect the input/output signals. In this context, it should be taken into
account that three connecting points (VIM, ground, and signal line) are available for input signals, so
that a sensor may be directly connected here without any further external wiring.
7.3.2.3.2 DCP Subunit

The connecting piece consists of a connector (fit for vehicle service) with 55 contacts for:
• Supply voltage for logic and power section
• CAN-bus (twice)
• Connection input/output signals
• Sensor supply
• Housing potential
An external distributor for leads is not necessary; all sensors and actuators can be connected to this
connector (including the sensor supply).
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.3.3 Interfaces
The only communication interface available on the DM01 or DI01 is a CAN-interface.
Physical bus characteristics acc. to EN 11898 (High Speed Bus).
Protocol acc. to CANopen (DS-301 V3.0).
The module-ID can be adjusted via switches (s. 7.3.2.1.1)

The adjustment of the transmission rate is effected via switches (s. 7.3.2.1.1)
Transmission rates [kbit/s] 250 200 125 100 62.5 50 20 10
Two ports are available; one serves as input, the other one as output. Pin assignment and pin identifiers
follow the CANopen-specifications physical-layer.
By mounting a wire-jumper (with CCN between pin 4 (CAN_H) and pin 6 (CAN_TR), or with the DCP-
subunit between pin 13 or pin 31(CAN_H) and pin 32 (CAN_TR)) it is easily possible to implement a bus
termination.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.4 Firmware

The DM01/DI01 is a node that supports the CANopen standard. From this standard the following
defined subset of functionalities is realized:
• Default identifier acc. to predefined connection set, adjustable via switches

• Minimum boot-up
• Fixed PDO(process data object)-mapping,
• 1 Receive-PDO (DLC=2 bytes), 1 Transmit-PDO (DLC=2 bytes)
• 1 Server-SDO (service data object)
• CANopen-slave
• Node and life guarding
• Emergency object
• State change RESET, PRE_OPERATIONAL, PREPARED and OPERATIONAL acc. to CANopen-
specification
• Device profile for I/O-modules (CiA DS-401)
This type of CAN-node is to be regarded as a pure input / output node. Apart from the monitoring of
input/output signals a preprocessing of input/output signals does not take place.
7.4.2.1 Initialization
The initialization part of the program is designed so that not only a power-up-reset but also an
unplanned local reset during the run time in a complex network (e.g., triggered off by the local watch
dog) guarantees a safe restart of the DM01/DI01 and thus a safe „reintegration“ into the network.
After a restart an emergency message (length 0) will be sent which identifies the start-up (not conform
with DS-301!).
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.4.2.2 Object dictionary acc. to CANopen specification
In principle, the object dictionaries for DM01 and DI01 are identical, with regard to the content, however,
they are possibly different. According to CANopen-Standard, DS-301, they have the following entries :
Sub- Type/ Attri-

Index Index Object Name Value Range bute Value
1000h VAR Device Type unsigned32 ro 91h,01h,
03h,00h
1001h VAR Error Register unsigned8 ro xxh (00h)
1008h VAR Manufacturer device name vis-string ro DM01 or DI01
100Ah VAR Manufacturer software version vis-string ro ‚Vx.y‘ 1
100Ch VAR Guard time unsigned16 rw xxxxh (0000h)
100Dh VAR Life time factor unsigned8 ro 02h
1400h RECORD 1st Receive PDO Communication PDOCommPar
Parameter
00h Number of entries unsigned8 ro 02h
01h COB-ID used by PDO unsigned32 ro xxxxxxxxh
02h Transmission Type unsigned8 ro FFh (async,
acc. to device
profile)
1600h ARRAY 1st Receive PDO Mapping Parameter PDOMapping

00h Number of mapped application unsigned32 ro 02h,00h,00h,0
objects in PDO 0h
01h Mapping 1st application object unsigned32 ro see Table 9 +
Table 101)
02h Mapping 2nd application object unsigned32 ro see Table 9 +
Table 102)
1800h RECORD 1st Transmit PDO Communication PDOCommPar

Parameter
00h Number of entries unsigned8 ro 03h
01h COB-ID used by PDO unsigned32 ro xxxxxxxxh
02h Transmission Type unsigned8 ro FFh (async,
acc. to device
profile)
03h Inhibit Time unsigned16 ro 0190h (40ms)
1A00h ARRAY 1st Transmit PDO Mapping PDOMapping

Parameter
00h Number of mapped application unsigned32 ro 02h
objects in PDO
01h Mapping 1st application object unsigned32 ro see Table 9 +
Table 103)
02h Mapping 2nd application object unsigned32 ro see Table 9 +
Table 104)
Table 7: Object dictionary CANopen standard, DS-301
1
x.y corresponding to current version
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
The object dictionary has the following entries acc. to CANopen-profile for I/O-modules, DS-401:
Sub- Type/ Attri DM01 DI01

Index Index Object Name Value Range bute Value
6000h ARRAY Read State 8 Input Lines x x
00h Number of blocks 8 inputs state unsigned8 ro x x 02h
01h Read 8 inputs (ID1-ID8) unsigned8 ro x x xxh
02h Read 8 inputs (QD1-QD8 with DM01) unsigned8 ro x x xxh
(ID9-ID16 with DI01)
6002h ARRAY Polarity 8 Input Lines x x
00h Number of blocks 8 inputs polarity unsigned8 ro x x 01h
01h Polarity 8 inputs (ID1-ID8) unsigned8 rw x x 00h1
6005h VAR Enable Digital Input Interrupts booloean rw x x 01h
6200h ARRAY Write State 8 Output Lines x

00h Number Blocks 8 Outputs State unsigned8 ro x 01h
01h Write 8 Outputs 1h-8h unsigned8 rw x xxh
Table 8: Object dictionary CANopen standard, DS-401
This leads to the following data for the PDO(process data object)-mapping of the node DM01:
Data on: Entry:

Index Sub-index Index Sub-index Object-length
[bits]
Rx 1600h1) 01h 6200h 01h 08h
Rx 1600h2) 02h 6002h 01h 08h
Tx 1A00h3) 01h 6000h 01h 08h
TX 1A00h4) 02h 6000h 02h 08h
Table 9: PDO(process data object)-mapping of the DM01
As a result, it is defined in the object dictionary that there exists a transmit-PDO with a length of 2 bytes
into which the state of the digital outputs (8 bit) and the state of the digital inputs (8 bit) are statically
mapped. The data will be managed according to the standards of the "CANopen device profiles for I/O-
modules". The PDO will only be transferred in the operational mode, triggered off by an event, i.e., every
change of the state of the digital inputs is to be considered an event. The transmission of the PDO is
limited by the inhibit time belonging to the PDO. After the reset it is set to 40 ms and cannot be
changed. By switching off the global event flag this feature of transmitting the PDO per event can be
switched off so that then the transmit-PDOs can only be obtained via remote-frames.
In addition, there exists a receive-PDO in which two 8-bit values are transmitted. They represent both
the states of the digital outputs (1st byte) and the selection of the input polarity of the digital inputs
(2nd byte).
1
The polarity reversal is only possible to a limited degree, i.e., for the least significant (ID1...ID4) and for the most
significant four input channels (ID5...ID8) each together. As a result, there are only the combinations 00h, 0Fh, F0h, and
FFh for this byte. Basically, in programming there will always the least significant bit of the nibble be taken and thus all
four bits of the nibble be occupied. Consequently, it is for instance possible when writing a value of 01h that then 0Fh will
be read back. The bit value „0“ stands for plus-switching and „1“ for ground-switching inputs.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
The PDO-mapping of the node DI01 looks as follows:
Data on: Entry:

Index Sub-index Index Sub-index Object-length
[bits]
Rx 1600h1) 01h 6005h 00h 08h
Rx 1600h2) 02h 6002h 01h 08h
Tx 1A00h3) 01h 6000h 01h 08h
Tx 1A00h4) 02h 6000h 02h 08h
Table 10: PDO(process data object)-mapping of the DI01
There is hardly a difference between the PDO-mapping for DM01 and that of DI01. With the DI01-node,
instead of the digital outputs, the receive-PDO transmits „enable digital input interrupts“ and the
transmit-PDO transmits both input ports!
7.4.2.3 Error handling

The error handling is effected according to the CANopen specification. For this purpose the
emergency-object available there will be used.
This emergency object will be transmitted
• after an inquiry by means of remote-object (error code 1000h or 0000h)
• whenever an error condition of the digital inputs/outputs occurs (Error Code 1000h) or not occurs
(Error Code 0000h)
• when changing between the conditions „error active“ and „error passive" of the CAN-controller
(„error active“ after „error passive“ (occurrence of an error): error code 1000h, „error passive“
after „error active“ (non-occurrence of an error): error code 0000h).
Data area Emergency object Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 1 Byte 4 2 Byte 5 3 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8
Error condition Emergency Error Manufacturer specific
error code register error field
Error cleared 0000h 000u000u yyyyyyyy zzzzzzzz 00h 00h 00h
Error passive 1000h 0001000u yyyyyyyy zzzzzzzz 00h 00h 00h
Error digital output 1000h 000u0001 yyyyyyyy zzzzzzzz 00h 00h 00h
Error digital input 1000h 000u0001 yyyyyyyy zzzzzzzz 00h 00h 00h
Table 11: Error handling
1
Communication error bit is bit 4, General error bit is bit 0, here identified with u, if both conditions are possible!
2
The bits yyyyyyyy represent the digital input channels 1-8; in this context 0000000y corresponds to an error in channel 1,
0y000000 to an error in channel 7; identified with y, if both conditions are possible (in the case of DCP-SU DM01 and
DCP-SU DI01).
3
The bits zzzzzzzz represent the digital output channels; in this context 0000000z corresponds to an error in channel 1,
0z000000 to an error in channel 7; identified with z, if both conditions are possible (only in the case of DCP-SU DM01;
with DCP-SU-DI01=0!).
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
The manufacturer-specific error field in the emergency object is used as follows:

In byte 4 the LSB is assigned to the digital input 1, ......, the MSB to the digital input 8. Every bit identifies
the error condition of the digital input pertaining to it (1=error, 0=normal state). An error will then be
detected in the digital inputs if the stimulation carried out when reading-in the input information was not
successful. The error of an input is synonymous with a hardware error on the module. The signal
condition of the input concerned is undefined.
In byte 5 the LSB is assigned to the digital output 1, ......, the MSB to the digital output 8. Every bit
identifies the error condition of the digital output pertaining to it (1=error, 0=normal state). An error will
then be detected in the digital outputs if the set condition and the actual condition differ. This leads to
the following assignment:
Preset Actual Pertaining Explanation

condition condition error bit
Output Output
0 0 0 Error-free condition
0 1 1 Error condition, occurs if the output is supplied from outside.
1 0 1 Error condition, occurs if, with the output being switched on, the
driver has switched off, or a short circuit has happened.
1 1 0 Error-free condition
Table 12: Error detection in digital outputs
When an output error occurs, an emergency message with the error code 1000h will be effected. If
there is no output error, an emergency message with the error code 0000h will be effected. Upon
inquiry by means of remote-object the current (i.e., the possibly last sent) error state will be transmitted.
There are two possible causes if an output error occurs with the output being switched on:
1. a short circuit on the output
2. overloading of the output(driver).
In both cases we recommend to switch off the concerned output(s) by the controlling program
(application program AWP). Then an emergency message with the error code 0000h will be sent in
which the concerned outputs in byte 5 are deleted.
In case of a short circuit the error indication will occur anew if the output(s) is/are switched on again.
Hence, the cause of the short circuit has to be eliminated.
In case of an overloading of the output - depending on the ambient conditions - a recovery time of at
least 5 seconds (for cooling the driver) has to be kept prior to switching on the output(s) again. If the
error(s) occur(s) again the output wiring is to be checked.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
7.4.2.4 CANopen - State change
Power On
Initialization
automatic
STOP
Pre-Operational
RESET START ENTER
PREOPER.
Prepared
STOP START
Operational
Figure 12: CANopen states
The changes between the CANopen states are effected via NMT-commands, as shown in the above
diagram.
The digital outputs are only active if the node is in the states OPERATIONAL and PREPARED. A
switch-over to any other mode will effect that the default value is set for every output. The default value
is zero.
At the end of the node-guarding-time the DM01-node will be caused (from the OPERATIONAL or
PREPARED state) to run through a quasi reset in order to arrive again in the PRE_OPERATIONAL
state. This ensures that the outputs take on their default values again. In addition, an existing network-
master, when possibly recommencing the node guarding, will find this node in PRE_OPERATIONAL
state and will infer from it that all the outputs are switched off!
7.5 Safety
The functional reliability of the nodes DM01 and DI01 is increased by the following features:
• Watch dog
• Backreadability of outputs
• Stimulating and testing of inputs
• Node and life guarding
• Emergency messages
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
8 PIN ASSIGNMENT
8.1 CCN pin assignment of spring-loaded terminals X1...X12

X1 Connector designation: Incoming CAN-bus-cable
Pin-No. Symbol Pin meaning
1 CAN_GND Ground
2 CAN_L CAN-bus-signal CAN-L (dominant low)
3 CAN_SHLD for connecting the CAN-shielding of a CAN-cable
4 CAN_H CAN-bus-signal CAN-H (dominant high)
5 CAN_V+ Output supply voltage for external CAN-components
6 CAN_TR Output internal terminating resistor for bus termination, to be connected to pin 4.
X2 Connector designation: Outgoing CAN-bus-cable

1 CAN_GND Ground
2 CAN_L CAN-bus-signal CAN-L (dominant low)
3 CAN_SHLD for connecting the CAN-shielding of a CAN-cable
4 CAN_H CAN-bus-signal CAN-H (dominant high)
5 CAN_V+ Output supply voltage for external CAN-components
6 CAN_TR Output internal terminating resistor for bus termination, to be connected to pin 4
X3 Connector designation: Connection Digital Input/Output channel 1

1 VQS Output supply voltage for direct sensor connection
2 GND Ground
3 ID1 Digital Input 1
5 GND Ground
6 QD1 / ID9 Digital Output 1 (DM01) or Digital Input 9 (DI01)

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual

2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
X11 Connector designation: Connection Supply voltages (incoming)

1 GND Ground
2 GND Ground
3 GND Ground
4 VIM Supply voltage Module
5 VIQ Supply voltage Load outputs
X12 Connector designation: Connection Supply voltages (outgoing)

1 GND Ground
2 GND Ground
3 GND Ground
4 VIM Supply voltage Module
As cable for higher currents, i.e., for power supply purposes, we recommend to use the ÖLFLEX 110 -
type from Messrs. LAPP Kabel. With this cable the following currents are possible via all pins:
• Cross-sectional area 0.5 mm2 : 9 A per pin,
• Cross-sectional area 0.75 mm2: 12 A per pin
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
8.2 DCP-Subunit Pin-Assignment
1. VIQ1
2. VIQ2
3. GND
4. VQS
5. VQS
20. VIM
6. VQS
21. GND
7. VQS
22. GND
8. GND
23. GND
9. VQS
24. GND
10. VQS
25. GND 38. GND
11. GND
26. GND 39. ID1
12. CAN_L1
27. VQS 40. ID2
13. CAN_H1
28. VQS 41. ID3
14. CAN_GND
29. PE 42. ID4
15. CAN_V+
30. CAN_L2 43. ID5
16. GND
31. CAN_H2 44. ID6
17. GND
32. CAN_TR 45. ID7
18. GND
33. CAN_SHLD 46. ID8
19. GND
34. CAN_GND 47. GND
35. GND 48. QD1 / ID9
36. IPARAM 49. QD2 / ID10
37. GND 50. QD3 / ID11
51. QD4 / ID12
52. QD5 / ID13
53. QD6 / ID14
54. QD7 / ID15
55. QD8 / ID16
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Dig. Dig. Ana. Ana. Cou. PWM

Pin-No. Signal identifier In Out In Out In Out Explanation
1 VIQ1 Feed-in supply voltage for power outputs (for outputs QD1-4)
2 VIQ2 Feed-in supply voltage for power outputs (for outputs QD5-8)
3 GND Ground connection
4 VQS Sensor voltage supply
12 CAN_L1 CAN-interface 1, Low-signal
13 CAN_H1 CAN-interface 1, High-signal
14 CAN_GND Ground connection for CAN (connected with GND)
15 CAN_V+ CAN voltage supply
20 VIM Feed-in supply voltage for control logic
Housing potential (ext. connection GND - PE lays GND on housing
29 PE potential)
32 CAN_TR CAN terminating resistor (optionally to be connected to CAN_H2)
33 CAN_SHLD CAN shield connection
34 CAN_GND Ground connection for CAN (connected with GND)
Control input f. parameteriz. mode (0=parameterization,
36 IPARAM • open=norm.operation)
39 ID1 •1 Digital Input 1 (switch-selectable ground / plus switching Group 1)
48 QD1 •3 Digital Output 1
Table 13: Pin assignment DM01 DCP-subunit
1
Group 1 (ID1..ID4), switch-selectable ground / plus switching
2
Group 2 (ID5...ID8), switch-selectable ground / plus switching
3
Group 1 (QD1...QD4), disconnectable by VIQ1
4
Group 2 (QD5...QD8), disconnectable by VIQ2
Stored:

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Dig. Dig. Ana. Ana. Cou. PWM

Pin-No. Signal identifier In Out In Out In Out Explanation
1 VIQ1 Feed-in supply voltage for power outputs
2 VIQ2 Feed-in supply voltage for power outputs
14 CAN_GND Ground connection for CAN (connected to GND)
15 CAN_V+ CAN voltage supply
20 VIM Feed-in supply voltage for control logics
Housing potential (ext. connection GND - PE lays GND on housing
29 PE potential)
32 CAN_TR CAN terminating resistor (to be optionally connected to CAN_H2)
33 CAN_SHLD CAN shield connection
34 CAN_GND Ground connection for CAN (connected to GND)
Control input f. parameteriz. mode (0=parameterization,
36 IPARAM • open=norm.operation)
48 ID9 • Digital Input 9
Table 14: Pin assignment DI01 DCP-subunit
1
2
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
9 TECHNICAL DATA
Symbol Definition min. max. Unit
VIM Max. external Module supply voltage -32 40 V
VIQ Max. external Load supply voltage -32 40 V
IIM Max. current Module supply 12 A
IIQ Max. current Load supply1 24 A
VCC Max. internal Electronics supply voltage 4.5 5.5 V
VLD Max. interference voltage @ 350 ms (Load Dump) tbd V
VID max Max. input voltage per digital input -32 40 V
IQD max Max. output current (only DM01) per digital output 2.5 A
with 1 channel
IQD max Max. output current (only DM01) per digital output 3.8 A
with 2 channels parallel
IQD max Max. output current (only DM01) per digit output with 5.9 A
4 channels parallel
9.2 Static Properties

Symbol Definition min. typical max. Unit
RI Input resistance per digital input 4.45/2.552 4.7/2.72 4.95/2.852 kΩ

3
TAWZ Sampling repeat time per digital input 100 1000 --- µs
TI12on Turn-on delay per digital input --- 8 --- ms
(Supply voltage = 12V)
TI24on Turn-on delay per digital input --- 4 --- ms
TI12off Turn-off delay per digital input --- 16 --- ms
TI24off Turn-off delay per digital input --- 8 --- ms
fG12 Max. signal frequency per digital input 25 42 --- Hz
4
fG24 Max. signal frequency per digital input 25 84 --- Hz
4
tON Turn-on time per digital output (only DM01) 80 200 400 µs
tOFF Turn-off time per digital output (only DM01) 80 200 400 µs
1
Via two terminals, i.e., 12A each per terminal.
2
CCN/DCP-SU
3
The max. sampling repeat time cannot be indicated, since the transmission rate, the bus load on the CAN-bus, and the
sampling repeat time are dependent on each other.
4
ATTENTION: The frequency is related to typical turn-on / turn-off delay. Since these times are voltage-dependent, the
frequency is voltage-dependent, too!
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual

For VIM = VIQ = 12 or 24V; T U = 25°C1
2
VIM External Module supply voltage 8.0 12/24 32.0 V
2
VIQ External Load supply voltage 9.0 12/24 32.0 V
IIM Current Module supply --- --- 12 A
IIQ Current Load supply 3 --- --- 24 A
VCC Internal Electronics supply voltage 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
ICC Current consumption Electronics --- 50 75 mA
TRES RESET-duration after Power-up or Power-fail 2 --- 100 ms

VCC_RES RESET-threshold 4.2 4.5 --- V
TWDA Watch-dog-timer response time 100 200 --- ms

TWDT Watch-dog-timer retrigger time --- --- 50 ms
Number of digital input channels on DM01/DI01 8/16

VI12off Turn-off voltage per digital input --- --- 2.5 V
VI24off Turn-off voltage per digital input --- --- 3.5 V
VI12on Turn-on voltage per digital input 7.0 --- --- V
VI24on Turn-on voltage per digital input 12.5 --- --- V
VI12on/off Real switching threshold per digital input --- 3.9 --- V
VI24on/off Real switching threshold per digital input --- 6.6 --- V
1
Unless otherwise indicated.
2
The operating voltages VIQ and VIM have to be supplied from the same voltage source. VIQ must not be switched on if VIM is
switched off, otherwise the load-dump-protection under VIM will not be fully effective! While on the other hand VIM may be
switched on if VIQ is switched off.
3
Via two terminals, i.e., 12A each per terminal.
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Dynamic Properties
Number of digital output channels (only DM01) 8

(UEA = 24V)
IQONNENN Output current per digital output in On-state with --- 1.5 --- A
1 channel nominal 2
IQon Output current per digital output in On-state with --- 1.5 2.5 A
1 channel 3
IQon Output current per digital output in On-state with --- 3.0 3.8 A
2 channels parallel 4
IQon Output current per digital output in On-state with --- --- 5.9 A
4 channels parallel5
TU Ambient temperature -40 --- +85 °C

TL Storage temperature -40 --- +85 °C
1
2
With the nominal current all the outputs can be permanently operated at the same time!
3
One output each of the groups QD1...QD4, or QD5...QD8 can be operated with the max. current indicated here, if all other
outputs of the same group are switched-off at the time when this load is applied.
4
Two outputs each of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated in parallel with the max. current indicated here,
if the two other outputs of the same group are switch-off at the time when the load is applied.
5
With the current indicated here the four outputs of the groups QD1...QD4 or QD5...QD8 can be operated in parallel. It is
possible that with 5.9A the expected current of 4 * 1.5A is not fully reached! We recommend that the real current loading IL
is realized by connecting n outputs in parallel, so that the following applies: n * IQonNENN ≥ IL !
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
Dynamic Properties
Degree of protection with enclosure acc. to DIN 40050 IP20 / IP66K2

Degree of protection without enclosure acc. to DIN 40050 IP00
CE – conformity in the making (06/99)
EMC testing DIN 40839-1/-3/-4 (highest severity is to be aimed at)
Environmental test Dry heat . IEC 68 Part 2-2
Environm. test Change of Temp. IEC 68 Part 2-14
CCN spring-loaded terminals Nominal data acc. to IEC/DIN VDE: Nominal voltage 125 V, max. current
FFKDS/V 12 A (@ 1 mm2 conductor cross section), impulse voltage withstand level
2.5 kV, pollution degree 3, overvoltage category III, insulating mat. group I.
Connection 0.14 - 1 mm2 (rigid), 0.14 - 1mm2 (flexible), AWG 26-18,
stripping length 10 mm, insulating material type PA, flammability class
V2, temperature indices RTI / Ti 125 / 100.
DCP-subunit connector FCI DCS-1 Nominal data: max. current carrying capacity of each pin 20 A @ 85°C
(15 A @ 100°C), temp.-range –40 .. +120°C, class of protection IP 67
1
2
CCN/DCP-subunit
Stored: 17.10.00

4885.64 DM01 / DI01
Manual
10 NOTES
Stored: 17.10.00

User Manual for
PLC Programming
with
PROSYD 1131

Copyright  1994, 1997, 1999 by Inter Control Hermann Köhler GmbH & CO.
KG
All rights reserved.
We have gone to great lengths to ensure this documentation is correct and

complete. However, since it is not possible to produce an absolutely error-free
text, please feel free to send us your hints and suggestions for improving it.
Publisher:
Inter Control
Hermann Köhler GmbH & Co. KG
Schafhofstraße 30
D-90411 Nürnberg
Tel. +49/ 911/ 9522 - 5
Fax. +49/ 911/ 9522 - 857
Internet: http://www.intercontrol.de
Last update 31.05.1999

Content
Contents
1 A Brief Introduction to PROSYD 1131 ________________________________________________ 1-1
1.1 What is PROSYD 1131 1-1

1.2 Overview of PROSYD 1131 Functions 1-1
2 What is What in PROSYD 1131 ______________________________________________________ 2-1
2.1 Project Components 2-1

2.2 Languages 2-12
2.2.1 Instruction List (IL) 2-12
2.2.2 Structured Text (ST) 2-14
2.2.3 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) 2-22
2.2.4 Function Block Diagram (FBD) 2-28
2.2.5 Ladder Diagram (LD) 2-29
2.3 Debugging, Online Functions 2-31
2.4 The Standard 2-33
3 We Write a Little Program __________________________________________________________ 3-1
3.1 Controlling a Traffic Signal Unit 3-1

3.2 Visualizing a Traffic Signal Unit 3-17
4 The Individual Components _________________________________________________________ 4-1
4.1 The Main Window 4-1

4.2 Options 4-5
4.3 Managing Projects 4-15
4.4 Creating and Deleting Objects, etc. 4-31
4.5 General Editing Functions 4-40
4.6 General Online Functions 4-47
4.7 Window set up 4-58
4.8 Help when you need it 4-59
5 Editors in PROSYD 1131____________________________________________________________ 5-1
5.1 The Declaration Editor 5-1

5.2 The Text Editors 5-9
PROSYD 1131 1-i

Content
5.2.1 The Instruction List Editor 5-14

5.2.2 The Editor for Structured Text 5-15
5.3 The Graphic Editors 5-16
5.3.1 The Function Block Diagram Editor 5-17
5.3.2 The Ladder Editor 5-25
5.3.3 The Sequential Function Chart Editor 5-31
5.3.4 The Continuous Function Chart Editor (CFC) 5-41
6 The Resources _____________________________________________________________________ 6-1
6.1 Overview of the Resources 6-1

6.2 Global Variables 6-1
6.2.1 Access Variables 6-2
6.2.2 Global Variables 6-3
6.2.3 Variable Configuration 6-4
6.2.4 Document Frame 6-5
6.3 PLC Configuration 6-7
6.3.1 Hardware dependent Configuration 6-7
6.3.2 Configurable PLC Configuration 6-10
6.3.3 CAN Configuration 6-11
6.4 Task Configuration 6-19
6.5 Sampling Trace 6-22
6.6 Watch and Receipt Manager 6-30
7 Library Manager __________________________________________________________________ 7-1
8 Visualization ______________________________________________________________________ 8-1
8.1 Create Visualization 8-1

8.2 Visualization Elements, Insert 8-2
8.3 Working with Visualization Elements 8-4
8.4 Visualization Elements, Configure 8-6
8.5 Additional Visualization Element Functions 8-17
9 DDE Interface _____________________________________________________________________ 9-1
10 Appendix 10-1
Appendix A: Using the Keyboard ______________________________________________________ 10-1
Use of Keyboard 10-1

Key Combinations 10-1
1-ii PROSYD 1131

Content
Appendix B: Data types _______________________________________________________________ 10-5
Standard Data types 10-5

Defined Data Types 10-6
Appendix C: IEC Operators __________________________________________________________ 10-11
IEC Operators 10-11

Bitstring Operators 10-13
Bit-Shift Operators 10-15
Selection Operators 10-19
Comparison Operators 10-22
Address Operators 10-25
Calling Operator 10-25
Type Conversion Functions 10-26
Numeric Functions 10-32
Appendix D: Standard Library Elements _______________________________________________ 10-39
String Functions 10-39

Bistable Function Blocks 10-45
Trigger 10-47
Counter 10-49
Timer 10-51
Appendix E: The UTIL.LIB Library ___________________________________________________ 10-57
BCD conversion 10-57

Bit/byte functions 10-58
Mathematical help functions 10-59
Controllers 10-61
Signal generators 10-62
Function manipulators 10-64
Analogue value processing 10-66
Appendix F: Operands in PROSYD 1131 _______________________________________________ 10-69
Constants 10-69
Variables 10-71
Addresses 10-72
Functions 10-73
Appendix G: Command Line/Command File Commands__________________________________ 10-75
Command Line Commands 10-75

Command File (cmdfile) Commands 10-76
PROSYD 1131 1-iii

Content
Appendix I: Error messages __________________________________________________________ 10-83
11 Index 11-1
1-iv PROSYD 1131

Chapter 1 - A Brief Introduction to PROSYD 1131
1 A Brief Introduction to PROSYD 1131

1.1 What is PROSYD 1131
PROSYD 1131 is a complete development environment for your PLC.

(PROSYD 1131 stands for Programming and System Diagnose)
PROSYD 1131 puts a simple approach to the powerful IEC language at the
disposal of the PLC programmer. Use of the editors and debugging
functions is based upon the proven development program environments of
advanced programming languages (such as Visual C++).
1.2 Overview of PROSYD 1131 Functions
How is a project
structured?
A project is put into a file named after the project. The first POU (Program
Organization Unit) created in a new project will automatically be named
PLC_PRG. The process begins here (in compliance with the main function
in a C program), and other POUs can be accessed from the same point
(programs, function blocks and functions).
Once you have defined a Task Configuration, it is no longer necessary to
create a program named PLC_PRG. You will find more about this in the
Task Configuration chapter.
There are different kinds of objects in a project: POUs, data types, display
elements (visualizations) and resources.
The Object Organizer contains a list of all the objects in your project.
How do I set up my
project?
First you should configure your PLC in order to check the accuracy of the
addresses used in the project.
Then you can create the POUs needed to solve your problem.
Now you can program the POUs you need in the desired languages.
Once the programming is complete, you can compile the project and remove
errors should there be any.
PROSYD 1131 1-1

Overview of PROSYD 1131 Functions
How can I test my

project?
Once all errors have been removed, activate the simulation, log in to the
simulated PLC and "load" your project in the PLC. Now you are in Online
mode.
Now open the window with your PLC Configuration and test your project
for correct sequence. To do this, enter input variables manually and observe
whether outputs are as expected. You can also observe the value sequence of
the local variables in the POUs. In the Watch and Receipt Manager you can
configure data records whose values you wish to examine.
Debugging
In case of a programming error you can set breakpoints. If the process stops
at such a breakpoint, you can examine the values of all project variables at
this point in time. By working through sequentially (single step) you can
check the logical correctness of your program.
Additional Online
Functions
An additional debugging function: You can set program variables and inputs
and outputs at certain values. You can use the flow control to check which
program lines have been run. The Sampling Trace allows you to trace and
display the actual course of variables over an extended period of time.
Once the project has been set up and tested, the hardware can be loaded in
the hardware and tested as well. The same online functions you used with
the simulation are available.
Additional PROSYD
1131 Features
The entire project can be documented or exported to a text file at any time.
Summary
PROSYD 1131 is a complete development tool used to program your PLC
which will save you a measurable amount of time setting up your
applications.
1-2 PROSYD 1131

Chapter 2 - What is What in PROSYD 1131
2 What is What in PROSYD 1131

This chapter contains a list of the most important concepts to make starting
easier.
2.1 Project Components
Project
A project contains all of the objects in a PLC program. A project is saved in
a file named after the project. The following objects are included in a
project:
POUs (Program Organization Units), data types, visualizations, resources,
and libraries.
POU (Program
Organization Unit)
Functions, function blocks, and programs are POUs.
Each POU consists of a declaration part and a body. The body is written in
one of the IEC programming languages which include IL, ST, SFC, FBD
and LD.
PROSYD 1131 supports all IEC standard POUs. If you want to use these
POUs in your project, you must include the library standard.lib in your
project.
POUs can call up other POUs. However, recursions are not allowed.
Function
A function is a POU, which yields exactly one data element (which can
consist of several elements, such as fields or structures) when it is
processed, and whose call in textual languages can occur as an operator in
expressions.
When declaring a function do not forget that the function must receive a
type. This means, after the function name, you must enter a colon followed
by a type.
A correct function declaration can look like this example:
FUNCTION Fct: INT
In addition, a result must be assigned to the function. That means that
function name is used as an output variable.
PROSYD 1131 2-1

Project Components
A function declaration begins with the keyword FUNCTION and ends with
END_FUNCTION.
Example in IL of a function that takes three input variables and returns the
product of the first two divided by the third:
Image 2.1: Function
The call of a function in ST can appear as an operand in expressions.

Functions do not have any internal conditions. That means that calling up a
function with the same argument (input parameters) always produces the
same value (output).
Examples for calling up the function described above:
in IL:
LD 7
Fct 2,4
ST Result
in ST:
Result := Fct(7, 2, 4);
in FBD:
In SFC a function call can only take place within a step or a transition.
2-2 PROSYD 1131

Note: If you define a function in your project with the name

CheckBounds, you can use it to check for range overflows in your project!
The name of the function is defined and may have only this identifier. An
example of how this function is implemented is shown below:
Image 2.2: Example of the Implementation of the Function CheckBounds
The following typical program for testing the CheckBounds function goes
beyond the boundaries of a defined array. The CheckBounds functions
makes sure that the value TRUE is not assigned to the position A[10], but
rather to the upper area boundary A[7] which is still valid. Therefore, the
CheckBounds function can be used to correct extensions beyond array
boundaries.
Image 2.3: Test Program for the CheckBounds Function
PROSYD 1131 2-3

Project Components
Note: If you define functions in your project with the name

CheckDivByte, CheckDivWord, CheckDivDWord and CheckDivReal,
you can use them See the following example for the implementation of the
function CheckDivReal:
Bild 2.4: Example for the implementation of the funciton CheckDivReal
Operator DIV uses the output of function CheckDivReal as Divisor. In a

program like shown in the following example this avoids an division by 0,
the divisor (d) is set from 0 to 1. So the result of the division is 799.
Bild 2.5: Example program of the function CheckDivReal
2-4 PROSYD 1131

Functionblock
A function block is a POU which provides one or more values during the
procedure. As opposed to a function, a function block provides no return
value.
A function block declaration begins with the keyword FUNCTION_BLOCK
and ends with END_FUNCTION_BLOCK.
Example in IL of a function block with two input variables and two output
variables. One output is the product of the two inputs, the other a
comparison for equality:
Image 2.6: Function Block
Function Block
Instances
Reproductions or instances (copies) of a function block can be created.
Each instance possesses its own identifier (the Instance name), and a data
structure which contains its inputs, outputs, and internal variables. Instances
are declared locally or globally as variables, whereas the name of the
function block is indicated as the type of an identifier.
Example of an instance with the name INSTANCE of the FUB function
block:
INSTANCE: FUB;
Function blocks are always called through the instances described above.
PROSYD 1131 2-5

Project Components
Only the input and output parameters can be accessed from outside of an
function block instance. This means the internal variables of the function
blocks remain invisible to the user of the function block.
Example for accessing an input variable:
The function block FB has an input variable in1 of the type INT.
PROGRAM prog
VAR
inst1:fb;
END_VAR
LD 17
ST inst1.in1
CAL inst1
END_PROGRAM
The declaration parts of function blocks and programs can contain instance
declarations. Instance declarations are not permitted in functions.
Access to a function block instance is limited to the POU in which it was
declared unless it was declared globally.
The instance name of a function block instance can be used as the input for a
function or a function block.
Note: All values are retained after processing a function block until the
next it is processed. Therefore, function block calls with the same arguments
do not always return the same output values!
Calling a function
block
You can use the variables of the function block by entering the instance
name, a point, and then the variable name.
If you would like to set the input parameters when you open the function
block, you can do this in the text languages IL and ST by assigning values to
the parameters after the instance name of the function block in parentheses
(this assignment takes place using ":=" just as with the initialization of
variables at the declaration position).
Examples for calling function block FUB described above: The
multiplication result is saved in the variable ERG, and the result of the
comparison is saved in QUAD. An instance of FUB with the name
INSTANCE is declared.
In IL the function block is called as shown in the following image:
2-6 PROSYD 1131

Image 2.7: Function Block Call in IL
In the example below the call is shown in ST. The declaration part is the
same as with IL:
Image 2.8: Function Block Call in ST
In FBD the instance of a function block is called as shown in the following

image (declaration part the same as with IL):
PROSYD 1131 2-7

Project Components
Image 2.9: Function Block Call in FBD
In SFC function block calls can only take place in steps.
Program
A program is a POU which returns several values during operation.
Programs are recognized globally throughout the project. All values are
retained from the last time the program was run until the next.
Image 2.10: Example of a program
Programs can be called. A program call in a function is not allowed. There

are also no instances of programs.
If a POU calls a program, and if thereby values of the program are changed,
then these changes are retained the next time the program is called, even if
the program has been called from within another POU.
This is different from calling a function block. There only the values in the
given instance of a function block are changed.
These changes therefore play a role only when the same instance is called.
2-8 PROSYD 1131

A program declaration begins with the keyword PROGRAM and ends with
END_PROGRAM.
Examples of calls of the program described above:

In IL:
CAL PRGExample
LD PRGexample.PAR
ST ERG
in ST:
PRGExample;
Erg := PRGexample.PAR;
In FBD:
Example for a possible call sequence for PLC_PRG:

LD 0
ST PRGexample.PAR (*Default setting for PAR is 0*)
CAL IL call (*ERG in IL call results in 1*)
CAL ST call (*ERG in ST call results in 2*)
CAL FBD call (*ERG in FBD call results in 3*)
If the variable PAR from the program PRGexample is initialized by a main
program with 0, and then one after the other programs are called with above
named program calls, then the ERG result in the programs will have the
values 1, 2, and 3. If one exchanges the sequence of the calls, then the values
of the given result parameters also change in a corresponding fashion.
PLC_PRG
The PLC_PRG is a special predefined POU. Each project must contain this
special program. This POU is called exactly once per control cycle.
The first time the "Project" "Object Add" command is used after a new
project has been created, the default entry in the POU dialog box will be a
POU named PLC_PRG of the program type. You should not change this
default setting!
If tasks have been defined, then the project may not contain any PLC_PRG,
since in this case the procedure sequence depends upon the task assignment.
Attention: Do not delete or rename the POU PLC_PRG

(assuming you are not using a Task Configuration, see chapter Task
Configuration!) PLC_PRG is generally the main program in a single task
program.
PROSYD 1131 2-9

Project Components
Action
Actions can be defined to function blocks and programmes. The action
represents a further implementation which can be entirely created in another
language as the ”normal” implementation. Each action is given a name.
An action works with the data from the function block or programme which
it belongs to. The action uses the same input/output variables and local
variables as the ”normal” implementation uses.
Image 2.11:Example for an action of a function block
In the example given, calling up the function block Counter increases or

decreases the output variable ”out”, depending on the value of the input
variable ”in”. Calling up the action Reset of the function block sets the
output variable to zero. The same variable ”out” is written in both cases.
An action is called up with <Program_name>.<Action_name> or
<Instance_name>.<Action_name>. If it is required to call up the action
within its own block, one just uses the name of the action in the text editors
and in the graphic form the function block call up without instance
information.
Examples for the calling-up of the above action:
Declaration for all Examples:
PROGRAM PLC_PRG
VAR
Inst : Counter;
END_VAR
In AWL:
2-10 PROSYD 1131

CAL Inst.Reset(In := FALSE)

LD Inst.out
ST ERG
In ST:
Inst.Reset(In := FALSE);
Erg := Inst.out;
In FUP:
Note: Actions play an important role in blocks in sequential function

charts, see the chapter 2.2.3 Sequential Function Chart - SFC.
The IEC standard does not recognise actions other than actions of the
sequential function chart.
Resources
You need the resources for configuring and organizing your project and for
tracing variable values:
• Global Variables which can be used throughout the project
• PLC Configuration for configuring your hardware
• Task Configuration for guiding your program through tasks
• Sampling Trace for graphic display of variable values
• Watch and Receipt Manager for displaying variable values and setting
default variable values
See the chapter called "The Resources".
Libraries
You can include in your project a series of libraries whose POUs, data types,
and global variables you can use just like user-defined variables. The library
"standard.lib" is a standard part of the program and is always at your
disposal.
See the chapter called "Library Manager".
Data types
Along with the standard data types the user can define his own data types.
Structures, enumeration types and references can be created.
See "Standard" and "Defined data types" in the appendix.
PROSYD 1131 2-11

Languages
Visualization
PROSYD 1131 provides visualizations so that you can display your project
variables. You can plot geometric elements off-line with the help of the
visualization. They can then change their form online, depending upon
certain variable values.
See the chapter called "Visualization".
2.2 Languages
2.2.1 Instruction List (IL)
An instruction list (IL) consists of a series of instructions. Each instruction

begins in a new line and contains an operator and, depending on the type of
operation, one or more operands separated by commas.
In front of an instruction there can be an identification mark (label)
followed by a colon (:).
A comment must be the last element in a line. Empty lines can be inserted
between instructions.
Example:
LD 17
ST lint (* comment *)
GE 5
JMPC next
LD idword
EQ istruct.sdword
STN test
next:
Modifiers and
operators in IL
In the IL language the following operators and modifiers can be used.
Modifiers:
• C with JMP, CAL, RET: The instruction is only then executed if the
result of the preceding expression is TRUE.
• N with JMPC, CALC, RETC: The instruction is only then executed if
the result of the preceding expression is FALSE.
• N otherwise: Negation of the operand (not of the accumulator)
Below you find a table of all operators in IL with their possible modifiers
and the relevant meaning:
2-12 PROSYD 1131

Operator Modifiers Meaning

LD N Make current result equal to the operand
ST N Save current result at the position of the
operand
S Then put the Boolean operand exactly at
TRUE if the current result is TRUE
R Then put the Boolean operand exactly at
FALSE if the current result is TRUE
AND N,( Bitwise AND
OR N,( Bitwise OR
XOR N,( Bitwise exclusive OR
ADD ( Addition
SUB ( Subtraction
MUL ( Multiplication
DIV ( Division
GT ( >
GE ( >=
EQ ( =
NE ( <>
LE ( <=
LT ( <
JMP CN Jump to the label
CAL CN Call programor function block or
RET CN Leave POU and return to caller.
) Evaluate deferred operation
You find a list of all IEC operators in the appendix.

Example of an IL program while using some modifiers:
LD TRUE (*load TRUE in the accumulator*)

ANDN BOOL1 (*execute AND with the negated value of the
BOOL1 variable*)
JMPC mark (*if the result was TRUE, then jump to the label
"mark"*)
LDN BOOL2 (*save the negated value of *)

ST ERG (*BOOL2 in ERG*)
label:
LD BOOL2 (*save the value of *)
ST ERG *BOOL2 in ERG*)
PROSYD 1131 2-13

Languages
It is also possible in IL to put parentheses after an operation. The value of

the parenthesis is then considered as an operand.
For example:
LD 2
MUL 2
ADD 3
ST ERG
Here is the value of Erg 7. However, if one puts parentheses:
LD 2
MUL 2
(
ADD 3
)
ST ERG
Here the resulting value for Erg is 10, the operation MUL is only then
evaluated if you come to ")"; as operand for MUL 5 is then calculated.
2.2.2 Structured Text (ST)
The Structured Text consists of a series of instructions which, as determined

in high level languages, ("IF..THEN..ELSE") or in loops (WHILE..DO) can
be executed.
Example:
IF value < 7 THEN
WHILE value < 8 DO
value:=value+1;
END_WHILE;
END_IF;
Expressions
An expression is a construction which returns a value after its evaluation.
Expressions are composed of operators and operands. An operand can be a
constant, a variable, a function call, or another expression.
2-14 PROSYD 1131

Valuation of
expressions
The evaluation of an expression takes place by means of processing the
operators according to certain binding rules. The operator with the strongest
binding is processed first, then the operator with the next strongest binding,
etc., until all operators have been processed.
Operators with equal binding strength are processed from left to right.
Below you find a table of the ST operators in the order of their binding
strength:
Operation Symbol Binding
strength
Put in parentheses (expression) Strongest binding
Function call Function name
(parameter list)
Exponentiation EXPT
Negate -
Building of NOT
complements
Multiply *
Divide /
Modulo MOD
Add +
Subtract -
Compare <,>,<=,>=
Equal to =
Not equal to <>
Boolean AND AND
Boolean XOR XOR
Boolean OR OR Weakest binding
There are the following instructions in ST, arranged in a table together with
example:
Instruction type Example

Assignment A:=B; CV := CV + 1; C:=SIN(X);
Calling a function block CMD_TMR(IN := %IX5, PT := 300);
and A:=CMD_TMR.Q
use of the FB output
RETURN RETURN;
PROSYD 1131 2-15

Languages
IF D:=B*B;
IF D<0.0 THEN
C:=A;
ELSIF D=0.0 THEN
C:=B;
ELSE
C:=D;
END_IF;
CASE CASE INT1 OF
1: BOOL1 := TRUE;
2: BOOL2 := TRUE;
ELSE
BOOL1 := FALSE;
BOOL2 := FALSE;
END_CASE;
FOR J:=101;
FOR I:=1 TO 100 BY 2 DO
IF ARR[I] = 70 THEN
J:=I;
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_FOR;
WHILE J:=1;
WHILE J<= 100 AND ARR[J] <> 70
DO
J:=J+2;
END_WHILE;
REPEAT J:=-1;
REPEAT
J:=J+2;
UNTIL J= 101 OR ARR[J] = 70
END_REPEAT;
EXIT EXIT;
Empty instruction ;
The name already indicates, the Structured Text is designed for structure
programming, i.e. ST offers predetermined structures for certain often used
constructs such as loops for programming.
This offers the advantages of low error probability and increased clarity of
the program.
2-16 PROSYD 1131

For example, let us compare two equally significant program sequences in

IL and ST:
A loop for calculating powers of two in IL:
Loop:
LD Counter
JMPC end
LD Var1
MUL 2
ST Var1
LD Counter
SUB 1
ST Counter
JMP Loop
End:
LD Var1
ST ERG
The same loop programmed in ST would produce:

WHILE counter<>0 DO
Var1:=Var1*2;
Counter:=counter-1;
END_WHILE
Erg:=Var1;
You can see, the loop in ST is not only faster to program, but is also
significantly easier to read, especially in view of the convoluted loops in
larger constructs.
The different structures in ST have the following significance:
Assignment operator
On the left side of an assignment there is an operand (variable, address) to
which is assigned the value of the expression on the right side with the
assignment operator :=
Example:
Var1 := Var2 * 10;
After completion of this line Var1 has the tenfold value of Var2.
PROSYD 1131 2-17

Languages
Calling function blocks

in ST
A function block is called in ST by writing the name of the instance of the
function block and then assigning the values of the parameters in
parentheses. In the following example a timer is called with assignments for
the parameters IN and PT. Then the result variable Q is assigned to the
variable A.
The result variable, as in IL, is addressed with the name of the function
block, a following point, and the name of the variable:
CMD_TMR(IN := %IX5, PT := 300);
A:=CMD_TMR.Q
RETURN instruction
The RETURN instruction can be used to leave a POU, for example
depending on a condition.
IF instruction
With the IF instruction you can check a condition and, depending upon this
condition, execute instructions.
Syntax:
IF <Boolean_expression1> THEN
<IF_instructions>
{ELSIF <Boolean_expression2> THEN
<ELSIF_instructions1>
.
.
ELSIF <Boolean_expression n> THEN
<ELSIF_instructions n-1>
ELSE
<ELSE_instructions>}
END_IF;
The part in braces {} is optional.
If the <Boolean_expression1> returns TRUE, then only the
<IF_Instructions> are executed and none of the other instructions.
Otherwise the Boolean expressions, beginning with
<Boolean_expression2>, are evaluated one after the other until one of the
expressions returns TRUE. Then only those instructions after this Boolean
expression and before the next ELSE or ELSIF are evaluated.
If none of the Boolean expressions produce TRUE, then only the
<ELSE_instructions> are evaluated.
2-18 PROSYD 1131

Example:
IF temp<17
THEN heating_on := TRUE;
ELSE heating_on := FALSE;
END_IF;
Here the heating is turned on when the temperature sinks below 17 degrees.
Otherwise it remains off.
CASE instruction
With the CASE instructions one can combine several conditioned
instructions with the same condition variable in one construct.
Syntax:
CASE <Var1> OF
<Value1>: <Instruction 1>
<Value2>: <Instruction 2>
<Value3, Value4, Value5>: <Instruction 3>
<Value6 .. Value10>: <Instruction 4>
...
<Value n>: <Instruction n>
ELSE <ELSE instruction>
END_CASE;
A CASE instruction is processed according to the following model:
• If the variable in <Var1> has the value <Value i>, then the instruction
<Instruction i> is executed.
• If <Var 1> has none of the indicated values, then the <ELSE
Instruction> is executed.
• If the same instruction is to be executed for several values of the
variables, then one can write these values one after the other separated
by commas, and thus condition the common execution.
• If the same instruction is to be executed for a value range of a variable,
one can write the initial value and the end value separated by two dots
one after the other. So you can condition the common condition.
Example:
CASE INT1 OF
1, 5: BOOL1 := TRUE;
BOOL3 := FALSE;
2: BOOL2 := FALSE;
BOOL3 := TRUE;
10..20: BOOL1 := TRUE;
BOOL3:= TRUE;
ELSE
BOOL1 := NOT BOOL1;
PROSYD 1131 2-19

Languages
BOOL2 := BOOL1 OR BOOL2;

END_CASE;
FOR loop
With the FOR loop one can program repeated processes.
Syntax:
INT_Var :INT;
FOR <INT_Var> := <INIT_VALUE> TO <END_VALUE> {BY <Step

size>} DO
<Instructions>
END_FOR;
The part in braces {} is optional.
The <Instructions> are executed as long as the counter <INT_Var> is not
greater than the <END_VALUE>. This is checked before executing the
<Instructions> so that the <instructions> are never executed if
<INIT_VALUE> is greater than <END_VALUE>.
When <Instructions> are executed, <INT_Var> is always increased by <Step
size>. The step size can have any integer value. If it is missing, then it is set
to 1. The loop must also end since <INT_Var> only becomes greater.
Example:
FOR Counter:=1 TO 5 BY 1 DO
Var1:=Var1*2;
END_FOR;
Erg:=Var1;
Let us assume that the default setting for Var1 is the value 1. Then it will
have the value 32 after the FOR loop.
Note: <END_VALUE> must not be equal to the limit value of the

counter <INT_VAR>. For example: If the variable Counter is of type SINT
and if <END_VALUE> is 127, you will get an endless loop.
WHILE loop
The WHILE loop can be used like the FOR loop with the difference that the
break-off condition can be any Boolean expression. This means you indicate
a condition which, when it is fulfilled, the loop will be executed.
2-20 PROSYD 1131

Syntax:
WHILE <Boolean expression>
<Instructions>
END_WHILE;
The <Instructions> are repeatedly executed as long as the
<Boolean_expression> returns TRUE. If the <Boolean_expression> is
already FALSE at the first evaluation, then the <Instructions> are never
executed. If <Boolean_expression> never assumes the value FALSE, then
the <Instructions> are repeated endlessly which causes a relative time delay.
Note: The programmer must make sure that no endless loop is caused.
He does this by changing the condition in the instruction part of the loop, for
example, by counting up or down one counter.
Example:
WHILE counter<>0 DO
Var1 := Var1*2;
Counter := Counter-1;
END_WHILE
The WHILE and REPEAT loops are, in a certain sense, more powerful than
the FOR loop since one doesn't need to know the number of cycles before
executing the loop. In some cases one will, therefore, only be able to work
with these two loop types. If, however, the number of the loop cycles is
clear, then a FOR loop is preferable since it allows no endless loops.
REPEAT loop
The REPEAT loop is different from the WHILE loop because the break-off
condition is checked only after the loop has been executed. This means that
the loop will run through at least once, regardless of the wording of the
break-off condition.
Syntax:
REPEAT
<Instructions>
UNTIL <Boolean expression>
END_REPEAT;
The <Instructions> are carried out until the <Boolean expression> returns
TRUE.
If <Boolean expression> is produced already at the first TRUE evaluation,
then <Instructions> are executed only once. If <Boolean_expression> never
assumes the value TRUE, then the <Instructions> are repeated endlessly
which causes a relative time delay.
PROSYD 1131 2-21

Languages
Note: The programmer must make sure that no endless loop is caused.
He does this by changing the condition in the instruction part of the loop, for
example by counting up or down one counter.
Example:
REPEAT
Var1 := Var1*2;
Counter := Counter-1;
UNTIL
Counter=0
END_REPEAT;
EXIT instruction
If the EXIT instruction appears in a FOR, WHILE, or REPEAT loop, then
the innermost loop is ended, regardless of the break-off condition.
2.2.3 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
The Sequential Function Chart is a graphically oriented language which

makes it possible to describe the chronological order of different actions
within a program.
2-22 PROSYD 1131

Image 2.12: Network in SFC
Step
A POU written in a Sequential Function Chart consists of a series of steps
which are connected with each other through directed connections
(transitions).
There are two types of steps.
• The simplified type consists of an action and a flag which shows if the
step is active. If the action of a step is implemented, then a small
triangle appears in upper right corner of the step.
• An IEC step consists of a flag and one or more assigned actions or
boolean variables. The associated actions appear to the right of the
step. More on this later.
Action
An action can contain a series of instructions in IL or in ST, a lot of
networks in FBD or in LD, or again in Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
With the simplified steps an action is always connected to a step. In order to
edit an action, click twice with the mouse on the step to which the action
belongs. Or select the step and select the menu command "Extras" "Zoom
Action/Transition".
PROSYD 1131 2-23

Languages
Actions of IEC steps hang in the Object Organizer directly under their SFC-
POU and are loaded with a doubleclick or by pressing <Enter> in their
editor. New actions can be created with "Project" "Add Action".
Entry or exit action

You can add an entry action and an exit action to a step. An entry action is
executed only once, right after the step has become active. An exit action is
executed only once before the step is deactivated.
A step with entry action is indicated by an "E" in the lower left corner, the
exit action by an "X" in the lower right corner.
The entry and exit action can be implemented in any language. In order to
edit an entry or exit action, doubleclick in the corresponding corner in the
step with the mouse.
Example of a step with entry and exit action:
Transition / Transition
condition
Between the steps there are so-called transitions.
A transition condition can be a Boolean variable, a boolean address, a
boolean constant, or a series of instructions with a Boolean result in ST
syntax (i.e. (i <= 100) AND b) or fully programmed in any language.
Active step
After calling the SFC POU, the action (surrounded by a double border)
belonging to the initial step is executed first. A step, whose action is being
executed, is called active. If the step is active, then the appropriate action is
executed once per cycle. In Online mode active steps are shown in blue.
In a control cycle all actions are executed which belong to active steps.
Thereafter the respective following steps of the active steps become active if
the transition conditions of the following steps are TRUE. The currently
active steps will be executed in the next cycle.
IEC step
Along with the simplified steps the standard IEC steps in SFC are available.
Any number of actions can be assigned to an IEC step. The actions of IEC
steps lie separated from the steps and can be used repeatedly within their
2-24 PROSYD 1131

POU. For this they must be associated to the single steps with the command
"Extras" "Associate action".
Along with actions, Boolean variables can be assigned to steps. Through the
so-called qualifiers the actions and Boolean variables are activated and
deactivated, partially with time delays. Since an action can still be active,
even if the next step has been processed, for example through the qualifier S
(Set), one can achieve concurrent processes.
An associated boolean variable is set or reset with each call of the AS. That
means, that with each call it gets the value TRUE or FALSE.
The actions associated with an IEC step are shown at the right of the step in
a two-part box. The left field contains the qualifier, possibly with time
constant, and the right field contains the action name respectively boolean
variable name.
Note: If an action has been inactivated, it will be executed once more.

That means, that each action is executed at least twice (also an action with
qualifier P).
In case of a call first the deactivated actions, then the active actions are
executed, in alphabetical order each time.
An example for an IEC step with two actions:
In order to make it easier to follow the processes, all active actions in online
mode are shown in blue like the active steps. After each cycle a check is
made to see which actions are active.
Whether a newly inserted step is an IEC step depends upon whether the
menu command "Extras" "Use IEC-Steps" has been chosen.
In the Object Organizer the actions hang directly underneath their respective
SFC POUs. New actions can be created with "Project" "Add Action".
In order to use IEC steps you must include in your project the special SFC
library Iecsfc.lib .
PROSYD 1131 2-25

Languages
Image 2.13: SFC POU with actions in the Object Organizer
Qualifier
In order to associate the actions with IEC steps the following qualifiers are
available:
N Non-stored The action active as long as the step

R overriding Reset The action is deactivated
S Set (Stored) The action is activated and remains active
until a Reset
L time Limited The action is activated for a certain time,
maximum as long as the step is active
D time Delayed The action becomes active after a certain
time if the step is still active and then it
remains active as long as the step is active.
P Pulse The action is executed just one time if the
step is active
SD Stored and time The action is activated after a certain time
Delayed and remains active until a Reset
DS Delayed and The action is activated after a certain time as
Stored long as the step is still active and remains
active up to a Reset
SL Stored and time The action is activated for a certain time
limited
The qualifiers L, D, SD, DS and SL need a time value in the TIME constant
format.
Implicit variables in
SFC
There are implicitly declared variables in the SFC which can be used.
A flag belongs to each step which stores the state of the step. The step flag
(active or inactive state of the step) is called <StepName>.x for IEC steps or
just <StepName> for the simplified steps. This Boolean variable has the
value TRUE when the associated step is active and FALSE when it is
inactive. It can be used in every action and transition of the SFC block.
One can make an enquiry with the variable <ActionName>.x. as to whether
an IEC action is active or not.
2-26 PROSYD 1131

Note: During the deactivation of the IEC action the variable already has
the value FALSE.
For IEC steps the implicit variables <StepName>.t can be used to enquire
about the active time of the steps.
SFC Flags
If a step is active in SFC for longer than its attributes state, some special
flags are set. There are also variables which can be set in order to control the
program flow in the sequential function chart. To use the flags it is
necessary, somewhere, globally or locally, to declare them as output or input
variables.
SFCEnableLimit: This variable is of the type BOOL. When it has the value
TRUE, the timeouts of the steps will be registered in SFCError. Other
timeouts will be ignored.
SFCInit: This variable is also of the type BOOL. When the variable has the
value TRUE the sequential function chart is set back to the Init step and the
other SFC flags are reset. The Init step remains active, but is not executed,
for as long as the variable has the value TRUE. It is only when SFCInit is
again set to FALSE that the block can be processed normally again.
SFCQuitError: A variable of the type BOOL. Execution of the SFC
diagram is stopped for as long as the variable has the value TRUE whereby
a possible timeout in the variable SFCError is reset. All previous times in
the active steps are reset when the variable again assumes the value FALSE.
SFCPause: A variable of the type BOOL. Execution of the SFC diagram is
stopped for as long as the variable has the value TRUE.
SFCError: This Boolean variable is set when a timeout has occurred in a
SFC diagram.
SFCTrans: This variable is of the type BOOL. The variable takes on the
value TRUE when a transition is actuated.
SFCErrorStep: This variable is of the type STRING. In this variable the
name of the step is stored which has caused a timeout to occur.
SFCErrorPOU: This variable of the type STRING contains the name of the
block in which a timeout has occurred.
SFCCurrentStep: This variable is of the type STRING. The name of the
step is stored in this variable which is active, independently of the time
monitoring. In the case of simultaneous sequences the step is stored in the
branch on the outer right.
PROSYD 1131 2-27

Languages
No further timeout will be registered if a timeout occurs and the variable

SFCError is not reset again.
Alternative branch
Two or more branches in SFC can be defined as alternative branches. Each
alternative branch must begin and end with a transition. Alternative
branches can contain parallel branches and other alternative branches. An
alternative branch begins at a horizontal line (alternative beginning) and
ends at a horizontal line (alternative end) or with a jump.
If the step which precedes the alternative beginning line is active, then the
first transition of each alternative branch is evaluated from left to right. The
first transition from the left whose transition condition has the value TRUE
is opened and the following steps are activated (see active step).
Parallel branch
Two or more branches in SFC can be defined as parallel branches. Each
parallel branch must begin and end with a step. Parallel branches can
contain alternative branches or other parallel branches. A parallel branch
begins with a double line (parallel beginning) and ends with a double line
(parallel end) or with a jump.
If the parallel beginning line of the previous step is active and the transition
condition after this step has the value TRUE, then the first steps of all
parallel branches become active (see active step). These branches are now
processed parallel to one another. The step after the parallel end line
becomes active when all previous steps are active and the transition
condition before this step produces the value TRUE.
Jump
A jump is a connection to the step whose name is indicated under the jump
symbol. Jumps are required because it is not allowed to create connections
which lead upward or cross each other.
2.2.4 Function Block Diagram (FBD)
The Function Block Diagram is a graphically oriented programming

language. It works with a list of networks whereby each network contains a
structure which represents either a logical or arithmetic expression, the call
of a function block, a jump, or a return instruction.
An example of a typical network in the Function Block Diagram as it could
appear in PROSYD 1131:
2-28 PROSYD 1131

Image 2.14: Network in Function Block Diagram
See also chapter 'The Continuous Function Chart Editor' at 'The Editors in
PROSYD 1131'.
2.2.5 Ladder Diagram (LD)
The Ladder Diagram is also a graphics oriented programming language

which approaches the structure of an electric circuit.
On the one hand, the Ladder Diagram is suitable for constructing logical
switches, on the other hand one can also create networks as in FBD.
Therefore the LD is very useful for controlling the call of other POUs.
The Ladder Diagram consists of a series of networks. A network is limited
on the left and right sides by a left and right vertical current line. In the
middle is a circuit diagram made up of contacts, coils, and connecting lines.
Each network consists on the left side of a series of contacts which pass on
from left to right the condition "ON" or "OFF" which correspond to the
Boolean values TRUE and FALSE. To each contact belongs a Boolean
variable. If this variable is TRUE, then the condition is passed from left to
right along the connecting line. Otherwise the right connection receives the
value OFF.
Example of a typical network in the Ladder Diagram as it could appear in
PROSYD 1131:
PROSYD 1131 2-29

Languages
Image 2.15: Network in a Ladder Diagram made up of Contacts and Coils
Contact
Each network in LD consists on the left side of a network of contacts
(contacts are represented by two parallel lines: | |) which from left to right
show the condition "On" or "Off".
These conditions correspond to the Boolean values TRUE and FALSE. A
Boolean variable belongs to each contact. If this variable is TRUE, then the
condition is passed on by the connecting line from left to right, otherwise the
right connection receives the value "Out".
Contacts can be connected in parallel, then one of the parallel branches must
transmit the value "On" so that the parallel branch transmits the value "On";
or the contacts are connected in series, then contacts must transmit the
condition "On" so that the last contact transmits the "On" condition. This
therefore corresponds to an electric parallel or series circuit.
A contact can also be negated, recognizable by the slash in the contact
symbol: |/|. Then the value of the line is transmitted if the variable is
FALSE.
Coil
On the right side of a network in LD there can be any number of so-called
coils which are represented by parentheses:( ). They can only be in parallel.
A coil transmits the value of the connections from left to right and copies it
in an appropriate Boolean variable. At the entry line the value ON
(corresponds to the Boolean variable TRUE) or the value OFF
(corresponding to FALSE) can be present.
Contacts and coils can also be negated (in the example the contact
SWITCH1 and the coil %QX3.0 is negated). If a coil is negated
(recognizable by the slash in the coil symbol: (/)), then it copies the negated
value in the appropriate Boolean variable. If a contact is negated, then it
connects through only if the appropriate Boolean value is FALSE.
Function blocks in the

Ladder Diagram
Along with contacts and coils you can also enter function blocks and
programs. In the network they must have an input and an output with
Boolean values and can be used at the same places as contacts, that is on the
left side of the LD network
2-30 PROSYD 1131

Set/Reset coils
Coils can also be defined as set or reset coils. One can recognize a set coil
by the "S" in the coil symbol: (S)) It never writes over the value TRUE in
the appropriate Boolean variable. That is, if the variable was once set at
TRUE, then it remains so.
One can recognize a reset coil by the "R" in the coil symbol: (R)) It never
writes over the value FALSE in the appropriate Boolean variable: If the
variable has been once set on FALSE, then it remains so.
LD as FBD
When working with LD it is very possible that you will want to use the
result of the contact switch for controlling other POUs. On the one hand you
can use the coils to put the result in a global variable which can then be used
in another place. You can, however, also insert the possible call directly into
your LD network. For this you introduce a POU with EN input.
Such POUs are completely normal operands, functions, programs, or
function blocks which have an additional input which is labeled with EN.
The EN input is always of the BOOL type and its meaning is: The POU with
EN input is evaluated when EN has the value TRUE.
An EN POU is wired parallel to the coils, whereby the EN input is
connected to the connecting line between the contacts and the coils. If the
ON information is transmitted through this line, this POU will be evaluated
completely normally.
Starting from such an EN POU, you can create networks similar to FBD.
Image 2.16: Part of a LD Network with an EN POU
2.3 Debugging, Online Functions
Sampling Trace
The Sampling Trace allows you to trace the value sequence of variables,
depending upon the so-called trigger event. This is the rising edge or falling
PROSYD 1131 2-31

Debugging, Online Functions
edge of a previously defined Boolean variable (trigger variable). PROSYD

1131 permits the tracing of up to 20 variables. 500 values can be traced for
each variable.
Debugging
The debugging functions of PROSYD 1131 make it easier for you to find
errors.
In order to debug, run the command "Project" "Options" and in the dialog
box that pops up under Build options select the item Debugging.
Breakpoint
A breakpoint is a place in the program at which the processing is stopped.
Thus it is possible to look at the values of variables at specific places within
the program.
Breakpoints can be set in all editors. In the text editors breakpoints are set at
line numbers, in FBD and LD at network numbers, and in SFC at steps.
Single step
Single step means:
• In IL: Execute the program until the next CAL, LD or JMP command.
• In ST: Execute the next instruction.
• In FBD, LD: Execute the next network.
• In SFC: Continue the action until the next step.
By proceeding step by step you can check the logical correctness of your
program.
Single Cycle
If Single cycle has been chosen, then the execution is stopped after each
cycle.
Change values online

During operations variables can be set once at a certain value (write value)
or also described again with a certain value after each cycle (forcing). In
online mode one also can change the variable value by double click on the
value. By that boolean variables change from TRUE to FALSE or the other
way round, for each other types of variables one gets the dialog Write
Variable xy, where the actual value of the variable can be edited.
Monitoring
In addition to the variable declarations visible on the screen, the current
values from the PLC are continuously read and displayed.
2-32 PROSYD 1131

In Online mode PROSYD 1131 monitors all variables visible on the screen.
At the same time variables can be put together in the Watch and Receipt
Manager whose data you would like to see all in one place.
Simulation
During the simulation the created PLC program is not processed in the PLC,
but rather in the calculator on which PROSYD 1131 is running. All online
functions are available. That allows you to test the logical correctness of
your program without PLC hardware.
2.4 The Standard
The standard IEC 1131-3 is an international standard for programming

languages of Programmable Logic Controllers.
The programming languages offered in PROSYD 1131 conform to the
requirements of the standard.
According to this standard, a program consists of the following elements:
• Structures
• POUs
• Global Variables
The processing of a PROSYD 1131 program begins with the special POU
PLC_PRG. The POU PLC_PRG can call other POUs.
PROSYD 1131 2-33

Chapter 3 - We Write a Little Program
3 We Write a Little Program

3.1 Controlling a Traffic Signal Unit
Let us now start to write a small example program. It is for a simple traffic
signal unit which is supposed to control two traffic signals at an intersection.
The red/green phases of both traffic signals alternate and, in order to avoid
accidents, we will insert yellow or yellow/red transitional phases. The latter
will be longer than the former. We further imagine the use of a CAN bus
system and will do the corresponding configuration.
In this example you will see how time dependent programs can be shown
with the language resources of the IEC1131-3 standard, how one can edit the
different languages of the standard with the help of PROSYD 1131, and
how one can easily connect them while becoming familiar with the
simulation of PROSYD 1131.
Create POU
The beginning is always easy: Start PROSYD 1131 and choose "File"
"New".
In the dialog box which appears, the first POU has already been given the
default name PLC_PRG. Keep this name, and the type of POU should
definitely be a program. Each project needs a program with this name. In
this case we choose as the language of this POU the Continuous Function
Chart Editor (CFC).
Now create three more objects with the command "Project" "Object Add"
with the menu bar or with the context menu (press right mouse button in the
Object Organizer): a program in the language Sequential Function Chart
(SFC) named SEQUENCE, a function block in the language Function Block
Diagram (FBD) named TRAFFICSIGNAL, along with a POU WAIT, also
of the type function block, which we want to program as an Instruction List
(IL).
What does
TRAFFICSIGNAL do?
In the POU TRAFFICSIGNAL we will assign the individual trafficsignal
phases to the lights, i.e. we will make sure that the red light is lit red in the
red phase and in the yellow/red phase, the yellow light in the yellow and
yellow/red phases, etc.
PROSYD 1131 3-1

Controlling a Traffic Signal Unit
What does WAIT do?

In WAIT we will program a simple timer which as input will receive the
length of the phase in milliseconds, and as output will produce TRUE as
soon as the time period is finished.
What does
SEQUENCE do?
In SEQUENCE all is combined so that the right light lights up at the right
time for the desired time period.
What does PLC_PRG

do?
In PLC_PRG the input start signal is connected to the traffic lights'
sequence and the 'color instructions' for each lamp are provided as outputs.
"TRAFFICSIGNAL"
declaration
Let us now turn to the POU TRAFFICSIGNAL. In the declaration editor
you declare as input variable (between the keywords VAR_INPUT and
END_VAR) a variable named STATUS of the type INT. STATUS will have
four possible conditions, that is one for the TRAFFICSIGNAL phases green,
yellow, yellow/red andred.
Therefore our TRAFFICSIGNAL has three outputs, that is RED, YELLOW
and GREEN. You should declare these three variables. Then the declaration
part of our function block TRAFFICSIGNAL will look like this:
Image 3.1: Function block TRAFFICSIGNAL, declaration part
3-2 PROSYD 1131

"TRAFFICSIGNAL"
body
Now it is time to determine from the input STATUS of the POU the values
of the output variables. For this go into the body of the POU. Click on the
field to the left beside the first network (the gray field with the number 1).
You have now selected the first network. Now choose the menu item
"Insert" "Operator".
In the first network a box is inserted with the operator AND and two inputs:
Click on the text AND with the mouse pointer and change the text into EQ.
Select the three question marks from the upper of the two inputs and enter
the variable STATUS. Then select the lower of the three question marks and
put a 1 underneath it. You get the following network:
Click now on a place behind the EQ Box. Now the output of the EQ
operation is selected. Choose "Insert" "Assignment". Change the three
question marks ??? to GREEN. You now have created a network with the
following structure:
STATUS is compared with 1, the result is assigned to GREEN. This

network thus switches to GREEN if the preset state value is 1.
For the other TRAFFICSIGNAL colors we need two more networks. You
create them with the command "Insert" "Network (after)". These
networks should be set up as in the example. The finished POU now is as
follows:
PROSYD 1131 3-3

Image 3.2: Function block TRAFFICSIGNAL, instruction part
In order to insert an operator in front of another operator, you must select the
place where the input to which you want to attach the operator feeds into the
box.
Then use the command "Insert" "Operator". Otherwise you can setup
these networks in the same way as the first network.
Now our first POU has been finished. TRAFFICSIGNAL, according to the
input of the value STATUS, controls whichever light color we wish.
3-4 PROSYD 1131

Connecting the
standard.lib
For the timer in the POU WAIT we need a POU from the standard library.
Therefore, open the library manager with "Window" "Library Manager".
Choose "Insert" "Additional library". The dialog box appears for
opening files. From the list of the libraries choose standard.lib.
"WAIT" declaration
Now let us turn to the POU WAIT. This POU is supposed to become a timer
with which we can determine the length of the time period of each
TRAFFICSIGNAL phase. Our POU receives as input variable a variable
TIME of the type TIME, and as output it produces a Boolean value which
we want to call OK and which should be TRUE when the desired time
period is finished. We set this value with FALSE by inserting at the end of
the declaration (before the semicolon, however) " := FALSE ".
For our purposes we need the POU TP, a clock generator. This has two
inputs (IN, PT) and two outputs (Q, ET). TP does the following:
As long as IN is FALSE, ET is 0 and Q is FALSE. As soon as IN provides
the value TRUE, the time is calculated at the output ET in milliseconds.
When ET reaches the value PT, then ET is no longer counted. Meanwhile Q
produces TRUE as long as ET is smaller than PT. As soon as the value PT
has been reached, then Q produces FALSE again. In addition you will find a
short description of all POUs from the standard library in the appendix.
In order to use the POU TP in the POU WAIT we must create a local
instance from TP. For this we declare a local variable ZAB (for elapsed
time) of the type TP (between the keywords VAR, END_VAR).
The declaration part of WAIT thus looks like this:
Image 3.3: Function Block WAIT, Declaration Part
PROSYD 1131 3-5

"WAIT" body
In order to create the desired timer, the body of the POU must be
programmed as follows:
Image 3.4: Function Block WAIT, Instruction Part
At first it is checked whether Q has already been set at TRUE (as though the
counting had already been executed), in this case we change nothing with
the occupation of ZAB, but rather we call the function block ZAB without
input (in order to check whether the time period is already over).
Otherwise we set the variable IN in ZAB at FALSE, and therefore at the
same time ET at 0 and Q at FALSE. In this way all variables are set at the
desired initial condition. Now we assign the necessary time from the
variable TIME into the variable PT, and call ZAB with IN:=TRUE. In the
function block ZAB the variable ET is now calculated until it reaches the
value TIME, then Q is set at FALSE.
The negated value of Q is saved in OK after each execution of WAIT. As
soon as Q is FALSE, then OK produces TRUE.
The timer is finished at this point. Now it is time to combine our two
function blocks WAIT and TRAFFICSIGNAL in the main program
PLC_PRG.
3-6 PROSYD 1131

"SEQUENCE" first
expansion level
First we declare the variables we need. They are: an input variable START
of the type BOOL, two output variables TRAFFICSIGNAL1 and
TRAFFICSIGNAL2 of the type INT and one of the type WAIT (DELAY as
delay). The program SEQUENCE now looks like shown here:
Image 3.5: Program Sequence, First Expansion Level, Declaration Part
Create a SFC diagram

The beginning diagram of a POU in SFC always consists of an action "Init"
of a following transition "Trans0" and a jump back to Init. We should
expand that somewhat.
First let us determine the structure of the diagrams before we program the
individual action and transitions. First we need for each TRAFFICSIGNAL
phase a step.. Insert it by marking Trans0 and choosing "Insert" "Step
transition (after)". Repeat this procedure three more times.
PROSYD 1131 3-7

If you click directly on the name of a transition or a step, then this is marked
and you can change it. Name the first transition after Init "START", and all
other transitions "DELAY.OK".
The first transition switches through, if START is TRUE and all others
switch through when DELAY in OK produces TRUE, i.e. when the set time
period is finished.
The steps (from top to bottom) receive the names Switch1, Green2, Switch2,
Green1, whereby Init of course keeps its Name. "Switch" should include a
yellow phase, at Green1 TRAFFICSIGNAL1 will be green, at Green2
TRAFFICSIGNAL2 will be green. Finally change the return address of Init
after Switch1. If you have done everything right, then the diagram should be
as follows:
3-8 PROSYD 1131

Image 3.6: Program SEQUENCE, First Expansion Level, Instruction Part
Now we have to finish programming the individual steps. If you doubleclick

on the field of a step, then you open a dialog to open a new action. In our
case we will use IL (Instruction List).
Actions and transition

conditions
In the action of the step Init the variables are initialized, the STATUS of
TRAFFICSIGNAL1 should be 1 (green). The state of TRAFFICSIGNAL2
should be 3 (red). The action Init then is as follows:
PROSYD 1131 3-9

Image 3.7: Action Init
Switch1 changes the State of TRAFFICSIGNAL1 to 2 (yellow), and that of

TRAFFICSIGNAL2 to 4 (yellow-red). In addition, a time delay of 2000
milliseconds is now set. The action is now as follows:
Image 3.8: Action Switch1
With Green2 TRAFFICSIGNAL1 is red (STATUS:=3),

TRAFFICSIGNAL2 green (STATUS:=1), and the delay time is at 5000
milliseconds.
Image 3.9: Action Green2
At Switch2 the STATUS of TRAFFICSIGNAL1 changes to 4 (yellow-red),

that of TRAFFICSIGNAL2 to 2 (yellow). A time delay of 2000 milliseconds
is now set.
Image 3.10: Action Switch2
3-10 PROSYD 1131

With Green1 TRAFFICSIGNAL1 is green (STATUS:=1),

TRAFFICSIGNAL2 is red (STATUS:=3), and the time delay is set at 5000.
Image 3.11: Action Green1
The first expansion phase of our program is completed. Now you can
compile it and also test the simulation.
"SEQUENCE" second
expansion level
In order to ensure that our diagram has at least one alternative branch, and so
that we can turn off our traffic light unit at night, we now include in our
program a counter which, after a certain number of TRAFFICSIGNAL
cycles, turns the unit off.
At first we need a new variable COUNTER of the type INT. Declare this as
usual in the declaration part of PLC_PRG, and initialize it in Init with 0.
Image 3.12: Action Init, Second Version
Now select the transition after Switch1 and insert a step and then a
transition. Select the resulting transition and insert an alternative branch to
its left. After the left transition insert a step and a transition. After the
resulting new transition insert a jump after Switch1.
Name the new parts as follows: the upper of the two new steps should be
called "Count" and the lower "Off". The transitions are called (from top to
bottom and from left to right) EXIT, TRUE and DELAY.OK. The new part
should therefore look like the part with the black border:
PROSYD 1131 3-11

Image 3.13: Program SEQUENCE, Second Expansion Level, Instruction Part
Now two new actions and a new transition condition are to be implemented.
At the step Count, the only thing that happens is that COUNTER is
increased by one:
Image 3.14: Action Count
3-12 PROSYD 1131

The EXIT transition checks whether the counter is greater than a certain
number, for example 7:
Image 3.15: Transition EXIT
At Off the state of both lights is set at 5(OFF), (or each other number not
equal 1,2,3 or 4) the COUNTER is reset to 0, and a time delay of 10 seconds
is set:
Image 3.16: Action Off
The result
In our hypothetical situation, night falls after seven TRAFFICSIGNAL
cycles, for ten seconds the TRAFFICSIGNAL turns itself off, then we have
daylight again, the traffic light unit turns itself on again, and the whole
process starts again from the beginning.
PLC_PRG
We have defined and correlated the time sequencing of the phases for both
sets of traffic lights in the block SEQUENCE. Since, however, we see the
traffic lights system as a CAN-module and wish to create the controller
configuration over a CAN-bus, it is necessary for us to make input and
output variables available in the block PLC_PRG. We want to start-up the
traffic lights system over an ON switch and we want to send each of the six
lamps (each traffic light red, green, yellow) the corresponding ”signal
command” for each step of the SEQUENCE. We are now declaring
appropriate Boolean variables for these six outputs and one input, before we
PROSYD 1131 3-13

create the programme in the editor, and are allocating them, at the same
time, to the corresponding IEC addresses.
The next step is to declare the variables LIGHT1 and LIGHT2 of the type
TRAFFICSIGNAL in the declaration editor.
Figure 3.17: Declaration LIGHT1 and LIGHT2
These deliver the Boolean value of each of the six lights to the above
mentioned six outputs for each step of the block SEQUENCE. We are not,
however, declaring the output variables which are foreseen within the
PLC_PRG block but under Resources for Global Variables instead. The
Boolean input variable IN, which is used to set the variable START in the
block SEQUENCE to TRUE, can be set in the same way. ON is also
allocated to an IEC address.
Select the tab Resources and open the list Global Variables.
Make the declaration as follows:
Figure 3.18: Declaration of the Input-/Output Variables for the CAN-Configuration
The name of the variable (e.g. IN) is followed, after AT, by a percent sign
which begins the IEC address. I stands for input, Q for output, B (used in
this example) stands for byte and the individual bits of the module are
addressed using 0.0 (0.1, 0.2, etc.). We will be handling the controller
3-14 PROSYD 1131

configuration afterwards but we want, first of all, to finish off the block
PLC_PRG.
For this we go into the editor window. We have selected the Continuous
Function Chart editor and we consequently obtain, under the menu bar, a
CFC symbol bar with all of the available elements (see Chapter The
Continuous Function Chart Editor).
Click on the right mouse key in the editor window and select the element
Box. Click on the text AND and write ”SEQUENCE” instead. This brings
up the block SEQUENCE with all of the already defined input and output
variables. Insert two further block elements which you name PHASES.
Phases is a function block and this causes you to obtain three red question
marks over the block which you replace with the already locally declared
variables LIGHT1 and LIGHT2. Now set an element of the type Input,
which award the title ON and six elements of the type Output which you
award variable names to, as described, namely L1_green, L1_yellow,
L1_red, L2_green, L2_yellow, L2_red.
All of the elements of the programme are now in place and you can connect
the inputs and outputs, by clicking on the short line at the input/output of an
element and dragging this with a constantly depressed mouse key to the
input/output of the desired element.
Your program should finally look like the example shown here.
Figure 3.19: PLC_PRG, Declaration and presentation with the continuous function chart editor
PROSYD 1131 3-15

CAN controller
configuration
Before we actually test the program, to see whether and how it runs, and
finally, as our climax, produce a small visualization we first of all want to
connect the traffic lights system over the CAN bus to the I/O level. To
achieve this go to the tab Resources and select ”Controller configuration”.
The hardware must be described here which the opened project is being
created for. Click with the mouse on the line ”Hardware configuration”. A
dotted box appears within which you can insert a Sub-element CAN using
the right mouse key. A dialog opens up in which global CAN properties
can be entered. It is sufficient for our example to confirm the pre-set
configuration with OK. An element CAN [0] appears in the configuration
window. Extend the contents of the dotted box by inserting a sub-element
using the right mousekey. You will receive a list of the pre-set configuration
possibilities. The contents of this selection list depends on the EDS files
(Electronic Data Sheet) which are located in the sub-directory PLCCONF
belonging to the library directory. For our example select one CAN element
with eight digital inputs (...8DI...) and one with eight digital outputs
(...8DO...). You are presented, in each case, with a dialog for setting the
basic parameters of the CAN module. Take note, for our example, that we
just need to enter a Node ID (the input must fit to the setting of the
associated module) and confirm this with OK. Both CAN modules are
brought under CAN in the configuration scheme and you can open out the
configuration tree up to the information about the IEC address by making a
mouse click on the plus sign.
This is the way in which the connection of our program to the IEC addresses
%IB0 and %QB0 is achieved. Our project also requires, however, that we
are able to address the digital input and outputs individually. This is
achieved by making a declaration of the variables as %QX0.x and %IX0.x.
Figure 3.20: CAN Controller configuration of the traffic lights system
3-16 PROSYD 1131

TRAFFICSIGNAL
simulation
Now test your program. For this you must compile it ("Project" "Rebuild
all") login ("Online" "Login" and then load it "Online" "Download"). If
you now select "Online" "Run", the chronological order of the individual
steps of your main program can be followed. The window of the POU
PLC_PRG has now changed to the monitor window. Click twice on the plus
sign in the declaration editor, the variable display drops down, and you can
see the values of the individual variables.
3.2 Visualizing a Traffic Signal Unit
With the visualization of PROSYD 1131 you can quickly and easily bring
project variables to life. You find an complete description of the
visualization in chapter 0. We will now plot two traffic signals and an ON-
Switch for our traffic light unit which will illustrate the switching process.
Creating a new
visualization
In order to create a visualization you must first select the range of
Visualization in the Object Organizer. First click on the lower edge of the
window on the left side with the POU on the register card with this symbol
and the name Visualization. If you now choose the command "Project"
"Object Add", then a dialog box opens.
Image 3.21: Dialog Box for Opening a New Visualization
Enter here any name. When you confirm the dialog with OK, then a window
opens in which you can set up your new visualization.
Insert element in
Visualization
For our TRAFFICSIGNAL visualization you should proceed as follows:
PROSYD 1131 3-17

Visualizing a Traffic Signal Unit
• Give the command "Insert" "Ellipse" and draw a medium sized circle
(∅2cm). For this click in the editor field and draw with pressed left mouse
button the circle in its length.
• Now doubleclick the circle. The dialog box for editing visualization
elements opens
• Choose the category Variables and enter in the field Change color the
variable name .L1_red or choose this variable using the input assistance
(button <F2>). This addresses the variable RED of the function block
instance TRAFFICSIGNAL1 of the POU PLC_PRG.
Image 3.22: Visualization Dialog Box Variables
• Then choose the category Color and click on the button Inside in the
area Color. Choose as neutral a color as possible, such as black.
• Now click on the button within in the area Alarm color and choose the
red which comes closest to that of a red light.
3-18 PROSYD 1131

Image 3.23: Visualization Configuration Dialog Box (Color category)
The resulting circle will normally be black, and when the variable RED from
TRAFFICSIGNAL1 is TRUE, then its color will change to red. We have
therefore created the first light of the first traffic signal !
The other traffic lights

Now enter the commands "Edit" "Copy" (<Ctrl>+<C>) and then twice
"Edit" "Paste" (<Ctrl>+<V>). That gives you two more circles of the
exact same size lying on top of the first one. You can move the circles by
clicking on the circle and dragging it with pressed left mouse button. The
desired position should, in our case, be in a vertical row in the left half of
the editor window. Doubleclick on one of the other two circles in order to
open the configuration dialog box again. Enter in the field Change Color of
the corresponding circle the following variables:
for the middle circle: L1_yellow
for the lowest circle: L1_green
Now choose for the circles in the category Color and in the area Alarm
color the corresponding color (yellow or green).
The TRAFFICSIGNAL
case
Now enter the command "Insert" "Rectangle", and insert in the same way
as the circle a rectangle which encloses the three circles. Once again choose
as neutral a color as possible for the rectangle and give the command
"Extras" "Send to back" so that the circles are visible again.
PROSYD 1131 3-19

If simulation mode1 is not yet turned on, you can activate it with the
command "Online" "Simulation".
If you now start the simulation with the commands "Online" "Login" and
"Online" "Run", then you can observe the color change of the first traffic
signal.
The second traffic

signal
The simplest way to create the second traffic signal is to copy all of the
elements of the first traffic signal. For this you select all elements of the first
traffic signal and copy them (as before with the lights of the first traffic
signal) with the commands "Edit" "Copy" and "Edit" "Paste". You then
only have to change the text "TRAFFICSIGNAL1" in the respective dialog
boxes into "TRAFFICSIGNAL2", and the visualization of the second traffic
signal is completed.
The ON switch
Insert a rectangle and award it, as described above, a colour for a traffic light
of your choice and enter .ON at Variables for the Change color. Enter
”ON” in the input field for Content in the category Text.
Image 3.24: Dialog to configure the visualization elements (Category Text)
In order to set the variable ON to TRUE with a mouse click on the switch,
the variable .ON must be entered into the category Variables. Also select
the Option Variable keying and enter the variable .ON at this point. Variable
1
The simulation mode is active if a check mark (!) appears in front of the
menu item "Simulation" in the "Online" menu..
3-20 PROSYD 1131

keying means that when a mouse click is made on the visualization element
the variable .ON is set to the value TRUE but is reset to the value FALSE
when the mousekey is released again (we have created hereby a simple
switch-on device for our traffic lights program).
Image 3.25: Dialog to configure the visualization elements (Category Input)
Font in the
visualization
In order to complete the visualization you should first insert two more
rectangles which you place underneath the traffic signals.
In the visualizations dialog box set white in the category Color for Frame
and write in the category Text in the field Contents "Light1" or "Light2".
Now your visualization looks like this:
PROSYD 1131 3-21

Image 3.26: Visualization for the Sample Project Trafficsignal
3-22 PROSYD 1131

Chapter 4 - The Individual Components
4 The Individual Components

4.1 The Main Window
Image 4.1: The Main Window
The following elements are found in the main window of PROSYD 1131
(from top to bottom):
• The menu bar
• The Tool bar (optional); with buttons for faster selection of menu
commands.
• The Object Organizer with register cards for POUs, Data types,
Visualizations, and Resources
• A vertical screen divider between the Object Organizer and the Work
space of PROSYD 1131
• The Work space in which the editor windows are located
• The message window (optional)
• The Status bar (optional); with information about the current status of
the project
PROSYD 1131 4-1

The Main Window
Menu bar
The menu bar is located at the upper edge of the main window. It contains
all menu commands.
Image 4.2: Menu Bar
Tool bar
By clicking with the mouse on a symbol you can select a menu command
more quickly. The choice of the available symbols automatically adapts
itself to the active window.
The command is only carried out when the mouse button is pressed on the
symbol and then released.
If you hold the mouse pointer for a short time on a symbol in the tool bar,
then the name of the symbol is shown in a Tooltip.
In order to see a description of each symbol on the tool bar, select in Help
the editor about which you want information and click on the tool bar
symbol in which you are interested.
The display of the tool bar is optional (see "Project" "Options" category
Desktop).
Image 4.3: Tool bar with symbols
Object Organizer
The Object Organizer is always located on the left side of PROSYD 1131.
At the bottom there are four register cards with symbols for the four types of
objects POUs, Data types, Visualizations and Resources.
In order to change between the respective object types click with the mouse
on the corresponding register card or use the left or right arrow key.
You will learn in chapter Creating and Deleting Objects, etc.how to work
with the objects in the Object Organizer.
4-2 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.4: Object Organizer
Screen divider
The screen divider is the border between two non-overlapping windows. In
PROSYD 1131 there are screen dividers between the Object Organizer and
the Work space of the main window, between the interface (declaration part)
and the implementation (instruction part) of POUs and between the Work
space and the message window.
You can move the screen divider with the mouse pointer. You do this by
moving the mouse with the left mouse button pressed.
Make sure the screen divider always remains at its absolute position, even
when the window size has been changed. If it seems that the screen divider
is no longer present, then simply enlarge your window.
Work space
The Work space is located on the right side of the main window in
PROSYD 1131. All editors for objects and the library manager are opened
in this area.
You find the description of the editors in the chapter Editors in PROSYD
1131
Under the menu item "Window" you find all commands for window
management.
Message window
The message window is separated by a screen divider underneath the work
space in the main window.
It contains all messages from the previous compilations, checks , or
comparisons.
If you doubleclick with the mouse in the message window on a message or
press <Enter>, the editor opens with the object. The relevant line of the
PROSYD 1131 4-3

The Main Window
object is selected. With the commands "Edit" "Next error" and "Edit"
"Previous error" you can can quickly jump between the error messages.
The display of the message window is optional (see "Window"
"Messages").
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the window frame of the main window in
PROSYD 1131 gives you information about the current project and about
menu commands.
If an item is relevant, then the concept appears on the right side of the status
bar in black script, otherwise in gray script.
When you are working in online mode, the concept Online appears in black
script. If you are working in the offline mode it appears in gray script.
In Online mode you can see from the status bar whether you are in the
simulation (SIM), the program is being processed (RUNS), a breakpoint is
set (BP), or variables are being forced (FORCE).
With text editor the line and column number of the current cursor position is
indicated (e.g. Line:5, Col.:11). In online mode 'OV' is indicated black in
the status bar. Pressing the <Ins> key switches between Overwrite and Insert
mode.
If the mouse point is in a visualization, the current X and Y position of the
cursor in pixels relative to the upper left corner of the screen is given. If the
mouse pointer is on an Element, or if an element is being processed, then its
number is indicated. If you have an element to insert, then it also appears
(e.g. Rectangle).
If you have chosen a menu command but haven't yet confirmed it, then a
short description appears in the status bar.
The display of the statusbar is optional (see "Project" "Options" category
Desktop).
Context Menu
Shortcut: <Shift>+<F10>
Instead of using the menu bar for executing a command, you can use the
right mouse button. The menu which then appears contains the most
frequently used commands for a selected object or for the active editor. The
choice of the available commands adapts itself automatically to the active
window. The choice of the available commands adapts itself automatically
to the active window.
4-4 PROSYD 1131

4.2 Options
About PROSYD 1131 there can be of course only one viewpoint. In

PROSYD 1131, however, you can configure the view of the main window
(and have more than one viewpoint). In addition you can make other
settings. For this you have the command "Project" Options" at your
disposal. The settings you make thereby are, unless determined otherwise,
saved in the file "PROSYD 1131.ini" and restored at the next PROSYD
1131 startup.
"Project" "Options"
With this command the dialog box for setting options is opened. The options
are divided into different categories. Choose the desired category on the left
side of the dialog box by means of a mouse click or using the arrow keys
and change the options on the right side.
You have at your disposal the following categories:
• Load & Save
• User information
• Editor
• Desktop
• Color
• Directories
• Build
• Passwords
Load & Save

If you choose this category , then you get the following dialog box:
Image 4.5: Option dialog box of the category Load & Save
PROSYD 1131 4-5

Options
When activating an option, a check (!) appears before the option.

If you choose the option Create Backup, then PROSYD 1131 creates a
backup file at every save with the extension ".bak". In this way you can
always restore the versions before the last save.
If you choose the option Auto Save , then while you work your project is
constantly saved to a temporary file with the extension ".asd" according to a
set time interval (Auto Save Interval). This file is erased at a normal exit
from the program. If for any reason PROSYD 1131 is not shut down
"normally" (e.g. due to a power failure), then the file is not erased. When
you open the file again the following message appears:
Image 4.6: There is an auto save backup.
You can now decide whether you want to open the original file or the auto
save file.
If you request the option Ask for project info, then when saving a new
project, or saving a project under a new name, the project info is
automatically called. You can visualize the project info with the command
"Project" "Project info" and also process it.
If you choose the option Auto Load, then at the next start of PROSYD 1131
the last open project is automatically loaded. The loading of a project at the
start of PROSYD 1131 can also take place by entering the project in the
command line.
User information
4-6 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.7: Options dialog box of the category User information
To User information belong the Name of the user, his Initials and the
Company for which he works. Each of the entries can be modified.
Editor
Image 4.8: Options dialog box of the category Editor
When activating an option, a check (!) appears before the option.

You can make the following settings for the Editors:
• Autodeclaration
• Autoformat
• Declaration as table
• Tab width
• Font
PROSYD 1131 4-7

Options
• Display of the text selection

• Display of the Bitvalues
Autodeclaration
If you have chosen the Autodeclaration, then (following the input of a not-
yet-declared variable) a dialog box will appear in all editors with which this
variable can be declared.
Autoformat
If the option Autoformat in the category Editor of the options dialog box
has been chosen, then PROSYD 1131 executes automatic formatting in the
IL editor and in the declaration editor. When you finish with a line, the
following formatting is made:
• Operators written in small letters are shown in capitals;
• Tabs are inserted to that the columns are uniformly divided.
Declarations as tables
If the option Declarations as tables in the Editor category in the Options
dialog box is selected, then you can edit variables in a table instead of using
the usual declaration editor (see chapter The Declaration Editor). This table
is arranged as a card-index box in which there are register cards for input,
output, local, and input/output variables. For each variable you have
available the fields Name, Address, Type, Initial, and Comment.
Tab-Width
In the field Tab-Width in the category Editor of the Options dialog box
you can determine the width of a tab as shown in the editors. The default
setting is four characters, whereby the character width depends upon the font
which is chosen.
Font
By clicking on the button Font in the category Editor of the Options dialog
box you can choose the font in all PROSYD 1131 editors. The font size is
the basic unit for all drawing operations. The choice of a larger font size
thus enlarges the printout, even with each editor of PROSYD 1131.
After you have entered the command, the font dialog box opens for choosing
the font, style and font size.
4-8 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.9: Dialog box for setting the font
Mark
When choosing Mark in the Editor category in the Options dialog box you
can choose whether the current selection in your graphic editors should be
represented by a dotted rectangle (Dotted), a rectangle with continuous lines
(Line) or by a filled-in rectangle (Filled). In the last case the selection is
shown inverted.
The selection is activated in front of which a (•) point appears.
Bitvalues
When choosing Bitvalues in the category Editor of the Options dialog box
you can choose whether binary data (type BYTE, WORD, DWORD) during
monitoring should be shown Decimal, Hexadecimal, or Binary.
The selection is activated in front of which a (•) point appears. If you choose
this category , then you get the following dialog box:
PROSYD 1131 4-9

Options
Image 4.10: Options dialog box of the category Desktop
If the option Tool bar has been chosen, then the tool bar with the buttons
for faster selection of menu commands becomes visible underneath the
menu bar.
If the option Status bar has been chosen, then the status bar at the lower
edge of the PROSYD 1131 main window becomes visible.
If the option Online in Security mode has been chosen, then in Online
mode with the commands "Run", "Stop", "Reset", "Toggle Breakpoint",
"Single cycle", "Write values", "Force values" and "Release force", a
dialog box appears with the confirmation request whether the command
should really be executed. This option is saved with the project.
In language you can define, in which language the menu and dialog texts
are displayed.
Note: Please note, that the language choice is only possible under
Windows NT !
Colors
4-10 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.11: Options dialog box of the category Color
You can edit the default color setting of PROSYD 1131. You can choose
whether you want to change the color settings for Line numbers (default
setting: light gray), for Breakpoint positions (dark gray), for a Set
breakpoint (light blue), for the Current position (red), for the Reached
Positions (green) or for the Monitoring of Boolean values (blue).
If you have chosen one of the indicated buttons, the dialog box for the input
of colors opens.
Image 4.12: Dialog box for setting colors
Directories
PROSYD 1131 4-11

Options
Image 4.13: Options dialog box of the category Directories
In the input fields Libraries and Compilation Files you can indicate
directories from which PROSYD 1131 should extract the libraries or
compilation files. If you activate the button (...) behind a field, then the
dialog box for selecting a directory opens.
Build
Image 4.14: Options dialog box of the category Build
If the option Debugging has been chosen, then the code can significantly
increase in size. Choosing this option makes it possible to generate
additional debugging codes. This is necessary in order to use the PROSYD
1131 debugging functions. If you deactivate this option, then you make
possible faster processing and a smaller code. This option is saved with the
project.
4-12 PROSYD 1131

If the option Online Changes has been chosen, then your project can be
changed in the Online mode. With this new compilation only the changed
POUs are loaded into the PLC. (See "Project" "Build")
If the option Save before compile, then your project will be saved every
time before compilation.
With the indication of the Number of data segments you can determine
how much space is reserved in the PLC for the data of your project. If during
Build you get the message: "The global variables need too much memory",
then increase the number of segments in "Project" "Build" ", which increases
the number of the data segments.
These options are saved with the project.
Passwords
Image 4.15: Options dialog box of the category Passwords
To protect your files from unauthorized access PROSYD 1131 offers the
option of using a password to protect against your files being opened or
changed.
Enter the desired password in the field Password. For each typed character
an asterisk (*) appears in the field. You must repeat the same word in the
field Confirm Password. Close the dialog box with OK. If you get the
message:
"The password does not agree with the confirmation",
then you made a typing error during one of the two entries. In this case
repeat both entries until the dialog box closes without a message.
If you now save the file and then reopen it, then you get a dialog box in
which you are requested to enter the password. The project can then only be
opened if you enter the correct password. Otherwise PROSYD 1131 reports:
PROSYD 1131 4-13

Options
"The password is not correct."

Along with the opening of the file, you can also use a password to protect
against the file being changed. For this you must enter a password in the
field Write Protection Password and confirm this entry in the field
underneath.
A write-protected project can be opened without a password. For this simply
press the button Cancel, if PROSYD 1131 tells you to enter the write-
protection password when opening a file. Now you can compile the project,
load it into the PLC, simulate, etc., but you cannot change it.
Of course it is important that you memorize both passwords. However, if
you should ever forget a password, then contact the manufacturer of your
PLC.
The passwords are saved with the project.
In order to create differentiated access rights you can define user groups
("Project" "Object access rights" and "Passwords for user groups").
`"Sourcedownload"
The following dialog will be opened when you select this category:
Image 4.16: Option dialog for the category Sourcedownload
You can choose to which Timing and what Extent the project is loaded into
the controller system. The option Sourcecode only exclusively involves just
the PROSYD 1131 file (file extension .pro). The option All files also
includes files such as the associated library files, visualization bitmaps,
configuration files, etc.
4-14 PROSYD 1131

Using the option Implicit at load allows the selected file range to be
automatically loaded into the controller system on the command "Online"
"Load".
Using the option Notice at load offers a dialog, when the command
"Online" "Load" is given, with the question ”Do you want to write the
source code into the controller system?”. Pressing Yes will automatically
load the selected range of files into the controller system, or you can
alternatively finish with No.
When using the option On demand the selected range of files must be
expressly loaded into the controller system by giving the command "Online"
"Sourcecode download".
The project which is stored in the controller system can be retrieved by
using "File" "Open" with Open project from PLC. The files will be
unpacked in the process.
See Chapter 4.3, "File" "Open" for details !
4.3 Managing Projects
The commands which refer to entire project are found under the menu items
"File" and "Project". Some of the commands under "Project" deal with
objects and are therefore described in the chapter Creating and Deleting
Objects, etc..
"File" "New"
Symbol:
With this command you create an empty project with the name "Untitled".
This name must be changed when saving.
"File" "Open"
Symbol:
With this command you open an already existing project. If a project has
already been opened and changed, then PROSYD 1131 asks whether this
project should be saved or not.
The dialog box for opening a file appears, and a project file with the
extension "*.pro" or a library file with the extension "*.lib" must be chosen.
This file must already exist. It is not possible to create a project with the
command "Open".
PROSYD 1131 4-15

Managing Projects
To upload a project from the PLC, press PLC at Open project from PLC.
If there is no current connection to the PLC, the dialog Communication
parameters appears to define the transmission parameters. If an online
connection is made, there will be checked whether there are already project
files with equal names in the local PC directories. In this case the dialog
Load project from PLC is opened where you can decide to replace or not
to replace the local files by that used in the PLC.
Note: Please note, that you in any case have to give a new name to a
project, when you load it from the PLC to your local directory, otherwise it
is unnamed.
If there has not yet been loaded a project to the PLC, you get an error
message.
(See also "Project" "Options" category "Sourcedownload").
Image 4.17: Standard dialog box for opening a file in PROSYD 1131
The most recently opened files are listed under the command "File" "Exit".
If you choose one of them, then this project is opened.
If Passwords or User groups have been defined for the project, then a
dialog box appears for entering the password.
4-16 PROSYD 1131

"File" "Close"
With this command you close the currently-open project. If the project has
been changed, then PROSYD 1131 asks if these changes are to be saved or
not.
If the project to be saved carries the name "Untitled", then a name must be
given to it (see "File" "Save as").
"File" "Save"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<S>

With this command you save any changes in the project.
If the project to be saved is called "Untitled", then you must give it a name
(see "File" "Save as").
"File" "Save as"

With this command the current project can be saved in another file or as a
library. This does not change the original project file.
After the command has been chosen the Save dialog box appears. Choose
either an existing File name or enter a new file name and choose the desired
file type.
Image 4.18: Dialog box for Save as
If the project is to be saved under a new name, then choose the file type
PROSYD 1131 Project (*.pro).
If you choose the file type Project Version 1.5 (*.pro), respectively
Project Version 2.0 (*.pro) then the current project is saved as if it were
PROSYD 1131 4-17

Managing Projects
created with the version 1.5 respectively 2.0. Specific data of the version 2.0
can thereby be lost! However, the project can be executed with the version
1.5 or 2.0.
You can also save the current project as a library in order to use it in other
projects. Choose the file type Internal library (*.lib) if you have
programmed your POUs in PROSYD 1131.
Choose the file type External library (*.lib) if you want to implement and
integrate POUs in other languages (e.g. C). This means that another file is
also saved which receives the file name of the library, but with the extension
"*.h". This file is constructed as a C header file with the declarations of all
POUs, data types, and global variables. Is external libraries are used, in the
simulation mode the implementation, written for the POUs in PROSYD
1131, will be executed. Working with the real hardware the implementation
written in C will be executed.
Then click OK. The current project is saved in the indicated file. If the new
file name already exists, then you are asked if you want to overwrite this
file.
When saving as a library, the entire project is compiled. If an error occurs
thereby, then you are told that a correct project is necessary in order to create
a library. The project is then not saved as a library.
"File" "Print"
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+
With this command the content of the active window is printed.
After the command has been chosen, then the Print dialog box appears.
Choose the desired option or configure the printer and then click OK. The
active window is printed.
4-18 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.19: Print dialog box
You can determine the number of the copies and print the version to a file.
With the button Properties you open the dialog box to set up the printer.
You can determine the layout of your printout with the command "File"
"Printer Setup".
During printing the dialog box shows you the number of pages already
printed. When you close this dialog box, then the printing stops after the
next page.
In order to document your entire project, use the command "Project"
"Document".
If you want to create a document frame for your project, then open a global
variables list and use the command "Extras" "Make Docuframe file".
"File" "Printer setup"

With this command you can determine the layout of the printed pages. The
following dialog box is now opened:
PROSYD 1131 4-19

Managing Projects
Image 4.20: Page Layout Dialog Box
In the field File you can enter the name of the file with the extension ".dfr"
in which the page layout should be saved. The default destination for the
settings is the file DEFAULT.DFR.
If you would like to change an existing layout, then browse through the
directory tree to find the desired file with the button Browse
You can also choose whether to begin a new page for each object and for
each subobject. Use the Printer Setup button to open the printer
configuration.
If you click on the Edit button, then the frame for setting up the page layout
appears. Here you can determine the page numbers, date, filename and POU
name, and also place graphics on the page and the text area in which the
documentation should be printed.
4-20 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.21: Window for pasting the placeholders on the page layout
With the menu item "Insert" "Placeholder" and subsequent selection

among the five placeholders (Page, POU name, File name, Date, and
Content), insert into the layout a so-called placeholder by dragging a
rectangle2 on the layout while pressing the left mouse button. In the printout
they are replaced as follows:
Command Placeholder Effect

Page {Page} Here the current page number appears
in the printout.
POU name {POU Name} Here the current name of the POU
appears.
File name {File Name} Here the name of the project appears.
Date {Date} Here the current date appears.
Contents {Contents} Here the contents of the POU appear.
In addition, with "Insert" "Bitmap" you can insert a bitmap graphic (e.g. a
company logo) in the page. After selecting the graphic, a rectangle should
also be drawn here on the layout using the mouse. Other visualization
elements can be inserted (see chapter Visualizations).
2
Drawing a rectangle on the layout by dragging the mouse diagonally while
pressing the left mouse button.
PROSYD 1131 4-21

Managing Projects
If the template was changed, then PROSYD 1131 asks when the window is
closed if these changes should be saved or not.
"File" "Exit"
Shortcut: <Alt>+<F4>
With this command you exit from PROSYD 1131.
If a project is opened, then it is closed as described in "File" "Save".
"Project" "Check all"

With this command you can check the static correctness of your program. If
an error crops up, then it is announced in the message window, as with the
building of the program.
In contrast to the command "Rebuild all", no code is created
"Project" "Build"
With this command all changed POUs are built. When loading the program,
only the modified POUs are sent to the PLC. The rest of the program
remains unchanged in the PLC.
Note: The command "Build" is only supported if PROSYD 1131 is

equipped with the Online Change function. Otherwise the command
"Build" acts like "Rebuild all".
With larger changes use the function "Project" "Register changes".
Online Change function means that parts of a program can be exchanged
(sent to the PLC) without interrupting the PLC. All data is retained as far as
possible.
Warning: If you select "Build" two times in a row without

sending the program to the PLC in the interim, then the error message
appears: "Modifications not compatible with each other".
Follwing this the program must be rebuilt ("Rebuild all") and sent in full to
the PLC!
"Project" "Rebuild all"

Shortcut: <Alt>+<F11>
With this command you rebuild all POUs. The message window is opened
which shows the progress of the building process and any errors which may
be be discovered.
4-22 PROSYD 1131

A list of all error messages is to be found in the appendix.
Image 4.22: Message window of a project with three POUs and two error messages
With the command "Online" "Login" the command "Rebuild all" is

automatically executed if the project has been modified since the last
compilation.
If the option Save before compile in the Options dialog box in the category
Build has been chosen, then the project is backed up before compilation.
Note: The cross references are created during compilation and are not
saved in the project! In order to use the commands "Show call tree”,
"Show cross reference list, and "Show unused variables the project must
be rebuilt after loading and after a modification.
"Project" "Document"
This command lets you print the documentation of your entire project. The
elements of a complete documentation are:
• The POUs,
• the contents of the documentation,
• the data types,
• the visualizations
• the resources (Access variables, global variables, variables
configuration, the Sampling Trace, the PLC Configuration, the Task
Configuration, the Watch and Receipt Manager)
• the call trees of POUs and data types, as well as
• the cross reference list.
For the last two items the project must have been built without errors.
PROSYD 1131 4-23

Managing Projects
Image 4.23: Dialog box for project documentation
Only those areas in the dialog box are printed which are highlighted in blue.
If you want to select the entire project, then select the name of your project
in the first line.
If, on the other hand, you only want to select a single object, then click on
the corresponding object or move the dotted rectangle onto the desired
object with the arrow key. Objects which have a plus sign in front of their
symbols are organization objects which contain other objects. With a click
on a plus sign organization object is expanded, and with a click on the
resulting minus sign it can be closed up again. When you select an
organization object, then all relevant objets are also selected. By pressing the
<Shift> key you can select a group of objects, and by pressing the <Ctrl>
key you can select several individual objects.
Once you have made your selection, then click on OK. The Print dialog box
appears. You can determine the layout of the pages to be printed with
"File" "Printer setup".
4-24 PROSYD 1131

"Project" "Export"
With PROSYD 1131 projects can be exported or imported. That allows you
to exchange programs between different IEC programming systems.
There is a standardized exchange format for POUs in IL, ST, and SFC (the
Common Elements format of IEC 1131-3). For the POUs in LD and FBD
and the other objects PROSYD 1131 has its own filing format since there is
no text format for this in IEC 1131-3. The selected objects are written to an
ASCII file.
POUs, data types, visualizations, and the resources can be exported.
Once you have made your selection in the dialog box window (the same way
as with "Project" "Document" ), you can decide, whether you want to
export the selected parts to one file or to export in separate files, one for
each object. Switch on or off the option One file for each object then click
on OK. The dialog box for saving files appears. Enter a file name with the
expansion ".exp" respectively a directory for the object export files, which
then will be saved there with the file name <objectname.exp>.
"Project" "Import"
In the resulting dialog box for opening files select the desired export file.
The data is imported into the current project. If an object with the same
name already exists in the same project, then a dialog box appears with the
question "Do you want to replace it?": If you answer Yes, then the object in
the project is replaced by the object from the import file. If you answer No,
then the name of the new objects receives as a supplement an underline and
a digit ("_0", "_1", ..). With Yes, all or No, all this is carried out for all
objects.
In the message window the import is registered.
"Project" "Compare"
With this command you can compare the open project with another. For
example, if you prepare to save and want to know where you have made
changes in the current project, then you can compare the open project with
the last saved version of it.
After you have given this command, then the dialog box for opening files
appears. Choose the project with which you want to compare the current
project. If you press OK, then you will see the result of the comparison in
the message window. All of the objects of the chosen project are listed and
the changes in the object are shown afterward in parentheses. There are five
possible messages:
• "Unchanged": The object was not changed.
PROSYD 1131 4-25

Managing Projects
• "Deleted": The object is no longer present in the current project.

• "Implementation changed": The instruction part of the POU has been
changed.
• "Interface changed": The declaration part of the object has been
changed.
• "Interface and implementation changed": Both the instruction part and
the declaration part of the POU have been changed.
A doubleclick on a message selects the first change in this object.
"Project" "Merge"
With this command you can merge objects (POUs, data types,
visualizations, and resources) from other projects into your project.
When the command has been given, first the standard dialog box for
opening files appears. When you have chosen a file there, a dialog box
appears in which you can choose the desired object. The selection takes
place as described with "Project" "Document" .
If an object with the same name already exists in the project, then the name
of the new object receives the addition of an underline and a digit ("_1",
"_2" ...).
"Project" "Project
info"
Under this menu item the information about your project can be saved.
When the command has been given, then the following dialog box opens:
4-26 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.24: Dialog box for entering project information
The following project information is displayed:

• File name
• Directory path
• The time of the most recent change (Change date)
This information can not be changed.
In addition, you can can add the following information:
• A Title of the project,
• the name of the Author,
• the Version number, and
• a Description of the project.
This information is optional. When you press the button Statistics you
receive statistical information about the project.
It contains information such as the number of the POUs, data types, and the
local and global variables as they were traced at the last compilation.
PROSYD 1131 4-27

Managing Projects
Image 4.25: Example of project statistics
If you choose the option Ask for project info in the category Load & Save
in the Options dialog box, then while saving a new project, or while saving a
project under a new name, the project info is called automatically.
"Project" "Global
Search"
With this command you can search for the location of a text in POUs, data
types, or in the objects of the global variables.
When the command is entered, a dialog box opens in which you can choose
the desired object. The selection is made as in the "Project" "Document"
description.
When you have confirmed the selection with OK, then the search dialog box
appears. If a text in an object has been found, then the object is loaded into
the appropriate editor, and its location is shown.
"Project" "Global
replace"
With this command you can search for the location of a text in POUs, data
types, or the objects of the global variables and replace this text by another.
This is executed in the same way as with "Project" "Global Search" or
"Edit" "Replace".
4-28 PROSYD 1131

"Project" "Register
changes"
This command is necessary when significant changes have to be made to a
project without interrupting the PLC. (Online Change).
Copy your project, make your changes, and test your changes. Select the
command "Project" "Compare" in order to compare the two projects.
With the command "Register changes" all differences between the current
project and the comparison are traced. Then, with the command "Build" the
modified POUs can be compiled. When downloading the program only the
modified POUs are sent to the PLC. The rest of the program remains
unchanged in the PLC.
User groups
In PROSYD 1131 up to eight user groups with different access rights to the
POUs, data types, visualizations, and resources can be set up. Access rights
for single objects or all of them can be established. Only a member of a
certain user group can open a project. A member of such a user group must
identify himself by means of a password.
The user groups are numbered from 0 to 7, whereby the Group 0 has the
administrator rights, i.e. only members of group 0 may determine passwords
and access rights for all groups and/or objects.
When a new project is launched, then all passwords are initially empty.
Until a password has been set for the 0 group, one enters the project
automatically as a member of the 0 group.
If a password for the user group 0 is existing while the project is loaded,
then a password will be demanded for all groups when the project is opened.
For this the following dialog box appears:
Image 4.26: Dialog box for password entry
In the combobox User group on the left side of the dialog box, enter the
group to which you belong and enter on the right side the relevant
PROSYD 1131 4-29

Managing Projects
password. Press OK. If the password does not agree with the saved
password, then the message appears:
"The password is not correct."
Only when you have entered the correct password can the project be opened.
With the command "Passwords for user group" you can assign the
passwords, and with "Object" "Access rights" you can define the rights
for single objects or for all of them.
"Project""Passwords
for user groups"
With this command you open the dialog box for password assignment for
user groups. This command can only be executed by members of group 0.
When the command has been given, then the following dialog box appears:
Image 4.27: Dialog box for password assignment
In the left combobox User group you can select the group. Enter the desired
password for the group in the field Password. For each typed character an
asterisk (*) appears in the field. You must repeat the same password in the
field Confirm password. Close the dialog box after each password entry
with OK. If you get the message:
"The password does not agree with the confirmation",
then you made a typing error during one of the two entries. In this case
repeat both entries until the dialog box closes without a message.
Then, if necessary, assign a password for the next group by calling the
command again.
With the command "Object" "Access rights" you can assign the rights for
single objects or all of them.
4-30 PROSYD 1131

4.4 Creating and Deleting Objects, etc.
Now we shall explain how to work with objects and what help is available
to keep track of a project (Folders, Call tree, Cross reference list,..).
Object
POUs, data types, visualizations and the resources (Access variables, global
variables, the variable configuration, the Sampling Trace, the PLC
Configuration, the Task Configuration, and the Watch and Receipt Manager
are all defined as "objects". The folders inserted for structuring the project
are partially involved. All objects of a project are in the Object Organizer.
If you hold the mouse pointer for a short time on a POU in the Object
Organizer, then the type of the POU (Program, Function or Function block)
is shown in a Tooltip. For the global variables the tooltip shows the keyword
(VAR_ACCESS, VAR_GLOBAL, VAR_CONFIG).
Folder
In order to keep track of larger projects you should group your POUs, data
types, visualizations, and global variables systematically in folders.
You can set up as many levels of folders as you want. If a plus sign is in
front of a closed folder symbol, then this folder contains objects and/or
additional folders. With a click on the plus sign the folder is opened and the
subordinated objects appear. With a click on the minus (which has replaced
the plus sign) the folder can be closed again. In the context menu you find
the commands "Expand nodes" and "Collapse nodes" with the same
functions.
With Drag&Drop you can move the objects as well as the folders within
their object type. For this select the object and drag it with pressed left
mouse button to the desired position.
Note: Folders have no influence on the program, but rather serve only
to structure your project clearly.
PROSYD 1131 4-31

Creating and Deleting Objects, etc.
Image 4.28: Example of folders in the Object Organizer
"New Folder"
With this command a new folder is inserted as a structural object. If a folder
has been selected, then the new one is created underneath it. Otherwise it is
created on the same level.
The context menu of the Object Organizer which contains this command
appears when an object or the object type has been selected and you have
pressed the right mouse button or <Shift>+<F10>.
"Expand nodes"
"Collapse nodes"
With the command expand the objects are visibly unfolded which are
located in the selected object. With Collapse the subordinated objects are no
longer shown.
With folders you can open or close them with a double mouse click or by
pressing <Enter>.
The context menu of the Object Organizer which contains this command
appears when an object or the object type has been selected and you have
pressed the right mouse button or <Shift>+<F10>.
"Project" "Object
Delete"
Shortcut: <Delete>
With this command the currently selected object (a POU, a data type, a
visualization, or global variables), or a folder with the subordinated objects
is removed from the Object Organizer and is thus deleted from the project.
For safety you are asked once more for confirmation.
If the editor window of the object was open, then it is automatically closed.
4-32 PROSYD 1131

If you delete with the command "Edit" "Cut", then the object is parked on
the clipboard.
"Project" "Object Add"

Shortcut: <Insert>
With this command you create a new object. The type of the object (POU,
data type, visualization, or global variables) depends upon the selected
register card in the Object Organizer. Enter the name of the new object in
the dialog box which appears. Remember that the name of the object may
not have already been used.
If you are dealing with a POU, then you must also choose the type of the
POU (Program, Function, or Function block) and the language in which it is
to be programmed.
After confirmation of the entry, then the suitable entry window for the object
appears.
Image 4.29: Dialog box for creating a new POU
If, on the other hand, you use the command "Edit" "Paste", then the object
is pasted from the clipboard, and no dialog box appears.
"Project" "Object
Rename"
Shortcut: <Spacebar>
With this command you give a new name to the currently-selected object or
folder. Remember that the name of the object may not have already been
used.
If the editing window of the object is open, then its title is changed
automatically when the name is changed.
Image 4.30: Dialog box for renaming a POU
PROSYD 1131 4-33

"Project" "Object
Convert"
This command can only be used with POUs. You can convert POUs from
the languages SFC, ST, FBD, LD, and IL into one of the three languages IL,
FBD, and LD.
For this the project must be compiled. Choose the language into which you
want to convert and give the POU a new name. Remember that the name of
the POU may not have already been used. Then press OK, and the new POU
is added to your POU list.
Image 4.31: Dialog box for converting a POU
"Project" "Object
Copy"
With this command a selected object is copied and saved under a new name.
Enter the name of the new object in the resulting dialog box. Remember that
the name of the object may not have already been used.
If, on the other hand, you used the command "Edit" "Copy", then the
object is parked on the clipboard, and no dialog box appears.
Image 4.32: Dialog box for copying a POU
4-34 PROSYD 1131

"Project" "Object
Open"
Shortcut: <Enter>
With the command you load a selected object within the Object Organizer
into the respective editor. If a window with this object is already open, then
it gets a focus, is moved into the foreground and can now be edited.
There are two other ways of opening an object:
• Doubleclick with the mouse on the desired object
• type in the Object Organizer the first letter of the object name. Then a
dialog box opens in which all objects of the available object types with
this initial letter are shown. Select the desired object and click on the
button Open in order to load the object in its edit window. This option
is supported with the object type Resources only for global variables.
This last possibility is especially useful in projects with many objects.
Image 4.33: Dialog box for choosing the object to be opened
"Project" "Object
Access rights"
With this command you open the dialog box for assigning access rights to
the different user groups. The following dialog box appears:
PROSYD 1131 4-35

Image 4.34: Dialog box for assigning access rights
Members of the user group 0 can now assign individual access rights for
each user group. There are three possible settings:
• No Access: the object may not be opened by a member of the user
group.
• Read Access: the object can be opened for reading by a member of the
user group but not changed.
• Full Access: the object may be opened and changed by a member of
the user group.
The settings refer either to the currently-selected object in the Object
Organizer or, if the option Apply to all is chosen, to all POUs, data types,
visualizations, and resources of the project.
The assignment to a user group takes place when opening the project
through a password request if a password was assigned to the user group 0.
"Project" "Add Action"

This command is used to generate an action allocated to a selected block in
the Object Organiser. One selects the name of the action in the dialog which
appears and also the language in which the action should be implemented.
The new action is placed under your block in the Object Organiser. A plus
sign appears in front of the block. A simple mouse click on the plus sign
causes the action objects to appear and a minus sign appears in front of the
block. Renewed clicking on the minus sign causes the actions to disappear
and the plus sign appears again. This can also be achieved over the context
menu commands "Expand Node" and "Collapse Node".
"Project" "View
instance"
With this command you can open and show single instances of function
blocks. The function block whose instance should be open must first be
4-36 PROSYD 1131

selected in the Object Organizer before you can execute this command. In
the resulting dialog box you can choose the desired instance of this function
block.
Note: Instances can be opened only after logging in! (Project was
correctly compiled and sent with "Online" "Login" to the PLC).
Image 4.35: Dialog box for opening an instance
"Project" "Show call

tree"
With this command you open a window which shows the call tree of the
object chosen in the Object Organizer. For this the project must be compiled
(see "Rebuild all"). The call tree contains both calls for POUs and
references to data types.
PROSYD 1131 4-37

Image 4.36: Example of a call tree
"Project" "Show cross

reference list"
With this command you open a dialog box which makes possible the output
of all application points for a variable, address, or a POU. For this the
project must be compiled (see "Rebuild all").
Choose first the category Variable, Address, or POU and then enter the
name of the desired element. By clicking on the button Get References you
get the list of all application points. Along with the POU and the line or
network number, it is shown whether this point has read only access or full
access, whether it is a local or global variable and whether the variable is
connected to an address.
When you select a line of the cross reference list and press the button Go To
or doubleclick on the line, then the POU is shown in its editor at the
corresponding point. In this way you can jump to all application points
without a time-consuming search.
In order to make processing easier, you can use the Send to message
window button to bring the current cross reference list into the message
window and from there change to the respective POU.
4-38 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.37: Dialog box and example of a cross reference list
"Project" "Show
unused variables"
With this command a list of variables is shown which, to be sure, have been
declared in the project but are not being used anywhere. For this the project
must be compiled (see "Rebuild all").
If there are no unused variables in your project, then that is announced.
Otherwise the following window appears:
PROSYD 1131 4-39

General Editing Functions
Image 4.38: Unused variables of a project
If you select a variable and press the button Go To or doubleclick on the

variable, then you change to the respective object in which the variable has
been declared.
"Extras"
Previous version
With this command you can restore the current object to the last saved state.
The restored state is either that of the most recent manual save ("File"
"Save") or that which was kept after the automatic save, depending upon
which version is most recent.
4.5 General Editing Functions
You can use the following commands in all editors and some of them in the
Object Organizer. All of the commands are locted under the menu item
"Edit".
"Edit" "Undo"
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<Z>
This command undoes the action which was most recently executed in the
currently-open editor window or in the Object Organizer.
By repeatedly selecting this command, all actions can be undone back to the
point at which the window was opened. This applies to all actions in the
editors for POUs, data types, visualizations, and global variables and in the
Object Organizer.
With "Edit" "Redo" you can restore an action which you have undone.
4-40 PROSYD 1131

Note: The commands "Undo" and "Redo" apply to the current

window. Each window carries its own action list. If you want to undo
actions in several windows, then you must activate the corresponding
window. When undoing or redoing in the Object Organizer the focus must
lie here.
"Edit" "Redo"
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<Y>
With the command in the currently-open editor window or in the Object
Organizer you can restore an action you have undone ("Edit" "Undo").
As often as you have previously executed the command "Undo" , you can
also carry out the command "Redo".
Note: The commands "Undo" and "Redo" apply to the current

window. Each window carries its own action list. If you want to undo
actions in several windows, then you must activate the corresponding
window. When undoing or redoing in the Object Manager must lie there.
"Edit" "Cut"
Symbol:
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<X> or <Shift>+<Delete>
This command transfers the current selection from the editor to the
clipboard. The selection is removed from the editor.
In the Object Organizer this similarly applies to the selected object, whereby
not all objects can be deleted, e.g. the PLC Configuration.
Remember that not all editors support the cut command, and that its use can
be limited in some editors.
The form of the selection depends upon the respective editor:
In the text editors (IL, ST, and declarations) the selection is a list of
characters.
In the FBD and LD editors the choice is a number of networks which are
indicated by a dotted rectangle in the network number field or a box with all
preceding lines, boxes, and operands.
In the SFC editor the selection is a part of a series of steps surrounded by a
dotted rectangle.
PROSYD 1131 4-41

In order to paste the content of the clipboard you use the command "Edit"
"Paste". In the SFC editor you can also use the commands "Extras"
"Insert parallel branch (right)" or "Extras" "Paste after".
In order to copy a selection onto the clipboard without deleting it, use the
command "Edit" "Copy".
In order to remove a selected area without changing the clipboard, use the
command "Edit" "Delete".
"Edit" "Copy"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<C>

This command copies the current selection from the editor to the clipboard.
This does not change the contents of the editor window.
With the Object Organizer this similarly applies to the selected object,
whereby not all objects can be copied, e.g. the PLC Configuration.
Remember that not all editors support copying and that it can be limited
with some editors.
For the type of selection the same rules apply as with "Edit" "Cut".
In the text editors (IL, ST, and declarations) the selection is a list of
characters.
In the FBD and LD editors the choice is a number of networks which are
indicated by a dotted rectangle in the network number field or a box with all
preceding lines, boxes, and operands.
In the SFC editor you can also use the commands "Extras" "Insert
parallel branch (right)" or "Extras" "Paste after".
"Edit" "Paste"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<V>

Pastes the content of the clipboard onto the current position in the editor
window. In the graphic editors the command can only be executed when a
correct structure results from the insertion.
With the Object Organizer the object is pasted from the clipboard.
Remember that pasting is not supported by all editors and that its use can be
limited in some editors.
The current position can be defined differently according to the type of
editor:
4-42 PROSYD 1131

With the text editors (IL, ST, Declarations) the current position is that of the
blinking cursor (a vertical line) which you place by clicking with the
mouse).
In the FBD and LD editors the current position is the first network with a
dotted rectangle in the network number area. The contents of the clipboard
are inserted in front of this network. If a partial structure has been copied,
then it is inserted in front of the selected element.
In the SFC editor the current position is determined the selection which is
surrounded by a dotted rectangle. Depending upon the selection and the
contents of the clipboard, these contents are inserted either in front of the
selection or into a new branch (parallel or alternative) to the left of the
selection.
In SFC the commands "Extras" "Insert parallel branch (right)" or
"Extras" "Paste after" can be used in order to insert the contents of the
clipboard.
"Edit" "Delete"
Shortcut: <Delete>
Deletes the selected area from the editor window. This does not change the
contents of the clipboard.
In the Object Organizer this applies likewise to the selected object, whereby
not all objects can be deleted, e.g. the PLC Configuration.
For the type of selection the same rules apply as with "Edit" "Cut".
In the library manager the selection is the currently selected library name.
"Edit" "Find"
Symbol:
With this command you search for a certain text passage in the current
editor window. The Find dialog box opens. It remains opens until the button
Cancel is pressed.
In the field Find what you can enter the series of characters you are looking
for.
In addition, you can decide whether the text you are looking for Match
whole word only or not, or also whether Match case is to be considered,
and whether the search should proceed Up or Down starting from the
current cursor position.
The button Find next starts the search which begins at the selected position
and continues in the chosen search direction. If the text passages is found,
then it is highlighted. If the passage is not found, then a message announces
PROSYD 1131 4-43

this. The search can be repeated several times in succession until the
beginning or the end of the contents of the editor window has been reached.
Remember that the found text can be covered up by the Find dialog box.
Image 4.39: Find dialog box
"Edit" "Find next"
Symbol: Shortcut: <F3>

With this command you execute a search with the same parameters as with
the most recent action "Edit" "Find".
"Edit" "Replace"
With this command you search for a certain passage just as with the
command "Edit" "Find", and replace it with another. After you have
chosen the command the dialog box for find and replace appears. This
dialog box remains open until the button Cancel or Close is pressed.
The button Replace replaces the current selection with the text in the field
Replace with.
The button Replace all replaces every occurrence of the text in the field
Find next after the current position with the text in the field Replace with.
At the end of the procedure a message announces how many replacements
were made.
4-44 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.40: Dialog box for find and replace
"Edit" "Input
Assistant"
Shortcut: <F2>
This command provides a dialog box for choosing possible inputs at the
current cursor position in the editor window. In the left column choose the
desired input category, select the desired entry in the right column, and
confirm your choice with OK. This inserts your choice at this position.
The categories offered depend upon the current cursor position in the editor
window, i.e. upon that which can be entered at this point (e.g. variables,
operators, POUs, conversions, ...).
Image 4.41: Input Assistant Dialog Box
In some positions (e.g. in the watch list) multilevel variable names are
necessary. At first the Input Assistant dialog box contains a list of all POUs
along with a single point for the global variables. After each POU name
there is a point. Doubleclicking with the mouse or pressing <Enter> opens a
list of the variables for a selected POU. Instances and data types can, when
appropriate, be opened again. By pressing OK you accept the selected
variable.
PROSYD 1131 4-45

Image 4.42: Input Assistant dialog box with multilevel variable names
Note: Some entries (e.g. global variables) are only brought up to date in
the Input Assistant after a compilation run.
"Edit" "Declare
Variable"’
This command opens the dialog for the declaration of a variable. This dialog
also opens automatically when the option 'Project' 'Options' 'Editor'
'Autodeclaration' is switched on and when a new undefined variable is used
the declaration editor.
"Edit" "Next error"

Shortcut: <F4>
After the incorrect compilation of a project this command can show the next
error. The corresponding editor window is activated and the incorrect place
is selected. At the same time in the message window the corresponding error
message is shown.
"Edit" "Previous
error"
After the incorrect compilation of a project this command shows the
previous error. The corresponding editor window is activated and the
4-46 PROSYD 1131

incorrect place is selected. At the same time in the message window the
corresponding error message is shown.
4.6 General Online Functions
The available online commands are assembled under the menu item
"Online". The execution of some of the commands depends upon the active
editor.
The online commands become available only after logging in.
"Online" "Login"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Alt>+<F8>

This command combines the programming system with the PLC (or starts
the simulation program) and changes into the online mode.
If the current project has not been compiled since opening or since the last
modification, then it is compiled now (as with "Project" "Rebuild all"). If
errors occur during compilation, then PROSYD 1131 does not change into
Online mode.
After a successful login all online functions are available (if the
corresponding settings in "Options" category Build have been entered). The
current values are monitored for all visible variable declarations.
Use the "Online" "Logout" command to change from online back to
offline mode.
If the system reports

Error:
"A connection to the PLC could not be established"
Verify whether the parameters selected in the "Online" "Communication
Parameters" agree with those of your PLC.
You should especially verify that the interface number is correct. (If you
have set it to COM1, the cable should also be physically plugged into
COM1.) Furthermore, verify that the baud rates in the PLC and the Program
System agree with each other. (Default setting in PROSYD 1131: 19200
Bd).
Error:
"The program has been modified! Should the new program be loaded?"
The project which is open in the editor is incompatible with the program
currently found in the PLC (or with the Simulation Mode program being
PROSYD 1131 4-47

General Online Functions
run). Monitoring and debugging is therefore not possible. You can either
choose "No," logout, and open the right project, or use "Yes" to load the
current project in the PLC.
"Online" "Logout"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Strg>+<F8>

The connection to the PLC is broken, or, the Simulation Mode program is
ended and is shifted to the offline mode.
Use the "Online" "Login" command to change to the online mode.
"Online" "Download"
This command loads the compiled project in the PLC.
If you use C-Code generation, then prior to the download, the C-Compiler is
called up, which creates the download file. If this is not the case, then the
download file is created during the compiling.
"Online" "Run"

This command starts the program in the PLC or in Simulation Mode.
This command can be executed immediately after the "Online"
"Download" command, or after the user program in the PLC has been
ended with the "Online" "Stop" command, or when the user program is at
a break point, or when a Single Cycle has been performed.
"Online" "Stop"
Symbol: Kurzform <Umschalt>+<F8>

Stops the execution of the program in the PLC or in Simulation Mode
between two cycles.
Use the "Online" "Run" command to restart the program.
"Online" "Reset"
If you have initialized the variables with a specific value, then this command
will reset the variables to the initialized value. All other variables are set at a
standard initialization (for example, integers at 0). As a precautionary
measure, PROSYD 1131 asks you to confirm your decision before all of the
variables are overwritten.
Use the "Online" "Run" command to restart the program.
4-48 PROSYD 1131

"Online" "Toggle
Breakpoint"

This command sets a breakpoint in the present position in the active
window. If a breakpoint has already been set in the present position, that
breakpoint will be removed.
The position at which a breakpoint can be set depends on the language in
which the POU in the active window is written.
In the Text Editors (IL, ST), the breakpoint is set at the line where the cursor
is located, if this line is a breakpoint position (recognizable by the dark-gray
color of the line number field). You can also click on the line number field
to set or remove a breakpoint in the text editors.
In FBD and LD, the breakpoint is set at the currently selected network. In
order to set or remove a breakpoint in the FBD or LD Editor, you can also
click on the network number field.
In SFC, the breakpoint is set at the currently selected step. In SFC you can
also use <Shift> with a doubleclick to set or remove a breakpoint.
If a breakpoint has been set, then the line number field or the network
number field or the step will be displayed with a light-blue background
color.
If a breakpoint is reached while the program is running, the program will
stop, and the corresponding field will be displayed in a red background
color. In order to continue the program, use the "Online" "Run",
"Online" "Step in", or "Online" "Step Over" commands.
Online "Breakpoint
Dialog Box"
This command opens a dialog box to edit breakpoints throughout the entire
project. The dialog box also displays all breakpoints presently set.
In order to set a breakpoint, choose a POU in the POU combobox and the
line or the network in the Location combobox where you would like to set
the breakpoint; then press the Add button. The breakpoint will be added to
the list.
In order to delete a breakpoint, highlight the breakpoint to be deleted from
the list of the set breakpoints and press the Delete button.
The Delete All button can be used to delete all the breakpoints.
PROSYD 1131 4-49

In order to go to the location in the editor where a certain breakpoint was

set, highlight the respective breakpoint from the list of set breakpoints and
press the Go to button.
Image 4.43: Breakpoint Editing Dialog Box
"Online" "Step over"

This command causes a single step to execute. If a POU is called, the
program stops after its execution. In SFC a complete action is executed.
If the present instruction is the call-up of a function or of a function block,
then the function or function block will be executed completely. Use the
"Online" "Step In" command, in order to move to the first instruction of a
called function or function block.
If the last instruction has been reached, then the program will go on to the
next instruction in the POU.
"Online" "Step in"

Shortcut: <F8>
A single step is executed. The program is stopped before the first instruction
of a called POU.
If necessary, there will be a changeover to an open POU.
If the present position is a call-up of a function or of a function block, then
the command will proceed on to the first instruction in the called POU.
In all other situations, the command will function exactly as "Online"
"Step Over".
4-50 PROSYD 1131

"Online" "Single
Cycle"
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<F5>
This command executes a single PLC Cycle and stops after this cycle.
This command can be repeated continuously in order to proceed in single
cycles.
The Single Cycle ends when the "Online" "Run" command is executed.
"Online" "Write
Values" or "Force
Values"
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<F7> (Write values)
Shortcut: <F7> (Force values)
In order to change the value of a variable containing a single element, you
must first use the mouse to doubleclick on the line in which the variable is
declared, or alternatively you can use <Enter>. Next you can enter the new
value of the variable in the dialog box that pops up. In the case of Boolean
variables, the value is toggled without the dialog box appearing. The new
value is displayed in red.
Image 4.44: Dialog Box for Writing a New Variable Value.
The new value is not yet written in the PLC.

Several variables can be set to specific values and afterwards written all at
once (cycle consistently) in the PLC.
With "Write Values", the values are written just once and can immediately
be written over again.
With "Force Values", the values continue to be written after each cycle
until this procedure is stopped with "Release Force".
"Online" "Release
Force"
PROSYD 1131 4-51

This command ends the forcing of variables in the PLC. All forced variables
once again change their values normally.
If no forced values are available, the command will have no effect.
"Online""Show Call
Stack"
You can run this command when the Simulation Mode stops at a breakpoint.
You will be given a dialog box with a list of the POUs currently in the Call
Stack.
Image 4.45: Example of a Call Stack
The first POU is always PLC_PRG, because this is where the executing
begins.
The last POU is always the POU being executed.
After you have selected a POU and have pressed the Go to button, the
selected POU is loaded in its editor, and it will display the line or network
being processed.
"Online" "Flow
Control"
If you have selected the flow control, then a check(!) will appear in front
of the menu item. Following this, every line or every network will be
marked which was executed in the last PLC Cycle.
The line number field or the network number field of the lines or networks
which just run will be displayed in green. An additional field is added in the
IL-Editor in which the present contents of the accumulator are displayed. In
4-52 PROSYD 1131

the graphic editors for the Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram, an
additional field will be inserted in all connecting lines not transporting any
Boolean values. When these Out- and Inputs are verified, then the value that
is transported over the connecting line will be shown in this field.
Connecting lines that transport only Boolean values will be shaded blue
when they transport TRUE. This enables constant monitoring of the
information flow.
"Online" "Simulation"
If Simulation Mode is chosen, then a check(!) will appear in front of the
menu item.
In the simulation mode, the user program runs on the same PC under
Windows. This mode is used to test the project. The communication
between the PC and Simulation Mode uses the Windows Message
mechanism.
If the program is not in simulation mode, then the program will run on the
PLC. The communication between the PC and the PLC typically runs over
the serial interface.
The status of this flag is stored with the project.
"Online"
"Communication
Parameters"
The parameters for transferring through the serial interface can be entered in
a dialog box. It is important that these parameters agree with those entered
in the PLC.
Image 4.46: Dialog box for Entering Communication Parameters
PROSYD 1131 4-53

Possible adjustments include: the Baudrate; whether the transfer should be

made with Even, Uneven, or No Parity; the number of Stop Bits; and also
the interface (COM1, COM2, etc.) via which the transfer is to occur. The
selected parameters are stored with the project.
"Online"
"Communications
Parameters" for the
use of Gateway
You are offered a special dialog for setting communications parameters
when the communication between the local PC and the run-time system is
running over a gateway server in your system.
Let us examine the principle of the gateway system before explaining the
operation of the dialog:
A gateway server can be used to allow your local PC to communicate with
one or more run-time systems. The setting concerning which run-time
systems can be addressed, which is specifically configured for each gateway
server, and the connection to the desired gateway server, is made on the
local PC. Here it is possible that both the gateway server and the run-time
system(s) can run together on the local PC. If we are dealing with a gateway
server which is running on another PC we must ensure that it has been
started there. If you are selecting a locally installed gateway server, it
automatically starts when you log onto the target run-time system. You can
recognise this through the appearance of a PROSYD 1131 symbol on the
bottom right in the task bar. This symbol lights up as long as you are
connected to the run-time system over the gateway. The menu points Info
and Finish are obtained by clicking with the right mousekey on the symbol.
Finish is used to switch off the gateway.
See the following scheme for presenting a gateway system:
Image 4.47: Example of a Gateway server system
PC_local is your local PC, PC_x is another PC, which gateway addresses.
PC_gateway is the PC on which the gateway server is installed, PC_PLC1
through to PC_PLC4 are PCs on which the run-time systems are running.
4-54 PROSYD 1131

The diagram shows the modules as separated but it is fully possible for the
Gateway server and / or run-time systems to be installed together on the
local PC.
Important: Please note that a connection to gateway is only

possible over TCP/IP so make sure that your PC is configured appropriately!
The connections from gateway to the various run-time computers can, on the
other hand, run over different protocols (TCP/IP, Pipe, etc.).
Let us now return to the communications parameters dialog on the local PC:
It shows the current situation on the selected gateway server, which can be
called up at any time using the button Update.
The dialog will appear as follows if the communications parameters have
already been configured according to the example shown above:
Image 4.48: Dialog for setting the gateway communications parameters, example
The heading Channels lists two categories of connections:

On the one hand all of the connections are shown which are installed on the
currently connected gateway server called 'localhost'. Here the address or the
name of this gateway is located on the upper position behind the minus sign,
which in our example is running on the local computer. The appropriate
address 'localhost' corresponds in the normal case to the IP address 127.0.0.1
PROSYD 1131 4-55

of the local computer (PC_local). Below, indented to the right, are three
addresses of run-time computers to which the gateway channels are set-up to
(PC_PLC1 to 3). They could have been configured both from the local PC
or from the other PCs (PC_x) which are or were connected to the gateway
server.
The second category of the channels includes all connections to the gateway
which can be set up from your local PC, over this configuration dialog for
example. They create the ”branch” which leads from the minus sign directly
below to PC_PLC1 and PC_PLC4. These channel addresses do not
necessarily have to be known yet at the gateway. For PC_PLC4 in the
example described above, the configuration parameters are stored locally in
the project but they will first be known to the gateway the next time log-in to
the run-time system occurs. This has already occurred for PC_PLC1 since
the associated gateway address has appeared as an additional ”sub-branch”
to the ”channel tree”.
In the central part of the dialog one finds the designation, in each case, of the
left selected channel and the associated parameter under Name, Value and
Comment.
Let us now turn to the way the communications parameters themselves can
be set in dialog:
To define the connection to the desired gateway we open the dialog
Communication Parameters Gateway by pressing the button Gateway.
Image 4.49: Example dialog, definition of the local connection to the gateway
Here it is possible to enter or edit the name of the computer on which the
gateway server is running as well as its Dataport and Serviceport. By first
activation 'localhost' is offered by default as the name of the computer. You
can also enter an IP address instead of the computer name. The name
'localhost' is usually identical to the local IP address 127.0.0.1 in most cases
but you may have to enter this directly into the field Address. Suitable
values for the selected Gateway are usually already present in the fields
Dataport and Serviceport.
4-56 PROSYD 1131

By ending the dialog with OK the appropriate input appears in the title
Channels of the dialog Communications Parameters, in the upper position.
A sign in brackets showing ”not connected” appears behind the address
when it is not possible to establish a connection to the selected gateway
address, either because it is not running or because the address is incorrect.
Press the button New if you wish to install a new channel on the gateway
server. You are offered the following dialog.
Image 4.50: Example dialog, installing a new channel
The input field Name always contains the name used for the last inputted
channel. The current gateway name e.g. ‘localhost_’ appears if a connection
has not been entered yet. You can edit the channel name at this point. The
channel name is purely informative, it does not have to be a unique name
but it is recommended to use one. Select a driver which is offered in the
column Name with a mouse click (the offering depends on your individual
installation conditions) and the commentary to it may possibly be shown in
the column Info if one exists.
If you now close the dialog with OK, the newly defined channel appears in
the communications parameter dialog as a further entry for Channels at the
lowest position under the minus sign. It is only stored locally in the project
at first (see above). It is still possible to edit the column Value while it is in
this condition (see tips below); confirm the parameters with OK thereby
leaving the dialog.
To make the newly established connection known in the gateway, and thus
to make it generally available, it necessary for you to log-on into the run-
time system. When you open the communications parameter dialog again
the new channel, apart from being in its former position, also appears
indented under the address/name of the gateway computer. If a
communications error occurs when logging in, the interface cannot be
PROSYD 1131 4-57

Window set up
opened (e.g. COM1 for a serial connection) possibly because it is used by

another device.
The parameters for a channel already known by the gateway server can no
longer be edited in the configuration dialog. The parameter fields appear
grey. You can, however, delete the connection as long as it is not active.
Important: Please not that the deletion of a channel is not

reversible. It occurs at the moment that you press on the button Remove!
Tips for editing the parameters in the communications parameters dialog:
You can only edit the text fields in the column Value.
Select a text field with the mouse, and get into the editing mode by double
clicking or by pressing the space bar. The text input is finished by pressing
the <Enter> key.
You can use <Tabulator> or <Shift> + <Tabulator> to jump to the next or
the previous switching or editing possibility.
To edit numerical values it is possible with the arrow keys or the Page
Up/Down keys to change the value by one or ten units respectively. A
double click with the mouse also changes the value by increasing by one
unit. A typing check is installed for numerical values: <Ctrl> + <Home> or
<Ctrl> + <End> deliver the lowest or the highest value respectively for the
possible input values for the type of parameter in question.
"Online" "Sourcecode
download"
This command loads the source code for the project into the controller
system. See also "Project" "Options" "Sourcecode download"
4.7 Window set up
Under the "Window" menu item you will find all commands for managing
the windows. There are commands both for the automatic set up of your
window as well as for opening the library manager and for changing
between open windows. At the end of the menu you will find a list of all
open windows in the sequence they were opened. You can switch to the
desired window by clicking the mouse on the relevant entry. A check will
appear in front of the active window.
4-58 PROSYD 1131

"Window" "Tile
Horizontal"
With this command you can arrange all the windows horizontally in the
work area so that they do not overlap and will fill the entire work area.
"Window" "Tile
Vertical"
With this command you can arrange all the windows vertically in the work
area so that they do not overlap and will fill the entire work area.
"Window" "Cascade"
With this command you can arrange all the windows in the work area in a
cascading fashion, one behind another.
"Window" "Arrange
Symbols"
With this command you can arrange all of the minimized windows in the
work area in a row at the lower end of the work area.
"Window" "Close All"

With this command you can close all open windows in the work area.
"Window" "Messages"
Shortcut: <Shift>+<Esc>
With this command you can open or close the message window with the
messages from the last compiling, checking, or comparing procedure.
If the messages window is open, then a check (!) will appear in front of the
command.
4.8 Help when you need it
Should you encounter any problems with PROSYD 1131 during your work,
online help is available to help to solve them. There you will find all the
information that is also contained in this handbook.
"Help" "Contents and

Index"
With this command you can open the help topics window.
PROSYD 1131 4-59

Help when you need it
Under the Contents register card you will find the contents. The books can
be opened and closed using a doubleclick or the corresponding button.
Doubleclicking or activating the Show button on a highlighted topic will
display the topic in the main window of help or in the index window.
Click on the Index register card to look for a specific word, and click on the
Search register card to select a full-text search. Follow the instructions in
the register cards.
Image 4.51: Help Topics Window
Main Help Window

In the main help window topics are displayed with index entries listed below
them.
The following buttons available:
• Help topics opens the help topics window
• Back shows the help entry that was previously displayed
• Print opens the dialog box for printing
4-60 PROSYD 1131

• << shows the help entry that comes prior in sequence to the present
entry
• >> shows the help entry that is next in sequence
In addition you can use the following menu commands:
• With "File" "'Print Topics" you can print out the present help entry.
• If you use the "Edit" "Copy" command, the selected text will be
copied into the clipboard. From here you can insert the text into other
applications and use it there.
• If you use the "Edit" "Annotate" command, a dialog box will be
opened. There is an editing field on the left side of the dialog box in
which you can enter an annotation to the help page.
On the right side there are buttons for storing the text, for canceling
the program, for deleting the notation, for copying a highlighted text
on the clipboard , and for pasting a text from the clipboard.
If you have made an annotation to a help entry, a small green paper
clip will appear in the upper left-hand corner. By clicking the mouse
on the paper clip, you can open the dialog box with the annotation that
has been made.
• If you would like to mark a page from help, then you can set a
bookmark. To do so, choose the "Define" "Bookmark" command. A
dialog box will appear in which you can enter a new name (The name
of the page can serve as a starter) or can delete an old bookmark. If
bookmarks were defined, then these will be displayed in the
"Bookmark" menu. By choosing these menu items, you can access
the desired page.
• Under "Options", you can define whether the help window always
appears in the foreground or in the background or in the standard
setting.
• With "Display previous topics" under "Options", you are furnished
with a selection window with the previously displayed help topics.
Doubleclick the entry you wish to view.
• Under "Options", you can select the desired "Font" in small,
normal, or large.
• If "Options" "Use System Color" has been chosen, help will not be
displayed in the colors that were set, but in the system colors instead.
PROSYD 1131 4-61

Help when you need it
Image 4.52: Main Help Window
Index Window
The index window contains explanations about the menu commands, terms,
or sequences.
The index window will always remain on the surface by default, unless the
help option is placed in the background in the main window of help.
The following buttons are available:
• Help topics opens the help topics window
• Back shows the help entry that was previously displayed
• Print opens the dialog box for printing
• << shows the help entry directly prior to the present entry
• >> shows the help entry that is next in sequence
4-62 PROSYD 1131

Image 4.53: Index Window
Context Sensitive Help

Shortcut: <F1>
You can use the <F1> key in an active window, in a dialog box, or above a
menu command. When you perform a command from the menu, the help for
the command called up at that time is displayed.
You can also highlight a text (for example, a key word or a standard
function) and have the help displayed for that item.
PROSYD 1131 4-63

Chapter 5 - Editors in PROSYD 1131
5 Editors in PROSYD 1131

5.1 The Declaration Editor
Declaration editors are used to declare variables of POUs (Program

Organization Units) and global variables, for data type declarations, and in
the Watch and Receipt Manager.
The declaration of variables is supported by syntax coloring.
All editors for POUs (Program Organization Units) consist of a declaration
part and a body. These are separated by a screen divider that can be dragged,
as required, by clicking it with the mouse and moving it up or down.
The most important commands are found in the context menu (right mouse
button or <Ctrl>+<F10>).
Declaration Part
All variables to be used only in this POU are declared in the declaration part
of the POU. These can include: input variables, output variables,
input/output variables, local variables, retain variables, and constants. The
declaration syntax is based on the IEC1131-3 standard. An example of a
correct declaration of variables in PROSYD 1131-Editor:
Image 5.1: Declaration Editor
PROSYD 1131 5-1

The Declaration Editor
Input Variable
Between the key words VAR_INPUT and END_VAR, all variables are
declared that serve as input variables for a POU. That means that at the call
position, the value of the variables can be given along with a call.
Example:
VAR_INPUT
in1:INT (* 1. Inputvariable*)
END_VAR
Output Variable
Between the key words VAR_OUTPUT and END_VAR, all variables are
declared that serve as output variables of a POU. That means that these
values are carried back to the POU making the call. There they can be
answered and used further.
Example:
VAR_OUTPUT
out1:INT; (* 1. Outputvariable*)
END_VAR
Input and Output
Variables
Between the key words VAR_IN_OUT and END_VAR, all variables are
declared that serve as input and output variables for a POU.
Attention: With this variable, the value of the transferred variable is
changed ("transferred as a pointer"). That means that the input value for
such variables cannot be a constant.
Example:
VAR_IN_OUT
inout1:INT; (* 1. Inputoutputvariable *)
END_VAR
Local Variables
Between the keywords VAR and END_VAR, all of the local variables of a
POU are declared. These have no external connection; in other words, they
can not be manipulated from the outside.
Example:
VAR
loc1:INT; (* 1. Local Variable*)
END_VAR
5-2 PROSYD 1131

Retain Variables
Retain variables are identified by the key word RETAIN. These variables
maintain their value, even after a power failure. When the program is run
again, the stored values will be processed further. A practical example
would be an operations timer that recommences timing after a power failure.
All other variables are newly initialized, either with their initialized values
or with the standard initializations.
Example:
VAR RETAIN
rem1:INT; (* 1. Retain variable*)
END_VAR
Constants
Constants are identified by the key word CONSTANT. They can be
declared locally or globally.
Syntax:
VAR CONSTANT
<Identifier>:<Type> := <initialization>;
END_VAR
Example:
VAR CONSTANT
con1:INT:=12; (* 1. Constant*)
END_VAR
You will find a listing of possible constants here in the appendix.
Keywords
In all editors, all keywords are written in capital letters. Keywords may not
be used as variables.
Variables declaration
A variables declaration has the following syntax:
<Identifier> {AT <Address>}:<Type> {:=<initialization>};
The parts in the braces {} are optional.
The variable identifier may not contain any blank spaces or special
characters, may not be declared more than once and cannot be the same as
any of the keywords. Capitalization is not recognized which means that
VAR1, Var1, and var1 are all the same variable. The underscore character is
recognized in identifiers (e.g., "A_BCD" and "AB_CD" are considered two
PROSYD 1131 5-3

different identifiers). An identifier may not have more than one underscore
character in a row. The first 32 characters are significant.
All declarations of variables and data type elements can include
initialization. They are brought about by the ":=" operator. For variables of
elementary types, these initializations are constants. The default-
initialization is 0 for all declarations.
Example:
var1:INT:=12; (* Integer variable with initial value of 12*)
If you wish to link a variable directly to a definite address, then you must
declare the variable with the keyword AT.
For faster input of the declarations, use the shortcut mode.
In function blocks you can also specify variables with incomplete address
statements. In order for such a variable to be used in a local instance, there
must be an entry for it in the variable configuration.
Pay attention to the possibility of an automatic declaration
AT Declaration
If you wish to link a variable directly to a definite address, then you must
declare the variable with the keyword AT. The advantage of such a
procedure is that you can assign a meaningful name to an address, and that
any necessary changes of an incoming or outgoing signal will only have to
be made in one place (e.g., in the declaration).
Notice that variables requiring an input cannot be accessed by writing. A
further restriction is that AT declarations can only be made for local and
global variables, and not for input- and output variables from POUs.
Examples:
counter_heat7 AT %QX0.0: BOOL;
lightcabinetimpulse AT %IX7.2: BOOL;
download AT %MX2.2: BOOL;
"Insert" "Declarations
keywords"
You can use this command to open a list of all the keywords that can be
used in the declaration part of a POU. After a keyword has been chosen and
the choice has been confirmed, the word will be inserted at the present
cursor position.
You also receive the list, when you open the Input Assistant and choose the
Declarations category.
5-4 PROSYD 1131

"Insert" "Type"
With this command you will receive a selection of the possible types for a
declaration of variables. You also receive the list when you access the Input
Assistant.
The types are divided into these categories:
• Standard types BOOL, BYTE, etc.
• Defined types Structures, enumeration types, etc.
• Standard function blocks for instance declarations
• Defined function blocks for instance declarations
PROSYD 1131 supports all standard types of IEC1131-3:
Examples for the use of the various types are found in the appendix.
Syntax Coloring
In all editors you receive visual support in the implementation and
declaration of variables. Errors are avoided, or discovered more quickly,
because the text is displayed in color.
A comment left unclosed, thus annotating instructions, will be noticed
immediately; keywords will not be accidentally misspelled, etc.
The following color highlighting will be used:
• Blue Keywords
• Green Comments in the text editors
• Pink Special constants (e.g. TRUE/FALSE, T#3s,
%IX0.0)
• Red Input error (for example, invalid time constant,
keyword, written in lower case,...)
• Black Variables, constants, assignment operators, ...
Shortcut Mode
The declaration editor for PROSYD 1131 allows you to use the shortcut
mode. This mode is activated when you end a line with <Ctrl><Enter>
The following shortcuts are supported:
• All identifiers up to the last identifier of a line will become declaration
variable identifiers
• The type of declaration is determined by the last identifier of the line.
In this context, the following will apply:
B or BOOL gives the result BOOL

I or INT gives the result INT
R or REAL gives the result REAL
S or string gives the result STRING
PROSYD 1131 5-5

• If no type has been established through these rules, then the type is
BOOL and the last identifier will not be used as a type (Example 1.).
• Every constant, depending on the type of declaration, will turn into an
initialization or a string (Examples 2. and 3.).
• An address (as in %MD12) is extended around the AT...
attribute(Example 4.).
• A text after a semicolon (;) becomes a comment (Example 4.).
• All other characters in the line are ignored (e.g., the exclamation point
in Example 5.).
Examples:
Shortcut Declaration
A A: BOOL;
ABI2 A, B: INT := 2;
ST S 2; A string ST:STRING(2); (* A string *)
X %MD12 R 5 Real Number X AT %MD12: REAL := 5.0;(* Real
Number *)
B! B: BOOL;
Autodeclaration
If the Autodeclaration of the Options dialog box , then a dialog box will
appear in all editors after the input of a variable that has not yet been
declared. With the help of this dialog box, the variable can now be declared.
Image 5.2: Dialog Box for Declaration of Variables
With the help of the Class combobox, select whether you are dealing with a
local variable (VAR), input variable( (VAR_INPUT), output variable
(VAR_OUTPUT), input/output variable (VAR_INOUT), or a global
variable (VAR_GLOBAL).
With the CONSTANT and RETAIN options, you can define whether you
are dealing with a constant or a retain variable
5-6 PROSYD 1131

The variable name you entered in the editor has been entered in the Name
field, BOOL has been placed in the Type field. The ... button opens the
Input Assistent dialog which allows you to select from all possible types.
In the Initial Value field you can assign a value to the variable; otherwise
the standard initial value will be used.
In the Address field you can link a variable to the address (AT declaration)
If necessary, insert a Comment.
By pressing OK you will enter the variable in the corresponding declaration
editor.
Note: The dialog box for variable declaration you also get by the
command "Edit" "Declare Variable" (see Chapter 4.5 General Editing
Functions).
Line Numbers in the

Declaration Editor
In offline mode, a simple click on a special line number will mark the entire
text line.
In the online mode, a single click on a specific line number will open up or
close the variable in this line, in case a structural variable is involved.
Declarations as tables
If the Declarations as tables option is set in the Options dialog box in the
Editor category, the declaration editor looks like a table. As in a card-index
box, you can select the register cards of the respective variable types and
edit the variables.
For each variable you are given the following entry fields.
Name: Input the identifier of the variable.

Address: If necessary, input the address of the variable (AT
declaration)
Type: Input the type of the variable. (Input the function
block when instantiating a function block)
Initial: Enter a possible initialization of the variable
(corresponding to the ":= " assignment operator).
Comment: Enter a comment here.
PROSYD 1131 5-7

Both of the display types of the declaration editor can be changed without
causing any problems. In the online mode, there are no differences for the
display.
Image 5.3: Declaration Editor as a Table
"Insert" "New
Declaration"
With this command you bring a new variable into the declaration table of
the declaration editor. If the present cursor position is located in an field of
the table, then the new variable will be pasted in the preceding line;
otherwise, the new variable is pasted at the end of the table. Moreover, you
can paste a new declaration at the end of the table by using the right arrow
key or the tab key in the last field of the table.
You will receive a variable that has "Name" located in the Name field, and
"Bool" located in the Type field, as its default setting. You should change
these values to the desired values. Name and type are all that is necessary for
a complete declaration of variables.
Declaration Editors in
Online Mode
In online mode , the declaration editor changes into a monitor window. In
each line there is a variable followed by the equal sign (=) and the value of
the variable. If the variable at this point is undefined, three question marks
(???) will appear.
In front of every multi-element variable there is a plus sign. By pressing
<Enter> or after doubleclicking on such a variable, the variable is opened
up. In the example, the traffic signal structure would be opened up.
5-8 PROSYD 1131

When a variable is open, all of its components are listed after it. A minus
sign appears in front of the variable. If you doubleclick again or press
<Enter>, the variable will be closed, and the plus sign will reappear.
Pressing <Enter> or doubleclicking on a single-element variable will open
the dialog box to write a variable. Here it is possible to change the present
value of the variable. In the case of Boolean variables, no dialog box
appears; these variables are toggled.
The new value will turn red and will remain unchanged. If the "Online"
"Write values" command is given, then all variables are placed in the
selected list and are once again displayed in black.
If the "Online" "Force values" command is given, then all variables will
be set to the selected values, until the "Release force" command is given.
Comment
User comments must be enclosed in the special character string "*" and "*".
Comments are allowed in all text editors at any preferred location. These
include all declarations, the IL and ST languages, and user-defined data
types.
In FBD and LD comments can be entered into every network. In order to do
so, select the network that you wish to comment, and enable "Insert"
"Comment".
In SFC you can enter comments for the step in the dialog box for editing
step attributes.
Interlocking comments are not allowed.
In Online mode, if you place the mouse pointer briefly above a variable,
then the type and, if necessary, address and comments about the variable
will be displayed in a Tooltip.
5.2 The Text Editors
The text editors (the Instruction List editor and the editor for ) of PROSYD
1131 offer the usual capabilities of Windows text editors.
PROSYD 1131 5-9

The Text Editors
The implementation in the text editors is supported by syntax coloring.

In Overwrite mode the status bar shows a black OV. You can switch
between Overwrite mode and Insert mode by key <Ins>
Image 5.4: Text Editors for the Instruction List and Structured Text
The text editors use the following menu commands in special ways:
"Insert" "Operator"
With this command all of the operators available in the current language are
displayed in a dialog box.
If one of the operators is selected and the list is closed with OK, then the
highlighted operator will be inserted at the present cursor position.
"Insert" "Operand"
With this command all variables in a dialog box are displayed. You can
select whether you would like to display a list of the global, the local, or the
system variables.
If one of the operands is chosen, and the dialog box is closed with OK, then
the highlighted operand will be inserted at the present cursor position.
5-10 PROSYD 1131

"Insert" "Function"
With this command all functions will be displayed in a dialog box. You can
choose whether to have a list displaying user-defined or standard functions.
If one of the functions is selected and the dialog box is closed with OK, then
the highlighted function will be inserted at the current cursor position.
If the With arguments option was selected in the dialog box, then the
necessary input and output variables will also be inserted.
"Insert" "Function
Block"
With this command all function blocks are displayed in a dialog box. You
can choose whether to have a list displaying user-defined or standard
function blocks.
If one of the function blocks is selected and the dialog box is closed with
OK, then the highlighted function block will be inserted at the current
cursor position.
If the With arguments option was selected in the dialog box, then the
necessary input variables of the function block will also be inserted.
The text editors in

Online mode
The online functions in the editors are set breakpoint and single step
processing (steps). Together with the monitoring, the user thus has the
debugging capability of a modern Windows standard language debugger.
In Online mode, the text editor window is vertically divided in halves. On
the left side of the window you will then find the normal program text; on
the right side you will see a display of the variables whose values were
changed in the respective lines.
The display is the same as in the declaration part. That means that when the
PLC is running, the present values of the respective variables will be
displayed.
If you place the mouse pointer briefly above a variable, then the type, the
address and the comment about the variable will be displayed in a Tooltip.
"Extras" "Monitoring
Options"
With this command you can configure your monitoring window. In the text
editors, the window is divided into two halves during monitoring. The
program is located in the left half. In the right half, all variables that are
located in the corresponding program line are monitored.
PROSYD 1131 5-11

The Text Editors
You can specify the Monitor Window Width and which Distance two
variables should have in a line. An distance declaration of 1 corresponds, in
this case, to a line height in the selected font.
Image 5.5: Monitoring Options Dialog Box
Breakpoint PositionsSince in PROSYD 1131 several IL lines are internally

combined into a single C-code line, breakpoints can not be set in every line.
Breakpoint positions include all positions in a program at which values of
variables can change or where the program flow branches off. (Exception:
function calls. If necessary, a breakpoint in the function must be set here.)
At the positions lying inbetween, a breakpoint would not even make sense,
since nothing has been able to change in the data since the preceding
breakpoint position.
This results in the following breakpoint positions in the IL:
• At the start of the POU
• At every LD, LDN (or, in case a LD is located at a label, then at the
label)
• At every JMP, JMPC, JMPCN
• At every label
• At every CAL, CALC, CALCN
• At every RET, RETC, RETCN
• At the end of the POU
Structured Text accommodates the following breakpoint positions:
• At every assignment
• At every RETURN and EXIT instruction
• in lines where conditions are being evaluated (WHILE, IF, REPEAT)
• At the end of the POU
Breakpoint positions are marked by the display of the line number field in a
darker gray.
5-12 PROSYD 1131

Image 5.6: IL Editor with Possible Breakpoint Positions (darker number fields)
How do you set a

breakpoint?
In order to set a breakpoint, click the line number field of the line where you
want to set a breakpoint. If the selected field is a breakpoint position, then
the color of the line numbers field will change from dark gray to light blue,
and the breakpoint will be activated in the PLC.
Deleting Breakpoints
Correspondingly, in order to delete a breakpoint, click on the line number
field of the line with the breakpoint to be deleted.
Setting and deleting of breakpoints can also be selected via the menu
("Online" "Toggle Breakpoint"), via the function key <F9>, or via the
symbol in the tool bar.
What happens at a
breakpoint?
If a breakpoint is reached in the PLC, then the screen will display the break
with the corresponding line. The line number field of the line where the PLC
is positioned will appear in red. The user program is stopped in the PLC.
If the program is at a breakpoint, then the processing can be resumed with
"Online" "Run".
In addition, with "Online" "Step over" or "Step in" you can cause the
program to run to the next breakpoint position. If the instruction where you
are located is a CAL command, or, if there is a function call in the lines up
to the next breakpoint position, then you can use "Step over" to bypass the
function call. With "Step in", you will branch to the open POU.
PROSYD 1131 5-13

The Text Editors
Line Number of the

Text Editor
The line numbers of the text editor give the number of each text line of an
implementation of a POU.
In Off-line mode, a simple click on a special line number will mark the
entire
text line.
In Online mode, the background color of the line number indicates the
breakpoint status of every line:
• dark gray: This line is a possible position for a breakpoint.
• light blue: a breakpoint has been set in this line.
• red: The program has reached this point.
In Online mode, simply clicking the mouse will change the breakpoint status
of this line.
5.2.1 The Instruction List Editor
This is how a POU written in the IL looks under the corresponding

PROSYD 1131 editor:
Image 5.7: IL Editor
5-14 PROSYD 1131

All editors for POUs consist of a declaration part and a body. These are
separated by a screen divider.
The Instruction List editor is a text editor with the usual capabilities of
Windows text editors. The most important commands are found in the
context menu (right mouse button or <Ctrl>+<F10>).
For information about the IL editor in Online mode, see Text Editors in
Online Mode.
For information about the language, see the Instruction Lists.
Flow Control
With the "Online" "Flow control" command, an additional field in which
the accumulator contents is displayed is inserted in the IL editor on the left
side of every line.
5.2.2 The Editor for Structured Text
This is how a POU written in ST appears under the corresponding PROSYD

1131 editor:
Image 5.8: Editor for Structured Text
PROSYD 1131 5-15

The Graphic Editors
The editor for Structured Text is a text editor with the usual capabilities of
Windows text editors. The most important commands are found in the
context menu (right mouse button or <Ctrl>+<F10>).
For information about the ST editor in Online mode, read Text Editors in
Online Mode.
For information about the language, read the chapter Structured Text(ST).
5.3 The Graphic Editors
The editors of both of the graphically oriented languages, LD and FBD, have
many points in common. These points are summarized in the following
chapters. The editor of the Sequential Function Chart digresses from this
point and is, consequently, not described until Chapter The Sequential
Function Chart Editor.
The implementation in the graphic editors is supported by syntax coloring.
Label
Each network has a label that can optionally be left empty. This label is
edited by clicking the first line of the network, directly next to the network
number. Now you can enter a label, followed by a colon.
Network Comments
Every network can be supplied with a multi-lined comment. In "Extras"
"Options", you can enter the maximum number of lines to be made
available for a network comment. This entry is made in the maximum
comment size field. (The default value here is 4.) You can also enter the
number of lines that generally should be reserved for comments (minimum
comment size). If, for example, the number 2 is entered, then, at the start of
each network there will be two empty lines after the label line. The default
value here is 0, which has the advantage of allowing more networks to fit in
the screen area.
If the minimal comment size is greater than 0, then in order to enter a
comment you simply click in the comment line and then enter the comment.
Otherwise you must next select the network to which a comment is to be
entered, and use "Insert" "Comment" to insert a comment line. In contrast
to the program text, comments are displayed in gray.
5-16 PROSYD 1131

"Insert" "Network
(after)" or "Insert"
"Network (before)"
Shortcut: <Shift>+<T> (Network after)
In order to insert a new network in the FBD or the LD editor, select the
"Insert" "Network (after)" or the “Insert" "Network (before)"
command, depending on whether you want to insert the new network before
or after the present network. The present network can be changed by
clicking the network number. You will recognize it in the dotted rectangle
under the number. With the <Shift key> and a mouse click you can select
from the entire area of networks, from the present one to the one clicked.
The network editors in

the online mode
In the FBD and the LD editors you can only set breakpoints for networks.
The network number field of a network for which a breakpoint has been set,
is displayed in blue. The processing then stops in front of the network,
where the breakpoint is located. In this case, the network number field is
displayed in red. With single step processing (steps), you can jump from
network to network.
All values are monitored upon entering and exiting network POUs (Program
Organization Units).
The flow control is run with the "Online" "Flow control" command.
Using the flow control, you can view the present values that are being
carried in the networks over the connecting lines. If the connecting lines do
not carry Boolean values, then the value will be displayed in a specially
inserted field. If the lines carry Boolean values, then they will be shaded
blue, in the event that they carry TRUE. Therefore, you can accompany the
flow of information while the PLC is running.
5.3.1 The Function Block Diagram Editor
This is how a POU written in the FBD under the corresponding PROSYD
1131 editor looks:
PROSYD 1131 5-17

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.9: Editor for the Function Block Diagram
The Function Block Diagram editor is a graphic editor. It works with a list
of networks, in which every network contains a structure that displays,
respectively, a logical or an arithmetical expression, the calling up of a
function block, a jump, or a return instruction.
Cursor positions in
FBD
Every text is a possible cursor position. The selected text is on a blue
background and can now be changed.
You can also recognize the present cursor position by a dotted rectangle.
The following is a list of all possible cursor positions with an example:
1) Every text field (possible cursor positions framed in black):
2) Every input:
5-18 PROSYD 1131

3) Every operator, function, or function block:
4) Outputs, if an assignment or a jump comes afterward:
5) The lined cross above an assignment, a jump, or a return instruction:
6) Behind the outermost object on the right of every network ("last cursor
position," the same cursor position that was used to select a network):
7) The lined cross directly in front of an assignment:
How to set the cursor

The cursor can be set at a certain position by clicking the mouse, or with the
help of the keyboard.
Using the arrow keys, you can jump to the nearest cursor position in the
selected direction at any time. All cursor positions, including the text fields,
can be accessed this way. If the last cursor position is selected, then the
<up> or <down> arrow keys can be used to select the last cursor position of
the previous or subsequent network.
An empty network contains only three question marks "???". By clicking
behind these, the last cursor position is selected.
"Insert" "Assignment"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<A>

This command inserts an assignment.
PROSYD 1131 5-19

The Graphic Editors
Depending on the selected position, insertion takes place directly in front of

the selected input (Cursor Position 2), directly after the selected output
(Cursor Position 4), directly before the selected line cross (Cursor Position
5), or at the end of the network (Cursor Position 6). For an inserted
assignment, a selection can be made accompanying the entered text "???",
and the assignment can be replaced by the variable that is to be assigned. For
this you can also use the Input Assistant.
In order to insert an additional assignment to an existing assignment, use the
"Insert" "Output" command.
"Insert" "Jump"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<L>

This command inserts a jump.
the selected input (Cursor Position 2), directly after the selected output
5), or at the end of the network (Cursor Position 6).
For an inserted jump, a selection can be made accompanying the entered text
"???", and the jump can be replaced by the label to which it is to be
assigned.
"Insert" "Return"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<R>

This command inserts a RETURN instruction.
the selected input (Cursor Position 2),directly after the selected output
5), or at the end of the network (Cursor Position 6)
"Insert" "Operator"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<O>

This command inserts an operator. Insertion takes place according to the
selected position.
If an input is selected (Cursor Position 2), then the operator is inserted in
front of this input. The first input of this operator is linked to the branch on
the left of the selected input. The output of the new operator is linked to the
selected input.
5-20 PROSYD 1131

If an output is selected (Cursor Position 4), then the operator is inserted after
this output. The first input of the operator is connected with the selected
output. The output of the new operator is linked to the branch with which
the selected output was linked.
If an operator, a function, or a function block is selected (Cursor Position 3),
then the old element will be replaced by the new operator. As far as
possible, the branches will be connected the same way as they were before
the replacement. If the old element had more inputs than the new one, then
the unattachable branches will be deleted. The same holds true for the
outputs.
If a jump or a return is selected, then the operator will be inserted before this
jump or return. The first input of the operator is connected with the branch
to the left of the selected element. The output of the operator is linked to the
branch to the right of the selected element.
If the last cursor position of a network is selected (Cursor Position 6), then
the operator will be inserted following the last element. The first input of the
operator is linked to the branch to the left of the selected position.
The inserted operator is always an AND. By selecting and overwriting the
text, you can convert this operator into any other operator. With the Input
Assistant, you can choose the desired operator from the list of the supported
operators. If the new operator has a different lowest number of inputs, then
these will be attached. If the new operator has a lesser highest number of
inputs, then the last inputs, including those on the branches situated in front
of them will be deleted.
All operator inputs that could not be linked will receive the text "???". This
text must be clicked and changed into the desired constant or variable.
"Insert" "Function" or
"Insert" "Function
Block"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<F (Function)
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+ (Function block)

This command inserts a function or a function block. Insertion takes place
according to the selected position. First the Input Assistant dialog box,
which contains all functions and function blocks, is opened.
The insertion then takes place analogous to the "Insert" "Operator"
command. The assignment of inputs and outputs is also analogous. If there
is a branch to the right of an inserted function block, then the branch will be
assigned to the first output. Otherwise the outputs will remain unallocated.
PROSYD 1131 5-21

The Graphic Editors
"Insert" "Input"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+

This command inserts an operator input. With many operators, the number
of inputs may vary. (For example, ADD can have 2 or more inputs.)
In order to extend such an operator by an input, you need to select the input
in front of which you wish to insert an additional input (Cursor Position 1);
or you must select the operator itself (Cursor Position 3), if a lowest input is
to be inserted.
The inserted input is allocated with the text "???". This text must be clicked
and changed into the desired constant or variable. For this you can also use
the Input Assistant.
"Insert" "Output"
Symbol:
This command inserts an additional assignment into an existing assignment.
This capability serves the placement of so-called assignment combs; i.e., the
assignment of the value presently located at the line to several variables.
If you select the lined cross above an assignment (Cursor Position 5) or the
output directly in front of it (Cursor Position 4), then there will be another
assignment inserted after the ones already there.
If the line cross directly in front of an assignment is selected (Cursor
Position 4), then another assignment will be inserted in front of this one.
The inserted output is allocated with the text "???". This text must be
clicked and changed into the desired variable. For this you can also use the
Input Assistant.
"Extras" "Negation"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<N>

With this command you can negate the inputs, outputs, jumps, or RETURN
instructions. The symbol for the negation is a small circle at a connection.
If an input is selected (Cursor Position 2), then this input will be negated.
If an output is selected (Cursor Position 4), then this output will be negated.
If a jump or a return is marked, then the input of this jump or return will be
negated.
A negation can be canceled through renewed negation.
5-22 PROSYD 1131

"Extras" "Set/Reset"
Symbol:
With this command you can define outputs as Set or Reset Outputs. A grid
with Set Output is displayed with [S], and a grid with Reset Output is
displayed with [R].
Image 5.10: Set/Reset Outputs in FBD
An Output Set is set to TRUE, if the grid belonging to it returns TRUE. The
output now maintains this value, even if the grid jumps back to FALSE.
An Output Reset is set to FALSE, if the grid belonging to it returns FALSE.
The output maintains its value, even if the grid jumps back to FALSE.
With multiple executions of the command, the output will alternate between
set, reset, and normal output.
"Extras" "Zoom"
Shortcut: <Alt>+<Enter>
With this command a selected POU is loaded into its editor (Cursor Position
3).
If you are dealing with a POU from a library, then the library manager is
called up, and the corresponding POU is displayed.
Cutting, Copying,
Pasting, and Deleting
in FBD
The commands used to "Cut", "Copy", "Paste", and "Delete" are found
under the "Edit" menu item.
If a line cross is selected (Cursor Position 5), then the assignments, jumps,
or RETURNS located below the crossed line will be cut, deleted, or copied.
If an operator, a function, or a function block is selected (Cursor Position 3),
then the selected object itself, will be cut, deleted, or copied, along with all
of the branches dependent on the inputs, with the exception of the first
branch.
PROSYD 1131 5-23

The Graphic Editors
Otherwise, the entire branch located in front of the cursor position will be
cut, deleted, or copied.
After copying or cutting, the deleted or copied part is located on the
clipboard and can now be pasted, as desired.
In order to do so, you must first select the pasting point. Valid pasting points
include inputs and outputs.
If an operator, a function, or a function block has been loaded onto the
clipboard (As a reminder: in this case all connected branches except the first
are located together on the clipboard), the first input is connected with the
branch before the pasting point.
Otherwise, the entire branch located in front of the pasting point will be
replaced by the contents of the clipboard.
In each case, the last element pasted is connected to the branch located in
front of the pasting point.
Note: The following problem is solved by cutting and pasting: A new

operator is pasted in the middle of a network. The branch located on the
right of the operator is now connected with the first input, but must be
connected with the second input. You can now select the first input and
perform the command "Edit" "Cut". Following this, you can select the
second input and perform the command "Edit" "Paste". This way, the
branch is dependent on the second input.
The Function Block

Diagram in the Online
Mode
In the Function Block Diagram, breakpoints can only be set to networks. If a
breakpoint has been set to a network, then the network numbers field will be
displayed in blue. The processing then stops in front of the network where
the breakpoint is located. In this case, the network numbers field will
become red. Using stepping (single step), you can jump from network to
network.
The current value is displayed for each variable. Doubleclicking on a
variable opens the dialog box for writing a variable. Here it is possible to
change the present value of the variable. In the case of Boolean variables, no
dialog box appears; these variables are toggled.
The new value will turn red and will remain unchanged. If the "Online"
"Write values" command is given, then all variables are placed in the
selected list and are once again displayed in black.
5-24 PROSYD 1131

The flow control is run with the "Online" "Flow control" command.
Using the flow control, you can view the present values that are being
carried in the networks over the connecting lines. If the connecting lines do
not carry Boolean values, then the value will be displayed in a specially
inserted field. If the lines carry Boolean values, then they will be shaded
blue in the event that they carry TRUE. By this means, you can accompany
the flow of information while the PLC is running.
5.3.2 The Ladder Editor
This is how a POU written in the LD appears in the PROSYD 1131 editor:
Image 5.11: POU in the Ladder Diagram
The LD editor is a graphic editor. The most important commands are found
in the context menu (right mouse button or <Ctrl>+<F10>).
For information about the elements, see Ladder Diagram (LD).
PROSYD 1131 5-25

The Graphic Editors
Cursor Positions in the

LD Editors
The following locations can be cursor positions, in which the function block
and program accessing can be handled as contacts. POUs with EN inputs
and other POUs connected to them are treated the same way as in the
Function Block Diagram. Information about editing this network part can be
found in Chapteron the FBD Editor.
1. Every text field (possible cursor positions framed in black)
2. Every Contact or Function Block
3. Every Coil
4. The Connecting Line between the Contacts and the Coils.
The Ladder Diagram uses the following menu commands in a special way:
"Insert" "Contact"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<O>

Use this command in the LD editor in order to insert a contact in front of the
marked location in the network.
If the marked position is a coil (Cursor Position 3) or the connecting line
between the contacts and the coils (Cursor Position 4), then the new contact
will be connected serially to the previous contact connection.
5-26 PROSYD 1131

The contact is preset with the text "???". You can click on this text and
change it to the desired variable or the desired constant. For this you can
also use the Input Assistant.
"Insert" "Parallel
Contact"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<R>

Use this command in the LD editor to insert a contact parallel to the marked
position in the network.
If the marked position is a coil (Cursor Position 3) or the connection
between the contacts and the coils (Cursor Position 4), then the new contact
will be connected in parallel to the entire previous contact connection.
The contact is preset with the text "???". You can click on this text and
change it to the desired variable or the desired constant. For this you can
also use the Input Assistant.
"Insert" "Function
Block"
Shortcut: <Ctrl>+
You can use this command to open a dialog box for selecting a function
block or a program. You can select between user-defined or standard
(default) POUs.
The selected POU is inserted, according to the same rules used to insert a
contact. In both cases, the first input of the POU is set on the input
connection, and the first output is set on the output connection. For this
reason both of these variables definitely must be of the BOOL type. All
other POU inputs and outputs are occupied with the text "???". These
default settings can be changed to other constants, variables, or addresses.
For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
"Insert" "Coil"

You can use this command in the LD editor to insert a coil in parallel to the
previous coils.
If the marked position is a connection between the contacts and the coils
(Cursor Position 4), then the new coil will be inserted as the last. If the
marked position is a coil (Cursor Position 3), then the new coil will be
inserted directly above it.
PROSYD 1131 5-27

The Graphic Editors
The coil is given the text "???" as a default setting. You can click on this
text and change it to the desired variable. For this you can also use the Input
Assistant.
POUs with EN Inputs

If you want to use your LD network as a PLC for calling up other POUs ,
then you must merge a POU with an EN input. Such a POU is connected in
parallel to the coils. Beyond such a POU you can develop the network
further, as in the Function Block Diagram. You can find the commands for
insertion at an EN POU under the menu item "Insert" "Insert at Blocks"
An operator, a function block, or a function with EN input performs the
same way as the corresponding POU in the Function Block Diagram, except
that its execution is controlled on the EN input. This input is annexed at the
connecting line between coils and contacts. If this connection carries the
information "On", then the POU will be evaluated.
If a POU has been created once already with EN input, then this POU can be
used to create a network. This means that data from usual operators,
functions, and function blocks can flow in an EN POU and an EN POU can
carry data to such usual POUs.
If, therefore, you want to program a network in the LD editor, as in FBD,
you only need first to insert an EN operator in a new network. Subsequently,
from this POU, you can continue to construct from your network, as in the
FBD editor. A network thus formed will perform like the corresponding
network in FBD.
"Insert" "Operator
with EN"
Use this command to insert an operator with EN input into a LD network.
The marked position must be the connection between the contacts and the
coils (Cursor Position 4) or a coil (Cursor Position 3). The new operator is
inserted in parallel to the coils and underneath them; it contains initially the
designation AND. If you wish, you can change this designation to another
one. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
"Insert" "Function
Block with EN"
With this command you can insert a function block with EN input into a LD
network.
coils (Cursor Position 4) or a coil (Cursor Position 3). The new function
block is inserted in parallel to the coils, below them. From the Input
5-28 PROSYD 1131

Assistant dialog box that appears, you can select whether to insert a user-
defined, or a standard (default) function block.
"Insert" "Function
with EN"
With this command you can insert a function with EN input into an LD
network.
coils (Cursor Position 4) or a coil (Cursor Position 3). The new function is
inserted in parallel to the coils, below them. From the Input Assistant dialog
box that appears, you can select whether to insert a user-defined, or a
standard function block.
"Insert" "Insert at
Blocks"
With this command you can insert additional elements into a POU that has
already been inserted (also a POU with EN input). The commands below
this menu item can be executed at the same cursor positions as the
corresponding commands in the Function Block Diagram (See Chapter 5.7).
With Input you can add a new input to the POU.
With Output you can add a new output to the POU.
With Operator you can add a new operator to the POU, whose output is
deposited onto the selected input.
With Assignment you can add an assignment to the selected input or output.
With Function you can add a function to the selected input.
With Function Block you can add a function block to the selected input.
"Insert" "Jump"
With this command you can insert a parallel jump in the selected LD editor,
in parallel, at the end of the previous coils. If the incoming line delivers the
value "On", then the jump will be executed to the indicated label.
coils(Cursor Position 4) or a coil (Cursor Position 3).
The jump is present with the text "???". You can click on this text and make
a change in the desired label.
PROSYD 1131 5-29

The Graphic Editors
"Insert" "Return"
In the LD editor, you can use this command to insert a Return instruction in
parallel at the end of the previous coils. If the incoming line delivers the
value "On," then the processing of the POU in this network is broken off.
coils(Cursor Position 4) or a coil (Cursor Position 3).
"Extras" "Paste after"

Use this command in the LD editor to insert the contents of the clipboard as
a serial contact after the marked position. This command is only possible if
the contents of the clipboard and the marked position are networks
comprised of contacts.
"Extras" "Paste below"

Shortcut: <Ctrl>+
parallel contact below the marked position. This command is only possible
if the contents of the clipboard and the marked position are networks
"Extras" "Paste above"

parallel contact above the marked position. This command is only possible
if the contents of the clipboard and the marked position are networks
"Extras" "Negate"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<N>

Use this command to negate a contact, a coil, a jump or return instruction, or
an input or output of EN POUs at the present cursor position (Cursor
Position 2 and 3).
Between the parentheses of the coil or between the straight lines of the
contact, a slash will appear ((/) or |/|). If there are jumps, returns, or inputs or
outputs of EN POUs, a small circle will appear at the connection, just as in
the FBD editor.
The coil now writes the negated value of the input connection in the
respective Boolean variable. Right at this moment, a negated contact
switches the status of the input to the output, if the respective Boolean
variable carries the value FALSE.
5-30 PROSYD 1131

If a jump or a return is marked, then the input of this jump or return will be
negated.
A negation can be canceled through renewed negation.
If you execute this command on a coil, then you will receive a Set Coil.
Such a coil never overwrites the value TRUE in the respective Boolean
variable. This means that once you have set the value of this variable to
TRUE, it will always remain at TRUE. A Set Coil is designated with an "S"
in the coil symbol.
If you execute this command once again, then you will be given a Reset
Coil. Such a coil never overwrites the value FALSE in the respective
Boolean variable. This means that once you have set the value of this
variable to FALSE, it will always remain at FALSE. A Reset Coil is
designated with an "R" in the coil symbol.
If you execute this command repeatedly, the coil will alternate between set,
reset and normal coil.
The Ladder Diagram

in the Online Mode
In Online mode, the contacts and coils in the Ladder Diagram that are in the
"On" state are colored blue. Likewise, all lines over which the "On" is
carried are also colored blue. At the inputs and outputs of function blocks,
the values of the corresponding variables are indicated.
Breakpoints can only be set on networks; by using stepping, you can jump
from network to network.
5.3.3 The Sequential Function Chart Editor
This is how a POU written in the SFC appears in the PROSYD 1131 editor:
PROSYD 1131 5-31

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.12: Sequential Function Chart Editor with an opened Action
The Sequential Function Chart editor is a graphic editor. The most important
commands are found in the context menu (right mouse button or
<Ctrl>+<F10>).
For information about the Sequential Function Chart, see Sequential
Function Chart.
The editor for the Sequential Function Chart must agree with the particulars
of the SFC. In reference to these, the following menu items will be of
service.
Marking Blocks in the

SFC
A marked block is a bunch of SFC elements that are enclosed in a dotted
rectangle. (In the example somewhat above, the step is marked Shift1.)
You can select an element (a step, a transition, or a jump) by pointing the
mouse on this element and pressing the left mouse button, or you can use the
arrow keys. In order to mark a group of several elements, press <Shift> for a
block already marked, and select the element in the lower left or right corner
5-32 PROSYD 1131

of the group. The resulting selection is the smallest cohesive group of

elements that includes both of these elements.
Observe that all commands can only be executed, if they do not contradict
the conventions of the language.
"Insert" "Step
Transition (before)"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<T>

This command inserts a step in the SFC editor followed by a transition in
front of the marked block.
"Insert" "Step
Transition (after)"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<E>

This command inserts a step in the SFC editor followed by a transition after
the first transition in the marked block.
"Insert" "Alternative
Branch (right)"

This command inserts an alternative branch in the SFC editor as a right
branch of the marked block. For this the marked block must both begin and
end with a transition. The new branch is then made up of one transition.
"Insert" "Alternative
Branch (left)"
Symbol:
This command inserts an alternative branch in the SFC editor as the left
branch of the marked block. For this the marked block must both begin and
end with a transition. The new branch is then made up of one transition.
"Insert" "Parallel
Branch (right)"

This command inserts a parallel branch in the SFC editor as the right branch
of the marked block. For this the marked block must both begin and end
with a step. The new branch is then made up of one step.
PROSYD 1131 5-33

The Graphic Editors
"Insert" "Parallel
Branch (left)"
Symbol:
This command inserts a parallel branch in the SFC editor as the left branch
with a step. The new branch is then made up of one step.
"Insert" "Jump"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+

This command inserts a jump in the SFC editor at the end of the branch, to
which the marked block belongs. For this the branch must be an alternative
branch.
For a inserted jump then the text field 'Step' can be selected and be replaced
by the label of the step which is target of the jump.
"Insert" "Transition-
Jump"
Symbol:
This command inserts a transition in the SFC editor, followed by a jump at
the end of the selected branch. For this the branch must be a parallel branch.
For a inserted jump then the text field 'Step' can be selected and be replaced
by the label of the step which is target of the jump.
"Insert" "Add Entry-

Action"
With this command you can add an entry-action to a step. An entry-action is
only executed once, right after the step has become active. The entry-action
can be implemented in a language of your choice.
A step with an entry-action is designated by an "E" in the bottom left corner.
"Insert" "Add Exit-

Action"
With this command you can add an exit-action to a step. An exit-action is
only executed once, before the step is deactivated. The exit-action can be
implemented in a language of your choice.
A step with an exit-action is designated by an "X" in the lower right corner.
5-34 PROSYD 1131

"Extras" "Paste
Parallel Branch
(right)"
This command pastes the contents of the clipboard as a right parallel branch
with a step. The contents of the clipboard must, likewise, be an SFC block
that both begins and ends with a step.
"Extras" "Paste after"

This command pastes the SFC block on the clipboard after the first step or
the first transition of the marked block. (Normal copying pastes it in front of
the marked block.) This will now be executed, if the resulting SFC structure
is correct, according to the language norms.
"Extras" "Zoom
Action/Transition"
Shortcut: <Alt>+<Enter>
The action of the first step of the marked block or the transition body of the
first transition of the market block is loaded into the editor in the respective
language, in which it has been written. If the action or the transition body is
empty, then the language must be selected, in which it has been written.
"Extras" "Clear
Action/Transition"
With this command you can delete the actions of the first step of the marked
block or of the transitions body of the first transition.
If, during a step, you implement either only the action, the entry-action, or
the exit-action, then the same will be deleted by the command. Otherwise a
dialog box appears, and you can select which action or actions are to be
deleted.
If the cursor is located in the action of an IEC step, then only this association
will be deleted. If an IEC step with an associated action is selected, then this
association will be deleted. During an IEC step with several actions, a
selection dialog box will appear.
"Extras" "Step
Attributes"
With this command you can open a dialog box in which you can edit the
attributes for the marked step.
PROSYD 1131 5-35

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.13: Dialog Box for Editing Step Attributes
You can take advantage of three different entries in the step attribute dialog
box. Under Minimum Time, you enter the minimum length of time that the
processing of this step should take. Under the Maximum Time, you enter
the maximum length of time that the processing of this step should take.
Note that the entries are of the TIME type, so you use a TIME constant (i.e.
T#3s) or a variable of the TIME type.Under Comment you can insert a
comment to the step. With "Extras" "Options" you can then adjust
whether, in the SFC editor, the comments or the time setting for the steps
should be displayed. On the right, next to the step, either the comment or the
time setting will appear.
If the maximum time is exceeded, SFC flags are set for the user to make
inquiries.
The example shows a step whose execution should last at least two, and at
the most, ten seconds. In Online mode, there is, in addition to these two
times, a display of how long the step has already been active.
"Extras""Time
Overview"
With this command you can open a window in which you can edit the time
settings of your SFC steps:
5-36 PROSYD 1131

Image 5.14: Time Boundaries Overview for a SFC POU
In the time boundaries overview, all steps of your SFC POU are displayed. If
you have entered a time boundary for a step, then the time boundary is
displayed to the right of the step (first, the lower limit, then the upper limit).
You can also edit the time boundaries. To do so, click on the desired step in
the overview. The name of the step is then shown below in the window. Go
to the Minimum Time or Maximum Time field, and enter the desired time
boundary there. If you close the window with OK, then all of the changes
will be stored.
In the example, steps 2 and 6 have a time boundary. Shift1 lasts at least two,
and at most, ten seconds. Shift2 lasts at least seven, and at most, eight
seconds.
"Extras" "SFC-
Overview"
With this command you are given a reduced display of the active SFC POU.
A check appears before the menu item. For better orientation you can
display the names of the steps, transitions, and jumps in tooltips by placing
the mouse pointer on an element.
In order to switch back to the normal SFC display, set a marking and then
either press <Enter> or select the command once again, and the change will
take place.
PROSYD 1131 5-37

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.15: SFC Overview
"Extras" "Options"
With this command you open a dialog box in which you can set different
options for your SFC POU.
Image 5.16: Dialog Box for Sequential Function Chart Options
In the SFC Options dialog box you can undertake five entries. Under Step
Height, you can enter how many lines high an SFC step can be in your SFC
editor. 4 is the standard setting here. Under Step Width, you can enter how
5-38 PROSYD 1131

many columns wide a step should be. 6 is the standard setting here. You can
also preset the Display at Step. With this, you have three possibilities: You
can either have Nothing displayed, or the Comment, or the Time Limits.
The last two are shown the way you entered them in "Extras" "Step
Attributes".
"Extras" "Associate
Action"
With this command actions and Boolean variables can be associated with
IEC steps.
To the right of, and next to the IEC step, an additional divided box is
attached, for the association of an action. It is preset in the left field with the
qualifier "N" and the name "Action." Both presets can be changed. For this
you can use the Input Assistant.
New actions for IEC steps are created in the Object Organizer for an SFC
POU with the "Project" "Add Action" command.
"Extras" "Use IEC-

Steps"
Symbol:
If this command is activated (denoted by a check in front of the menu item
and a printed symbol in the Tool bar), then IEC steps will be inserted instead
of the simplified steps upon insertion of step transitions and parallel
branches.
If this option is switched on, the Init step is set as an IEC step when you
create a new SFC POU.
This settings are saved in the file "PROSYD 1131.ini" and are restored
when PROSYD 1131 gets started again.
The Sequential
Function Chart in the
Online Mode
With the Sequential Function Chart editor in Online mode, the currently-
active steps will be displayed as blue steps. If you have set it under
"Extras" "Options", then the time management is depicted next to the
steps. Under the lower and upper bounds that you have set, a third time
indicator will appear from which you can read how long the step has already
been active.
PROSYD 1131 5-39

The Graphic Editors
In the picture above the step depicted has already been active 8 seconds and
410 milliseconds. The step must, however, be active for at least 7 minutes
before the step will be left.
With "Online" "Toggle Breakpoint", a breakpoint is set at a step. The
processing then stops in front of the execution of this step. The step with the
breakpoint is colored light blue.
If several steps are active in a parallel branch, then the active step whose
action will be processed next is displayed in red.
If IEC steps have been used, then all active actions in Online mode will be
displayed in blue.
SFC also includes support for stepping a step at a time ("Online" "Step
Over"). With this stepping, the program will always proceed to the next step
whose action is to be executed.
With "Online" "Step in" you can step into actions or transitions. Within the
transitions or actions, all debugging capabilities of the corresponding editor
are at the user's disposal.
If you place the mouse pointer briefly above a variable, then the type and the
comment about the variable will be displayed in a Tooltip.
5-40 PROSYD 1131

Image 5.17: Sequential Function Chart in the Online Mode with an Active Step (Shift1) and a
Breakpoint (Step10)
5.3.4 The Continuous Function Chart Editor (CFC)
It looks like a block which has been produced using the continuous function
chart editor (CFC):
PROSYD 1131 5-41

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.18: Editor for continuous function charts
No snap grid is used for the continuous function chart editor so the elements
can be placed anywhere. Elements of the sequential processing list include
blocks, input, output, jump, label, return and comments. The inputs and
outputs of these elements can be connected by dragging a connection with
the mouse. The connecting line will be drawn automatically. The shortest
possible connection line is drawn taking into account existing connections.
The connecting lines are automatically adjusted when the elements are
moved. If the case arises where a connecting line cannot be drawn simply
because of lack of space, a red line will be shown between the input and the
associated output instead. This line will be converted into a connecting line
just as soon as space is available.
One advantage of the continuous function chart as opposed to the usual
function block diagram editor is the fact that feedback paths can be inserted
directly.
The most important commands can be found in the context menu
Cursor positions in the

continuous function
chart editor
Each text is a possible cursor position. The selected text is shaded in blue
and can be modified.
5-42 PROSYD 1131

In all other cases the current cursor position is shown by a rectangle made up
of points. The following is a list of all possible cursor positions with
examples:
1. Trunks of the elements blocks, input, output, jump, label, return and
comments.
2. Text fields for the elements blocks, input, output, jump, label, return and
comments as well as text fields for connection
markers:
3. Inputs for the elements block, input, output, jump and

return:
PROSYD 1131 5-43

The Graphic Editors
4. Outputs for the elements block and input:
"Insert" "Block"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+
This command can be used to paste in operators, functions, function blocks
and programs. It is always pasted in as an ”AND” operator. This can be
converted by Selection and Overwrite of the text into every other operator,
into every function, into every function block and every program. The input
assistance serves to select the desired block from the list of supported
blocks. If the new block has another minimum number of inputs, these will
be attached. If the new block has a smaller highest number of inputs, the last
inputs will be deleted.
"Insert" "Input"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <E>
This command is used to insert an input. The text offered ”???” can be
selected and replaced by a variable or constant. The input assistance can also
be used here.
"Insert" "Output"
This command is used to insert an output. The text offered ”???” can be
selected and replaced by a variable. The input assistance can also be used
here. The value which is associated with the input of the output is allocated
to this variable.
"Insert" "Jump"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl>+<J>
This command is used to insert a jump. The text offered ”???” can be
selected and replaced by the jump label to which the program should jump.
"Insert" "Label"
5-44 PROSYD 1131

This command is used to insert a label. The text offered ”???” can be
selected and replaced by the jump label.
"Insert" "Return"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <R>
This command is used to insert a RETURN command.
"Insert" "Comment"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <K>
This command is used to insert a comment.
You obtain a new line within the comment with <Ctrl> + <Enter>.
"Insert" "Block input"

Shortcut: <Ctrl> + 
This command is used to insert a block input. The number of inputs is
variable for many operators (e.g. ADD can have two or more inputs).
To increase the number of inputs for such an operator by one, the operator
itself must be selected (Cursor position 1)
"Extras" "Negate"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <N>
This command is used to negate inputs, outputs, jumps or RETURN
commands. The symbol for the negation is a small cross on the connection.
The input of the element block, output, jump or return is negated when it is
selected (Cursor position 3)
The output of the element block or input is negated when it is selected
(Cursor position 4).
A negation can be deleted by negating again.
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <T>
This command can only be used for selected inputs of the element output
(Cursor position 3).
The symbol for Set is S and for Reset is R.
PROSYD 1131 5-45

The Graphic Editors
VarOut1 is set to TRUE, if VarIn1 delivers TRUE. VarOut1 retains this

value, even when VarIn1 springs back to FALSE.
VarOut2 is set to FALSE, if VarIn2 delivers TRUE. VarOut2 retains this
value, even when VarIn2 springs back to FALSE.
Multiple activation of this command causes the output to change between
Set, Reset and the normal condition.
"Extras" "EN/ENO"
Symbol: Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <0>
This command is used to give a selected block (Cursor position 3) an
additional Boolean enable input EN (Enable In) and a Boolean output ENO
(Enable Out).
ADD is only executed in this example when the Boolean variable

“Bedingung” (condition) is TRUE. VarOut is also set to TRUE after ADD
has been executed. ADD will not be executed when the variable
“Bedingung” (condition) is FALSE and VarOut retains its value FALSE.
The example below shows how the value ENO can be used for further
blocks.
x should initialised to 1 and y initialised to 0. The numbers in the right

corner of the block indicate the order in which the commands are executed.
x will be increased by one until it reaches the value 10. This causes the
output of the block LT(0) to deliver the value FALSE and SUB(3) and
ADD(5) will be executed. x is set back to the value 1 and y is increased by
1. LT(0) is executed again as long as x is smaller than 10. y thus count the
number of times x passes though the value range 1 to 10.
"Extras"
"Properties..."
Constant input parameters (VAR_INPUT CONSTANT) from functions and
function blocks are not shown directly in the continuous function chart
5-46 PROSYD 1131

editor. These can be shown and their value can be changed when one selects
the trunk of the block in question (Cursor position 1) and then selects the
command ‚Extras‘ ‚Properties‘ or simply double clicks on the trunk. The
following dialog opens:
Image 5.19: Properties dialog
The values of the constant input parameter (VAR_INPUT CONSTANT) can

be changed. Here it is necessary to mark the parameter value in the column
Value. Another mouse click or pressing on the space bar allows this to be
edited. Confirmation of the change to the value is made by pressing the
<Enter> key or pressing <Escape> rejects the changes. The button OK
stores all of the changes which were made.
Selecting elements
One clicks on the trunk of the element (Cursor position 1) to select it.
To mark more elements one presses the <Shift> key and clicks in the
elements required, one after the other, or one drags the mouse with the left
hand mousekey depressed over the elements to be marked.
The command ‘Extras’ ‘Select all’ marks all elements at once.
Moving elements
One or more selected elements can be moved with the arrow keys as one is
pressing on the <Shift> key. Another possibility is to move elements using a
depressed left mousekey. These elements are placed by releasing the left
PROSYD 1131 5-47

The Graphic Editors
mousekey in as far as they do not cover other elements or exceed the

foreseen size of the editor. The marked element jumps back to its initial
position in such cases and a warning tone sounds.
Copying elements
One or more selected elements can be copied with the command ‘Edit’
‘Copy’ and inserted with the command ‘Edit’ ‘Paste’.
Creating connections
An input of an element can be precisely connected to the output of another
element. An output of an element can be connected to the inputs of a
number of other elements.
There are a number of possibilities to connect the input of an element E2
with the output of an element E1.
Place the mouse on the output of element E1 (Cursor position 4), click with
the left mousekey, hold the left mousekey down and drag the mouse cursor
onto the input of element E2 (Cursor position 3) and let the left mousekey
go. A connection is made from the output of element E1 to the mouse cursor
during this dragging operation with the mouse.
Place the mouse on the input of element E2, click with the left mousekey,
hold the left mousekey down and drag the mouse cursor onto the output of
element E1 and let the left mousekey go.
Move one of the elements E1 or E2 (Cursor position 1) and place it in such a
way by letting go of the left mousekey that the output of element E2 and the
input of element E1 touch.
Where element E2 is a block with a free input, a connection can also be
made by dragging the mouse from an output from E1 to the trunk of E2. A
connection with the free input at the highest position on E2 will be created
when the mousekey is released. In the case where block E2 does not have a
free input but is an operator which can have an input added to it, a new input
will be automatically generated.
The output and input of a block can be connected together (feedback path)
by using this method.
Deleting connections
There are a number of possibilities for removing the connection between the
output of an element E1 and the input of an element E2:
5-48 PROSYD 1131

Select the output of element E1 (Cursor position 4) and press the <Delete>
key or execute the command ‘Edit’ ‘Delete'. Several connections will be
removed at the same if the output of E1 is connected to more than one of
inputs.
Select the input of element E2 (Cursor position 4) and press the <Delete>
key or execute the command ‘Edit’ ‘Delete‘.
Select the input of E2 with the mouse, hold the left mousekey depressed and
drag the connection from the input to E2 away. The connection is removed
when the left mousekey is released in a free area of the screen.
Changing connections
A connection between the output of an element E1 and the input of an
element E2 can easily be changed into a connection between the output of
element E1 and the input of element E3. The mouse is clicked on the input
of E2 (Cursor position 3), the left mousekey is kept depressed, the mouse
cursor is moved to the input of E3 and then released.
"Extras" "Connection
marker"
Connections can also be represented by a connector (connection marker)
instead of a connecting line. Here the output and the associated input have a
connector added to them which is given a unique name.
Where a connection already exists between the two elements which should
now be represented by connectors, the output of the connecting line is
marked (Cursor position 3) and the menu point ‚Extras‘ ‚Connection
marker‘ is selected. The following diagram shows a connection before and
after the selection of this menu point.
A unique name is given as standard by the program which begins with M,

but which can be changed. The connector name can be edited both at the
input and at the output.
It is important to know that the connector name is associated with a property
of the output of a connection and is stored with it.
1. Edit the connector at the output:

If the text in the connector is replaced, the new connector name is adopted
by all associated connectors at the inputs. One cannot, however, select a
PROSYD 1131 5-49

The Graphic Editors
name which already belongs to another connection marker since the

uniqueness of the connector name would be violated.
2. Edit the connector at the input:

If the text in the connector is replaced, the connection to the old connection
marker will be deleted and a new connection will be created, or in other
words only the name of another existing connection marker can be given.
Connections in connector representations can be converted to normal
connections in that one marks the output of the connections (Cursor position
4) and again selects the menu point ’Extras‘ ‘Connection marker‘.
Order of execution
The elements block, output, jump, return and label each possess a number
indicating the order in which they are executed. In this sequential order the
individual elements are evaluated at run time.
When pasting in an element the number is automatically given according to
the topological sequence (from left to right and from above to below). The
new element receives the number of its topological successor if the sequence
has already been changed and all higher numbers are increased by one.
The number of an element remains constant when it is moved.
The sequence influences the result and must be changed in certain cases.
If the sequence is displayed, the corresponding sequential execution number
is shown in the upper right hand corner of the element.
"Extras" "Order"
"Display"‘
This command switches the display of the order of execution on and off.
The default setting is to show it (recognised by a tick (!) in front of the
menu point).
"Extras" "Order"
"Order topologically"‘
Elements are ordered in a topological sequence when the execution takes
place from left to right and from above to below, that is the number
increases from left to right and from above to below for topologically
arranged elements. The connections are not relevant, only the location of the
elements is important.
All selected elements are topologically arranged when the command
‘Extras‘ ‘Order‘ ’Order topologically‘ is executed. All elements in the
selection are taken out of the sequential processing list by this process. The
elements are then entered into the remaining sequential processing list
5-50 PROSYD 1131

individually from bottom right through to upper left. Each marked element
is entered into the sequential processing list before its topological successor,
i.e. it is inserted before the element that in a topological sequencing would
be executed after it, when all elements in the editor were sequenced
according to a topological sequencing system. This will be clarified by an
example.
Image 5.20: Sequence before the topological ordering of the three elements
The elements with numbers 1, 2 and 3 are selected. If the command ’Order
topologically‘ is selected the elements are first taken out of the sequential
processing list. Var3, the jump and the AND-operator are then inserted
again one after the other. Var3 is placed before the label and receives the
number 2. The jump is then ordered and receives the number 4 at first but
this then becomes 5 after the AND is inserted. The new order of execution
which arises is:
PROSYD 1131 5-51

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.21: Sequence after the topological ordering of the three elements
When a newly generated block is introduced it will be placed by default in

front of its topological successor in the sequential processing list.
"Extras" "Order" "One

forwards"‘
With this command all selected elements with the exception of the element
which is at the beginning of the sequential processing list are moved one
place forwards in the sequential processing list.
"Extras" "Order" "One

backwards"‘
With this command all selected elements with the exception of the element
which is at the end of the sequential processing list are moved one place
backwards in the sequential processing list.
"Extras" "Order" "To

the beginning"‘
With this command all selected elements will be moved to the front of the
sequential processing list whereby the order within the group of selected
elements is maintained. The order within the group of unselected elements
also remains the same.
"Extras" "Order" "To

the end"‘
With this command all selected elements will be moved to the end of the
sequential processing list whereby the order within the group of selected
5-52 PROSYD 1131

elements is maintained. The order within the group of unselected elements

also remains the same.
"Extras" "Order"
"Order everything
according to data
flow"‘
This command effects all elements. The order of execution is determined by
the data flow of the elements and not by their position.
The diagram below shows elements which have been ordered
topographically.
Image 5.22: Sequence before the ordering according to data flow
The following arrangement exists after selecting the command:
PROSYD 1131 5-53

The Graphic Editors
Image 5.23: Sequence after the ordering according to data flow
When this command is selected the first thing to happen is that the elements
are ordered topographically. A new sequential processing list is then created.
Based on the known values of the inputs, the computer calculates which of
the as yet not numbered elements can be processed next. In the above
”network” the block AND, for example, could be processed immediately
since the values at its inputs (1 and 2) are known. Block SUB can only then
be processed since the result from ADD must be known first, etc.
Feedback paths are inserted last.
The advantage of the data flow sequencing is that an output box which is
connected to the output of a block comes immediately after it in the data
flow sequencing system which by topological ordering would not always be
the case. The topological ordering can deliver another result in some cases
than ordering by data flow, a point which one can recognise from the above
example.
Feedback paths
Feedback paths can only be displayed directly in the continuous function
chart editor and not in the usual function block diagram editor. Here it
should be observed that the output of a block always carries an internal
intermediate variable. The data type of the intermediate variable results, for
operators, from the largest data type of the inputs.
5-54 PROSYD 1131

The data type of a constant is obtained from the smallest possible data type,
that is the constant ‘1’ adopts the data type SINT. If now an addition with
feedback and the constant ‘1’ is executed, the first input gives the data type
SINT and the second is undefined because of the feedback. Thus the
intermediate variable is also of the type SINT. The value of the intermediate
variable is only then allocated to the output variable.
The diagram below shows an addition with feedback and an addition with a
variable. The variables x and y should be of the type INT here.
There are differences between the two additions:

The variable y can be initialised with a value which is not equal to zero but
this is not the case for intermediate variable for the left addition.
The intermediate variable for the left addition has the data type SINT while
that on the right has the data type INT. The variables x and y have different
values after the 129th call up. The variable x, although it is of the type INT,
contains the value -127 because the intermediate variable has gone into
overflow. The variable y contains the value 129, on the other hand.
PROSYD 1131 5-55

Chapter 6 - The Resources
6 The Resources
6.1 Overview of the Resources
In the Resources register card of the Object Organizer, there are objects for
configuring and organizing your project and for keeping track of the values
of the variables:
• Global Variables that can be utilized in the entire project; the global
variables of the project as well as the libraries.
• PLC Configuration for configuring your hardware
• Task Configuration for controlling your program control via tasks
• Sampling Trace for graphic logging of variable values
• Watch and Receipt Manager for indicating and presetting variable
values
Image 6.1: Resources
6.2 Global Variables
Editing Global
Variables
In the Object Organizer, you will find three objects in the Resources register
card in the Global Variables folder (default names of the objects in
parentheses).
• Access Variables List (Access Variables)
• Global Variables List (Global Variables)
• Variables Configuration (Variable Configuration)
PROSYD 1131 6-1

Global Variables
All variables defined in these objects are recognized throughout the project.
If the global variables folder is not opened up (plus sign in front of the
folder), you can open it with a doubleclick <Enter> in the line.
Select the corresponding object. The "Object Open" command opens a
window with the previously defined global variables. The editor for this
works the same way as the declaration editor.
Several Variables Lists

Access variables (Key Word VAR_ACCESS), normal global variables
(VAR_GLOBAL), and variable configurations (VAR_CONFIG) must be
defined in separate objects.
If you have declared a large number of global variables, and you would like
to structure your global variables list better, then you can create further
variables lists.
In the Object Organizer, select the Global Variables folder or one of the
existing objects with global variables. Then execute the "Project"
"Object Add" command. Give the object that appears in the dialog box a
corresponding name. With this name an additional object will be created
with the key word VAR_GLOBAL. If you prefer an object with access
variables, or if you want to have a variable configuration, change the
corresponding key word to VAR_ACCESS or VAR_CONFIG.
6.2.1 Access Variables
Access variables assist in communicating with other PLCs (Programmable

Logic Controllers).
They are defined in an object between the key words VAR_ACCESS and
END_VAR. In the Object Organizer in the Resources register card, the
object Access_Variables is generally available. The object can be
renamed, and further objects for access variables can be created.
The editor for access variables works the same way as the declaration editor.
Access variables can be used in the entire project.
Syntax:
VAR_ACCESS
<Identifier> : "<Access Path>" : <Access Mode> <Type>
END_VAR
In the project, an access variable is addressed through its <Identifier>, just
like any other variable. The <Access Path> is specified in single quotes. The
access path and the implementation are program specific.
6-2 PROSYD 1131

The two <Access Modes>, READ_ONLY and READ_WRITE are

available. If no access mode is specified, then READ_ONLY will be
accepted. This means that the variable in the project can only be read. With
READ_WRITE, you can also access the variable by writing.
Examples:
sensor3 : "control2.sens3": BOOL READ_ONLY;
counter2 : "control2.count2": UINT;
displaytext : "control2.text": STRING READ_WRITE;
6.2.2 Global Variables
Normal global variables are defined in an object between the key words
VAR_GLOBAL and END_VAR. In the Object Organizer in the Resources
register card, the object Global_Variables will generally be available.
The object can be renamed and further objects for global variables can be
created.
To create a new global variables list open the dialog New global variable
list by 'Project' 'Object' 'Add'. Here you insert a Name for the new list. If you
want to use an export file (*.esp) or a DCF file (*.dcf), which contains the
relevant variable, you can connect it by Link to file. Press Select to get the
standard dialog Select text file. DCF files are converted to IEC syntax when
called.
If the settings in dialog 'New global variable list' are confirmed by pressing
the OK button, the new object is created and the variables' editor opens. The
editor for global variables works just the same as the Declaration Editor.
Though if an external variable list is used, it cannot be edited in PROSYD
1131. External variable lists only can be edited external and they will be
read each time the project is opened or compiled again.
Global variables can be used in the entire project.
Syntax:
VAR_GLOBAL
(*Declaration of Variables *)
END_VAR
Global retain variables additionally receive the key word RETAIN.
Syntax:
VAR_GLOBAL RETAIN
PROSYD 1131 6-3

Global Variables
END_VAR
Global constants additionally receive the key word CONSTANT.
Syntax:
VAR_GLOBAL CONSTANT
END_VAR
6.2.3 Variable Configuration
In function blocks it is possible to specify addresses for inputs and outputs

that are not completely defined, if you put the variable definitions between
the key words VAR and END_VAR. Addresses not completely defined are
identified with an asterisk.
Example:
FUNCTION_BLOCK locio
VAR
loci AT %I*: BOOL := TRUE;
loco AT %Q*: BOOL;
END_VAR
Here two local I/O-variables are defined, a local-In (%I*) and a local-Out
(%Q*).
If you want to configure local I/Os for variables configuration in the Object
Organizer in the Resources register card, the object
Variable_Configuration will generally be available. The object then can be
renamed and other objects can be created for the variables configuration.
The editor for variables configuration works like the declaration editor.
Variables for local I/O-configurations must be located between the key
words VAR_CONFIG and END_VAR.
The name of such a variable consists of a complete instance path through
which the individual POUs and instance names are separated from one
another by periods. The declaration must contain an address whose class
(input/output) corresponds to that of the incompletely specified address
(%I*, %Q*) in the function block. Also the data type must agree with the
declaration in the function block.
Configuration variables, whose instance path is invalid because the instance
does not exist, are also denoted as errors. On the other hand, an error is also
reported if no configuration exists for an instance variable. In order to
receive a list of all necessary configuration variables, the "All Instance
Paths" menu item in the "Insert" menu can be used.
6-4 PROSYD 1131

Example:
Assume that the following definition for a function block is given in a
program:
PROGRAM PLC_PRG
VAR
Hugo: locio;
Otto: locio;
END_VAR
Then a corrected variable configuration would look this way:
VAR_CONFIG
PLC_PRG. Hugo.loci AT %IX1.0 : BOOL;
PLC_PRG. Hugo.loco AT %QX0.0 : BOOL;
PLC_PRG. Otto.loci AT %IX1.0 : BOOL;
PLC_PRG.Otto.loco AT %QX0.3 : BOOL;
END_VAR
Note: Be aware not to describe an output, which is used in the variables

configuration, additionally within the project or by a variable (AT
declaration). This would not be noticed.
"Insert" "All Instance

Paths"
With this command a VAR_CONFIG - END_VAR-block is generated that
contains all of the instance paths available in the project. Declarations
already on hand do not need to be reinserted in order to contain addresses
already in existence. This menu item can be found in the window for
configuration of variables if the project is compiled ("Project" "Rebuild
All").
6.2.4 Document Frame
Document Frame
If a project is to receive multiple documentations, perhaps with German and
English comments, or if you want to document several similar projects that
use the same variable names, then you can save yourself a lot of work by
creating a docuframe with the "Extras" "Make Docuframe File"
command.
The created file can be loaded into a desired text editor and can be edited.
The file begins with the DOCUFILE line. Then a listing of the project
variables follows in an arrangement that assigns three lines to each variable:
PROSYD 1131 6-5

Global Variables
a VAR line that shows when a new variable comes; next, a line with the
name of the variable; and, finally, an empty line. You can now replace this
line by using a comment to the variable. You can simply delete any variables
that you are unable to document. If you want, you can create several
document frames for your project.
Image 6.2: Windows Editor with Document Frame
In order to use a document frame, give the "Extras" "Link Docu Frame"
command. Now if you document the entire project, or print parts of your
project, then in the program text, there will be an insertion of the comment
produced in the docuframe into all of the variables. This comment only
appears in the printout!
"Extras" "Make
Docuframe File"
Use this command to create a document frame. The command is at your
disposal, whenever you select an object from the global variables.
A dialog box will open for saving files under a new name. In the field for
the name file, the *.txt extension has already been entered. Select a desired
name. Now a text file has been created in which all the variables of your
project are listed.
"Extras" "Link Docu

File"
With this command you can select a document frame.
6-6 PROSYD 1131

The dialog box for opening files is opened. Choose the desired document
frame and press OK. Now if you document the entire project, or print parts
of your project, then in the program text there will be an insertion of the
comment produced in the docuframe into all of the variables. This comment
only appears in the printout!
To create a document frame, use the "Extras" "Make Docuframe File"
command.
6.3 PLC Configuration
6.3.1 Hardware dependent Configuration
The PLC Configuration is dependent on the respectively configured

hardware. Therefore, at this juncture, only the basic workings of the
PROSYD 1131 hardware configuration will be described.
The PLC Configuration is found as an object in the register card
Resources in the Object Organizer. With the PLC Configuration editor, you
must describe the hardware the opened project is established for. For the
program implementation, the number and position of the inputs and outputs
is especially important. With this description, PROSYD 1131 verifies
whether the IEC addresses used in the program also actually exist in the
hardware.
In addition, identifiers for inputs and outputs can be allocated using the
PLC Configuration Editor.
PROSYD 1131 6-7

PLC Configuration
Image 6.3: PLC Configuration with a CPU Module and a CAN Module. These modules themselves
have submodules.
A PLC Configuration consists of a row of elements that are either inputs or

outputs, or management elements which themselves also have subelements
(for example, a CAN-bus or a digital input card with 8 inputs).
For inputs and outputs, symbolic names can be assigned. The IEC-address
where this input or output can be accessed is then located behind the
symbolic name.
Working in the PLC

Configuration
If a new project was created, then a minimal PLC Configuration is to be
considered.
• For selecting elements, click the mouse on the corresponding element,
or, using the arrow keys, move the dotted rectangle onto the desired element.
• The words "Hardware Configuration" stand at the heading of the PLC
Configuration. Elements that begin with a plus sign are organization
elements and contain subelements. To open an element, select the element
and doubleclick this plus sign or press <Enter>. You can close opened
elements (minus sign in front of the element) the same way.
• If the cursor is located on an element, you can set an edit control box
around the name by doubleclicking on the entry or by using the <Space
bar>. Then you can change the designation of the input/output.
6-8 PROSYD 1131

In order to set up the In-/Output modules use the command 'Extras'

'Properties'.
• With the "Insert" "Insert Element" command, you can paste the
selected element in front of the selected element.
• With the "Insert" "Append Subelement" command, the selected
element will be appended to the selected element as the last subelement.
• The most important commands are found in the context menu (right
mouse button or <Ctrl>+<F10>).
"Extras" "Properties"
Shortcut: <Enter>
With this command a dialog box will appear. In the PLC Configuration you
can consign further information to an input-output module. (Example: an
input module is a thermostat. The information is regulating parameters or a
comment to a simple digital input.)
You can also receive the dialog box by selecting the desired element and
then doubleclicking.
"Insert" "Insert
Element"
This command is used to insert a selected element into the PLC
Configuration in front of another selected element.
"Insert" "Append
Subelement"
This command is used to append a selected element into the PLC
Configuration as the last subelement to another selected element.
PLC Configuration in
Online Mode
In Online mode, the PLC Configuration indicates the states of the inputs and
outputs of the PLC. If a Boolean input or output has the value "TRUE", then
the box before the input or output will be displayed in blue.
The Boolean inputs can be toggled with a mouse click. With other inputs, a
dialog box appears for inputting the new value. The new value is placed in
the PLC immediately after execution through an OK.
PROSYD 1131 6-9

PLC Configuration
6.3.2 Configurable PLC Configuration
Besides the above described hardware dependant PLC configuration it is

also possible in PROSYD 1131 to describe the hardware by a file in the INI
file format. This option of configuration makes it easier to build customer
specific adaptations in PROSYD 1131.
The configurable PLC configuration is fully integrated in the PROSYD
1131 configuration. The described hardware modules can be fit in,
configured and represented.
When PROSYD 1131 is started, all files (*.con) which describe the modules
are loaded into the subdirectory “PLCCONF” of the Library Manager. After
that they are listed in the menu 'Insert' 'Insert element', available in the
PLC configuration.
Using the command ´Extras´´Properties´ the modules can be configured.
‘Extras’ ‘Properties’
With this command a dialog box will appear where further information to an
input-output module in the PLC configuration can be consigned.
In the register card base addresses you fill in the IEC addresses for Receive
and Send and a unique node number (Node-Id) angegeben werden.
Bild 6.4: Properties dialog, base addresses
6-10 PROSYD 1131

Bild 6.5: Properties dialog, parameters
6.3.3 CAN Configuration
PROSYD 1131 supports a hardware configuration according to CANopen

Draft Standard 301. The configuration looks like that described for the
hardware dependant configuration.
All EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) respectively DCF (Device Configuration
File) files which are stored in the subdirectory PLCCONF of the library
when PROSYD 1131 is started, can be integrated, edited and displayed in
the configuration. In the EDS file the configuration options of a CAN
module are described. If you add a module, which is described in a DCF file,
only the IEC addresses can be modified, for the module has already been
configured completely in a CAN configurator.
Inserting CAN bus and

CAN modules
It is possible to set the Global CAN Properties after inserting a CAN bus
directly below the hardware configuration with the command ‘Insert’
‘Append Subelement’ and selecting the CAN.
The individual CAN modules are inserted under a CAN bus using the
command ‘Insert’ ‘Append Subelement’.
Global CAN Properties

The properties for transmission on the CAN bus can be set directly after the
insertion of the module or can be called up with the command ’Extras’
‘Properties’.
PROSYD 1131 6-11

PLC Configuration
Using the selection option, set the required Baud rate which the
transmission should take place at.
One differentiates between synchronous and asynchronous transmission
modes (see PDO properties) for PDO’s (Process Data Object). The
synchronisation message is sent with a unique number Sync.COB-Id
(Communication Object Identifier) in the interval in microseconds which is
given by the Communication Cycle Period. The synchronous PDO’s are
transmitted directly after the synchronisation message in the time window
(Sync.Window Length in microseconds). No synchronisation message will
be sent if the fields Comm. Cycle Period and Sync. Window Length contain
0.
A marker address must be given at the diagnosis address of the CAN bus.
From this address onwards there is various information concerning the
structure CanOpenBusState of the library CanOpen.lib which can be read
into or written from the project:
Cmd: WORD; (* Access to write: 1 = Start, 0 = Stop *)
State: WORD; (* Access to read: 1 to 4 = Initialisation phase, 5 = Bus
running, 6 = Error *)
Error: WORD; (* Access to read: Special error number *)
Create a variable for access with the following structure:
e.g. diagnosis_bus AT %MB0 : CanOpenBusState;
The IEC addresses for the next inserted CAN modules will be awarded
automatically if the option Automatic addressing is activated, in order to
ensure that they are ordered in a row and that overlapping is avoided.
The CAN bus will automatically initialised and started when downloading is
occurring and when the controller system starts up if the option Automatic
start is activated. The CAN bus must be started up in the project if this
option is not active.
6-12 PROSYD 1131

Image 6.6: Global CAN Properties
Basis parameters of a
CAN module
The configuration of an individual CAN module can be undertaken directly
after inserting the module or can be called up with the command ’Extras’
‘Properties’.
PROSYD 1131 6-13

PLC Configuration
Image 6.7: Configuration of a CAN module, basis parameters
The following adjustments can be made to the Basis Parameters.

The Node-Id serves to identify the CAN module uniquely and corresponds
to the set number on the module itself which is between 1 and 127. The Id
must be entered as a decimal number.
IEC addresses by which the PDO’s (Process Data Object) in the project can
be addressed are entered for output and input addresses, whereby the
direction (input or output) is defined by the module.
A marker address must be given at the diagnosis address of the CAN
module. From this address onwards there is various information concerning
the structure CanOpenNodeState of the library CanOpen.lib which can be
read in the project:
State: WORD; (* 0 = OK, 1 =timeout, 2 = not OK, 3 = module missing
(during initialisation), 4 =the wrong module (during initialisation) *)
Emergency: ARRAY[0..7] OF BYTE; (* Special emergency numbers *)
6-14 PROSYD 1131

Create a variable for access with the structure CanOpenNodeState:

e.g. diagnosis_bus AT %MB5 : CanOpenNodeState;
When DCF write is activated a DCF file is created after inserting an EDS
file in the defined directory for the compiled files whose name is made up of
the name of the EDS file and the Node Id which is tacked on the end.
When the option Nodeguarding is activated a message is sent to the module
in the interval which is set by Guard Time in milliseconds. If the module
does not then send a message with the given Guard COB-ID
(Communication Object Identifier), it receives the status timeout. If the
number of attempts (Life Time Factor) is reached the module receives the
status not OK. The status of the module will be stored at the diagnosis
address (see above). No monitoring of the module occurs if the variables
Guard Time and Life Time Factor are not defined (0).
A module sends an emergency message, with a unique COB-Id., when
there is an internal error. These messages, which vary from module to
module, are stored in the diagnosis address.
The entries “FileInfo” and “DeviceInfo” of the EDS or DCF file from the
corresponding module manufacturer are hidden behind the Info button.
PDO mapping of a
CAN module
The tabs Receive PDO mapping and Send PDO mapping in the
configuration dialog for a CAN module allow the ”mapping” of the module,
which is described in the EDS file, to be changed.
PROSYD 1131 6-15

PLC Configuration
Image 6.8: Configuration of a CAN module, PDO-Mapping send
All of the ”mappable” objects in the EDS file are located on the left side and
can be added in the right side to the PDO’s (Process Data Object) (”>>”
button) or removed again (Remove button). The StandardDataTypes can be
inserted to create empty spaces in the PDO.
The button Insert Element can be used to create further PDO’s and to add
appropriate objects to them. The allocation of inputs or outputs to the IEC
addresses can be achieved over the inserted PDO’s. The setting which have
been made in the controller system configuration will become visible when
one leaves the dialog. The individual objects can be afforded symbolic
names there.
The standard set properties of the PDO’s can be edited using Properties.
6-16 PROSYD 1131

Image 6.9: PDO Properties dialog
Each PDO message requires a unique COB-Id (Communication Object

Identifier).
The field appears in grey and cannot be edited if an option is not be
supported by the module or if the value cannot be changed.
The Inhibit Time is the minimum time between two messages from this
PDO. This is to prevent PDO’s which are sent when the value is changed
from being sent too often.
The CMS Priority Group cannot be changed and describes the relative
importance of the PDOs during the CAN transmission. Values from 0 to 7
are displayed, whereby 0 is the highest.
Transmission Type offers you a selection of possible transmission modes
for this module:
acyclic - synchronous: the PDO will be transmitted synchronously but
not periodically.
cyclic – synchronous: the PDO will be transmitted synchronously,
whereby the Number of Sync's gives the number of synchronisation
messages, which lie between two transmissions of this PDO.
synchronous – RTR only: the PDO will be updated after each
synchronisation message but not sent. It is only sent when there is an
explicit request to do so (Remote Transmission Request)
asynchronous – RTR only: the PDO will only be updated and
transmitted when there is an explicit request to do so (Remote
Transmission Request)
asynchronous – device profile specific and asynchronous -
manufacturer specific: the PDO will only be transmitted when
specific events occur.
PROSYD 1131 6-17

PLC Configuration
The modifiable
parameters of a CAN
module
The tab Editable Parameters in the configuration dialog of a CAN module
contains a list of all objects in the EDS or DCF file which are in the area of
the Index 0x2000 to 0x9FFF and which are marked as writable.
Image 6.10: Configuration of a CAN module, Editable parameters
The properties Index, Name, Value, Type and Default are displayed for
every object. The value can be changed. Mark the value and press the
<Space bar>. After making the change confirm the new value with <Enter>
or reject it with the <Escape> key.
The set values are transmitted in the form of SDO's (Service Data Object) to
the CAN modules at the initialisation of the CAN bus.
6-18 PROSYD 1131

Note: All incompatible data types between CANopen and IEC-1131

will be replaced in PROSYD 1131 by the next larger IEC-1131 data type.
6.4 Task Configuration
In addition to declaring the special PLC_PRG program, you can also control
the processing of your project using the task management.
The Task Configuration is found as an object in the Resources register
card in the Object Organizer. The task editor contains a series of tasks. The
task declaration consists of the name of the task, an entry for the priority the
task is to have, and an entry for the condition under which the task is to be
executed. This requirement can either be a time interval, according to which
the task is to be executed, or a global variable that, in the event it has a
rising edge, brings about an execution.
For each task you can now specify a series of programs that will be started
by the task. If the task is executed in the present cycle, then these programs
will be processed the length of one cycle.
The Task Configuration is displayed in the following form:
• The Task Configuration is located in the first line.
• Underneath and indented from the Task Configuration, you will find a
sequence of task entries (with name, priority, interval, and
occurrence).
• Below each task entry, there is again a series of program call ups.
Image 6.11: Example for a Task Configuration
In this example of a Task Configuration, Task2 has a lower priority than

Task1. Task1, however, is only executed every two seconds. (The entry
under Single is disregarded.) Thus, in this Task Configuration, Task1 is
executed every two seconds, and, in between, Task2 can be executed at any
time, provided that the global variable "Schalten" has a rising edge.
PROSYD 1131 6-19

Task Configuration
Which task is being

processed?
For the execution, the following rules apply:
• That task is executed, whose condition has been met; i.e., its specified
time has expired, or after its condition variable exhibits a rising edge.
• If several tasks have a valid requirement, then the task with the highest
priority will be executed.
• If several tasks have valid conditions and equivalent priorities, then the
task that has had the longest waiting time will be executed first.
• The most important commands are found in the context menu (right
mouse button or <Ctrl>+<F10>).
Working in the Task

Configuration
• At the heading of the Task Configuration are the words "Task
Configuration."If a plus sign is located before the words, then the sequence
list is closed. By doubleclicking on the list or pressing <Enter>, you can
open the list. A minus sign now appears.By doubleclicking once more, you
can close the list again.
• For every task, there is a list of program call-ups attached. Likewise,
you can open and close this list the same way.
• With the "Insert" "Insert Task" command, you can insert a task.
• With the "Insert" "Insert Program Call", a program call will be
inserted.
• With the "Extras" "Edit Entry" command, you can edit the task
characteristics or the program call-up, depending on the selected element.
• By clicking on the task or program name, or by pressing the <Space
bar>, you can set an edit control box around the name. Then you can change
the designation directly in the task editor.
"Insert" "Insert Task"

or "Insert" "Append
Task"
With this command you can insert a new task into the Task Configuration.
If a task is selected, then the "Insert Task" command will be at your
disposal. The new task will be inserted in front of the cursor. If the words
Task Configuration are selected, then the "Append Task" is available, and
the new task will be appended to the end of the existing list.
6-20 PROSYD 1131

The dialog box will open for you to set the task attributes.
Image 6.12: Dialog Box for Setting Task Attributes
In the dialog box you can enter the desired attributes: the Name; the
Priority
(a number between 0 and 31, with the following validities: 0 has the highest,
and, 31, the lowest priority); the Interval after which the task should be
started again; or a variable that, following a raising edge, will cause an
execution of the task (in the Single field). With the Select... button, you can
open the Input Assistant to select from the declared variables.
If an entry is on hand for both the interval and for the variable, then only the
interval time will be considered for the execution requirement. If an entry
has not been made in either of the two fields, then only the priority with the
counter will be considered. This means that in every cycle the task will be
considered to be executable.It will only cease to be executed if another task
of higher priority is likewise executable.
"Insert" "Insert
Program Call" or
"Insert""Append
Program Call"
With these commands you will open the dialog box for entering a program
call to a task in the Task Configuration.
With Insert Program Call", the new program call is inserted in front of the
cursor, and with "Append Program Call", the program call is appended to
the end of the existing list.
PROSYD 1131 6-21

Sampling Trace
Image 6.13: Dialog box for Program Call Entry
In the field, specify a valid program name for your project, or open the Input
Assistant with the Select button to select a valid program name. If the
selected program requires input variables, then enter these in their usual
form and of the declared type (for example, prg(invar:=17)).
"Extras" "Edit Entry"

Depending on the element selected, you can use this command in the Task
Configuration to open either the dialog box for setting the task attributes
(see "Insert" "Task") or the dialog box for entering the program call (see
"Insert" "Program Call").
If the cursor is located at the task entry, and there is no list of program calls
appended to the task entry, then you open the dialog for setting the
doubleclicking on the entry or by pressing <Enter>.
If the cursor is located on an entry for a program call, then you can also open
the dialog box for editing the program entry by doubleclicking on the entry.
By clicking on the task or program name, or by pressing the <Space bar>,
you can set an edit control box around the name. Then, you can change the
designation directly in the task editor.
"Extras" "Set Debug

Task"
With this command a debugging task can be set in Online mode in the Task
Configuration. The text [DEBUG] will appear after the set task.
The debugging capabilities apply, then, only to this task.In other words, the
program only stops at a breakpoint if the program is gone through by the set
task.
6.5 Sampling Trace
Sample tracing means that the progression of values for variables is traced
over a certain time frame. These values are written in a ring buffer (trace
buffer). If the memory is full, then the "oldest" values from the start of the
6-22 PROSYD 1131

memory will be overwritten. As a maximum, 20 variables can be traced at

the same time. A maximum of 500 values can be traced per variable.
Since the size of the trace buffer in the PLC has a fixed value, in the event of
very many or very wide variables (DWORD), fewer than 500 values can be
traced.
Example: if 10 WORD variables are traced and if the memory in the PLC is
5000 bytes long, then, for every variable, 250 values can be traced.
In order to be able to perform a trace, open the object for a Sampling
Trace in the Resources register card in the Object Organizer. After this, you
must enter the trace variables to be traced.(See "Extras" "Trace
Configuration".) After you have sent the configuration with "Save Trace
to the PLC and have started the trace in the PLC ("Start Trace"), then the
values of the variables will be traced. With "Read Trace", the final traced
values will be read out and displayed graphically as curves.
"Extras" "Trace
Configuration"
With this command you will be given the dialog box for entering the
variables to be traced, as well as diverse trace parameters for the Sampling
Trace. The dialog can also be opened by a double click in the grey area of
the dialog Sampling Trace.
PROSYD 1131 6-23

Sampling Trace
Image 6.14: Dialog Box for Trace Configuration
The list of the Variables to be traced is initially empty. In order to append a

variable the variable must be entered in the field under the list. Following
this, you can use the Add button or the <Enter> to append the variable to the
list. You can also use the Input Assistant.
A variable is deleted from the list when you select the variable and then
press the Delete button.
A Boolean or analogue variable can be entered into the field Trigger
Variable. The input assistance can also be used here. The trigger variable
describes the termination condition of the trace. In Trigger Level you enter
the level of an analogue trigger variable at which the trigger event occurs.
When Trigger edge positive is selected the trigger event occurs after an
ascending edge of the Boolean trigger variable or when an analogue variable
has passed through the trigger level from below to above. Negative causes
6-24 PROSYD 1131

triggering after a descending edge or when an analogue variable went from

above to below. Both causes triggering for both descending and ascending
edges or by a positive or negative pass, whereas none does not initiate a
triggering event at all. Trigger Position is used to set the percentage of the
measured value which will be recorded before the trigger event occurs. If,
for example, you enter 25 here then 25 % of the measured values are shown
before the triggering event and 75% afterwards and then the trace is
terminated. The field Sample Rate is used set the time period between two
recordings in milliseconds. The default value ”0” means one scanning
procedure per cycle.
Select the mode for recalling the recorded values: With Single the Number
of the defined samples are displayed one time. With Continuous the
reading of the recording of the defined number of measured values is
initiated anew each time. If, for example, you enter the number ‘35’ the first
display contains the first measured values 1 to 35 and the recording of the
next 35 measured values (36-70) will then be automatically read, etc..
Manual selection is used to read the trace recordings specifically with
"Extras" "Read trace".
The recall mode functions independently of whether a trigger variable is set
or not. If no trigger variable is set the trace buffer will be filled with the
defined number of measured values and the buffer contents will be read and
displayed on recall.
The button Save is used to store the trace configuration which has been
created in a file. The standard window ”File save as” is opened for this
purpose.
Stored trace configurations can be retrieved using the button Load. The
standard window ”File open” is opened for this purpose.
Note: Please note that Save and Load in the configuration dialog only
relates to the configuration, not to the values of a trace recording (in contrast
to the menu commands "Extras" "Save trace" and "Extras" "Load trace").
If the field Trigger Variable is empty, the trace recording will run endlessly
and can be stopped by "Extras" "Stop Trace".
"Extra" "Start Trace"
Symbol:
With this command the trace configuration is transferred to the PLC and the
trace sampling is started in the PLC.
PROSYD 1131 6-25

Sampling Trace
"Extra" "Read Trace"
Symbol:
With this command the present trace buffer is read from the PLC, and the
values of the selected variables are displayed.
"Extra" "Auto Read"

With this command the present trace buffer is read automatically from the
PLC, and the values are continuously displayed.
If the trace buffer is automatically read, then a check (!) is located before
the menu item.
"Extra" "Stop Trace"
Symbol:
This command stops the Sampling Trace in the PLC. .
Selection of the
Variables to be
Displayed
The comboboxes to the right, next to the window for displaying curves trace
variables defined in the trace configuration. If a variable is selected from the
list, then after the trace buffer has been read the variable will be displayed in
the corresponding color (Var 0 green, etc.). Variables can also be selected if
curves are already displayed.
A maximum of up to eight variables can be observed simultaneously in the
trace window.
6-26 PROSYD 1131

Display of the
Sampling Trace
Image 6.15: Sampling Trace of various Variables
If a trace buffer is loaded, then the values of all variables to be displayed

will be read out and displayed. If no scan frequency has been set, then the X
axis will be inscribed with the continuous number of the traced value. The
status indicator of the trace window (first line) indicates whether the trace
buffer is full and when the trace is completed.
If a value for the scan frequency was specified, then the x axis will specify
the time of the traced value. The time is assigned to the "oldest" traced
value. In the example, e.g., the values for the last 25 seconds are indicated.
The Y axis is inscribed with values in the appropriate data type. The scaling
is laid out in a way that allows the lowest and the highest value to fit in the
viewing area. In the example, Var 0 has taken on the lowest value of 6, and
the highest value of 100: hence the setting of the scale at the left edge.
If the trigger requirement is met, then a vertical dotted line is displayed at
the interface between the values before and after the appearance of the
trigger requirement.
A memory that has been read will be preserved until you change the project
or leave the system.
"Extras" "Cursor
Mode"
The easiest way to set a cursor in the monitoring area is to click there with
the left mouse button. A cursor appears and can be moved by the mouse. At
PROSYD 1131 6-27

Sampling Trace
the top of the monitoring window the current x-position of the cursor is
displayed. In the fields next to 'Var 0', 'Var 1', ..., 'Var n' the value of the
respective variable is shown.
Another way is the command "Extras" "Cursor mode". With this command
two vertical lines will appear in the Sampling Trace. First they are laying
one on the other. One of the lines can be moved to the right or to the left by
the arrow keys. By pressing <Ctrl>+<left> or <Ctrl>+<right> the speed of
the movement can be increased by factor 10.
If additionally the <Shift> key is pressed, the second line can be moved,
showing the difference to the first one.
"Extras" "Multi
Channel"
With this command you can alternate between single-channel and multi-
channel display of the Sampling Trace. In the event of a multi-channel
display, there is a check (!) in front of the menu item.
The multi-channel display has been preset. Here the display window is
divided into as many as eight display curves. For each curve the maximum
and the minimum value are displayed at the edge.
In a single-channel display, all curves are displayed with the same scaling
factor and are superimposed. This can be useful when displaying curve
abnormalities.
"Extras" "Show grid"

With this command you can switch on and off the grid in the graphic
window. When the grid is switched on, a check (!) will appear next to the
menu item.
"Extras" "Y Scaling"

With this command you can change the preset Y scaling of a curve in the
trace display.
In the dialog box specify the number of the desired curve (Channel) and the
new maximum (maximum y scale) and the new minimum value (minimum
y scale) on the y axis.
By doubleclicking on a curve you will also be given the dialog box. The
channel and the former value are preset.
6-28 PROSYD 1131

Image 6.16: Dialog Box for Setting the Y Scale
"Extras" "Stretch"
Symbol:
With this command you can stretch (zoom) the values of the Sampling Trace
that are shown. The beginning position is set with the horizontal picture
adjustment bar. With repeated stretches that follow one-after-another, the
trace section displayed in the window will increasingly shrink in size.
This command is the counterpart to "Extras" "Compress".
"Extras" "Compress"
Symbol:
With this command the values shown for the Sampling Trace are
compressed; i.e., after this command you can view the progression of the
trace variables within a larger time frame. A multiple execution of the
command is possible.
This command is the counterpart to "Extras" "Stretch".
"Extras" "Save Trace"

With this command you can save a Sampling Trace (values + configuration
data). The dialog box for saving a file is opened. The file name receives the
extension "*.trc".
Be aware, that here you save the traced values as well as the trace
configuration, whereas Save trace in the configuration dialog only concerns
the configuration data.
The saved Sampling Trace can be loaded again with "Extras" "Load
Trace".
"Extras" "Load Trace"

With this command a saved Sampling Trace (traced values + configuration
data)can be reloaded. The dialog box for opening a file is opened. Select the
desired file with the "*.trc" extension.
PROSYD 1131 6-29

Watch and Receipt Manager
With "Extras" "Save Trace" you can save a Sampling Trace.
"Extras" "Trace in
ASCII-file"
With this command you can save a Sampling Trace in an ASCII-file. The
dialog box is opened for saving a file. The file name receives the extension
"*.txt". The values are deposited in the file according to the following
scheme:
PROSYD 1131 Trace
D:\PROSYD 1131\PROJECTS\TRAFFICSIGNAL.PRO
Cycle PLC_PRG.COUNTER PLC_PRG.LIGHT1
021
121
221
.....
If no frequency scan was set in the trace configuration, then the cycle is
located in the first column; that means one value per cycle has been recorded
at any given time. In the other respects, the entry here is for the point in time
in ms at which the values of the variables have been saved since the
Sampling Trace has been run.
In the subsequent columns, the corresponding values of the trace variables
are saved. At any given time the values are separated from one another by a
blank space.
The appertaining variable names are displayed next to one another in the
third line, according to the sequence (PLC_PRG.COUNTER,
PLC_PRG.LIGHT1).
6.6 Watch and Receipt Manager
Watch and Receipt

Manager
With the help of the Watch and Receipt Manager you can view the values of
selected variables. The Watch and Receipt Manager also makes it possible
to preset the variables with definite values and transfer them as a group to
the PLC ("Write Receipt"). In the same way, current PLC values can be
read into and stored in the Watch and Receipt Manager ("Read Receipt").
These functions are helpful, for example, for setting and entering of control
parameters.
All watch lists created ("Insert" "New Watch List") are indicated in the
left column of the Watch and Receipt Manager.These lists can be selected
6-30 PROSYD 1131

with a mouse click or an arrow key. In the right area of the Watch and
Receipt Manager the variables applicable at any given time are indicated.
In order to work with the Watch and Receipt Manager, open the object for
the Watch and Receipt Manager in the Resources register card in the
Object Organizer.
Watch and Receipt

Manager in the Offline
Mode
In Offline Mode, you can create several watch lists in the Watch and Receipt
Manager using the "Insert" "New Watch List".
For inputting the variables to be watched, you can call up a list of all
variables with the Input Assistant, or you can enter the variables with the
keyboard, according to the following notation:
<POUName>.<Variable Name>
With global variables, the POU Name is left out. You begin with a point.
The variable name can, once again, contain multiple levels. Addresses can
be entered directly.
Example of a multiple-level variable:
PLC_PRG.Instance1.Instance2.Structure.Componentname
Example of a global variable:
.global1.component1
Image 6.17: Watch and Receipt Manager in the Offline Mode
The variables in the watch list can be preset with constant values. That
means that in Online mode you can use the "Extras" "Write Receipt"
command to write these values into the variables. To do to do must use := to
assign the constant value of the variable:
PROSYD 1131 6-31

Example:
PLC_PRG.TIMER:=50
In the example, the PLC_PRG.COUNTER variable is preset with the value
6
"Insert" "New Watch

List"
With this command a new watch list can be inserted into the Watch and
Receipt Manager. Enter the desired name for the watch list in the dialog box
that appears.
"Extras" "Rename
Watch List"
With this command you can change the name of a watch list in the Watch
and Receipt Manager.
In the dialog box that appears, enter the new name of the watch list.
"Extras" "Save Watch

List"
With this command you can save a watch list. The dialog box for saving a
file is opened. The file name is preset with the name of the watch list and is
given the extension "*.wtc".
The saved watch list can be loaded again with "Extras" "Load Watch
List".
"Extras" "Load Watch

List"
With this command you can reload a saved watch list. The dialog box is
opened for opening a file. Select the desired file with the "*.wtc" extension.
In the dialog box that appears, you can give the watch list a new name. The
file name is preset without an extension.
With "Extras" "Save Watch List", you can save a watch list.
Watch and Receipt

Manager in the Online
Mode
In Online mode, the values of the entered variables are indicated.
Structured values (arrays, structures, or instances of function blocks) are
marked by a plus sign in front of the identifier. By clicking the plus sign
with the mouse or by pressing <Enter>, the variable is opened up or closed.
6-32 PROSYD 1131

In order to input new variables, you can turn off the display by using the
"Extra" "Active Monitoring" command. After the variables have been
entered, you can use the same command again to activate the display of the
values.
Image 6.18: Watch- and Receipt Manager in the Online Mode
In the Offline Mode you can preset variables with constant values (through
inputting := <value> after the variable). In the Online Mode, these values
can now be written into the variables, using the "Extras" "Write Receipt"
command.
With the "Extras" "Read Receipt" command you can replace the
presetting of the variable with the present value of the variable.
Note: Only those values the watch list are loaded which was selected in
the Watch and Receipt Manager!
"Extra" "Monitoring
Active"
With this command at the Watch and Receipt Manager in the Online mode,
the display is turned on or off. If the display is active, a check (!) will
appear in front of the menu item.
In order to enter new variables or to preset a value (see Offline Mode), the
display must be turned off through the command. After the variables have
been entered, you can use the same command again to activate the display of
the values.
PROSYD 1131 6-33

"Extras" "Write
Receipt"
With this command in the Online Mode of the Watch and Receipt Manager,
you can write the preset values (see Offline Mode) into the variables.
"Extras" "Read
Receipt"
With the command, in the Online Mode of the Watch and Receipt Manager,
you can replace the presetting of the variables (see Offline Mode) with the
present value of the variables.
Example:
PLC_PRG.Counter [:= <present value>] = <present value>
Force values
In the Watch and Receipt Manager you can also "Force values" and
"Write values". If you click on the respective variable value, then a dialog
box opens, in which you can enter the new value of the variable. Changed
variables appear in red in the Watch and Receipt Manager.
6-34 PROSYD 1131

Chapter 7 - Library Manager
7 Library Manager
The library manager shows all libraries that are connected with the current
project. The POUs, data types, and global variables of the libraries can be
used the same way as user-defined POUs, data types, and global variables.
The library manager is opened with the "Window" "Library Manager"
command.
Image 7.1: Library Manager
Using the Library

Manager
The window of the library manager is divided into three or four areas by
screen dividers. The libraries attached to the project are listed in the upper
left area.
In the area below that, depending on which register card has been selected,
there is a listing of the POUs , Data types, or Global variables of the
library selected in the upper area.
Folders are opened and closed by doubleclicking the line or pressing
<Enter>. There is a plus sign in front of closed folders, and a minus sign in
front of opened folders.
If a POU is selected by clicking the mouse or selecting with the arrow keys
then the declaration of the POU will appear in the upper right area of the
PROSYD 1131 7-1

library manager; and in the lower right is the graphic display in the form of a
black box with inputs and outputs.
With data types and global variables, the declaration is displayed in the right
area of the library manager.
Standard Library
The library with "standard.lib" is always available. It contains all functions
and function blocks that are required by the IEC1131-3 as standard POUs
for an IEC programming system. The difference between a standard function
and an operator is that the operator is implicitly recognized by the
programming system, while the standard POUs must be tied to the project
(standard.lib).
The code for these POUs exists as a C-library and is a component of
PROSYD 1131.
User-defined Libraries
If a project is to be compiled in its entity and without errors, then it can be
saved in a library with the "Save as" command in the "File" menu. The
project itself will remain unchanged. Subsequently, you can gain access to
the project under the entered name, just as with the standard library.
"Insert" "Additional
Library"
With this command you can attach an additional library to your project.
In the dialog box for opening a file, choose the desired library with the
"*.lib" extension. The library is now listed in the library manager, and you
can use the objects in the library as user-defined objects.
Remove Library
With the "Edit" "Delete" command you can remove a library from a
project and from the library manager.
7-2 PROSYD 1131

Chapter 8 - Visualization
8 Visualization
8.1 Create Visualization
Visualization
Visualizations allow you to view your project variables. With the help of the
visualization you can draw geometric elements offline. These can then
change their forms or colors, in subjection to certain variable values, in
Online mode. For example, it possible to display the tendency of a variable
to increase in a bar chart. You can also deal with input for the program by
way of the mouse and the keyboard.
Image 8.1: Example of a Visualization
Create Visualization
In order to create a visualization, you must select the register card for
Visualization in the Object Organizer.
PROSYD 1131 8-1

Visualization Elements, Insert
Using the "Project" "Object Add" command, you can create a new
visualization object. A dialog box opens in which you can enter the name of
the new visualization. If you have entered a valid name, then you can close
the dialog box with OK. A window opens in which you can edit the new
visualization.
8.2 Visualization Elements, Insert
Visualization Elements,
Insert
You can insert four different geometric forms, as well as bitmaps and
existing visualizations, into your visualization.
Geometric forms at your disposal include: rectangles, rounded rectangles,
ellipses/circles, and polygons.
Go to the "Insert" menu item and select freely from the following
commands: 'Rectangle', 'Rounded Rectangle', 'Ellipse',
'Polygon',
'Line‘, 'Curve‘, 'Bitmap', 'Visualization' . A check
appears in front of the selected command. You can also use the tool bar. The
selected element appears pushed down (for example ).
If you now go to the editor window with the mouse, you will see that the
mouse pointer is identified with the corresponding symbol (for example
). Click on the desired starting point of your element, and drag the
pointer, while pressing the left mouse button, until the element reaches the
desired size.
If you want to create a polygon or a line, first click with the mouse on the
position of the first corner of the polygon resp. on the starting point of the
line, and then click on the further desired corner points. By doubleclicking
on the last corner point you will close the polygon and it will be completely
drawn respectively the line will be completed
If you want to create a curve (Bezier curves) determine the initial and two
other points with mouse clicks to define the circumscribing rectangle. An
arc is drawn after the third mouse click. You can then change the position of
the end point of the arc by moving the mouse and can then end the process
with a double click or add another arc with additional mouse clicks.
Furthermore pay attention, to the status bar and the change from select and
insert modes.
8-2 PROSYD 1131

"Insert" "Rectangle"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a rectangle as an element into your
present visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert)
"Insert" "Rounded
Rectangle"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a rectangle with rounded corners as an
element in your present visualization. (Use, Visualization Elements, Insert)
"Insert" "Ellipse"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a circle or an ellipse as an element in your
present visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert)
"Insert" "Polygon"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a polygon as an element in your present
visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert).
"Insert" "Line"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a line as an element into your current
visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert).
"Insert" "Curve"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a Bezier curve as an element into your
current visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert)..
"Insert" "Bitmap"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert a bitmap as an element in your present
visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert)
PROSYD 1131 8-3

Working with Visualization Elements
While pressing the left mouse button, bring up an area in the desired size.
The dialog box is opened for opening a file. Once you have selected the
desired bitmap, it will be inserted into the area brought up.
"Insert"
"Visualization"
Symbol:
With the command you can insert an existing visualization as an element in
your present visualization. (Use, see Visualization Elements, Insert)
While pressing the left mouse button, bring up an area in the desired size. A
selection list of existing visualizations opens. After you have selected the
desired visualization, it will be inserted in the defined area.
8.3 Working with Visualization Elements
Selecting Visualization
Elements
In order to select an element, click with the mouse on the element. You can
also select the first element of the elements list by pressing the <Tab> key
and jump to the next by each further keystroke. If you press the <Tab> key
while pressing the <Shift> key, you jump backwards in the order of the
elements list.In order to mark multiple elements, press and hold the <Shift>
key and click the corresponding elements, one after another; or, while
holding down the left mouse button, pull a window over the elements to be
selected.
In order to select all the elements, use the "Extras" "Select All" command.
Modifying
Visualization Elements
You can select an element which has already been inserted by a mouse click
on the element or by pressing the <tab> key. A small black square will
appear at each corner of each of the elements, (with ellipses at the corners of
the surrounding rectangle). Except in the case of polygons, lines or curves
further squares appear in the middle of the element edges between the corner
points.
8-4 PROSYD 1131

With a selected element, the turning point (balance point) is also displayed
at the same time. You can then rotate the element around this point with a
set motion/angle. The turning point is displayed as a small black circle with
a white cross ( ). You can drag the turning point with a pressed left mouse
button.
You can change the size of the element by clicking on one of the black
squares and, while keeping the left mouse button pressed, controlling the
new outline.
With the selection of a polygon, you can drag each individual corner using
the same technique. While doing this, if you press the <Ctrl>-key then an
additional corner point will be inserted at the corner point, an additional
corner point will be inserted, which can be dragged by moving the mouse.
By pressing the <Shift>+<Ctrl>-key, you can remove a corner point.
Dragging Visualization
Elements
One or more selected elements can be dragged by pressing the left mouse
button or the arrow key.
Copying Visual
Elements
One or more selected elements can be inserted with the "Edit"
"Copy"command, the <Ctrl>+<C> key combination, or the corresponding
copy symbol, and with "Edit" "Paste".
A further possibility is to select the elements and then click the mouse in an
element once again, while pressing the <Ctrl>-key. Now you can remove the
newly copied elements from the original ones while pressing the left mouse
button.
Changing the Selection

and Insert Mode
After the insertion of a visualization element, there is an automatic change
back into the selection mode. If you want to insert an additional element the
same way, you can once again select the corresponding command in the
menu or the symbol in the tool bar.
You can also quickly change between the selection mode and the insert
mode by pressing the <Ctrl>-key and the right mouse button simultaneously.
In the insert mode, the corresponding symbol will also appear at the mouse
pointer, and the name will also be indicated in black in the status bar.
PROSYD 1131 8-5

Visualization Elements, Configure
Status Bar in the

Visualization
In a visualization, the present X and Y position of the mouse pointer is
displayed in the status bar. The position values are always relative to the
upper left corner of the picture in the status bar. If the mouse pointer is
located on an Element, or if the element is being processed, then the
number of the element will be displayed. If you have selected an element to
insert, then this element will also appear (for example, Rectangle).
8.4 Visualization Elements, Configure
"Extras" "Configure"
With this command you can open the dialog box to configure the selected
visualization element.
You are given the dialog box for configuration when you doubleclick on the
element.
Select a category in the left area of the dialog box, and fill out the requested
information in the right area.
Depending on the visualization element selected, various categories can be
selected:
• Shape Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, Ellipse
• Text All
• Color Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, Ellipse,
Polygon, Line, Curve
• Motion absolute All
• Motion relative All, except Polygon, Line, Curve
• Variables All
• Input All
• Tooltip All
• Bitmap Bitmap
• Visualization Visualization
Shape
In the visualization element configuration dialog box, you can select in the
Shape category from among Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, and Ellipse
respectively Polygon, Line and Curve. The form will change into the size
already set.
8-6 PROSYD 1131

Image 8.2: Dialog Box for Configuring Visualization Elements (Shape Category)
Text
In the visualization element configuration dialog box, in the Text category
you can set a text for the element.
Enter the text in the Content field. By pressilng <Ctrl>+<Enter> you can
insert line breaks.
If you enter "%s" into the text, then this location, in Online mode, will be
replaced by the value of the variable from the Text Output field of the
Variables category.
This text will appear in the element, according to the respective Horizontal
Left, Center, or Right positioning, and the respective Top , Center, or
Bottom positioning, that was specified in the element.
If you use the Font button, a dialog box for selection of the font will appear.
Select the desired font and confirm the dialog with OK. With the Standard
Font button you can set the font that is selected below in the "Project"
"Options". If the font is changed there, then this font will be displayed in
all elements except in those elements for which another font has explicitly
been selected by using the Font button.
PROSYD 1131 8-7

Image 8.3: Dialog Box for Configuring Visualization Elements (Text Category)
Colors
In the visualization element configuration dialog box, in the Color category
you can select primary colors and alarm colors for the inside area and for the
frame of your element. Chosing the options no color inside and no frame
color you can create transparent elements.
Image 8.4: Dialog Box for Configuring Visualization Elements (Color Category)
If you now enter a Boolean variable in the Variables category in the

Change Color field, then the element will be displayed in the Color set, as
long as the variable is FALSE. If the variable is TRUE, then the element
will be displayed in its Alarm Color.
8-8 PROSYD 1131

Note: The change color function only becomes active, if the PLC is in
Online Mode!
If you want to change the color of the frame, then press the Frame button,
instead of the Inside button. In either case, the dialog box will open for
selection of the color.
Here can to choose the desired hue from the primary colors and the user-
defined colors. By pressing the Define Colors you can change the user-
defined colors.
Motion absolute
In the visualization element configuration dialog box, in the Motion
absolute category, X- or Y-Offset fields variables can be entered. These
variables can shift the element in the X or the Y direction, depending on the
respective variable value. A variable in the Scale field changes the size of
the element linear to the value of the variable.
A variable in the Angle field causes the element to turn on its turning point,
depending on the value of the variable. (Positive Value = Mathematic
Positive = Clockwise). The value is evaluated in degrees. With polygons,
every point rotates; in other words, the polygon turns. With all other
elements, the element rotates, in such a way, that the upper edge always
remains on top.
The turning point appears after a single click on the element, and is
displayed as a small black circle with a white cross ( ). You can drag the
turning point with a pressed left mouse button.
Image 8.5: Visualization Element Configuration Dialog Box (Motion absolute Category)
PROSYD 1131 8-9

Motion relative
In the dialog for configuring visualization elements in the Motion relative
category, you can assign variables to the individual element edges.
Depending on the values of the variables, the corresponding element edges
are then moved. The easiest way to enter variables into the fields is the Input
Assistant.
The four entries indicate the four sides of your element. The base position of
the corners is always at zero.A new value in the variables, in the
corresponding column, shifts the boundary in pixels around this value.
Therefore, the variables that are entered ought to be INT variables.
Note: Positive values shift the horizontal edges downward, or, the
vertical edges, to the right!
Image 8.6: Dialog Box for Configuration of Visualization Elements (Motion relative Category)
Variables
You can enter the variables that describe the status of the visualization
elements in the Variable category within the dialog box for configuring
visualization elements. The simplest way to enter variables in the fields is to
use the Input Assistant.
You can enter Boolean variables in the Invisible and Change color fields.
The values in the fields determine their actions. If the variable of the
Invisible field contains the value FALSE, the visualization element will be
visible. If the variable contains the value TRUE, the element will be
invisible.
8-10 PROSYD 1131

If the variable at the Change color field contains the value FALSE, the
visualization element will be displayed in its default color. If the variable is
TRUE, the element will be displayed in its alarm color.
You can enter a variable in the Textdisplay field whose value is displayed if
you have , in addition to the text, inserted %s in the Content field of the
Text category. In Online mode, "%s" is replaced by the value of the
variables found in Textdisplay.
Image 8.7: Visualization Element Configuration Dialog Box (Variables Category)
Input
Selecting the field Toggle variable allows you, in online mode, to toggle the
value of the variables which are located in the input field with every mouse
click on the element. The value of the Boolean variable changes with each
mouse click from TRUE to FALSE and then back to TRUE again at the next
mouse click, etc.
The option Keying variable allows you, in online mode, to change the value
of the Boolean variable which is located in the input field, between TRUE
and FALSE. Place the mouse cursor on the element, press the mousekey and
hold it depressed (the value will, for example, change from TRUE to
FALSE). The variable changes back to its initial value (TRUE) as soon as
you release the mousekey.
Selecting the field Zoom to Vis... allows you, in the following field, to enter
the name of a visualization object in the same project. While in online mode
use a mouse click to change to the element in the window of the
visualization which has been entered. If a program variable of the type
STRING (e.g. PLC_PRG.xxx) has been entered, instead of a visualization
object, then this variable can be used to define the name of the visualization
PROSYD 1131 8-11

object (e.g. ,visu1’) which the system should change to when a mouse click
occurs (e.g. xxx:= ,visu1).
The field Zoom to Vis... can be used to configure the return to the calling
visualization by using the command ‚ZOOMTOCALLER‘.
Selecting the option Execute program allows you to enter any executable
program in the input field and then to execute it in online mode by clicking
on the element with the mouse.
Note: The configuration field Execute program plays a major role for
the PROSYD 1131 operating version, since PROSYD 1131 program
actions can be initiated here over defined commands, which are available as
menu commands in the full version (see Special input possibilities for the
PROSYD 1131 operating version).
Selecting the option Text input of the variable ‘Text output’ allows you,
in online mode, to allocate a value to a variable over this visualization
element. The value which is located in the field Text output of the category
Variables will be written in the variable. Clicking in online mode on the
element produces an editing frame in which you can enter the new value of
the variable over the keyboard. Press the <Enter> key to accept the value.
Image 8.8: Dialog to configure the visualization elements (Category Input)
8-12 PROSYD 1131

Special input
possibilities for the
PROSYD 1131
operating version
In the operating version of PROSYD 1131 there are no menus and status
and tool bars available to the user. The most important control and
monitoring functions can, however, be attached to a visualization element
and thus be available through a mouse click or over the keyboard. The
following special input possibilities are available in the configuration dialog
for a visualization element:
Enter internal commands in the field Execute program in the category
Input according to the following syntax:
INTERN <COMMAND> [PARAMETER]*
The following internal commands which can accommodate a number of
parameters separated by the <space bar> are presently available:
Command The equivalent in Explanation

the full version of
PROSYD 1131
LANGUAGE <visualization The dialog for visualization

settings> settings which includes the
category language gets openend.
LANGUAGE <visualization The desired language file is
<sprache> settings> chosen without using the dialog
for visualization settings.
DEFINERECEIPT <Select watch lists> A watch list is selected from the
name receipt manager which enters
your name (name) when the
command is given. The
variables in this watch list are
registered and displayed.
WRITERECEIPT ‘Write receipts' The name of a watch list of the
name receipt manager is expected.
The receipt of this watch list
will be written. A previous
execution of
DEFINERECEIPT is not
necessary.
SAVEWATCH ‘Save watch list' The receipt will be read into the
current watch list which will be
PROSYD 1131 8-13

stored in a file. Important: call a

previous DEFINERECEIPT to
define the current receipt !
LOADWATCH ‘Load watch list' + The standard window ‚File
‘Write receipt' open‘ appears, from which a
previously stored receipt can be
selected. This receipt will be
immediately written into the
controller system.
EXITPROGRAM ‚File‘ ‘Close' The program will be exited.
PRINT ‚File‘ ‘Print' The current visualization will be

printed out online.
TRACE <Open object trace The window for trace recording
recording> will be opened.
The menu commands Trace
Start, Read, Stop, Save, Load
which are available in the full
version of PROSYD 1131 are
available in this window.
Image 8.9: Dialog for the trace recording in the operation version
8-14 PROSYD 1131

ToolTip
The dialog Text for Tooltip offers an input field for text which appears in a
text field as soon as the mouse cursor is passed over the object in online
mode. The text can be formatted with line breaks by using the key
combination <Ctrl> + <Enter>.
Bitmap
You can enter the options for a bitmap in the Bitmap category within the
visualization element configuration dialog box.
Enter the bitmap file and its path in the Bitmap field. You can use the ...
button to open the standard Windows Browse dialog box from which you
can select the desired bitmap.
All other entries affect the frame of the bitmap.
By selecting Anisotropic, Isotropic or Fixed you specify how the bitmap
should react to changes in the size of the frame. Anisotropic means that the
bitmap remains the same size as the frame which allows you to change the
height and width of the bitmap independently. Isotropic means that the
bitmap retains the same proportions even if the overall size is changed (i.e.,
the relationship between height and width is maintained). If Fixed is
selected, the original size of the bitmap will be maintained regardless of the
size of the frame.
If the Clip option is selected together with the Fixed setting, only that
portion of the bitmap that is contained within the frame will be displayed.
If you select the Draw option, the frame will be displayed in the color
selected in the Color and Alarm color buttons in the color dialog boxes.
The alarm color will only be used if the variable in the Change Color field
in the Variable category is TRUE.
PROSYD 1131 8-15

Image 8.10: Visualization Element Configuration Dialog Box (Bitmap Category)
Visualization
You can enter the options for a visualization as an element in another
visualization in the Visualization category within the visualization element
configuration dialog box. Enter the object name for the visualization in the
Visualization field. Use the ... button to open a dialog box containing the
visualizations available in this project. Any visualization may be used with
the exception of the current one.
All other entries affect the visualization frame.
If you select the Draw option, the frame will be displayed in the color
selected in the Color and Alarm color buttons in the color dialog boxes.
The alarm color will only be used if the variable in the Change Color field
in the Variables category is TRUE.
If Isotropic is selected, the proportions of the visualization will be
maintained even if the size changes (i.e., the relationship between height and
width will remain the same). Otherwise the proportions can be changed.
If the Clip option is selected in Online mode, only the original portion of the
visualization will be displayed. For example, if an object extends beyond the
original display area, it will be clipped and may disappear from view
completely in the visualization.
8-16 PROSYD 1131

Image 8.11: Visualization Element Configuration Dialog Box (Visualization Category)
8.5 Additional Visualization Element Functions
"Extras" "Send to
Front"
Use this command to bring selected visualization elements to the front.
"Extras" "Send to
Back"
Use this command to send selected visualization elements to the back.
"Extras" "Select
Background Bitmap"
Use this command to open the dialog box for selecting files. Select a file
with the extension "*.bmp". The selected bitmap will then appear as the
background in your visualization.
The bitmap can be removed with the command "Extras" "Clear
Background Bitmap".
"Extras" "Clear
Background Bitmap"
Use this command to remove the bitmap as the background for the current
visualization.
You can use the command "Extras" "Select Background Bitmap" to
select a bitmap for the current visualization.
PROSYD 1131 8-17

Additional Visualization Element Functions
"Extras" "Align"
Use this command to align selected visualization elements.
The following alignment options are available:
• Left: the left edge of each of the elements will be aligned to the
element that is furthest to the left
• the same is true for Right / Top / Bottom
• Horizontal Center: each of the elements will be aligned to the
average horizontal center of all elements
• Vertical Center: each of the elements will be aligned to the
average vertical center of all elements
"Extras" "Select All"

This command allows you to select all visualization elements within the
current visualization object.
‘Extras’ ‘Select Mode’

This command is used to switch the selection mode on or off. This can also
be achieved using the symbol or by pressing the right mousekey while
holding down the <Ctrl> key at the same time.
"Extras" "Element list"

This command opens a dialog box containing a list of all visualization
elements including their number, type and position. The position is given
according to the x and y position of the upper left and lower right corner of
the element.
When one or more items have been selected, the corresponding elements in
the visualization are marked for visual control and if necessary the display
will scroll to that section of the visualization that contains the elements.
Use the To front button to bring selected visualization elements to the front.
Use the To behind button to move them to the back.
Use the Delete button to remove selected visualization elements.
Use the Undo and Redo buttons to undo or restore changes that have been
made just as you would do with the commands "Edit" "Undo" and "Edit"
"Redo" . In the dialog box, you can observe the changes that are being
made.
Click on OK to close the dialog box and confirm the changes.
8-18 PROSYD 1131

Image 8.12: Element list dialog box
"Extras" "Settings"
When this command is used, a dialog box will open in which you can make
certain settings that affect the visualization.
Note: The categories Display, Frame and Language also can be edited
in the online mode.
Enter a zoom factor into the field Zoom in the category Presentation of
between 10 and 500 % in order to increase or decrease the size of the
visualization display. Selecting Element numbers shows the numbers of the
elements in each visualization element when in offline mode.
If Auto-scrolling is selected in the Frame category, the visible portion of
the visualization window will move automatically when you reach the edge
while drawing or moving a visualization element If Best fit in Online mode
is selected, the entire visualization including all elements will be shown in
the window in Online mode regardless of the size of the window. When
Include Background Bitmap is selected, the background bitmap will be
fitted into the window as well, otherwise only the elements will be
considered.
The category Grid is used to define whether the grid points are visible in the
offline mode, whereby the spacing between the visible points is at least 10
even if the entered size is smaller than that. In this case the grid points only
appear with a spacing which is a multiple of the entered size. Selecting
Active causes the elements to be placed on the snap grid points when they
are drawn and moved. The spacing of the grid points is set in the field Size.
PROSYD 1131 8-19

Image 8.13: Setting dialog for visualizations (Category Display)
The category Language is used to display the text which has been assigned
to the visualization elements using the options Text and Text for Tooltip in
a desired language. You have to prepare a language file as described in the
following:
Choose option language file. In the associate input field you give in where
you want to store the file. The extension is '.vis'. You also can use the dialog
'Open' by pressing the button . If a language file is available already, it
will be offered here.
In the input field next to Language you fill in a keyword for the language,
which is currently used in the visualization, i.e. "german" (or "D"). Then
press the button Save. A file with the extension .vis is created, which now
can be edited by a normal text editor. For example you can open the file by
notepad:
Bild 8.14: Example of a language file for a visulisation (Category Language)
8-20 PROSYD 1131

You get a list of the text variables for the language currently used in the
visualization. It includes a reference to the title of this list, for example
"1=german" as reference to the title [german]. You can extend the list by
copying all lines, then replacing the German by English text and setting a
new title [english]. Beyond the line 1=german you accordingly have to add
2=english.
To view the visualization in one of the prepared languages, open the dialog
Language again. In the option field beyond Language now you can choose
between german and english (for the example described above).
Operation over the

keyboard - in online
mode
The visualization elements can be manipulated in online mode over the
following key functions:
Pressing the <Tabulator> key selects the first element in the element list for
which an input is configured. Each subsequent pressing of the key moves
one to the next element in the list. Pressing the key while keeping the
<Shift> key depressed selects the previous element.
The arrow keys can be used to change from a selected element to a
neighbouring one in any direction.
The <Space bar> is used to execute an activity on the selected visualization
element. If the element is one which has a text output variable, a text input
field will be opened which displays the text contents of the variable.
Pressing the <Enter> key writes in this value.
Note: Operation over the keyboard in online mode is of greatest

significance for the operation version of PROSYD 1131!
"File" "Print" in online

mode
"File" "Print" is used to print out the contents of the visualization window in
online mode. Visualizations which stretch over the border of the window
can lead to inconsistencies particularly when there are moving elements in
the visualization.
PROSYD 1131 8-21

Chapter 9 - DDE Interface
9 DDE Interface
DDE Interface
PROSYD 1131 has a DDE (dynamic data exchange) interface for reading
data. PROSYD 1131 uses this interface to provide other applications that
also use a DDE Interface with the contents of control variables and IEC
addresses.
Activating the DDE

Interface
The DDE interface becomes active as soon as the PLC (or the simulation) is
logged in.
General Approach to
Data
A DDE inquiry can be divided into three parts:
1. Name of the program (here: PROSYD 1131),
2. File name and
3. Variable name to be read.
Name of the program: PROSYD 1131
File name: complete project path (c:\example\example.pro).
Variable name: The name of a variable as it appears in the Watch and
Receipt Manager .
Which variables can be

read?
All addresses and variables are readable. Variables or addresses should be
entered in the format used in the Watch and Receipt Manager.
Examples:
%IX1.4.1 (* Reads the input 1.4.1*)
PLC_PRG.TEST (* Reads the variable TEST from the POU
PLC_PRG*)
.GlobVar1 (* Reads the global variable GlobVar1 *)
Linking variables using

WORD
In order to get the current value of the variable TEST from the POU
PLC_PRG through the DDE interface in Microsoft WORD, a field (e.g., the
date) must be inserted in WORD ("Insert" "Field"). Now when you click on
PROSYD 1131 9-1

the field with the right mouse button and select the command "Toggle Field
Codes" you can change the field function for the chosen text.In our example,
this would look as follows:
{ DDEAUTO PROSYD 1131"C:\PROSYD
1131\PROJECT\IFMBSP.PRO" "PLC_PRG.TEST" }
Click on the field with the right mouse button again, then click on "Update
Field" and the desired variable content appears in the text.
Linking variables using

EXCEL
The following must be entered in Microsoft EXCEL before you can assign a
variable to a cell.
=PROSYD 1131|'C:\PROSYD
1131\PROJECT\IFMBSP.PRO'!PLC_PRG.TEST'
When you click on "Edit" then "Links", the result for this link will be:
Type: PROSYD 1131
Source file: C:\PROSYD 1131\PROJECT\IFMBSP.PRO
Element: PLC_PRG.TEST
Accessing variables
with Intouch
Link with your project a DDE Access Name <AccessName> with the
application name PROSYD 1131 and the DDE topic name C:\PROSYD
1131\PROJECT\IFMBSP.PRO.
Now you can associate DDE type variables with the access name
<AccessName>. Enter the name of the variable as the Item Name (e.g.,
PLC_PRG.TEST).
9-2 PROSYD 1131

10
10 Appendix
Appendix A: Using the Keyboard

Use of Keyboard
If you would like to run PROSYD 1131 using only the keyboard, you will
find it necessary to use a few commands that are not found in the menu.
• The function key <F6> allows you to toggle back and forth within the
open POU between the Declaration and the Instruction parts.
• <Alt>+<F6> allows you to move from an open object to the Object
Organizer and from there to the Message window if it is open. If a
Search box is open, <Alt>+<F6> allows you to switch from Object
Organizer to the Search box and from the there back to the object.
• Press <Tab> to move through the input fields and buttons in the
dialog boxes.
• The arrow keys allow you to move through the register cards and
objects within the Object Organizer and Library Manager.
All other actions can be performed using the menu commands or with the
shortcuts listed after the menu commands. <Shift>+<F10> opens the
context menu which contains the commands most frequently used for the
selected object or for the active editor.
Key Combinations
The following is an overview of all key combinations and function keys:
General Functions
Move between the declaration part and the <F6>
instruction part of a POU
Move between the Object Organizer, the <Alt>+<F6>
object and the message window
Context Menu <Shift>+<F10>
Shortcut mode for declarations <Ctrl>+<Enter>
Move from a message in the Message window <Enter>
back to the original position in the editor
PROSYD 1131 10-1

Key Combinations
Open and close multi-layered variables <Enter>

Open and close folders <Enter>
Switch register cards in the Object Organizer <Arrow keys>
and the Library Manager
Move to the next field within a dialog box <Tab>
Context sensitive Help <F1>
General Commands
"File" "Save" <Ctrl>+<S>
"File" "Print" <Ctrl>+
"File" "Exit" <Alt>+<F4>
"Project" "Check" <Strg>+<F11>
"Project" "Build" <Umschalt>+<F11>
"Project" "Rebuild all" <F11>
"Project" "Delete Object" <Del>
"Project" "Add Object" <Ins>
"Project" "Rename Object" <Spacebar>
"Project" "Open Object" <Enter>
"Edit" "Undo" <Ctrl>+<Z>
"Edit" "Redo" <Ctrl>+<Y>
"Edit" "Cut" <Ctrl>+<X> or
<Shift>+<Del>
"Edit" "Copy" <Ctrl>+<C>
"Edit" "Paste" <Ctrl>+<V>
"Edit" "Delete" <Del>
"Edit" "Find next" <F3>
"Edit" "Input Assistant" <F2>
"Edit" "Next Error" <F4>
"Edit" "Previous Error" <Shift>+<F4>
"Online" "Run" <F5>
"Online" "Toggle Breakpoint" <F9>
"Online" "Step over" <F10>
10-2 PROSYD 1131

Appendix A:
"Online" "Step in" <F8>

"Online" "Single Cycle" <Ctrl>+<F5>
"Online" "Write Values" <Ctrl>+<F7>
"Online" "Force Values" <F7>
"Online" "Release Force" <Shift>+<F7>
"Window" "Messages" <Shift>+<Esc>
FBD Editor Commands

"Insert" "Network (after)" <Shift>+<T>
"Insert" "Assignment" <Ctrl>+<A>
"Insert" "Jump" <Ctrl>+<L>
"Insert" "Return" <Ctrl>+<R>
"Insert" "Operator" <Ctrl>+<O>
"Insert" "Function" <Ctrl>+<F>
"Insert" "Function Block" <Ctrl>+
"Insert" "Input" <Ctrl>+
"Extras" "Negate" <Ctrl>+<N>
"Extras" "Zoom" <Alt>+<Enter>
LD Editor Commands
"Insert" "Network (after)" <Shift>+<T>
"Insert" "Contact" <Ctrl>+<O>
"Insert" "Parallel Contact" <Ctrl>+<R>
"Insert" "Function Block" <Ctrl>+
"Insert" "Coil" <Ctrl>+<L>
"Extras" Paste below" <Ctrl>+
"Extras" "Negate" <Ctrl>+<N>
SFC Editor Commands

"Insert" "Step-Transition (before)" <Ctrl>+<T>
PROSYD 1131 10-3

Key Combinations
"Insert" "Step-Transition (after)" <Ctrl>+<E>

"Insert" "Alternative Branch (right)" <Ctrl>+<A>
"Insert" "Parallel Branch (right)" <Ctrl>+<L>
"Insert" "Jump"(SFC) <Ctrl>+
"Extras" "Zoom Action/Transition" <Alt>+<Enter>
Move back to the editor from the SFC <Enter>
Overview
Work with the PLC Configuration

Open and close organization elements <Enter>
Place an edit control box around the name <Spacebar>
"Extras" "Edit Entry" <Enter>
Work with the Task Configuration

Place an edit control box around the task or <Spacebar>
program name
10-4 PROSYD 1131

Appendix B:
Appendix B: Data types

You can use standard data types and user-defined data types when
programming. Each identifier is assigned to a data type which dictates how
much memory space will be reserved and what type of values it stores.
Standard Data types
BOOL
BOOL type variables may be given the values TRUE and FALSE. 8 bits of
memory space will be reserved.
Integer Data Types

BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, and
UDINT are all integer data types
Each of the different number types covers a different range of values. The
following range limitations apply to the integer data types:
Type Lower limit Upper limit Memory space

BYTE 0 255 8 Bit
WORD 0 65535 16 Bit
DWORD 0 4294967295 32 Bit
SINT: -128 127 8 Bit
USINT: 0 255 8 Bit
INT: -32768 32767 16 Bit
UINT: 0 65535 16 Bit
DINT: -2147483648 2147483647 32 Bit
UDINT: 0 4294967295 32 Bit
As a result when larger types are converted to smaller types, information

may be lost.
PROSYD 1131 10-5

Defined Data Types
REAL / LREAL
REAL and LREAL are so-called floating-point types. They are required to
represent rational numbers. 32 bits of memory space is reserved for REAL
and 64 bits for LREAL.
STRING
A STRING type variable can contain any string of characters. The size entry
in the declaration determines how much memory space should be reserved
for the variable.It refers to the number of characters in the string and can be
placed in parentheses or square brackets. If no size specification is given, the
default size of 80 characters will be used.
Example of a String Declaration with 35 characters:
str:STRING(35):='This is a String';
Time Data Types

The data types TIME, TIME_OF_DAY (abb. TOD), DATE and
DATE_AND_TIME (abb. DT) are handled internally like DWORD.
Time is given in milliseconds in TIME and TOD, time in TOD begins at
12:00 A.M.
Time is given in seconds in DATE and DT beginning with January 1, 1970
at 12:00 A.M.
The time data formats used to assign values are described in the chapter on
Constants.
Defined Data Types
ARRAY
One-, two-, and three-dimensional fields (arrays) are supported as
elementary data types. Arrays can be defined both in the declaration part of a
POU and in the global variable lists.
Syntax:
<Field_Name>:ARRAY [<ll1>..<ul1>,<ll2>..<ul2>] OF <elem. Type>.
ll1, ll2, ll3identify the lower limit of the field range; ul1, ul2 and ul3 identify
the upper limit. The range values must be integers.
Example:
Card_game: ARRAY [1..13, 1..4] OF INT;
Initializing Arrays:
10-6 PROSYD 1131

Appendix B:
You can initialize either all of the elements in an array or none of them.
Example for initializing arrays:
arr1 : ARRAY [1..5] OF INT := 1,2,3,4,5;
arr2 : ARRAY [1..2,3..4] OF INT := 1,3(7);
(* short for 1,7,7,7 *)
arr3 : ARRAY [1..2,2..3,3..4] OF INT := 2(0),4(4),2,3;
(* short for 0,0,4,4,4,4,2,3 *)
Array components are accessed in a two-dimensional array using the
following syntax:
<Field_Name>[Index1,Index2]
Example:
Card_game [9,2]
Note: If you define a function in your project with the name

CheckBounds, you can use it to check for range overflows in your project
(see chapter 'What is what in PROSYD 1131', 'Components of a project',
'Function')
Pointer
Variable or function block addresses are saved in pointers while a program
is running.
Pointer declarations have the following syntax:
<Identifier>: POINTER TO <Datatype/Functionblock>;
A pointer can point to any data type or function block even to user-defined
types.
The function of the Address Operator ADR is to assign the address of a
variable or function block to the pointer.
A pointer can be dereferenced by adding the content operator "^" after the
pointer identifier.
Example:
pt:POINTER TO INT;
var_int1:INT := 5;
var_int2:INT;
pt := ADR(var_int1);
var_int2:= pt^; (* var_int2 is now 5 *)
Enumeration
Enumeration is a user-defined data type that is made up of a number of
string constants. These constants are referred to as enumeration values.
PROSYD 1131 10-7

Defined Data Types
Enumeration values are recognized in all areas of the project even if they
were locally declared within aPOU. It is best to create your enumerations as
objects in the Object Organizer under the register card Data types.
They begin with the keyword TYPE and end with END_TYPE.
Syntax:
TYPE <Identifier>:(<Enum_0> ,<Enum_1>, ...,<Enum_n>);
END_TYPE
A variable of the type <Identifier> can take on one of the enumeration
values and will be initialized with the first one. These values are compatible
with whole numbers which means that you can perform operations with
them just as you would with INT. You can assign a number x to the
variable. If the enumeration values are not initialized, counting will begin
with 0. When initializing, make certain the initial values are increasing. The
validity of the number will be reviewed at the time it is run.
Example:
TYPE TRAFFIC_SIGNAL: (Red, Yellow, Green:=10); (*The initial
value for each of the colors is red 0, yellow 1, green 10 *)
END_TYPE
TRAFFIC_SIGNAL1 : TRAFFIC_SIGNAL;
TRAFFIC_SIGNAL1:=0; (* The value of the traffic signal is red*)
FOR i:= Red TO Green DO
i := i + 1;
END_FOR;
You may not use the same enumeration value more than once.
Example:
TRAFFIC_SIGNAL: (red, yellow, green);
COLOR: (blue, white, red);
Error: red may not be used for both TRAFFIC_SIGNAL and COLOR.
Structures
Structures are created as objects in the Object Organizer under the register
card Data types. They begin with the keywords TYPE and STRUCT and
end with END_STRUCT and END_TYPE.
The syntax for structure declarations is as follows:
TYPE <Structurename>:
STRUCT
<Declaration of Variables 1>
.
.
<Declaration of Variables n>
END_STRUCT
10-8 PROSYD 1131

Appendix B:
END_TYPE
<Structurename> is a type that is recognized throughout the project and can
be used like a standard data type.
Interlocking structures are allowed. The only restriction is that variables may
not be placed at addresses (the AT declaration is not allowed!).
Example for a structure definition named Polygonline:
TYPE Polygonline:
STRUCT
Start:ARRAY [1..2] OF INT;
Point1:ARRAY [1..2] OF INT;
End:ARRAY [1..2] OF INT;
END_STRUCT
END_TYPE
Example for the initialization of a structure:
Poly_1:polygonline := ( Start:=3,3, Point1 =5,2, Point2:=7,3,
Point3:=8,5, Point4:=5,7, End := 3,5);
You can gain access to structure components using the following syntax:
<Structure_Name>.<Componentname>
For example, if you have a structure named "Week" that contains a
component named "Monday", you can get to it by doing the following:
Week.Monday
References
You can use the user-defined reference data type to create an alternative
name for a variable, constant or function block.
Create your references as objects in the Object Organizer under the register
card Data types. They begin with the keyword TYPE and end with
END_TYPE.
Syntax:
TYPE <Identifier>: <Assignment term>;
END_TYPE
Example:
TYPE message:STRING[50];
END_TYPE;
PROSYD 1131 10-9

Appendix C:
Appendix C: IEC Operators

IEC Operators
PROSYD 1131 supports all IEC Operators. In contrast with the standard
functions, these operators are recognized implicitly throughout the project.
Operators are used like functions in POU implemArithmetic Operators
ADD
Addition of variables of the types: BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT,
INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL and LREAL.
Two TIME variables can also be added together resulting in another time
(e.g., t#45s + t#50s = t#1m35s)
Example in IL:
LD 7
ADD 2,4,7
ST Var 1
Example in ST:
var1 := 7+2+4+7;
Example in FBD:
MUL
Multiplication of variables of the types: BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT,
USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL and LREAL.
Example in IL:
LD 7
MUL 2,4,7
ST Var 1
Example in ST:
var1 := 7*2*4*7;
Example in FBD:
PROSYD 1131 10-11

IEC Operators
SUB
Subtraction of one variable from another of the types: BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL and LREAL.
A TIME variable may also be subtracted from another TIME variable
resulting in third TIME type variable. Note that negative TIME values are
undefined.
Example in IL:
LD 7
SUB 8
ST Var 1
Example in ST:
var1 := 7-2;
Example in FBD:
DIV
Division of one variable by another of the types: BYTE, WORD, DWORD,
SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL and LREAL.
Example in IL:
LD 8
DIV 2
ST Var 1 (* Result is 4 *)
Example in ST:
var1 := 8/2;
Example in FBD:
Hinweis: If you define functions in your project with the names

CheckDivByte, CheckDivWord, CheckDivDWord and CheckDivReal, you
can use them to check the value of the divisor if you use the operator DIV,
for example to avoid a division by 0 (see chapter 'What is what in PROSYD
1131', 'Project components' 'Function')
MOD
Modulo Division of one variable by another of the types: BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL and LREAL.
10-12 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
The result of this function will be the remainder of the division. This result
will be a whole number.
Example in IL:
LD 9
MOD 2
Example in ST:
var1 := 9 MOD 2;
Example in FBD:
INDEXOF
Perform this function to find the internal index for a POU.
Example in ST:
var1 := INDEXOF(POU2);
SIZEOF
Perform this function to determine the number of bytes required by the
given data type.
Example in IL:
arr1:ARRAY[0..4] OF INT;
Var1 INT
LD arr1
SIZEOF
Example in ST:
var1 := SIZEOF(arr1);
Bitstring Operators
AND
Bitwise AND of bit operands. The operands should be of the type BOOL,
BYTE, WORD or DWORD.
Example in IL:
Var1 BYTE
LD 2#1001_0011
AND 2#1000_1010
PROSYD 1131 10-13

Bitstring Operators
ST Var 1 (* Result is 2#1000_0010 *)

Example in ST:
var1 := 2#1001_0011 AND 2#1000_1010
Example in FBD:
Note: If you have a program step in the SFC like the following
and if you use 68xxx- or C-code generators, please note the following: The
allocation of the value of the second input variable at the AND operator
module to variable z will not be executed ! This is due to the optmized
processing in the SFC in case of value FALSE at the input variable.
OR
Bitwise OR of bit operands. The operands should be of the type BOOL,
Example in IL:
var1 :BYTE;
LD 2#1001_0011
OR 2#1000_1010
ST var1 (* Result is 2#1001_1011 *)
Example in ST:
Var1 := 2#1001_0011 OR 2#1000_1010
Example in FBD:
Note: If you have a program step in the SFC like the following
and if you use 68xxx- or C-code generators, please note the following: The
allocation of the value of the second input variable at the AND operator
module to variable z will not be executed ! This is due to the optmized
processing in the SFC in case of value FALSE at the input variable.
10-14 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
XOR
Bitwise XOR of bit operands. The operands should be of the type BOOL,
Example in IL:
Var1 :BYTE;
LD 2#1001_0011
XOR 2#1000_1010
ST Var1 (* Result is 2#0001_1001 *)
Example in ST:
Var1 := 2#1001_0011 XOR 2#1000_1010
Example in FBD:
NOT
Bitwise NOT of a bit operand. The operand should be of the type BOOL,
Example in IL:
Var1 :BYTE;
LD 2#1001_0011
NOT
ST Var1 (* Result is 2#0110_1100 *)
Example in ST:
Var1 := NOT 2#1001_0011
Example in FBD:
Bit-Shift Operators
SHL
Bitwise left-shift of an operand : erg:= SHL (in, n)
The input variables erg, in and n should be of the type BYTE, WORD, or
DWORD. in will be shifted to the left by n bits and filled with zeros on the
right.
Note: Please note, that the amount of bits, which is regarded for the
arithmetic operation, is pretended by the data type of the input variable !. If
PROSYD 1131 10-15

Bit-Shift Operators
the input variable is a constant the smallest possible data type is regarded.
The data type of the output variable has no effect at all on the arithmetic
operation.
See in the following example in hexadecimal notation that you get different
results for erg_byte and erg_word depending on the data type of the input
variable (BYTE or WORD), although the values of the input variables
in_byte and in_word are the same.
Example in ST:
Example in FBD:
Example in IL:
LD 16#45
SHL 2
ST erg_byte
SHR
Bitwise right-shift of an operand: erg:= SHR (in, n)
erg, in and n should be of the typeBYTE, WORD or DWORD. in will be
shifted to the right by n bits and filled with zeros on the left.
See the following example in hexadecimal notation to notice the results of
the arithmetic operation depending on the type of the input variable (BYTE
or WORD).
10-16 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
Example in ST:
Example in FBD:
Example in IL:
LD 16#45
SHL 2
ST erg_byte
ROL
Bitwise rotation of an operand to the left: erg:= ROL (in, n)
shifted one bit position to the left n times while the bit that is furthest to the
left will be reinserted from the right.
operation.
PROSYD 1131 10-17

Bit-Shift Operators

Example in ST:
Example in FBD:
Example in IL:
LD 16#45
SHL 2
ST erg_byte
ROR
Bitwise rotation of an operand to the right: erg = ROR (in, n)
shifted one bit position to the right n times while the bit that is furthest to
the left will be reinserted from the left.
operation.
10-18 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:

Example in ST:
Example in FBD:
Example in IL:
LD 16#45
SHL 2
ST erg_byte
Selection Operators
All selection operations can also be performed with variables. For purposes
of clarity we will limit our examples to the following which use constants as
operators.
SEL
Binary Selection.
OUT := SEL(G, IN0, IN1) means:
OUT := IN0 if G=FALSE;
OUT := IN1 if G=TRUE.
PROSYD 1131 10-19

Selection Operators
IN0, IN1 and OUT can be any type of variable, G must be BOOL. The result
of the selection is IN0 if G is FALSE, IN1 if G is TRUE.
Example in IL:
LD FALSE
SEL 3,4
ST Var1 (* Result ist 3 *)
Example in FBD:
MAX
Maximum function. Returns the greater of the two values.
OUT := MAX(IN0, IN1)
IN0, IN1 and OUT can be any type of variable.
Example in IL:
LD 90
MAX 30
MAX 40
MAX 77
ST Var1 (* Result is 90 *)
Example in FBD:
MIN
Minimum function. Returns the lesser of the two values.
OUT := MIN(IN0, IN1)
IN0, IN1 and OUT can be any type of variable.
Example in IL:
LD 90
MIN 30
MIN 40
MIN 77
Example in FBD:
10-20 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
LIMIT
Limiting
OUT := LIMIT(Min, IN, Max) means:
OUT := MIN (MAX (IN, Min), Max)
Max is the upper and Min the lower limit for the result. Should the value IN
exceed the upper limit Max, LIMIT will return Max. Should IN fall below
Min, the result will be Min.
IN and OUT can be any type of variable.
Example in IL:
LD 90
LIMIT 30,80
ST Var 1 (*Result is 80 *)
PROSYD 1131 10-21

Comparison Operators
MUX
Multiplexer
OUT := MUX(K, IN0,...,INn) means:
OUT := INK.
IN0, ...,INn and OUT can be any type of variable. K must be BYTE,
WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT or UDINT. MUX
selects the Kth value from among a group of values.
Example in IL:
LD 0
MUX 30,40,50,60,70,80
ST Var 1 (*Result is 30 *)
GT
Greater than
A Boolean operator which returns the value TRUE when the value of the
first operand is greater than that of the second. The operands can be BOOL,
BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT,
REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME and
STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 20
GT 30
ST Var 1 (* Result is FALSE *)
Example in ST:
VAR1 := 20 > 30 > 40 > 50 > 60 > 70;
Example in FBD:
LT
Less than
A Boolean operator that returns the value TRUE when the value of the first
operand is less than that of the second. The operands can be BOOL, BYTE,
WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL,
LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME and
STRING.
10-22 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
Example in IL:
LD 20
LT 30
ST Var 1 (* Result is TRUE *)
Example in ST:
VAR1 := 20 < 30;
Example in FBD:
LE
Less than or equal to
operand is less than or equal to that of the second. The operands can be
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT,
UDINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY,
DATE_AND_TIME and STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 20
LE 30
Example in ST:
VAR1 := 20 <= 30;
Example in FBD
GE
Greater than or equal to
operand is greater than or equal to that of the second. The operands can be
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT,
UDINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY,
DATE_AND_TIME and STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 60
GE 40
Example in ST:
PROSYD 1131 10-23

VAR1 := 60 >= 40;

Example in FBD:
EQ
Equal to
A Boolean operator that returns the value TRUE when the operands are
equal. The operands can be BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT,
USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME and STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 40
EQ 40
Example in ST:
VAR1 := 40 = 40;
Example in FBD:
NE
Not equal to
A Boolean operator that returns that value TRUE when the operands are not
equal. The operands can be BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT,
USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME and STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 40
NE 40
ST Var 1 (* Result is FALSE *)
Example in ST:
VAR1 := 40 <> 40;
Example in FBD:
10-24 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
Address Operators
ADR
Address Function
ADR returns the address of its argument in a DWORD. This address can be
sent to manufacturing functions to be treated as a pointer or it can be
assigned to a pointer within the project.
Example in IL:
LD Var 1
ADR
ST Var 2
man_fun1
Content Operator
A pointer can be dereferenced by adding the content operator "^" after the
pointer identifier.
Example in ST:
pt:POINTER TO INT;
var_int1:INT;
var_int2:INT;
pt := ADR(var_int1);
var_int2:=pt^;
Calling Operator
CAL
Calling a function block or a program
Use CAL in IL to call up a function block instance. The variables that will
serve as the input variables are placed in parentheses right after the name of
the function block instance.
Example: Calling up the instance Inst from a function block where input
variables Par1 and Par2 are 0 and TRUE respectively.
CAL INST(PAR1 := 0, PAR2 := TRUE)
PROSYD 1131 10-25

Type Conversion Functions
Its is forbidden to implicitly convert from a ”larger” type to a ”smaller” type

(for example from INT to BYTE or from DINT to WORD). Special type
conversions are required if one wants to do this. One can basically convert
from any elementary type to any other elementary type.
Syntax:
<elem.Typ1>_TO_<elem.Typ2>
BOOL_TO
Conversions
Conversion from type BOOL to any other type:
For number types the result is 1, when the operand is TRUE, and 0, when
the operand is FALSE.
For the STRING type the result is ‚TRUE‘ or ‚FALSE‘.
Examples in AWL:
LD TRUE (*Result is 1 *)
BOOL_TO_INT
ST i
LD TRUE (*Result is 'TRUE' *)

BOOL_TO_STRING
ST str
LD TRUE (*Result is T#1ms *)

BOOL_TO_TIME
ST t
LD TRUE (*Result is TOD#00:00:00.001 *)

BOOL_TO_TOD
ST
LD FALSE (*Result is D#1970-01-01 *)

BOOL_TO_DATE
ST dat
LD TRUE (*Result is DT#1970-01-01-00:00:01 *)

BOOL_TO_DT
ST dandt
10-26 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
Examples in ST:
i:=BOOL_TO_INT(TRUE); (* Result is 1 *)
str:=BOOL_TO_STRING(TRUE); (* Result is "TRUE" *)
t:=BOOL_TO_TIME(TRUE); (* Result is T#1ms *)
tof:=BOOL_TO_TOD(TRUE); (* Result is TOD#00:00:00.001 *)
dat:=BOOL_TO_DATE(FALSE); (* Result is D#1970 *)
dandt:=BOOL_TO_DT(TRUE); (* Result is DT#1970-01-01-00:00:01 *)
Examples in FUP:
(*Result is 1 *)
(*Result is 'TRUE' *)
(*Result is T#1ms *)
(*Result is TOD#00:00:00.001 *)
(*Result is D#1970-01-01 *)
(*Result is DT#1970-01-01-00:00:01 *)
TO_BOOL
Conversions
Conversion from another variable type to BOOL:
The result is TRUE when the operand is not equal to 0. The result is FALSE
when the operand is equal to 0.
The result is true for STRING type variables when the operand is "TRUE",
otherwise the result is FALSE.
Examples in AWL:
PROSYD 1131 10-27

LD 213 (*Result is TRUE *)

BYTE_TO_BOOL
ST b
LD 0 (*Result is FALSE *)
INT_TO_BOOL
ST b
LD T#5ms (*Result is TRUE *)

TIME_TO_BOOL
ST b
LD 'TRUE' (*Result is TRUE *)

STRING_TO_BOOL
ST b
Examples in FUP:
(*Result is TRUE *)
(*Result is FALSE *)
(*Result is TRUE *)
(*Result is TRUE *)
Examples in ST:
b := BYTE_TO_BOOL(2#11010101); (* Result is TRUE *)

b := INT_TO_BOOL(0); (* Result is FALSE *)
b := TIME_TO_BOOL(T#5ms); (* Result is TRUE *)
b := STRING_TO_BOOL('TRUE'); (* Result is TRUE *)
10-28 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
Conversion between
Integral Number Types
Conversion from an integral number type to another number type:
When you perform a type conversion from a larger to a smaller type, you
risk losing some information. If the number you are converting exceeds the
range limit, the first bytes for the number will be ignored.
Example in ST:
si := INT_TO_SINT(4223); (* Result is 127 *)
If you save the integer 4223 (16#107f represented hexadecimally) as a
SINT variable, it will appear as 127 (16#7f represented
hexadecimally).
Example in IL:
LD 2
INT_TO_REAL
MUL 3.5
Example in FBD:
REAL_TO-/
LREAL_TO
Conversions
Converting from the variable type REAL or LREAL to a different type:
The value will be rounded up or down to the nearest whole number and
converted into the new variable type. Exceptions to this are the variable
types STRING, BOOL, REAL and LREAL.
risk losing some information.
Example in ST:
i := REAL_TO_INT(1.5); (* Result is 2 *)
j := REAL_TO_INT(1.4); (* Result is 1 *)
Example in IL:
PROSYD 1131 10-29

LD 2.7
REAL_TO_INT
GE %MW8
Example in FBD:
TIME_TO/TIME_OF_
DAY Conversions
Converting from the variable type TIME or TIME_OF_DAY to a different
type:
The time will be stored internally in a DWORD in milliseconds (beginning
with 12:00 A.M. for the TIME_OF_DAY variable). This value will then be
converted.
risk losing some information
For the STRING type variable, the result is a time constant.
Examples in IL:
LD T#12ms (*Result is 'T#12ms' *)

TIME_TO_STRING
ST str
LD T#300000ms (*Result is 300000 *)

TIME_TO_DWORD
ST dw
LD TOD#00:00:00.012 (*Result is 12 *)
TOD_TO_SINT
ST si
Examples in ST:
str :=TIME_TO_STRING(T#12ms); (* Result is T#12ms *)

dw:=TIME_TO_DWORD(T#5m); (* Result is 300000 *)
10-30 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
si:=TOD_TO_SINT(TOD#00:00:00.012); (* Result is 12 *)
Examples in FBD:
DATE_TO/DT_TO
Conversions
Converting from the variable type DATE or DATE_AND_TIME to a
different type:
The date will be stored internally in a DWORD in seconds since Jan. 1,
1970. This value will then be converted.
risk losing some information
For STRING type variables, the result is the date constant.
Examples in St:
b :=DATE_TO_BOOL(D#1970-01-01); (* Result is FALSE *)
i :=DATE_TO_INT(D#1970-01-15); (* Result is 29952 *)
byt :=DT_TO_BYTE(DT#1970-01-15- (* Result is 129 *)
05:05:05);
str:=DT_TO_STRING(DT#1998-02-13- (* Result is
14:20); 'DT#1998-02-13-14:20'
*)
STRING_TO
Conversions
Converting from the variable type STRING to a different type:
The operand from the STRING type variable must contain a value that is
valid in the target variable type, otherwise the result will be 0.
Examples in ST:
PROSYD 1131 10-31

Numeric Functions
b :=STRING_TO_BOOL('TRUE'); (* Result is TRUE *)

w :=STRING_TO_WORD('abc34'); (* Result is 0 *)
t :=STRING_TO_TIME('T#127ms'); (* Result is T#127ms *)
TRUNC
Converting from REAL to INT. The whole number portion of the value will
be used.
risk losingsome information
Examples in ST:
i:=TRUNC(1.9); (* Result is 1 *)
i:=TRUNC(-1.4); (* Result is 1 *)
Example in IL:
LD 2.7
TRUNC
GE %MW8
Numeric Functions
ABS
Returns the absolute value of a number. ABS(-2) equals 2.
The following type combinations for input and output variables are possible:
IN OUT
INT INT, REAL, WORD, DWORD, DINT
REAL REAL
BYTE INT, REAL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, DINT
WORD INT, REAL, WORD, DWORD, DINT
DWORD REAL, DWORD, DINT
SINT REAL
USINT REAL
UINT INT, REAL, WORD, DWORD, DINT, UDINT,
UINT
DINT REAL, DWORD, DINT
UDINT REAL, DWORD, DINT, UDINT
10-32 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
Example in IL:
LD 2
ABS
ST i (*Result is 2 *)
Example in ST:
i:=ABS(-2);
Example in FBD:
SQRT
Returns the square root of a number.
IN can be type BYTE, WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, REAL, SINT,
USINT, UINT, UDINT, OUT must be type REAL.
Example in IL:
LD 16
SQRT
ST q (*Result is 4 *)
Example in ST:
q:=SQRT(16);
Example in FBD:
LN
Returns the natural logarithm of a number.
Example in IL:
LD 45
LN
ST q (*Result is 3.80666 *)
Example in ST:
q:=LN(45);
Example in FBD:
PROSYD 1131 10-33

Numeric Functions
LOG
Returns the logarithm of a number in base 10.
Example in IL:
LD 314.5
LOG
Example in ST:
q:=LOG(314.5);
Example in FBD:
EXP
Returns the exponential function.
Example in IL:
LD 2
EXP
ST q (*Result is 9.7448e+009 *)
Example in ST:
q:=EXP(2);
Example in FBD:
10-34 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
SIN
Returns the sine of a number.
Example in IL:
LD 0.5
SIN
ST q (*Result is 0.479426 *)
Example in ST:
q:=SIN(0.5);
Example in FBD:
COS
Returns the cosine of number. The value is calculated in arch minutes.
USINT, UINT, UDINT, OUT must be type Typ REAL.
Example in IL:
LD 0.5
COS
ST q (*Result is 0.877583 *)
Example in ST:
q:=COS(0.5);
Example in FBD:
PROSYD 1131 10-35

Numeric Functions
TAN
Returns the tangent of a number. The value is calculated in arch minutes. IN
can be type BYTE, WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, REAL, SINT, USINT,
UINT, UDINT, OUT must be type REAL.
Example in IL:
LD 0.5
TAN
ST q (*Result is 0.546302 *)
Example in ST:
q:=TAN(0.5);
Example in FBD:
ASIN
Returns the arc sine (inverse function of sine) of a number. .
Example in IL:
LD 0.5
ASIN
ST q (*Result is 0.523599 *)
Example in ST:
q:=ASIN(0.5);
Example in FBD:
10-36 PROSYD 1131

Appendix C:
ACOS
Returns the arc cosine (inverse function of cosine) of a number. The value is
calculated in arch minutes.
Example in IL:
LD 0.5
ABS
Example in ST:
q:=ACOS(0.5);
Example in FBD:
ATAN
Returns the arc tangent (inverse function of tangent) of a number. The value
is calculated in arch minutes.
Example in IL:
LD 0.5
ABS
ST q (*Result is 0.463648 *)
Example in ST:
q:=ATAN(0.5);
Example in FBD:
EXPT
Exponentiation of a variable with another variable:
PROSYD 1131 10-37

Numeric Functions
OUT = IN1IN2.
IN1 and IN2 can be type BYTE, WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, REAL,
SINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, OUT must be type REAL.
Example in IL:
LD 7
EXPT 2
ST var1 (*Result is 49 *)
Example in ST:
var1 := (7,2);
Example in FBD:
10-38 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
Appendix D: Standard Library Elements

String Functions
LEN
Returns the length of a string. Input STR is of type STRING, the return value
of the function is type INT.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUSI'
LEN
ST VarINT1 (* Ergebnis ist 4 *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := LEN (‘SUSI’);
LEFT
Left returns the left, initial string for a given string. Input STR is type
STRING, SIZE is of type INT, the return value of the function is type
STRING.
LEFT (STR, SIZE) means: Take the first SIZE character from the right in
the string STR.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUSI'
LEFT 3
ST VarSTRING1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘SUS’ *)
Example in FBD:
PROSYD 1131 10-39

String Functions
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := LEFT (‘SUSI’,3);
RIGHT
Right returns the right, initial string for a given string.
RIGHT (STR, SIZE) means: Take the first SIZE character from the right in
the string STR.
Input STR is of type STRING, SIZE is of type INT, the return value of the
function is of type STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUSI'
RIGHT 3
ST VarSTRING1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘USI’ *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := RIGHT (‘SUSI’,3);
MID
Mid returns a partial string from within a string.

Input STR is type STRING, LEN and POS are type INT, the return value of
the function is type STRING.
10-40 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
MID (STR, LEN, POS) means: Retrieve LEN characters from the STR
string beginning with the character at position POS.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUSI'
RIGHT 2,2
ST VarSTRING1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘US’ *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := MID (‘SUSI’,2,2);
CONCAT
Concatenation (combination) of two strings.
The input variables STR1 and STR2 as well as the return value of the
function are type STRING.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUSI'
CONCAT ‘WILLI’
ST VarSTRING1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘SUSIWILLI’ *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := CONCAT (‘SUSI’,’WILLI’);
PROSYD 1131 10-41

String Functions
INSERT
INSERT inserts a string into another string at a defined point.
The input variables STR1 and STR2 are type STRING, POS is type INT and
the return value of the function is type STRING.
INSERT(STR1, STR2, POS) means: insert STR2 into STR1 after position
POS.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUSI'
INSERT ‘XY’,2
ST VarSTRING1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘SUXYSI’ *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := INSERT (‘SUSI’,’XY’,2);
DELETE
DELETE removes a partial string from a larger string at a defined position.
The input variable STR is type STRING, LEN and POS are type INT, the
return value of the function is type STRING.
DELETE(STR, L, P) means: Delete L characters from STR beginning with
the character in the P position.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUXYSI'
DELETE 2,23
ST Var1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘SUSI’ *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
10-42 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
Var1 := DELETE (‘SUXYSI’,2,3);
REPLACE
REPLACE replaces a partial string from a larger string with a third string.
The input variable STR1 and STR2 are type STRING, LEN and POS are
type INT, the return value of the function is type STRING.
REPLACE(STR1, STR2, L, P) means: Replace L characters from STR1
with STR2 beginning with the character in the P position.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUXYSI'
REPLACE 'K', 2,2
ST VarSTRING1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘SKYSI’ *)
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
VarSTRING1 := REPLACE (‘SUXYSI’,’K’,2,2);
FIND
FIND searches for a partial string within a string.
The input variable STR1 and STR2 are type STRING, the return value of
the function is type STRING.
FIND(STR1, STR2) means: Find the position of the first character where
STR2 appears in STR1 for the first time. If STR2 is not found in STR1, then
OUT:=0.
Example in IL:
LD 'SUXYSI'
FIND 'XY'
ST VarINT1 (* Ergebnis ist ‘3’ *)
Example in FBD:
PROSYD 1131 10-43

String Functions
Example in ST:
VarINT1 := FIND (‘SUXYSI’,’XY’);
10-44 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
Bistable Function Blocks
SR
Making Bistable Function Blocks dominant:
Q1 = SR (SET1, RESET) means:
Q1 = (NOT RESET AND Q1) OR SET1
The input variables SET1 and RESET as well as the output variable Q1 are
type BOOL.
Declaration example:
SRInst : SR ;
Example in IL:
CAL SRInst(SET1 := VarBOOL1, RESET := VarBOOL2)

LD SRInst.Q1
ST VarBOOL3
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
SRInst(SET1:= VarBOOL1 , RESET:=VarBOOL2 );
VarBOOL3 := SRInst.Q1 ;
RS
Resetting Bistable Function Blocks
Q1 = RS (SET, RESET1) means:
Q1 = NOT RESET1 AND (Q1 OR SET)
The input variables SET and RESET1 as well as the output variable Q1 are
type BOOL.
RSInst : RS ;
Example in IL:
CAL RSInst(SET := VarBOOL1, RESET1 := VarBOOL2)
PROSYD 1131 10-45

Bistable Function Blocks
LD RSInst.Q1
ST VarBOOL3
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
RSInst(SET:= VarBOOL1 , RESET1:=VarBOOL2 );
VarBOOL3 := RSInst.Q1 ;
SEMA
A Software Semaphore (Interruptible)
BUSY = SEMA(CLAIM, RELEASE) means:
BUSY := X;
IF CLAIM THEN X:=TRUE;
ELSE IF RELEASE THEN BUSY := FALSE; X:= FALSE;
END_IF
X is an internal BOOL variable that is FALSE when it is initialized.
The input variables CLAIM and RELEASE as well as the output variable
BUSY are type BOOL.
If BUSY is TRUE when SEMA is called up, this means that a value has
already been assigned to SEMA (SEMA was called up with CLAIM =
TRUE). If BUSY is FALSE, SEMA has not yet been called up or it has been
released (called up with RELEASE = TRUE).
SEMAInst : SEMA ;
Example in IL:
CAL SEMAInst(CLAIM := VarBOOL1, RELEASE := VarBOOL2)
LD SEMAInst.BUSY
ST VarBOOL3
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
SEMAInst(CLAIM:= VarBOOL1 , RELEASE:=VarBOOL2 );
10-46 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
VarBOOL3 := SEMAInst.BUSY;
Trigger
R_TRIG
The function block R_TRIG detects a rising edge.
FUNCTION_BLOCK R_TRIG
VAR_INPUT
CLK : BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Q : BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR
M : BOOL := FALSE;
END_VAR
Q0 := CLK AND NOT M;
M := CLK;
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
The output Q0 and the help variable M will remain FALSE as long as the
input variable CLK is FALSE. As soon as S1 returns TRUE, Q will first
return TRUE, then M will be set to TRUE. This means each time the
function is called up, Q will return FALSE until CLK has falling edge
followed by an rising edge.
RTRIGInst : R_TRIG ;
Example in IL:
CAL RTRIGInst(CLK := VarBOOL1)

LD RTRIGInst.Q
ST VarBOOL2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
RTRIGInst(CLK:= VarBOOL1);
VarBOOL2 := RTRIGInst.Q;
PROSYD 1131 10-47

Trigger
F_TRIG
The function block F_TRIG a falling edge.
FUNCTION_BLOCK F_TRIG
VAR_INPUT
CLK: BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Q: BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR
M: BOOL := FALSE;
END_VAR
Q := NOT CLK AND NOT M;
M := NOT CLK;
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
The output Q and the help variable M will remain FALSE as long as the
input variable CLK returns TRUE. As soon as CLK returns FALSE, Q will
first return TRUE, then M will be set to TRUE. This means each time the
function is called up, Q will return FALSE until CLK has a rising followed
by a falling edge.
FTRIGInst : F_TRIG ;
Example in IL:
CAL FTRIGInst(CLK := VarBOOL1)

LD FTRIGInst.Q
ST VarBOOL2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
FTRIGInst(CLK:= VarBOOL1);
VarBOOL2 := FTRIGInst.Q;
10-48 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
Counter
CTU
The function block Incrementer:
The input variables CU and RESET as well as the output variable Q are type
BOOL, the input variable PV and the output variable CV are type WORD.
The counter variable CV will be initialized with 0 if RESET is TRUE. If CU
has a rising edge from FALSE to TRUE, CV will be raised by 1.Q will
return TRUE when CV is greater than or equal to the upper limit PV.
CTUInst : CTU ;
Example in IL:
CAL CTUInst(CU := VarBOOL1, RESET := VarBOOL2, PV := VarINT1)

LD CTUInst.Q
ST VarBOOL3
LD CTUInst.CV
ST VarINT2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
CTUInst(CU:= VarBOOL1, RESET:=VarBOOL2 , PV:= VarINT1);

VarBOOL3 := CTUInst.Q ;
VarINT2 := CTUInst.CV;
CTD
Function Block Decrementer:
The input variables CD and LOAD_ as well as the output variable Q are
type BOOL, the input variable PV and the output variable CV are type INT.
When LOAD_ is TRUE, the counter variable CV will be initialized with the
upper limit PV. If CD has a rising edge from FALSE to TRUE, CV will be
PROSYD 1131 10-49

Counter
lowered by 1 provided CV is greater than 0 (i.e., it doesn't cause the value to

fall below 0).
Q returns TRUE when CVis equal 0.
CTDInst : CTD ;
Example in IL:
CAL CTDInst(CD := VarBOOL1, LOAD := VarBOOL2, PV := VarINT1)

LD CTDInst.Q
ST VarBOOL3
LD CTDInst.CV
ST VarINT2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
CTDInst(CD:= VarBOOL1, LOAD:=VarBOOL2 , PV:= VarINT1);
VarBOOL3 := CTDInst.Q ;
VarINT2 := CTDInst.CV;
CTUD
Function Block Incrementer/Decrementer
The input variables CU, CD, RESET, LOAD_ as well as the output
variables QU and QD are type BOOL, PV and CV are type WORD.
If RESET is valid, the counter variable CV will be initialized with 0. If
LOAD is valid, CV will be initialized with PV.
If CU has a rising edge from FALSE to TRUE, CV will be raised by 1. If
CD has a rising edge from FALSE to TRUE, CV will be lowered by 1
provided this does not cause the value to fall below 0.
QU returns TRUE when CV has become greater than or equal to PV.
QD returns TRUE when CV has become equal to 0.
10-50 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
CTUDInst : CUTD ;
Example in IL:
CAL CTUDInst(CU := VarBOOL2, RESET := VarBOOL3, LOAD :=

VarBOOL4, PV := VarINT1)
LD CTUDInst.QU
ST VarBOOL5
LD CTUDInst.QD
ST VarBOOL6
LD CTUDInst.CV
ST VarINT2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
CTUDInst(CU := VarBOOL1, CU:= VarBOOL2, RESET := VarBOOL3,

LOAD:=VarBOOL4 , PV:= VarINT1);
VarBOOL5 := CTUDInst.QU ;
VarBOOL6 := CTUDInst.QD ;
VarINT2 := CTUDInst.CV;
Timer
TP
The function blockTimer is a trigger.
TP(IN, PT, Q, ET) means:
PROSYD 1131 10-51

Timer
IN and PT are input variables of the BOOL and TIME types respectively. Q
and ET are output variables of the BOOL and TIME types respectively. If IN
is FALSE, Q is FALSE and ET is 0.
As soon as IN becomes TRUE, the time will begin to be counted in
milliseconds in ET until its value is equal to PT.It will then remain constant.
Q is TRUE if IN is TRUE and ET is less than or equal to PT. Otherwise it is
FALSE.
Q returns a signal for the time period given in PT.
Graphic Display of the TP Time Sequence:
TPInst : TP ;
Example in IL:
CAL TPInst(IN := VarBOOL1, PT := T#5s)

LD TPInst.Q
ST VarBOOL2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
TPInst(IN := VarBOOL1, PT:= T#5s);
VarBOOL2 :=TPInst.Q;
TON
The function block Timer On Delay implements a turn-on delay.
TON(IN, PT, Q, ET) means:
10-52 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
IN and PT are input variables of the BOOL and TIME types respectively. Q
and ET are output variables of the BOOL and TIME types respectively. If IN
is FALSE, Q is FALSE and ET is 0.
As soon as IN becomes TRUE, the time will begin to be counted in
Q is TRUE when IN is TRUE and ET is equal to PT. Otherwise it is
FALSE.
Thus, Q has a rising edge when the time indicated in PT in milliseconds has
run out.
Graphic display of TON behavior over time:
TONInst : TON ;
Example in IL:
CAL TONInst(IN := VarBOOL1, PT := T#5s)

LD TONInst.Q
ST VarBOOL2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
TONInst(IN := VarBOOL1, PT:= T#5s);
TOF
The function block TOF implements a turn-off delay.
PROSYD 1131 10-53

Timer
TOF(IN, PT, Q, ET) means:

IN and PT are input variables type BOOL respectively TIME. Q and E are
output variabls type BOOL respectively TIME. If IN is TRUE, the outputs
are TRU respectively 0.
As soon as IN becomes FALSE, in ET the time will begin to be counted in
Q is FALSE when IN is FALSE und ET equal PT. Otherwise it is TRUE.
Thus, Q has a falling edge when the time indicated in PT in milliseconds has
run out.
Graphic display of TOF behavior over time:
TOFInst : TOF ;
Example in IL:
CAL TOFInst(IN := VarBOOL1, PT := T#5s)

LD TOFInst.Q
ST VarBOOL2
Example in FBD:
Example in ST:
TOFInst(IN := VarBOOL1, PT:= T#5s);
VarBOOL2 :=TOFInst.Q;
RTC
The function block Runtime Clock returns, starting at a given time, the
current date and time.
10-54 PROSYD 1131

Appendix D:
RTC(EN, PDT, Q, CDT) means:

EN and PDT are input variables type TIME. Q and CDT are output variables
type BOOL respectively DATE_AND_TIME. When EN is FALSE, the
output variables Q und CDT are FALSE respectively DT#1970-01-01-00-
00:00:00.
As soon as EN becomes TRUE, the time of PDT is set, is counted up in
seconds and returned in CDT as long as EN is TRUE (see example in the
picture above). As soon as EN is reset to FALSE, CDT is reset to the initial
value DT#1970-01-01-00-00:00:00. Please note that the time in PDT is only
set by a rising edge.
PROSYD 1131 10-55

Appendix E:
Appendix E: The UTIL.LIB Library

This library contains an additional collection of various blocks which can be
used for BCD conversion, bit/byte functions, mathematical help functions,
as controller, signal generators, function manipulators and for analogue
value processing.
BCD conversion
A byte in the BCD format contains integers between 0 and 99. Four bits are
used for each decimal place. The ten decimal place is stored in the bits 4-7.
Thus the BCD format is similar to the hexadecimal presentation, with the
simple difference that only values between 0 and 99 can be stored in a BCD
byte, whereas a hexadecimal byte reaches from 0 to FF.
An example: The integer 51 should be converted to BCD format. 5 in
binary is 0101, 1 in binary is 0001, which makes the BCD byte 01010001,
which corresponds to the value $51=81.
BCD_TO_INT
This function converts a byte in BCD format into an INT value:
The input value of the function is type BYTE and the output is type INT.
Where a byte should be converted which is not in the BCD format the output
is -1.
Examples in ST:
i:=BCD_TO_INT(73); (* Result is 49 *)
k:=BCD_TO_INT(151); (* Result is 97 *)
l:=BCD_TO_INT(15); (* Output -1, because it is not in BCD
format *)
INT_TO_BCD_
This function converts an INTEGER value into a byte in BCD format:
The input value of the function is type INT, the output is type BYTE.
The number 255 will be outputted where an INTEGER value should be
converted which cannot be converted into a BCD byte.
Examples in ST:
i:=INT_TO_BCD(49); (* Result is 73 *)
PROSYD 1131 10-57

Bit/byte functions
k:=BCD_TO_INT(97); (* Result is 151 *)

l:=BCD_TO_INT(100); (* Error! Output: 255 *)
Bit/byte functions
EXTRACT
Inputs to this function are a DWORD X, as well as a BYTE N. The output is
a BOOL value, which contains the content of the Nth bit of the input X,
whereby the function begins to count from the zero bit.
Examples in ST:
FLAG:=EXTRACT(X:=81, N:=4); (* Result : TRUE, because 81 is
binary 1010001, so the 4th bit is 1 *)
FLAG:=EXTRACT(X:=33, N:=0); (* Result : TRUE, because 33 is
binary 100001, so the bit ‘0’ is 1 *)
PACK
This function is capable of delivering back eight input bits B0, B1, ..., B7
from type BOOL as a BYTE.
The function block UNPACK is closely related to this function.
PUTBIT
The input to this function consists of a DWORD X, a BYTE N and a
BOOLean value B.
PUTBIT sets the Nth bit from X on the value B, whereby it starts counting
from the zero bit.
Example in ST:
A:=38; (* binary 100110 *)
B:=PUTBIT(A,4,TRUE); (* Result : 54 = 2#110110 *)
C:=PUTBIT(A,1,FALSE); (* Result : 36 = 2#100100 *)
UNPACK
UNPACK converts the input B from type BYTE into 8 output variables
B0,...,B7 of the type BOOL, and this is the opposite to PACK.
Example in FBD: Output:
10-58 PROSYD 1131

Appendix E:
Mathematical help functions
DERIVATIVE
This function block approximately determines the local derivation.
The function value is delivered as a REAL variable by using IN. TM
contains the time which has passed in msec in a DWORD and the input of
RESET of the type BOOL allows the function block to start anew through
the delivery of the value TRUE.
The output OUT is of the type REAL.
In order to obtain the best possible result, DERIVATIVE approximates
using the last four values, in order to hold errors which are produced by
inaccuracies in the input parameters as low as possible.
Block in FBD:
INTEGRAL
This function block approximately determines the integral of the function.
In an analogue fashion to DERIVATIVE, the function value is delivered as a
REAL variable by using IN. TM contains the time which has passed in msec
in a DWORD and the input of RESET of the type BOOL allows the function
block to start anew with the value TRUE.
The output OUT is of the type REAL.
PROSYD 1131 10-59

Mathematical help functions
The integral is approximated by two step functions. The average of these is

delivered as the approximated integral.
Block in FBD: Example: Integration of a linear function:
STATISTICS_INT
This function block calculates some standard statistical values:
The input IN is of the type INT. All values are initialised anew when the
BOOLean input RESET is TRUE.
The output MN contains the minimum, MX of the maximum value from IN.
AVG describes the average, that is the expected value of IN. All three
outputs are of the type INT.
Block in FBD:
STATISTICS_REAL
This function block corresponds to STATISTICS_INT, except that the input
IN is of the type REAL like the outputs MN, MX, AVG.
VARIANCE
VARIANCE calculates the variance of the entered values.
The input IN is of the type REAL, RESET is of the type BOOL and the
output OUT is again of the type REAL.
This block calculates the variance of the inputted values. VARIANCE can
be reset with RESET=TRUE.
The standard deviation can easily be calculated as the square root of the
VARIANCE.
10-60 PROSYD 1131

Appendix E:
Controllers
P
The P controller function block:
ACTUAL (actual value) and DESIRED (desired or nominal value) as well
as K, the proportionality coefficient, are all input values of the type REAL.
The output, the absolute control output (OUT), is also of the type REAL and
satisfies the equation:
OUT = ACTUAL + K⋅∆ , whereby ∆=DESIRED-
ACTUAL
Example in FBD:
PD
The PD controller function block:
as KP, the proportionality coefficient, are all input values of the type REAL.
TV is of the type DWORD and contains the derivative action time in msec.
RESET is of the type BOOL and serves to reset the controller.
The output, the absolute control output (OUT), is of the type REAL, and is
calculated as follows:
δ∆
OUT = ACTUAL + K⋅ (∆ + TV⋅ ) , whereby ∆=DESIRED-
δt
ACTUAL
Example in FBD:
PROSYD 1131 10-61

Signal generators
PID
The PID controller function block:
as KP, the proportionality coefficient, are all input values of the type REAL.
TN, the integral action time, and TV, the derivative action time, are
delivered in msec by a DWORD. RESET is of the type BOOL and serves to
reset the controller.
The output, the absolute control output (OUT), is again of the type REAL,
and is calculated as follows:
1 δ∆
OUT = ACTUAL + K⋅ (∆ + TN ⌠∆(t)dt
⌡ + TV⋅ )
δt
The PID controller can be easily converted to a PI controller by setting
TV=0.
Example in FBD:
Signal generators
BLINK
The function block BLINK generates a pulsating signal. The input consists
of ENABLE of the type BOOL, as well as TIMELOW and TIMEHIGH of
the type TIME. The output OUT is of the type BOOL.
If ENABLE is set to TRUE, BLINK begins, to set the output for the time
period TIMEHIGH to TRUE, and then afterwards to set it for the time
period TIMELOW to FALSE.
Example in FBD:
10-62 PROSYD 1131

Appendix E:
GEN
The function generator generates typical periodic functions:
The inputs are a composition consisting of MODE from the pre-defined
counting type GEN_MODE, BASE of the type BOOL, of the PERIOD of
the type TIME, of two INT values CYCLES and AMPLITUDE and of the
BOOLean RESET input. An INT is generated with the designation OUT.
The MODE describes the function which should be generated, whereby the
enumeration values TRIANGLE and TRIANGLE_POS deliver two
triangular functions, SAWTOOTH_RISE an ascending,
SAWTOOTH_FALL a descending sawtooth, RECTANGLE a rectangular
signal and SINE and COSINE the sine and cosine:
TRIANGLE: TRIANGLE_POS:
SAWTOOTH_RISE: SAWTOOTH_FALL:
RECTANGLE: SINUS:
COSINUS:
PROSYD 1131 10-63

Function manipulators
BASE defines whether the cycle period is really related to a defined time
(BASE=TRUE) or whether it is related to a particular number of cycles,
which means the number of calls of function block (BASE=FALSE).
PERIOD or CYCLES defines the corresponding cycle period.
AMPLITUDE defines, in a trivial way, the amplitude of the function to be
generated.
The function generator is again set to 0 as soon as RESET=TRUE.
Example in FBD:
Function manipulators
CHARCURVE
This function block serves to represent values, piece by piece, on a linear
function:
IN of the type INT is fed with the value to be manipulated. The BYTE N
designates the number of points which defines the presentation function.
This characteristic line is then generated in an ARRAY P[0..10] with P of
the type POINT which is a structure based on two INT values (X and Y).
The output consists of OUT of the type INT, the manipulated value and
BYTE ERR, which will indicate an error if necessary.
The points P[0]..P[N-1] in the ARRAY must be sorted according to their X
values, otherwise ERR receives the value 1. If the input IN is not between
P[0].X and P[N-1].X, ERR=2 and OUT contains the corresponding limiting
value P[0].X or P[N-1].X.
10-64 PROSYD 1131

Appendix E:
If N lies outside of the allowed values which are between 2 and 11, then
ERR=4.
Example in ST:
First of all ARRAY P must be defined in the header:
VAR
...
CHARACTERISTIC_LINE:CHARCURVE;
KL:ARRAY[0..10] OF POINT:=(X:=0,Y:=0),(X:=250,Y:=50),
(X:=500,Y:=150),(X:=750,Y:=400),7((X:=1000,Y:=1000));
COUNTER:INT;
...
END_VAR
We then feed CHARCURVE with an increasing value:

COUNTER:=COUNTER+10;
CHARACTERISTIC_LINE(IN:=COUNTER,N:=5,P:=KL);
The subsequent tracing illustrates the effect:
RAMP_INT
RAMP_INT serves to limit the ascendance or descendance of the function
being fed:
The input consists on the one hand out of three INT values: IN, the function
input, and ASCEND and DESCEND, the maximum increase or decrease for
a given time interval, which is defined by TIMEBASE of the type TIME.
Setting RESET to TRUE causes RAMP_INT to be initialised anew.
The output OUT of the type INT contains the ascend and descend limited
function value.
When TIMEBASE is set to t#0s, ASCEND and DESCEND are not related
to the time interval, but remain the same.
PROSYD 1131 10-65

Analogue value processing
Example in FBD:
RAMP_REAL
RAMP_REAL functions exactly in the same way as RAMP_INT, with the
simple difference that the inputs IN, ASCEND, DESCEND and the output
OUT are of the type REAL.
HYSTERESIS
The input to this function block consists of three INT values IN, HIGH and
LOW. The output OUT is of the type BOOL.
If IN goes below the limiting value LOW, OUT becomes TRUE. If IN goes
over the upper limit HIGH, FALSE is delivered.
An illustrative example:
10-66 PROSYD 1131

Appendix E:
PROSYD 1131 10-67

LIMITALARM
This function block specifies, whether the input value is within a set range
and which limits it has violated if it has done so.
The input values IN, HIGH and LOW are each of the type INT, while the
outputs O, U and IL are of the type BOOL.
If the upper limit HIGH is exceeded by IN, O becomes TRUE, and when IN
is below LOW, U becomes TRUE. IL is TRUE if IN lies between LOW and
HIGH.
Example in FBD: Result:
10-68 PROSYD 1131

Appendix F:
Appendix F: Operands in PROSYD 1131

Operands
Constants, variables, addresses and possibly function calls can appear as
operands.
Constants
BOOL Constants
BOOL constants are the logical values TRUE and FALSE.
TIME Constants
TIME constants can be declared in PROSYD 1131. These are generally used
to operate the timer in the standard library. A TIME constant is always made
up of an initial "t" or "T" (or "time" or "TIME" spelled out) and a number
sign "#".
This is followed by the actual time declaration which can include days
(identified by "d"), hours (identified by "h"), minutes (identified by "m"),
seconds (identified by "s") and milliseconds (identified by "ms"). Please
note that the time entries must be given in this order according to length (d
before h before m before s before m before ms) but you are not required to
include all time increments.
Examples of correct TIME constants in a ST assignment:
TIME1 := T#14ms;
TIME1 := T#100S12ms; (*The highest component may be allowed
to exceed its limit*)
TIME1 := t#12h34m15s;
the following would be incorrect:
TIME1 := t#5m68s; (*limit exceeded in a lower component*)
TIME1 := 15ms; (*T# is missing*)
TIME1 := t#4ms13d; (*Incorrect order of entries*)
DATE Constants
These constants can be used to enter dates. A DATE constant is declared
beginning with a "d", "D", "DATE" or "date" followed by "#". You can then
enter any date with format Year-Month-Day.
Examples:
DATE#1996-05-06
PROSYD 1131 10-69

Constants
d#1972-03-29
TIME_OF_DAY
Constants
Use this type of constant to store times of the day. A TIME_OF_DAY
declaration begins with "tod#", "TOD#", "TIME_OF_DAY#" or
"time_of_day#" followed by a time with the format: Hour:Minute:Second.
You can enter seconds as real numbers or you can enter fractions of a
second.
Examples:
TIME_OF_DAY#15:36:30.123
tod#00:00:00
DATE_AND_TIME
Constants
Date constants and the time of day can also be combined to form so-called
DATE_AND_TIME constants. DATE_AND_TIME constants begin with
"dt#", "DT#", "DATE_AND_TIME#" or "date_and_time#". Place a hyphen
after the date followed by the time.
Examples:
DATE_AND_TIME#1996-05-06-15:36:30
dt#1972-03-29-00:00:00
Number Constants
Number values can appear as binary numbers, octal numbers, decimal
numbers and hexadecimal numbers. If an integer value is not a decimal
number, you must write its base followed by the number sign (#) in front of
the integer constant. The values for the numbers 10-15 in hexadecimal
numbers will be represented as always by the letters A-F.
You may include the underscore character within the number.
Examples:
14 (Decimal number)
2#1001_0011 (Binary number)
8#67 (Octal number)
16#A (Hexadecimal number)
These number values can be from the variable types BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL or LREAL.
Implicit conversions from "larger" to "smaller" variable types are not
permitted. This means that a DINT variable cannot simply be used as an INT
variable. You must use the type conversion (see the Type Conversions
chapter in the appendix).
10-70 PROSYD 1131

Appendix F:
REAL/LREAL
Constants
REAL and LREAL constants can be given as decimal fractions and
represented exponentially. Use the standard American format with the
decimal point to do this.
Example:
7.4 instead of 7,4
1.64e+009 instead of 1,64e+009
STRING Constants
A string is a sequence of characters. STRING constants are preceded and
followed by single quotation marks. You may also enter blank spaces and
special characters (umlauts for instance). They will be treated just like all
other characters.
In character sequences, the combination of the dollar sign ($) followed by
two hexadecimal numbers is interpreted as a hexadecimal representation of
the eight bit character code. In addition, the combination of two characters
that begin with the dollar sign are interpreted as shown below when they
appear in a character sequence:
$$ Dollar signs
$' Single quotation mark
$L or $l Line feed
$N or $n New line
$P or $p Page feed
$R or $r Line break
$T or $t Tab
Examples:
'w1Wüß?'
' Abby and Craig '
':-)'
Variables
Variables can be declared either locally in the declaration part of a POU or

in a global variable list.
The variable identifier may not contain any blank spaces or special
characters, may not be declared more than once and cannot be the same as
any of the keywords. Capitalization is not recognized which means that
VAR1, Var1, and var1 are all the same variable. The underscore character is
PROSYD 1131 10-71

Addresses
recognized in identifiers (e.g., "A_BCD" and "AB_CD" are considered two

different identifiers). An identifier may not have more than one underscore
character in a row. The first 32 characters are significant.
Variables can be used anywhere the declared type allows for them.
You can access available variables through the Input Assistant.
System Flags
System flags are implicitly declared variables that are different on each
specific PLC. To find out which system flags are available in your system,
use the command "Insert" "Operand" An Input Assistant dialog box pops
up, select the category System Variable.
Accessing variables for

arrays, structures and
POUs.
Two-dimensional array components can be accessed using the following
syntax:
<Fieldname>[Index1, Index2]
Structure variables can be accessed using the following syntax:
<Structurename>.<Variablenname>
Function block and program variables can be accessed using the following
syntax:
<Functionblockname>.<Variablename>
Addresses
Address
The direct display of individual memory locations is done through the use of
special character sequences. These sequences are a concatenation of the
percent sign "%", a range prefix, a prefix for the size and one or more
natural numbers separated by blank spaces.
The following range prefixes are supported:
I Input
Q Output
M Memory location
10-72 PROSYD 1131

Appendix F:
The following size prefixes are supported:
X Single bit
None Single bit
B Byte (8 Bits)
W Word (16 Bits)
D Double word (32 Bits)
Examples:
%QX75 and %Q75 Output bit 75
%IW215 Input word 215
%QB7 Output byte 7
%MD48 Double word in memory position 48 in the memory
location.
%IW2.5.7.1 depending on the PLC Configuration
The current PLC Configuration for the program determines whether or not
an address is valid.
Memory location
You can use any supported size to access the memory location.
For example, the address %MD48 would address bytes numbers 192, 193,
194, and 195 in the memory location area (48 * 4 = 192). The number of the
first byte is 0.
You can access words, bytes and even bits in the same way: the address
%MX5.0 allows you to access the first bit in the fifth word (Bits are
generally saved wordwise).
Functions
In ST a function call can also appear as an operand.

Example:
Result := Fct(7) + 3;
PROSYD 1131 10-73

Appendix G:
Appendix G: Command Line/Command File

Commands
Command Line Commands
When PROSYD 1131 is started, you can add commands in the command
line which will be asserted during execution of the program. These
commands start with a „/“. Capitalization/Use of small letters is not
regarded. The commands will be executed sequentially from the left to the
right.
/debug Additional debug outputs like listings etc. are activated.

/online Immediately after start PROSYD 1131 tries to go online
with the current project.
/run After login PROSYD 1131 starts the application
program.
Only valid in combination with /online.
/show ... Settings for the PROSYD 1131 frame window can be
made:
/show hide
The window will not be displayed, it also will not be
/show icon represented in the task menu.
/show max The window will be minimized in display.
/show normal The window will be maximized in display.
The window will be displayed in the same status as it
was during the last closing.
/out <outfile> All messages are displayed in the message window and
additionally are written in the file <outfile>.
/cmd After starting the commands of the <cmdfile> get
<cmdfile> executed.
Example for a command line:

The project ampel.pro gets opened, but no window opens. The commands
included in the command file command.cmd will be executed.
C:\ampel.pro /show hide /cmd command.cmd
PROSYD 1131 10-75

Command File (cmdfile) Commands
See the following table for a list of commands, which can be used in a
command file (<cmdfile>). You can call the command file by a command
line (see above). Capitalizing/Use of small letters is not regarded. The
command line will be displayed as a message in the message window and
can be given out in a message file (see below). Additionally to the command
a „@“ is prefixed. All signs after a semicolon (;) will be ignored (comment).
Commands of the online menu:
Online login Login with the loaded project ('Online

Login')
Online logout Logout ('Online' 'Logout')
Online run Start of the application program ('Online'
'Run')
Online sim Switch on of simulation mode (!) 'Online'
'Simulation')
Online sim off Switch off of simulation mode ('Online'
'Simulation')
Commands of the file menu:
File new A new project is created ('File' 'New')

File open <projectfile> The project <projectfile> will be loaded
('File' 'Open')
file close The current project will be closed ('File'
'Close')
file save The current project will be stored ('File'
'Save')
file saveas <projectfile> The current project will be saved with the file
name <projectfile> ('File' 'Save as')
file quit PROSYD 1131 will be closed ('File' 'Exit')
10-76 PROSYD 1131

Appendix G:
Commands of the project menu:
project compile The current project will be compiled by

"Rebuild all" ('Project' 'Rebuild all')
project check The current project will be checked ('Project'
'Check')
project build The current project will be built ('Projekt'
'Build')
project import <file1> ... The files <file1> ... <fileN> get imported into
<fileN> the current project ('Project' 'Import')
project export <expfile> The current project will be exported in the
file <expfile> ('Project' 'Export')
project expmul Each object of the current project will be
exported in an own file, which gets the name
of the object.
Commands for the control of the message file:
out open <msgfile> The file <msgfile> opens as message file.

New messages will be appended
out close The currently shown message file will be
closed.
out clear All messages of the currently opened
message file will be deleted.
PROSYD 1131 10-77

Commands for the control of messages:
echo on The command lines will be displayed as

messages.
echo off The command lines will not be displayed as
messages.
echo <text> <text> will be displayed in the message
window.
Commands for the control of replace of objects respectively for the control
of files for import, export, replace:
replace ok Replace
replace yes
replace no Do not replace
replace yesall Replace all
replace noall Replace none
Commands for the control of the default parameters of PROSYD 1131

dialogs:
query on Dialogs are displayed and need user input

query off ok All dialogs respond as if the user had clicked
on the 'OK' button
query off no All dialogs respond as if the user had clicked
on the 'No' button
query off cancel All dialogs respond as if the user had clicked
on the 'Cancel' button
Debug command:
debug corresponds to the command "/debug" in the

command line
10-78 PROSYD 1131

Appendix G:
Command for calling command files as subroutines:
call <parameter1> ... Command files are called as subroutines. Up

<parameter10> to ten parameters can be consigned. In the
subroutine called you can access the
parameters using $0 - $9.
Command for setting the libraries used by PROSYD 1131:
dir lib <libdir> <libdir> is set as library directory

dir compile <compiledir> <compiledir> is set as directory for compile
files
Command for setting a delay time concerning execution of the CMDFILEs:
delay 5000 Wartet 5 Sekunden
Commands for control of the Watch and Receipt Manager:
watchlist load <file> The watch list saved in <file> will be loaded
Watchliste and the appropriate window will
be opened ('Extras' 'Load Watch List')
watchlist save <file> Saves the current watch list in <file> ('Extras'
'Save Watch List')
watchlist set <text> A previous loaded watch list gets the name
<text> ('Extras' 'Rename Watch List')
watchlist read The values of the watch variables are updated
('Extras' 'Read Receipt')
watchlist write The values of the watch list are written to the
watch variables ('Extras' 'Write Receipt')
Example of a command file:
PROSYD 1131 10-79

A command file like shown below will open the project file ampel.pro, will
then load a watch list, which was stored as w.wtc, will then start the
application program and write – after 1 second delay - the values of the
variables into the watch list watch.wtc (which will be saved) and will finally
close the project.
file open C:\work\projects\PROSYD 1131_test\ampel.pro
query off ok
watchlist load c:\work\w.wtc
online login
online run
delay 1000
watchlist read
watchlist save c:\work\watch.wtc
online logout
file close
10-80 PROSYD 1131

Appendix H:
PROSYD 1131 10-81

Appendix I:
Appendix I: Error messages
Here you will find the error messages that the parser displays (italics) and
possible causes.They are shown in alphabetical order:
"ADR does not require an expression

or constant or addressed variable as
operand"
Replace the term or the constant with a variable.
""Function name not allowed here""
Replace the function call with a variable or a constant.
"<Number> operands is too many for

<operator>. Exactly <number> are
needed."
Check to see how many operands the operator <operator> requires and insert
the ones that are missing.
"<Number> operands is too few for

<operator>. At least <number> are
needed"
Check to see how many operands the operator <operator> requires and
remove those that aren't needed.
"Only BOOL variables are allowed at

a bit address"
Change the type of declaration to BOOL or change the address to a different

format.
"IL Operator Expected"
Change the first word in the line to a valid operator or a valid function.
"POU ends incorrectly: add ST or

delete the last expression."
The POU ends with an incomplete expression. Add the correct ending or
delete it.
PROSYD 1131 10-83

"POU <Name> is not defined in the

project"
Define a POU named <name> using the menu command "Project"

"Object add" or change the name to the name of the POU defined.
"POU <Name>needs exactly

<number> inputs"
Check the number of input variables this POU requires, then add or remove
them as needed.
"Identifier expected"
Enter a valid identifier at the beginning of the declaration part.
"CAL, CALC, or CALN require

function block instance as operand"
Declare an instance for the function block that you would like to call up.
"<Component> is not a component of

<variable>"
If the variable is a structure, change the component into one of the

components that are declared in this structure.
If the variable is a function block instance, change the <component> into an
input or output parameter that is declared in this function block.
"Index expression of an array must be

type INT"
Change the index into a constant or an INT type variable.
"Conditional Operator requires type

BOOL"
The result of the previous instruction is not a BOOL type variable. Insert an
operator or a function whose result is BOOL.
"Name used in interface is not

identical with POU name"
Rename your POU with the menu command "Project" "Object Rename"
or change the name of the POU in its declaration part. The name must
appear directly after the keywords, PROGRAM, FUNCTION or
FUNCTIONBLOCK.
10-84 PROSYD 1131

Appendix I:
"End value of FOR statement must be

of type INT"
Change the variable to an INT type variable.
"Increment value of FOR statement

must be of type INT"
"Step name is no identifier: <name>"
Change the identifier <name> to a valid identifier
"CASE requires selector of an integer

type"
Change the selector to an INT type selector.
"Start value of FOR statement must

be of type INT"
"Variable of FOR statement must be

of type INT. "
"Expression in FOR statement is not

variable with write access"
Change the variable to a variable with write permission.
"It is not possible to locate an array

of strings to an address"
Clear the address assignment.
"It is not possible to locate an array

of an array to an address"
"Extra characters following valid

watch expression"
Remove the extra characters.
PROSYD 1131 10-85

"Function block call requires function

block instance"
Insert the name of the desired instance or remove the call for the function
block.
"A jump must have exactly one label"
Change the jump destination to a defined label.
10-86 PROSYD 1131

Appendix I:
"END_STRUCT or identifier
expected"
A structure definition must end with the keyword END_STRUCT.
"END_VAR or identifier expected"
Write in valid identifier or END_VAR at the beginning of the declaration

part.
"At most 4 numerical fields allowed

in addresses"
Remove the extra address fields.
"Expression expected"
An expression must be entered at this point.
"EXIT outside a loop"
Remove EXIT
"Error in initial value"
Enter a constant (constants) for the initial value which corresponds to the
declaration type.
"Too many parameters in function

<Name>"
Delete the extra parameters.
"<Name> function has too few

parameters"
Add the missing parameters.
"No instance specied for call of

function block <name>"
Change the text of the instance for function block <name> (initialized with
"Instance") in the identifier of a valid instance declaration.
"Integer number or symbolic constant

expected"
PROSYD 1131 10-87

Only integers or symbolic constants can be used as the condition for a CASE
instance. Change the incorrect condition.
"<Identifier> is not a function"
Change <identifier> into one of the functions from the libraries that are
linked to the project or into one of the function declared in the project.
"IF and ELSIF require a Boolean

expression for the condition"
Change the expression to an expression with a BOOL type result.
"Illegal time constants"

Check to see if the time constant you wrote is correct and change any
mistakes you find. Possible mistakes are:
The t or # is missing at the beginning.
A time entry appears twice (e.g., t#4d2d).
Incorrect sequence of times.
Incorrect time indicator (the d, h, m, s or ms is missing).
"'[<index]' needs array variables"
Declare the identifier before the bracket as an array or change it into a

declared array variable.
"INI operator needs function block

instance or a data unit type instance"
Change the operands into a function block instance. To do this, declare the
operand as a function block or use a previously declared function block, or
use a data unit type instance.
"No *.obj found"
Turn on Simulation Mode.
"Label in brackets not allowed"
Remove the label or the parentheses.
"No write access to variable <Name>

allowed"
Change <name> into a variable with write permission.
10-88 PROSYD 1131

Appendix I:
"Comments are only allowed at the

end of the line in IL"
Write the comments at the end of the line.
"LD expected"
The instruction "LD" is the only one allowed in this line.
"It is not possible to locate a

multidimensional array to an
address"
"Duplicate definition of identifier

<name>"
Rename one of the identifiers.
"Duplicate definition of label

<names>"
Remove one of the defined labels.
"Multiple underscore in identifier"
Remove one of the underscore characters from the identifier.
"At least one statement is required"
Enter an instruction.
"Address expected after 'AT'"
Insert a valid address after the AT or change the keyword AT.
"Number expected after '+' or '-'"
Change the word after + or - into a valid constant.
"No comma allowed after ')'"
Remove the comma.
"Number is expected after ','"
Remove the comma or insert an additional number.
PROSYD 1131 10-89

"<Name> is not an input variable of

the called function block"
Check over the input variables for the called function block and change
<name> into one of these variables.
"<Name> is no function block"
Replace <name> with the name of a valid function block.
"<Name> must be a declared

instance of the function block
<FBName>"
Change the text of the function block instance (initialized with "Instance")
into an identifier for a valid function block instance declaration.
"'N' modifier requires a BOOL type

operand"
Remove the N and negate the operand explicitly with the NOT operator
"NOT requires an operand of type

BOOL"
Change the operand into a BOOL type operand.
"Only VAR and VAR_GLOBAL can

be located to addresses"
Copy the declaration into a VAR or VAR_GLOBAL area.
"Variable with write access or direct

address required for ST, STN, S, R"
Replace the first operand with a variable that has write permission
"Operand expected"
Add an additional operand.
"<Operator> in parentheses is not

allowed"
This operator is not allowed within parentheses. Either remove the

parentheses or the operator.
10-90 PROSYD 1131

Appendix I:
"Operator is not extendable. Remove

the surplus operands"
Check the number of operands for this operator and remove the surplus
operands.
"Type mismatch in parameter

<number>: Cannot convert <type>
to <type>."
Check the type of the operand with the number <number> of this operator,
function or function block. Change the type of the variable that caused the
error to a type that is allowed or select a new variable of an allowed type.
"Closing bracket with no

corresponding opening bracket"
Remove the end bracket or insert the beginning one.
"Keywords must be uppercase"
Change how the keyword is written.
"Step names are duplicated:

'<Name>'"
Change one of the names.
PROSYD 1131 10-91

"Jump to an undefined step:

<Name>"
Change <name> into the name of an existing step or add a step named
<name>.
"Jump and Return require an Boolean

input"
The result of the previous instruction is not a BOOL result. Insert an

operator or a function with a result of the type BOOL.
"Jump and Return are only allowed

on the right side of a network"
Delete the jump or return that is not allowed.
"<Label> label is not defined"
Define a label with the name <LabelName> or change <LabelName> into a

defined label.
"<string> is not an operator"
Change <string> into a valid operator
"Expecting type specification"
Write a valid type behind the identification in the declaration
"Unknown type: <string>"
Change <string> into a valid type.
"Unrecognized variable or address"
This watch variable is not declared in the project. Press <F2> to access help
with declared variables.
"Unexpected End"
In the declaration part: Add the keyword END_VAR to the end of the
declaration part.
In the text editor: Insert instructions that end the last instruction sequence
(e.g., ST).
"Unexpected end of text in brackets"
10-92 PROSYD 1131

Appendix I:
Insert an end bracket.
"UNTIL requires a BOOL expression

as condition"
"Type mismatch: Cannot convert

<Type1> into <Type2>.
Check the required types of operators (search for Operator in your help file)
and change the variable type that produced the error into a type that is
allowed or select another variable.
"Invalid address: <Address>"
Check in your PLC Configuration to see which addresses are allowed and
replace the addresses with permissible addresses or change the PLC
Configuration.
"Type mismatch on input _1_variable

<name>: Cannot convert <Type1>
into <Type2>."
A value that is <Type2> (which is not allowed) is assigned to the variable

<name>. Change the variable or the constant into a variable or constant of
the type <Type1>.

<name> of <name>: Cannot convert
<Type1> into <Type2>."
Use a <Type2> type variable for the assignment to the <name> parameter or
change the type of assigned variable to <Type1>.

<Parameter> of <POU>: Cannot
convert <Type1> into <Type2>."
Check to see what type of <parameter> parameter are required in the
<POU> POU. Change the type of the variable that caused the error to
<Type2> or select another variable that is <Type2>.
"Invalid characters follow the valid

expression: '<name>'"
Remove the extra characters.
PROSYD 1131 10-93

"Identifier <name> not defined"
Declare this variable in the declaration part of the POU or in the global
variable list.
"VAR, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT

or VAR_INOUT expected"
The first line after the name of the POU must contain one of these
keywords.
10-94 PROSYD 1131

Appendix I:
"'.' needs structure variable."
The identifier to the left of '.' is not a structure variable or instance for a
function block. Change the identifier into a structure variable or into a
instance for a function block or remove the period and the identifier to its
right.
"WHILE requires a Boolean

expression as its condition"
"Expecting Number, ELSE or

END_CASE"
The end of a CASE statement is incorrect. Add the keyword END_CASE.
"Too many indices for array"
Check how many indices are declared for the array(1, 2, or 3) and remove
the extra ones.
"Overflow of identifier list"
You must learn to restrain yourself, no more than 64000 identifiers are
allowed.
"Too few indices for array"

Check how many indices are declared for the array (1, 2, or 3) and add those
that are needed.
"Out of Memory"
Leave the system by saving. Close Windows, restart it and then restart the
compilation.
PROSYD 1131 10-95

11
Breakpoint 1-2, 2-32, 4-49, 5-11, 5-13, 5-41

Breakpoint Dialog Box 4-49
11 Index Breakpoint position 4-49
Build 4-12, 4-22
BYTE 10-5
BYTE Constants 10-70
A
ABS 10-32 C
Absolute Value 10-32
Access rights 4-35 CAL 10-25
Access Variables 6-2 Call tree 4-23, 4-37
ACOS 10-37 Calling a function 2-2
Action 2-10, 2-22, 2-23, 3-9, 4-36 Calling a function block 2-6, 2-15
Action Init 3-7 Calling function blocks in ST 2-18
Active step 2-24 CAN Configuration 6-11
ADD 10-11 CAN Module configuration 6-13, 6-15, 6-18
Address Function 10-25 CAN Properties 6-11
Addresses 10-72 CASE 2-16
ADR 10-25 CASE instruction 2-19
ALLIAS 10-9 Changing connections in CFC 5-50
Alternative Branch in SFC 2-28, 5-34 CHARCURVE 10-64
AND 10-13 CheckBounds 2-2, 10-7
Arc cosine 10-37 CheckDivByte 2-3
Arc sine 10-26 10-36 CheckDivDWord 2-3
Arc tangent 10-37 CheckDivWord 2-3
Argument 2-2, 2-6 CoDeSys 1-1
ARRAY 10-6 CoDeSys operating version 8-13
ASIN 10-36 Coil 2-30, 5-28
Assignment 2-15, 5-20 Collapse Node 4-32
Assignment Combs 5-22 Colors 4-10, 8-8
Assignment operator 2-17 Comment 5-7, 5-9, 5-17
AT Declaration 5-4 Communication Parameters 4-53
ATAN 10-37 Communications Parameters Gateway 4-54
Auto Load 4-6 Comparing projects 4-25
Auto Save 4-6 Compress 6-29
Autodeclaration 4-8, 5-6 CONCAT 10-41
Autoformat 4-8 Concatenation 10-41
Connection marker in CFC 5-50
CONSTANT 5-3, 6-4
B Constants 5-3
Contact 2-30, 5-27
Backup, automatic 4-6
Content Operator 10-7, 10-25
BCD conversion 10-57
Context menu 4-4
BCD_TO_INT 10-57
Context Sensitive Help 4-63
Binding of ST operators 2-15
Conversion of Integral Number Types 10-29
Bitmap 8-3, 8-15
Conversions of types 10-26
Bitvalues 4-9
Convert object 4-34
BLINK 10-62
Copy 4-42
Body 5-1, 5-15, 5-16, 5-26, 5-33
Copy in Help 4-61
Bookmark in Help 4-61
Copying in CFC 5-49
BOOL 10-5
Copying in FBD 5-24
BOOL Constants 10-69
COS 10-35
BOOL_TO Conversions 10-26
Cosine 10-35
PROSYD 1131 11-1

Index
Create Backup 4-6

Creating connections in CFC 5-49
E
Cross reference list 4-23, 4-38 Edit Menu
CTD 10-49 Copy 4-42
CTU 10-49 Cut 4-41, 5-24
CTUD 10-50 Delete 4-43
Cut 4-41 Find 4-43
Cutting in FBD 5-24 Find next 4-44
Input Assistant 4-45
Next error 4-46
D Paste 4-42, 5-24
Data types 2-11, 4-2, 10-5 Previous error 4-46
DATE 10-6 Redo 4-41
DATE Constants 10-69 Replace 4-44
DATE_AND_TIME 10-6 Undo 4-40
DATE_AND_TIME Constants 10-70 Editing functions 4-40
DATE_TO Conversions 10-31 Editor options 4-7
DCF file 6-3 Editors 5-1, 5-15, 5-16, 5-26, 5-33
DDE Interface 9-1 EN Input 2-31, 5-28
Debugger 5-11 EN POU 2-31
Debugging 2-32, 4-13, 5-17 END_FUNCTION_BLOCK 2-4
Declaration 3-5 END_PROGRAM 2-9
Declaration Editor 5-1 END_TYPE 10-8, 10-9
Declaration Part 2-1, 5-1, 5-15, 5-16, 5-26, 5-33 Entering Trace Variables 6-23
Declarations as tables 4-8, 5-7 Entry action 5-35
Declare Variable 4-46 Entry action 2-24
Declare, automatic 4-8, 5-6 Enumeration 10-7
Defined Data Types 10-6 EQ 10-24
Delete 4-43 Error messages 10-83
DELETE 10-42 EXIT 2-16, 2-22
Deleting a Transition 5-36 Exit action 5-35
Deleting an Action 5-36 Exit action 2-24
Deleting connections in CFC 5-49 EXP 10-34
Deleting in FBD 5-24 Expand Node 4-32
Dereferencing 10-7, 10-25 Exponential Function 10-34
DERIVATIVE 10-59 Exponentiation 10-37
DINT 10-5 Export 4-25
DINT Constants 10-70 export file 6-3
Directory 4-12 Expression 2-14
DIV 10-12 EXPT 10-37
CheckDivByte 2-3 External library 4-18
CheckDivDWord 2-3 EXTRACT 10-58
CheckDivWord 2-3 Extras Menu
Division durch 0 2-3 Align 8-18
Document 4-19, 4-23 Associate Action 5-40
Document Frame 6-5 Auto Read 6-26
Download 4-14, 4-48, 4-58 Clear Action/Transition 5-36
Drag&Drop 4-31 Clear Background Bitmap 8-12 8-17
DT 10-6 Compress 6-29
DT_TO Conversions 10-31 Configure 8-6
DWORD 10-5 Cursor Mode 6-27
DWORD Constants 10-70 Edit Entry 6-22
Element list 8-18
11-2 PROSYD 1131

11
Link Docuframe File 6-7 Exit 4-22

Load Trace 6-29 New 4-15
Load Watch List 6-32 Open 4-15
Make Docuframe File 6-6 Print 4-18
Monitoring Active 6-33 Printer Setup 4-19
Monitoring Options 5-12 Save 4-17
Multi Channel 6-28 Save as 4-17
Negate 5-23, 5-31 Find 4-43
Options 5-17, 5-39 FIND 10-43
Paste above 5-31 Flow Control 4-52, 5-15
Paste after 5-30, 5-36 Folder 4-31, 4-32
Paste below 5-31 Font 4-8
Paste Parallel Branch (right) 5-36 FOR 2-20
Previous version 4-40 FOR loop 2-16, 2-20
Properties 6-9 Forcing 4-51, 5-9, 6-34
Read Receipt 6-34 Formatting, automatic 4-8
Read Trace 6-26 Function 2-1, 10-73
Rename Watch List 6-32 FUNCTION 2-1
Save Trace 6-29 Function Block 2-4
Save Watch List 6-32 Function block call 2-6
Select All 8-18 Function Block Diagram 2-2, 2-7, 4-49, 5-18
Select Background Bitmap 8-17 Function Block in FBD 5-22
Send to Back 8-17 Function block in LD 2-31
Send to Front 8-17 Function block, instance 2-5
Set Debug Task 6-22 Function call 2-2
Set/Reset 5-23, 5-31 Function declaration 2-1
Settings 8-19 Function in FBD 5-22
SFC Overview 5-38 FUNCTION_BLOCK 2-4
Show grid 6-28
Start Trace 6-25
Step Attributes 5-36 G
Stop Trace 6-26 Gateway 4-54
Stretch 6-29 Gateway Server 4-54
Time Overview 5-37 GE 10-23
Trace Configuration 6-23 GEN 10-63
Trace in ASCII-file 6-30 Global CAN Properties 6-11
Use IEC Steps 5-40 Global Constants 6-4
Write Receipt 6-34 Global Retain Variables 6-3
Y Scaling 6-28 Global Variables 6-1, 6-3
Zoom 5-23 Graphic Editors 5-16
Zoom Action/Transition 5-36 Grid 8-19
GT 10-22
F
F_TRIG 10-48 H
falling edge 10-48 Help 4-59
FBD 2-2, 2-7, 2-28, 4-49, 5-18 Help Menu
FBD Editor 5-18 Contents and Index 4-59
Feedback paths in CFC 5-55 Help Topics Window 4-59
Fields 2-1, 10-6 HYSTERESIS 10-66
File 4-15
File Menu
Close 4-17
PROSYD 1131 11-3

Index
New Declaration 5-8

I New Watch List 6-32
Identifier 5-3, 10-71 Operand 5-11
IEC 1131-3 2-33 Operator 5-10, 5-21
IEC Step 2-24, 5-40 Operator with EN 5-29
IEC steps 2-26 Output 5-22
Iecsfc.lib 2-25 Parallel Branch (left) 5-35
IF instruction 2-16, 2-18 Parallel Branch (right) 5-34
IL 2-2, 2-5, 2-6, 2-12, 4-49, 5-14 Parallel Contact 5-27
IL Editor 5-14 Placeholder 4-21
IL operator 2-12 Polygon 8-2, 8-3
Implicit at load 4-15 Rectangle 8-2, 8-3
Implicit variables in SFC 2-26 RETURN 5-21, 5-30
Import 4-25 Rounded Rectangle 8-2, 8-3
Index Window 4-62 Step Transition (after) 5-34
INDEXOF 10-13 Step Transition (before) 5-29 5-34
Initialization 5-4 Transition-Jump 5-35
Input and Output Variable 5-2 Types 5-5
Input Assistant 4-45 Visualization 8-2, 8-4
Input in FBD 5-22 Insert mode 5-10
Input Variable 5-2 Insert Network 5-17
INSERT 10-42 Instance 2-5
Insert in LD 5-30 Instance name 2-5, 2-6
Insert in SFC 5-34 Instruction 2-12, 2-15, 2-16
Insert Menu Instruction List 2-2, 2-5, 2-6, 2-12, 4-49, 5-14
Add Entry-Action 5-35 INT 10-5
Add Exit-Action 5-35 INT Constants 10-70
Additional Library 7-2 INT_TO_BCD 10-57
All Instance Paths 6-5 INTEGRAL 10-59
Alternative Branch (left) 5-34 Internal library 4-18
Alternative Branch (right) 5-34
Append Program Call 6-21
Append Subelement 6-9 J
Append Task 6-20 Jump 2-28, 5-20
Assignment 5-20 Jump in SFC 5-33, 5-35
Bitmap 8-2, 8-3
Coil 5-28
Comment 5-17 K
Contact 5-27
Declarations Keywords 5-4 Keywords 5-3, 5-4
Ellipse 8-2, 8-3 Konfigurierbare Steuerungskonfiguration 6-10
Function 5-11, 5-22
Function Block 5-11, 5-22, 5-28 L
Function with EN 5-29
Input 5-22 Label 5-17
Insert at Blocks 5-28, 5-30 Ladder Diagram 2-29, 4-49, 5-25
Insert Element 6-9 LD 2-29, 4-49, 5-25
Insert Program Call 6-21 LD Editor 5-25
Insert Task 6-20 LE 10-23
Jump 5-20, 5-30, 5-35 LEFT 10-39
Line 8-3 LEN 10-39
Network (after) 5-17 Library 2-11, 4-18
Network (before) 5-17 Library directory 4-12
11-4 PROSYD 1131

11
Library Manager 3-5, 7-1 Block 5-45

Library, Define 7-2 Block input 5-46
Library, Insert 7-2 Curve 8-3
LIMIT 10-21 Input 5-45
LIMITALARM 10-68 Jump 5-45
Line number field 4-49, 4-52, 5-13 Label 5-45
Line Number of the Text Editor 5-14 Output 5-45
Line numbers 5-7 Return 5-46
LN 10-33 Menu Online
Load & Save 4-5 Communications Parameters Gateway 4-54
Load Trace 6-29 Sourcecode download 4-58
Load trace configuration 6-25 Menu Project
Load Watch List 6-32 Add Action 4-36
Local Variable 5-2 Merge 4-26
LOG 10-34 Message window 4-3
Log in 4-47 MID 10-40
Logarithm 10-33 MIN 10-20
Logout 4-48 MOD 10-12
Loop 2-14, 2-17 Modifier 2-12
LREAL 10-6 Monitoring 2-33, 4-47, 5-8, 5-11, 6-33
LREAL Constants 10-71 Moving in CFC 5-48
LREAL_TO Conversions 10-29 MUL 10-11
LT 10-22 Multi Channel 6-28
MUX 10-22
M
Main Help Window 4-60
N
Main program 2-9 NE 10-24
Mark 4-9 Negation in FBD 5-23
Marking in SFC 5-33 Negation in LD 5-31
MAX 10-20 Network 5-17, 5-19
Memory location 10-73 Network Comment 5-17
Menu Bar 4-2 Network in FBD 2-28, 3-3
Menü Edit Network in LD 2-30
Declare Variable 4-46 Network in SFC 3-7
Menu Extras Network number field 4-49, 4-52
Connection marker 5-50 New Folder 4-32
Display order 5-51 Next error 4-46
EN/ENO 5-47 NOT 10-15
Negate 5-46 Note in Help 4-61
Order - One backwards 5-53 Notice at load 4-15
Order - One forwards 5-53 Number Constants 10-70
Order – To the beginning 5-53 Number of data segments 4-13
Order – To the end 5-53
Order everything according to data flow 5-54
Order topologically 5-51 O
Properties 5-47, 6-11, 6-13 Object 2-1, 4-31
Select All 5-48 Object Organizer 4-2
Select Mode 8-18 Online 1-2, 5-11, 5-17, 6-32
Set/Reset 5-46 Online Change 4-13, 4-22, 4-29
Menü Extras Online functions 4-47
Properties 6-10 Online in Security mode 4-10
Menu Insert
PROSYD 1131 11-5

Index
Online Menu PLC Configuration 6-7

Breakpoint Dialog Box 4-49 PLC Configuration in the Online Mode 6-9
Communication Parameters 4-53 PLC_PRG 2-9
Download 4-48 Pointer 10-7
Force values 4-51 POINTER 10-7
Log in 4-47 POU (Program Organization Unit) 1-1, 2-8, 3-1, 4-
Logout 4-48 2
Release Force 4-51 Presentation 8-19
Reset 4-48 Previous error 4-46
Run 4-48 Previous version 4-40
Show Call Stack 4-52 Print 4-18
Simulation 4-53 Program 2-8
Single Cycle 4-50 PROGRAM 2-9
Step in 4-50 Program call 2-8
Step over 4-50 Project 1-1, 2-8, 3-1
Stop 4-48 Project directory 4-12
Toggle Breakpoint 4-49 Project info 4-6, 4-26
Write values 4-51 Project Menu
Online Mode 4-47 Add object 4-33
Declaration Editor 5-8 Build 4-22
Function Block Diagram Editor 5-25 Check all 4-22
Ladder Editor 5-32 Compare 4-25
Network Editor 5-17 Convert object 4-34
PLC Configuration 6-9 Copy object 4-34
Sequential Function Chart Editor 5-40 Delete Object 4-32
Text Editor 5-11 Document 4-23
Watch- and Receipt Manager 6-32 Export 4-25
Operand 2-2, 5-11, 10-69 Global Replace 4-28
Operator in FBD 3-4, 5-21 Global Search 4-28
Operators 5-10, 10-11 Import 4-25
Options 4-5 Merge 4-26
OR 10-14 Object access rights 4-35
Order of execution in CFC 5-51 Open object 4-35
Output in FBD 5-22 Options 4-5
Output Variable 5-2 Passwords for user groups 4-30
Overwrite mode 5-10 Project info 4-26
Rebuild all 4-22
Register Changes 4-29
P Rename object 4-33
P 10-61 Show call tree 4-37
PACK 10-58 Show cross reference list 4-38
Parallel Branch in SFC 2-28, 5-34, 5-35 Show unused variables 4-39
Parallel Contacts 2-30, 5-27 View instance 4-36
Password 4-13 Project version 1.5 4-18
Passwords for user groups 4-30 PUTBIT 10-58
Pasting 4-42
Pasting in FBD 5-24
PD 10-61
Q
PDO 6-15 Qualifier 2-26
PDO mapping of a CAN module 6-15
PID 10-62
Placeholder 4-21
PLC 4-47, 4-51
11-6 PROSYD 1131

11
SFC Editor 5-32

R SFC Flags 2-27
R_TRIG 10-47 SFC library 2-25
RAMP_INT 10-65 SFC Overview 5-38
RAMP_REAL 10-66 SFCCurrentStep 2-28
Read Receipt 6-34 SFCEnableLimit 2-27
Read trace 6-25 SFCError 2-27
Read Trace 6-26 SFCErrorPOU 2-27
READ_ONLY 6-3 SFCErrorStep 2-27
READ_WRITE 6-3 SFCInit 2-27
REAL 10-6 SFCPause 2-27
REAL Constants 10-71 SFCQuitError 2-27
REAL_TO Conversions 10-29 SFCTrans 2-27
Receipt Manager 6-30 Shift 10-15
Redo 4-41 SHL 10-15
References 10-9 Shortcut Mode 5-5
Register Changes 4-29 Show Call Stack 4-52
REPEAT 2-16 Show grid 6-28
REPEAT loop 2-21 SHR 10-16
Replace 4-28, 4-44 Simulation 2-33, 3-17, 4-47, 4-53
REPLACE 10-43 SIN 10-35
Reset 4-48 Sine 10-35
Reset Output 5-23, 5-31 Single Cycle 4-50
Resources 2-11, 4-2, 6-1 Single Step 2-32, 4-50, 5-41
RETAIN 5-3, 6-4 SINT 10-5
Retain Variable 5-3 SINT Constants 10-70
RETURN 2-15, 2-18, 5-21 SIZEOF 10-13
RIGHT 10-40 Sourcecode download 4-58
rising edge 10-47 Sourcedownload 4-14
ROL 10-17 SQRT 10-33
ROR 10-18 Square Root 10-33
Rotation 10-17, 10-18 SR 10-45
RS 10-45 ST 2-2, 2-7, 2-14, 4-49, 5-16
RTC 10-54 ST Editor 5-16
Run 4-48 ST operand 2-14
ST operator 2-14, 2-15
Standard data types 10-5
S Standard Function 7-2
Sample Rate 6-25 Standard Library 3-5, 7-2
Sampling Trace 2-32, 6-22 Standard POUs 2-1
Save 4-17 Standard.lib 7-2
Save before compile 4-13 Start Trace 6-25
Save Trace 6-29 Statistics 4-27
Screen divider 4-3 STATISTICS_INT 10-60
SEL 10-19 STATISTICS_REAL 10-60
Selecting 4-9 Status bar 4-4, 4-10, 8-6
Selecting in CFC 5-48 Step 2-23, 4-49, 5-33
SEMA 10-46 Step Attributes 5-36
Sequential Function Chart 2-2, 2-8, 2-22, 3-7, 4-49, Step Init 2-24
5-32 Stepping 5-11, 5-18, 5-41
Set Output 5-23, 5-31 Stop 4-48
Set/Reset coils 2-31 Stop Trace 6-26
SFC 2-2, 2-8, 2-22, 3-7, 4-49, 5-32 Stretch 6-29
PROSYD 1131 11-7

Index
STRING 10-6 UINT Constants 10-70

STRING Constants 10-71 Undo 4-40
String Functions 10-39 UNPACK 10-58
STRING_TO Conversions 10-31 Unused variables 4-23
STRUCT 10-8 User group 4-29
Structured Text 2-2, 2-7, 2-14, 4-49, 5-16 User information 4-6
Structures 2-1, 10-8 USINT 10-5
SUB 10-12 USINT Constants 10-70
Syntax Coloring 5-1, 5-5
System Flag 10-72
V
VAR 5-2, 5-6
T VAR_ACCESS 6-2
Tab-width 4-8 VAR_CONFIG 6-2, 6-4
TAN 10-36 VAR_GLOBAL 5-6, 6-2, 6-3
Tangent 10-36 VAR_IN_OUT 5-2
Task Configuration 6-19 VAR_INOUT 5-6
Text Editors 5-9 VAR_INPUT 5-2, 5-6
TIME 10-6 VAR_INPUT CONSTANT 5-48
TIME Constants 10-69 VAR_OUTPUT 5-2, 5-6
Time Management in SFC Editor 5-37 Variable Configuration 6-4
TIME_OF_DAY 10-6 Variables 10-71
TIME_OF_DAY Constants 10-70 Variables declaration 5-3
TIME_TO Conversions 10-30 VARIANCE 10-60
Timer 10-51 Visualization 2-12, 4-2, 8-1
TO_BOOL Conversions 10-27 Bitmap 8-15
TOD 10-6 Colors 8-8
TOD_TO Conversions 10-30 File - Print 8-21
TOF 10-53 Input 8-11
TON 10-52 Input possibilities for the operating version 8-13
Tool bar 4-2, 4-10 Motion absolute 8-9
Tooltip 4-2, 4-31, 5-9, 5-11, 5-18, 5-25, 5-32 Motion relative 8-10
TP 3-5, 10-51 Operation in online mode 8-21
Trace Buffer 6-22, 6-27 Operation over the keyboard 8-21
Trace in ASCII-file 6-30 Shape 8-6
Trace Variable 6-26 Text 8-7
Trace, Automatically Read 6-26 Tooltip 8-15
Transition 2-24, 5-33 Variables 8-10
Trigger 2-32, 6-24, 10-47 Visualization Elements, Configure 8-6
Trigger Edge 6-24 Visualization Elements, Copy 8-5
Trigger Level 6-24 Visualization Elements, Insert 8-2
Trigger Position 6-25 Visualization Elements, Shift, Move 8-5
TRUNC 10-32
TYPE 10-8, 10-9
Type Conversions 10-26 W
Types 5-5 Watch and Receipt Manager 6-30
Watch and Receipt Manager Offline 6-31
Watch and Receipt Manager Online 6-32
U Watch List 6-30
UDINT 10-5 Watch Variable 5-9, 5-25
UDINT Constants 10-70 WHILE loop 2-16, 2-20
UINT 10-5 Window 4-58
11-8 PROSYD 1131

11
Window Menu
Arrange symbols 4-59
Cascade 4-59
Close all 4-59
Library Manager 7-1
Messages 4-59
Tile Horizontal 4-59
Tile Vertical 4-59
WORD 10-5
WORD Constants 10-70
Work space 4-3
Write protection password 4-14
Write Receipt 6-34
X
XOR 10-15
Y
Y Scaling 6-28
Z
Zoom 5-23
Zoom Action 5-36
Zoom Transition 5-36
PROSYD 1131 11-9

AC 200-1 Training Manual 2.5

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

AC 200-1 Training Manual 2.5

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ac200-1 All Terrain Crane 200 t Lifting Capacity

Page · Seite · Page · Pagina · Página:

Specifications · Technische Daten · Caractéristiques · Dati tecnici · Datos técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Overview of standard duty charts · Übersicht Standard-Tragfähigkeitstabellen ·

HA Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Braccio base · Pluma principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

MS Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Basic equipment · Basisausstattung · Équipement de base · Allestimento di base · Equipamiento básico . . . . . . . . 30

KEY · ZEICHENERKLÄRUNG · LÉGENDE · LEGGENDA · LEYENDA

Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Contrappeso · Contrapeso

Radius · Ausladung · Portée · Sbraccio · Radio

Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Braccio base · Pluma principal

Swing-away jib · Klappspitze · Fléchette pliante · Punta rettratile · Plumín de articulación

Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner

Mechanism · Antrieb · Mécanisme · Funzioni · Mecanismos

Tyres · Bereifung · Pneumatiques · Pneumatici · Neumáticos

Hook block · Unterflasche · Crochet-moufle · Bozzello · Gancho

Hoist · Hubwerk · Treuil de levage · Agano · Cabrestante

Dolly · Nachläufer · Remorque · Vagoni · Tráiler

Slewing · Drehwerk · Orientation · Rotazione · Unidad de giro

Boom telescoping · Teleskopieren · Télescopage · Funzione telescopica · Despliegue telescópico

Boom elevation · Ausleger-Winkelstellung · Relevage de flèche · Angolazione braccio · Elevación de pluma

Workings speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten · Vitesses opérationnelles · Velocità di lavoro · Velocidades de trabajo

Rope diameter · Seildurchmesser · Diamètre du câble · Diametro · Diam. cable

Rope length · Seillänge · Longueur du câble · Lunghezza fune · Long. cable

Number of sheaves · Anzahl Rollen · Nombre de poulies · No di pulegge · No de poleas

Number of lines · Einscherung · Nombre de brins · No max avvolgim.· Reenvíos máx.

Ballast · Ballast · Lest · Zavorra · Lastre

Self-rigging 85 m total system length (HA 68 m + HAV 17 m)

100 m maximum system length with up to 33 m extendable swing-away jib

Mit 85 m selbstrüstbarer Systemlänge (HA 68 m + HAV 17 m) verfahrbar

Déplacement sur une longueur de système à auto-amarrage de 85 m

Idonea alla circolazione su strada, con una lunghezza di 85 m in ordine di marcia

Con 85 m de longitud total automontable de sistema (HA 68 m + HAV 17 m)

SPECIFICATIONS · TECHNISCHE DATEN · CARACTÉRISTIQUES ·

< 12,0 t 70,0 t 12 x 8 x 10 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 15,9 t 17 m (X) (1,5 t)

< 11,8 t 179,8 t 14 x 8 x 12 14.00 R 25 80-3-21 16,4 t 17 m – –

SPECIFICATIONS · TECHNISCHE DATEN · CARACTÉRISTIQUES ·

OPTION: WITH MODULAR AXLE · OPTION: MIT ZUSATZACHSE · EN OPTION: AVEC

1 Additional counterweight · Zusatzgegengewicht · Contrepoids supplémentaire · Contrappeso supplementare · Contrapeso adicional

2 Base plates · Abstützplatten · Plaque de callage · Piastra stabilizzatori · Placas base

120 m/min* 98,2 kN 21 mm 345 m 11 119,9 112-0-21 6 – 1350 2,00 m

4* Off-wall · Wand-weg · Hors mur · Marcia laterale · Desempotrado

4* Off-wall · Wand-weg · Hors mur · Marcia laterale · Desempotrado

EQUIPMENT · EINRICHTUNGEN · ÉQUIPEMENT · EQUIPAGGIAMENTO · EQUIPAMIENTO

CONFIGURATIONS · KONFIGURATIONEN · CONFIGURATIONS · CONFIGURAZIONI · CONFIGURACIONES

OVERVIEW OF STANDARD DUTY CHARTS · ÜBERSICHT STANDARD-TRAG FÄHIG -

68,5 - 34,0 - 68,5 - 34,0 - 17,8 -

68,5 - 34,0- 68,5 - 34,0-

68,5 - 34,0 - 16,4 - 68,5 - 34,0 - 17,8-

68,5 - 34,0- 68,5 - 34,0-

If offsetting is restricted, the maximum possible angle is indicated

OVERVIEW OF STANDARD DUTY CHARTS · ÜBERSICHT STANDARD-TRAG FÄHIG -

0° - 40° (Intervall 10°)

If offsetting is restricted, the maximum possible angle is indicated

** with special attachment

30,9 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO

9,0 t 8,44 m x 8,20 m 360° ISO

TELESCOPING CAPACITIES · TELESKOPIERBARE TRAGFÄHIGKEITEN · CHARGES TÉLE-

9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m

9,0 m 17,0 m 9,0 m 17,0 m